<7 ,£¢, Fee eth ee gy EP ure ae we Meee es Sede ee Pasa aa cake ae Male enter oes aA ales Ke As Oe Bt ; ay Yih ery nny Ma ee ial : Cade Sida rotates: a ri 2 aes Y ig ail . iG hs Re, % “i a. , Wike Gary N » CALKINS Sa Adnabin Universied® W. M. WHEELER Bussey Institution, Harvard University THE atid W 230 zolisdO WISTAR INST URPHOLOGY if Yin wer to. 4, W woerTMaN te % Be Mew’ rane yay fipeeeeeiqe > Marah BL ‘Tramaaa ee , 4 OP Wixea.), Mrs. Helen Keith Frost (Weatfiue Sige \ Yetretary olting Gamtante eh hs Kijatwineretee, Headmaster Enylish High tighevs, onion, Mate, Bea BA. Ret Hidvsed Phelps Allis, Jr., Dr. Reiuhands ‘om oad otaens, Tanita tapi: my indebtedness to EB. G. Conklin and 4 i; Whi, for cettiotan af tha pratar. seript, The section dealing with Whitwieo ocloniifie work wns preyard! | s T. H. Morgan, E. G. Conk in, J. Perey - tion rece ot hers—See footungte oy shvv, wy | 3 K , th ah Wade By. x eae, 3 f Kiely y returning 8 oe aad ~ CHARLES OTIS WHITMAN FRANK R. LILLIE Charles Otis Whitman was born December 14, 1842, in Wood- stock, Maine. He died at his home in Chicago, December 6, 1910. On his father’s side! he was descended from Jacob Whitman, who was a resident of Bridgewater, Massachusetts, whence he emi- grated to Buckfield, Maine. Three sons of Jacob Whitman settled in Woodstock, Maine, about the beginning of the nine- teenth century, among them Joseph (born September 30, 1783), the grandfather of the subject of our sketch. Whitman’s father (born February 19, 1821) was the eighth of ten children; his mother (born December 12, 1823) was Marcia Leonard, daughter of Solomon Leonard, also of Woodstock. Whitman married Emily Nunn of Peru, Ohio, in August, 1884, and had two sons, Francis, born in Milwaukee, Wisconsin, and Carroll, born in Worcester, Massachusetts. His early life was spent in Woodstock, though his father re- moved to Waterford for a while, subsequently returning to Wood- stock. He attended the town schools in Woodstock and Water- ford ‘‘and fitted for college at Norway and other academies, teaching winters to obtain the means for paying his school ex- penses.” ‘‘He early developed a taste for natural history, and while here (Woodstock) and a boy, he procured and mounted a very fine collection of the birds of Maine. So artistically pre- 1 In the preparation of this brief biography I have been indebted for information to Mrs. Whitman, Dr. Wallace Craig, Prof. H. H. Donaldson, Prof. E. 8. Morse, Prof. Cornelia M. Clapp, George T. Little, the librarian of Bowdoin College, Mrs. Cornelia Fletcher Day (Westford, Mass.), Mrs. Sarah H. Trumbull (Beverly, Mass.), Mrs. Helen Keith Frost (Westford, Mass.), Secretary of the Boston School Committee, Headmaster English High School, Boston, Mass., Prof. E. L. Mark, Edward Phelps Allis, Jr., Dr. Reinhardt Dohrn, and others. I must also express my indebtedness to E. G. Conklin and T. H. Morgan, for criticism of the manu- script. The section dealing with Whitman’s scientific work was prepared by T. H. Morgan, E. G. Conk in, J. Perey Moore and others—See foot-note p. xlvil. XV XV1 CHARLES OTIS WHITMAN pared where they, and so naturally mounted, that they attracted much attention among ornithological students.’’? It would be interesting to know more of his early life but Pro- fessor Whitman rarely spoke of it, though he referred at times to work on his father’s farm. In reply to the question whether he had been interested in natural history as a boy, he replied to Professor Wallace Craig that he judged he must have been, be- cause of his persistence in getting his grandfather to tell hunting stories. He never tired of the stories, and often walked a mile to have an evening of them; his grandfather was very kind in always telling these when asked. He also said that he kept pigeons as a boy, and was fascinated by them and sat and watched them by the hour, intensely interested in their feeding, their young, and in everything that they did. We thus get a distinct though undetailed view of a boyhood spent on a New England farm, an education acquired by dint of labor and self sacrifice, and of an original interest in natural history, shown in his observation of pigeons and his collection of the birds of Maine. He entered Bowdoin College as a sophomore in September, 1865, and graduated with the degree of Bachelor of Arts in July, 1868. The college curriculum of this time was the usual course of re- quired studies with much emphasis on the classical languages, some study of modern languages and of mathematics, the elements of philosophy and a variety of sciences taught no doubt mainly from text-books. The influence of this classical education re- mained with him all his life, and was no doubt responsible for the views that he entertained in favor of the requirement of Latin for college education. There was certainly little to stimulate his interest in the field in which he subsequently won distinction. His membership in the Greek Letter Society Delta Kappa Epsi- lon, in the Athenaeum Society (literary), and in the Philologian Society (debating) may help to indicate his social and intellectual interests at this period. At his graduation he ranked about ninth in a class of twenty-three. The title of his commence- 2 See Lapham, William B. ‘‘History of Woodstock, Me., with family sketches and an appendix.’ Portland, Stephen Barry, Printer, 1882. BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH + Sev ) ment oration ‘“‘Free Enquiry’’ indicates already an unfettered mind. On graduating from Bowdoin, Whitman was appointed prin- cipal of Westford Academy in Westford, Massachusetts. He began to teach there on December 16, 1868, and remained until the spring of 1872. He must have taught a great variety of sub- jects, to judge by the catalogue of 1872, as there was a four years’ course involving mathematics, English, Latin, Greek,. French, geography, book-keeping, history, natural philosophy, chemistry, mental philosophy, astronomy, physiology, and botany, and there were but two assistant teachers and ninety pupils in 1871-72. However, he continued his interest in birds and taxidermy, and the library of the Academy still has a good collection of Westford birds prepared by a lady whom Whitman instructed in the art while there; it also contains a fine specimen of one of the largest of Maine loons set up by Whitman himself. During the school year 1871-72 Whitman substituted in the English High School in Boston, Massachusetts, and was regularly appointed sub-master in September, 1872. At that time the departmental system had not been introduced into the school and he taught general high school subjects. He remained with the | school until the summer of 1875. While in Boston Whitman came under the influence of Louis Agassiz, and was one of the fifty students who, in July and August, 1873, attended the Anderson School of Natural History founded by Agassiz on the island of Penikese. Here he met Professor E. 8S. Morse, who was an instructor under Agassiz, a circumstance which had a great effect in Whitman’s later life, leading to his call to the University of Tokyo as related further on. Professor Morse was much attracted to him by the beauti- ful and accurate way in which he drew the lower forms of life, particularly the Ascidian Perophora, on which Morse himself - was working at the same time. Morse and Whitman remained ‘the best of friends throughout life, and at Whitman’s invitation many years later Morse delivered several lectures at the Marine Biological Laboratory. XVill CHARLES OTIS WHITMAN Louis Agassiz died in December, 1873, and the Penikese school was opened again in 1874 for the last time by his son, Alexander Agassiz. Whitman was again one of the privileged fifty who worked there, though ninety other applicants had to be refused admission for lack of accommodations. The Penikese school started a tide of biological work at the sea-shore in American which ebbed indeed for a while, but began to flow again in the decade of the eighties and has been running stronger ever isnce. No doubt the germ of the Marine Biological Laboratory, Whitman’s most significant scientific enterprise, was implanted there in Whitman’s heart and in the hearts of others. Doctor Craig states that Whitman felt that he got his first start in scientific zoology from Agassiz, but that he did not really get under way until he worked with Leuckart on Clepsine in Germany. Asked by Doctor Craig (in August, 1910) what he thought of Agassiz’s method, Whitman replied that he did not think much of it at first but that as time went on he thought more and more of it. ‘‘We are apt to do the work for the student too much. What we should do is to set him a problem and let him work it out.” In 1875 Whitman decided to go to Germany to study natural history. Apparently he had not yet decided to abandon his career as teacher in the high school, for he left open the possibility of returning to his position after a year’s absence. He sailed in July, 1875, and settled in Leipzig. From there he wrote to his successor in Westford Academy, Mr. William E. Frost, May 28, 1876: ‘‘Mr. Seaver (the head-master of the English High School at that time) says he will secure my re-election and another year’s absence if possible. JI have not much doubt of his ability to do this. At any rate I shall remain another year.” But when 1877 arrived he was not yet ready to leave and he decided to remain a part, at least, of a third year. In 1878 he received the degree of doctor of philosophy from the University of Leipzig, and sailed for America in July of the same year, although he still wished ‘‘to remain a little longer in Deutschland, but the Fates say no!’’3 3 Letter to Mr. Frost, July 6, 1878. BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH xix In 1878 he published his first scientific paper ‘‘ The Embryology of Clepsine’”’ in the Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science, vol. 18, pp. 215-315. This was his doctor’s thesis; in many respects it was a very notable, indeed epoch-making work. It was the first time that the primordia of any ectodermal organs had been followed to individual cells, and that the cleavage process itself had been adequately interpreted as a process of ‘histoge- netic sundering.’ He laid emphasis on the existence of embryonic axes in the unsegmented egg, and anticipated to a considerable extent views that did not receive adequate recognition until the period of study of ‘cell-lineage’ began about fifteen years later. On his return to America he was appointed Junior Master, first grade, of the English High School in Boston, teaching English, and resigned in 1879. It is evident that now for the first time, at the age of nearly thirty-seven, he had irrevocably decided to devote himself entirely to zoology, for by his resignation he burned his bridges behind him. He received an appointment as fellow in biology in Johns Hopkins University for 1879-80, but he did not enter on the fellowship, haviny in the meantime accepted the chair of zoology in the University of Tokyo. He sailed for Yoko- hama, August 21, 1879. On the voyage he made observations on the flight of flying fish which he described in the American Naturalist, vol. 14, 1880, maintaining that their course through the air is actual flight. WHITMAN IN TOKYO With his appointment to the University of Tokyo in 1879, begins Whitman’s real influence as a teacher and organizer in zoology. He was then nearly thirty-seven years of age and had passed through a most varied preparation for his life-work. He had pushed on without haste but without rest, always carrying with him his original and vital interest in living things since he first studied pigeons as a boy, in spite of the necessity of earning a livelihood by teaching school. He thus came to his chosen life work in full maturity with a mind broadened by varied expe- riences, yet with actual boyish enthusiasm and interest, that never left him throughout life. XX CHARLES OTIS WHITMAN The work in zoology in the Imperial University of Tokyo was first organized by Professor E. 8S. Morse, who was invited from abroad in 1877.4. He remained there two years and was succeeded in 1879 by Professor Whitman. Professor Iwakawa states that Professor Huxley was first invited by Professor Morse to accept the chair as his successor. Professor Huxley wrote that for years he had been desirous of studying biology in oriental countries and that the present call from Tokyo was the best chance he could ever have; however, he regretted that the declining condition of his health would not allow him to accept. Professor Morse states in a letter that while instructor at Penikese he had known Whitman and was much impressed by the beauty and accuracy of his work; his experience as teacher in Boston was also a recom- mendation; so Professor Morse secured Whitman’s call to the chair of zoology in Tokyo and it was accepted. Professor Whit- man remained in Japan for two years until 1881. He had only four students, but as all became professors of zoology in the Im- perial University he may be ««stly regarded (as Dr. Takahashi states) as the father of zoology in Japan. Professor Iwakawa says that Professor Whitman’s teaching really laid the foundation of modern zoology in Japan. It is impossible to reproduce the tone of affection and reverence in which these reminiscences are written by two of his original pupils, Iwakawa and Ishikawa, and a later student during the Chicago period, Takahashi. Professor Iwakawa says, ‘“‘Once he was my teacher while he was in Japan and since then until today I have been paying respects and admiration both for his character and for his work in biology.’”’ ‘‘I am constrained by what I regard as a duty to him to let others get a glimpse of what I knew him to be while he was with us in Tokyo’’—and the whole tenor of his reminiscences is one of affectionate admiration and devotion. ‘Professor Whitman’s attitude of mind toward his ‘In the Magazine of Zoology, published by the Zoological Society of Japan, Tokyo, vol. 23, no. 269, March 15, 1911, there appear three articles on Professor Whitman, the first by Professor Tomotaro Iwakawa, the second by Professor Chiyomatsu Ishikawa, and the third by Dr. Katashi Takahashi. For the trans- lation of these articles I am indebted to Dr. Shigeo Yamanouchi. They form the basis of the following account. Charles Otis Whitman = 1882 From Lapham’s History of Woodstock, Maine. 3 i ; BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH Xx1 pupils was such as a mother toward her son.”’ Professor Ishikawa writes in a similar spirit throughout. He says, ‘“‘On receiving the tidings of Professor Whitman’s death I am very much sur- prised and bitterly mourned.”’ ‘‘I mourned bitterly in the recol- lection that those delightful days we had together shall never again be realized, but have now become a memory.”’ ‘‘The work he has done during his life still remains and will be remembered forever.”’ Takashahi says, ‘‘As he was the teacher of our pro- fessors, he will be justly regarded as our father of zoology in Japan. I feel as if I had lost my grandfather because of his being the teacher of our professors and because of his cherished kindness shown to me as a father might have shown to his son during my stay in his laboratory in the University of Chicago.” The following incident, as related by Professor Iwakawa and translated by a Japanese friend, is worth quoting: For the purpose of making bird specimens for the museum, the Uni- versity secured two government licenses in hunting seasons and the licenses were handed to the Zoological Department for the use of the students. To make the specimens was one of purposes of hunting and the other end seemed to eat flesh of birds. One Saturday, a number of pigeons was brought to our laboratory and the next day being Sunday, some of us came to the laboratory to have the share of feast. Dr. Iijima dissected the birds. founded by Edward Phelps Allis, Jr. Mr. Allis had decided to start a laboratory for biological and related research and Whitman was recommended to him as a proper person to take charge. There followed a con- ference in which the plans and purposes of the laboratory were discussed, and Whitman then presented the need of an American journal for publication of zoological research, pointing out that American workers were obliged either to present their papers to some scientific society or to send them for publication to some one of several European journals. Whitman then asked Mr. Allis if he would consider the publication of such a journal, in con- nection with the laboratory. He was asked to submit figures and > T am indebted to Mr. Allis for some of the information on which the following statements are based. XXV1 CHARLES OTIS WHITMAN plans, and it was finally arranged that he should come to Mil- waukee, take charge of the laboratory, to be known as the Lake Laboratory, ‘and also edit with the cooperation of Mr. Allis, a journal to be called the Journal of Morphology. The journal was to be a model of publications of the kind. Whitman may not have been the first to realize the need of establishing a journal of zoological and anatomical science in America, but he was the first to possess sufficient courage, energy and influence to set about realizing the need. He was fortunate indeed to find a man of scientific attainments and enthusiasm with an ample and liberal purse to support him in this under- taking. In the introduction to the Journal Whitman wrote, “The mixed character and scattered sources of our publications are twin evils that have become intolerable both at home and abroad. The establishment of the Journal of Morphology may not be the death blow to these evils; but there is hope that it will, at least, relieve the more embarrassing difficulties of the present situation.”’ In its make-up both scientific and typographical, the Journal of Morphology was a model of what a research publication should be, and it did much to coordinate zoological research in America, to give it a worthy setting, and to make it better known abroad. Eighteen volumes were published between 1887 and 1903, always at considerable financial loss, and its publication was then sus- pended for a while in spite of Whitman’s efforts to secure the needed support. The American Journal of Anatomy and The Journal of Experimental Zoology, begun in the period of suspen- sion of the Journal of Morphology, did not, however, suffice for the growing needs of zoological and anatomical science, and the Journal of Morphology was taken up again by The Wistar Institute of Anatomy and Biology in Philadelphia, in 1908, and its publication has continued ever since. As Professor Mall says, ‘‘The Journal of Morphology served as a model for many of our scientific journals, both biological and medical, which have come into existence during the past twenty-one years. The im- portance of sound scientific journals to anatomical and zoological science is now clear to all, and both anatomists and zoologists BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH XXVil owe to Professor Whitman a debt of gratitude for having been the pioneer in this field”? (Anatomical Record, vol. 2, 1908, p. 381). In 1898, realizing the need of some means for more rapid publi- cation than was afforded by the Journal of Morphology, Whitman started the Zoological Bulletin with the cooperation of W. M. Wheeler. The idea was to afford means for the rapid publication of shorter articles and preliminary notices dealing with investi- gations in zoology which required only simple illustrations. The Bulletin was therefore published monthly. It was intended to be a companion serial to the Journal of Morphology. After the publication of two volumes the name was changed to the Bio- logical Bulletin and it was transferred to the Marine Biological Laboratory as its official publication. At the Lake Laboratory Whitman was associated with Edward Phelps Allis, the founder, Howard Ayers, William Patten, A. C. Eycleshymer, and some others. The work of the laboratory was research work in morphology, especially embryology. Whitman himself began investigations on Amia and Necturus, but though he carried some of this work quite far, but little of it was ever published. His scientific activity during this time may be in- ferred from the list of publications covering the period 1886 to 1889. AT CLARK UNIVERSITY: 1889-1892 In 1889 Whitman accepted a call to the chair of zoology in the newly founded Clark University of Worcester, Massachusetts. Professor G. Stanley Hall of Johns Hopkins University had sought to establish with the aid of Jonas Clark of Worcester, astrictly grad- uate and research institution, which should accomplish all that the Johns Hopkins University had set out to do in elevating the stand- ard of scholarship in America, but without the hindrance of under- graduate instruction. Whitman met there with thoroughly con- genial conditions and associates. President Hall had assembled a small but remarkable group of scientific men, all animated by the same high ideals of scholarship. They were unencumbered with undergraduate instruction, provided with fairly adequate means for research, and they seemed destined to realize the fine aim that President Hall had set before them. XXV111 CHARLES OTIS WHITMAN Whitman’s teaching career, interrupted since he left Tokyo eight years before, was now resumed, and continued to the time of his death. A small body of research students was attracted to him, who carried on their work in Worcester during the aca- demic year and at the Marine Biological Laboratory in Woods Hole during the summer. Whitman’s laboratory was a paradise to the properly qualified research worker. There was practically no set instruction and the student’s liberty was complete in all respects, but a spirit of hard work and complete absorption in the fundamental problems of biology prevailed. The problems of biology were the true topics of the day and, when the zoologi- cal club met, such subjects as Darwinism and Lamarckism were discussed with a fire and enthusiasm comparable to the most intense political or religious controversies. The main business of each student was his research problem, a secondary business was the preparation of some subject set for presentation at the zoological club, and the animated discussion of fundamental problems of biology prevented too much narrowness. Students read much and thought much because they had both time and inclination, and were not subject to trivial academic demands. Whitman had a great respect for the intellectual independence of his students. He set them worthy problems but left the work- ing out to the student; he was at the same time their severest and most friendly critic. He maintained their courage through difficulties, rejoiced with them in their discoveries, and always acknowledged their complete ownership in their results. He required convincing proof of each statement, and one could feel sure that whatever passed him would stand. He was completely loyal to them in all relations, and it is characteristic that the main event which finally induced him to resign and move to Chicago was an act of the administration which he regarded as an injustice to one of his students. He was not alone in his displeasure with the administration, though the causes were various and the de- partments of physics and chemistry, zoology, anatomy, neurology, and palaeontology of the new University of Chicago were organ-— ized by seceders from Clark University in 1892. BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH b0.4b.4 PROFESSOR WHITMAN AND THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY The organization of the Marine Biological Laboratory was a response to the same demand that established and maintained a marine laboratory on the island of Penikese in 1873 and 1874. In his address at the opening of the Marine Biological Laboratory Professor Whitman said: The Annisquam Laboratory, the immediate predecessor of this, was organized to serve the same ends as the Penikese School, and the forces there engaged have simply been supplemented and transferred to the new Marine Biological Laboratory of Woods Hole, with such changes only as circumstances have rendered necessary. It was through the generous support and active cooperation of the Woman’s Education. Association of, Boston that Professor Hyatt was able to maintain the Laboratory at Annisquam, and the same Association initiated and car- ried through the movement that has given us this Laboratory. In 1886 efforts were made by the Association to place the Annis- quam Laboratory on an independent and broader foundation. A circular letter sent to many of the leading biologists of the country received encouraging replies and accordingly a prelim- inary meeting was held on March 5, 1887, in the library of the Boston Society of Natural History. A committee was there organized. to perfect plans for the organization of a permanent sea-side laboratory, to elect trustees and to devise ways and means for collecting the necessary funds. The committee met with sufficient success for a modest beginning and accordingly in March, 1888, the Marine Biological Laboratory was formally incorpor- ated with ten members. Seven trustees were chosen at a meeting of the Corporation held the same month. In June, 1888, the Trustees issued a circular in which they announced the policy of the Laboratory to support instruction as well as research, and invited the cooperation of the universities and colleges of the country. Professor Whitman’s appointment as director of the Laboratory was also announced in this circular. This brief account of some facts in the early history of the Marine Biological Laboratory may suffice to show the origin of Professor Whitman’s connection with the institution. He found a local organization that planned to become national in scope, XXX CHARLES OTIS WHITMAN to enlist the cooperation of colleges and universities throughout the country and.to provide for research and instruction in biology. The location of the Laboratory was also fixed and the first build- ing erected at Woods Hole. Although the incorporators were all residents of Boston, yet they had provided for a national organ- ization by offering each institution invited to cooperate the privi- lege of naming five members each of the Corporation during the term of cooperation. Apparently, Professor Whitman had noth- ing to do with the original statement of these principles, but after his appointment as director, at least, he became their chief exponent and developed them to a much greater extent than the original incorporators had intended, so that the Corporation soon came to have a large and nation-wide membership, and the Board of Trustees was enlarged to include 12 members in 1890, 17 in 1892, and 21 in 1895. The membership of the Corporation grew by leaps and bounds, and rapidly became representative of the entire country, as the practice was followed for some years of inviting all who worked at the Laboratory to become members. The attendance at the Laboratory was 17 in 1888, 44 in 1889, 47 in 1890, 71 in 1891, 110 in 1892, 199 in 1895; and the number of institutions represented was 13 in 1888, 29 in 1889, 32 in 1890, 31 in 1891, 52 in 1892 and 85 in 1895. The early years of the Laboratory were years of great pros- perity; to accommodate the growing tide of workers an L was added to the original building in 1890; in 1892 a building equal to the original Laboratory in size was added to form the third side of a quadrangle, and two separate buildings, one for botany and another for a lecture hall and research rooms were added by 1896. Whitman’s part during this period of rapid material develop- ment was to furnish the spirit and develop the ideals of the institution. It is obvious that the idea of cooperation had a pri- mary practical significance in the minds of the original trustees, to secure support for the new institution. Though he did not lose sight of its practical significance, the idea of cooperation was transformed by Whitman into an ideal of a scientific democracy, which furnished a motive for loyalty and devotion such as rarely, if ever, existed in a scientific enterprise, so that the development BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH XXX1 of the Laboratory became a kind of cult to a large and influential body of naturalists. Whitman not only awakened this spirit, which was compounded of devotion to himself as well as to the ideal which he represented, but he kept it alive, and more than once, by refusing to compromise any fraction of the fundamental idea for immediate practical advantage, he saved the principle from extinction. That the Laboratory today is still ascientific democracy is due entirely to Whitman’s uncompromising devo- tion. In his first report Professor Whitman states, ‘“The new Lab- oratory at Woods Holl is nothing more, and, I trust, nothing less, than a first step towards the establishment of an ideal bio- logical station, organized on a basis broad enough to represent all important features of the several types of laboratories hitherto known in Europe and America.’”’ Thus he formed great plans for the germinal institution. He early maintained that in such an ideal biological station it was essential that all biological interests should be represented, and accordingly successively added depart- ments of botany, physiology and embryology to the original zoology, each with its side of research as well as instruction. But the variety of work that has been welcomed at Woods Hole can- not be included even within these broad divisions. Professor Whitman had most catholic interests in biology and it is remark- able in what fundamental ways he comprehended the problems of each division. The association of workers in different fields of biology has been one of the most helpful and stimulating fea- tures of the Station. The Marine Biological Laboratory was designed for instruction as well asresearch. The original circular opens with these words: “The Trustees of the Marine Biological Laboratory earnestly desire to enlist your cooperation in the support of a sea-side lab- oratory for instruction and investigation in biology.’”’ Instruc- tion was in fact placed first, not only in the opening sentence but throughout the circular. However, the Laboratory started out at once under Whitman as primarily a research institution, and in his address at the opening of the Laboratory, July 17, 1888, he said: XXXll CHARLES OTIS WHITMAN In every attempt hitherto made to combine the two chief interests here represented, instruction has been the object of first concern. Now the only way to keep the distributive function efficient and active is to unite it in proper relations with the productive function. The Labor- atory (i.e., the side of investigation) is the creative agent—the source of all supplies; the school is merely the receiver and distributor. Any attempt to combine the two which ignores or reverses these relations must end in disappointment and failure. In the fifth annual report Professor Whitman states: The two functions of instruction and investigation have worked ad- mirably together, each growing stronger in the success of the other. We have endeavored to keep the two properly balanced, but I think we have nearly reached the limit of our capacity for instruction with our present space and means. We already see that to tax our teaching foree much more would not tend to improve the side of investigation. In the eighth annual report for the year 1895 Professor Whitman again returns to this theme: Our instruction and investigation have been inspired by a common purpose, and thus kept in such relations that each has added to the strength of the other, and added more and more with every stride for- ward. If instruction has increased, it is chiefly due to the stimulating influence of investigation; if investigation has gained, it is because in- struction has multiplied workers. Mutual service is the bond of union, but the union is not merely one of coordination, in which the two ele- ments are simply balanced one against the other; it is one of a more vital order, in which each isservantand only oneismaster. Allour classes face in one direction—towards original work—and all our activities, sympa- thies and interests are dominated by the spirit of research. Doesthat render our instruction less efficient? Just the contrary. It fills with life and purpose, makes students more earnest, dignifies the work of the teachers, and wins their best effort. Moreover, it re-enforces the service of the regular staff by contributions from every member of the investi- gating departments. Farther on: What does instruction mean for us? It means, not wholly, but pre- eminently, preparation for original work, and much of it is especially designed for the benefit of investigators, not beginners only, but for specialists who are independent workers. It will be plain, I trust, that we are not cultivating two antagonistic functions, between which we have to carefully guard the balance, lest one may prosper at the expense of the other. There can be no excess in either direction, for every gain, whether on one side or the other, is a gain not only for the part but also for the whole. BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH XXX1l1 These extracts explain Whitman’s position with reference to the functions of instruction in a primarily research institution. His ideas seem to have been sound, if we may judge from the experience of twenty-three years, during which the two have existed side by side with mutual advantage. During the third session of the Laboratory Whitman organized the evening course of Biological Lectures which has proved ever since one of the stimulating features of the Laboratory life. In his report for this session Whitman outlines the idea as follows: These were not intended to take the place of systematic lectures, such as are given in the regular courses of instruction; they stand rather for the higher and the more general needs of the science. Their leading purpose, if I may be permitted to define it more with reference to the possibilities of its future development than to its present attainment, was to meet the rapidly growing need of cooperative union among special- ists. Specialization has now reached a point where such union appears to be an essential means of progress. Specialization is not science, but merely the method of science. For the sake of greater concentration of effort, we divide the labor; but this division of labor leads to inter- dependence among the laborers, and makes social coordination more and more essential. This is the law of progress throughout the social as well as the organic world. An organism travels towards its most per- fect state in proportion as its component cell-individuals reach the limit of specialization, and form a whole of mutually dependent parts. Sci- entific organization obeys the same law. As methods of investigation improve, specialization advances, and at the same time the mutual de- pendence of specialists increases. Isolation in work becomes more and more unendurable. Comparison of results, interchange of views and ideas, and a thousand other advantages of social contact, become of paramount importance to the highest development. In such considerations may be found the leading motive for this course of lectures. While directed in the main to the higher needs of investigators, they deal, as a rule, with subjects of present and quite general interest to beginners. In general, it may be said that the authors undertake to set forth what has been accomplished in their special fields of research, to give the conclusions of the best work and thought, to point out general bearings, and to state the problems that await solution. The educational value which such lectures may be presumed to have, and the consideration that through them the aims, the needs, and the possibilities of biological work might, in some measure, be made better known to the public, especially to those whose liberal benefactions have enabled the Laboratory to carry forward its work, suggested the propri- ety of publication. XXXIV CHARLES OTIS WHITMAN At various times these lectures, which have sometimes taken on a spirit of some formality, have been supplemented by informal discussions following lectures delivered by investigators before classes, especially the class in embryology during the early years, and later in physiology; at other times research seminars have been formed for the distinct purpose of discussing and criticising work presented by the investigators; and at all times in the his- tory of the Laboratory free and informal discussion between investigators of their work in progress has been a characteristic feature in the laboratory life. In all this the steady and sane influence of Whitman was at work. All coveted discussions with Whitman; he had a most sympathetic interest in all work going on in the Laboratory, and deep insight into the fundamental problems. One frequently discovered after unburdening one’s self in response to his sympathetic attitude that he had thought out the problem in question more thoroughly. But his courteous and honest attitude always saved such a situation from being painful. He exercised in these ways a steadying influence on the investigations of others, for he was never hurried into following a mere fashion in research. The social life of the Laboratory in Whitman’s time was simple and sincere. He had a horror of all formality and met everybody on a plain and equal footing. His hospitality usually took the form of small dinners particularly well cooked and served, with not more than half a dozen guests usually. He was a most charm- ing host, gracious and self-effacing. The conversation usually turned on some scientific subject and he had the knack of making the others talk, and it was considered quite a triumph for the others to draw him out. He sustained relations with his stu- dents both at Woods Hole and elsewhere, that can only be de- scribed as fatherly. He often helped them financially, and stood by them with the greatest loyalty in securing positions. To the respect that all his students felt for his scholarship and ability was added the love and devotion that they owed to the best of friends. No account of Whitman’s relations to the Marine Biological Laboratory would be complete which failed to describe his con- BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH XXXV duct in various crises of the history of the institution. The essen- tial character of the man comes out better probably in its mingled elements than in any other known relations. But this account must necessarily be incomplete and partial to the extent that Whitman is the subject, and not the Laboratory. Up to about 1895 the relations of the Director and trustees seem to have been on the whole cordial, in spite of minor difficulties. But the rapid growth of the Laboratory imposed financial burdens of no slight amount. In 1890 an ‘L’ was added to the original build- ing; in 1890 a new wing was built; in 1893-4 a new dining hall and kitchen were erected, and the present botanical laboratory. The expenses of these additions was met by numerous contribu- tions from friends and by a loan of $3,500 secured by a mortgage upon the property of the Laboratory, and an unsecured loan of $3,000 from one of the trustees. The Boston trustees themselves felt great satisfaction in the rapid growth of the Laboratory. In 1894 they could say: ‘‘The only serious perplexities of the last year have been the result of its rapid growth and prosperity;’ the Laboratory had in fact become self supporting so far as current expenses were concerned. ‘It was important, however, to meet the outstanding loans for new buildings and the following appeal was issued: Reluctant as the trustees were to incur expenses which would make it necessary, in this time of financial stress, to ask help from the friends of the Laboratory, yet, in the opinion of many, to have checked the growth of the institution at this stage, by turning away desirable students and investigators, would have inflicted a permanent injury. We ask, then, from those whose conviction of the value of such a Laboratory has helped to bring it to its present condition of prosperity, still further aid in its future development (from the Trustees’ Report to the Corporation for the year 1894). But the enlargements, great as they had been, were still in- adequate to the growing demand. In proposing the further enlargement which Professor Whitman felt to be necessary to provide for the growth of the Laboratory, he was hampered by the reluctance of some, at least, of the trustees, to incur further indebtedness. A new building was needed of the size of the orig- inal laboratory to provide a lecture hall and more rooms for inves- XXXV1 CHARLES OTIS WHITMAN tigators at an estimated cost of $3,000. Professor Whitman organized the investigators of the Laboratory into a Biological Association to work for the needed building. This Association pledged $1,500 towards the cost of the new building, and the trus- tees finally agreed to secure anequal sum. The building was erected in 1896, and has been fully occupied ever since, thus justifying Whitman’s estimate of the needs of the Laboratory. But this plan left the debt for previous buildings still outstanding. ‘‘Sub- sequent events showed that Doctor Whitman raised the whole of the $3,000, besides the money needed for equipment, and the trus- tees did not as a body raise anything; although a few individuals who were supporters of Doctor Whitman and his policy raised a few hundred dollars’? (from ‘“‘A Reply to the Statement of the Former Trustees of the Marine Biological Laboratory,’ 1897, p. 8). While it is perhaps undesirable to revive old controversies, yet it seems needful in justice to Doctor Whitman, to state the issues of the years 1896-1897, with the dispassionateness which fourteen elapsed years should furnish. It was never true that a majority of the board of trustees lost confidence in, or were out of sympathy with Doctor Whitman; but a minority of the board, who neverthe- less constituted the governing element by virtue of their original membership and residence in Boston where all the meetings were held, were much displeased with him for not listening respect- fully enough to their motives of caution, and for his dominance in Laboratory affairs. The existence of a small deficit in the operating expenses of the year 1896 led them to declare that the Laboratory should not be opened in 1897, unless a sum of $2,000 were raised not later than April 15. This sum was much in excess of the deficit and the vote was not taken until February 5, 1897. An offer on the part of one of the trustees, Mr. L. L. Nunn, to bear any added deficit resulting from operations of 1897, was re- fused. The trustees raised the sum of $1,140 by April 12, and the treasurer reported on May 5 that there was a balance in the treasury of $735.55; there was also about $670 accumulated interest in funds available for any purpose the trustees might approve. The deficit in the meantime had melted away. The é October 10, 1908. Photograph by R. M. Strong 1908. Photograph by Kenji Toda Charles Otis Whitman BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH a announcement of the 1897 session was therefore very late and the attendance suffered seriously in consequence of the rumor that had spread that the Laboratory would not be opened that year. A meeting of the board of trustees was held at Woods Hole on August 6, 1897, and at this meeting a majority of the members present, who were favorable to Whitman, voted to call a special meeting of the members of the Corporation to be held in Boston on August 16 for the purpose of considering changes in the by- laws. The purpose of the proposed changes was (1) to provide that the annual meeting of the Corporation should be held in Woods Hole instead of in Boston, and in August instead of Nov- ember, and to increase the quorum so as to secure a more repre- sentative attendance and avoid local control, and (2) to change the body of the trustees from a body practically self-perpetuating to an elective body, elected by the Corporation in four groups, one such group to be elected each year for a period of four years, and thus avoid the old practice of the simultaneous annual election of all members. At this meeting about eighty-seven members of the Corporation recorded their names with the clerk, and it was estimated that there were about twenty others present who did not do so. It was the largest and most representative meeting of the Corpora- tion ever held up to that time. The program as outlined was unanimously adopted. This amounted to no less than a revolution in the government of the Laboratory, and the action was promptly followed by the resignation of seven out of the nine members of the board of trustees resident in Boston and its vicinity. Six of these and one other trustee then drew up a statement which was primarily an attack on the Director, Professor Whitman, which they published in Science, October 8, 1897. To this statement a complete reply was made in the more dignified, but less permanent, form of a separate pamphlet by a committee of three of the trustees who stood by the Director (‘‘A Reply to the Statement of the Former Trustees of the Marine Biological Laboratory,” Boston, Alfred Mudge and Son, Printers, No. 24 Franklin Street, 1897.) This reply and the facts that two-thirds of the board of trustees stood XXXVI11 CHARLES OTIS WHITMAN by Professor Whitman, that the places of the ‘former trustees’ were taken by well-known naturalists, and that the progress of the Laboratory was not seriously interrupted even by so serious a controversy, constitute a sufficient vindication for Whitman. This struggle was unfortunately necessary to establish the national, representative and democratic character of the institu- tion, a character that grows with the years and which commands the loyalty and devotion of the present members, both of the Corporation and of the board of trustees. Once again it was necessary for Whitman to take a firm stand to maintain the fundamental ideals of organization of the Labor- atory. ‘This was when the newly organized Carnegie Institution of Washington offered in 1902 to take the Laboratory as a depart- ment. This would have permanently solved the difficult prob- lem of maintenance, but Whitman was convinced that it would destroy the representative democratic character of the institu- tion, although every possible concession to the existing form of organization was generously offered by the Carnegie Institution. In this opinion he stood nearly alone, but none the less firmly, and it was his insistence that finally brought about a delay of the decision with an annual grant of $10,000 a year for a period of three years (1903-1905) from the Carnegie Institution in the form of a subscription to twenty work rooms. At the end of this period a very notable petition signed not only by all members of the laboratory, but also by a large number of representative naturalists, for the continuation of the temporary arrangement was not granted by the trustees of the Carnegie Institution, and the original proposal lapsed. The independence of the Labora- tory had been maintained, but it was apparently as far from a stable basis of financial support as ever. Following this, Whitman gradually withdrew from active par- ticipation in the management of the Laboratory, although he retained the title of Director until 1908. However, he no longer attended meetings, and was even absent from the Laboratory for two successive seasons, 1904 and 1905. The house which he had occupied at Woods Hole burned down in the winter of 1905- 1906; and, fearing that this would make his return impossible BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH XXX1X his friends raised a sum of $8,000 by subscription and the property was bought and the house restored and presented to Whitman. This very signal mark of love and appreciation on the part of his friends, indicating as it did so clearly their desire to remove every obstacle that prevented his presence among them, touched Whitman most deeply. He was present again at the Laboratory in the sessions of 1906 and 1907, but never again, except for a brief visit of two or three days in 1909. His gradually increasing engrossment in the study of heredity and evolution in pigeons may be assigned as the principal cause of his withdrawal from residence at the Laboratory. For many years he transferred his large collection of birds from Chicago to Woods Hole and back again each summer. He always suffered some losses of valuable birds, even when the railroad companies allowed him to take his birds as excess baggage and to attend to them en route. However, when this permission was refused and they had to come by express and might be delayed over an extra night, the losses became more serious. Indeed, the trans- fer became an intolerable burden, and he relinquished his charge of affairs at Woods Hole rather than curtail his own research, an eminently characteristic choice. In 1908 he tendered his resignation; his letter and the reply thereto follow: To the Trustees of the Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods Hole, Mass. Gentlemen: This year has brought the twenty-first birthday of the Marine Bio- logical Laboratory. For these many years you have continued to honor me with the directorship of the Laboratory. In late years I have so far drifted out of office and out of use that a formal resignation at this time can scarcely be more than an announcement of the fact accom- plished. The time has arrived, however, when a reorganization seems to be imperatively demanded, and as a prelude thereto, I must ask you to accept this note as a somewhat belated announcement of my resig- nation of the office of director. Let me take this opportunity to thank you one and all very heartily for the cordial support you have extended to me. Respectfully, C. O. WHITMAN. xl CHARLES OTIS WHITMAN August 13, 1908. The Corporation and Trustees of the Marine Biological Laboratory, in accepting the resignation of the Director, Professor C. O. Whitman, have ordered to be put upon their records and to be forwarded to Doctor Whitman the following minute: The Corporation and Trustees desire to express to the retiring Direc- tor their regret that he finds it necessary to withdraw from the active directorship of the laboratory, and their appreciation of the inestimable value of his services. Since the establishment of the Laboratory at Woods Hole twenty-one years ago, he has been continually its Direc- tor and he has to a very large extent guided its growth and development. He has stood for the principles of cooperation and independence which have made the laboratory unique in character and truly national in its reputation and influence. His high ideals and his generous apprecia- tion of the work of others have been an inspiration to the many biolo- gists, who, during these years, have attended the laboratory. The corporation and trustees desire that the retiring Director may continue to serve the laboratory as honorary director and trustee and that his presence at the laboratory may continue to be an inspiration in the future as in the past. Professor Whitman’s reply was as follows: To the Corporation and Trustees of the Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods Hole, Mass. Ladies and Gentlemen: Your action of August 13, in which you express a desire to have me serve the laboratory as ‘honorary director and trustee’ is in itself alone an all-sufficient reward for whatever services I have rendered as Director. Your goodwill is the all-important recompense, and no title that you could confer could add to the weight of your approbation. In fact, titles belittle the spirit. Let me have the latter without the former—without title or office of any kind. Please respect this wish and believe me, as ever, a sincere and devoted friend of the Laboratory. Respectfully and cordially, C. O. WHITMAN. The report of the trustees to the Corporation bearing on Pro- fessor Whitman’s resignation and on his services to the Laboratory expresses so well what many others feel that it is appropriate to quote it in large part: | Professor Whitman’s resignation as Director of the Marine Biological Laboratory, after twenty-one years of service in that: position, impres- sively recalls the inestimable value of his services in the establishment and development of this institution. If we have today one of the lead- BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH xli ing marine laboratories of the world, we owe it in large part to him. The interest of almost every member of this board of trustees and of the corporation was enlisted through his efforts, and the splendid influence which the Marine Biological Laboratory has had upon the development of biology in this country is traceable ultimately to him. His connection with the laboratory began at a time when it had neither permanent home, recognized standing, nor scientific ideals. Some of the leading biologists of this country felt that it could not compete as a research station with the U. 8. Fish Commission Station, backed as the latter was by the resources of the government, and that its chief field of usefulness must be as a summer school. Whitman thought otherwise, and by his real greatness as a scientist, his untiring energy and enthusiasm, his splendid ideals and his unfailing faith and courage he made it from the start the principal center in America for biological research. From start to finish his ideals for the laboratory were these: (1) A national center for research in every department of biology; (2) a lab- oratory founded upon the cooperation of individuals and institutions; (3) an organization independent in its government and free to follow its natural course of growth and development. For these ideals he has labored consistently and persistently year after year, sometimes with a disregard of present advantage, to be gained by the sacrifice of one or the . other of these ideals, which cost him friendships which he highly prized. At one particular crisis he wrote: ‘If I have made any enemies through unkindness or injustice, I am sincerely sorry for it; but if I have made any because I have stated my conviction on the question before us I can afford to part with all friends who are made enemies for such a cause.’ His faith in the ultimate achievement of these ideals was so great that he chose rather to sacrifice present good than, as he believed, the future welfare of the laboratory; and his plans for the laboratory were so great, while current resources were so small, that he was frequently charged with being impractical. But it is only fair and just to recognize how much was accomplished by adherence to these ideals and to what an extent the spirit and success of the laboratory are due to them. Woods Hole is indeed a national center for research in several branches, if not in every department, of biology. Whitman had the wisdom to see that biology could progress only as a whole. ‘The great charm of a biological station,’ he wrote, ‘must be the fullness with which it repre- sents the biological system. Its power and efficiency diminish in geo- metrical ratio with every source of light excluded.’ To zoology, which was the only subject represented at first, he added botany and physiology and he strove to make Woods Hole a center in each of these departments. He was one of the first to insist upon adequate provision for experimen- tal work. He was, we believe, the first in this country to plan and plead for a biological farm for the study of problems of heredity and evolu- tion. He desired to make Woods Hole a center for the comparative study of anatomy, pathology and psychology. Some of these lines of work have since been taken up and largely developed elsewhere, but if xh CHARLES OTIS WHITMAN Whitman could have had the necessary support in his plans they would have been centered at Woods Hole. This need of a national center of research in every department of biology is still before the laboratory as a living issue, and although this grand concept has so far failed of complete realization, who can say how much the laboratory owes to this catholicity of spirit of its director, how much biology as a whole owes to this splendid ideal? If the laboratory was to be truly national, Professor Whitman be- lieved that it must be founded upon the cooperation of individuals and institutions; no one man nor institution, however great, could accom- plish this purpose. He recognized that common ideals must form the basis of such cooperation, and he sought to bring into close connection with the laboratory every person and every institution that shared these ideals with himself. With these ideals, and by means of his own per- sonal charm and scientific abilities, Whitman secured the cooperation of many of the younger biologists of the country. There was thus de- veloped at Woods Hole a center for research work in biology which has had few equals in the history of the world. By his own work, as well | as by his appreciation of the really fundamental problems of biology, he has set a very high standard for the scientific work of the laboratory, and by his kindness, sincerity, and generosity he has called forth similar qualities in others, so that it has been characteristic of Woods Hole, as of few other laboratories at home or abroad, that a spirit of genuine cooperation and mutual helpfulness prevails. Who that experienced it can ever forget the inspiration and enthusiasm of those early years of the laboratory? Who of us can forget the cordial appreciation and generous encouragement which we received from Professor Whitman? Some of us feel that we there incurred a debt of gratitude to him which we can never fully repay. Since those early years other laboratories have arisen and other duties have drawn men away from Woods Hole, but the Marine Biological Laboratory never loses its charm for those who have worked there, and this charm will continue as long as the spirit of cooperation, which Whitman instilled into it, prevails. Finally, Professor Whitman stood for the complete autonomy ofthe laboratory. Although aid might have been had more than once from universities and institutions by surrendering the independence of the laboratory, he steadfastly and consistently refused to do this, even though in doing so he had to face the opposition of almost all the mem- bers of the board of trustees and the corporation. There is still a dif- ference of opinion as to the expediency of this stand, but there is prob- ably no question as to the desirability of the autonomy. If the labor- atory can obtain endowments such as to provide for its present and future needs and to insure its independence we shall all greatly rejoice, but whether it shall succeed in this aim or not, we are probably all agreed that this much at least of Professor Whitman’s ideal must be maintained, viz: that the laboratory must be left free to grow and develop as its own needs and the interests of science demand. BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH xii These are the ideals which Professor Whitman succeeded in making part and parcel of the Marine Biological Laboratory and which we count among our most valuable possessions. To those who measure the suc- cess of an institution by the size of its buildings or endowments, his efforts at Woods Hole may seem in large part to have failed, but those who realize that ideals are the motive forces of the world, that life con- sists not in abundance of possessions but in abundance of service, that science is not paraphernalia but knowledge—these will not fail to recog- nize the great value of the work Professor Whitman has done for the Marine Biological Laboratory and for the whole science of biology. To these words of appreciation there is but little to add. It may be that the Marine Biological Laboratory is Whitman’s most enduring monument, as it was his chief work of organiza- tion. But the principles will endure eternally, whatever the life of the particular expression they have been given in the Labor- atory, and the fact that Whitman was the chief champion of these ideals and that he gave them visible and effective expression is one of his chief claims to affectionate and reverent remembrance. THE AMERICAN MORPHOLOGICAL SOCIETY Professor Whitman was the leader in the three most important organizations for the advance of zoology in America during the time of his active life: in 1887 he founded the Journal of Mor- phology, in 1888 he became director of the Marine Biological Laboratory, and in 1890 he took the leading part in the founda- tion of the American Morphological Society. 392 outside of sex-gland anlagen. Root of mesentery between sex- gland! Janlagemn.yoss.b a oaemer 3 os os 163 iG SOKO LANG 2. ke so cure Ps whe ele » oe 180 eee felt sex-gland... +s. sc. 0... 179 f 359 in sex-gland anlagen. The table may be allowed to speak for itself. The sex-gland anlagen grade into one another by an intermediate region at the root of the mesentery. More or less arbitrary limits had to be assumed to distinguish between these three regions. In later stages, illustrated by the 17 mm. stage, fig. 11, we shall see 8 BENNET M. ALLEN that the sex-cells undergo lateral migration, either apparent or real, so as eventually to lie at some distance on each side of the median point. The narrowest portion of the mesentery is at about one-quarter the distance from its origin to its insertion. Its minimum width, as measured here amounts to .028 mm., thus showing a great reduction as compared with the 10.7 mm. stage. This reduction in width is shared by the entire mesentery, certain regions remain- ing broad only on account of the enclosed blood vessels. No doubt the migration of the sex-cells out of the mesentery is in large part responsible for this, but a considerable share of it must be ascribed to the fact that there has been a tendency for the tissues to become more compact. The total length of the hind gut at this stage has reached 4.03 mm. Sex-cells are found in the entoderm at its cranial end, and from there extend to within 0.62 mm. of the cloaca. The dis- tribution of sex-cells within the sex-gland anlagen is somewhat more restricted, since they extend from a point 0.31 mm. caudal to the beginning of the hind gut, to a point 1.00 mm. cranial to the cloaca. They are rather sparse at these two extremes. As in the preceding stages, there is no clear evidence of division of the sex-cells, although one can not be absolutely certain upon this point. While at this time many are free from yolk material, others show but little diminution of it. It is true that the sex- cells are often found arranged in clusters, but there is no evidence to show that these are due to repeated division of a parent cell rather than to a tendency for them to congregate through mutual attraction. What the nature of this attraction might be, we do not know; but it might well be akin to that influence which causes the sex-cells to migrate toward the sex-gland anlagen from their source. Similar clusters of sex-cells were found in early stages in Chrysemys. Lepidosteus 14.1 mm. total length. Little radical change is to be seen in this stage. The sex-cells were counted and gave the following results: SEX-CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS 9 Gutentod ern .0 <7 ql de cae 128 Mesoderm of intestinal wall and MERCMLENY 1 is.ge ee uk eae es 222 > 387 outside of sex-gland anlagen. Root of mesentery between 8. G. anlavenis: i. chageeetig serene 37 Right sex-glam dls. sot hecsas eae 197 \350 in sex-gland anlagen. ett nexer land ..n s24.ce cee 153 f There is a strikingly close correspondence between the results of the count in this specimen and those in the preceding one. Attention may be called to the fact that in this specimen a materially greater number of sex-cells is found in the right sex- gland than in the left. At the same time there is a very close correspondence in the total number of sex-cells that have reached the sex-gland anlagen as compared with the total number in the 12.0 mm. stage (359). Lepidosteus 17 mm. total length. In this specimen those sex- cells destined to occupy the sex-glands are seen to have migrated some distance to each side of the root of the mesentery, fig. 11. Their position relative to the root of the mesentery and to the Wolffian duct varies at different points along the sex-gland anlage. In the most cranial portion of the latter they le just medial to the Wolffian duct. As one follows the sex-glands caudally, the sex-cells are found to lie closer and closer to the mesentery, being situated midway between the latter and the Wolffian duct in the middle region of the sex-gland anlage. The most caudally situated sex-cells lie close to the root of the mesen- tery. In this and the succeeding stages the intestine had become so voluminous as to make the counting of the sex-cells in its walls very difficult and inaccurate. It is in fact not easy to distin- guish them from the cells of the gut entoderm because of their rather small size and their entire lack of yolk material at this stage. The total number of sex-cells in the sex-gland anlagen of this specimen is rather high, there being 235 in the left sex-gland and 262 in the right. The total number is 497. 10 BENNET M. ALLEN The slightly greater number of sex-cells in the sex-glands of this specimen as compared with that in the previous ones is of little significance. It most certainly does not indicate that there has been any extensive division of them. In a previous work upon Chrysemys, (Allen ’07), it was shown that there was an extreme amount of individual variation in the number of sex-cells. This variation in Lepidosteus is relatively slight compared with that observed in Chrysemys. In a specimen slightly older than this stage (18 mm.) there were 171 sex-cells in the right sex-gland, and 173 in the left one, the total number, 344, being not far from the average. In these two stages, 17 and 18 mm., the sex-cells usually occur singly, although in places they are aggregated into clumps so thick as sometimes to show as many as five or six in a section of one of the sex-glands. Whether the sex-cells occur singly or in clumps, they are surrounded by peritoneal cells which con- tribute materially to the formation of the ridge-like anlage of the sex-gland. Lepidosteus 24 mm. total length. In aspecimen of this length, fig. 12, there is no essential advance in the development of the sex-gland. There were 147 sex-cells in the right sex-gland, and 154 in the left one. The total number, 301, is distinctly below the average. Comparison with other forms leaves no room for doubt as to the identity of these sex-cells. Since the aim of this paper is merely to trace out their origin, we will not follow them through later stages in their history, but will describe the conditions found in a specimen 110 mm., in length, fig. 13. A complete series of sections through the sex-gland region of this specimen was not made, so it is impossible to give a full account as to the number of sex-cells and general condition of the sex-gland at this time. In running through the series one is struck with the sparseness of the sex-cells. Never are more than two or three to be found in a single section, and often none at all. This would lead one to infer that there has been little or no multiplication B the sex- cells even at this late stage of development. SEX-CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS ial A glance at table 2 shows that there is a general tendency to a reduction in the average size of the cell body in the later stages. This may be due to the absorption of the contained yolk material. There is no marked change in the size of the nucleus. TABLE 2 Dimensions of sex-cells of Lepidosteus CELL BODY Stage Nucleus LARGEST SMALLEST AVERAGE mm. 8.6 | 6.04 | 15.10 | 12.08 13.74 9.3 6.04 | 18.12 12.08 | 14.95 10.7 6.04 1520 11.32 | 13,59) « 14.0 | 5.81 12.08 9.06 | 10.27 17.0 | 6.04 13.59 | 9.06 | 163 24.0 | 5.81 9.06 | a5 | 8.65 110.0 | 6.53 14.50 9.22 12.40 AMIA CALVA Amia 4 mm., total length. In the text figure A is shown a transverse section of an Amia larva of this stage. It will serve as a starting point from which we shall proceed to consider still earlier stages in tracing out the earliest phases in the origin and migration of the sex-cells. The section shown is taken ‘just anterior to the hind gut, the gut entoderm being clearly marked by its greater thickness and dorsal curvature. The cavity of the intestine at this point opens into the large sub-germinal cavity. The extra embryonic portions of the entoderm, 7.e., those which do not form part of the anlagen of the alimentary tract and its appendages can logically be divided into four different regions: (1) The roof of the sub-germinal cavity which is distinguishable from the gut entoderm, as indicated; (2) The layer forming the floor of the sub-germinal cavity; (8) The peripheral layer of entoderm lateral to the sub-germinal cavity (peripheral entoderm) ; (4) The central yolk mass, or vitellus (vitelline entoderm). In the first three of these regions the cells are arranged in a single layer. They are characterized by the fact that the yolk spherules of the component cells are distinctly smaller than are those of 12 BENNET M. ALLEN the vitellus, their diameter being from one-quarter to one-half of that of the typical spherules to the vitellus. In the latter cells are scattered a few of these smaller yolk spherules; but the distinction between the first three divisions of the entoderm and the vitellus is a very sharp one. TEXT FIGURE A In connection with this distinction it is interesting to note that the yolk spherules along the cleavage planes that cut through the vitellus are found to belong to this small type. It is easy to see that if the vitellus were cut up into cells as small as those comprising portions 1, 2, and 3 of the entoderm, the thickness of the layers of small spherules which form merely a border to the large cells would be so great as to comprise the entire body of the more finely divided ones. This difference in the size of the SEX-CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS 13 yolk spherules is then probably associated with the difference in the size of the cells. The peripheral entodermal layer which we have designated as division three is interrupted latero- ventrally by blood vessels lying in the mesoderm. The lateral plates of mesoderm have long since broken away from the mesoblastic somites. Their inner margins lie at some distance to each side of the median line. While there is the slightest tendency in places for the splanchnic and somatic layers of mesoderm to split apart along the medial margins of the lat- eral plates, the remainder of the lateral plates show no indication of a splitting, even in the arrangement of the nuclei. It is, how- ever, quite probable that such a plane of cleavage is already laid down. This is shown by the sex-cells (text fig. A) being imbed- ded in the lateral plates. When the somatopleure and splanchno- pleure separate later, these will be found to lie in the coelomic cavity, being for a time merely adherent to the coelomic sur- face of the medial portion of the somatic mesoderm. One can fairly assume that during the period of migration, represented by fig. 5, the sex-cells push their way between the two layers of mesoderm following the potential cleft that separates them. Text fig. A is very suggestive, as it shows sex-cells situated at intervals from a point just beyond that at which the roof and floor entoderm join the peripheral entoderm. The path of their migration is thus clearly marked out. In this figure it should be noted that the most laterally situated sex-cell lies in the ento- derm, while all of the others are clearly imbedded in the lateral plates of mesoderm as already indicated. In but one or two of the many specimens examined were there any sex-cells found in the roof or gut entoderm. They arise in the peripheral entoderm from which they migrate into the lateral plates of mesoderm and through them to their medial borders, whence, as I shall later show, they pass into the sex-gland anlagen after the formation of the coelomic cavity. The total number of sex-cells found in the mesoderm of the specimen of this stage was 87. Of these 40 were found on the right side and 47 on the left. Text fig. A will indicate their dis- tribution. 14 BENNET M. ALLEN Table 3 serves to show for purposes of comparison the num- bers of sex-cells found in different specimens of Amia. TABLE 3 Number of sex-cells in Amia calva NUMBER OF SEX-CELLS IN MESODERM STAGE SPECIMEN | ihe ie Total Hours. mm. | | | 132 | A None None | 0 132 B None None 0 132 C None None | 0 132 D None None 0 137 A ve 4 11 137 B 9 7 16 Bi C 21 8 29 147 A 15 Ti 22 147 B 14 17 31 147 C 22 ul 33 147 D 48 18 66 147 E 39 28 67 147 | F 50 26 76 155 3.0 15 34 49 3.4 62 41 103 3.5 | A 39 53 92 a5) B 59 48 107 Ball A 42 30 | 72 30 | B 45 47 92 4.0 40 47 rf 5.0 23 20 43 5.6 42 56 98 6.0 28 34 62 a0 38 36 74 h26 33 42 75 9.1 36 40 76 ili 4! 28 54 82 15 RO A 28 49 ha 15.0 B 38 45 83 16.0 A 19 14 33 16.0 B yy) 17 39 16.0 C 99 eT 47 55 102 This stage is a convenient starting point from which to proceed in the study of earlier stages. SEX-CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS is Amia 3.7 mm. total length. The conditions are, in the main, quite similar to those found in the 4mm. stage. Inoneof the two speci- mens (B) in which the sex-cells were counted there were 92 sex- cells in the mesoderm and 10 in the entoderm. Although this total number of 102 is greater than the number found in the 4 mm. stage (87), yet, as shown in table 2, no significance is to be attached to this on account of the great individual variation in the number of sex-cells observed, not only in Amia, but also shown by the author to be so obvious in the turtle, Chrysemys. In A of this stage, 72 sex-cells were found, 42 on the right and 30 on the left side. Amia 3.6 mm. total length. Two larvae of this stage were stud- ied. It was rather difficult to measure the specimens accurately, owing to the fact that the caudal portion of the body free from the yolk has a strong ventral bend. It can be straightened out only in later stages. The two specimens of this length were taken from the same nest and both are distinctly younger than the pre- ceding, yet they showed decided differences from one another in the positions occupied by the sex-cells, probably owing to the fact that this, in all likelihood, is the period of their most active migration. In specimen A the sex-cells are quite numerous in the portion of the lateral plate of mesoderm, which lies imme- diately above the border of the subgerminal cavity. They occur in fair numbers in the mesoderm between this region and a point one-half the distance from this point to the median edge of the lateral plate of mesoderm. Only three were found nearer the median line than this. Of these, one had scarcely passed the midway point, one was still some distance from the median edge of the lateral plate, while one had actually reached that point. In specimen B of this stage a large proportion of the sex-cells have reached the median edge of the lateral plate of mesoderm of each side. This is especially noticeable on the right side. The conditions in this specimen approach those described for the 4 mm. stage but do not show quite such an advanced condition, owing to the fact that a larger proportion of sex-cells are scattered along the outer portions of what we may call the sex-cell path. There 16 BENNET M. ALLEN were noted two or three instances in which the sex-cells were migrating from the peripheral entoderm into the mesoderm. Amia, 3 mm., total length; 155 hours. Inaspecimen of 3.0 mm. total length, the free caudal portion has but recently separated from the vitelline mass, and has attained a total length of .56 mm. By comparison with a number of embryos of 132, 187, and 147 hours old, the age of this embyro was estimated to be very close to 155 hours. This estimate was made by counting the number of sections passing through the posterior part of the embryo free from the yolk mass. Sufficient numbers of embryos were used to give a fairly accurate determination, there being seven specimens of the 147-hour, three of the 137-hour, and two of the 132-hour stages studied. TABLE 4 The numbers of sex-cells in each were as follows: RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE | TOTAL LESBIAN 2 4 8 peda) ec 39 53 92 Tass agen aves «2 ae 59 48 107 There were 49 sex-cells counted in the 3 mm., 155-hour embryo. This, it will be seen, is decidedly below the average and yet the number is greater than that found in the 5 mm. stage and in the much later 16 mm. specimens. Only two of the sex-cells have migrated a very short distance along the lateral plate of mesoderm, beyond a point overlying the lateral boundary of the subgerminal cavity; the remainder of them all lie lateral to it. It will thus be seen that they show a much earlier phase of migration than that observed in the 3.5 mm. embryo, not only as regards the number that have migrated into the mesoderm, but likewise in the distance through which they have travelled in their journey in that layer toward the sex- gland anlagen. Amia, 147 hr. stage. That there is a great amount of individ- ual variation in the rapidity with which this migration from the peripheral entoderm to the lateral plates of mesoderm is accom- plished may be readily seen by referring to the numbers counted SEX-CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS 17 in the mesoderm of seven specimens of the 147 hour stage. These specimens were all taken from the same nest and kept in the same dish, so there can be but very slight difference in their ages, due, if it exists, to the small difference in the time at which the eggs were laid. It will be seen that the total number of sex- cells in the entoderm in these spectmens varies from 22 to 76. The latter number is not only greater than that observed in the 3 mm., 155 hour stage, but almost equals that counted in many specimens of older stages after migration has been completed, as, for instance, the 11.4 mm. and 15 mm. stages (see table). In this stage clearly defined sex-cells can be seen in the peripheral entoderm just below the lateral plates of mesoderm, figs. 16 and 17. These cells are distinguishable from the other entoderm cells among which they lie, by the greater size of their contained yolk granules as contrasted with the small size of the yolk granules in the other cells that make up this layer. The difference is further marked by the more rounded form of the sex-cells. Com- parison of these sex-cells in the peripheral entoderm shows them to be identical with other more clearly defined sex-cells in the mesoderm. Of this identity there can be no question, and it is equally clear, from a study of later stages, that these cells, having once migrated into the lateral plates of mesoderm, pass unaltered along the latter to come finally to rest in the sex-gland anlagen. There can be no doubt about the origin of the sex-cells from the entoderm. A number of cases were observed in which the sex- cells were actually in process of passing from the peripheral ento- derm into the lateral plates of mesoderm. At this stage, sex-cells have a wide distribution in the periph- eral entoderm, being scattered through a region extending from a point opposite to the region where the blood cells originated to the junction of the peripheral, sub-germinal and roof entoderm. In three specimens of the 137 hour stage, conditions are quite similar to the foregoing. In these embryos the number of sex- cells ranged from 11 to 29. It will be seen that the maximum number of sex-cells counted in this stage is greater than the minimum number of the 147 hour stage, although in all three of these 137 hour embryos, the caudal end of the embryo, that part JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL, 22, NO. 1 - 18 BENNET M. ALLEN that has been lifted off the yolk, is decidedly shorter than in any of the 147 hour specimens. Amia, 182 hr. stage. In four specimens of the 132 hour stage, the caudal end of the embryo was just ready to undergo separa- tion from the yolk. Only in one of them had this really com- menced, the separated portion having reached a length of but 20u. Not one of these four specimens showed a single sex-cell in the mesoderm. ‘There can be no question upon this point because they could be very readily detected if present. In the 137 and 147 hour stages those that migrated into the mesoderm stand out most clearly and sharply from the surrounding mesodermal cells. The points of difference between the two kinds of cells are very striking and unmistakable. The sex-cells on the one hand are large, spherical, have sharply defined boundaries, and are filled with large oval yolk grains; while the mesodermal cells are small, flattened, syncytial, and contain a very few minute yolk granules. It is very much more difficult to trace the earlier history of the sex-cells in the peripheral entoderm, owing to the slight differences that may be taken as criteria in distinguishing them from the neighboring entoderm cells. Numbers of cells with all the characteristics of sex-cells are found just beneath the anlagen of the blood masses. This stage is just before the development of blood vessels within the embryo, and the blood-forming cells occur in the form of two sharply limited bands, one on each side of the embryo and at some distance lateral to it. Here and there, sex-cells are found in the peripheral entoderm, medial to these areas; but clearly defined cases of this sort are rather rare as compared with the large number seen in this region a little later in the 147 hour stage. It is quite likely that many of these sex-cells are overlooked at this stage owing to the fact that the neighboring entodermal cells contain rather large yolk grains at this time, while those seen in these cells in the 147 hour stage are much smaller than at this stage. It is quite possible that the sex-cells may migrate medially in the entoderm from an entodermal source beneath the blood anlagen to various points between this region and the edge of the sub-germinal cavity. It is possible that a large proportion SEX-CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS 19 of them may have developed in the peripheral entoderm through- out this entire extent. On the other hand, it is also possible that sex-cells may migrate up into this region from the central ento- derm beneath. We have traced the history of the sex-cells from the 4 mm. stage where they are readily identified by any one who has had any experience in observing these cells, back to the earliest stage at which they are distinguishable in the entoderm. We shall now follow them up to the period when they are enclosed in the definitely formed sex-glands and finally to the stage at which they are found to have begun to increase in number. Amia 5 mm., total length. Passing from the 4 mm. stage to the next represented in our series, 5 mm., we find that the sex- cells have made but little progress in their migration toward the median edge of the lateral mesodermal plates. The total number of sex-cells counted in this stage was surprisingly small, being 43 as compared with 87 in the 4mm. stage. This difference in number is probably due to individual variation. The hind gut has materially lengthened, being 1.3 mm. in length, compared with .88 mm. in the 4 mm. stage. There has been a corre- sponding increase in the length of the region over which the sex- cells are distributed. In the 4 mm. stage they extend from a point 0.06 mm., in front of the beginning of the hind gut, cau- dally to a distance of 0.35 mm. In the 5 mm. stage that we are considering, this region begins at the same point relative to the hind-gut and extends caudally for 0.50 mm., one isolated sex- cell being found at a distance of 0.57 mm. behind the cranial limit of their distribution. In the more caudal portion of this region the splanchnic and somatic layers of mesoderm have begun to separate to form the coelome. This separation does not at first lead to the formation of a continuous cavity but rather to a series of isolated, some- what rounded cavities. Further caudad, the coelome becomes more and more completely developed, appearing as a large cav- ity on each side. Amia 6 mm., total length. At this time the first sex-cells appear in the splanchnopleure just at the entrance of the hind gut. 20 BENNET M. ALLEN The first sex-cells in the somatopleure are found in the sex-gland anlagen a short distance (0.04 mm.) behind this point. The sex- cells are distributed somewhat irregularly from the cranial end of the hind-gut to a point 0.90 mm., caudad to this point and there are a few scattering sex-cells still further caudad than this. The coelome is apparent as a continuous cleft on either side of the hind-gut along the entire extent of the region occupied by the sex-cells. The majority of the sex-cells are to be found in the dorso-medial extremity of the coelome, 7.e., near the root of the mesentery. A few lie lateral and ventral to the intestine. The coelomic cleft has not as yet become wider than the diameter of the average sex-cell and we consequently see them usually bridging across it, fig. 18. In no case have they penetrated into the somatic mesoderm as we find them doing later. One sex-cell was found in the gut-entoderm, whither it may have migrated from the mesoderm. It is, on the other hand, quite possible for it to have migrated in the entoderm in the man- ner of sex-cell migration in the turtle. This is a point of minor significance and an occurrence which is at best very infrequent. Amia, 7 mm., total length. Up to this time, the mesentery has been only potentially present, the two lateral plates of meso- derm being in contact above the gut-entoderm. Now, however, we find that it has begun to elongate and become thin. This is naturally correlated with the increase in the extent of the coelome, fig. 19. Two well defined sex-cells are found in the gut-entoderm, 0.06 mm., cranial to the opening of the hind-gut. These are to be interpreted in the same way as the cell in the entoderm men- tioned above. The first sex-cell occurring in the mesoderm is found 0.08 mm. caudad to the beginning of the hind-gut. The sex-cells are distributed through a region extending from a point immediately back of the opening of the hind-gut to a point 1.05 mm. behind it, with a few scattering ones behind these. The total number of sex-cells is 74. Amia, 9.1 stage. Sex-cells first appear .18 mm. cranial to the opening of the hind-gut. They extend from this point to a point 1.59 mm. caudad to this, giving a total extent of 1.67 mm. The total number of sex-cells counted at this stage amounted to SEX-CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS 21 76. Of these all were in the sex-gland anlagen except three; one of which occurred in the gut-entoderm and two in the parietal peritoneum. I am inclined to consider it unlikely for these mis- placed sex-cells to reach the sex-glands. One is struck, however, with the great difference in the relative number of misplaced sex- cells in Amia as compared with Lepidosteus. This may be apparent rather than real, owing to the possibility that in Amia large numbers of them may have failed to migrate from the ento- derm into the mesoderm during early stages. Owing to the diffi- culty of certainly distinguishing sex-cells in the entoderm from or- dinary entoderm cells, it was quite impossible to make any count of those left behind in migration. All but avery few, however, that reach the mesoderm succeed, as we have seen, in reaching the sex- gland anlagen. A considerable number of cells seen in the ento- derm in later stages contain small yolk spherules and show other points of resemblance to sex-cells. In this stage the mesentery has become quite lengthened and the coelome very large. The sex-cells have penetrated into the root of the mesentery, fig. 20. The sex-cells, with rare exceptions, still contain large quanti- ties of yolk material. In these exceptional cases a finely granular appearance gives at least the suggestion of small unstained yolk spherules. The yolk appears in the shape of particles varying in size from small granules up to large lemon-shaped pieces quite as large as those with which the cells of the yolk entoderm are so completely filled. Amia 11.4 mm., total length. The sex-cells are fairly numerous over a region 1.85 mm. in length, beginning at a point 0.06 mm. back of the yolk stalk and ending at a point 0.85 mm. cranial to the cloaca. Two isolated sex-cells are found caudad to the point named, one of them occurring very close to the cloaca. Their total number in this embryo is eighty-two. The sex-cells have much the same characteristics as in the previous stage. This stage is marked by a decided increase in the length of the mesentery and by a decrease in the size of the yolk-sac, which is now but 0.7 mm. in diameter and is greatly hollowed out to form a portion of the intestinal wall. 22, BENNET M. ALLEN While the sex-cells of the 9.1 mm. stage are imbedded in the mesoderm at the root of the mesentery and always close to the median line, they are found in the 11.4 mm. stage to occupy a position a short distance on each side of this point. Not only have they moved laterally, but they have also protruded into the body cavity, accompanied by a few mesoderm cells which are intercalated between them, fig. 21, and surround them with a thin peritoneal investment as well. Amia 15 mm., total length. In this stage the sex-cells extend over a distance of 2.70 mm. in the caudad 0.50 mm. of which they are very sparse. The sex-glands protrude further into the body cavity than in the preceding stage, and the ligament of attachment becomes narrower. The genital ridge is very much lower in the gaps between sex-cells than it is in the sex-cell regions. In spite of the fact that it may be very low for quite a distance, it is continuous throughout. The genital ridges diverge quite widely at their cranial ends, approaching the median line at a point .4 mm. caudad to their point of commencement. The sex-cells have almost uniformly used up their contained yolk material, although a few scattered ones are still closely packed full of them. The sex-cells in specimen A, numbered 28 on the right side and 49 on the left, the total number being 77. The number of sex-cells in specimen B was 38 on the right side and 45 on the left, the total being 83. Amia 16 mm. long. In two 16 mm. larvae, conditions very similar to those of the 15 mm. stage were found. None of the sex-cells contained yolk material in a sufficiently large amount to be clearly recognizable. The striking thing about these two specimens is the very small number of sex-cells present, 33 in one case and 39 in another. There is no indication of degeneration or of a failure to migrate to the proper positions.. The case seems to be similar to one cited in Chrysemys, both being due to individual variation. These two specimens were taken from the same brood and no doubt had the same parentage. Another 16 mm. specimen taken from a different brood showed 99 sex-cells, a number not very far below the maximum. From this fact, and from the SEX-CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS 23 total absence of any indication of degeneration of sex-cells in these or earlier stages, I feel convinced that this small number does not indicate any tendency to degeneration of sex-cells. Amia, 23.7 mm. total length. In the next stage studied, 23.7 mm., the sex-cells numbered 102. Here again there is no evidence of a change in the number of sex-cells originally present. The number, although somewhat high, is exceeded by some of the specimens of very much earlier stages. There is no evidence of sex-cell division nor of any degeneration. Amia, 40 mm. total length. At this stage the sex-gland is elongated oval in transverse section. It has become bent over in such a way that the proximal edge is medial and the free edge TABLE 5 Dimensions of sex-cells of Amia STAGE NUCLEUS CELL BODY Hours 137 | 7.10 18.03 147 | 6.71 18.70 mm. 3.7 | 6.45 21.88 5.0 6.51 17.80 9.1 8.00 14.96 11.4 | 7.48 11.59 15.0 7.48 12.64 16.0 7.74 14.06 23.0 | 7.22 14.20 lateral in position. The mesodermal cells have increased greatly in number. The peripheral cells have become arranged into a somewhat poorly defined layer, while the sex-cells le in the in- terior of the sex-gland. No attempt was made to determine the time at which the sex-cells begin to divide, or to study the further, development of the sex-glands. Measurements of the nuclei and cell bodies of the sex-cells gave the following averages, two diameters being measured in each of five sex-cells chosen at random in each stage. Although the number of cells measured in each stage is hardly sufficient to justify one in considering these average dimensions 24 BENNET M. ALLEN to have any high degree of accuracy, I feel that we are quite justified in concluding from these figures that: (1) there is a fair decrease in the size of the cell-body as development proceeds, and (2) that there is a slight increase in the size of the nucleus. The decrease in the size of the cell-body is probably due to the absorption of the yolk material with which the sex-cells are so richly filled during the earlier stages. No good explanation to account for the slight apparent increase in size of the nucleus presents itself. DISCUSSION OF RESULTS We can not consider this work as completed without making a comparison between the sex-cells and the other cells of the embryo. This subject will first be taken up in Amia where we have traced the sex-cells back to earlier stages than in Lepidosteus. It has already been pointed out that the sex-cells, as first seen in the peripheral entoderm, are to be distinguished only by the size and arrangement of the yolk spherules. The nuclei bear a close resemblance to those of surrounding cells of the same size, while the larger nuclei of larger cells show many points of similarity to them. In all except the earliest stages studied, these nuclei are quite rounded. The chromatin appears in the form of slender strands that take a peripheral position in the nucleus. There is invariably a plasmosome present and rarely two of them. In the 147 hour stage the nuclei of the sex-cells bear a resemblance not only to those of the neighboring cells but also to those of the gut entoderm. In fact, many nuclei of the mesoderm show simi- lar characteristics. After development has gone a little further, as in the 3.4 mm. and 4 mm. stages, the mesodermal nuclei and those of the gut entoderm are found to have become smaller and are more deeply stained than those of the sex-cells and peripheral entoderm. In all of these later stages, which include 5 mm., 6 mm., 9.1 mm., 11.4 mm. and 16 mm. larvae, these differences are found to increase. Although the sex-cells undergo a migration from the peripheral entoderm into the lateral plates of mesoderm and through the latter to the sex-gland anlagen, they still bear a close resemblance SEX-CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS 25 to certain cells of the peripheral entoderm. This not only in- volves a similarity of the nuclei but of the dimensions of the cell bodies. This is true even after the sex-cells and the correspond- ing cells of the peripheral entoderm have lost their yolk through absorption. ; In the stage of 11.4 mm., the yolk mass has been greatly reduced (figs. 25 and 26). Only here and there about its periph- ery are cells to be found with well defined outlines. The great mass is syncytial, with large nuclei of varying size scattered here and there. While these nuclei of the vitelline mass are much larger than the sex-cell nuclei, they bear a close resemblance to the latter. The nuclei of the well defined peripheral cells are prac- tically identical in size and appearance with those of the sex-cells. While the similarity between sex-cells and between these two classes of cells is not so marked in Lepidosteus as in Amia, yet it appears to be equally true. In the 17 mm. stage (figs. 14 and 15) the yolk mass is still of fair size. There is a layer of peripheral entoderm that is largely made up of cells with clear boundaries, whose nuclei are similar to those of the sex-cells in respect to the presence and character of the plasmosome and in the form and distribution of the chromatin material. In many cases these nuclei are larger than those of the sex-cells; but many are found which are quite as small. These grade into the very large nuclei of the syncytial vitelline entoderm. At this stage the tissues of the body have taken on their dis- tinctive characters and their component cells have undergone in many cases a high degree of specialization. This emphasizes strongly the similarity between the sex-cells and the cells of the peripheral entoderm. As we pass back to earlier stages, such as those of 9.3 mm., 5.9 mm., ete., we still find this similarity between these types of cells, although the nuclei of all the body cells tend to show greater and greater similarity to one another in the earlier stages. For instance, it becomes quite difficult to distinguish the nuclei of the gut entoderm cells from those of the sex-cells. Even the nuclei of the Wolffian ducts show quite a close resemblance to the sex- cell nuclei during the early stages of development. 26 BENNET M. ALLEN There are two ways of viewing the similarity that the sex- cells of Amia and Lepidosteus bear to these cells of the peripheral entoderm. The well defined cells of the peripheral entoderm might be interpreted as sex-cells that have failed to migrate into. the lateral plates of mesoderm. It would then remain to give an explanation of the resemblance that the nuclei of these cells bear to the nuclei of the vitelline entoderm and to account for the intermediate types of nuclei by which they grade into one another. The other view of this problem is to consider sex-cells, periph- eral entoderm cells, and vitelline entoderm cells as slightly differ- entiated blastomeres, dating from an early stage of development, and to consider the similarity that they bear to the cells of the peripheral entoderm as due to the fact that they too have remained in a relatively slightly differentiated condition. This view seems the more probable of the two. It is by no means a new one, having been advanced by Nussbaum in 1880. It would be rash in the extreme to claim that the sex-cells might not differin some essential chromosomal characters from the cells of the peripheral entoderm which they so closely resemble, and yet careful study has failed as yet to show any real differences. While such differences may exist, these cells all have much in common with one another. In a recent paper by A. P. Dustin (07), this author gives a new view of the origin and movements of the sex-cells of Triton alpes- tris, Rana fusca and Bufo vulgaris. Since his view is so greatly at variance with my own, it will be necessary to review this work in some detail. He begins with an account of the sex-cells of Triton, and stress is laid upon this form, the author showing a strong tendency to bring his studies upon Rana and Bufo into line with his work upon Triton. He first recognizes the anlage of the sex-cells in the medial portions of the lateral plates of mesoderm in the 3 mm. larva of Triton. They occur only in the caudal half of the body and involve only those parts of the lateral plates of mesoderm lying medial to the Wolffian ducts. In the early stages these cells are - filled with large yolk spherules and do not greatly differ from the mesodermal cells that surround them. At a later period the sex- SEX-CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS 27 cell anlagen are pushed together in the median line, between the aorta and the roof of the archenteron. They fuse into a median longitudinal rod of cells lymg just above the dorsal root of the mesentery. By this time the sex-cells have lost their yolk material and have, to a large extent, assumed their definitive character. During these stages the number of the sex-cells has increased from one hundred to one hundred and fifty, occasional mitoses being observed. Soon after this stage of the median anlage (9 mm.) has been reached, the sex-cells migrate laterally to their final positions on each side of the root of the mesentery. At the stage of 14 mm., a large number of them degenerate, leav- ing only 60. A second generation of sex-cells soon begins to form from a source entirely different from the first, namely, from a transformation of ordinary peritoneal cells. Dustin is, in this regard, quite in accord with Bouin who expressed similar views regarding Rana. Dustin considers somewhat more briefly the corresponding stages in Rana and Bufo. Here he finds what he considers to be a substantially similar source of origin of the sex- cells, namely the medial borders of the lateral plates of meso- derm. An incredible feature of his account is the statement that the lateral sex-gland anlagen contain no sex-cell at all comparable in size to those of the yolk-filled entoderm, at the period imme- diately prior to their union in the median line. Dustin would have us believe, nevertheless, that these selfsame sex-cells show a close resembiance to the entoderm cells immediately after this union of the lateral anlagen, and this in spite of the fact that both of these stages of development are so close together that the embryos upon which he made these observations were all of the same length. His own statement is as follows: ‘“Au moment ot les ébauches paires séparées par une sorte de clivage des lames latérales du mésoblaste se sont rapprochées de la ligne médiane, les cellules sexuelles futures passent par une série de transformations cytologiques a la suite desquelles elles auront presque les caractéres des cellules de l’hypoblaste vitellin. Les dimensions des corps cellulaires augmentent dans de fortes proportions; les grains vitellins deviennent beaucoup plus nombreux et plus volumineux; ils se colorent mieux par orange G. Par le fait de l’augmentation du nombre des plaquettes 28 BENNET M. ALLEN vitellines, le noyau, souvent réfoulé 4 la périphérie de la cellule, pré- sente 4 sa surface une série d’encoches lui donnant un aspect hérissé (p. 476). He finds the number of sex-cells in Rana to increase gradually, from 75 in the 8 mm. stage to 90 in the 15 mm. stage, at which time sex-cells begin to be formed by the transformation of ordi- nary peritoneal cells. Simultaneously there is a degeneration of sex-cells which is overbalanced by this process of transforma- tion. In criticism of the above views I wish, first of all, to admit the possibility that Dustin may be perfectly correct in his account of the origin of the first line of sex-cells from the lateral plates of mesoderm in Triton. His account of this feature is circum- stantial and rather convincing. His account of a transformation of peritoneal cells into sex-cells during later stages is by no means so easy of acceptation. His figures to demonstrate this are not convincing. His counts of sex-cells are not given in any circumstantial detail and there is no indication as to whether the number of sex- cells recorded for any given stage is the result of a count of the sex-cells in one specimen or in several. One can not be blamed for being skeptical of the value of such counts if made upon but one specimen of each stage, when so few stages are chosen to demonstrate general processes of degeneration and new formation. Such a process can only be established by a count of the sex- cells of numerous specimens. I wish to express my complete disbelief in the first appearance of the sex-cells in the lateral plates of mesoderm of Rana and Bufo in the manner described by Dustin. In my paper upon ‘“‘An Important Period in the History of the Sex-Cells of Rana pipiens” (’07) I showed that the sex-cells migrate upward from the median dorsal portion of the gut entoderm at the time when the two lateral plates are pushing together to the median line in the process of forming the mesentery. Attention was called to the resemblance that this process bears to an actual pinching off of the mass of sex-cells by the inner margins of the plates of SEX-CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS 29 mesoderm. As pointed out in my article, the lateral plates of mesoderm, examined immediately before their approximation in the median line, show no cells which, as regards size or yolk con- tent, in the least compare with the sex-cells. It is especially gratifying to me to find support for my views in two recent papers. In one of these Kuschakewitsch (’08), referring to my paper of a few months before, stated: ‘‘Der Ver- fasser hat die Abschnitiring von Dotterzellen lings der dorsalene Sagittallinie des Dottersackes im hinteren Teile des Rumpfes beobachtet und die Theilname dieser Dotterzellen am Aufbau einer kompakten Mesenterial-anlage festgestellt, die Bouin (1900)) als “‘ebauche génitale primordiale’”’ aufgefasst hatte. Wie aus meiner Schilderung der entsprechenden Vorginge in der Normalreihe von Rana esculenta zu ersehen ist, kann ich die Angaben von Allen vollstandig bestitigen.”’ Another paper, appearing the same year (King, ’08), gives an account of the origin of the sex-cells in Bufo lentiginosus which is In complete accord with the above, and states: ‘‘Allen’s recent account of the origin of the sex-cells in Rana pipiens agrees essentially with what I have found in Bufo.” Miss King finds no evidence in the course of development of any transformation of peritoneal cells into sex-cells as asserted by several writers among whom may be mentioned Bouin and Dustin. This is quite in accord with my observations upon Chrysemys (’06) in which the sex-cells were traced to the period of sexual maturity without finding any evidence of such transformation. Miss May Jarvis (’08) in a paper upon ‘‘The Segregation of the Germ-Cells of Phrynosoma cornutum”’ (preliminary note) finds the sex-cells to take their origin in the entoderm of the vascular area on all sides of the embryo, even cranial to it, and notes a few in the region of the brain. Her results are in their main features confirmatory of my own work upon Chrysemys. The following quotation from her paper is self-explanatory: ‘‘Through the courtesy of Dr. Allen, I have been enabled to examine the more important stages in the migration of the germ-cells of Chrysemys; they are similar to my own material, as my conclu- 30 BENNET M. ALLEN sions, although differing from Dr. Allen’s in details of early dis- tribution and periods of migration, uphold his.”’ Rubaschkin (’08 and ’09) in a couple of recent papers, has shown that the sex-cells of the rabbit and guinea-pig are first to be found in the entoderm at some distance on each side of the hind-gut and that they follow a path almost identical with that followed by the sex-cells of Chrysemys. These references to the coincidence of the views of other recent writers with my own are made to show that I do not stand alone in placing emphasis upon the entodermal origin of the sex-cells in the vertebrates. At the same time I wish, however, to disclaim any intention of making at this time a sweeping claim that the sex-cells of all vetebrates arise in the entoderm. Wheeler’s work on Petromyzon (99) shows that they may be included in the mesoderm at the time when that layer is split off from the entoderm. He has, however, pointed out their similarity to the entoderm cells and their dis- similarity to the mesodermal cells among which they lie. I do not seek to discredit the work of Dustin upon the sex- cells of Triton; although his statements about the origin of the sex-cells in Rana and Bufo strike me as being very far from the mark, because they are so radically at variance with not only my own observations, but with those of King and Kuschake- witsch as well. Dustin, in his attitude toward the work of others, seems to consider that there must be a strict uniformity in all forms in both the place of origin and in the movements of the sex- cells. He has apparently studied this problem first in Triton and at some length. His results, probably correct for that form, he has attempted to apply to Rana and Bufo as well, undeterred by the difficulties to which attention was called above. Dustin is quite ready flippantly to dismiss my work upon Chrysemys, because the results there expressed did not coincide with the views that he had formed regarding the origin of the sex-cells in Triton, Rana, and Bufo.! The process of migration through the entoderm is so clear in Chrysemys, that it is unmistakable. The sex-cells are not only characterized by their larger size, 1See postscript. SEX-CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS 31 definite, rounded outlines and fine chromatin network, but by their large yolk content and the fact that they do not divide during the stages in dispute. _ The sex-cells are migratory to a high degree. The path and time of their migration may vary greatly within a given group of animals, as illustrated by the case of Amia and Lepidosteus. While in the forms that I have studied they are first to be ob- served in the entoderm, I am quite open to conviction that in other forms they may migrate from this layer into the potential mesoderm before the two layers are separated, as shown by Wheeler in Petromyzon. It is even conceivable that they may lie, from the very beginning of development, in material destined to form mesoderm—that they may never have existed among cells actually or potentially entodermal. The more recent de- velopment of our work along these lines, however, most cer- tainly tends to show that it is usual among the vertebrates for the sex-cells to first appear in the entoderm. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS 1. The sex-cells of both Amia and Lepidosteus have their origin in the entoderm. In Amia they are first distinguishable in the peripheral entoderm from the lateral angle of the subgermi- nal cavity to the anlage of the blood cells. In Lepidosteus they are first seen in the ventral and lateral portions of the gut-entoderm, although analogy with Chryse- mys leads us to assume that they may have migrated through the entoderm to these regions from more lateral anlagen, similar to those from which the sex-cells of Amia arise. In both forms, the sex-cells arise only in the region of the hind-gut. None were found at any considerable distance in front of it. 2. The path of sex-cell migration in Amia carries them out of the peripheral entoderm directly into the overlying lateral plates of mesoderm, along which they travel, to come to rest near the medial edges of the latter. These portions are destined to join above the intestine to form the mesentery. As the splanchnic and somatic layers of the lateral plates of mesoderm Sy BENNET M. ALLEN split to form the coelome, the sex-cells adhere to the somatic layer at a point near the root of the developing mesentery—the sex-gland anlage. They later sink into the peritoneum of this region, which afterwards proliferates to form a long ridge—the sex-gland. Very few sex-cells fall by the wayside in this migra- tion, practically all reaching the sex-glands. 3. In Lepidosteus the sex-cells, first seen in the ventral and lateral portions of the gut-entoderm, migrate to occupy a position in the dorsal portion of it, from which they pass dorsally into the loose mesenchyme that forms the substance of the developing mesentery. As the mesentery becomes more narrow and com- pact, owing to the increase in size of the body cavity, the sex- cells migrate to its dorsal portion and laterally to the sex-gland anlagen. Roughly speaking, one-half of the total number of sex-cells reach the sex-gland anlagen, the remainder being dis- tributed between the intestinal entoderm, the mesodermal layers of the intestine, the mesentery and the tissues at and dorsal to the root of the intestine. 4. The number of the sex-cells in Amia and Lepidosteus is a matter of individual variation for those periods of development during which they do not undergo division. The average number in Amia, after the period when the migration from the entoderm to the mesoderm has been completed, up to the latest stage in which counts were made, was found to be 75. In Lepidosteus it was 765, an average of 636 of these occurring in the mesoderm. 5. There is a close resemblance between the nuclei of the sex- cells and of the yolk cells. This is especially true of certain cells of the peripheral entoderm, although these grade by gradual transition forms into the large nuclei of the vitelline entoderm. This is probably due to the fact that both types of ¢ells have undergone but little differentiation in the course of development. POSTSCRIPT A few days before proof of this article came to hand, I received, through the courtesy of the author, a reprint of an article by A. P. Dustin, entitled, ‘‘L’Origine et Evolution des Gonocytes chez SEX-CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS 33 les Reptiles,’ (Archives, de Biologie, 1910). This article deals with the origin of the sex-cells in Chrysemys marginata, the form which served as a subject for my own work of 1906. As noted above, Dustin in his paper ‘‘Recherches sur l’origine des gono- eytes chez les Amphibiens”’ 1907, exhibited scant respect for my work on the sex-cells of Chrysemys. It was, no doubt, in large part, this feeling that prompted him to repeat my work. While he, no doubt, expected to find in this form a confirmation of his previously expressed views, he is led to substantiate completely my statements regarding the entodermal origin of the sex-cells. He traces them along the same migration path that I demon- strated four years before. For all this he now gives me full credit and support; but takes issue with my statements regarding the distribution of the sex-cells prior to their migration into the em- bryo, and, furthermore, claims to have-evidence to show that there is a new formation of sex-cells, due to a transformation of ordinary peritoneal cells. These points of controversy and certain other minor ones can not be considered here, but I promise a full discussion of them in another place. I may say that I am fully prepared to maintain my views upon all of the points at issue. On my part, the work that I have carried on upon Necturus since this paper was written, has given me results quite similar to those at which Dustin arrived in his work upon Triton. I may say that preliminary studies have convinced me that the sex-cells arise in an essentially similar manner in Amblystoma. We then see that, in all three of these urodeles, the sex-cells arise from the inner edges of the lateral plates of mesoderm. I owe it to myself to call attention to the fact that I have at no time disputed the accuracy of Dustin’s work upon Triton. While the evidence seems to me quite clear that this is the usual, if not the universal, mode of origin of the sex-cells among the uro- dele amphibians, I am ready to maintain with equal vigor the entodermal origin of the sex-cells in the aruran amphibians, at the same time admitting the possibility that exceptions to this apparent rule may be discovered. I do not feel however, that Dustin has proved his case in Rana fusca and Bufo vul- 34 BENNET M. ALLEN garis. The discussion of his work above gives the reasons for my position in this matter. Not only does it seem probable that the sex-cells arise during early stages in the mesoderm of the urodeles, but this seems to be the case in the teleosts as well. The most recent and satisfac- tory support of this view is contained in the excellent paper of Dr. Gideon 8. Dodds upon the‘‘Segregation of the Germ-Cells of the Teleost, Lophius,’’ in the Journal of Morphology, 1910. Here again, we must urge caution in forming a sweeping general- ization from the facts thus far at hand. There is certainly a wide field for work in the study of the origin of the sex-cells of the vertebrates. It is a subject which should be approached in a spirit of broad toleration for the views of others. The sex- cells are cells that retain their early embryonic character after the somatic cells have undergone specialization. It seems, from a number of observations made by different authors, that in most forms the sex-cells first make their appearance in the entoderm—the germ layer whose cells appear to maintain their primitive embryonic characters longer than do those of the other germ layers. At the same time, unimpeachable evidence shows that this apparently logical process is not universal, and I have at no time claimed that it is. The sex-cells, as shown by Nuss- baum, Eigenmann, Beard and others, do not belong to any one germ layer, but are, in a sense at least, independent of the som- atic tissues. They are free to follow their own path in their travels from the place of origin to the sex-gland anlagen, where they finally come to rest. While this path is no doubt identi- cal or similar in closely allied species and in more general divi- sions of the vertebrates, I do not feel that we are justified in at- tributing a high degree of phylogenetic importance to the different steps in the migration paths through which they travel. I wish to express my indebtedness for the work of our depart- mental artists, Misses Hedge and Battey. I am indebted to Miss Hedge for the execution of diagrams 1-6 and for figs. 9, 10, 14, 15, 21, 22, 25 and 26; and to Miss Battey for figs. f1, 12, 13, 23, and 24. The remaining drawings are my own. SEX-CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS 30 BIBLIOGRAPHY ALLEN, BENNET M. 1906 Origin of the sex-cells of Chrysemys. Anat. Anz. Bd. 29. 1907a 300. 11 Transverse section through the hind-gut of a 17 mm. larva of Lepidosteus osseus. X 300. SEX CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS mn PLATE. BENNET M, ALLEN >. ERRATA Gelatin plates 1, 2 and 3 should have been numbered 3, 4 and 5 “tiie. \ Wolff. | JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL, 22, NO. 1 PLATE 3 EXPLANATION OF FIGURES 7 'Tranavarea cantinn thranah tha hindiaut af an @ BR mm _lawra «Af T .-:1-- SEX CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS BENNET M, ALLEN PLATE 1 ss es ¢ TEE By he : NSE S 5 @ —Gut End. — JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL, 22, NO.1 i : f J a) - tip i tha > aie Bs = y™ ; Us PLATE 4 EXPLANATION OF FIGURES 12 Transverse section of the rudimentary sex-glands of a 24 mm. larva of Lepidosteus osseus. > 300. 13 Transverse section of a sex-gland of a 110 mm. specimen of Lepidosteus osseus. X 300. 14 Part of a transverse section of a 17 mm. larva of Lepidosteus osseus, show- ing the reduced vitelline mass. 15 Detail drawing of a portion of the vitelline mass of the above section. X 300. 16 Transverse section through the region immediately lateral to the pos- terior portion of the sub-germinal cavity of a 147 hr. embryo of Amia calva. X 300. This shows the place of origin of the sex-cells. 17 Section passing similarly through another specimen of the same stage of Amia calva. X 300. One sex-cell shown as it is pushing up into the mesoderm. 18 Transverse section through the hind-gut of a 6 mm. larva of Amia calva. x 300. 19 Transverse section through the hind-gut of a 7 mm. larva of Amia calva. x 300. SEX-CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS ens 3 BENNET M. ALLEN G Sky So “$4. ye! Sw. BI, 6 Periph. End, _Lat. Mes. JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL, 22, NO, 1 by oe a 7A eK 7 1 (agin. FARIA a" ; PLATE 5 EXPLANATION OF FIGURES 20 Transverse section through the hind-gut of a 9.1 mm. larva of Amia calva. x 300. 21 Transverse section through the hind-gut and sex-gland anlage of an 11.4 mm. larva of Amia calva. > 300. 22 Transverse section through the young sex-glands of a 16 mm. larva of Amia calva. X 300. 23 Sketch to show the orientation of the sex-glands in a 40 mm. specimen of Amia calva as seen in transverse section. 24 Detail drawing of the sex-gland as seen in above sketch. X 300. 25 Drawing to show the orientation of the much reduced vitelline mass of an 11.4 mm. larva of Amia calva. 26 Detail drawing of a portion of the vitelline mass indicated above. This shows the resemblance that certain cells of the peripheral entoderm show to sex- cells of this stage. XX 300. SEX-CELLS OF AMIA AND LEPIDOSTEUS PLATE 3 BENNET M. ALLEN Sw. B. 23 JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL, 22, NO.1 eae a \ ’ ’ ' ¥ os r A ever > “at -s i _ ai) ' AA vst i] a ‘ © ~ ap > ‘ ‘ * a f ' i 1 | y . of é 4 ~ "1 a 2 i 4 4 aE : i - 4 ad nf et i. #a - LP . af i ee il 4 ¥ i ; ul 4 we Le yy ¥ Pl ‘ ih) i dA t } * ee eS % ’ a. q a - te m % 1 ‘ é ' ' a4 bd ¥ 1 ‘ + i 5 - Ve ‘ q * ’ \ ae y | ~ ges - ap oo? ie eh A” an’ ' ' Aa 1 a! a ‘ } ini “ 68 a a ete xy ie) a 5 * . ™ re flies Be bind 4 he OR Rihel : es) , ' ey , t a’ ¥ ‘ ee - s Wee y oe z f) FL > Nae Sahat i] POA re i THE CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF THE GUINEA PIG LEO LOEB From the Laboratory of Experimental Pathology of the University of Pennsylvania, and from the Pathological Laboratory of the Barnard Skin and Cancer Hospital, St. Louis, Mo. In the course of an experimental investigation into the causes of the cyclic changes taking place in the uterine mucosa and into the factors underlying the formation of the maternal placenta in mammals, we observed that cyclic changes in the structure of the ovary correspond to the uterine cycle. It has of course been known that at certain times ovulation takes place in the mamma- lian ovary, and furthermore, changes have been described as occur- ring in the ovarian follicles of certain mammals in connection with copulation and during pregnancy; but the cyclic changes taking place in the ovary quite independently of copulation and of pregnancy and merely dependent upon ovulation have, as far as we are aware, not yet been recognized. While we know of no publication dealing with the cyclic changes in the ovaries in general, a valuable study of the changes taking place during pregnancy in two species of Insectivores and in one species of Lemurid has been made by C. H. Stratz.1. This author comes to the conclusion that in the period following copulation all the ovarian follicles become atretic; that during pregnancy small follicles are formed but also become atretic before they can develop; that only towards the end of pregnancy the follicles begin to grow to a considerable size, and that they reach the stage of maturity during the puerperium. Stratz was not in a position to determine in an exact manner the time elapsed since the last copulation of the animals the ova- 1C. H. Stratz: der geschlechtsreife Siugethiereierstock. Haag. 1898. 37 38 LEO LOEB ries of which he examined. He also seems to have examined a relatively very limited number of ovaries of animals during the different stages of pregnancy, and furthermore he studied only certain parts of each ovary. A methodical study of ovaries of non-pregnant animals was not undertaken. While his obser- vation that after copulation all follicles become atretic is ap- proximately, but not altogether correct, as far as its general validity is concerned, in the guinea pig the processes taking place in the ovaries during the subsequent stages differ from the con- ditions described by Stratz in the case of Tupaja, Sorex and Tarsius. Furthermore Stratz does not recognize the essential factor upon which the cyclic changes in the ovaries depend. The con- clusions in the last chapter of his publication show this clearly. He summarizes as follows: If we find all follicles atretic, the animal has been pregnant. If at the same time a new corpus luteum is present, we have to deal with an early stage of preg- nancy. If we detect some normal follicles, besides numerous atretic follicles and a new corpus luteum, we have to consider a puerperal condition of the animal. A large number of atretic besides a few normal follicles also suggests a puerperal state. These general conclusions are not justified; the changes of the follicles do not, as Stratz assumes, depend upon pregnancy, and if we should attempt to use the criteria given by Stratz in the case of guinea pigs and mammals in general we would be liable frequently to make mistaken diagnoses. Notwithstanding, these necessary criticisms, the work of Stratz is very valuable and it advanced to a considerable extent our knowledge of the ovaries. Since his publication no more detailed investigation into the processes taking place in the ovaries under various conditions has appeared, as far as we are aware. Within recent years, how- ever, the question has been raised whether a new ovulation can take place during pregnancy. We limited our investigations to the study of the ovary of the guinea pig. We examined several hundred pairs of ovaries of animals in which the period of the sexual cycle at which the ovaries CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF GUINEA PIG 39 were obtained had been ascertained. In each case the entire ovary was cut into serial sections. During the progress of our work-new problems arose and an accident made it impossible for us to re-examine all our material in order to answer several questions which were raised at a later stage of our investigation. We especially regret our in- ability to determine the existence of follicles which were ready to rupture, in certain cases in which these data would have been of considerable interest. Our work is therefore incomplete in some respects. We expect, however, very soon to be able to supplement our present work, wherever necessary. OVARIES OF GUINEA PIGS IN THE LAST STAGE OF PREGNANCY The condition of the ovaries of a guinea pig in the last days of pregnancy is as follows: there are small, medium sized and large follicles without degeneration of granulosa cells. In other large follicles various stages of granulosa degeneration are pre- sent. Many follicles show further advanced stages of atresia, in which connective tissue grows into the follicular cavity. Especially numerous are the last stages of atresia in which the zona pellucida is directly surrounded by very cellular connective tissue. Mitoses are seen in the granulosa cells of the well pre- served follicles. We also find here a few mature follicles which are characterized by an increase in cytoplasm of the granulosa cells. These follicles are large; their cavity is very wide. The nuclei of the granulosa cells are not as densely packed in these follicles as in the ordinary large follicles, this peculiarity being due to the marked development of the cytoplasm. They can be easily recognized in sections stained by haemotoxylin and eosin, inasmuch as they appear stained more reddish, in contradistinc- tion to the ordinary large follicles in which the blue color of the nuclei predominates, while in the mature follicles the red stain of the cytoplasm is a distinguishing feature. In these mature fol- licles the number of mitoses is very much smaller than in the ordinary large follicles. With the increase in the quantity of cytoplasm and the relative decrease in the nuclear material, 40 LEO LOEB the cell proliferation is diminished. The number of mitoses is usually very small, or mitoses may be absent in such follicles. Another characteristic feature is the relative lack of degeneration of the granulosa in these follicles. While the ordinary large follicles degenerate in the large majority of cases, the granu- losa cells becoming karyorrhectic, as soon as the follicle attains a certain size; the mature follicles are very much more resist- ant. The changes in the granulosa cells described above and which lead to the transformation of an ordinary large follicle into a mature red-staining follicle, and simultaneously to a de- crease in cell proliferation of the granulosa and to a diminished karyorrhexis of the granulosa cells, probably produces a decrease in cell metabolism, and this decrease in cell metabolism stands perhaps in a causal relation to the decrease in cell multiplication and to the greater resistance of the granulosa cell. A slight de- gree of degeneration of the granulosa may even occur in the ma- ture red-staining follicles; a few of the central granulosa cells may degenerate; and in one case we observed even a fargoing degeneration of the granulosa in a mature follicle. It becomes therefore probable that these mature follicles also degenerate, if ovulation does not take place. This transformation of an ordinary large follicle into a mature follicle takes place only to a limited extent; the large majority of the follicles degenerate before they have reached the stage of full maturity. This holds good even in the case of guinea pigs before delivery, in which a rupture of follicles will soon take place. The corpora lutea of pregnancy which, at the time at which we examined the ovaries, were approximately fifty-six to sixty-four daysold and which had formed soon after copulation, show already some retrogressive changes in the lutein cells. A considerable number of the vessels entering the corpora lutea have a very thick . wall consisting of several rows of cells. A large number of the vessels, however, have merely an endothelial lining. In many of the vessels no lumen is visible, the circulation through the corpus luteum being evidently not very active; some of the capillary vessels have, however, a widely open lumen. The quantity of the connective tissue in the centre of the corpus luteum is small, CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF GUINEA PIG 41 on account of the previous proliferation of lutein cells which en- croached more and more upon the space originally filled by the connective tissue. The corpora lutea are large. The lutein cells show signs of degeneration; they are finely vacuolar and may have a foamy appearance; a certain number of cells take less eosin and appear therefore pale. Many cells have a sharply defined, red- staining outline. The nuclei also show changes; they are frequent- quently deformed, indentated; or they are round, vesicular, but stain less with haematoxylin; they appear somewhat karyolytic. Mitoses could not be seen in the lutein cells. The degree of retro- gressive changes may vary in different corpora lutea even in the same ovary. We see therefore that even before delivery and before a new ovulation has taken place, degenerative changes set in in the cor- pora lutea, and it accords with these retrogressive changes that mitoses are absent or at least very rare in such corpora lutea. Besides these corpora lutea of pregnancy we may find in such ovaries ‘yellow bodies’ representing the last stage of retrogression of corpora lutea. In thecorpora lutea which were transformed into such yellow bodies, degeneration must have set in approximately sixty to sixty-five days ago. These ‘yellow bodies’ have the fol- lowing structure: In their centre and periphery we find hyaline connective tissue; between these two zones of hyaline connective tissue a relatively small number of degenerated large lutein cells is enclosed, in which, during the process of retrogression, a large amount of yellow pigment was produced. OVARIES OF GUINEA PIGS WITHIN TWO DAYS AFTER DELIVERY In the period directly following delivery the condition of the ovaries, as far as follicles and corpora lutea are concerned, is approximately the same as in the period preceding it. The growth and degeneration of the follicles still continue to take place, and in follicles in which the granulosa has completely or almost com- pletely degenerated an ingrowth of connective tissue and complete atresia of the follicles occur. The retrogressive changes in the corpora lutea also progress, but at a slow rate, and on the whole the JOURNAU OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 1 42? LEO LOEB corpora lutea are not very different from those found in the preced- ing period. This description holds good for instance for ovaries of a guinea pig extirpated ten minutes after complete delivery. Soon after delivery (usually within a few hours) the guinea pig is ready for a new copulation and ovulation, and after ovulation changes take place in the follicles which will be described later. The corpora lutea of the preceding pregnancy undergo no very marked changes within the next two days after delivery, although vacuolization of the lutein cells and degenerative changes in the nuclei show probably a slight advance; the lutein cells do not stain as well with eosin and appear pale. If copulation take place soon after delivery, a rupture of the mature follicles occurs within the succeeding six or ten hours; butif copulation be prevented by isolat- ing the female, ovulation frequently occurs, but does not need to take place within thirty-six hours after delivery. In several cases in which an actual copulation was prevented, in which how- ever the male was in contact with the female for a short time after delivery, the rupture of the follicles and the formation of new corpora lutea took place in the usual way. The changes inthe new corpora lutea within the first two days after delivery are the same as those described in a previous paper.? In three cases the lower part of the uterus or the vagina of guinea pigs were tied completely or incompletely towards the end cf pregnancy. This procedure led to the death of the fetuses, fol- lowed by expulsion of the dead fetuses in a case in which the occlu- sion had been incomplete. In another case the animal was killed by chloroform six days after the application of the ligature, and the fetuses were found dead; furthermore autolysis of the placenta had set in. In these cases especially the periphery of the corpora lutea of the preceding pregnancy showed vacuolization of the lute tein cells. The nuclei were shrunken or somewhat chromatolytic. Notwithstanding the degenerative changes visible in the corpora lutea, no new ovulation had taken place. From these and other observations it follows that delivery as such does not lead to far- 2 The formation of the corpus luteum in the guinea pig. Journal American Medical Association, February 10, 1906. CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF GUINEA PIG 43 going changes in the ovaries; that merely a slow progress takes place in changes which had set inbefore delivery. We furthermore see that without copulation a spontaneous ovulation does not need to take place after delivery, notwithstanding the degenerative changes in the corpora lutea; that ovulation can, however, occur without copulation, and this seems to be the rule, if the male had been in contact with the female for some time after delivery, a copulation having been made impossible during this period of contact. OVARIES OF NON-PREGNANT GUINEA PIGS IN THE PERIOD DIRECTLY PRECEDING OVULATION This description applies to ovaries of guinea pigs which had copulated a few hours previously, in which an ovulation had how- ever not yet taken place—ovulation usually taking place approxi- mately six to ten hours after copulation. In another case we examined the ovaries of a guinea pig that was ready for copulation (‘in heat’) in which, however, an actual copulation had been pre- vented by occluding the vagina by means of a strip of plaster. The condition of the follicles in these ovaries was similar to the condition found in ovaries preceding and immediately following delivery; we find good follicles of small, medium and large size; mitoses are present in the granulosa of such follicles. The majority of the large follicles however show more or less degeneration of the granulosa, with the exception of the few large follicles which progressed to complete maturity; they showed the cytoplasmic changes described above. In these as well as in some other well preserved large follicles the theca interna appears somewhat hyperemic. We also find the various stages of connective tissue ingrowth and of the subsequent diminution in the size of the folli- cles (‘connective tissue atresia’) which we described in the case of the other ovaries. In this case we do not find corpora lutea of a preceding pregnancy, but corpora lutea of an ordinary ovarian period, not accompanied by pregnancy. These corpora lutea are much smaller than those of pregnancy; their lutein cells show vacuolization, indicating the beginning of retrogressive changes. Notwithstanding these retrogressive changes an occasional mitosis 44 LEO LOEB can still be found in lutein cells. The corpora lutea of the second last ovulation have in the meantime been transformed into yellow bodies. Processes of degeneration have therefore set in in the corpora lutea of non pregnant as well as of pregnant guinea pigs before ovulation. These beginning degenerative changes do however not prevent the occurrence of a few mitoses in the cor- pora lutea of previously not copulated animals, while in the de- generating corpora lutea of pregnancy we have so far not been able to detect the presence of mitoses in lutein cells. OVARIES OF GUINEA PIGS WITHIN THREE AND ONE HALF DAYS AFTER OVULATION In connection with ovulation certain far reaching changes take place in the ovaries. All follicles, with exception of very small ones, degenerate. These changes set in with ovulation, or they may perhaps start somewhat earlier, namely, simultaneously with those processes that bring about ovulation. As we have pointed out above, the general degeneration of the follicular granulosa which we find directly after ovulation cannot yet be observed before ovulation. This sudden degenerative process is quite independent of copulation; we found that it can be produced through ovulation without a preceding copulation. We discovered experimental means through which we can produce a spontaneous ovulation without a preceding copulation. Such an ovulation is followed or accompanied by the same degeneration of the granu- losa. Moreover, if we keep a number of female guinea pigs separ- ated from the males and if we examine their ovaries after various periods of isolation, we find occasionally ovaries in which the rupture of follicles had taken place a few days before. In this case also the typical follicular degeneration takes place indepen- dently of a preceding copulation. Six and a half hours after a preceding copulation the ovaries showed, besides the presence of newly ruptured follicles, the follow- ing changes in the follicles: All, with the exception of very small follicles, show granulosa degeneration; in the large majority of the follicles almost the whole granulosa is found in a process of degen- eration. We also find follicles in the process of connective tissue CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF GUINEA PIG 45 atresia. Similar conditions are found in other ovaries at the same period. Twenty-two hours after copulation some granulosa cells are found degenerated even in small follicles, (follicles having a small cavity); these degenerated granulosa cells are dissolved. Similar changes take place in ovaries of guinea pigs in which ovulation followed delivery. In a guinea pig in which copulation took place two hours after delivery and in which the ovaries were examined seventeen hours after copulation, only a few quite small follicles without granulosa degeneration were found; in the large and also in the medium sized follicles much granulosa degenera- tion had taken place, the central granulosa cells degenerating first. Almost no entirely good follicles were left. As soon as the interna becomes exposed, phagocytic cells (rounded off interna cells) penetrate into the follicular cavity and these cells take up debris of the granulosa. The degeneration of the granulosa cells is as usual followed by ingrowth of connective tissue. In other ovaries the granulosa may be degenerated to a great extent, but some remnants may still be left. Especially the granulosa cells of the discus proligerus survive usually the rest of the granulosa. We find of course various stages of connective tissue atresia besides the degeneration of the granulosa. From these observations it follows that the onset of degeneration of the granulosa must be extremely rapid. If we extirpate the corpora lutea, from two to eight days after copulation a new spontaneous rupture of follicles takes place in most cases approximately from thirteen to fifteen days after the previous ‘copulation, even if the female had been kept entirely isolated during the whole period following the extirpation of the corpora lutea. This early spontaneous ovulation is accompanied by the same follicular degeneration which we described above. It is an interesting problem, whether an artificially produced rupture of a follicle, with the subsequent development of a corpus luteum, is accompanied by the same acute follicular degeneration. Several years ago we made experiments in which we pricked or cut the surface of ovaries of guinea pigs which were either ‘in heat,’ without however having copulated, or which copulated a few hours previously, or which had in some cases copulated from three to six 46 LEO LOEB days previously. In only one case did we find a young corpus luteum the origin of which could reasonably be attributed to the cutting of the ovary and to the artificial rupture of a follicle. In this case an animal had been used which showed the first symp- toms characteristic for the period of heat. Three days after the cuts had been made the ovaries were examined. One young corpus luteum was found in the cortex of the ovary. Blood and connective tissue were found in the center of the corpus luteum; connective tissue and vessels grew into the corpus luteum, which was very small. In this ovary we found good follicles of small medium and large size; we also found large follicles with begin- ning and with further advanced granulosa degeneration, and with beginning ingrowth of connective tissue. In as much as in no case of spontaneous rupture the follicles were found in a similar condition at that period after the rupture, it is very probable that we have in this case to deal with an artificial rupture of follicles and that such an artificial rupture of follicles 1s not accompanied by the rapid degeneration of the follicular granulosa. On the basis of our previous results we can easily understand, why in all probability we succeeded in one case only in causing an artificial rupture of a follicle. Suchanexperiment does not promise to be successful, unless we have the chance of opening a mature follicle, and such an opportunity exists only at periods of very short duration. In these ovaries we find usually two or three generations of cor- pora lutea; namely: 1. The young corpora lutea, developing in the recently rup- tured follicles. These corpora lutea we have described elsewhere in their development up to the sixth day. 2. Corpora lutea that had formed at the time of the preceding ovulation, which had not been followed by pregnancy in female guinea pigs which had been kept separated from males. These corpora lutea are therefore in all probability approximately nine- teen to twenty-eight daysold. They show signs of beginning retro- gression. Their lutein cells are more or less vacuolar, especially in the periphery, where the vacuolization usually begins; gradually the vacuolization progresses to the central part. In the center of CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF GUINEA PIG 47 the corpus luteum we find a relatively small amount of fibrous tissue. We not only find capillary vessels but also vessels the wall of which consists of two coats penetrating the corpus luteum. These corpora lutea begin to shrink very soon, and three days after the new rupture they are usually smaller than immediately after the ovulation. Notwithstanding the degenerative processes which are apparent in these corpora lutea, it is not uncommon to to find still mitoses in the lutein cells of such corpora lutea within the first twenty hours after the new rupture of follicles has taken place. At a later period mitoses were not seen in this series. The mitoses appear in the relatively well preserved, but they may be present even in somewhat vacuolar lutein cells. It is possible that occasionally mitoses occur also in endothelial cells of the capil- laries. © 3. The third generation is represented by yellow hyaline bodies. They are the remnants of corpora lutea that formed forty or more days ago. If we examine ovaries of young guinea pigs, two and a half to three months old, we may find only the first, or the first and second generations of corpora lutea, but yellow bodies may be lacking. We see therefore that preceding and following the rupture of new follicles in non-pregnant animals, processes of degeneration have begun in the corpora lutea of the preceding ovulation, and that notwithstanding such processes of degeneration, mitoses may occur in such corpora lutea for a short period following the new ovulation. These corpora lutea which are not accompanied by pregnancy are much smaller than the corpora lutea of pregnancy and they shrink more rapidly. The absolute diminution in size is more rapid than in the retrogressing corpora lutea of a preced- ing pregnancy. Concerning the relative rapidity of retrogression (the percentage decrease in size, the full size of the corpora lutea being taken as the standard), we cannot make any definite state- ment, not having carried out any measurements. The mode of retrogression is the same in both ordinary corpora lutea and in those of pregnancy. The vacuolization begins in the periphery, where it becomes most marked, and from here it proceeds into the interior of the corpus luteum. 48 LEO LOEB OVARIES OF A GUINEA PIG APPROXIMATELY THREE TO FOUR DAYS AFTER ABORTION In one case the ovaries of a guinea pig were examined which on examination had previously been found to be in a well developed stage of pregnancy, but which had aborted about three to four days previously. The four corpora lutea showed signs of degener- ation. The lutein cells were vacuolar in the periphery, in the cen- ter the cells stained pale red with eosin, the vesicular nuclei showed a diminution in the amount of chromatin. The cell out- lines were very sharp, staining red with eosin. In the center there was dense connective tissue and many blood vessels had very thick walls. Follicles of small, medium and large size, with well preserved granulosa, were present. A few mature, red staining follicles with- out mitoses or degeneration in the granulosa were also found. Many other large immature follicles showed various stages of granulosa degeneration. There were of course also present various stages of connective tissue atresia. We see therefore that abortion is not followed by or associated with marked changes in the follicles. Whether the mature follicles which we found in these ovaries matured as a result of abortion, or whether the mature follicles were present before the onset of abor- tion, we cannot state with certainty, although it is more probable that maturation of the follicles followed abortion. We also note the beginning retrogressive changes in the corpora lutea. But in this case also we cannot be sure that the degenerative processes had not set in before the abortion had commenced. OVARIES OF GUINEA PIGS FOUR TO SEVEN AND ONE HALF DAYS AFTER OVULATION Six days after an ovulation we find in the ovaries on the whole the following condition of the follicles: There are well preserved follicles of small and medium size, with mitoses in the granulosa cells. A limited amount of granulosa degeneration is found only in rare instances. In such follicles mitoses are absent or their CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF GUINEA PIG 49 number is decreased. Follicles in an advanced state of connective tissue atresia are frequent. The character of the follicles at this period-of the sexual cycle is the same in cases in which the last ovulation was preceded by delivery, in which, therefore, in the previous period of the sexual cycle a pregnancy was present, and in other cases in which the previous period of the sexual cycle had not been complicated by pregnancy. We see therefore that within six days quite small follicles, possessing only a very small follicular cavity, grow and reach medium size. During this period the granulosa of medium sized follicles did not degenerate, and no large follicles had as yet developed. We find therefore principally, besides the follicles with preserved granulosa, follicles in an advanced state of con- nective.tissue atresia. Six days after ovulation we find the corpora lutea of the last generation (corpora lutea six days old, asfollows: The center of the corpus luteum is filled by a more or less loose connective tissue. Mitoses are present in the lutein cells as well as in the endothelial cells of the capillaries. Almost all the vessels have a capillary character. They penetrate into the central connective tissue. At that period vessels with two coats (intima and muscle coat of the media) can be observed for the first time, although they become more frequent at a somewhat later period. In guinea pigs in which a pregnancy and delivery preceded the - last ovulation, the corpus luteum of the preceding pregnancy shows marked signs of degeneration. Especially the peripheral cells are frequently coarsely, while the more centrally situated cells are more finely vacuolar; but even in the latter the proto- plasm stains less with eosin and the nuclei are slightly chromatoly- tic; the cells appear distinctly pale. The vessels are very thick and at certain places in the periphery the connective tissue of the neigh- borhood seems to begin to grow into the peripheral parts of the corpus luteum. The ordinary corpora lutea of the second generation (not accom- panied by pregnancy) show marked vacuolization; they diminish in size and in one case yellow pigment developed in a few of the vacuolar cells. Therefore in the course of five to eight days 50 LEO LOEB since the beginning of degeneration the retrogressive changes have much advanced. The retrogressing corpora lutea of pregnancy of the corresponding generation are much larger at this period than the ordinary corpora lutea. In a certain number of ovaries we also find a further (third) generation of retrogressing corpora lutea, represented by yellow bodies. One corpus luteum deserves especial mention. In an ovary of a guinea pig which had ovulated approximately four and a half days before, five corpora lutea were found, four of whichshowing the typical structure. In the fifth of these corpora lutea, however, the lutein cells were arranged in the shape of glandular ducts. This condition has perhaps been produced through a dissolu- tion of the central cells. Otherwise the corpora lutea in this ovary were normal. The same typical changes in the follicles noticed in ovaries of this period after a preceding copulation and ovulation are also found in ovaries in which a spontaneous ovulation took place inde- pendently of a preceding copulation. As we stated above, such a spontaneous ovulation can be produced through an early exci- sion of the corpora lutea. The same follicular changes take place also in pregnant animals in which, through an excision of the cor- pora lutea about six to eight days after copulation, a spontaneous ovulation is produced approximately thirteen to fifteen days after the beginning of pregnancy, without the pregnancy being interrupted. We see therefore that these cyclical changes in the ovaries are essentially independent of copulation and of pregnancy and are directly connected only with ovulation. OVARIES OF GUINEA PIGS SEVEN AND ONE HALF TO EIGHT AND ONE HALF DAYS AFTER OVULATION At this stage of the sexual cycle we find good follicles of small, medium and large size with no, or only very little, granulosa degeneration. We also find follicles in connective tissue atresia. We see therefore that in approximately eight days follicles originally CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF GUINEA PIG ol very small have reacheda large size. The new (eight days old) corpora lutea grow actively during this period and show frequent mitoses in lutein cells. The corpora lutea of the preceding ovula- tion (second generation) continues to shrink and show marked vacuolization of the lutein cells. If the second last ovulation were accompanied by pregnancy, the retrogressing corpora lutea were still larger. The third generation of corpora lutea was represented by atre- tic yellow bodies the age of which varied approximately between forty-eight and ninety-five days. OVARIES OF GUINEA PIGS TEN TO ELEVEN DAYS AFTER OVULATION We find good follicles without granulosa degeneration of small, medium and large size, besides various stages of granulosa degener- ation and of connective tissue atresia, early stages with beginning ingrowth of connective tissue included. In the granulosa of well preserved follicles mitoses are present as usual. At this stage —ten days after ovulation—the ovary presents again its normal aspect. The follicles have grown to a large size and undergo the ordinary retrogressive changes. The ten to eleven days old corpora lutea are well developed; in the centre a relatively small amount of connective tissue is present. Mitoses in the lu- tein cells are usually frequent; they occur perhaps also in endothe- lial cells of capillaries. The large majority of the vessels have a capillary character, but occasionally a vessel is seen with a double coat of cells. Marked signs of degeneration are absent, but a few slightly vacuolar lutein cells may occasionally be seen. The second generation of corpora lutea, originating in the sec- ond last ovulation, are small vacuolar bodies with much connective tissue and thick vessels. If, however, this second last ovulation had been followed by pregnancy, the retrogressing corpora lutea of the previous pregnancy are as yet much larger; the lutein cells have become very vacuolar; many thick vessels are present. In some of the vacuolar lutein cells yellow pigment appears. A third generation of corpora lutea is represented by yellow bodies. They are, however, not found in all ovaries. He LEO LOEB In this series of animals pregnancy had been prevented after a preceding copulation, either by ligaturing the tubes within the first two days after copulation, or by making long incisions into the uterus approximately four to six days after copulation. The ovaries were also examined in a certain number of other guinea pigs of this period in which pregnancy existed. The accom- panying pregnancy does not produce any marked change in the ovaries and the preceding description applies on the whole equally well to these ovaries. OVARIES OF GUINEA PIGS THIRTEEN TO FIFTEEN DAYS AFTER OVULATION In this series of animals pregnancy was prevented in the same manner as in the series of animals examined ten to eleven days after ovulation. The follicles have approximately the same character as in the previous period. We see the same varieties of follicles. Small follicles grow and become large and, after having reached this stage, or even at a slightly earlier stage, granulosa degeneration sets in with consecutive connective tissue atresia. In the granulosa of well preserved follicles numerous mitoses are present, and mitoses may even be found, if a slight amount of granulosa degeneration has taken place. The corpora lutea of the last ovulation (I generation) show more generally the beginning of vacuolization, especially in the periphery of the corpus luteum; but on the whole the corpus luteum is still well preserved and usually mitoses are found in some of the lutein and occasionally in cells belonging to blood vessels. In the center we find connective tissue with thin spindle-shaped nuclei, and a number of vessels with walls consisting of several rows of cells penetrate into the central connective tissue. In some of the lutein cells the protoplasm appears dense and stains deeply with eosin. It appears probable that in such cells the nuc- leus had started to divide by mitosis, but degenerative processes seem to have set in and interrupted the process of the mitotic division. We are however not certain that this interpretation, CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF GUINEA PIG 53 which would perhaps agree with an opinion expressed by Regaud and Dubreuil,’ is correct. The second generation of corpora lutea is represented by small vacuolar bodies with relatively much connective tissue and thick vessels. These atretic corpora lutea originated at the time of the second last ovulation and are therefore approximately thirty-three to forty days old. If this second last ovulation had been followed by pregnancy, the corpora lutea of this period are still much larger than the corpora lutea of the corresponding generation without an accompanying pregnancy ; but a considerable shrinking of these corpora lutea has also taken place. The vessels are to a great extent collapsed. The lutein cells are finely or coarsely vacuolar, take less stain, still possess nuclei and a distinct cell wall, staining with eosin. The third generation of corpora lutea is again represented by yellow bodies. They are not present in all ovaries, but are found especially in the ovaries of older guinea pigs. Occasionally the degenerating corpora lutea of the second generation may also be absent. In guinea pigs in which the last ovulation was followed by preg- nancy, the condition of the follicles is very similar. The corpora lutea of the first generation, however, are large and show frequent mitoses in lutein cells, occasionally also in lutein cells the peri- phery of which is vacuolar. There are possibly also mitoses pres- ent in the endothelial cells. The retrogressing corpora lutea of the second and third generations are in pregnant animals of a similar character as those described in the ovaries of guinea pigs of the same period without an accompanying pregnancy. OVARIES OF GUINEA PIGS FIFTEEN TO NINETEEN DAYS AFTER OVULATION Pregnancy had in most cases been prevented by the same means which were used in the preceding stages. In a few instances in which pregnancy had occurred an early abortion followed. The follicles exhibit on the whole the same character as in the preced- ing stage; we find good follicles of small, medium and large size, 3C. R. Soc. Biol., 54. 1908. 54 LEO LOEB and follicles in various stages of granulosa degeneration and of connective tissues atresia. We may also find large mature follicles. In how many cases these latter are present, will still have to be determined. In such animals a rupture of follicles is imminent. In three guinea pigs a spontaneous ovulation had taken place at this period, notwithstanding the absence of male guinea pigs. In such cases young corpora lutea were found and, accordingly, a condition of the follicles characteristic of a period directly follow- ing ovulation. In the large majority of cases however a spontane- ous ovulation did not take place in ovaries at this period of the sexual cycle. In such cases the follicles showed the character described above. The corpora lutea of the first generation, which originated as a result of the last ovulation, show more or less signs of beginning retrogressive changes as indicated by fine or coarse vacuoliza- tion of the lutein cells. The intensity of this degenerative change varies is different ovaries. On the whole the retrogressive changes seem to be more marked in the nineteen days than in the sixteen days old corpora lutea; but variations seem to occur, even in cor- pora lutea of the same age. The vacuolization is usually most marked in the periphery and progresses toward the center. Other lutein cells are still more solid and mitoses in lutein cells can be seen in the majority of the corpora lutea of this period. In cases in which mature follicles are present and a spontaneous rupture of follicles is therefore soon to be expected, the corpora lutea show much vacuolization; but here also mitoses are still present in lutein cells. In some cases the retrogressive changes are still further ad- vanced and a connective tissue capsule may appear in the peri- phery of the corpus luteum. The marked vacuolization of peri- pheral lutein cells may be accompanied by a diminution in the lumen of blood vessels. Vessels with coats consisting of several rows of cells are seen regularly in these corpora lutea. The con- nective tissue in the center of the corpora lutea is usually dense and relatively small in amount. In those cases in which a new spontaneous ovulation had taken place the vacuolization of the corpora lutea had still further pro- CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF GUINEA PIG oo gressed and under such circumstances mitoses were no longer present in them. The corpora lutea of the preceding (II) generation, originating in an ovulation that took place at least thirty-seven days ago, are sometimes represented by small bodies which are surrounded by a thick connective tissue capsule; much fibrous tissue is found in the center and the lutein cells between these two zones show very large vacuoles. The vessels remaining in such structures have very thick cellular walls. In other cases some yellow pig- ment appears in such vacuolar cells and in still other cases we see only yellow.atretic bodies. It is probable that the latter struc- tures are found in cases in which a still longer time has elapsed since the preceding (second last) ovulation. There may of course have occurred a longer interval than twenty days between the last and second last ovulation. When the second generation was represented by a corpus luteum of pregnancy, the retrogressive changes were also marked, shrink- ing of the corpus luteum and vacuolization of the lutein cells are pronounced, but such corpora lutea are still considerably larger sixteen to nineteen days after the completion of pregnancy than ordinary corpora lutea of the corresponding generation. Some of the vacuolar cells may show a yellow pigmentation. In such ovaries we may find a still older generation of retrogressing cor- pora lutea present, represented by yellow atretic bodies which owe their origin to an ovulation that took place more than a hundred days ago; and if the last named (third last)ovulation were followed by a pregnancy, this ovulation may have taken place approximately one-hundred and fifty days ago. Not in all animals are so many generations of corpora lutea found; especially in young animals (two to three months old only one generation may be present. If the last ovulation that took place fifteen and one half to nineteen days ago were followed by pregnancy, the follicles in the ovaries of pregnant animals of this period do not show any marked difference from the follicles of non-pregnant animals at the corre- sponding period after ovulation. In both cases we find good folli- cles of various sizes and the different stages of retrogression of 56 LEO LOEB follicles which we mentioned above. In the ovaries of pregnant animals of this period we may also find mature follicles, the granu- losa cells of which have more cytoplasm that stains red with eosin. Such follicles show less granulosa degeneration and a decrease in thenumber of mitoses is visible in the granulosa cells. Some degen- eration of granulosa cells may however occur in these follicles and their further fate will still have to be determined. The corpora lutea of pregnancy (first generation) are well pre- served. Fine vacuoles may however be present, especially in the peripheral lutein cells. Mitoses are also present. They do not show such pronounced signs of retrogression, as occur in cor- pora lutea of non-pregnant animals of this period. OVARIES OF GUINEA PIGS TWENTY TO TWENTY-SEVEN DAYS AFTER OVULATION At this period the proportion of animals in which a spontane- ous ovulation had taken place, notwithstanding the separation of females and males, is much greater than in the preceding period. Among twenty-two guinea pigs a spontaneous ovulation had taken place in eight, while in the fourteen other females no rupture of follicles had as yet occurred. In at least one and possibly in more of these fourteen guinea pigs a rupture was however imminent, as indicated by the presence of mature, red-staining follicles. In those animals in which ovulation had taken place within the last few days the follicles were in the condition corresponding to that stage after ovulation. The corpora lutea that originated as a result of the ovulation twenty to twenty-six days previously showed marked degeneration; the cells were vacuolar; in one case the lutein cells formed a hyaline material in which the vesicular nuclei were imbedded. Mitoses were present in only one case, in which the rupture had taken place apparently within the last twenty-four hours, but even vacuolar cells may divide mitotically. Many blood vessels have thick cellular coats and the blood vessels in general do not seem to be patent. In all the other guinea pigs in which a new rupture of follicles had not yet taken place the follicles behave approximately in the same manner as in the previous stage; we see follicles of various CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF GUINEA PIG 56 sizes without granulosa degeneration,’ and follicles of large and also of medium size in various stages of granulosa and connective tissue atresia. In the ovaries of the guinea pig in which a spontaneous rupture of follicles was imminent, the twenty-two days old corpora lutea also showed the signs of early degeneration; some of the cells were still good, but the majority were vacuolar. In the guinea pigs, in which a spontaneous ovulation had not yet taken place, the corpora lutea of the last ovulation were also in a process of degeneration, which was especially marked during the later stages, twenty-four to twenty-six days after ovulation; here the vacuolization was very pronounced, and occasionally con- nective tissue began to grow into the periphery of the corpus luteum. The vessels of these corpora lutea were very thick. In some other ovaries, especially in those examined twenty and twenty-one days after ovulation, the number of relatively well preserved cells was still greater. On the whole the number of mitoses found in lutein cells at this period is distinctly diminished. The older generations of corpora lutea are represented by atre- tic yellow bodies, which are however not present in all animals. In one case a corpus luteum was present that originated as a result of an ovulation that took place approximately ninety-three days before and was accompanied by pregnancy. In this cases twenty- seven days after delivery very little of the lutein tissue was left, the blood vessels had very thick coats, and the fibrous tissue of the remnant of the corpus luteum was very prominent. If the ovulation which took place twenty to twenty-seven days before were followed by a pregnancy, no new spontaneous ovula- tion took place. The conditions of the follicles was the same as in those guinea pigs in which the last ovulation was not followed by pregnancy and in which no new spontaneous ovulation had as yet taken place. The corpora lutea of pregnancy of this period showed much less vacuolization, although a slight amount of it may have been present, especially in the periphery of the corpus luteum. Mitoses were more common in these corpora lutea of pregnancy than in the ordinary corpora lutea of the same period. Their size was also greater. JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 1 58 LEO LOEB In regard to the ordinary corpora lutea and the corpora lutea of pregnancy of previous generations, the same retrogressive changes which were described above in the ovaries of non-pregnant guinea pigs of this period, were found in pregnant animals. We see therefore that the condition of the corpora lutea indi- cates the condition of the follicles, and conversely the condition of the follicles indicates the history of the corpora lutea. At a certain time (approximately ten days) after the ovulation a certain equilibrium is reached between the growth and the degen- eration of the follicles. Whether a quantitatively exact equili- brium is reached, cannot yet be stated. In proportion to the length of time which elapsed since the last ovulation, the probabil- ity of a new spontaneous rupture, with the subsequent changes in the follicles, becomes greater. At this and the preceding period signs of degeneration are present in the ordinary corpora lutea, which become the more marked the older the corpus luteum; the number of mitoses in lutein cells decreases with advancing age; they may however still be present in corpora lutea immediately following a new ovulation; the latter however is soon followed by further progressing degeneration of the corpus luteum of the pre- ceding ovulation. If the ovulation that took place twenty to twenty-six days previously was accompanied by pregnancy, no new spontaneous rupture of follicles took place, the prolifera- tion of the lutein cells continued, and degenerative processes in the corpora lutea were retarded. Approximately twenty-five days after the completion of preg- nancy the corpora lutea of pregnancy (second generation) have become small vacuolar bodies with thick vessels and fibrous tissue, while corresponding ordinary corpora lutea have at this time apparently been transformed into yellow bodies. CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF GUINEA PIG 59 OVARIES OF GUINEA PIGS TWENTY-SIX TO FORTY DAYS AFTER OVULATION In five animals in which, in order to prevent pregnancy, both (and in one case one) of the Fallopian tubes had been ligated within twenty-six hours after copulation, and in which at a later operation incisions had been made into the uterus, no new ovu- lation had taken place at the time of the examination, twenty- six to thirty-four days after copulation. The corpora lutea (twenty-six to thirty-four days old) showed very marked retro- gression; they were very vacuolar; their size was always diminished especially after thirty-two to thirty-four days, but differed some- what in individual cases. Some corpora lutea formed small bodies containing very dense fibrous tissue in the center and en- closing in the periphery a relatively small number of very vacuolar cells. Other corpora lutea were still somewhat larger and con- tained a.few better preserved cells. Besides the retrogressing vacuolar corpora lutea some atretic yellow bodies could be found in some cases; they were remnants of corpora lutea at least fifty days old. In two other ovaries a spontaneous ovulation had taken place recently and the condition of the follicles was in accordance with the age of the new corpora lutea. Here also the thirty to thirty-two days old corpora lutea of the preceding ovulation were very vacuolar and contained blood vessels with a thick coat and much dense fibrous tissue. OVARIES OF A PREGNANT GUINEA PIG APPROXIMATELY THIRTY- FIVE TO FORTY DAYS AFTER COPULATION In these ovaries we found good follicles of small, medium and large size without granulosa degeneration and with mitoses in granulosa cells; other follicles showed various stages of granulosa degeneration and of connective tissue atresia. Mitoses were absent or diminished in number in follicles in which granulosa degeneration existed. In addition to the ordinary large follicles mature or almost mature follicles were seen in which the cytoplasm of the cells was well developed, and in which the granulosa contained only very 60 LEO LOEB few mitoses which were found especially in the discus proligerus. Some of the nuclei of the granulosa cells appeared somewhat con- tracted in these follicles, but no marked degeneration of the gran- ulosa cells was found. The corpora lutea of pregnancy were large, the cytoplasm of the lutein cells stained red yellow with eosin; the cell outlines were quite distinct. The large majority of the lutein cells were compact and did not show vacuoles; the nuclei were vesicular. A few mitoses were found in lutein cells. Only very little con- nective tissue was present in the center of the corpora lutea. Some of the vessels had thick walls, while other vessels were of a capillary character and had either a wide or narrowlumen. We see therefore that also at later stages of pregnancy the follicles continue to grow and to degenerate, and that even at this period of pregnancy follicles may mature. The lutein cells of the corpora lutea of pregnancy continue to show mitotic nuclear figures and well preserved cytoplasm at a time when, in the ordinary corpora lutea, retrogression is very far advanced. OVARIES OF GUINEA PIGS IN WHICH COPULATION HAD BEEN PREVENTED A large number of ovaries were examined of female guinea pigs which had been kept separated from males for various lengths of time. One set of guinea pigs was separated from males before sexual maturity had been reached. The ovaries were examined, when the animals were six and twelve months old. In every instance ovu- lation had taken place repeatedly and we usually found the three generations of corpora lutea which we described in the case of guinea pigs which had copulated, namely relatively young cor- pora lutea, retrogressing vacuolar corpora lutea and _atretic yellow bodies. In another series guinea pigs were guarded against contact with males after delivery, and were kept separated from males for various periods of time. In this case a spontaneous ovulation took place after delivery, at least in the majority of cases, even CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF GUINEA PIG 61 without contact with males, and subsequently further ovulations occurred. Under such conditions the successive ovulations do however not occur in the same intervals in all animals; in some cases a delay in ovulation may take place: this accords well with our previous observations. The conditions of the follicles corre- spond to the time elapsed since the last ovulation, as indicated by the state of the corpora lutea. Not in every case however does a spontaneous ovulation take place without contact with male. In several cases neither new nor retrogressing corpora lutea could be found ia the ovaries of guinea pigs which, according to their age, ought to have ovulated, but in which no sign of heat had been noticed during an observa- tion extending over a certain period of time. In other guinea pigs which had been in heat recently, but in which copulation had been prevented, no new ovulation corresponding to the period of heat had taken place at the time of examination. SOME OBSERVATIONS ON THE POSTFETAL DEVELOPMENT OF THE OVARY OF THE GUINEA PIG In connection with the cyclic changes in the adult ovary of the guinea pig, just described, we thought it of interest to determine the time at which these cyclic changes set in. For this purpose we studied a series of ovaries at differents stages of the growing guinea pig. 1. Jn the ovaries of a fetus near the tume of birth many follicles are present in the cortex. These follicles have not yet a cavity and the largest follicles have a granulosa consisting of three, or four rows of granulosa cells; in the latter some mitoses can be seen. No distinct differentiation appears in the connective tissue of the different parts of the ovary. 2. In the ovaries of guinea pigs four, five and seven days old we find a cavity in a certain number of the follicles; no atretic processes have as yet taken place. The theca interna cells are distinguished from the surrounding connective tissue through the 62 LEO LOEB increase in the size of their nuclei. The connective tissue around the medullary canals is relatively dense. In the granulosa, theca interna and in the ordinary connective tissue stroma mitoses are frequent. 3. The ovaries of guinea pigs eighteen days old are larger; the follicles also have increased in size. Small and medium sized and in proportion to the as yet small size of the ovaries, relatively large follicles are present. In some of the follicles degenerative processes appear at this time, but the extent to which such changes have taken place differs in the ovaries of different animals. In the ovaries of some guinea pigs no degeneration of the granulosa has as yet taken place. In the ovaries of another guinea pig a few follicles showed a trace of granulosa degeneration, while in another follicle the granulosa degeneration was pronounced. In the folliclesof some ovaries we find even a beginning ingrowth of connective tissue into the follicular cavity, and in one case a cavity of a follicle was filled with loose connective tissue. The majority of the follicles are in a good condition; their cavity is larger than at the preceding stage and the interna is better devel- oped and consists of more rows of cells. Mitoses are present in the theca interna and in the granulosa. The connective tissue be- tween the follicles is a little more fibrous, and around certain blood and lymph vessels it is somewhat edematous and rarefied. 4. In the ovaries of guinea pigs twenty-eight days old the major- ity of follicles are in good condition and non-atretic; they are of small and medium, but not yet very large size. In some ovaries hardly any degeneration of follicles is visible; in others we see some follicles which have not yet attained their full size (corresponding to the as yet small size of the ovaries), presenting various stages of granulosa degeneration. In some follicles the granulosa has been entirely destroyed and connective tissue begins to grow into the cavity.* In some cases we find quite atretic connective tissue follicles. In some small and medium sized follicles the ova may undergo (probably amitotic) nuclear division and a corresponding segmentation of the cytoplasm, the granulosa being still intact. CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF GUINEA PIG 63 In other cases, however, such ova are surrounded by connective tissue. The connective tissue of the ovaries shows more differentiation at this period and is somewhat more fibrous. 5. In ovaries of guinea pigs one to two months old the size of some of the follicles, in correspondence with the growth of the ovaries, enlarges. We see various stages of granulosa degenera- tion and of connective tissue atresia. Granulosa degeneration may take place in medium sized and in large follicles. In some ovaries the large majority of follicles may show either granulosa degen- eration or connective tissue atresia. Corpora lutea are not yet visible. 6. Ovaries of guinea pigs three months old: Approximately at this period the ovaries have become mature. We find various stages of developing follicles and occasionally mature follicles ready to rupture. We find the various stages of granulosa degen- eration and of connective tissue atresia. We notice a greater differ- entiation in the structure of the stroma in different parts of the ovary. Corpora lutea, which occasionally are already in the beginning of degeneration, are present in some ovaries; in other animals ovulation has not yet taken place. It follows from these observations that degenerative processes in follicles set in approximately fourteen to eighteen days after birth, and ovulation and formation of corpoa lutea appear in guinea pigs two to three and a half months old. The ovaries and follicles must have reached a certain size, before ovulation sets in. The time required for the development of small into large follicles, with subsequent beginning of degenerative processes, is somewhat longer in the young growing animal than in the mature guinea pig, but in both the periods of time are of a similar order (approximately nine and fourteen days respectively). —* 64 LEO LOEB SUMMARY The principal result of our investigations we can state as follows: In the ovary of the guinea pig (and probably of mammals gener- ally) cyclic changes take place independently of copulation and of pregnancy. A sexual period (the period between two ovulations) is accom- panied by a series of changes in the follicles. As a result of the conditions leading to or accompanying ovulation the granulosa of all large and medium follicles undergoes a very rapid degenera- tion, which is very marked within an hour or two after ovulation, or perhaps even sooner. In the follicles in which the cavity is as yet very small, the degenerative processes are very slight or absent. These follicles do not seem to perish. These degenerative changes affect equally both ovaries of one animal, even if a rupture of follicles should have taken place in only one of the two ovaries. The local effect of the rupture of the follicle can therefore not be the cause of the follicular degeneration. Within the next few days the small follicles grow and gradually attain a large size. Eight days after ovulation large follicles are again noticeable. As soon as good sized and medium sized follicles have been formed they begin to undergo degenerative processes, the granulosa degenerating and becoming dissolved and connective tissue grow- ing into the follicular cavity. This process ends in an almost complete disappearance of these follicles. In the meantime other follicles grow and, having reached a large size, they also degenerate. Thus after a first stage of general growth, comprising approxi- mately ten days after ovulation, a certain equilibrium is reached in which new follicles are growing to a certain size, and in which other follicles of large or medium size degenerate. Whether certain quan- titative differences in the proportion of the number of growing and degenerating follicles exist at different periods of this second part of the sexual cycle, will still have to be determined. This second period of equilibrium begins approximately ten days after the last ovulation, and it lasts until a new ovulation occurs. Gradually a few large follicles undergo still further changes, the cytoplasm of their granulosa cells enlarges, the number of mitoses in these CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF GUINEA PIG 65 cells decreases and they become more resistant to those processes which lead to degeneration in other follicles. The follicles in which such changes have taken place are mature and ready to rupture. In the meantime the follicles that ruptured during the preceding ovulation developed into corpora lutea. The latter represent principally the hypertrophic granulosa cells of the rup- tured follicles, which proliferate mitotically. After a certain stage of development has been reached, degenerative processes set in in the corpus luteum, which start in its periphery and pro- ceed to the center. These degenerative processes set in very early, are noticeable eighteen to twenty days and are usually marked twenty to twenty-four days after the preceding ovulation. Throughout this period of beginning degeneration, however, some mitoses are still visible in certain lutein cells. At this period usually a new ovulation takes place. The exact time at which the new ovulation occurs varies however somewhat in different animals, ovulation occurring earlier in some animals than in others. In some cases it can be hastened through certain external factors, especially copulation, but in the large majority of cases it occurs sooner or later even without a preceding copulation. After the new ovulation has taken place, the degenerative processes progress in the corpus luteum, although within the first twenty hours after ovulation mitoses may still be found in certain lutein cells. In the following period a considerable shrinking of the cor- pus luteum takes place; the connective tissue in the cortex and in the periphery becomes hyaline and forms a relatively prominent part enclosing a small number of very vacuolar cells. Gradually yellow pigment is deposited in these vacuolar cells and thus the corpora lutea become transformed into the atretic yellow bodies. The new ovulation was of course again followed by thetypical changes in the follicles. If the ovulation be followed by pregnancy, the principal changes taking place in the ovaries are on the whole the same. The only 4 Whether or not in the guinea pig ovulation can take place independently of a preceding copulation has been a subject of controversy. Concerning the litera- ture of this question see William H. Kirkham, Biological Bulletin, ‘vol. 18, no. 5, April, 1910. 66 LEO LOEB difference consists in a prolongation of the sexual cycle, which lasts as long as the pregnancy continues. The changes in the follicles are identical with those found in the ordinary sexual period not accompanied by pregnancy. After copulation the period of growth following the sudden degeneration of the follicles is the same as in the ordinary sexual period, but the period of follicular equilibrium is much pro- longed. During this period of follicular equilibrium certain follicles ean not only grow to a considerable size, but may even undergo the additional changes which indicate the maturation of the folli- cle. A rupture of follicles does not however take place during pregnancy under ordinary circumstances. The corpus luteum of pregnancy differs from the ordinary corpus luteum mainly in its prolonged duration of growth and of life. At a time when, in the ordinary corpus luteum not accom- panied by pregnancy, mitoses have ceased to be present and the retrogressive changes are very marked, mitoses are still seen in the corpus luteum of pregnancy. In the corpus luteum of pregnancy degenerative changes set in before the end of pregnancy has been reached, and they continue after delivery. A short time after delivery a new ovulation usually occurs, even if no copulation had taken place after delivery. The retrogression of the corpora lutea of pregnancy continues, but it requires much more time than the retrogression of an ordinary corpus luteum. The mechanism that governs the sexual cycle in the ovary can be recognized only incompletely by observation and it has been the subject of an experimental investigation, the results of which we shall report in more detail elsewhere. We may however state that our experiments have shown that through extirpation of the corpora lutea the sexual cycle is shortened. The presence of well functioning corpora lutea inhibits a new ovulation. Pregnancy as such does not prevent ovulation. Ovulation can be made to take place even in pregnancy, if the corpora lutea be extirpated at an early period after copulation. And under such conditions the typical follicular changes follow the ovulation during preg- nancy. As soon therefore as degenerative processes have set CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF GUINEA PIG 67 in in the corpora lutea, either during pregnancy or outside of pregnancy, a new ovulation can take place. How far the presence of the corpora lutea influences the transformation of ordinary large follicles into mature follicles and how far its action merely con- cerns the rupture of the mature follicles, remains still to be deter- mined. It follows from our observations that the time of ovulation depends upon at least three different factors: (1) Changes taking place in the ovaries. It is necessary that mature follicles have been produced, before rupture can take place. Our experiments indicate that cuts into an ovary causing an opening of a follicle may possibly lead to the formation of a corpus luteum only at a time when mature follicles are present. A certain time must therefore have elapsed after ovulation before another ovulation ean take place. During this period small follicles reach their full size. Thus a minimal time which must elapse between two ovulations is required. (2) The time at which the influence of the corpus luteum preventing ovulation ceases to be exerted. Our observations make it very probable that the retrogressive changes observed in the corpora lutea before ovulation indicate the neces- sary cessation of functional activity. It is however noteworthy that, notwithstanding such a cessation of activity, mitoses can still be observed in the lutein cells at this period. Whether the corpus luteum acts prineipally upon the last stage in the develop- ment of follicles (maturation) or merely upon the rupture of folli- cles will still have to be determined with certainly. We recall . however the fact that we observed the occurrence of mature follicles during various stages of pregnancy, notwithstanding the existence of corpora lutea. (3) Certain more or less accidental con- ditions, as for instance copulation. It is probable that other cir- cumstances also may accelerate or retard the rupture of the follicles. Such factors act probably indirectly by causing changes in the circulation in the ovaries. In the guinea pig these are not indis- © pensable, but theirplace can be taken by other factors; or even the total absence of corpora lutea may in the guinea pig be sufficient to allow a new ovulation. 68 LEO LOEB In the guinea pig ovulation occurs in the large majority of cases without any previous copulation. In many cases however copula- tion is not without significance even in the guinea pig; it acceler- ates ovulation. While, after delivery, a spontaneous rupture may take place without copulation, in other cases it does not occur with- out ovulation. Also in the ordinary period of heat ovulation does not need to take place without copulation. Copulation is there- fore not without importance; but in almost all of these cases ovu- lation is only deferred and sooner or later it will take place with- out the male. So far as the literature has been accessible to us it appears that the role copulation plays had not been fully appre- ciated by former investigators. Certain observations which we made indicate that other factors besides a preceding copulation may influence ovulation, and we intend to continue our investi- gation in this direction. Our observations enable us to give some data concerning the time relations in the growth of various ovarian structures. a Follicles. In about six days after ovulation small follicles reach medium size. In approximately eight days large follicles have developed and now degenerative processes set in. Mitotic cell division is most pronounced in the granulosa before degenera- tive processes have commenced; but mitoses may still beseen, if a slight degree of degeneration exist. b Ordinary corpora lutea. The development of corpora lutea within the first six days after ovulation has been described in a previous paper. At six days we see for the first time, besides the capillary vessels, blood vessels with walls consisting of two rows of cells penetrating into the corpus luteum; they become some- what more frequent from the tenth day on. In the meantime mitotic division of lutein cells continues and the increase in these cells causes the central connective tissue to become smaller in amount. In corpora lutea ten to eleven days old a few vacuolar cells are present in the periphery of the corpus luteum. From ten to fif- teen days after ovulation vacuolization is still very slight in peri- pheral luetein cells. From fifteen to eighteen days more fine or coarse vacuolization may appear. Other lutein cells are still CYCLIC CHANGES IN THE OVARY OF GUINEA PIG 69 more solid and mitoses are still present. If no new ovulation have taken place, degeneration becomes more marked after twenty days; twenty-four days after ovulation we noticed a small amount of connective tissue growing into the periphery. At this period the number of mitoses is already diminished. In cases in which, between the eighteenth and twenty-sixth day after ovulation, a new rupture of follicles sets in, the degenerative processes are still more marked; mitoses may still be seen in the course of the first day after rupture of the follicles, but they disappear after- wards and the degenerative processes progress. The vacuoliza- tion of the lutein cells increases, the corpora lutea shrink, the con- nective tissue becomes gradually hyaline and is relatively pre- ponderating in quantity over the lutein cells. About six days after the new ovulation (in approximately twenty-six days old corpora lutea) yellow pigment may be seen for the first time in the vacuo- lar lutein cells. Eight days after the new ovulation the corpus luteum is much shrunken, and ten to eleven days after the new ovulation corpora lutea approximately thirty-one to thirty-two days old have been reduced to small vacuolar bodies, around which a strong connective tissue capsule may appear. Corpora lutea thirty-three to forty days old (twelve to nineteen days after new ovulation) still, represent vacuolar bodies; but now gradually the transformation into a yellow body sets in. Corpora lutea about forty-five days old have the appearance of yellow bodies and they may probably persist as such for a long time, after the third ovulation has taken place. Thus three generations of corpora lutea may be present side by side in the same ovary. c. Corpus luteum of pregnancy. The corpus luteum of pregnancy differs from the ordinary corpus luteum in the longer duration of mitotic division, and the delay in retrogressive changes. Although slight vacuolization may be noticeable at relatively early stages, the corpora lutea of pregnancy are still in a good condition thirty- five to forty days after ovulation and they may still show mitoses at this period. Towards the latter part of pregnancy however degenerative processes set in, vacuolization and loss in staining power of the nuclei, and other changes, are noticeable. Mitoses could not be seen at this stage, and they appeared to be absent 70 LEO LOEB after delivery had taken place. From ten to twelve days after delivery yellow pigment was seen in a few of the lutein cells in the corpus luteum of the previous pregnancy. Thirteen to twenty days after delivery the corpus luteum is still much larger than an ordinary corpus luteum at the same period after ovulation, but considerable shrinking has already taken place. Twenty-seven days after delivery the corpus luteum is very small and vacuolar, with much hyaline connective tissue, but has not yet been transformed into a yellow body; but at a later stage, approximately sixty days after delivery (or possibly somewhat earlier) the corpus luteum appears as a yellow body, and as such it may persist for some time. d. In the developing ovaries degeneration of the granulosa and connective tissue atresia of follicles are found as soon as the folli- cles have reached a relatively large size; these retrogressive changes first appear in guinea pigs approximately fourteen to eighteen days old, while the first ovulation appears much later, namely two to three and a half months after birth. * STUDIES ON CHROMOSOMES VII. A REVIEW OF THE CHROMOSOMES OF NEZARA; WITH SOME MORE GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS EDMUND B. WILSON From the Zoélogical Department, Columbia University NINE FIGURES AND ONE PLATE CONTENTS (ADO) oC CLOVE! Scere clos Oe ge i OME err CARA ale Berek oe Ete Sin so em (ol ID SSSR OMIN Gein eS cc gies oD ae ee Oe OC Gos aed tans bone 5 Oa ae 73 1 The second spermatocyte-division in Nezara.......................... 73 ft Ne MCtOC ArOMOsOMes.....< ...: i... 0. See eee ne ea ee ho 73 bethevdouble:chromosomie:... \s. \532 cee oo ented ee peer we AeolheaiEstspermatocyle=GivisiOn .-.ic, i dacs save eel ee nae) eee ee eee 78 3 The growth-period and spermatocyte-prophases....................... 80 aU he diploidhchromosome-groups .-.....:: “Sd. see eA eee ee 83 (Glemer al eet Pee e eee RS bes erie cid Boog) avd SO ee See tae nb 84 eM DHEVLCIOC HT OMOSONIGS,. §.).)< 05 .:.« Sis.d cj 2 ole eek) ake eee een OU. ph be oc 84 Ba Composlinoneanaduorioin) Ola tine: \eys= Deligianni 85 be Maditicattens:of the X-element,....../.0-4. ccc pe eee sya wicicns «ok 88 Groex. .\/.4 22 ee eae ans ated ke 99 6 Modes in which the chromosome-number may change.................. 99 OCIS OM mower een ekg. brs... 95 2ye.) ayfueant ‘1O[OO ssBuIN| ( MTHLON-UALSOA,, UGHiIVva SOILSIUALOVUVHO % A! € ATaVi *burids {fo ay? UL SLaqZOD.DYD pansasgo uwds fo ay, ur uoYynjoedxa ay? (7) £panottoqg "g quawiaday fo buynu fo sznsat ay? buinoysy 118 Cc. B. DAVENPORT Polish—Houdan hybrid) was mated with a Black Minorca 14122 4. The results of this mating are given in table 4. Experiment 5. No. 11693 ¢, used in this experiment, is a white bird that had ‘smoke’ on down when hatched. It is of somewhat complex origin. Its mother was an F, hybrid between a Black Spanish cock and a White Leghorn; its father had the same ele- ments and also white Silkie in its ancestry. No. 11693 has, con- sequently, black recessive. It has a single comb, is free of the skin pigment of the Silkie, is clean-shanked and has four toes on the right foot and five on the left. On September 19, 1909, this pullet (which was hatched March, 1910) was treated with atropin, etherized during half an hour and opened as usual between the last two ribs. All of the ovary, as far as could be seen, was removed. Pieces of ovary from no. 11280 ¢ (a straight-bred Dark Brahma bantam) were placed in contact with the peritoneum, near the removed ovary, but not stitched in, as the bird showed signs of succumbing. The cut was sewed up and the bird set aside where it lay quiet for half an hour.2. The Dark Brahma from which the ovary (whose eggs measured 0.5 mm. in diameter) was removed died in consequences of hemorrhage. Later No. 11693 was mated with 11291 7 (in mating 1027: 11693). He is a straight-bred dark Brahma bantam cock, used also in experiments 1 and 3. The results are shown in table 5. Experiment 6. No. 11826¢, hatched March, 1909, a pure bred Dark Brahma was opened October 2, 1909, and ovary imperfectly removed. Ovary of no. 12550 (a White Leghorn-Minorca-Polish- Houdan hybrid) sewed on to peritoneum at point of removal. The ovary had been kept out of body of hen about ten minutes, but covered and moist. In the late winter of 1910 no. 11826 ¢ was mated in pen 1050 with 14122 4, a single-comb Black Minorca. The results are given in table 6. * See postscript. Il® Uy guesqe [lB ‘T 10 Z eps tI ‘FP J ‘e[#uys 10 ved ‘uyezreoun fey ‘vod Z ‘MOI ( 8 ‘MOI T ‘P ‘SMO ¢ FI ‘MOTEq eVGA ‘OUTG ee ONINdSAIO FT NOILVZIIVEU 9 quosqe MOIICU y Ie poyrpour ‘vod SMOI § 03 0 ‘qqsIT nq ‘yueseid MOTE OFFA !yOBTq qyuosoid 97 B]peul1ezUy 4ue90 rod 9g wey Sssey ‘¢ jueo 10d (0g I9A0 ‘fF quLOd- quesqe ‘gueo sed 0G YoB[q fqueo red Q¢ o}14M jueseid quosqe 6 epeas ‘YSTy |] 107 optis ‘MoOlIeU (S] ¥ v A wod quosqe |SMOI J 0} ¢ ‘AAvoY MOTOq Peet] ey Avis :aoureuulo ie G)z{o [5 [POCO NS ee S199 BOF qso10 JO SssoujooIgT [ opeis ‘Morimeu | [H3SON See | eagpcoduen es 400} 0} 800} JO 1equInNy eyauys |e qui09 quosqe [oo guyj0og MOTO VITA SyoByq | ayueAnt ‘Jo]oo + sesvUIN{d XT € XT ‘¢ NOIWVLOEdxXt ay AUVAO JO AOUN0S *§ (QAHLOW UALSOA, | ugHLva SOILSIUMLOVUVHO 1 paasasgo ay} (9) 08]D {payniauabas som fisvao sadoud ay} pwn pays 72 70Y7 (¢) ‘pwn “papassons yfoub ay, yoy, UoYdUNssD ay { sayjou-1ajsof, puyoig, Yo 247 (8) ‘quaind aynu ay7 (J) fo waar ain suajovunyo 91am Sar4nno ay} YOUN WoOLf Way 2Y7 (8) + WITAVL “Puridsffo ay} UL SuazoDiny9 7 uo buridsffo ay, ur uoynjoadxa ay) (7) Spanostog aqvuaant ay, “47 quawraday fo synsat ay} buinoys quao iad g¢ uevyy ssey ‘¢ € ‘8003 ¢ {cy ‘8909 F \guaD Jod QE IOAO ‘fF 7 ft Jo] ¢ {9U B11 F Fe es) (aorta Reciena a 400} 0} 890} JO JEqUINN 21 ‘pepzooorun fy] ‘ysry ATyensn ‘vod peyrpou ‘ved vod vod asus 2 8 UN (PSG EARS ae quiog } ‘paps0o ° -o1un !¢ ‘MOTT {G ‘SMOI Z fz ‘SMOI EG | SMOI E 0} Q ‘FUBITS | SMO J 07 ¢‘AABOY | SMOI J 07 G ‘AABOT quosqe |SMOI 1 0} g¢ ‘AABO [> suyjoog yueo red 0g ‘YoRTq ‘queo T ‘yowq uourvuuyo fey ‘(ATE red gg ‘peqjods MOTAq ABIS MOTeq AvIs Ayjeq Avis ayYM) Yyoulq ‘zg ‘poqqjods yoryq ‘azq Aa ayy puB ‘ayy | fyoeq uourBUUTD | fyoRq uoUTeUUT [YOVTq] FGA | Syowq wourwUUTD | * ayueAnt ‘rojoo esBuUINn{d ONINASaIO gT éXI € XI 9 eo. AUVAO 4O GOUNOS |, YAHLON-UALSOI,, UGHLVA SOILSIUMLOVUVHO NOILVZT1Vau ‘¢ «=NOIWVLodaxa “fF “9 4 | ‘g0uBU]WIOp JO UO}QO9JIod WI 07 pOqtiose oq 09 eSe_ZqNOp Ss} Yowq uowvU -UJO YIM YOryO BV JO OsBo o[FUIS OY], ‘“ONSST}? pojywisUS OY} JO GOUdASTSIEd JO QOUEPIAS OU gs] JJ “o[GBYsBUIEI S| Fusdsyo oyy uy seqyyA Jo uosjiodoid MO] OTT, *Butudsffo ay} Ut SsazoDADYO paasasqgo ay} (9) Os]D “pazrws 22 7DY7 (G) PUD !papaavons 7/v16 ay) yoy2 uoydwunssn ay) UO buriwds fo ay7 Ur UOYNJIad La 94} (+) ‘pazuDj)dsunsz a1aM SartuDA0 By} YOLYM Wouf Uay DUWYDIG Y4DG ay? fo (g) /,4ayJOUL-La}SOf, pa]]VI-08 azlUM ay? fo (g) S4aygnf ay) fo(]) Uaarb aun suazovuMyd azruaant ay, “DUuYvig Yyuvq paeiq-aind D' OT EZI] ‘ON pun (fuvao vwynig yuvg pazfosbua yzim) & SE9TT ON Suyow fo sznsay ¢ ATAVL F ‘pepsodeiuN ‘cy ‘Z 10 [| epwvis ‘MOT J pepsoseiun gt ‘sod T ‘SA\OI F | €T ‘sMor ¢ J ‘pepsooerun ‘fF ‘SMOI Z BT ‘Moyaq oyTyAL ‘yOuTG G OF ¢ Z 10 [ Opis ‘MOT apvIdo}eIpoUTIEjUT peylrpou ‘vad A SMOI ¢ | 03 0 ‘97, 8] pseul1ez UT quesqe quad rad 0¢ oyTy AA pus yovyq ‘4yuU00 Jod ¢z ‘syoods MOfEq: | = youyq ‘aqTyAt aM $yovyq [Ty {yueo sed eg ‘aqTTyM | 8 epBis ‘apr quosqe [evry pue youyq] ey Z 10 [ opBis ‘MOT od SMOI J 0} ¢ ‘AAGOT Mofeq Avis ‘9AOqe UOUTBUUIO ONIVdSIAO GT NOILVZIIVEY 9 tXT °C NOILVLOGdXH ‘fF AUVAO JO GOuNnOS € ( JHHLON-UGLSON,, T opsad ‘Morrem }* 99> 7 tee TH3sON Gifuie |<. re qui0g quesqe |°o7 Sujj00g MOTEG OFIYM SyoRyTq | ajrasant ‘Iojoo oesBUIn[ UaGHLIVA SOLLSINGLOVUVHO | — *Bur.dsffo ay}? Ut S1ajzoDLDYo paasasqo ay} (9) oszp ‘pajwf 7fv16 ay; yoy (9) pun ‘papaaoons zfn46 ay yoy, UOYydwnssD ay} UO buridsfo ay, U1 WOY4NZIad La ay} (fF) KPanowas a1aM SaL1DAO BY} YOLYM wWoLf UaYy ay? (g) {,tayjoum-sajsof, DuYDILg YLDG ay} (g) “quand (MOLOUrTY YOD]G) a7DUW ay} (7) fo Wanrb auv SLajz9DILDYO azuaant ay. “9 quawweday ‘buynw ay7 fo synsat ay2 buanoys 9 HIGVL JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 1 122 Cc. B. DAVENPORT CONCLUSIONS In the six experiments described above there is no evidence that the engrafted ovary ever became functional but all results are in accord with the conclusion that the more or less completely extir- pated ovary regenerated and produced an abundance of eggs. With the results the data of Dr. Guthrie’s paper are not in dis- accord. His data, like ours, furnish no evidence for the survival of the engrafted ovaries, far less of an effect of the soma of the foster-mother on the introduced germ plasm. Cold Spring Harbor, N. Y. September 26, 1910. POSTSCRIPT On January 4, 1911, No. 11693 ¢ was killed and opened on the left side. An ovary of fairly typical size for a hen entering her second year of laying was found. It contained numerous eggs, 4 to 5 mm. in diameter. Slightly ventrad of the main artery of the ovary is an irregular mass 5 x4 X2 mm. of cheesy consistency, imbedded in and covered by peritoneum. Its general appearance is that of a dried, hardened ovary, with clear traces of follicles. It doubtless represents the engrafted ovary, entirely encysted in the peritoneum. : January 30, 1911. LITERATURE CITED Davenport, C. B. 1906 Inheritance in poultry. Publication no. 52, Carnegie Institution of Washington. 1910 Inheritance of plumage color in poultry. Proc. Soc. Exper. Biol. and Med., vol. 7, p. 168. GuTurig C. C. 1908 Further results of transplantation of ovaries in chickens. Jour. Exp. Zodl., 5, pp. 563-576. THE EFFECTS OF. INBREEDING AND SELECTION ON THE FERTILITY, VIGOR AND SEX RATIO OF DROSOPHILA AMPELOPHILA W. J. MOENKHAUS Indiana University, Bloomington, Indiana CONTENTS MAA EEOMUCLORY | Wie Nae Tet nitoct asd yf 6.0 athip «Hue acne hee ae RO eg MO Ee 124 Mia etralpAncamlGunOdS eye v2): s.\.c ccs stl se «at A Nein sclecn doe Ol SEO eee eee s 124 Inbreeding and selection on fertility and vigor.................0eceeeeeeeee- 126 pla TCC UL CT OTN ene ena, So cle cs cis.broct « Gals ae, odo Ree Crete Deere Shere 126 2)" {SHEVA gia Nee Ae ae mR dere e Ays inn RCs Siti ecs 127 a @haracien or ther sterility i: 2 6s .0/s cigs. ve ote sete dene = oreo meee 2 127 GP DCMECOM Ole SUOETTUY Sch Cs ce. c tre 5 sie «sts dow 0 ee eh renee aot ne cece ee 128 1G Ol oWRee Vey ato VGLN1a 1°20) Oe A ee ems oc oo Dente eiclc 131 he Hever Aaa LaVe histel SUNK) Oe Gan 7 ens bien Sc aredc aac 134 IDISCHASIONa OleRESULUS cc. co coe05...< 4 sco 2 @, ove ciRpe oie act eene ein cee Remetet ors oe 138 Dex Vad O AMOUSELECTION Serko ohices, uc winies aovin's nlbadae = AE a ea tee 141 PLC LOCUCLOL Ys. pit iie ote «= cicled. = 4 s/s Je 3 shy cs Semen epee eterno 141 Dee LReStOrmMalWesex-TAUIOnds. ¢ oe). as sos ietans wipes oe etree ane cneier meee wie 143 PREStOry. OF (STAM AUG mc. 2 %.5 cf-uk< Ok aeicuatels Gate ot seem as. as te eeaternestotay 147 EMIDISCHISHI OMe Perce calciaie 9 steko te 5 Pe oP hea Seated ice che 147 Influence of male and female in determining the sex-ratio.......... 148 IDisScussionkoleresUlissONWSeX=CaAtlOl a... foes eters cee 151 SiimamisryehOmeeh Sete Bett Su... Se Raver Do 0, ae a he ee 153 Tniiersbur eecivedieaniearers cee sc hax 22 = cetera Tee cle tine ne et ee ERR! teen Srcvonsyen en tae 154 124 W. J. MOENKHAUS INTRODUCTORY The present report includes the results of two series of experi- ments on the fruit fly—Drosophila ampelophila. One set con- cerns itself primarily with the effects of inbreeding and the other with sex-ratios. The experiments on inbreeding grew out of work I had been carrying on on hybridization. In these hybridiza- tion experiments the effects on the developmental processes of hybrids between species too remotely related were especially emphasized. The converse of these experiments was, naturally, to study the effect upon the young between individuals too closely related. Fishes, upon which all my experiments in hybridization were made, do not lend themselves for purposes of inbreeding without elaborate breeding facilities. Mice seemed suitable for this purpose but, both at the outset of these experiments and since, these creatures have proven miserable failures in my hands. Among the insects, I tried the common willow beetle but this proved to throw only one generation annually in this latitude. It was desirable to have an animal with a brief life history, whose food could be easily obtained at all seasons and in which the sexes could be readily distinguished. In these respects the fruit fly is almost ideal. The facts herein considered confine themselves to this. species. The experiments on sex-ratio suggested themselves in connec- tion with the inbreeding experiments and so were carried out along with the latter and after they were completed. MATERIAL AND METHODS The strain which is mostly under discussion in my inbreeding experiments came from a well-filled female that was taken from the window of my residence in Bloomington. Other strains were started at the onset. Some of these came from the banana bunches at the various groceries and others came from fruit which I had laid out for this purpose. None of these were carried further than two or three generations excepting two, called 6 and 7 in my records. The latter was discontinued after the tenth generation INBREEDING AND SELECTION TN DROSOPHILA AMPELOPHILA 125 since it had been from the beginning apparently less prolific. The strain 6 was carried for over seventy-five generations and is the one on which the experiments in inbreeding of this report are based. For vivaria, tall stender dishes, tumblers, quinine bottles and lamp chimneys were given a trial. They were discarded in favor of 8-dram shell vials. These were compact, so that a large number of matings could be kept in a small space, and they were most con- venient in manipulating the pairs during the frequent changes to new cages that was necessary all along. The open end of the shell vial was closed with a plug of absorbent cotton, not too compact, so as to afford some ventilation. The flies are strongly positive to light, so that the vials could be laid with their bottom toward the light and the cotton plug removed with safety for the introduction of food etc. Small trays holding fifteen of these vials were used and in this way the experiments could be readily and compactly stored in the incubator, or they could be packed into a valise to be taken along wherever I went. The food was exclusively well-ripened bananas. To prevent the larvae ‘rom pupating in the food, narrow strips of blotter or filter paper were introduced in which they seemed to be especially fond of pupating. It is, of course, apparent that the greatest care had to be taken to avoid contamination from flies without. The stock food had to be scrupulously watched and the instruments kept clean to avoid the introduction of eggs laid on them by extraneous females. The bananas, especially, as they come from the stores, are likely to be infected with eggs and larvae if the skin be in any way bruised or split. The brothers and sisters were paired off, always within the first ten or twelve hours of their life as imagos. Up to this time mating has not occurred. In fact I have never found a pair that copulated during the first twenty-four hours or, if so, that pro- duced fertile eggs. 126 W. J. MOENKHAUS ’ INBREEDING AND SELECTION ON FERTILITY AND VIGOR 1. Introductory That continued inbreeding acts deleteriously on the fertility and vitality of a race is a belief so firmly and generally established that it is seldom questioned. This has its origin largely in the common experience of breeders whose observations, unfortun- ately, are too often unreliable. There are not wanting experi- ments such as those of Van Guaita (’98) and Bos (’94) and others, scientifically conducted, which bear out this conclusion. On the other hand, it is refreshing to encounter in the literature such reports as that of Gentry (’05) who believes not only that inbreeding is not necessarily harmful, but also that it may be beneficial to conserve and intensify the good points in his breed. Gentry’s experiments were made on Berkshires. The most pro- longed tests of close inbreeding that have been recorded were made by Castle (’06) on the same species with which the present paper deals. He inbred (brothers with sisters) for fifty-nine gener- ations. He concludes that such close inbreeding does not neces- sarily result in a loss of productiveness and of vigor; at least that inbreeding cannot be regarded as a causal factor. Some of his results so nearly parallel those of the present writer that further reference to his results will be made in the body of the paper. During the early part of October, 1903, a number of pairs were started breeding. These came from various sources in Bloomington. These different pairs were reared for the most part only a few generations, excepting pair No. 6 which was continued for about four and one-half years. During this time over seventy-five generations were produced. Toward the close of this period no exact count was kept of the generations so that only an approxi- mate figure can be given. Five pairs of brothers and sisters were mated in each generation to insure against accidents that might terminate the strain if but one mating were made. Along at the fifth and sixth generation it became more and more difficult to keep the strain alive with the five pairs of brothers and sisters that were mated each generation. The failure of an INBREEDING AND SELECTION IN DROSOPHILA AMPELOPHILA 127 occasional pair to produce young had hitherto been attributed to accidental conditions of food, etc., but this no longer seemed a satis- factory explanation of all the failures to produce young. This con- dition, was, therefore looked into more thoroughly. This was done by laying out instead of five pairs a much larger number from the offspring of a given productive pair. The greatest care was taken with the food, temperature etc. and it soon developed that a variable per cent of the pairs were sterile. These sterile pairs were to all appearances normal. It was clear now that, while inbreed- ing had not reduced the general vitality of the strain thus far, there had appeared a high degree of sterility. 2. Sterility * a. Character of the sterility. Examination of all the matings brought out the fact that in all cases eggs were present in large numbers. This seemed to suggest that the difficulty lay in the larvae either failing to emerge from the egg envelope or, succeeding in this, failing to carry themselves through the feeding stage or the transformation. By a careful search of the food of the sterile pairs, after suffi- cient time for the larvae to mature had been allowed, it became evident that the difficulty lay at a time earlier than the pupal stage for none of the latter could ever be found. The food sup- plied these sterile pairs was the same as that of the fertile ones since it could not be foretold which pairs were going to prove infertile. Furthermore, the infertile pairs were usually kept for from twenty to thirty days, the best of food being supplied them from time to time. The same search showed that no larvae were pres- ent, at least so far as direct inspection of the food under a dis- secting microscope could be depended upon. It was always possible, of course, that the larvae failed to carry their development very far, and, thus, being small when they first emerge from the egg, might have been overlooked. It became necessary, consequently, to take the eggs as they were laid from time to time and keep them under observation to see whether the larvae ever emerged. This was done by placing a piece of banana 128 W. J. MOENKHAUS in the vial with a sterile pair and from time to time removing the eggs one by one with the point of a needle and placing them on a piece of moist filter paper in a separate vial. Usually twenty were placed in each vial and some food added for the larvae, should they emerge. Inspection of the eggs after twenty-four, forty-eight and seventy-two hours would readily reveal the number of eggs that had produced larvae. I have laid out thus at a great expense of time literally thousands of eggs from many infertile pairs, in many cases all the eggs that a given pair produced during the first twenty-five days of its life, but I have never seen a single egg that had hatched. Eggs of fertile pairs thus laid out will readily hatch so that all the larvae will have taken to the food twenty-four hours after the eggs are deposited. Such infertile pairs copulate frequently and it would seem that impregnation should follow. I have never sectioned the eggs to see whether spermatozoa enter the eggs or whether they con- tain partially developed larvae which fail to hatch. I have, however, been able to determine in this strain which of the sexes is at fault. This was done in the following manner. After a pair by sufficient trial had proven itself infertile, the male was mated to a virgin female of a fresh strain that had not been inbred and possessed a high degree of fertility, and the female was simi- larly mated with a male, usually one whose fertility had been estab- lished. Sixty-four such cases were tried and in no case did the females fail to produce young and in no case did the males pro- duce any although repeated copulations took place. It is evident from the foregoing, that, in this strain, the sterility lies exclusively in the male and that the female has lost, apparently, nothing in fertility. Castle (p. 735) reports, on the other hand, that either sex may be sterile. However, Castle took no account of the eggs and larvae but merely the production of pupae, so that his steril- ity cannot be with certainty compared to mine. It would seem, however, that in some strains infertility may be strictly confined to the males and in others to both sexes. That sterility is com- plete for all males, when it occurs, is shown by both our results. b. Degrees of sterility. The foregoing experiments concerned themselves with such pairs as were completely sterile. Other pairs INBREEDING AND SELECTION IN DROSOPHILA AMPELOPHILA 129 of brothers and sisters from the same parents, however, were fer- tile. Judging from the productiveness of these, there was often a wide divergence. It would seem that, as a result of inbreeding, we had a condition of fertility ranging from absolute infertility to comparatively high fertility among the different pairs of brothers and sisters from any given pair of parents. To test this the follow- ing experiment was carried out: About two-hundred eggs from each of fifteen pairs of flies were laid out after the fashion indicated above. Ten of these pairs had been inbred for seventeen genera- tions while five belonged to fresh stock that had not been inbred. Of the ten pairs of the inbred strain, five belonged to a strain which had arrived at a very low degree of fertility, namely only 36 per cent of the forty-two pairs tested were fertile (table 3, seventeenth generation, strain, A). These five pairs were brothers and sisters to many of the sterile pairs considered in the preceding section. The other five pairs (of the ten inbred) were from a strain which had been held by selection to a high degree of fertility, namely 97 per cent of the thirty-four pairs tested were fertile. Both of these strains were descended from common great grandparents (table 3, seventeenth generation, strain B). | We have, thus, for comparison three conditions, namely, (1) eggs from a highly infertile inbred strain; (2) eggs from a highly fertile inbred strain; and (38) eggs from a presumably norma strain that had not been inbred. It should be added that the five pairs were taken at random and were not selected. Approxi- mately the first two-hundred eggs of each pair were laid out in batches of about twenty to twenty-five to the vial. The number of eggs that hatched was noted in each case and also the number that emerged as imagos. Table 1 gives the summary of results. From this table it appears that from the eggs which were taken from the inbred pairs with low fertility practically as large a per cent (97.27) hatched as from the eggs that came from the inbred pairs that showed a high fertility (98.2). The same is true in regard to the number that produced imagoes, 86.8 per cent and 85.1 per cent respectively. The fact clearly brought out here is that when infertility arises in this strain it arises suddenly and JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, No. 1. 130 W. J. MOENKHAUS does not present all intergradations. In other words, one does not find that among a large number of brothers and sisters some pairs whose eggs only partially hatch and other pairs that range in this respect, on the one hand, to perfect fertility and, on the other, to complete sterility. The fertility is either completely lost or it is of a high degree. Furthermore, when we compare the inbreds with thenormals (not inbred) in regard to the percentage of eggs hatched no essential difference is observable. It would seem, therefore, TABLE 1 Inbred (low fertility) | | | NUMBER OF PER CENT OF pa «fon RE Se, ne Ocoee eee ee ee Ee ey: ios | as.) WeeeO ed 8508 82.9 ee ee 200 1280 169 94.0 84.5 Cie, Vea as 201 | 197 | 182 98.0 90.5 Dy Eee thts: See i98 >| 198 180 100.0 90.9 Re ett ed | 123 123 104 100.0 84.5 otal su seen 915 890 795 97.27 86.8 Inbred (high fertility) A esol 198 Toe | 88.5 90.5 Bene ee 73d 172 156 | 99.4 90.1 Coie et | 204s 200 fet? |. 98:0 78.9 WBA eh hs 197 193 joy || 0740 83.7 5 See ere ers 169 145 | 96.5 82.8 | Totals cowl | 950 932.1) gogiy' "| Ossie eibsoa Normals (not inbred) Ane Pieler cia D155 9) 5) Ot: Tes. | |) Beer 89.7 Bae) ene 70 70) ou 48 | 100.0 68.5 EOE | a Te | 153 152 igo. |. 9999 86.2 De ee ee 224 21S) = 144. | O78 64.2 | Rae pe) OES 158 155 144 | 98.1 91.1 Ee ed eee Eee 146 ieee 109) | ©S7S7AMeIS Bevan CF ee oe 223 Die | 205 99.9 91.9 Total sees 1189 1155 | 975 97.2 82.0 INBREEDING AND SELECTION IN DROSOPHILA AMPELOPHILA 131 that the pairs that had not completely lost their fertility, in so far as hatching their eggs is concerned, had suffered no deteriora- tion whatever as a result of seventeen generations of closest in- breeding. A fact of further importance brought out by table 1 is that of the percentage of eggs that successfully produced imagos. This does not differ essentially in the two groups of inbreds nor do these differ essentially from the normals. Castle used as his measure ‘productiveness,’ meaning thereby the number of pupae that were successfully produced. Making allowance for some pupae which do not emerge, the imagos produced in my experi- ments were an approximation to his ‘productiveness.’ Inbreed- ing, consequently, does not affect adversely the productiveness of pairs that show any fertility at all. Castle found that his strains showed an annual fluctuation in productiveness, the period of least productiveness falling in the late autumn and early winter. My own experiments extended over about four and one half years and, although I have been on the lookout for this, I have never observed it. As Castle himself suggests, this fluctuation was probably a function of the tempera- ture of the room. My flies were kept in a room which varied from 60 to 80 degrees and, when this was not possible, they were placed in an incubator kept at about the same range of temperature. It may also be that the productiveness of his strain ran low at this time of the year because they were placed in new hands at the open- ing of the college year. My observation has been that it takes some time for a new man to learn all the conditions that make for a favorable rearing of these creatures so that Castle’s low produc- tive periods may be merely a measure of the training period of the experimentor. 3. Inbreeding and vigor At the outset of the experiments it was the expectation of the writer that such rigorous inbreeding would early and violently show itself in the vigor and fertility of the animals. In this, how- ever, he was largely disappointed. In the strain that is here under consideration no untoward results could be detected during the Pee W. J. MOENKHAUS first five or six generations. As previously stated, up to this time the method consisted in placing pairs of brothers and sisters in each of five vials to insure against mishaps. These mishaps con- sisted of drying up of the food, attacks of fungus and in some cases the escape of the flies themselves during the process of feeding ete. Those pairs that produced young were regarded as having es- caped these various possible mishaps and were taken as indica- tions of the vitality and productiveness of the strain. Theexpecta- tion at that time was that any deleterious effect of the inbreeding would show itself in the offspring of any of the pairs. Conse- quently, when a given pair would produce offspring that was num- erous, all well formed, vigorous, and in no apparent way differing from normal offspring, to see whether some slight influence might not be present that could not be detected by ordinary observation a definite measure was taken of (1) their rate of reaction to light and gravity, (2) the total number of eggs produced and (3) the percen- tage of eggs which hatched and emerged. An attempt was made to determine their length of life but this proved too prolonged to allow one to carry it out together with all the other incidents of the already too laborious experiments. The reaction of this animal toward light and against gravity is well known. To get a measure of the rate of reaction the ani- mals were made to travel through a glass tube that had been blackened for 16 cm. on the inside. This tube had a light placed at one end and was inclined about twenty-five degrees. From a glass vial the flies were admitted, one at a time, into the tube and the time from the moment of entrance into the blackened portion of the tube to their emergence was recorded. It was found essen- tial that the two batches of flies (inbreds and normals) should be of the same age, be reared under the same conditions and that the temperature of the room be the same for the two batches. The results are as follows: at a temperatureof 27.2° C. 133 normals took 16 seconds, average, to travel the distance, and 140 inbreds took 15.4 seconds. The two sexes in these two groups were about equal in number. In both groups the males travel the distance on an average in three seconds less time. It is clear from this that the normals and inbreeds are equally responsive to these two INBREEDING AND SELECTION IN DROSOPHILA AMPELOPHILA 133 agents and that the latter have not suffered in this regard as a result of inbreeding. In order to determine the total number of eggs produced it was necessary to isolate the pairs and twice each day pick off all the eggs that had been deposited in and around the food provided. This proved to bea most laborious process, for the eggs are too small to be followed safely with the naked eye and had to be removed individually with the point of a needle. Too much value must not be attached to this measure for the reason that the rate and, therefore, probably the number of eggs deposited seems to depend somewhat, at least, on the condition of the food present, and for the TABLE 2 Strain 6 Number of generations inbred............. aac 3 5 6 | 3) s, Number of days eggs were counted........ 27] 30 34) | odes 32 Total number of eggs laid.............. 433 | 617 | 480 | 724 | 455 | 516 Strain 7 a fs er i. : Lae | | Number of generations inbred ............| 2 | 3 | 5 | 6 | 9; 10 Number of days eggs were counted........ 26 33 29 | 23 | 33 28 Total number of eggs laid.............. 654 | 662| 539] 498| 907) 429 reason that only the eggs deposited during the first twenty-five or thirty days were counted. These creatures live to ke very much older. We have kept females alive 153 days, but after the first twenty-five or thirty days the eggs come only in small numbers. Table 2 gives the actual counts of several females of both strains 6 and 7. We see from the above counts that no material reduction has occurred in egg production during nine and ten generations of inbreeding. Such variations as occur may, of course, represent individual differences in the females. The data given in table 1 of the relative hatching and emerging qualities of the young of normals and of pairs inbred for seventeen generations shows that there is no difference in this respect. 134 W. J. MOENKHAUS In so far as the above determination may be taken as a measure of the vitality of this species we are justified in concluding that from six to seventeen generations of inbreeding no appreciable deterioration has resulted. No such exact determinations were made in later generations, and it is possible that eventually the effects of inbreeding would manifest themselves, but my observa- tions during seventy-five or more generations does not lead me to believe this. 4. Sterility and selection Along at the thirteenth and fourteenth generations the sterility had become very pronounced. Of the offspring of some of the pairs, more than 50 per cent of the males were sterile. On the other hand, while practically all pairs showed at least some degree of sterility this varied very much in the different brothers and sis- ters of the same brood. That this sterility was a direct physiolog- ical result of the inbreeding seemed to me very doubtful. To find the effects of inbreeding showing itself in such a specific way upon the males only, did not, to say the least, meet expectations. Furthermore, sterility was not wholly wanting in forms that had not been inbred. It was highly desirable to continue the experiments on inbreed- ing, and yet to keep the strain alive, it was necessary to find some way to eliminate this high degree of sterility. The process that was most effective was selection. By continuing the strain of those pairs whose offspring showed the highest degree of fertility but at the same time continuing the rigorous inbreeding, it was possible almost completely to eliminate the sterility. This at the same time gave one of the severest tests as to whether inbreeding was the responsible factor, for if the sterility could be eliminated by continuing the very process of inbreeding the latter could not well be held to be the cause of it. This was done as follows: In the fourteenth generation three fertile pairs of brothers and sisters from the same brood were iso- lated and mated. The offspring of each of these were mated in pairs to determine the degree of sterility. By reference to table 135 INBREEDING AND SELECTION IN DROSOPHILA AMPELOPHILA 8T ZI oT ST FI Wo]}e18Uar) (%s) (%s6) (%8) (%16) (%e) (%16) (%L) (%e6) (%01) (%06) Clamney, a ‘gee SSee CSE be cs Sacer fa oe 02 (¢) (¥) (g) (Z) (I) (Mie) (%69) (%st) (%¢8) (%82) (%LL) (%t) (%96 (%Lt) (%s) II v4 8 tr al (ds = z 6F thé Me 6I (S) (F) (8) (2) (1) (%se) (%19) (%02) (%08) (%62) (%T12) (%82) (%e2) (%6F) (%1S) 6 61 II oF SI 1g FI Lg 4 1% (¢) ) (e) (2) ) 8I (penulyuo0ostq) (%o01) ¢z (%ze) L (%89) St 0 (%001) 61 0 (%001) F1 0 (%001) St (¢) (F) (g) (2) (%s) I (%16) && (%¥9) 12 US Gi LI (mee (%001) 28 (YL) 22 kb) 0% 91 (ponulyaoos{(7) (%ee) ¢ (%L9) OL (%62) F (%12) OF (%SL) 6 (%Sz) € cl I | ce I a I | a ‘9) Vv | | (A91[19193 %9'F8 YUM poosq ur0r,q)T4'9 O pun gv suwug fo huojsry € WTAV.L FI UOl}BIOUaY) 136 W. J. MOENKHAUS 3, it will be seen that the pair marked A produced offspring out of which nine of twelve pairs tested were infertile; pair'B produced offspring of which four pairs out of fourteen tested were infertile and pair C threw offspring with five pairs out of fifteen infertile. We have here, then, three pairs showing a wide variation in the degree of fertility of their offspring. Pair A showed 75 per cent of the pairs infertile and pairs B and C approximately the reverse ratio. In the further progress of the experiment pair C was dis- TABLE 4 Strain A | NUMBER | NUMBER NUMBER PAIRS lpr CENT PAIRS PER CENT PAIRS | PAIRS TESTED | PAIRS FERTILE INFERTILE | FERTILE | INFERTILE LS OD )ee | 52 27 25 51 49 18 (2)... 51 37 14 | 72 | 28 1Sa(3)e.. 52 37 15 71 | 29 18 (4)... rl 56 45 | 11 | 80 | 20 1305) ae =| 28 19 9 | 69 | 31 Average for 238 pairs 69 per cent. Strain B i ; —_ he - A HSL) eh trae es 15 Spi 0 100 0 18 (2). 4 Cane 0 100 0 1S 5(3) tectess seesee 2 19 19 | 0 100 0 18 (4).. 22 15 7 | 68 32 Gee 23 23 0 | 100 0 Average for 93 pairs 92.5 per cent. continued so that only pairs A and B were used. I shall in the further description of the experiment refer to the descendants of A as strain A and of B as strain B. Before entering upon the experiment of selection it was neces- sary to ascertain whether, without selection, the descendants of pairs A and B continued to show a low and high fertility respec- tively. Accordingly, a single one of the fertile pairs of the 15th inbred generation of strain A and B was tested. Reference to the table shows that in strain A 27 pairs or 57 per cent of the forty seven pairs tested were infertile, while in strain B none of the thirty- INBREEDING AND SELECTION IN DROSOPHILA AMPELOPHILA 137 seven pairs tested were infertile. The same process was repeated with a pair of the sixteenth generation of the two strains. Strain A showed twenty-seven or sixty-four per cent of the forty-two pairs tested infertile and strain B one or three per cent of the thirty-six pairs tested. . Up to this point in the experiment only a single pair in each generation was tested as to the fertility of its offspring. It might well be that by chance in each case a pair of low fertility was taken in strain A and a pair of high fertility in strain B. Toeliminate this possible error five pairs were taken in each strain and the fertility of their offspring determined. It was further desirable to obtain an estimate of the variability in the fertility of the pairs in the two strains as well as to get a more correct estimate of the average fertility of both. In the diagram these five pairs are designated as 18 (1), 18 (2), ete. Table 4 shows the number of pairs of offspring tested for each pair and the number and per- centage of pairs fertile and infertile. The fertility thus varied in strain A from 51 per cent in 18 (1) to 80 per cent in 18 (4), with an average fertility of 69 per cent. In strain B the fertility was much less variable in the different pairs, the only exceptions being 18 (4), the average fertil- ity being 92.5 per cent. We now have definitely established two strains, one of low and another of high fertility. The important part to be empha- sized here is that this was produced by the process of selection from among the variable offspring of generation fourteen of the inbred strain. To make the experiment more complete it was now neces- sary to obtain a highly fertile strain out of the one with low fertility. Accordingly strain B was discontinued at this point and attention restricted to strain A. Five pairs, 19 (1), 19 (2), 19 (3), ete., were taken from among the offspring of 18 (4) because this showed the highest percentage of fertility. These were tested in the same way as in the preceding generation. Table 5 gives the details. By selection it will be seen that the average fertility was raised from 69 per cent in the 18th generation to 75 per cent in the 19th generation. Among the five pairs used one 19 (2) showed an unusually high fertility (96 per cent). This pair was accordingly JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 1 138 W. J. MOENKHAUS TABLE 5 NUMBER PAIRS | NUMBER PAIRS | NUMBER PAIRS |PER CENT PAIRS PER CENT PAIRS TESTED | FERTILE INFERTILE FERTILE INFERTILE POMEL ymae eae Se 50 27 23 53 47 1ONO Ae .. 51 49 2 96 4 (eee 51 39 12 77 23 TCS) ea 52 44 8 85 15 ilo Lae ee 35 24 1 69 31 Average fertility of 239 pairs 75 per cent. taken to select from. Five pairs were again taken as before. The results appear in table 6. Thus it will be seen that all five pairs showed a uniformly high degree of fertility. The average fertility of all the pairs was raised to 93. 8 per cent. 5. Discussion From the above series of experiments a number of important facts are brought out. 1. Sterility, as it appeared in the strain under consideration, is strongly transmissible through inheritance. 2. It is readily controlled by selection. 3. Inbreeding is probably not the physiological cause of it. That this sterility is transmissible cannot be doubted. The faithfulness with which this occurs appears in the strains A and B. Both were derived from a common pair that showed a variability with respect to this character in the three pairs of its offspring TABLE 6 NUMBER PAIRS NUMBER PAIRS NUMBER PAIRS PER CENT PER CENT PAIRS TESTED FERTILE INFERTILE | PAIRS FERTILE | INFERTILE BMG ces, , 41 37 4 90 10 (Oye: Ue 45 42 ene} 93 7 DOGS rete: ee 45 44 1 97 3 Di hy ee ee ys 36 33 3 91 9 Is eee eee 44 42 2 95 5 Average for 211 pairs 93.8 per cent. INBREEDING AND SELECTION IN DROSOPHILA AMPELOPHILA 139 tested. One of these possessed a high degree of sterility, while the two other pairs showed alow degree. The descendants of thelatter constituting strain B, retained this low degree of infertility through- out. Similarly the descendants of the former, constituting strain A, retained their high degree of infertility up to the time when selection away from this condition was introduced. In the latter process the transmissibility of the character is again emphatically revealed. In the eighteenth generation, pair 4 showed a lower degree of sterility than any of the remaining four pairs of brothers and sisters. Breeding from this pair at once showed offspring with a decided decrease in sterility, compared with the eighteenth generation, the average of the nineteenth generation being 75 per cent of the pairs fertile as compared to 69 per cent of the latter. Again, in the nineteenth generation, pair 19 (2) showed a much lower degree of infertility than the other pairs. Continuing the strain from this pair, this character is faithfully reproduced in the offspring in that they average fertility of the latter is raised to 93.8 per cent. It is important to note in this connection that Castle, in his experiments upon Drosophila, found that productiveness (which as previously noted is quite a different thing from the sterility here considered) was similarly transmissible and amenable to selection. Furthermore, Castle’s experiments would seem to indi- cate that this character of productiveness behaves, in inheritance, after the Mendelian fashion, low productiveness acting as the recessive character. We have evidently to do here, both in the pro- ductiveness in Castle’s experiments and in the sterility in my own, with characters that are germinal for they behave as such. In the strain upon which my experiments were made we have the further remarkable condition that the infertility is inherited only by the males. It is clear that whatever the causal factor or factors to which the sterility may be attributed, it is relatively insignificant compared to the effect of selection upon it. Furthermore, the modification is a germinal one. That inbreeding may be responsible for its prevalance in the strain seems probable, but that it is responsible 140 W. J. MOENKHAUS for its origin is not believed. We have seen that the general vital- ity of the strain, as measured by its productiveness and its reaction to light and gravity, did not suffer as a result of seventeen gener- ations of closest inbreeding. Failing in this, it is not probable that its effect would show itelf in so specific a way as the sudden and complete sterility in certain males of the strain. The improba- bility is further supported by the fact that the inbreeding may be continued unabated if only care be exercised in the selection of the brothers and sisters to be mated, thereby even eliminating practically what sterility may have existed. It is much more probable that the sterility arose spontaneously in this strain or that it is present to a varying degree in this species. With the character present and highly transmissible and subject to selection it is only necessary to carry on indiscrim- inate breeding to have the character appear in varying intensi- ties depending upon the chance combinations. The rule of inbreeding would be only to intensify the chance combination of the character and to insure the more or less continued presence in the successive generations. That this character of sterility is not unique to this inbred strain is evident from its rather frequent presence in pairs not inbred. In my own experience this sterility nearly always showed itself in the males. In one instance I found among a brood, besides a sterile male, two females that failed to deposit eggs although eggs were evidently present in the oviducts. Similarly Castle found in his strain a considerable amount of sterility, and this in some cases among the females. We see, therefore, that sterility is not altogether rare even in broods that were not inbred. The same facts doubtless hold for the character of productive- ness. Castle has shown this to be transmissible and amenable to selection. Inbreeding does not produce it but is instrumental, with indiscriminate mating, in intensifying it, or, if the strain be not eliminated thereby, of preserving it in the strain. INBREEDING AND SELECTION IN DROSOPHILA AMPELOPHILA 141 SEX-RATIO AND SELECTION 1. Introductory The once rather generally accepted notion that nutrition was an influential factor in the control of sex, based on the experiments of Yung (’85), Born (’81), and others, has given place to the now as commonly accepted idea that sex is determined prior to or at the time of fertilization and is independent of the food. The experimental work of Cuénot (’99) King (’07) and others, and the splendid cytological researches of Wilson and his students are largely responsible for this change of view and have been so fre- quently reviewed in the various recent discussions of the problem of sex that they need not be further detailed here. The writer tried some starvation experiments on Drosophila in 1904. During the past year more extensive experiments were carried on under his direction by Mr. Claude D. Holmes, on the effects of starvation during successive generations upon the sex- ratio. These are published under a separate title(’10). It will suffice in this connection, to state that the results coincide with those of recent workers, namely that nutrition does not affect the sex-ratio. 2. The normal sex-ratio One fact was very apparent in these earlier tests and in all sub- sequent experiments, that, under the varying conditions in these creatures were reared, there was the same persistance of the pre- dominance of females over males. Below (table 7) is given the TABLE 7 roo pou | RE | ue fan aan IB aITAN as Ae pee seed etka ee eciers 10506 4972 5534 1:1.113 GRADES cpm s . teen eee oe 2161 995 1166 1S fe Bria Tomatoes and grapes...... 4048 1948 2105 1:1.083 IGTATAS Ge ce. A arches 10218 4757 5461 1:1.14 MOT AME Jeo eB. edo pelts 26933 12667 14266 1:1.126 142 W. J. MOENKHAUS summary of four determinations on a large scale to obtain the normal sex-ratio. The flies were reared in the following manner. Mason jars containing a large quantity of food were exposed to flies in nature. The jars were left open until the larvae began to pupate when all flies were excluded by tying a guaze over the top. As the imagos emerged from time to time they were preserved and the sex-ratios determined. For 26933 individuals, the ratio was one male to 1.126 females. In regard to these determinations only one question, so far as I can see, can be raised. This is the academic one of the greater mortality of the males during development or, to push the matter back a little further and to make it applicable to recent develop- ments in our idea of sex, the greater mortality of the male deter- mining sex cells. In reference to this it may be pointed out that the developmental conditions were as nearly normal as one can imagine. There was an abundance of food, air, hght and mois- ture, and the larvae pupated in the remnants of the food in much the same manner as one finds them doing in nature. In this con- nection the experiments of Miss King (’07) on the influence of food on the sex ratio of Bufo are of importance. In this she finds that the mortality among the males is not greater than among the females. From these facts and from the knowledge that has come to me from the extensive rearing of Drosophilas for six years I am convinced that the sex-ratio in this species is not one of equality. 3. Control of sex-ratio by selection If the sex-ratio of this species, then, is that of 1 male to every 1.126 females, this should be regarded as specific Just as any other of the specific characters of the species. It should, therefore, be subject to fluctuations and to control like other specific characters. Starting with this conception of sex-ratio, I wished to see whether it were possible to control this, within limits, of course, by the process of selection. The results of these experiments I propose to detail below. To apply the selective process on the sex-ratio, the following simple method was employed. Two pairs were selected from INBREEDING AND SELECTION IN DROSOPHILA AMPELOPHILA 143 nature, the one showing a high, the other a low female ratio. These were selected as the parents of the twostrains to be developed. From among the offspring of each of these two pairs a number of single matings were made. From among these the pair that showed the most favorable ratio in the desired direction was selected to continue the strain. The same process was repeated as often as desired. From a number of pairs taken from a banana bunch in Bloom- ington June 12, 1907, two such pairs were obtained. These two pairs go by the numbers 206 and 207, showing the following ratio: 206—52 7:135 ¢ or 1:2.59 207—84 7:75 2 or 1:0.89 A. Strain 206 (high female ratio). The 206 strain will, for convenience, be called the female strain and the 207 strain the male strain, although, as will appear, the latter never developed into a predominantly male strain. In tables 8 and 9 are given in diagramatic form the results of selection for five generations in the former and six generations in the latter. At the margin the genera- tions are numbered 1, 2, 3 etc., and the sex-ratios are indicated. The sex-ratio of the eleven pairs of brothers and sisters mated from the first generation of the female strain (206) varied from 1:93 Gove mee) tol: 7200 (S 3: 56 2). The unusually high female ratio in the latter is probably attri- butable to the small number of individuals obtained from this pair. Two of the pairs threw a predominance of males (table 8 nos. 4 and 8). With the exception of no. 5, all the remaining pairs threw a high female ratio. The ratio for all the pairs was 1:1.67 (578 7: 969 ¢). Wehave here a female ratio very much higher than that characteristic of the species (1:1.14) and yet considerably below that of the parent pair (1:2.59). This may be regarded as a regression toward the normal ratio. It should be pointed out here that too much emphasis should not be placed upon the exact figures representing the ratios in the different pairs, since the number of individuals at best are rather small. In most cases, however, when the number of offspring obtained is fairly large, the ratio approximates the true one, so that in any given MOENKHAUS J. Ww. 144 (L0°T :1) G89 :96 F LEIP OT Z0T O&T 2021 8L:FL LPF €9 329 PP ITG &1 Or } 9 9 g z (6€°T £1) B19 +2Le ZEI 298 BIT :0F 101786 Ze 28 6EI 212T g | | | | 8 L 9 ¢ ¥ (9ST :1) E8h + PSE 901 : #9 COT = 48 £6 °€¢ 19°49 oS: 8 99 :6€ LP :9% | | | | | | Or 8 ZL g £ (4 i (413 21) 108 +£6 12398 18292 #9 :81 18:91 (@8'T :T) , 16E S12 BLT *86 OL =S¢ #6: 1P 6F °12 | | | | Or 6 8 Z (19°T = 1) GOT :g¢ 99:8 £01 -€¢ 9F 1S 19° €P 08 =1¢ GOI = 801 TL:9L POT -TL 89 °F LEG Hee izes | | | | | | com II OL 6 8 L 9 g g z I TROL (6 ST? © 2g) 902 “WOy}B19MAL) 906 Uwug fo hsojsiy 8 WIAVt 145 INBREEDING AND SELECTION IN DROSOPHILA AMPELOPHILA (90° 1 #1) 166? 46 (th 1:1) $99 : 19F (LTT ?1) 109 ‘STS (40° 1:1) LBL GFT (OTT? 1) OF9 188 (90°T:1) £23 06 (80°11) GL -98¢ oh T20L el "i el a oP 60T:9IT 1B i 74 9 F * 19 | IL 861: 491 101:66 601:8IT IT : 01 ee | Caeae ee Siren qo S26 os z I Big FOI ig i ¢8 ile 1g if oy Hi ¥6 0¢:08 OL SiG 8 D ‘ : 7 {4 rat 8:62 FL:F9 © «= 863 GL mrioM 92:92 C8: 9F PPL :GP Z&:0F (tte | | ee. | | IT 6 8 L 9 g g LBIGF ae a ie L 9 G I at a i i a ee ne TOT:ST1 86:12 eran 8 =p 9 HG) an en, ~ @ Gas al ae AL OFT ie oe 6 Sy L G € ae ae ae ae Me Hie 89:61 IT = TROL = "EG 7 WE poe YY ic z (S92: © $8) 10 Log umiug fo fisopsry 6 AIAVL uoy}e10Ner) 146 W. J. MOENKHAUS pair from which a fairly large number of offspring has been obtained shows a high female ratio for instance, this may be taken as a pretty safe indication that the female ratio would be high if all or a much larger number had been obtained. For the next generation ten pairs were taken from brood 9 with aratio of 1.1.94. Brood 3, with a ratio of 1:2.31, would have been a more favorable one to select from, but this is not always possible since the matings must be made before all the offsprmg have emerged and therefore all the data for the complete ratio is ob- tained. Only four pairs of this series of matings came through safely, due purely to the lack of time to give them the attention _ they should have had. The four pairs threw the following sex- ratios: 1: 2.33; 1:2,29; 1:1.27; 11.81. The ratio for the entire brood was 1:1.82 (215 2: 391 ¢). This ratio was somewhat more predominantly female. Pairs were now selected from the brood 8 with a ratio of 1:2.29. Of the seven pairs mated the offspring of only four was obtained and the number of young in each case was quite small. The ratio for all the offspring of the generation was 1:2.17 (93 @ to 201 ¢). The total number here involved is so small that not too much importance should be attached to the increased female ratio. For the matings of the next generation there is little doubt that an unfortunate selection was made. The brood from which the matings were taken showed a ratio of 1:2.46 but this ratio was based on numbers so small (52) that it probably did not represent the true ratio of the pair. This may account for the drop in the ratio for all the broods of the 4th generation to 1:1.386 (854 4 483 9). Two sets of matings were now made from as many broods of the fourth generation. One of these series was again taken from the brood showing the most favorable female ratio 1:1.90 (85 2 162 ¢), but the other series was taken from a brood showing a relatively low female ratio, 1:1.04 (64 # 67 ¢). From the former the ratio of five pairs was obtained showing a ratio of 1:1.39 (372 2z—5d18 ¢) and from the latter the ratio of 7 pairs, show- ing a ratio of 1:1.07 (496 ~: 535 ¢). INBREEDING AND SELECTION IN DROSOPHILA AMPELOPHILA 147 b. Strain 207 (low female ratio). From pair 207 with a ratio of 1:0.89 (84 «: 75 2) it was hoped to develop by selection a strain showing a low female ratio. Seven matings from the first generation produced 536 « and 579 9¢, or a ratio of 1:1.08. The range of ratios of the individual pairs was from 1:1.22 (99 ¢: 121 ¢) to 1:0.86 (79 «: 68 ¢). This selection was continued for four generations, the matings being made from broods with a low female ratio. The ratios of all the offspring in thesuccessive generations were 1:1.06 (220 7: 228 ¢) 1:1.10 (581 2 : 640 Sheed: 104 (142 & : 14749)s 117, (18h@ + 607 2) for; the second, third, fourth and fifth generations respectively (See Table 9). This low female ratio showed itself rather uniformly in all the individual matings, a notable exception occurring in the fifth gener- tion (see Table 9, pair 3.) with a ratio of 1:2.53 (45 #: 144 9). On the other hand no pairs threw a great preponderance of males, the most notable among those from which a large number of progeny was obtained being pair 2 in the third generation in which the ratio was 1:0.87 (115 #: 101 ¢). For the sixth generation two sets of matings were made as in the fifth genera- tion of the strain 206. One of these was made from a brood with a ratio of 1:2.53 (45 o« : 144 ¢) and the other from a brood with a relatively low female ratio, 1:1.36 (72 @: 98 9). From the former the total progeny of eight matings gave a ratio of 1:1.42 (461 =: 654 9?) and from the latter the ratio of eleven matings was 1.1.05 (944 7:997 9). c. Discussion. It seems from the above experiment that the sex- ratio in this creature is a strongly transmissible character. Start- ing with a pair that throws an offspring showing either high or a low female ratio it was possible to maintain, by selection, a strain maintaining the respective ratios. The offspring from a given pair, when mated in pairs, show a considerable variation in the sex-ratio of their children. It is thus possible to develop a strain with a low female ratio from one with a high female ratio, or the reverse, as is shown in the fifth and sixth generation of experi- ment 206 and 207 respectively (tables 8 and 9). The sex-ratio is clearly amenable to selection like any other character. 148 W. J. MOENKHAUS It is an interesting fact that it is possible to develop a strain with a high female ratio much more easily and pronouncedly than a male strain. I have repeatedly tried to hold the sex-ratio to or below that of unity but without success. Not infrequently pairs will throw a predominance of males but it has not been possible to hold them there. The best I have ever been able to do is to hold it considerably below that of the normal, but never as low as unity. On the other hand, it is relatively easy to select in the direction of females even to the extent of 1 to 2. It should be observed that in the breeding of these strains the most rigorous inbreeding was practiced. It might, therefore, be that the difficulty of selecting for a low female ratio results from the possibility that inbreeding tends toward the elimination of the males. My extensive experience in inbreeding these crea- tures, however, does not bear out this explanation. Furthermore, in the sixth generation of the high female strain it,was possible in two generations to reduce this ratio to near unity notwith- standing that the same rigorous inbreeding was continued. 4. Relative influence of male and female in determining the sex-ratio Having thus produced two strains showing a decided difference in the sex-ratio of their offspring I wished to determine two further points. First, whether the maternal or the paternal elements had an equal share in the control of this ratio, and second, whether this ratio was determined in the process of fertilization. To this end reciprocal crosses were made between the two strains and the pro- portion of the sexes in the offspring ascertained. Three experi- ments were performed in the following manner. From among a brood of each of the two strains a large number of individuals were taken. Before sexual maturity a number of males and females were isolated, while the remainder were allowed to reproduce. The latter gave a control for each of the strains. The isolated virgin females of one strain were mated with the males of the other. Each experiment thus consisted of four multiple matings. (1) A number of brothers and sisters belonging to the male strain. This furnished a control for the male strain. (2) A number of brothers and sisters belonging to the female strain. This furnished a control INBREEDING AND SELECTION IN DROSOPHILA AMPELOPHILA 149 for the female strain. (3) Females from the male strain mated with males from the male strain, and (4) the reciprocal of ‘(3)’. In crossing two strains as in the above experiment three possi- bilities might obtain. First, that the two sexes have an equal influence in determining the sex-ratio; second, that either sex have a predominant influence and third, that a ratio result unlike that obtaining in either of the parental strains. While the first is probably the expected result, the experiments show in a most decided way that the male has little or no influence in deter- mining the sex-ratio in this species (tables 10, 11 and 12). In most of the cases the ratio of the offspring falls pretty closely around that of the strain from which the females were taken. In two instances the ratios exceeded 100 per cent influence. The re- maining ones, with the exception of strain 244 in which the male in- fluence amounted to 35 per cent show the female influence almost near enough to 100 per cent to justify one in regarding the differences merely as fluctuations incident to the small number of individuals involved. The unusually great influence of the male in strain 244 might be accounted for in two ways. First the number of individuals involved in this experiment are relatively small so that the ratios of both the control and the crossed broods are not as reliable as in the other experiments. Secondly, the flies used for this experiment were taken from the earlier generations of the two strains, before, we may believe, any considerable selec- tion had been applied to fix the character of the respective strains. Indeed, this seems to be borne out in the other experiments. The materials of the three experiments were not all taken from the same generation but were taken from different generations in the development of the strain. Thus, in experiment 1 the broods were taken from the first generation of strain 206 and 207. In experiment 2 the broods came from the second generation of strain 206 and the third of 207. The third experiment was made from the fourth and fifth generations of strains 206 and 207 respectively. Arranging these experiments in a series, based on the length of time that selection had been practiced on the broods used, we see that the male influence decreases as the selective time increases. 150 W. J. MOENKHAUS TABLE 10 Experiment 1 . | No. 242 No. 245 No. 243 * No. 244 No. of strain mated....... { B12, K 2122 | 21220 X ldo | 24g X B14q | 21499 K Ber | @ 9 cs 9 o 9 cy 9 Number of individuals....... 208 | 194) 463) 475:) 1a | 2738) 225R sit Sex-raiioi(actual) eres eee 1300") (0.98) | 100) 1503") 1-00 | £60 Me O0s iss ihheaneticaliratiossse eer 1.00 | 1.288 1.00 | 1.288 Influence of male parents.... 7.3 per cent 35 per cent Influence of female parents.. 92.7 per cent 65 per cent TABLE 11 Experiment 2 : | No. 271 No. 274 No. 272 No. 273 No. of the strains mated. . { 252i X 252: | 252309 K 255g} 255g X255q | 255g9. YX 252rach a | 9 of Q cs 9 a g Number of individuals.......| 332} 545] 589} 919; 739); 818] 680} 698 Sex-ratio (aotualyes.. 22) 1.00 | 1.69 | 1.00 | 1.56 | 1.00 | 1.106) 1.00 | 1.026 Theoretical sex-ratio........ | 1.00 | 1.365 1OON ERS G5 a Sa ay, | ; Influence of male parents... . 22 per cent 0 per cent (—13) Influence of female parents. .| 78 per cent 100 per cent (1.13) TABLE 12 Experiment 3 7 aA figs: 6,7. PARAMAECIUM AURELIA AND PARAMAECIUM CAUDATUM 225 modern systematic works as P. aurelia O. F. M. and P. cau- datum Ehrbg. Dujardin, in 1841, in his treatise on the Infusoria !, recognized but two species of Paramaecium as follows: PARAMECIE AURELIE.—Paramecium aurelia. Corps ovale oblong, arrondi ou obtus aux deux extrémités, plus large en arriére.—Long de 0, 18 4 0, 25. PARAMECIE A QUEUE.—Paramecium caudatum. Corps fusiforme, obtus ou arrondi en avant, aminci en arriére.—Long de 0, 22. His figures of the two species show clearly the characteristic form which he considered diagnostic. Various investigators, including Stein, and Claparéde and Lachmann, questioned the justification of considering these two forms as distinct species, basing their opinions, as had Ehrenberg and Dujardin, solely on external characters, and they united these two forms under one species, and applied Miiller’s original namie, P. aurelia. This union of aurelia and caudatum into one species was accepted by all the subsequent students of Paramae- cium, e.g., Balbiani, Biitschli, Engelmann, Gruber and Kolliker and consequently all the early literature on the conjugation of this infusorian, refers to the organism as P. aurelia, although it had but a single micronucleus. Maupas, in 1883, in his studies on the ciliates,’ wrote :— Tous les auteurs jusqu’ici ont décrit Paramecium aurelia comme ne possédant jamais qu’un nucléole d’assez grande taille et mesurant de Omm,005 4 Omm,008. C’est en effet la forme que l’on rencontre la plus fréquemment. Mais j’ai obsérve aussi de nombreux individus pourvus de deux nucléoles plus petits et de structure différente de la précedénte. Ils étaient de forme sphérique et composés d’un corpus- cule central opaque vivement coloré par les teintures et ne mesurant que Omm,003; enveloppé d’une couche corticale mesurant en diamétre Omm,005, claire et ne se colorant pas. 12Histoire naturelle des Zoophytes. Infusoires, ete. Paris, 1841. Pp. 481-483, PIS 8; figs:'5, 65.7. 8Contributions a l’etude morphologique et anatomique des Infusoires cilies, Arch. de zool. exp. et gen., (2), I, 1883, p. 660. 226 LORANDE LOSS WOODRUFF Thus Maupas tacitly accepted the current view that there was one large species of Paramaecium, but observed, for the first time, that certain paramaecia have a different nuclear apparatus from that previously described. This author, however, in 1888, stated that in his earlier work he, as all his immediate predeces- sors, had confused two species, and he wrote" as follows: Ces deux formes de micronucléus constituent le caractére distinctif le plus important entre les deux espéces de Paramécies. La premiére forme appartient toujours et uniquement au P. caudatum, la seconde, également toujours et uniquement, au P. aurelia. Pour Ehrenberg et Dujardin, P. caudatum se distingue par un corps allongé, fusiforme, obtus en avant, aminci en arriére: P. aurelia par un corps plus large, presque ovale, obtus aux deux extrémités. Ces différ- ences de contour général, tout en étant réelles, ne sont pas absolument rigoureuses; Car, si on ne trouve jamais de Paramécie 4 un seul micro- nucléus affectant la formed trapue obtuse, il n’est pas trés rare d’en rencontrer 4 deux micronucléus, ayant pris la forme allongée 4 queue. Dans ce dernier cas, il est impossible de savoir 4 quelle espéce on a affaire, sans une préparation permettant de voir les micronucléus. Ce charactére distinctif, basé sur le contour général, n’a done qu’une valeur relative. Il est cependant bon d’en tenir compte; car lorsqu’on s’est exercé & bien distinguer les deux espéces, il suffit presque toujours et trompe rarement. Le P. caudatum parait avoir une taille un peu plus grande que celle du P. aurelia. Ainsi, j’ai mesuré des premiers depuis 120 jusqu’a 325 wp, tandis que les seconds ont varié seulement entre 70 et 290 u. En outre, P. caudatum se conjugue avec une taille variant entre 125 4 220 w, et P. aureliaentre 754145. Pendant la conjugaison, le déroule- ment rubanaire, préparant la fragmentation du nucléus, s’effectue chez le P. aurelia, des le stade D, tandis que chez le P. caudatum il ne com- mence que vers le milieu du stade G. Chez cette derniére espéce, le nucléus mixte de copulation donne naissance finalement & huit corpus- cules, chez P. aurelia il n’en produit que quatre; il en résulte que chez celle-ci l’état normal se trouve rétabli dés la premiére bipartition qui suit la conjugaison, et chez P. caudatum seulement aprés la seconde. Toutes ces différences anatomiques et physiologiques me paraissent plus que suffisantes pour justifier la distinction des deux espéces. Il “Sur la multiplication des Infusoires cilies, Arch. de zool. exp. et gen., (2), 4, 1888, pp. 231-235. PARAMAECIUM AURELIA AND PARAMAECIUM CAUDATUM 227 est fort possible que Claparéde et Lachmann aient eu raison, en considér- ant la forme caudatum comme plus typique que la forme aurelia. $i, en effet, on examine avec soin les dessins de O.—F. Miiller, on penche & croire que le vieux micrographe a vu et figuré la premiére seulement. En se conformant strictement au principe de la loi de priorité, ce serait done le nom aurelia, donné par Miller, qui devrait étre conservé & la forme fuselée. Mais, d’un autre c6té, Ehrenberg et Dujardin ont dis- tingué ce type et l’ont décommé caudatum. Si nous lui conservons la vieille dénomination aurelia, il devient impossible de transmettre le qualificatif caudatum & la forme qui, le plus souvent, est obtuse 4 ses deux extrémités. Il faudrait alors eréer un nouveau nom. Je crois plus simple de conserver les dénominations d’ Ehrenberg. Since 1889, when Maupas" and Hertwig'®, in studies on conju- gation added further evidence for the distinction of the two forms, - they have been generally accepted as ‘good’ species. Calkins, however, again raised the question in 1906: ‘‘I personally believe that the slight differences that distinguish the two types of Para- mecium are not of specific value, and hold that P. caudatum should be regarded as a mere variant of P. aurelia.’’!7 He based this view chiefly on the following observations. One of a pair of ex-conjugants of P. caudatum, which he was studying by his well-known accurate culture methods, reorganized as P. caudatum and the other as P. aurelia, i.e., the latter had two small micro- nuclei, instead of one, and remained in this condition for about forty-five generations in pedigree culture, and then reverted to the caudatum type with one large micronucleus. While the aurelia phase existed, the rate ofedivision was comparatively slow, and when the caudatum phase was reassumed the rate of division immediately increased considerably. Calkins also con- sidered the relative size of the two forms, and the conjugation phenomena as described by Maupas and Hertwig, and concluded that these are not of such a character as to warrant their being considered diagnostic. . 6 Le rajeunissement karyogamique chez les cilies, Arch. de zool. exp. et gen., (2), 7, 1889. 16 Ueber die Konjugation der Infusorien, Abh. kgl. bayr. Akad. d. Wiss. Miinchen, 2, C1.°17, 1889. 17Paramecium aurelia and Paramecium caudatum. Studies by the pupils of W. T. Sedgwick, 1906. 228 LORANDE LOSS WOODRUFF Jennings, in his studies on heredity in Paramaecium,!* showed that he could readily isolate a considerable number of pure lines from a wild culture, and that these pure lines breed true, 1.e., there exist inherent hereditary differences in size, persisting when all other conditions remain the same. ‘These different lines fall usually into two main groups, one group having a mean length greater than 170u, and the other having a mean length less than 140u. But he was able finally to isolate a line intermediate in size, and thus to bridge over the gap. As Jennings points out, even if it were not possible to isolate a strain of intermediate size between the two large groups, this would not give a basis for distinguishing two species. However, he states: “I may be permitted to add to the precise data thus far given a personal impression or surmise. Though, as I-have shown, intermediate lines occur, I believe that it will be found that most Paramecia can be placed in one of the two groups that we have called ‘cau- datum’ and ‘aurelia’. In other words, if my impression is cor- rect, most lines will have a mean length either below 145 microns or above 170 microns; rarely will lines be found whose mean falls between these values. Such at least has been my experience in a large amount of work. Furthermore, I am inclined to believe that those belonging to the smaller group (mean length below 145 microns) will be found to have as a rule two micronuclei; those belonging to the large group but one micronucleus. This matter is worthy of special examination.” Jennings and Hargitt in 1909 made this examination and in a preliminary communicatior’ stated!® that “two sets of races could be distinguished, one set having two micronuclei, the other but one. The races with two micronuclei were all smaller than those with one. The larger races together thus correspond with what had before been described as P. caudatum, the smaller races with P. aurelia. The two differ also in the size, position and 18Heredity, variation and evolution in Protozoa. II. Heredity and variation of size and form in Paramecium, with studies of growth, environmental action and selection, Proc. Amer. Philosophical Society, 47, no. 190, 1908. 19Characteristics of the diverse races of Paramecium, Proc. Amer. Soc. Zool- ogists, 1909 meeting, in Science, March 25, 1910. PARAMAECIUM AURELIA AND PARAMAECIUM CAUDATUM 229 staining relations of the micronuclei, in ways that correspond to the descriptions of Hertwig and Maupas. But 7 rare cases specimens of the caudatum races have two micronuclei, those of aurelia races but one, thus confirming the observation of Calkins on this point.” In accordance with the conclusions of Calkins, I have used the specific name aurelia to include both the aurelia and caudatum forms; but my extended study of Paramaecia cultures has demon- strated that these two forms are remarkably constant, and I am inclined to the view that they are distinct species, in the sense in which this term is generally used in biological work. The data on which I base this conclusion are chiefly as follows: the pedi- gree culture of P. aurelia which I have had under daily observa- tion for (so far) more than three and one half years, during which time more than 2100 generations have been attained, has bred practically true to the aurelia type as described by Maupas in the passage quoted. The pedigree culture of P. caudatum which I have carried for nearly seven months, and which has attained more then 300 generations up to the present time, has bred prac- tically true to the caudatum type as described by that author. The pedigree culture of P. aurelia was started on May 1, 1907, with & ‘wild’ individual which was found in a laboratory aquar- ium, and was carried on at Williams College during May and June, 1907; at the Woods Hole Marine Biological Laboratory during parts of the summers of 1907 through 1910; and at Yale Univer- sity during the academic years from 1907 to the present time, November 30, 1910. The pedigree culture of P. caudatum was started on May 14, 1910, with a ‘wild’ individual collected from a pond at New Haven, Conn., and was carried on at Yale Univer- sity except for a period of a few weeks in the summer when it was taken to the Woods Hole Laboratory. The original specimen of each culture was placed in about five drops of culture fluid on a glass slide having a central ground concavity, and when the animal had divided twice, producing four individuals, each of these was isolated on a separate slide to form the four lines of the respective cultures. The pedigree cultures have been maintained by the isolation of a specimen from 230 LORANDE LOSS WOODRUFF each of these lines practically every day up to the present time, thus precluding the possibility of conjugation taking place between sister cells. The number of divisions of each line has been recorded daily at the time of isolation and the average rate of these four lines has been again averaged for ten-day periods (cf. fig. 1). The culture medium has consisted of materials collected prac- tically at random from laboratory aquaria, hay infusions, ponds, etc. The infusions were thoroughly boiled to prevent the con- tamination of the pure lines of the pedigree cultures by ‘wild’ individuals. Permanent preparations have been preserved from time to time for the study of the cytological changes during the life history. In the light of this experience with cultures I shall consider each of the characters emphasized by Maupas. Shape. The general shape of the aurelia and caudatum forms is, in nearly all specimens, quite distinctive; aurelia is slightly more broad at the posteriorthan at the anterior end, while cau- datum, as the name implies, is quite pointed at the posterior end as compared: with the anterior end. The posterior end, in the specimens in my pure culture, is markedly pointed, and being free from endoplasmic inclusions, appears transparent and clearly delineated even under a lens with a magnification of ten diameters. ‘I have been accustomed to allow stock material from my pedigree aurelia culture to multiply in large flasks of hay infusion, for various experiments on conjugation, ete. Frequently I have used this material for my elementary class in biology and I have found that even the novice has called attention to the fact that the shape of the ends was reversed as compared with the figure of caudatum in the text-book. McClendon, how- ever, stated that in his study of aurelia and caudatum he found ‘no characters of outward form” which were diagnostic. Changes in the vitality of my pedigree lines never have been very marked, and consequently I have not had organisms, in the direct lines of my pedigree cultures, representing physiolog- ical extremes to compare. Numerous experiments, however, have been made with ‘stock’ material left over after the daily isolations of the pure lines, which have clearly shown that, for PARAMAECIUM AURELIA AND PARAMAECIUM CAUDATUM 231 example, even when the aurelia and caudatum cultures are sub- jected to unfavorable environmental conditions, as, for example, scarcity of food, the very great majority of individuals retain the shape which is characteristic of the race. Size. As has frequently been pointed out, size alone is an entirely inadequate character on which to base species. It is significant, however, I believe, that during the long life of my pure strains, I have never observed the relative size of the indi- viduals of the aurelia and caudatum forms, when bred under identical conditions, to change greatly during any single period. Experiments have shown that even when the two forms have been bred under diverse conditions, for example, aurelia in a medium rich in food and caudatum in a medium with a very small amount of bacterial growth, the size of the caudatum form always has remained sufficiently great to render it distinguish- able from the aurelia form. On the basis of size alone, then, it has been possible, with great accuracy, to separate the two forms when mingled together. It is probable, of course, that I began my pedigree cultures with very typical specimens of the aurelia?® and caudatum groups as described by Jennings. If such be the case, then my cultures add considerable evidence in favor of the different strains which Jennings has isolated. It appears to me, however, that what that author has done for Paramaecium, can probably be done for many closely related species of infusoria, and the very fact that he did find it difficult to secure an inter- mediate race between the aurelia and the caudatum groups is a strong point in favor of the. distinctness of the forms. Vitality. It has been customary to regard the rate of repro- duction of infusoria in culture as a just criterion of vitality. Maupas wrote: ‘‘Cette faculté de reproduction (aurelia) resem- ble beaucoup 4 celle de la précédente espéce (caudatum).”” My cultures completely corroborate this statement, for during the six and one half months of the life of the caudatum culture, 324 generations have been attained, while during the same period, 20For further details of the culture see: L. L. Woodruff, Two thousand genera- tions of Paramaecium; Archiv fiir Protistenkunde, 21, 3, 1911. 21Sur la multiplication des Infusoires cilies, loc. cit., p. 234. 232 LORANDE LOSS WOODRUFF under identical conditions, the aurelia culture has advanced from the 1785th generation to the 2117th generation, or 332 genera- tions. This gives a difference of only eight generations in the rate of reproduction of the two forms during seven months (cf. fig. 1). These cultures obviously do not support the statement, frequently made, that aurelia is a weaker form than caudatum. Maupas remarked that P. aurelia was one of the most common infusoria, and Jennings found that a typical wild culture could MAY JUNE JULY AUG. SEPT. OCT. NOV. 1909 Fig. 1 Diagram showing the comparative rate of division of the pedigree cultures of Paramaecium aurelia and Paramaecium caudatum, when bred under identical conditions, from May 14, 1910, to November 30, 1910. During this pe- riod P. aurelia (designated by continuous line) advanced from 1785 to 2117 genera- tions, while P. caudatum (designated by broken line) advanced from 1 to 324 generations. The rate of division is averaged for ten-day periods. The ordin- ates represent the average daily rate of division of the four lines of the cultures. be resolved into caudatum and aurelia groups. It has been my experience that it is as easy to procure one form as the other in the wild state. Certainly my aurelia culture, which theo- retically would provide individuals to the number represented by 2 to the 2117th power, gives more evidence of vitality and reproductive power than has been demonstrated for any other animal. Conjugation. I have no data in regard to the conjugation of either of these forms, for, so far, in all experiments with stock PARAMAECIUM AURELIA AND PARAMAECIUM CAUDATUM 233 material left over after the daily isolations from my pure lines, I have failed to observe a single syzygy, either between aurelia lines or caudatum lines, or between aurelia and caudatum lines. Jenning’s” experiments on conjugation in Paramaecium bring out data which add further evidence that in certain strains at least a predisposition to conjugation does not exist. Maupas wrote: ‘“C’est bien certainement une des espéces (aurelia) qui se recontrent les plus fréquemment 4 l’etat conjugué.”’ Maupas, as we have seen, pointed out a difference in the nuclear phenomena during conjugation which he held to be of diagnostic value, and Hertwig apparently showed that aurelia has two micro- nuclei at the reorganization after conjugation. Calkins, on the other hand, has shown that P. caudatum, in one case, reorgan- ized with two micronuclei and later reverted to the uninucleate type. Such a case can readily be considered a ‘sport’ which has arisen possibly by the persistence of the stage with two micro- nuclei immediately following the separation of the conjugants, or by the precocious division ef a single micronucleus previous to the first regular vegetative division after conjugation. Although, as Calkins stated also, forty-five generations is a long time for an abnormality, if it be such, to persist; nevertheless, I believe it is very significant that, whereas during the presence of two micronuclei the division rate averaged only 0.8 of a division per day, after the loss of one of the micronuclei the division rate increased to the remarkable rate of 2.2 divisions per day, on the average for a period of four months. It is also of interest that the other exconjugant which reorganized ‘normally’ as caudatum failed to live. So far as I am aware, the following statement?’ by Simpson is the only record of a possible case of conjugation between aurelia and caudatum: ‘‘Out of twenty-one attempts I had but two par- tial successes. Conjugation took place on two slides: the period | was normal. After separation each of the ex-conjugates divided once: on the third day they died off. In anticipation of something 22What induces conjugation in Paramecium? Jour. Exp. Zodl. 9, 2, 1910. Observations on binary fission in the life-history of Ciliata, Proc. Royal Soc. Edinburgh, 1901, pp. 407-408. 234 LORANDE LOSS WOODRUFF of this sort from analogy in higher forms, I intended to let the two pairs run their natural course, foregoing the desire to examine their nuclear condition. In view, therefore, of the incomplete- ness of the experiment, it is perhaps unwarrantable to draw any results regarding hybridization and infertility, or even the ‘fixity of species’ so far down in the animal scale.”” Simpson gives no data to prove that these were actually syzygies between the two forms, but if they were, it is obvious that they were not fertile. Jennings and Hargitt stated that they had been unable to induce the two forms to conjugate. In view of the fact that, for example, Maupas studied conjuga- tion of both P. aurelia and P. caudatum, and Hertwig studied conjugation of P. aurelia, and also that Jennings observed con- jugation in both his aurelia races and in his caudatum races, it is clear that aurelia forms conjugate and caudatum forms con- jugate, but there is no positive evidence that conjugation takes place between individuals of aurelia and caudatum. Macronucleus. The normal macronucleus of aurelia was de- scribed by Hertwig and Maupas and that of caudatum agrees very closely. It is an ellipsoidal body with a smooth contour, except for a slight depression, in which the micronucleus is usually located. But the form of the macronucleus of both aurelia and caudatum frequently departs very greatly from the ‘normal’ condition. It is not unusual to find paramaecia of my aurelia cultures with the macronucleus resolved into several parts. These parts apparently may be gathered together into a typical nucleus for division, or the cytoplasm and micronuclei may divide, the macronuclear fragments which are in the posterior part form- ing the macronucleus of one daughter cell and those in the anterior part forming the macronucleus of the other daughter cell. I shall reserve the full discussion of these interesting changes for a special paper. It is- important to emphasize the fact that these are not pathological conditions, since the general vitality, as indicated by the rate of division, is not appreciably affected. PARAMAECIUM AURELIA AND PARAMAECIUM CAUDATUM 235 Calkins, however, found nuclear fragmentation in degenerat- ing individuals of caudatum, Wallengren® and Kasanzeff* showed that various changes including fragmentation of the mac- ronucleus occur when paramaecia are starved, and Popoff?? described a large increase in size and fragmentation of the macro- nucleus in degenerating caudatum which paralleled the conditions observed in specimens ripe for conjugation. He also obtained similar changes by subjecting the animals to various reagents.”® Mitrophanow”* emphasized the fact that the structure of the macronucleus varied considerably under the influence of diverse conditions, and he described fragmentation and figured spherical pieces which very closely resembled micronuclei. It is evident, then, from my cultures that the macronucleus of both aurelia and caudatum is subject to great morphological vari- ation without appreciably affecting the rate of reproduction, L.e., it is entirely normal. It is also apparent from the work of the other authors cited that degeneration changes become manifest in the fragmentation of the macronucleus. Consequently the macronucleus presents no character which is of permanent diag- nostic value. Micronucleus. Maupas, as we have seen, regarded the micro- nucleus as the chief distinguishing character of aurelia and cau- datum, and my cultures substantiate his view. Fixed and stained individuals show that the micronuclei of the aurelia culture for over two thousand generations have conformed in a remarkable degree to the aurelia type as described by the French investi- gator, and the micronuclei of the caudatum culture have conformed to his caudatum type. Studies on the life history of Protozoa. IV. Death of the A Series, Jour. Exp. Zoél., 1, 3, 1904. % Tnanitionserscheinungen der Zelle, Zeit. f. allg. Physiologie, I, 1, 1901. *Experimentelle Untersuchungen ueber Paramecium caudatum. Inaug.—Diss., Ziirich, 1901. 27Depression der Protozoenzelle und der Geschlechtszellen der Metazoen, Archiv fiir Protistenkunde, R. Hertwig Festband, 1907. 28Experimentelle Zellstudien III. Ueber einige Ursachen der physiologischen Depression der Zelle. Archiv fiir Zellforschung. 4, 1909. 22T,’appareil nucléaire des Paramécies, Arch. Zool. Exp. et Gen., (4), I, 1908. 236 LORANDE LOSS WOODRUFF It is not only the presence of two micronuclei, but their pecul- iar morphology, as emphasized by Maupas, which is character- istic of the aurelia type. I have found one individual of the au- relia culture with three micronuclei, and a few specimens in which I have been unable, in total mounts, to distinguish a single micronucleus or more than one micronucleus. ~.But when only one micronucleus could be seen it has been of the aurelia type, and otherindividuals of the culture at the same period have had the two characteristic micronuclei. I have observed a variation in the number of micronuclei in various pedigree cultures of hypotrichs,*° Popoff has found reduplication in Stylonychia mytilus and Para- maecium caudatum during degeneration, and Kasanzeff has observed the same in starved P. caudatum. Thus, while my cultures of Paramaecium and various hypotrichous species sub- stantiate Wallengren’s and Calkins’ statement that the micro- nuclei are the most stable elements in the cell, and the last to be visibly affected by environmental changes, nevertheless it is apparent that they are subject to variations under certain unknown conditions. Temporary variation, therefore, cannot be considered as having weight in determining species. The essen- tial fact is, however, that throughout the existence of my aurelia and caudatum cultures, the morphology of the micronuclei has conformed to Maupas’ description for the respective species. It must be borne in mind also that P. caudatum has been the subject of more extended study by exact culture methods than any protozoon except P. aurelia, and in all these long pedigree cultures it has bred true to the caudatum type, at least with respect to the single micronucleus. Calkins, for example, in his impor- tant investigations on the life history of this form, carried three distinct cultures, by the aid of artificial stimuli during periods of physiological depression, through 379, 570, and 742 generations respectively. McClendon, also, studied mass cultures of Para- maecium for considerable periods and stated that he never found individuals ‘‘ with different numbers of micronuclei in the same culture.’’?! 30An experimental study on the life history of hypotrichous Infusoria, Jour. Exp. Zodél., 2, 4, 1905. 31Protozoan studies, Jour. Exp. Zool., 6, 2, 1909. PARAMAECIUM AURELIA AND PARAMAECIUM CAUDATUM 237 SUMMARY Briefly stated, I am convinced from my study of paramaecia that— 1. A very great majority of individuals of aurelia and caudatum can be distinguished on the basis of shape alone; 2. Avery great majority of individuals of aurelia and cau- datum can be distinguished on the basis of size alone; 3. The power of reproduction, or general vitality, of aurelia and caudatum is practically identical; 4. The macronucleus of aurelia and caudatum is subject to such great variation that it affords no diagnostic feature; 5. The micronuclear apparatus of aurelia and caudatum affords crucial diagnostic characters. I have summarized the various characters of the two forms as they have shown themselves in my long pedigree cultures, and it is evident that they have conformed practically identically to the Maupasian types—such variations as have appeared not being so great as have been observed to occur in undisputed species, or as one would expect to find when the intimate relation of the unicellular organism to the environment is considered. Therefore, I believe, that since one of the crucial tests of a species is its ability to breed true to its type indefinitely, aurelia and cau- datum have adequately met this test during more generations than any other animal under observation, and accordingly Paramaecium aurelia O.F.M.and Paramaecium caudatum Ehrbg. should be regarded as distinct species.*: * 22TIn this paper I have followed the spelling of the name of the genus as given by its founder, except in direct quotations from other authors. 337 have the satisfaction to note that my conclusions are in accord with the final results published by Jennings and Hargitt in the last number of this journal, which was received when this paper was in press. MHargitt says, “There is cytological warrant for distinguishing caudatum races from aurelia races, and it seems probable that it will continue to be convenient to distinguish- these as two species.’’ MALE ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER IN THE CRAY-FISH, CAMBARUS AFFINIS: THEIR STRUCTURE AND USE E. A. ANDREWS From the Zoélogical Laboratory, Johns Hopkins University THIRTY-ONE TEXT FIGURES AND FOUR PLATES INTRODUCTION The present paper is a contribution to our knowledge of the means that lead to the fertilization of the egg. It is part of the history of the sperm outside the body of the animal. Sexual reproduction in most complex animals involves the trans- fer of the sperm from one animal to another, before the eggs can be fertilized. Among animals the various methods by which the sperm is transferred may be grouped under the three heads, diffuse, direct, indirect. By diffuse sperm transfer we mean the discharge of the sperm into the water, where it may meet the eggs outside of the female, as in certain coelenterates, echinoderms and annelids, or may be drawn into the body of the female, as in certain lamel- libranchs. By direct sperm transfer we mean the method found in the majority of complex animals, in which there is more or less direct application of the terminal parts of the passages leading the sperm to the exterior to the passages leading from the exter- ior direct to the eggs. In this group there is commonly a true copulation. By indirect sperm transfer we mean those peculiar complex methods of getting the sperm from the testis to the eggs that are found in a few cases amongst the great groups of animals, as in JOURNAL OF MORPHULOGY, VOL. 22, No. 2 239 240 E. A. ANDREWS earthworms, spiders, some cephalopods and leeches. The es- sence of these cases of indirect sperm transfer lies in the fact that while the sperm is transferred by organs, and not by floating, yet these organs either do not put the sperm into the egg passages, or else if they do they are not organs directly concerned with the discharge of sperm, or both may be true. In indirect sperm trans- fer there is no true copulation, or intromission, but at most con- jugation or clasping. The three methods are not always sharply separable, and may be regarded as only convenient groupings of physiological processes that occur here Andgthere among animals without reference to their systematic positions. The diffuse method is obviously the one open to the most hazard in the sperm and eggs meeting; the direct method by intromission the best assured method; the in- direct method most perculiar and needing special explanation in each case. In the crayfishes and lobsters most interesting cases of indirect sperm transfer occur, and it is the purpose of the present paper to describe the organs of the males that are used to transfer the sperm > to the receiving organs that have been described in previous com- munications (1, 2, 3). In these animals the male transfers the sperm to the outside surface of the female where it remains till the eggs are laid, when fertilization takes place outside the body. In the American lobster and the sixty and more species of cray- fishes of the genus Cambarus that are found in all but the most western parts of North America, the sperm on the shell of the female is stored in a special pocket, or receptacle, but in the other genera of crayfishes, all the world over, there is no such receptacle . and the sperm is believed to be distributed over the shell of the female in separate spermatophores. While the sperm pocket has been described (1, 2, 3) the organs of the male that fill the pocket have had only such consideration as was necessary for the sys- tematist, who found them to be of the greatest value in distin- guishing species and in forming subgenera. In the present paper the anatomy of the male organs is exam- ined and their use as organs of sperm-transfer is explained. ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 241 CAMBARUS AFFINIS While the sexual habits of all the species of Cambarus, agree in the main, the species affinis has been more studied, and as in describing the female organs concerned in sperm transfer we first considered this species, we will also give chief attention to the male organs of sperm transfer in this species. As elsewhere described (4, 5) conjugation is here a long series of activities of the male accomplishing the accurate adjustment of the essential transfer organs of the male to the receptacle of the female. The receptacle of the female is a single pouch in the shell, but the transfer organs of the male are three pairs of outgrowths. On each side of the body there is a papilla, or special termination of the sperm duct, and two limbs, those of the first and second segments of the abdomen, which we may call the stylets. To introduce the sperm into the receptacle the papilla must be adjusted both to the first and to the second stylet and both sides of the body play a necessary part in the process of sperm transfer. THE PAPILLAE One external instrument concerned in the process of sperm transfer is the modified end of the sperm duct that emerges from the base of the fifth leg, on each side of the animal. These organs are the papillae. Since systematic work has been done largely upon preserved specimens it is not so generally known that the sperm duct ends in life, in a soft, turgid protuberance, which may be so collapsed after death as to leave only the rounded hole in the firmer shell as the apparent ending of the sperm duct. These papillae lie concealed by the stylets, at rest, but on raising the stylets the papillae are seen as conspicuous, clear, tubes about 3 mm. long and 13 mm. wide, jutting out from the base of each fifth leg. At the time of conjugation the papillae are also concealed from view since the necks of the first and the second stylets form a nicely adjusted frame about the papillae and this frame is fitted in between the bases of the fifth legs. Certain in and out move- 242 E. A. ANDREWS ments of these bases seem to adjust the papillae so that they fit accurately into the orifices of the first stylets (figs. 30, 31) and by that means the sperm discharged from each papilla is passed into the cavity of the stylet. The papilla (P. fig. 1) is on the under side of the large first seg- ment of the leg and projects downward and toward the median plane; but its tip turns away from the middle line of the body. The papilla is a cone with bent apex. It is translucent and dis- tended with colorless blood. When directly injured, or upon les- sening of the blood pressure from injury elsewhere, the papilla collapses, being but a thin uncalcified protrusion of the skin, kept turgid, or erected, by blood pressure. Within the papilla one can see a large central tube passing toward the tip and also chalky white masses suspended between the central tube and the thin outer walls. On the shell at the base of the papilla there is, anteriorly, a single row of very long setae (fig.1 ) that form a sort of protective screen over the anterior face of the papilla. Sections show that the papilla is a continuation of the deferent duct, blood cavity and skin, so constructed that the bent, conical apex, with its soft walls can be adjusted to the hard opening of the stylet so as to fit hermetically, as a tense rubber bag might. Moreover the bent tip can be opened to discharge the sperm, when special muscles remove the obstructing valve that holds the tube closed. A lengthwise section through this delicate papilla (fig. 2) shows that the central tube is a direct continuation of the deferent duct that leads the sperm from the testes to the tip of the papilla. Between this duct and the outer cuticle there is a large space full of blood, traversed by little connective tissue and in it are the white bodies just mentioned, now seen to be small tubular glands, opening into the central duct. The central duct presents two strikingly distinct parts; the one continued from within the leg has the thick muscular wall and peculiar secreting lining of the deferent ducts, the other is lined by the thin cuticle inflected at the orifice at the tip of the papilla, and lacks muscle. In place of muscle the wall has only epidermis, which extends irregularly ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 243 Fig. 1 Posterior face of the left fifth leg of a living male 95 mm. long to show the translucent papilla. (P.) 2. do. Fig. 2 Longitudinal section through the papilla and the base of the fifth leg, showing the orifice of the sperm duct, the valve, the muscles and the glands. 2. 90mm. A. 244 E. A. ANDREWS into the blood space as the tubular glands alluded to above. The orifice at the tip is small and is not closed by any muscle, but apparently by blood pressure only. The part of the tube lined by cuticle has its lumen much reduced by a valve, or great longi- tudinal ridge, which extends out as far as the abrupt bend at the orifice. Ina cross section (fig. 3) this ridge is well seen, as is also the fact that some muscle fibres run into it and that the glands are chiefly on the side opposite the ridge. The ridge appears to act like a valve to hold this part of the tube closed, while contractions of the muscle would tend to open the tube wide and let the sperm pass to the orifice, which would then be forced open by the internal pressure of the sperm squeezed by the muscles of the wall all along the length of the duct, or some extent of it at all events. The upper part of the duct, as seen in the cross section fig. 4, has its thick muscles arranged chiefly in transverse fibres and is lined by an epithelium that evidently in large measure breaks down to furnish a great mass of secretion about the sperms. It is probably this secretion that envelops the sperm in the form of macaroni-like tubes, when they pass out in a slow stream. THE STYLETS The most complex of the organs concerned in sperm transfer are the modified limbs of the abdomen which we will call the sty- lets. In the male the sixth pair of abdominal appendages form the large side parts of the tail fan while the third to the fifth in- clusive are the simple and apparently rather useless swimmerets. The first and second pairs are specially constructed to serve as transfer organs for the sperm. These appendages of the first and second somites are much stouter and longer than the following swimmerets and have a very firm attachment to the abdominal sterna. The calcified ridge across the middle of the sterna is much more developed in the first and second somites, and where the appendages are fastened it rises up as a decided elevation which remains as a stump when the appendage is cut off. On the second somite these stumps are far apart, (some 10 mm. in a male of 100 mm.) while on the first ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 245 Fig. 3 Cross section of the sperm duct and valve along the line 3 of fig. 2, showing the duct closed by valve ridge. 2. A. Fig. 4 Cross section of the sperm duct along the line of 4 of fig. 1, showing the muscular wall and the lining epithelium disintegrating in secretion. 2. A. Fig. 5 Extreme tip of right first stylet, showing the groove bottom coming to the surface, posterior face. 2. A. Ex. m.—the external mass. M.m.—the in- ternal mass. 13—the level of the section, fig. 13. Fig. 6 Diagram of stylet as in plate 1, fig. 1, to show location of glands in the interior, and the location of the sections, 7 to 13, shown in figs. 7 to 13. 246 E. A. ANDREWS somite they are in contact at the median line of the abdomen. The elliptical transversely elongated stumps of the first append- ages are 5 mm. long and those of the second about 3 mm. Commonly these appendages are carried forward horizontally under the thorax between the thoracic legs in a deep depression of the thoracic sterna. The first pair lie close side by side with their median faces in contact. The second pair lie over and largely conceal the first, since their form enables them to come to the middle of the body beneath the first pair in spite of the fact that their bases are attached to the sterna, so far from the middle line. In a dead male one may move the appendages upon their at- tached bases as follows: The first may be moved upon its base from the horizontal up toward the vertical only about 45°. The membrane on the anter- ior face of the joint at the base of the appendage is stretched to its limit when the appendage is pulled up a little beyond sixty degrees, so that this appendage is never vertical and cannot swing back and forth through a wide arc as do the ordinary swimmerets. The distance traversed by its tip issome twoem. The appendage may also be rotated a very little at its base and moved from side to side a little so that ts tip travels some 5 or 6 mm. The apex of the second may be drawn from the horizontal up a little beyond the vertical; but neither the basal protopodite nor the endopodite travels more than 90°. They are set together at a large angle, so that while the main length of the appendage is horizontal the basal part never is, and when the base goes back some 90 degrees the horizontal part is swung past the vertical line. The tip traverses some 38cm. The base may be rotated a little and moved from side to side so that the apex travels 6 or 7 mm. STRUCTURE AND ANATOMY OF THE FIRST STYLET The first abdominal appendage of the male is a very stiff cal- cified mass of the general shape of an awl, some 17 mm. long, but having two tips. There is a groove along more than half its length and the base is articulated to the ventral shell of the anima’ so ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 247 that the appendage has very little mobility back and forth through some 45°. The normal position of the stylet is pointed forward under the thorax, where it lies horizontally in a deep groove, but in use it is dropped down and backward toward a vertical position. It has an anterior face, which is usually carried as the dorsal side, a posterior face which is usually the ventral aspect, and an outer and an inner or median face. The general appearance of the stylet is seen in the photographs, figs. I, II, 111,1v, which represent respectively the posterior, median (or rather median and posterior somewhat diagonally), the anter- ior and the outer faces of the same left stylet. Fig. 1, the posterior face, is the view got by looking at the under side of the crayfish, after lifting up the second stylet, which les over the first and largely conceals it. The first pair of stylets do not spring from the sternal surface far apart as is the case with the common, unmodified swimmeret, but they arise very close together; in fact the median faces, (fig. 11,) of the two come into contact so that these two appendages really form one mass. If looked at from the dorsal side, the two are seen to lie in contact at the base and all along the distal half, leaving between the constricted parts of the two a square opening that is occupied, in rest, by part of the second stylet. In describing the stylet we will distinguish the base, the neck, and the scroll or spiral that contains the groove. The scroll ends in two tips, the more slender, side outgrowth, or spatula, and the real end bearing the groove, the canula The base is some 6 mm. wide and long and only 2 thick, being flattened from before back. ‘The posterior or ventral face of the base, fig. I, presents a wide groove bounded on the median side by a rounded knob and on the outer side by a long ridge which, as it passes on to the neck, bears a tuft of long, finely plumose setae, that are seen again in profile in figs. i, iv. In this deep groove the second stylet lies when not in use, so that the two appendages are firmly packed together under the thorax of the male. The part of the base joined to the sternum of the animal is an oblique elliptical area, around the edge of which the hard shell gives place to the soft articular membrane that makes it possible 248 E. A. ANDREWS to cut the whole appendage away from the sternum. In this membrane there is an articular, whitish plate that is seen in figs. m1 andtv. The whole base is pyramidal and except the posterior all its faces (figs. 1, 111, Iv) are convex and rounded. The neck is the narrowest part, before the sudden enlargement of the spiral part; it is the smallest of the three regions; and is best seen in figs. 11, 11,iv. The neck passes gradually into the base and ends abruptly at the spiral. It is some 3 mm. long and 2 wide and thick. It has an angle along the ventral face that continues the ridge of the base up to the outer part of the spiral. The spiral or scroll may be likened to a long triangular plate with its edges rolled in together so as to leave a groove between them, but it is a plate some 8 mm. long, with the edges greatly thickened, so that the resulting mass is apparently solid. The groove begins on the median side, fig. 11, and passes in a sinuous course to the ventral side and along this diagonally to the very tip. The apparent bifid nature of the stylet is due to an out- growth from the median part, quite separate from the real end of the organ, in which the groove is continued through its entire length. We have then to describe a sinuous groove and its two boundaries, which we will call the median mass and the external mass; and also the two tips. The external mass, seen from the ven- tral side on the right of fig. 1, shows a proximal part about 2 mm. long and 1 mm. wide, bearing a marked ridge parallel to its sides and continued up from the neck. And then it suddenly turns at a large angle and becomes a rounded and gradually tapering ter- minal part, something less than $ mm. wide at first, and 6 mm. long. This passes behind the slender protuberance of the median mass to end as a flattened, horny tip together with the like ending of the median mass. In other words both external and median masses unite as the horny tip that we will call the canula. The sudden change in direction of the mass is accompanied by a like change in the groove whose edge it forms; this change of the groove we will call the angle of the groove. Seen from the outer face, fig. 1v, the external mass is widely swollen proximally, some 2} mm. deep, and gradually narrows into the distal part. The round canula is bent somewhat, ventrally. ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 249 On the dorsal face, fig. 11, the external mass is confluent with the median mass, without boundary line. Thus the distinction be- tween the two masses is useful chiefly on the anterior face where they form the two sides of the groove. In fig. m1, the long triangular region running from the notch that marks off the neck from the spiral region and ending distally in the rounded and pointed canula, is to be regarded as made up chiefly of the median mass, but the depressed part along the left edge is part of the external mass. On the median face, fig. 11, (which is unfortunately turned so that part of the posterior face shows) the external mass shows only its preximal end along the side of the diagonal groove, and into this groove the external mass here sends a narrow horny shelf, dimly seen as light in fig. 11. The external mass has an angular projection, or lip, at the very beginning of the groove which will be deseribed in connection with the orifice of the groove. At the tip, part of the external mass is seen making the lower part of the canula, to the right, that is, the curved strip of external mass seen is flat and on a lower level than the median mass. On the ventral face, fig. 1, the median mass looks like a long rounded white bone that begins suddenly without apparent con- nection with the neck and, after running nearly straight for some 6 mm., turns externally across the external mass as a flat, curved process that we will call the spatula. Beyond the spatula, which stands out freely as the second tip of the appendage, the median mass continues as the narrow median edge of the canula. From the external view, fig. Iv, the visible part of the median mass, the spatula is back of the external mass. In the dorsal view, fig. 111, the main part of the spiral region is median mass, forming a long triangle, beginning at a deep notch near the neck and extending in the foreground as the vis ble part of the canula and back of that as the spatula. At the notch may be seen part of the lip on the external mass. The median face best shows the median mass, but, fig. 11, beg not an exactly median view, does not do justice to it. In reality this face is markedly flat where it comes against the like face of of the other stylet of the pair. This flat face is a long ellipse, 2 250 E. A. ANDREWS mm. wide and 5 long, and is smooth except for a roughened area near its proximal end where there is a long tuft of finely plumose setae which bend abruptly downward, that is, posteriorly, as if an adjustment to the fact that they are pressed in between the two stylets. These setae are so long as to be visible from all points of view, cf. figs. I, 11, III, Iv. The groove itself is seen only from the median and ventral views. Itissome 7mm. long and begins as the orifice on the med- ian face where it meets the ventral, fig. 11. The orifice is a con- ical opening bounded by that depression of theneck that makes the notch so conspicuous in fig. 111, by the rounded origin of the me- dian mass, fig. 11, and by the overhanging lip of the external mass. It is of such shape that the tip of the spout, fig. 1, can fit into it. The groove leads from the orifice obliquely outward and distally between the external and median masses some 3 mm. and then turns to make a rounded angle, fig. 1, toward the median line some 3mm. more. In this part of its course it is soon concealed behind the median mass that is rising to form the base of the spat- ula, but it still exists there and emerging again runs the entire length of the spatula as a very narrow slit with horny edges. The groove is thus a long double curve, bending abruptly outward, then forward and slightly inward and finally outward again, as seen from the ventral side. But it also bends in the vertical plane, passing downward, then forward and upward and finally a little downward at the tip. While the walls of the groove seem to be merely hard rounded bone there projects into the groove from the side a narrow shelf of horn that springs from the external mass only. This will be seen in sections. The spatula is a flat flagellum-like process some 2 mm. long, 3 wide and perhaps } to io thick. It is curved and pointed as seen in the figures. It springs from the median mass where this sud- denly narrows to help form the canula, fig. 11. In life the spatula is milky white and pliable, not bony, more like leather. At its base it passes suddenly into the bony walls of the median mass and there can be bent as if in a socket. After drying it looks more like a thin chitinous membrane over a dried contents. It is somewhat concave at the base on the dorsal face. With methyl ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 251 green the horny tip of canula and the shelf in the groove stand out clearly as distinct from the substance of the spatula. The canula is some 3 mm. long and at base ? mm. wide and thick. It is a long cone, flattened somewhat from before back, bent up- ward dorsally, and ending in a rather sudden point that bends outward from the median side. The canula is made up of both external and internal masses. Most of the length of the canula is clear, yellow, horny matter, but at the base this is continued as the white calcified material of the rest of the stylet. The bone of the external mass stops rather suddenly, while that of the med- ian mass is continued in the midst of the horny cap as a central area, as seen from the median view. An enlarged view of the tip of the canula, fig. 5, shows that both external and internal masses make about the same amount of the canula, since the groove continues sinuously almost to the exact tip of the organ, but yet there is a greater prolongation of the external mass to form a short ungrooved apex. This sketch is from a canula of the opposite side of the body from that in fig. 1. The two canular tips flare away from one another. The groove may be said to begin and to end on the median face and to be shoved away from it through most of its course by the ridge that we have called the median mass (fig. 1.). INTERNAL ANATOMY When the stylet is macerated some days the entire contents may be drawn out of the hard shell; such a cast of the shell has its general long conical form with a short conical tip that came out of the canula and a short flat plate that came out of the spatula. It is made of connective tissue and blood covered with epidermis with some red pigment cells and shows at the base some muscles and at the middle some glands. The muscles, as made out by dissection of fresh and preserved crayfishes, are weak and run from the base of the stylet into the adjacent ridge of the sternum upon which the stylets articulate. There is a wide thick fan of muscle that passes from the bony articular plate of the anterior face of the stylet, fig. m1. When 252 E. A. ANDREWS this is pulled the stylet is raised dorsally into its position of rest. Since it lowers the organ into the groove on the thorax it may be called the depressor, though it really swings the appendage for- ward. This depressor muscle is lodged in the protruding ridge of the sternum from which the stylets spring, and its fibres are made fast to the posterior wall of this ridge. There is also a smaller muscle attached to the base of the stylet at its external edge which would seem to antagonize the other and to tend to swing the sty- let backward, that is, to raise it up from its horizontal position of rest into the erect position of use; it may be called the erector muscle. ¥ The internal anatomy of the stylet as well as the character and mode of use of the groove, were made clear from sections. The diagram fig. 6 shows the ventral view of a left stylet as if transparent, the extent of the glandular area being shaded; the glands occur in both external and internal masses, but not in the base of the stylet, and they extend from the neck to near the ori- gin of the spatula, filling most of the cavity of the region in which they occur. The sections, (figs. 7 to 13, inclusive), were taken across the stylet along the planes indicated by the like numerals in fig. 6. The transverse section, (fig. 7) shows in black the exceedingly thick shell with the depression on one side that forms part of the orifice of the groove, overhung by the solid lip. Through the thickness of the shell that forms this part of the orifice are seen many fine tubes, passing from the internal glands to discharge on the surface. The interior of the stylet is a delicate mass of con- nective tissue, chiefly blood sinuses, crossed by few strands of tissue, and bounded by the thin epidermis against the shell., Seattered all through this are the tubular glands that bend and are cut at various angles. These glands ultimately discharge by the numerous fine ducts that penetrate the shell. In this section the sharp angle above is the ridge (R) seen in figs. 6 and I passing along the external mass. The angle to the right is the line be- tween the ventral and external faces of the external mass. ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 253 Sections 8 and 9 show the orifice passing into the groove; they are cut obliquely transverse and, in addition to the section of the first stylet, show also the section of the second stylet as it lies locked in the first. Disregarding for the present all but the lower part of the sections we see that the stylet has widened out from the con- stricted neck into a wide flattened mass sub-divisible with refer- ence to the groove into the external and median masses. In Fig.7 Section across the stylet, in the region of the neck, just below the orifice, on the level 7 of fig. 6. R—the sharp ridge on the external mass, fig. 6 and 1. 2. 90mm. A. Fig. 8 Cross section of the same at the level 8, showing the groove above the orifice filled by the head of the accessory stylet, which is the separate.mass lying to the left and above. 2. 90 mm. A. fig. 8 the orifice is so overhung by the lip as to be in section a C- shaped bay, embracing the head and neck of part of the second stylet. Here again the shell is remarkably thick, but is penetra- ted by the ducts of the glands discharging on the surface that lines the orifice. In fig. 8 the lower straight side to the left is the flat face that is normally applied against its fellow on the outer side of the body. Above is the angle (R) that represents the ridge of 254 E. A. ANDREWS the external mass, just as in fig. 7. In the interior some of the glands are very large. The section distal to this, (fig. 9) shows the bottom of the groove receded from the surface and constricted from the rest by the continuation of the lip so that it forms a rather elliptical hole with only a very narrow slit opening into the deep groove that is seen from the surface. This surface groove is bounded on the left by the greatly thickened shell substance of the median mass and on the right by the thick shell of the external Fig.9 Cross section of the same at the level 9, showing also the grasping second stylet, above, and its wedge, to the left, where it is entering into the groove of the spiral. 2. 90 mm. A. Fig. 10 Cross section of the same at the level 10, showing the bottom of the groove cut off by the shelf from the external mass. 2. 90mm. A. Fig. 11 Cross section of the same, at the level 11, showing, above, the base of the spatula. 2. 90mm. A. ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 255 mass. The cavity within the shell of the external mass is reduced to a narrow space and the glands have become few. Further along the stylet, (fig. 10) the groove has passed from opening to the left (fig. 8), through the position shown in fig. 9, to open more toward the right. The groove is a deep and narrow one. Into it still open some few gland ducts from the remaining glands of the median mass. As before the side walls of the groove are made of very thick shell. The most unexpected fact is that the bottom of the groove is shut off as a very minute hole overhung by the continuation of the lip, which is now a horny shelf passing all along the groove, near its bottom, and so nearly meeting the opposite side as to practically shut off the bottom of the groove as a special tube. This figure shows the form of the stylet at the level, 10, of fig. 6. The flat side to the left is the flat face of the median mass, while the rounded edges of the groove are the two narrow parts of the external and median masses seen from the ventral side in figs. I and 6, just proximal to the base of the spatula. A section through the base of the spatula, (fig. 11) shows the groove above overhung by the rising spatula that conceals it from surface view, (figs. 1 and 6) but still allows access to the groove from the right, in under the spatula base. The external mass (#zx. m.) is now the greater, but it contains no glands, while the median mass is reduced to a nearly solid shell prolonged as the slightly hollow spatula. The tube at the bottom of the groove is still there, overhung by the little chitinous shelf. Near the apex of the organ, (fig. 12) the groove is again open above, as we have passed beyond the base of the spatula, only the tip of which is cut, lying well over to the right. This figure being magnified twice the diameter of the preceding figures, shows plainly the shelf that cuts off the bottom of the groove. The median mass is a narrow and nearly solid shell that forms the left wall of the straight, deep groove, The external mass is the main part of the section and contains much very watery connective tissue, covered with epidermis. In this section, the calcified part of the shell is represented in black, as in the other sections, while the chitinous or horny parts are dotted. From the surface this region of the canula looks to be only chitin. Farther on the JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 2. 256 E. A. ANDREWS calcified part of the shell fades away and only pure chitinous matter is left, so that a section at the very tip of the canula, (fig. 13) is only chitin. This view is enlarged four times as much as the preceding one and shows the disappearance of the superficial part of the groove though the bottom, which is now close to the surface, is still overhung by the shelf from the external mass. That is the tube at the bottom of the groove can now discharge by a slit to the surface at the tip of the canula; see fig. 5, where the surface slit of the groove is represented by the black line and the bottom of the groove, or the tube, is represented by the dotted line, which comes finally to the surface at the tip as seen in the section across the level 13. As fig. 5 is of-a right stylet and the section 13 from a left stylet it shows the parts reversed; the main bulk of the section is really of the external mass, as in fig. 12. The specialization of the bottom of the groove had not been expected till sections revealed it and suggested some special use. Sections of stylets taken when being used in conjugation soon showed that the tube at the bottom of the groove is the channel for the transfer of sperm. Along this minute tube all the sperm passes from the papilla to the sperm pocket of the female. A section across the stylet where the median surface bears a tuft of setae, between the levels of 8 and 9 of fig. 6, when sufficiently enlarged, shows that the sperm is contained inside the tube of the groove, as in fig. 14. This shows only the part of the shell about the tube, with the sharp edge of the shelf above, jutting out to almost meet the wall of the median mass (see fig. 9). The cavity of the tube is full of a secretion containing at its centre a pear- shaped mass of the peculiar sperm of the crayfishes. As was shown (6) these sperm do not assume the star shape they have in books as long as they are in the male and not even when in the sperm receptacle of the female when normally protected from the water, and in this section, where they are seen in transit, they are still spherical, clear bodies with the peculiar bowl-shaped central part that, as represented in the sketch, might be thought a central nucleus. All along the groove above the orifice thereis thus a strand of sperm surrounded by a paste-like white mass that fits tightly into the tube. 15 14 Fig. 12 Cross section of the same near tip, at level 12, showing the spatula cut off to the right. 2. A. Fig. 13 Cross section of the very tip of the stylet, at the level 13, of figs. 5 and 6, showing the groove coming to the surface of the horny canula. 2. D. Fig. 14 Enlarged view of section across the tubule, between the levels 8 and 9 of fig. 6 showing the sperm cells enveloped in a secretion and shut in by the shelf above. 2. D. Fig. 15 Enlarged view of section of tubule and bottom of groove, about the level 10 of fig. 6 showing the fewer sperm and little secretion in the tubule, sur- rounded by a thick horny layer. The calcified skeleton is represented as black. ee): 258 E. A. ANDREWS That this mass is run in under pressure seems indicated by the way it tends to flow out at the narrow slit leading up from the tube into the groove and by the form of the sperm mass that tends likewise to copy the shape of the cavity that is filled, being pointed toward the slit (fig. 14). In successive sections this sperm mass 1s found all along the length of the groove, always in the bottom of the tube only, while the enveloping secretion for the most part disappears. Thus in the fig. 15 from the level 10, where there are still some secretion tubes coming through the heavy shell of the median mass, (fig. 10) there are a dozen or so sperm enclosed in the minute tube together with very little secre- tion and the sperm seem to come into contact with the shell. At this level, however, the thick and well-calcified shell (fig. 10) is covered by a thick layer of horny substance that makes the shelf and continues on up the face of the external mass bounding the groove, (fig. 15). The discharge of the milk-white sperm from the tip of the canula, (figs. 5, 6 and 13) was seen in some males separated from females in conjugation. The anatomy of the stylet thus shows it to be a more refined and specialized tool for sperm transfer than had been expected. It is essentially a very fine tube receiving sperm at its larger base and discharging it at its attenuated tip; but it has walls that give it great strength and rigidity while allowing the tip some elasticity. Moreover the receiving part of the tube is provided with glands of problematic value. In looking for further light upon the nature of this sperm trans- fer organ we turn to its development in the individual. ONTOGENY OF STYLET We find that in Cambarus affinis the first and second larval stages are externally alike, in both sexes, while the third shows the male openings on the fifth legs, or the female on the third legs. In the first stage, there are no abdominal appendages on the first somite and but a crowding of epidermal nuclei under the shell where the appendage will be. In the second stage, these appendages are slight papillae. These indifferent stages are fol- ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 259 lowed by the third, in which the external openings are differen- tiated but the appendages of the first somite are still simple papil- lae, alike in both sexes, unless they be longer in the male. In the fourth stage, which is about 11 mm. long, the pleopods of the female still are simple papillae but little longer than in the third stage, while in the male they are long, simple spines, point- ing toward one another and but slightly forward, as indicated in fig. 10 p. 127, Andrews, Ontogeny of Annulus, Biol. Bull., 1906. The ventral face of the left spine or slightly specialized first pleopod, of a male 11 mm. long, is seen in fig. 16, magnified 430 in the camera sketch. This is from a larva killed July Ist, from late spring hatching. The organ is like a club; it is very simple, nearly cylindrical and very blunt. It is not jointed, although there is a faint groove marking off the base from what will be the neck and spiral. On the base there isaslight ridge with depressions on the median side of it. Internally there are two muscles from the base into the sternum of the abdomem ‘The distal part of the appendage is slightly grooved along its ventral face, thus marking off an exter- nal from a median mass. In cross section, fig. 17, the shell is not very thick and beneath it is a well formed epidermis with large nuclei, from which connective tissue strands traverse the large blood space in which blood corpuscles float. This section shows the groove on the lower side. The appendage is articulated to a slightly elevated stump on the sternum that holds one of the articular muscles and part of the other and ends in an elliptical orifice into which the base of the stylet fits. This articulation is so. oblique that the stylet lies down and cross-wise towards its fellow and is but little elevated or directed forward. In the male of this stage, the openings on the fifth legs are short slits, not a third of the width of the above simple stylet, and to each slit there leads a strand of nuclei that represents the efferent duct. In males of 15 to 18 mm., in the fifth stage, the stylet (fig. 18) is about 1 mm. long and is somewhat more specialized. The base is set off from the terminal part by a more pronounced fur- 260 BE. A. ANDREWS Fig. 16 Posterior face of left first stylet of male 11 mm. long. Enlarged 215 diameters. Fig. 17 Cross section of the same stylet. 2. D. Fig. 18 Posterior face of left stylet of male 18 mm. long. Length of stylet *imm. 2. A. Fig. 19 Section of stylet of a male 12 or 15mm. long. 2. D. ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 261 row, but there is no movable joint. The organ is more pointed and the groove is very deep from the rising up of its sides. Thus in section fig. 19, the narrow median mass, (M.m) to the left, rises high up beyond the groove and the groove itself is a narrow space between the wide external and the narrow median masses. In the surface view, (fig. 18) the bottom of the groove is indicated by the broken line; it is already twistetl so that the groove looks towards the median side along its proximal part and then for a short distance toward the observer, that is toward the ventral side, and finally at the tip toward the median side again. Where the groove is open ventrally the median mass is rising up as a protuberance that will form the spatula. As yet the canula is only the spoon-shaped end of the organ. In a male 22 to 21’mm. long and probably in the sixth stage, (fig. 20) killed October 4th, we find the same stage as in other males of this size killed in July, this being an exceptional male that failed to grow as the average do to be nearly two inches long in October. Here the spatula is quite evident as a blunt rounded finger-like elevation that crosses over the groove. As shown by the dotted line the bottom of the groove is to the right of its mouth along the proximal part of its course and to the left along under the base of the spatula; that is, the sinuousness of the groove. is exaggerated by the fact that the sides not only rise up but grow over the groove, the external mass overhanging toward the medi- an line proximally and the median mass growing over away from the median line, distally. The base of the stylet now bears a few short acicular setae and is provided with three muscles at its at- tachment to the sternal elevation upon which it stands. By this time the stylets point forward under the thorax. The canula is now a short rounded blunt termination of the stylet in which the groove is no longer widely open but reduced to a slit by the up- growth of its walls. In an autumnal male 38 mm. long, (fig. 21) the stylet has be- come much longer and more modeled but still shows the stiff joint between the base and the partly-formed neck. The few setae extend along the ridge of the base on to the proximal part of the external mass. The median mass sticks out abruptly at 262 E. A. ANDREWS Fig. 20 Posterior face of left stylet of male 22 mm. long in October. 2. A. Fig. 21 Posterior face of left stylet of male 38 mm. long in October. Enlarged 25 diameters. 2. 90 mm. A. Fig. 22 Anterior face of left accessory stylet, somewhat turned to show part of the external face: a view between vit and vill. 2. a ,. On the left an en- larged sectional view of the cup at the end of the radius and the wedge cut off. ORGANS FOR SPERM TRANSFER 263 the notch, or orifice, and bears a tuft of short setae. The spatula is long, flat and pointed. The canula is bluntly pointed and turned outward. Later when the animal is 64 mm. long, the false joint of the stylet has disappeared and the tips become more sharp and long. Even before this size the males are known to conjugate, when about two inches long. We thus find that the complex stylet of the adult starts from a slender papilla that becomes slightly flattened and grooved so as to form a very clumsy spoon with its depression rather more median than ventral. Then the sides of this groove grow up and make the groove into a cleft, which opens as before toward the median face proximally and distally; but along the middle of its course is forced to open ventrally and even externally by the over- hanging growth of the median mass. The organ might be imi- tated by taking a long strip of clay with a slight length-wise groove on it and rolling the sides up over the groove, the median side tending to roll over outside the other. How the shelf from the external mass first grows out over the groove to cut off its inner part as a tube was not made out, but it is evidently a secondary specialization of the shell made by some special activity of the epi- dermis in a line near the bottom of the groove after the groove has become deep. THE SECOND OR ACCESSORY STYLET The accessory stylets (figs. v-vir) are evidently specializations of the common type of abdominal appendages, (fig. 26). They are elevated only when in use in conjugation; and at rest are car- ried forward under the thorax, horizontally, where they rest upon the first stylets and are closely packed in with them inside the special sternal groove of the male thorax. Figs. v, VI, VII, vi, represent the left second stylet as seen from the ventral or posterior, the median, the anterior or dorsal, and the exterior faces, respectively. Like the unmodified pleopods this has a basal protopodite, an exopodite, an endopodite. The exopodite is a slender offset with setae, while the endopodite is 264 E. A. ANDREWS the complex large part of the appendage that bears a terminal flabelum and the remarkable side protuberance, found on no other limbs, which may be called the triangle. Describing the entire stylet from the base outward, we see that the protopodite is chiefly a very strong flattened bony mass extending diagonally inward so that while the endopodite and ex- opodite are about parallel to the median line of the animal the protopodite forms an angle of 45° with it. This makes it possible for the endopodites of the two stylets tocome together at the me- dian line and for the endopodite of each side to lie upon the groove of the base of the first stylet, like a lance in its rest, although the bases of the two second stylets are fastened to the sternum of the second abdominal somite some distance from the median line. The protopodite is not entirely one-jointed but at its base is a soft membrane where it is joined to the sternum and in this are two large calcified plates, (figs. v and vr) besides two minute ones, (fig. vit) all of which together make a narrow basal section of the protopodite. Dissection shows there are muscles passing from this base of the protopodite into the sternum that may depress and elevate the appendage. The protopodite is some 6 mm. long, 2 wide and 14 thick. The exopodite is a slender filament some 9 mm. long and 4 mm. thick; a slightly flattened tapering cylinder set with long setae on exter- nal and median face. The setae are really plumose and together form a sparse brush. The exopodite is obscurely divided into some twenty segments. The basal 2 mm. is partly calcified, the rest membranous. It articulates freely with the outer distal corner of the protopodite so that it may be moved from the posi- tion of rest parallel to the endopodite, outward through 90° and swung back and forth some 45°. The tip of the exopodite often lies dorsally within the cavity or hollow of the triangle, and may have some use as a cleaning brush. The endopodite is the stout calcified mass, roughly cylindrical but flattened from before back, some 9 mm. long on the median (fig. vt) and 7 mm. on the external face (fig. vim), and bearing at its distal end a flagellum on the external side and the flat triangle on the internal side. This bony mass is set on the protopodite ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 265 by a very stiff oblique joint at about 45° and allows of very little lateral and rotative motion. It may be forced outward and in- ward through but few degrees, its tip traveling only 4 mm. _ It may be twisted so that the triangle, from being almost concealed dorsal to the end of the bony mass (fig. v), may be turned outward a few degrees toward a horizontal position and present more of its median face, somewhat as in fig. v1. The movement is com- parable to that of a stiff arm that should allow only a little side- wise movement and a very little twisting at the elbow with the end result that the triangle, or hand, at the end, accomplishes a little adjustment to the orifice of the first stylet. This is done as if by supination, though done by the above twist at the elbow. The flagellum is the real termination of the endopodite; it is some 3 mm. long, 1 mm. wide and rapidly tapering, also flattened, being a long triangular terminal tip to the essentially flat endopo- dite. By the presence of white lateral areas in the otherwise mem- branous flagellum, it is obscurely divided into 9 or 12 joints. At the tip and along the sides it bears long plumose setae that are often sparse or worn off along the outer side. The flagellum springs from a socket in the bony shell of the wide end of the endo- podite. The external angle of the edge of this socket, figs. v and vi, forms a hard protuberance at the end of a bony ridge (the Guide). The setae along the flagellum as well as those along the exopodite do not stand out horizontally, right and left, but slant ventrally, or posteriorly, (fig. vir). The most novel and characteristic part of the second appendage of male crayfishes is the lateral outgrowth which we will call the triangle. It is a form of the Decapod appendix masculina of Boas. The triangle stands up dorsally so that at rest, it, with its fellow of the other side of the body, fits into the squarish cavity left between the two necks of the first stylets. It is not well seen normally from the ventral view, (fig. v) but it may be pulled outwards through 90° and then looks as in the median view (fig. v1). It isa flat triangular outgrowth, partly calcified and partly membranous. The edges are calcified and the centre membran- ous, so that the whole suggests a bent arm or wing with skin stretched across it. Each long side of the triangle is about 3 and 266 E. A. ANDREWS the shorter base about 2mm. The bony rims of the triangle as seen in fig. vi may be called the humerus and the radio-ulna. The distal free part of the apparatus, (figs. v1, vir) is a tri- hedral mass set with long plumose setae and might be likened to a sort of hand at the end of the fore-arm. We will call it the wedge from its appearance and use as seen in sections (fig. 9). The humerus articulates at each end; proximally loosely with the side of the exodopodite mass, (fig. v1); distally at the elbow, firmly with the other firm edge of the triangle, the radio-ulna. On the external or concave face of the triangle, (fig. vit) the hu- merus is not as well separable from the membranous part of the triangle, and between its proximal end and the bone of the main mass of the endopodite there is more or less expanse of membrane. On this outer face, (fig. vimr) we find that all the concave aspect of the triangle is membranous. The humerus is wide and smooth and flat on the inner face, fig. v1, but on the outer face forms only a narrow edge to the mem- brane, fig. VIIt. The soft hollow face of the triangle in lifeis swollen with contained liquid. The soft area is not only the outer face of the triangular protuberance but also half of the dorsal face of the distal part of the main trunk of the endopodite. The whole darkened area of fig. vi11 might be compared to the soft inside of the palm of a hand and it is this which comes against the neck of the first stylet, in conjugation. While the humerus is wider toward the base and slender at the elbow end, the radio-ulna is the reverse; that is, it begins nar- row at the elbow and widens to the hand or terminal part.. The radio-ulna is a thick plate-like mass that is not in the same plane as the humerus, but about 45° with it, so that it has the appear- ance of a scroll rolling in over the depressed membranous outer face of the triangle, (figs. viz, vit). The radius part is the free rounded edge, (fig. vit) and this ends abruptly opposite the base of the hand, which is back of it in the figure, while the ulna plate runs on continuously in the background of this figure and passes imperceptibly into the hand, or wedge, (fig. viz). The radius stands free, away from the membrane, as a rounded ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 267 bony ridge much thicker than the ulna plate from which it is faintly marked off by a suture. Thus in sections (fig. 8), the radius looks like a head on a slender neck. The abrupt termina- tion of the radius is very like the elbow end of the human radius, a shallow cup. The actual cup is made by clear horny matter of considerable thickness and is prolonged as a horny sharp ridge all along the radial edge of the pyramidal wedge. The head of the radius stands out as wider than the neck (fig. vir). The ulna is but a vaguely defined thick area of the general shell and it continues as the hand or wedge, which is, next to the head of the radius, the most peculiar part of the triangle. This wedge is a hard horny pyramid of three faces. One is rounded and setose, two flat, meeting at a sharp edge, (see small sketch, fig. 22). Its exposed rounded face (figs. v1, vi1) is set with a dense brush of plumose setae. The external or ulnar face (fig. vi) is smooth bone, bearing setae along its right edge and ending, to the left, in the sharp horny ridge that runs up from the head of the radius and is shown as a dark shade in fig. v. The concealed innermost face is bony and contains orange pigment; along its left edge it bears setae (fig. vim), and its right edge is thesharp horny membrane that runs up from the head of the radius. In the union of this face with the soft membrane of the concavity of the triangle there is a bony articular plate. The photographs donot represent one feature of the triangle and that is the small tuft of some five or six, or so, very wiry bent plumose setae that spring from the elbow of the triangle and, for the most part, curve so as to lie down close to the soft membrane. These setae are roughly shown in fig. 22 at the elbow. This also gives in the side sketch, an end view of the head of the radius as seen when the base of the wedge was cut off and the stump of the ulna and free end of the radius viewed from the face where the wedge had been. This is intended to show the head of the radius as a rounded saucer with flat bottom, not deep, but with flaring and rounded sides that form a rim thicker than the neck of the radius below. The cut off setae in this figure are the bases of those on the union of ulna and wedge, just above the level of the line 23 in the main fig. 22. 268 E. A. ANDREWS INTERNAL ANATOMY OF THE SECOND STYLET Dissections and sections showed the presence of the same gen- eral structures as in the case of the first stylet, with the important difference that the special glands of the tube of the first stylet are absent and on the other hand the intrinsic muscles that are ab- sent in the first are well developed in the second stylet. The muscles are arranged as in the younger stages (figs. 27, 28). Be- sides the three muscles at the base that pass into the sternum of the second abdominal somite a very short distance there are long muscular strands within the stylet itself. The protopodite springs from a considerable elevation of the sternum and in the adult two muscles were found within this elevated articular region. Pulling one tended to depress the sty- let into its position of rest while the smaller muscle was thought to be probably concerned with the erection of the stylet. Pull- ing all the basal muscles made the stylet not only he down but also move toward the median line, which would enable it to fit in nicely with the first stylet. Some of these extrinsic muscles extend a distance into the protopodite itself, to be attached to the shell. There are also long strands arising from the shell of the protopo- dite and running to the exopodite and the endopodite. Those of the exopodite seem associated with the basal muscles, so that pull- ing the muscle in the sternum made slight twitching movements of the exopodite, simulating those seen during conjugation, which may thus be caused by contractions of the muscles that hold the entire appendage in position. Pulling the muscles that are in the distal part of the protopodite made both exopodite and endopo- dite move dorsally and also away from the median plane. The muscles that move the exopodite are better developed than those of the endopodite. Within the exopodite there is a long intrinsic muscle that would seem fit to bend the slender filament slightly. Inside the endopodite, beside the slight muscles of the base concerned with the movement upon the protopodite, there are in the adult two slight threads that represent the muscle seen in early stages (figs. 27,28) passing from the terminal flagellum down ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 269 into the region whence springs the triangle. These muscles are seen in the sections of the triangle (figs. 23, 24) as two black dots. These sections, with those in figs. 8, 9, show the anatomy of the triangle. Fig. 23 is a section along the line 23 of fig. 22. The great thickness of the calcified shell is shown by the black mass. The membranous parts are shown by the thin black, as to the left in fig. 24. The cavity within is blood space traversed by connec- tive tissue strands and faced by epidermis against the shell. In Fig. 23 Cross section of the triangle on the level 23 of fig. 22. 2. 90mm. A. Fig. 24 Cross section of the same about the level 24 of fig. 22. 2. 90 mm. A. fig. 23 the triangle and the distal part of the protopodite are cut across with the hollow face to the left. The dense shell mass to the left above is the guide ridge, (fig. vimr) which somewhat over- hangs the cavity of the triangle and bears on its median face some setae, (fig. v1), which are connected at the root with the epidermis by the long canals of which one is seen to the left (fig. 23) pene- trating the shell. Opposite this on the median face of the endo- podite there are also a few setae which do not appear in the 270 E. A. ANDREWS photograph (fig. v) but present one of their canals in the shell of fig. 23, to the right. In contrast to the excessive thickness of the shell of this main stem of the endopodite, the triangle, as repre- sented by the lower part of this section, is relatively thin shelled. The radius is the thick knob in the lower left corner. The shell to the right is the ulna, the thick mass against the concavity of the triangle is in reality more membranous than calcified, but as yet thick. But further toward the elbow (fig. 24) along the line 24, (fig. 22), the corresponding region is a thin membrane reaching from the neck of the radius across to the thick guide ridge. In reality the elbow stands out more as in fig. vir so that the width of the section 24 is much greater than fig. 28. Fig. 24 shows clearly, on the right, the hinge-like line of demarcation between the outstanding triangle and the main stem of the endopodite, being in fact cut at the edge of the proximal articulation of the hum- erus (fig. vr), where there is a sudden change in level in passing from the humerus to the main stem. In sections 23 and 24, the small black dots above within the connective tissue, are the muscles that run up into the flagellum, much as in fig. 28. Section 8 shows the radius standing out from the flat triangle with the thick mass of the humerus above in the figure, while fig. 9 shows the thick end of the endopodite above and in the groove of the first stylet the cut off wedge, as will be described below in considering the adjustments of the first and second stylets during conjugation. ONTOGENY OF THE ACCESSORY, OR SECOND, STYLET Between the individual development of the first and the second stylets there is this important difference that while the first never at any time looks like one of the ordinary pleopods but is of late appearance and is also a dwarfed, specialized, or reduced append- age from the first, the second appendage is present as soon as the others are and is at first like the ordinary appendage and becomes specialized by the addition of an outgrowth and not by the loss of parts. ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 271 The pleopods of the second, third, fourth and fifth somites of both males and females are represented at the time of hatch- ing and all alike have the appearance seen in fig. 26 which is mag- nified 75 diameters and represents the anterior face of the third left pleopod of a male'18 mm., in July, when in the fifth larval stage. The pleopod is flat and translucent; the endopodite (/n.) is longer than the exopodite (#v.) and both are fringed by long setae that are really plumes, though not so figured. Both endo- podite and exopodite are obscurely jointed and the protopodite has a short annular segment as well as a long main segment. Through the thin shell may be seen the muscles, represented by the dotted lines. At the base are three large and one minute muscles; two of the main three are posterior and one anterior, and appar- ently the movement of the entire appendage would be a more powerful backward swing and weak forward recovery, as in swim- ming. Within the main segment of the protopodite are three long muscles that would seem to aid in bending the appendage at its base, while distally there are two muscles which both go to the exopodite to move it. The endopodite is left with only intrinsic muscles to move it at its base and with a long branched muscle that can act only to bend the endopodite itself. The exopodite has also intrinsic muscles at its base as well as the muscles of the protopodite to move it. There is likewise a long branched muscle to bend the exopodite. In the early stages the second appendage of the male is quite like this third pleopod, but in a male of 21 mm. (probably in the same larval stage as the male having the third appendage shown in fig. 26) we find the pleopod of the second somite modified as in fig. 27, that is, there has been added to it the excrescence seen on the median side of the endopodite. This is to become the triangle or appendix masculina of the adult. The first discovered trace of this outgrowth was seen in a larva of the fourth stage, 11 mm. long, in July. This first beginning of the triangle is the slight elevation (a) seen in fig. 25, on the side of the endopodite. This figure represents only that part of the endopodite which is not well jointed and forms a sort of base beyond which is the more flabelliform distal part, (fig. 26). It JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL, 22, NO, 2 At E. A. ANDREWS will be noted that the row of plumes on the right, or median side of the endopodite (fig. 25), is interrupted distally so that there is a blank space where one would expect one or two setae, and in this space there protrudes to the right a rounded elevation. The position of this slight elevation with reference to the muscles leaves Fig. 25 Posterior view of basal part of the endopodite of the accessory stylet of amale 11 mm. long. Enlarged 215 diameters. no doubt that it is the same thing as the larger elevation of the next larval stage (fig. 27). In the preparation the epidermis, not here shown, grew out to form this elevation as a hollow outgrowth, leaving no question as to the possible artificial nature of the bulging of the cuticle shown in fig. 25. ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER Dis In the fifth larval stage (fig. 27) the protopodite has become wider and stouter and the basal part of the endopodite is much expanded distally where the protuberance arises from it. The 26 27 Fig. 26 Anterior face of third left pleopod of a male 18 mm. long. 2. D. Fig. 27 Anterior face of left accessory stylet of male 21mm. long. Enlarged 75 diameters. result is that the exopodite begins to take on that relative insig- nificance in size, characteristic in the adult accessory stylet. 274 E. A. ANDREWS The new growth on the median side of the basal part of the endo- podite (fig. 27), is a sort of knob set on a neck and inclined at about 45° to the axis of the endopodite. Its form is not spherical but rather more that of a short cylinder on a slightly shorter neck. The long axis of the cylinder and of the neck is at an angle of 45 degrees to the side of the endopodite. Not only this protruding knob must be reckoned as part of the future triangle but also the neighboring widened area of the endopodite which is depressed as indicated in the shadow in fig. 27 and which will be the de- pressed anterior face of the future triangle. In fact this depres- sion is accentuated by the position of the knob, which not only stands out as represented in the figure but also rises up toward the observer; that is, anteriorly away from the general plane of the endopodite. The base of the flabelliform distal part of the endo- podite is continued on to the external distal corner of the basal region of the endopodite as a ridge standing up above the de- pressed area, and forming what will be the guide ridge of the per- fected organ. In a small male, 38 mm. long, in October, the second pleopod had advanced to the state of perfection shown in fig. 28, which is an external view of a left accessory stylet, which was about three times as long as the one shown in fig. 27. The muscles in the protopodite remain as before, though not so well seen from this point of view, and the same is true of the endopodite and the exo- podite. The protopodite and the exopodite have grown so large and massive that the slender exopodite is much subordinated. The great increase in the basal part of the endopodite, along with the enlargement and specialization of the triangle, leaves the plu- mose terminal part of the endopodite as a slender palp-like rem- nant of the original end of the endopodite. The triangle is now so much longer at its free edge than at its attached part that it has the adult triangular form when seen from the median face; or more explicitly, the obliquely set ‘cylindrical knob of fig. 27 has grown so much longer at its free edge than at its attachment that the length between its ends about equals the distance of the prox- imal end or elbow from the main mass of the endopodite, which ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 293 Fig. 28 External face of left accessory stylet of male 38 mm. long in October, enlarged 25 diameters. Fig. 29 External view of the united first and second stylets of the left side of an adult male, 110 mm. long. 2. 90mm. do. Fig. 30 View of the median face of the same. 2. 90 mm. do. In figs. 29, 30, 31: Ig=I1st stylet 5’ =other fifth leg not crossed. II. =2nd stylet C =canula 5 =crossed fifth leg seen in section Sp =spatula. 276 E. A. ANDREWS gives the wide scalene triangle as seen from the median side (fig. v1). The proximal elongation of the cylinder makes the elbow of the triangle, while the distal elongation has made the pyramid or wedge that runs up toward the flagellum of the endopodite. As yet no setae were seen on the wedge. The triangle, however, is not merely a flat plate that grows out diagonally, but from the first it is thick through in the anterior-posterior direction, thus producing the cylindrical edge seen in fig. 27, where the thick edge is restricted and marked off by a less thick neck; moreover the thickening of the cylinder is toward the anterior face. By the stage shown in fig. 28 there is great thickening toward the external face. Moreover the external free edge of this thickened cylinder is now itself thickened as a ridge hanging out from the ventral rim over the depressed area as indicated by the broken line in fig. 28. This rounded thick edge is the future radius. (Compare figs. 28 and vu.) From this state it is an easy transition to the more sculptured form of the appendage seen in adults. The second pleopods of the male thus owe their special struc- ture to a gradual emphasis of the endopodite and protopodite with the addition of an outgrowth peculiar to these appendages, the triangle. The triangle at first is a mere blister on the median side of the endopodite but soon becomes an oblique plate that is surmounted by a thickening. The plate grows anteriorly and the thickening of its free edge becomes longer than the base of the plate, with a resulting triangular form as seen from the median face. The thick ridge grows out externally and this extension itself acquires a thickened rim, posteriorly, which is the radius. The triangle is thus a triangle only as seen from the median face of the pleopod, in its entirety the triangle is a curved object like a half open hand, and as such is capable of being applied to the rounded surface of the first stylet. It is made of a cylinder obliquely set along the edge of a plate and curving over it, like fingers over the palm. A slip of paper if cut of angular form and bent twice at right angles may be made to represent the stylet. ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 247i USE OF STYLETS IN CONJUGATION The way in which the various parts of the stylets are used in the process of conjugation and sperm transfer has been found out partly by direct observation, partly by experiment, and partly by more indirect inferences that still leave some questions un- answered. The phenomena of conjugation in general have been described elsewhere (5) and we will here consider chiefly the use of the sty- lets. There is a stage in the early part of conjugation, where the male has seized the female and clasped all her claws, when he rises up away from her sufficiently to allow the pleopods to swing back and forth. In this swinging the long stiff stylets and acces- sory stylets take part and then are soon locked together, after which the stylets are held by the crossed fifth leg so that hence- forth they make a rigid mass which cannot be folded down against the thorax again by any pressure until that fifth leg is removed. The process of locking together of the stylets is as follows: The swinging of the pleopods is caused by their basal muscles; and likewise the muscles in the bases of the stylets move them slightly backward, or erect them, and forward, or depress them. While both first and second generally move together and right and left alike, they have been seen to move independently. By a special movement of the second stylets they are clasped against the first in such a way that the triangle is applied to the neck of the first stylet. By arching the abdomen, cat-like, the second stylet is drawn up dorsally along the first, and then, by partial relaxation of the arch of abdomen, the second is shoved distally. along the first, while held tight against it; the result is that the wedge glides along in the groove of the stylet and the radius enters into the inner tubule through the flaring orifice and is shoved in so far that it remains fast. In sections (fig. 8) it is seen that radius fits into the groove as in a socket and, all the walls being thick and solid, the radius cannot be forced out again without running it back along the orifice. The fact is that the locking is very firm and when one tries to pull the second stylet backward the first. is dragged with it and only by pulling the second dorsally toward 278 E. A. ANDREWS the base of the first can one separate the two, as by that means the radius is brought to the orifice out of which it readily passes. When the two stylets have been erected by their own erector muscles and locked together by their muscular movements which lead to this mechanical fastening of the edge of the triangle within the groove, they form one organ, physiologically, which is to transfer the sperm without any further muscular activity within it. : The appearance of the two locked organs is indicated in the somewhat diagrammatic sketches 29, 30. In 29 the external view of the left stylets and part of the fifth thoracic legs is shown. The second stylet, to the right of the figure shows the solid tip region of the endopodite applied closely against the most protuberant part of the posterior face of the spiral of the first stylet, while the terminal flabellum runs along parallel to the canula and spatu- ula. In fact the tip of the bony endopodite seems to overlap the contours of the spiral and this is due to the soft nature of the depressed region of the median face of the end of the endopodite as is seen in fig. vit. The guide ridge is the part seen external to the spiral in fig. 29, while the soft surface is squeezed against the rounded face of the spiral and the triangle is applied close against the median face of the spiral so that it can be seen only from the median view. Turning to the median view we see, (fig. 30) the triangle lying over the neck and extending out along the groove. The elbow of the triangle lies over the orifice. The radial edge of the tri- angle conforms with the obliquity of the groove since both the wedge and the radius are firmly inserted in the groove. Figures 29 and 30, show the supporting fifth leg in section, as a rounded cross-hatched area. It will prevent the locked stylets from being shoved forward, or closed up against the sternum an- teriorly. It is also obvious that the movement backward toward a vertical position will be hindered, not only by the inclination and rigidity of the basal joint of the first stylet, but by a like join- ing of the base of the second stylet, since one cannot move back without the other, for the radius and wedge will go no further ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 279 toward tip of groove. The second forms a mechanical brace tending to hold the first from going backward. In order to separate the two the second must move toward the animal and glide along the first till free from it. And this motion is actually seen. The locking is not always done without trial and may be broken and renewed during conjugation, so that we often see two positions of the stylets, that of perfect locking, Fig. 31° Same view when the accessory is drawn back into position of recession showing the papilla at the mouth of the groove. as in figs. 29 and 30 when the triangle is most advanced toward the tip of the spiral, and a preliminary and alternate position of recession when the triangle is applied against the base of the first style proximal to the orifice. ‘This position of recession is shown in fig. 31. The triangle goes as far toward the basal end of the first stylet as possible, till stopped by the knob on the base (fig. 11). In this recession the orifice with the papilla meeting it, is exposed and the ventral lip is seen. It should be borne in mind that the back and forth play of the triangle on the first stylet is limited not only by the knob basally and the narrowness of the groove that prevents the radius from going into it dorsally beyond the position of figure 30, but it is limited laterally by the fact that the triangles of the two sides 280 E. A. ANDREWS of the body are in contact and are held together by being placed in the squarish hole between the necks of the first two stylets. The two triangles play back and forth like two hands with bent fingers, back to back, in a narrow space between the first stylets and, like hands, each runs its palm or soft flat surface along the median constricted part of the first stylet and the firm guiding ridge—its thumb, as it were—along the external face of the stylet (fig. 29). In one case from 3 to 4 seconds were taken to glide the triangles back from the normal position to the recession (fig. 31) ; there they remained four or five seconds and advanced strongly in two seconds. Another recession took 12 seconds, but the ad- vance occupied 2 seconds. If we imagine figure v applied to 1, vi to 1 and vu to 11, vil to Iv, we will appreciate how nicely all the surfaces adjust themselves. The oblique ridge of the external mass of fig. I is overlaid by the soft depressed area, (figs. vill, 22) so that the thumb-like guide shows external to the ridge as in fig. 29. In life the two sets of appendages, right and left, are so closely applied together that the median face of neither can be seen, directly, without mutilation experiments on one side, but the pres- ence of the guide ridge along the external face of the spiral (fig. 29) enables one to judge where the triangle must be at any stage of advance or recession, a matter of importance in deciding as to its use in sperm transfer. That an application of the second, or accessory stylet, to the first is necessary for the completion of normal conjugation and the filling of the sperm pocket by transferred sperm, was determined not only by the above facts of structure and use but by the follow- ing experiments. The instincts of the male are so strong that, when in the process of conjugation the second stylet on one side was cut off, there was no immediate visible effect, except the escape of some blood from the stump of the appendage. And- when on the next day al] the stylets, both first and second, were cut off, the male seized and turned a female and carried the conjugation as far as possible in the absence of the organs of transfer. The instincts thus go on without the means of carrying them to completion. ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 281 It was then easy to get males to begin conjugation when the accessory stylets had been removed from both sides. ‘Three such males made conjugation experiments with several females, successively, but in no case was there an evidence that the annu- lus had been filled by these mutilated males, through in one case the union lasted for eight and one-halfhours. Inthese attempted conjugations it was not evident how the absence of the second stylet prevented perfect sperm transfer. In one case the male let fall three or four sperm masses, or pseudo-spermatophores, about 1 mm. long on the telson of the female but it was not deter- mined how this happened. Apparently this was from failure to have a close union at the orifice, which would lead one to think the failure due to absence of the triangle that normally holds the papilla tight to the orifice. But the failure may have been due to the absence of piston like movements of the radius. More expe- riments should show what the uses of the different parts of the triangle really are. HOW THE SPERM IS FORCED ALONG THE TUBULE OF THE STYLET The adjustment of the papillae, whose anatomy has been des- cribed, to the stylets must now be considered in order to appreciate the final use of the stylet. As seen in fig. 1, the papilla juts out toward the median plane so far that it can be placed across the narrowest part of the first stylet where the notch is (fig. m1); that is across the dorsal face of the first stylet. But its tip turns abruptly inward far enough to reach along the median face (fig. 11) as far as the orifice, into which its tip fits. In figs. 30, 31, this position of the papilla is crudely represented; in reality the tensely swollen translucent spout is very nicely applied to the rounded faces of the entrance to the groove. The papilla is seen in this position when the triangle is receded (fig. 31) and in the advance of the triangle its tip becomes concealed, but it doubtless remains as before. Returning to the actions of the combined stylets which embrace the papillze we note certain ‘tamping’ movements. Besides the advance and recession of the second stylet along the first, the first and second together when locked, are seen to execute quick jerks 282 E. A. ANDREWS that carry the tips of the first back and forth a part of a milli- meter only. When the tips of the stylets have gained entrance into the annulus, these thrusts may serve to introduce the tip far- ther into its cavity. As in the movements of recession the force here must be exerted by the muscles of the abdomen, as the sty- lets themselves have no telescopic power; and actual twitching of the anterior part of the abdomen were seen. SPERM EMISSION AND CONDUCTION In normal conjugation nothing is seen of the sperm so that its transfer from the deferent duct to the cavity of the annulus is a matter of inference. The papilla is applied to the orifice of the tube of the first stylet so that it may discharge into it and sections show the tube full of sperm, (figs. 14, 15); moreover in some abnor- mal cases the sperm is seen to issue from the tip of the canula into the water, and, as the tip of the canula is normally inside the sperm pocket, it is evident that the sperm must pass along the stylet from the papilla. The force that propels the sperm is no doubt muscular contraction, but it is not clear at first what mus- cles are concerned; there are none within the first stylet which acts merely as a passive tube. From such figures as 2, it is evident that the deferent duct has powerful transverse muscles that could squeeze out the sperm with force and this seems the main if not only motive force to carry the sperm through the papilla and all along the tube of the stylet into the annulus. The force necessary to propel the liquid sperm through a tube that is only some 20 to 40 u in diameter (figs. 18, 15) is great and attempts to force india ink through the tubule of the stylet with a small hypodermic syringe failed. When the specially ground can- ula was inserted into the orifice, while the radius was engaged in the tubule, no ink could be forced out of the tip of the stylet. It was inferred that the radius blocked the way, as it fits in so as to nearly occlude the lumen (fig. 8), but the same failure was met with when the triangle was removed from the stylet, but then the ink jetted out along the proximal part of the groove where the ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 283 triangle had been. Apparently the wedge of the triangle is well fitted to hold the liquid in the tubule since it fills up the groove external to it (fig. 9), where the sides of the groove are not as close together as they are distally (fig. 10), which is beyond the wedge. When the ink had been introduced into the tubule and not forced out of the tip of the stylet the triangle was applied to the stylet and the radius worked back and forth like a piston in the tubule with the result that some of the ink issued from the tip of the can- ula of the stylet. This suggested that the radius might act like a piston in normal sperm transfer and thus propel the sperm from the papilla along the tubule to the annulus. We also saw that when a pair was separated in conjugation the sperm that issued from the tip of the canula of the stylet was mixed with bubbles of air when held out of the water, which suggested some action at the base of the tubule (at the orifice) to draw the air into the tubule. However, this might be movements of the triangle or simply failure of the tri- angle to hold a tight joint around the tip of the papilla and ori- fice, for thus air could be drawn in by the stream of sperm ad- vancing, driven by pressure of the muscles of the deferent duct. When the radius was inserted into the orifice and shoved along in the tubule, sperm was forced out of the tip of the canula, which seemed to demonstrate the ability of the radius to act as a pro- pelling piston. We failed to detect any such piston motions during conjuga- tion, but they would be of very slight extent and not readily observed. The movements of advance and recession described above are of a much grosser magnitude than the piston movements that might be supposed to take place. The movements 31, 30 are only for getting right adjustment of the enveloping triangle over the papilla tip and the entrance of the radius into the tubule so that the hand-like triangle may make such tight binding of the papilla to the orifice that no sperm escapes or comes into contact with the water. Yet the piston may then presumably be in posi- tion to advance or recede a little. When we thrust the triangle strongly so far along the stylet that the elbow was at the orifice, (fig. 30), the triangle tended to spring slowly back out of the groove 284 E. A. ANDREWS till only half of the length of the radius remained in the groove, owing apparently to the elastic side walls of the groove shoving against the wedge (figs. 9, 10) as these walls are the closer together toward the tip of the stylet. By this mechanical means the piston might tend to recede, while the movements of the muscles of the abdomen might make the entire second stylet advance enough to shove the piston along the groove’again. We can easily pump the radius back and forth in the groove by moving the whole second stylet. The muscles of the abdomen make the slight twitching back and forth jerks of both first and second stylets above mentioned as tamping movements. Now after the first stylet, with the second locked to it, is introduced into the cavity of the annulus as far as possible, these movements of tamping, if they be continued, could not ad- vance the first stylet but may push the second further along the first and so cause the piston to act on the sperm. The dish-like head of the end of the radius (fig. 22) receives explanation upon the assumption that it is useful in shoving the sperm along in the tubule, in fact, the solid bone-like piston with horny cupped tip provided with elastic flaring edge seems a remarkably well made apparatus for pushing liquid along in a tube that it fits so well. Some such piston movements might be expected from the state- ments of Coste (C. R. 46, 1858), that Gerbe in his laboratory saw the male Astacus apply the foliacious part of the second sty- let to the first stylet and by reiterated back and forth motions during the passage of sperm, keep as he thought, the trough of the first stylet free from sperm ‘that might harden there else. Schil- linger, states that the second stylet is used to push the sperma- tophores out of the first stylet.’ The groove and its concealed inner part that forms the tubule are of course open to the water and if the sperm is to pass free from contact with the water to the cavity of the annulus the as- sumed piston movements of the radius may serve to clean out the tubule and fill it with harmless secretions. The source of such secretions may be surmised to be the glands in the tip of the pap- 1 As reported by Ortmann in Bronn’s Klassen und Ordnungen. ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 285 illa (fig. 2) or those along the tubule itself (fig. 8). Possibly this preparatory action of the radius is all that it has to fulfill and that the pressure of the muscle of the efferent duct is all sufficient to cause the sperm to run through the length of the stylet. In. connection with this question we have to bear in mind that the sperm is in some way freed from its envelope of secretion made in the efferent duct before it is laid away inside the sperm pocket where it exists pure (1). This separation of sperm from enveloping secretion takes place in the tubule of the stylet. In the proximal part of the tubule the secretion of the deferent duct (fig. 2), is still all around the strand of sperm (fig. 14), but distally the sperm is almost pure inside the tubule (fig. 15). We found also that in one case a male, fallen on the side while still holding a female, had the stylets only partly erected so that they were free in the water and from the tip of each canula a very fine stream of sperm, finer than the tip of the spatula, issued slowly and coiled up in a small mass. From one canula the sperm then slowly sank in ten minutes down in the still water as a fine thread with a coil at the tip. Another male showed faint sperm jelly on the tip of the flagellum of the endopodite of the second stylet and this was pure sperm becoming modified by the water; there was no secretion. There are however besides these escapes of pure sperm, escapes of sperm inside of secretions that resemble spermatophores. In a male, in which the triangle was in the position of recession, (fig 31), there were such white sperm threads, $ to 1 mm. long, about the orifice of the groove. The pseudo-spermatophores that in abnormal or interrupted conjugations were sometimes seen were soft, paste-like tubes containing a central mass of sperm. The short pieces of tube stick by their ends to the inside of a pipette used to pick them up and to the shell of the crayfish on which they fall. The wall of these tubes is a very thin layer of secretion which is vesiculate and stringy like dough and can be drawn out into clear threads with minute droplets along them. These would seem to be not normal spermatophores, which in Astacus have 286 E. A. ANDREWS thick walls, but only rods of sperm enveloped in some slight se- cretion from the deferent duct, or possibly that of the papilla or of the glands of the spiral. The thin walls of these tubes break open, hernia like, and sperms ooze out. The separation of the sperm from the secretion of the deferent duct may be due merely to the diminution in diameter of the tub- ule; the pressure of the duct would drive the central part of the current faster than the envelope and thus the central sperm might flow out of the very narrow tip of the canula and leave the envel- ope of secretion behind in the wider parts of the tubule. Finally, when enough sperm had passed along to fill the annulus, the envel- oping secretion might be forced out and this would make that wax-like mass that fills the external parts of the annulus and pro- jects in excess from its mouth as the so-called sperm plug. Pos- sibly again the piston movements of the radius might come into play to clean out the secretion from the stylet tubule and ram it into the annulus. In fact in the last stages of conjugation of one pair slow and repeated movements of advance and recession of the triangle were seen which may be interpreted as concerned with plug making. The use of the glands of the spiral is not known. Possibly their secretion cleanses the surfaces to be used in sperm transfer and aids in keeping water from the sperm. Possibly the secretion may help the enveloping secretion of the deferent duct to adhere to the walls of the tubule of the spiral and thus hold it back till the sperm has passed on into the annulus. THE RIGHT AND LEFT DUPLICATION OF STYLETS The striking fact of the exact duplication of both first and sec- ond stylets right and left suggests questions as to the use of right and left in conjugation. Are both sidesused at each conjugation? Again the remarkable dimorphism of the females of C. affinis and of probably all other species of that genus, which expresses itself in the occurrence of females with the vestibule of the sperm pocket opening a little to the right of the middle line and of females with the pocket opening to the left, so that the symmetry ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 287 of the two is reversed, raises the question as to whether the males are adjusted, in habit, to these two kinds of females, so as to use the right set of sperm transfer organs for a left-handed female and vice versa, or not. The crucial experiments to determine whether males actually use the one stylet for right and the other for left-handed females have not yet been made. However, some facts and considerations make it improbable that a male is obliged to do so and indicate that a male may adjust his stylets so as to use either right or left on any form of female annulus, leaving the question still open as to what is the normal habit of the males with reference to the two forms of females. In the first place we found that though the two first stylets seem to be in the annulus they are never both firmlyinserted. One is fixed firmly by its tip while the other may be drawn away by a pair of forceps. Moreover the one that is inserted has its tip some # to 14 mm. in advance of the other and its base is locked against the base of the other, diagonally, the abdomen being ad- vanced more on one side than the other. Observations showed that not only were there cases of the right stylet in the left annulus but of right stylet in the right annulus and of left stylet in left annulus and of left styletin right annulus. Whether in these cases the sperm was actually transferred was, unfortunately, not made out. It is possible that a male may in- sert one stylet and afterwards the other till finally the actual sperm transfer takes place with some more definite reference to the symmetry of the annulus than the above observations would indicate. That there is any alteration in the advance of the stylets was not made out, but there is often an alteration in the use of the fifth leg, right and left. At any one time many males will be found with the left and others with the right leg crossed, but continuous observations show that the male will change from right to left in difficult cases especially, till a better adjustment is obtained. It was at first thought that there was a relation between the fifth leg and the advance and use of the first stylet so that these were on the same side, that is, the stylet being advanced by the JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, No. 2 288 E. A. ANDREWS use of the leg of that side of the body, but cases were recorded in which the advanced stylet was on the opposite side from the crossed leg. Males crossed the right leg with either right or left stylet advanced and males crossed the left leg with either right , or left stylet advanced. Here again there is the possible objec- tion that the condition observed was not permanent or the one employed in actual sperm transfer. More minute observation of several normal cases are necessary. One good case seems, however, rather conclusive. In this a male, in November, crossed the left fifth and advanced the left stylet, but after an hour of attempts to enter the annulus, crossed the right fifth and five hours later the right stylet was one mm. in advance of the other and the female had a sperm plug in a right annulus. Here the leg and stylet used did coincide, but the annulus was not the one to be expected. Again in some conjugates killed by boiling while united it was found that in one a right stylet was advanced to a right annulus and in others a left stylet to a left and to a right annulus. As far as the evidence goes it gives the impression that the male is free to use either right or left stylet with either right or left fifth legs till successful in getting some one tip of the stylets into the vestibule of the annulus, which may be a right or a left one, indifferently. Yet future observations may show that the lines of least resistance are for the male to use the left stylet for the right-handed female, and the reverse, and that this actually takes place, in nature as the normal, though we doubt if it be at all neces- sary. Observations show that both papille are ready to dis- charge sperm at the same time and it should be determined by ex- periment whether the male uses both right and left sets of sperm transfer organs, alternately, at each conjugation or not. When the first and the second stylets were cut off from one side of some sixteen males and, either at once or some weeks after, these males were given females, the unexpected result followed that in spite of many repeated attempts, one lasting nine hours, the numerous conjugations of these unilaterally mutilated males did not result in any clear cases of successful sperm transfer. In ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 289 many cases the annuli of the females were artificially cleared out so that any new plugs would have been seen. Among these cases there were males that alternately used the fifth left and right legs in crossing, though some had only the left series of stylets and others the right; the leg being crossed on the side where there was no stylet and on the side where there was a stylet. And these same cases were attempting conjugation with females that were of both kinds, right and left forms, so that there was no agreement between the kind of annulus and the fifth leg used. In only one case was there any sperm seen and this was seen twice in successive conjugations of the same male that seems to have been peculiar. This sperm lay in pseudo spermatophores, 8 mm. long, upon the telson of the female under the left stylet, and probably escaped from some imperfection of the closure of the triangle. While it was not found out why there was this apparent inability tocomplete sperm transfer while the stylets of one side were miss- ing it is thought that this is not due to the need of usingsperm from both sides of the body at each conjugation but rather to the mechanical factor that the two sets of stylets are always applied to one another so firmly as to hold the tips of the stylets at the annulus, so that when one is absent the tip of the remaining one lacking the usual support cannot be readily brought to the middle line of the body. Moreover it is possible that the triangle will not be well applied to the orifice unless the fellow triangle be there to shove against it, as both are packed in side by side between the necks of the first stylets. SUMMARY Though the sperm of the crayfish, Cambarus affinis, is injured by exposure to water, it is transferred from the male to the female under water and stored up in an external pouch. The part played by the female in this insurance against injury in transit has been elsewhere described. 290 E. A. ANDREWS The present paper describes only those organs of the male that are combined to form a safe conduit for the sperm from the male to the receptacle on the female. The actual sperm transit apparatus of the male consists of three organs on each side of the body. The anatomy and use of these three organs are here described in detail. The ‘papilla’ or end of the deferent duct is provided with glands and a valve. It is distended by blood and applied to fit accu- rately to the beginning of a tube. This tube is the innermost part of the groove of the first stylet, or limb of the abdomen, and hitherto its existence and use has not been described. The first abdominal limb is, in action, a duct leading the sperm uninterruptedly from the deferent duct into the receptacle of the female. It contains large glands of problematical use, and relies for mechanical support upon the habit of the male in using the second abdominal limb as well as one of the fifth thoracic limbs to insure the entrance of the first stylet into the receptacle of the female. The second stylet is accessory to the first in applying its hand- like outgrowth over the papilla and insuring a tight joint. It also gives mechanical support to the first stylet. How much it may also serve as a piston for cleaning the tube or even for aiding in sperm transfer is left undecided. The ontogeny of the first stylet shows that it begins after the other abdominal limbs and is from the first a simple unbranched outgrowth which becomes a tube by the depression of its central and elevation of its lateral parts to form a deep groove, the bottom of which is ultimately isolated by a shelf. The morphology of the organ, based upon its use, anatomy and development, gives the basis for its utilization in defining species and subgenera. The tip or canula that is inserted into the recep- tacle to discharge sperm is the real tip of the organ and all other tips are to be referred to lateral outgrowths from one or the other side of the original groove. The ontogeny of the second stylet shows that in the first larva it is just like the following abdominal limbs; but its subsequent ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER 291 fate is to add on a lateral outgrowth (appendix masculina) which becomes the useful part of this organ when acting as a necessary part of the sperm transit apparatus. The duplication of all three organs, right and left, seems neces- sary in.as far as removal of one set leads to the lack of necessary mechanical support for the perfect functioning of the opposite set. The evidence is against the conclusion that the right and left openings of different receptacles upon different females are neces- sarily met by the males employing the stylets of one side rather than an other. In each case the male may by trial obtain the entrance of some one of the two stylets into the receptacle of the female. The extreme solidity of the shell of the stylets is to be correlated with the amount of force exerted by the male in making a water tight passage for the sperm from the deferent duct into the recep- tacle of the female. While all six organs are necessary for sperm transfer, most of them may be removed without preventing the males from carry- ing out many of the stages of conjugation that would normally lead up to sperm transfer. Many of the peculiarities of the form and structure of the trans- fer organs are demonstrated to be of use, or even necessary. The accurate interadjustment of the six organs is necessary for the perpetuation of the species. It is difficult to believe that in the evolution of Cambarus the increasing perfection of these organs could have been decisive in eliminating the less perfect organs. Astacus survives with more simple organs and the majority of genera of crayfish have no stylets at all. The perfection of the organs, characteristic of Cambarus may have been brought about from laws of change that it will require much experimentation to discover. JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 2 1 K. A. ANDREWS LITERATURE CITED AnprReEws, E. A. 1906 The annulus ventralis. Pro 1908 1908 1904. 1910 1904 vol. 32. The annulus of a Mexican crayfish. Biol. Bull The sperm receptacle of the crayfishes Cambarus cubensis and C. para- doxus. Proce. Wash. Acad. Sci. vol. 10. Breeding habits of crayfish. Am. Nat. vol. 38 Conjugation in the crayfish Cambarus affinis. Crayfish spermatozoa. c. Boston Soe. Nat. Hist., . vol. 14. Jour. Exp. Zool. vol. 9. Anatom. Anz. vol. 25. PLATES 1, 2, 3, 4 EXPLANATION OF FIGURES I. Photograph taken with a magnification of about ten diameters, of the posterior face of the first stylet of the left side. II. Photograph of the same, taken from the median side, but diagonally, so that the posterior side is also shown in part. III. Photograph of the same from the anterior face. IV. Photograph of the same from the external face. V. Photograph taken enlarged about ten diameters, of the second, or accessory stylet, of the left side of adult male. Posterior face. VI. The same from the median face. VIt. The same from the anterior face. VIII. The same from the external face. PLATE 1 ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER E. A. ANDREWS JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL, 22, No. 2 ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER PLATE 2 E. A. ANDREWS III JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 2 TR ANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFE Er. A. ANDREWS 1 x ORC - = Or JOURNAL ORGANS FOR SPERM-TRANSFER PLATE 4 E. A. ANDREWS Vil !OURN MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. ty ‘J ut OVIPOSITION INDUCED BY THE MALE IN PIGEONS WALLACE CRAIG Department of Philosophy, University of Maine The influence of the male upon the time of oviposition is a mat- ter in regard to which pigeons differ from some other birds, notably the domestic fowl. With regard to the fowl I have consulted a number of poultry keepers and experts, chiefly Dr. Raymond Pearl and Dr. Frank M. Surface, of the Maine Agricultural Ex- periment Station, where the most extensive studies of the egg- laying of fowls have been, and are being carried on. Dr. Pearl and Dr. Surface tell me that the domestic hen, and also the hen of the wild Gallus bankiva so far as can be ascertained, commence their spring laying at an approximately fixed date which can nei- ther be deferred by withholding the cock nor advanced by giving the cock before the usual time. Pigeons differ widely from poultry in this respect. If, from the winter season onward, an old female piegon be kept unmated and isolated, she refrains from egg-laying, in evident distress for want of a mate, until the breeding season is far advanced; at length she does begin to lay, but her laying without a mate manifestly partakes of the abnormal. And a virgin pigeon, if kept isolated from other pigeons, may postpone her laying for a still longer pe- riod. On the other hand, a female pigeon, young or old, will lay very early in the season if she be early mated. Moreover, there is a pretty definite interval between the first copulation and the laying of the first egg, namely six or seven days; if the egg be de- layed much beyond this time, the fact indicates some indisposi- tion on the part of the female. And as the pair rear brood after brood throughout the season, this time-relation between copula- tion and egg-laying is regularly repeated. 299 300 WALLACE CRAIG The utility of this time adjustment in pigeons seems obvious. The male pigeon takes his turn daily in the duty of incubation: hence the female must not lay the eggs before he is ready to sit. This aspect of the matter, which has to do with pigeon sociology, has already been treated elsewhere (Craig ’08) and will be dis- cussed more fully in a book dealing with pigeon behavior. The present paper is to show, not why the male should determine the time of oviposition, but how he does determine it. The thesis of the present paper is, that the influence of the male in inducing oviposition is a psychological influence; that the stim- ulus to oviposition is not the introduction of sperm, for the male ean cause the female to lay even though he does not copulate with her. This is easily proven by an experiment, which requires only pigeons, patience, and time, and I shall now recount seven repe- titions of such experiment, the first two being accidental cases, the other five being trials designed and carried out on purpose to test the thesis. Case 1 (1903). In the spring of 1903 I brought together a vir- gin female dove (individual female no. 7, the species in all these trials being the blonde ring-dove, Turtur risorius) and a young inexperienced male, intending simply that they should mate in the normal manner. The young male played up to the female, but due to his inexperience and to other causes which need not be dis- cussed here, his mating behavior was imperfect and he did not copulate with her. Nevertheless, in due time (six days) she laid an egg, and a second egg, as usual, forty hourslater. This was the first intimation to me that a male bird can stimulate the female to lay, without copulating with her. Such an explanationseemed so absurd at that time that I dismissed it with the assumption that the birds must have copulated unobserved, and I did not even test the eggs to see if they were fertile. Looking back on that case now, however, and considering the observed behavior of that male, I feel reasonably certain that he did not fertilize the eggs but simply stimulated oviposition through the psychic (neural) channels. Case 2 (1904). A female dove (no. 5) had been kept alone ever since her mate had died in November, 1903, and as time wore on OVIPOSITION IN PIGEONS 301 she showed intense anxiety to mate. She being a very tame bird, I had often caught and held her gently, but she did not like to be held, so one day in early March I tried tickling her head and pull- ing the feathers about her neck somewhat as a courting male would do it, and, finding that the poor lonely bird received these atten- tions with intense pleasure and became still more tame, I contin- ued to preen her neck daily. She now acted toward the hand as if it were a mate, went through a nesting performance in her seed dish, there being no nest in her cage, and to my astonishment laid her eggs in due season. The first egg was laid March 11 and the second March 13. There is no doubt in my mind that the caress- ing of this bird’s head and neck brought on oviposition. I once tried to repeat the experiment with another female dove, but she would not accept the touch of the hand as the former dove had done. Yet there is other evidence indicating that, with a spe- cially tamed bird, this experiment, inducing oviposition by the hand, could be successfully repeated. This case called to mind that of 1908, and suggested an ex- periment to determine definitely whether the male dove can stim- ulate the female to lay, without actual copulation. Opportunity to try this experiment was not found till 1907 and following years, when it was planned as follows. Method of the regular trials The experiment requires an unmated female dove that is not laying eggs, preferably a young dove that has never laid. It is best tried early in the season (e.g., in February), especially if an old dove be used, for, as said above, if the female is kept too long without a mate she may lay without one. Side by side with this female, in a separate cage, is placed an unmated male, and the two are given several days to become acquainted. When they act to- ward one another like mate and mate, the doors separating them are opened and they are allowed to come together for a time, under constant supervision. When they attempt to copulate, a slender rod which can be thrust between the bars of the cage is used to keep them apart. Such attempts are made many times in a day, 302 WALLACE CRAIG mostly in the afternoon, and are continued for several days in succession; hence it is best that the experimenter should be able to devote some hours a day for several days in succession to a single pair or at most two pairs of birds. Whenever the birds are not under surveillance they are shut apart, each in his or her own cage. But they should be allowed to come together daily until the egg is laid. A factor which caused difficulty in one of my trials was the nest. In cases 1, 2, 3 and 6, the bird laid without any nest at all (except that in case 6 a nest was given just a few hours before the egg was deposited). But in case 4 (q.v.) the female refused to lay without a nest: it was then necessary to remove the male and make the trial again, first giving the female a nest, and waiting long enough to prove that the nest alone would not cause her to lay. Results of the regular trials Case 3 (1907). Female dove, no. 20. This bird had been bought recently from a dealer, and it was not known whether she had laid earlier in the season. But she was kept isolated for some time, during which she showed no inclination to lay. She was then given a male in the manner indicated. No nest given. June 9. Male allowed in cage of female, and plays up to her. June 15. First egg. June 17. Second egg. (The second egg was of no special in- terest. After the first egg was laid, I generally left the doors open, allowing the pair to come together without surveillance.) Case 4 (1908). Female, the same. She had not laid since the close of last season. No nest given. February 4. Male allowed to enter. The female was unresponsive and showed by her behavior that this time she was holding back for want of anest. This deficiency was supplied in the following manner (vide ut supra.) February 8. Male taken away to another building. March 10. Nest put in cage. Female paid practically no at- tention to it. Many days were allowed to pass, in order to make sure that the nest alone would not stimulate the female to lay. OVIPOSITION IN PIGEONS 303 March 21. Male (after short period in sight of female, that they might become re-acquainted) allowed to enter. March 27.: Egg laid. | Case 5 (1910). Female, the same as in cases 3 and 4. She has laid no eggs since last season (1909.) January 20. I begin to allow male in cage, at same time putting nest in. January 29. Egg laid. Case 6 (1908). Female, no. 19. Virgin, has never laid. No nest given. In this case, the date on which the female was first given the requisite stimulus cannot be stated so definitely as in the other cases. July 12. Male,-in his cage, placed close to cage of female. Cooing commences. Female so excited that she several times assumes, and maintains in extreme degree, the copulation posture. July 14. Male allowed into cage of female, but he fights her, so that it is necessary to remove him (otherwise the female might be painfully injured), and to allow the pair a few days more of preliminary acquaintanceship. July 18. Male allowed to begin his series of daily visits. July 22. Egg laid. Case 7 (1910). Female no. 19, the same as in case 6. She has laid no eggs since last summer (1909.) For several days before contact with the male, a nest was kept in her cage; but she paid no attention to it, showing that the nest alone would not stimulate her to lay. January 20. Male allowed to enter. January 26. Egg laid. SUMMARY 1. In six eases, stimulation of a female dove by a male, without copulation, was followed by oviposition; and in one other instance (case 2), stimulation by the hand of man in imitation of a male dove was followed by oviposition 2. In six of the seven cases (being all except case 3, in which the previous history was unknown), it was known that the female JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 2 304 WALLACE CRAIG had laid no eggs previously during the current year. In two of these six cases the dove was a virgin aad had never laid. 3. It is true that the female may, if left without a mate, begin to lay late in the season. Hence it might be suspected that the sequence of stimulation and egg-laying in the seven cases was mere coincidence. But this is precluded, first of course by the fact that coincidences are not known to happen seven times in succession, and further by the following considerations. 4. Insome of the trials it was proven that the female when stim- ulated by the male laid much earlier in the season than she did when not so stimulated. This is shown in the following table. Female, no. 20. . 1908. (Case 4), stimulated by male, laid March 27. 1909. (Control), without male, began to lay May 138. 1910. (Case 5), stimulated by male, laid January 29. Female, no. 19. 1909. (Control), without male, began to lay April 26. 1910. (Case 7), stimulated by male, laid January 26. 5. The interval between the first stimulation by the male, and the laying of the first egg, was as follows: Case 1. 6 days. Case 2. (Male not used.) Case 3. 7 days. Case 4. 6 days. Case 5. 9 days. Case 6. 4 to 10 days, depending on what is regarded as the first stimulation in this case. Case 7. 6 days. The average and the variation of these intervals tally closely with the average and the variation of the interval in normal breeding, between the first copulation and the laying of the first egg. 6. There were no exceptions. Ovoposition never failed to fol- low within nine days after the first contact with the male. (The only partial failure was that of the first trial in case 4, which was due to faulty experimental conditions. ) OVIPOSITION IN PIGEONS 305 CONCLUSION These facts make it certain that the male dove can stimulate the female to lay, without copulating with her. Harper (’04) mentioned the fact that ovulation in the pigeon does not take place until after the bird is mated, but he was in doubt as to how far the influence of mating was a‘mental’ one and how far it was a matter of the introduction of sperm. The present paper goes to show that the stimulus to the whole process of egg development and laying is a psychic (neural) stimulus, not de- pendent upon the introduction of sperm. BIBLIOGRAPHY Craic, Wattace 1908 The voices of pigeons regarded as a means of social con- trol. Am. Jour. Sociol., vol. 14, pp. 86-100. Harrer, EUGENE Howarp 1904 The fertilization and early development of the pigeon’s egg. Am. Jour. Anat., vol. 3, pp. 349-386. THE ANT-COLONY AS AN ORGANISM’ WILLIAM MORTON WHEELER As a zoologist, reared among what are now rapidly coming to be regarded as antiquated ideals, I confess to a feeling of great diffidence in addressing an audience so thoroughly versed in the very latest as well as the very oldest biological facts, methods and hypotheses. I feel, indeed, like some village potter who is bring- ing to the market of the metropolis a pitiable sample of his craft, a pot of some old-fashioned design, possibly with a concealed crack which may prevent it from ringing true. Although in what I have to say, I shall strenuously endeavor to be modern, I can only beg you, if I fail to come within hailing distance of the advance guard of present day zodlogists, to remember that the range of adaptability in all organisms, even in zodélogists, is very limited. Under the circumstances, my only hope lies in appealing to our permanent common biological interests and these, I take it, must always center in the organism. But the point of view from which we study this most extraordinary of nature’s manifestations, is continually shifting. Twenty years ago we were captivated by the morphology of the organism, now its behavior occupies the foreground of our attention. Once we thought we were seriously studying biology when we were scrutinizing paraffine sections of animals and plants or dried specimens mounted on pins or pressed between layers of blotting paper; now we are sure that we were studying merely the exuviae of organisms, the effete residua of the life-process. If the neovitalistic school has done nothing else, it has jolted us out of this delusion which was gradually taking possession of our faculties. It is certain that whatever changes may overtake biology in the future, we must henceforth grapple 1 A lecture prepared for delivery at the Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods Hole, Mass., August 2, 1910. 307 308 WILLIAM MORTON WHEELER with the organism as a dynamic agency acting in a very complex and unstable environment. In using the term organism, there- fore, I shall drop the adjective ‘living,’ since I do not regard pickled animals or dried plants as organisms. As I wish to describe a peculiar type of organism, I may be asked, before proceeding, to state more concisely what I mean by an organism. It is obvious that no adequate definition can be given, because the organism is neither a thing nor a concept, but a continual flux or process, and hence forever changing and never completed. As good a formal definition as I can frame is the follow- ing: An organism is a complex, definitely codrdinated and there- fore individualized system of activities, which are primarily directed to obtaining and assimilating substances from an envir- onment, to producing other similar systems, known as offspring, and to protecting the system itself and usually also its offspring from disturbances emanating from the environment. The three fundamental activities enumerated in this definition, namely nutrition, reproduction and protection seem to have their incep- tion in what we know, from exclusively subjective experience, as feelings of hunger, affection and fear respectively. Biologists long ago constructed an elaborate hierarchy of organ- isms. Those of a speculative turn of mind, like Spencer and Weis- mann, postulated the existence of very simple organisms, the physiological units, or biophores, which, though invisible, were nevertheless conceived as combining the fundamental activites above enumerated. These biophores were supposed to form. by aggregation the cells, which may exist as independent organisms in the Protozoa and Protophyta or unite with other cells to form more complex aggregates, for which Haeckel’s term ‘persons’ may be adopted. The person may be merely a cell-aggregate or consist of complexes of such aggregates as the metameres of the higher animals, for the separate metameres, according to a very generally accepted theory, are supposed to be more or less modi- fied or highly specialized persons. Somewhat similar conditions are supposed to obtain in the composition of the vascular plants. The integration both of the metameric and non-metameric Meta- zoa may proceed still further, the simple persons combining to THE ANT-COLONY AS AN ORGANISM 309 form colonies in which the persons are primarily nutritive and acquire fixed and definite spatial relations to one another, whereas the more specialized animals, like the social insects, may constitute families of mobile persons with reproduction as the ‘Leitmotiv’ of their consociation. In man we have families associating to form still more complex aggregates, the true societies. Other compre- hensive organisms are the coenobioses, or more or less definite consociations of animals and plants of different species, which the ecologists are endeavoring to analyze. Finally we have philos- ophers, like Fechner, stepping in with the assertion, that the earth as a whole is merely a great organism, that the planetary systems in turn are colonies of earths and suns and that the universe it- self is to be regarded as one stupendous organism. Thus starting with the biophore as the smallest and ending with the universe as the most comprehensive we have a sufficiently magnificent hier- archy of organisms to satisfy even the most zealous panpsychist. As biologists we may, for present purposes, lop off and discard the ends of this series of organisms, the biophores as being purely hypothetical and the cosmos as involving too many ultrabiological assumptions. We then have left the following series: first, the Protozoon or Protophyte, second the simple or non-metameric person, third the metameric person, fourth the colony of the nutritive type, fifth the family, or colony of the reproductive type, sixth the coenobiose, and seventh the true, or human society. Closer inspection shows that these are sufficiently heterogeneous when compared with one another and with the personal organism, which is the prototype of the series, but I believe, nevertheless that all of them are real organisms and not merely conceptual construc- tions or analogies. One of them, the insect colony, has interested me exceedingly, and as I have repeatedly found its treatment as an organism to yield fruitful results in my studies, I have acquired the conviction that our biological theories must remain inade- quate so long as we confine ourselves to the study of the cells and persons and leave the psychologists, sociologists and metaphy- sicians to deal with the more complex organisms. Indeed our failure to codperate with these investigators in the study of ani- mal and plant societies has blinded us to many aspects of the 310 WILLIAM MORTON WHEELER cellular and personal activities with which we are constantly dealing. This failure, moreover, is largely responsible for our fear of the psychological and the metaphysical, a fear which be- comes the more ludicrous from the fact that even our so-called ‘exact’ sciences smell to heaven with the rankest kind of material- istic metaphysics. Leaving these generalities for the present, permit me to present the evidence for the contention that the animal colony is a true organism andnot merely theanalogueof the person. To make this evidence as concrete as possible I shall take the ant-colony asa paradigm and ask you to accept my statement that the colonies of the termites, social bees and wasps, which the limited time at my disposal does not permit to consider, will be found to offer the same and in some cases even more satisfactory data. I select the ant-colony not only because I am more familiar with its activities, but because it is much more interesting than that of the polyps, more typical and less specialized than that of the honey bee, less generalized than that of the wasps and bumble-bees, and has been much more thoroughly investigated than the colonies of the sting- less bees and the termites. The most general organismal character of the ant-colony is its individuality. Like the cell or the person, it behaves as a unitary whole, maintaining its identity in space, resisting dissolution and, as a general rule, any fusion with other colonies of the same or alien species. This resistance is very strongly manifested in the fierce defensive and offensive codperation of the colonial personnel. Moreover, every ant-colony has its own peculiar idiosyncrasies of composition and behavior. This is most clearly seen in the character of the nest, which bears about the same relation to the colony that the shell bears to the individual Foraminifer or mol- lusc. The nest is a unitary structure, built on a definite but plastic design and through the codperation of a number of persons. It not only reflects the idiosyncrasies of these persons individually and as a whole, but it often has a most interesting adaptive growth and orientation which may be regarded as a kind of tropism. In many species the nest mounds, which are used as incubators of the brood and as sun-parlors for the adult ants, are constructed in THE ANT-COLONY AS AN ORGANISM aut such a manner as to utilize the solar radiation to the utmost. In the Alps and Rocky Mountains we find the nests oriented in such a manner that the portions in which the brood is reared face south or east, and as time goes on the nests often grow slowly in these directions, like plants turning to the light, so that they become greatly elongated. This orientation is, in fact, so constant in some species that the Swiss mountaineers, when lost in a fog, can use it as a compass. Every complete ant-colony, moreover, has a definite stature which depends, of course, on the number of its component persons. And this stature, like that of personal organisms, varies greatly with the species and is not determined exclusively by the amount of food, but also by the queen mother’s fertility, which is constitu- tional. Certain ants live in affluence but are nevertheless unable to form colonies of more than fifty or a hundred individuals, while others, under the same conditions, have a personnel of thousands or tens of thousands. One of the most general structural peculiarities of the person is the duality of its composition as expressed in the germ-plasm on the one hand and the soma on the other, and the same is true of the ant-colony, in which the mother queen and the virgin males and females represent the germ-plasm, or, more accurately speak- ing, the ‘Keimbahn,’ while the normally sterile females, or workers and soldiers, in all their developmental stages, represent the soma. In discussing the question of the inheritance or non-inheritance of acquired characters the Neodarwinians trace all the congenital modifications of the worker and soldier phases to the queen, just as in the personal organism all the congenital somatic char- acters are traced to the germ-plasm of the egg. Since the homo- logue of the reproductive organ of the ant-colony consists of the virgin males and females, and since the males mature earlier than the females, the colony may be regarded as a protandric hermaph- rodite. Some colonies, however—and this is probably charac- teristic of certain species—produce only males or females and are therefore in a sense gonochoristic, or dicecious. And this protan- dric hermaphroditism and gonochorism, like the corresponding conditions in persons, may be interpreted as a device for, or, at 312 WILLIAM MORTON WHEELER any rate, as an aid, in insuring cross-fertilization. The fecun- dated queen of the ant-colony represents the first link in the ‘Keimbahn’ and therefore corresponds to the fertilized egg of the personal organism. She produces both the worker personnel and the virgin males and females, just as the fertilized egg produces both the soma and the germ-cells. The colonial soma, moreover, may be differentiated as the result of a physiological division of labor into two distinct castes, comprising the workers in which the nutritive and nidificational activities predominate, and the sol- diers, which are primarily protective. Here, too, the resemblance to the differentiation of the personal soma into entodermal and ectodermal tissues can hardly be overlooked. The structure of the ant-colony thus appears to be very simple as compared with that of its component persons. The question naturally arises as to the particular type of unicellular or per- sonal organism which it most resembles. Undoubtedly, if we could see it acting in its entirety, the ant-colony would resemble a gigantic foraminiferous Rhizopod, in which the nest would rep- resent the shell, the queen the nucleus, the mass of ants the plasmodium and the files of workers, which are continually going in and out of the nest, the pseudopodia. The ant-colony, of course, like the person, has both an onto- genetic and a phylogenetic development; the former open to observation, the latter inferred from the ontogeny, a comparison of the various species of ants with one another and with allied Hymenopterous insects, and from the paleontological record. The fecundated queen, as I have stated, represents the fertilized egg which produces the colonial organism, but she is a winged and possibly conscious egg, capable not only of actively disseminating the species, like the minute eggs of many marine animals, but of selecting the site for the future colony. After finding this site she discards her wings and henceforth becomes sedentary like the wingless workers which she will produce. The whole colony rests satisfied with the nesting site selected by its queen if the environ- mental conditions remain relatively constant. If these become unfavorable, however, the colony will move as a whole to a new site. In most species such movements are rather limited, but the THE ANT-COLONY AS AN ORGANISM ole nomadic driver and legionary ants are almost continually moving from place to place and must cover a considerable territory during the year. After the queen has selected the nesting site, she im- mures herself in some earthen or vegetable cavity, lays a number of eggs, supplying them with yolk derived by metabolism from her fat-body and now useless wing-muscles, and feeds the hatch- ing larve on her salivary secretion, which, though highly nutri- tious, is, nevertheless, very limited in quantity, so that the off- spring when mature are dwarfed and very few in number. They are in fact, workers of the smallest and feeblest caste; but they set to work enlarging the nest, break through the soil or plant tissues, construct an entrance on the surface and seek food for themselves and their famished mother. This food enables her to replenish her fat-body and to produce more eggs. Her expansive instincts and activities now contract, so to speak, and become reduced henceforth to a perpetual routine of assimilation, metabolism and oviposition. She produces brood after brood during her long life which may extend over a period of ten to thirteen years. Her workers assume the duties of foraging, of feeding the larve and one another, and of completing the nest. Their size and poly- morphism increase with successive broods, till the soldier forms, if these are characteristic of the species, make their appearance. Then the individuals which correspond to the reproductive cells of the personal organism, namely, the virgin males and females develop, and the colonial organism may be said to have reached maturity. Like the personal organism, it may persist for thirty or forty years-or,, perhaps, even longer without much growth of its soma, since the workers and soldiers of which this consists are exposed to many vicissitudes and live only from three to four years and probably, as a rule, for a much shorter period. If the queen grow too old or die the colony, as a rule, dwindles and eventually perishes unless her place is taken by one or more of her fertile daughters. This is the ontogenetic history of most ant-colonies. It is so similar to the phylogenetic history derived from the sources men- tioned above that we have no hesitation in affirming that it con- forms in the most striking manner to the biogenetic law. The 314 WILLIAM MORTON WHEELER very ancient behavior of the solitary female Hymenopteron is still reproduced during the incipient stage of colony formation, just as the unicellular phase of the Metazoon is represented by the egg. A further correspéndence of the ontogeny and phylog- eny is indicated by the fact that the most archaic and primitive of living ants form small colonies of monomorphic workers closely resembling the queen, whereas the more recent and most highly specialized ants produce large colonies of workers not only very unlike the queen but unlike one another. In order to complete the foregoing account it will be necessary to consider some interesting modifications of the usual method of colony formation and growth, especially as these modifications furnish additional and striking evidence in favor of the contention that the ant-colony is a true organism. In many species, after the colony has reached maturity and especially if the food-supply continue to be abundant, several of the virgin females may be fecundated in the nest, lose their wings and remain as members of the colony. This may, indeed, contain half a dozen and in extreme cases as many as forty or fifty or even more fertile queens. But often the growth of the colonial organism becomesexcessive through an increase in the worker personnel and passes over into a form of colonial reproduction, when the young fertilized queens, each accompanied by a band of workers, start new nests in the vicinity of the parental formicary. In this manner a very large and com- plex colony may arise and extend over many adjacent nests. For some time the new settlements may remain in communication with the home-nest through files of workers, but eventually the daugh- ter settlements may become detached and form independent colonies. The resemblance of this method of reproductton, which is essentially the same as thesswarming in the honey-bee, to the asexual reproduction of many unicellular and multicellular organ- isms by a process of budding, is too obvious to need further com- ment. The important rdle of nutrition in the development of the colony will be clear from the foregoing remarks. It becomes even more striking in the methods adopted by the queens of cer- tain parasitic species in starting their colonies. Some European THE ANT-COLONY AS AN ORGANISM old observers and myself have found a number of queen-ants that are unable to found colonies without the aid of workers of allied spe- cies. These queens may be separated into four groups, as follows: 1. The queen which enters a colony of an alien species and decapitates its queen or is the occasion of her being killed off by her own workers. The intrusive queen is then adopted by the workers and a compound colonial organism arises, consisting of the germ-plasm of one species and the soma of another. The queen proceeds to lay eggs, which are reared by the alien workers, thus relieving her of all the labor and exhaustion endured by the inde- pendent typical ant-queen during the early stages of colony for- mation. Pari passu with the development of the worker off- spring of the intrusive queen, the worker nurses grow old and die, so that the colony eventually comes to consist of only one species, the soma of the host being replaced by that of the parasite. This method of colony formation, first observed among our American ants and later among certain Huropean and North African species, I have called temporary social parasitism. Now many of the species, which behavein this manner, have extremely small queens, or queens provided with a peculiar pilosity or sculpture that tend to endear them to the workers of the alien colonies which they invade. If we regard the large fertilized queens of ordinary ants, which are supplied with a voluminous fat-body and wing-muscu- lature, as representing eggs provided with a great amount of yolk, and the diminutive queens of the temporary social parasites as the equivalents of alecithal eggs, we have another striking resem- blance between the personal and colonial organisms, for the large queens, like the yolk-laden eggs of many vertebrates, are produced in small numbers but are able to generate the colonial soma inde- pendently, whereas the small queens, which are produced in great numbers, in order that some of them may survive the vicissi- tudes of a parasitic life, correspond to the small yolk-less eggs of many parasites, which have to be deposited in plant or animal tissues in order that the imperfect young on hatching may be surrounded by an abundance of food. 2. The queen of the blood-red slave-maker (Formica san- guinea) adopts a different method. She enters the colony of an 316 WILLIAM MORTON WHEELER allied species, snatches up the worker brood and kills any of the workers or queens that endeavor to dispute her possessions. The ants hatch with a sense of affiliation with their foster mother and proceed to rear her eggs and larvee as soon as they appear. Here, too, the colony isformed by amixture of two species, but the work- ers produced by the intrusive queen inherit her predatory instincts and therefore become slave-makers. They keep on kidnapping worker larve and pupe from the nests of the alien species, carry them home, and eat some of them but permit many to mature, so that the mixed character of the colony is maintained. This, how- ever, is not invariably the case, for old and vigorous sanguinea colonies may cease to make slave-raids and the slaves may die off and leave a pure colony of the predatory species. The advantages of this method of colony formation are obvious, for the colonial soma, being composed of two species, grows more rapidly and is much more efficient as a nutritive and protective support to the colonial germ-plasm, which is restricted to the predatory species. 3. The colony-founding queen of the amazon ants of the genus Polyergus resorts to a modification of the method adopted by sanguinea, as has been shown by Emery’s recent observations. She enters the colony of an alien species, perforates its queen’s head with her sickle-shaped mandibles and permits herself to be adopted by the workers. She pays no attention to the brood but begins to lay eggs, the larvee from which are carefully reared by the workers. The Polyergus offspring inherit the pugnacity of their mother, but, like the sanguinea workers, have the ability to kidnap the brood of other ants. They are, in fact, slave-makers of a very deft and ferocious type. Like their mother, however, they are unable to excavate the nest, to care for their own young or to take food except from the mouths of the workers that hatch from the kidnapped larve and pupe. The mixture of the two species is therefore obligatory, and the slave personnel, which represents the nutritive and nest-building portions of the colonial soma, has to be maintained throughout the life of the colony. 4. Certain feeble queen ants belonging to a few aberrant genera (Anergates, Wheeleriella) invade populous nests of an alien species and are adopted in the place of their queens, which are THE ANT-COLONY AS AN ORGANISM 31% destroyed by their own workers. The parasites then proceed to lay eggs but these give rise only to males and females as the worker caste is entirely suppressed. The colony retains a mixed character, the parasitic species usurping the functions of the germ- plasm, while the host is purely somatic. As there are no means of prolonging the lives of the host-workers and as they do not re- produce, the whole colony is short-lived and the maturation of the parasitic sexual individuals has to be accelerated so that it will fall within the brief life-time of the worker hosts. This condition I have called permanent social parasitism. These four peculiar types of colony-formation all lead to the formation of compound colonial organisms, comparable to certain compound personal organisms which, with few exceptions, ean be produced only by artificial means. In temporary social parasitism the colonial egg can develop its somaonly when grafted on to the soma of another species. This soma eventually perishes and the colony then assumes a normal complexion. This condi- tion reminds us of certain tropical plants, like the species of Clusia and Ficus, which develop as epiphytes on other trees but after killing their hosts take root in the soil and thenceforth grow as in- dependent organisms. The slave-makers of the sanguinea or facultative type are also unable to develop the soma except when grafted on to the soma of another species, but in this case the co- operation of both somas in nourishing and protecting the germ- plasm is maintained for a much longer period. This kind of colony may be compared with a graft made by uniting the longitudinal half of one plant with that of another so that both take nourish- ment through their roots. To make the resemblance more com- plete one of the grafted halves would have to be pruned in such a manner as to prevent flowering. In the amazons or obligatory slave-makers and the permanent social parasites the alien soma alone has a nutritive function, so that the conditions are like those in ordinary vegetable grafts, in which the stock retains the roots and the scion produces the flowers and fruit. I have dwelt on the various methods of colony formation not only because they give us an insight into colonial reproduction, but because they throw light on the colonial organism from the 318 WILLIAM MORTON WHEELER standpoint of parasitology. That the four types of queens and their offspring are directly comparable with entoparasitic persons is not so remarkable as the fact that in ants the host and para- site form a mixed organism which could only be obtained with persons by jumbling together the component cells of host and parasite like two kinds of peas shaken in a bottle. Notwith- standing this mixture the parasitic colony not only retains its identity and the anticipatory character of its behavior but cas- trates the host colony and constrains its soma either to codperate in many of its activities or to specialize as a purely nutritive or nest-building auxiliary. The host is thus reduced to the status of a nourishing or protective organ of the parasite. This behavior has many striking analogies among persons. Guard long ago called attention to the fact that when the cirriped Sacculina settles under the abdomen of a male crab and sends its rootlike haustoria into the tissues of its host, the latter undergoes cas- tration, and its narrow abdomen expands to form a protection for the soft-bodied parasite. In other words, the parasite acts as if it were a mass of crabs’ eggs and the male crab behaves as if it had changed its sex and develops an abdomen of the female type. Not only are there ants, like those already considered, that may be regarded as colonial entoparasites, but there are also a number of species that may be called colonial ectoparasites. These form the so-called ‘compound nests,’ in which two or more species live amicably side by side, or may even mingle freely with one another, but rear their broods in separate nests, thus indicating in the clearest manner the integrity of the colonial organism. This is also shown by the vast number of myrmecophilous insects, which are, of course, ento- or ectoparasitic persons, and behave towards the ant colony as if it were a rather incoherent and there- fore more vulnerable, or exploitable personal organism. Finally we come to what the neovitalists regard as the most striking autonomic manifestations of the organism, namely the regulations and restitutions, and face the question as to whether these, too, have their counterpart in the colonial organism. I believe that the following facts compel us to answer this ques- THE ANT-COLONY AS AN ORGANISM 319 tion in the affirmative. If the worker personnel be removed from a young ant-colony, leaving only the fertile queen, we find that this insect, if provided with a sufficiently voluminous fat-body, will set to work and rear another brood, or, in other words, re- generate the missing soma. And, of course, any portion of the worker or sexual personnel, that is removed from a vigorous colony will be readily replaced by development of a corresponding portion of the brood. On the other hand, if the queen alone be removed, one of the workers will often develop its ovaries and take on the egg-laying function of the queen. In ants such substitution queens, or gynaecoid workers are not fertilized and are therefore unable to assume their mother’s worker- and queen-producing functions. The termites, however, show a remarkable provision for restituting both of the fertile parents of the colony from the so-called complemental males and females. In ants we have a production of fertile from normally infertile individuals, but the incompleteness of the result does not disprove the existence of a pronounced restitutional tendency. Very striking examples of this tendency are exhibited when colonies are injured by parasitic myrmecophiles. I shall consider only the case of the peculiar beetle Lomechusa strumosa, which breeds in colonies of the blood-red slave-maker (Formica san- guinea). Though the beetle and its larve are treated with great affection, the latter devour the ant larve in great numbers, so that little of the brood survives during the early summer months when the colony is producing its greatest annual increment to the worker personnel. The ants seem to perceive this defect and en- deavor to remedy it by converting all the surviving queen larve into workers. But as these larve have passed the stage in their development when such an operation can be successful, the result is the production of a lot of pseudogynes, or abortive creatures structurally intermediate between the workers and queens and therefore useless in either capacity. It is instructive to com- pare this case with the regeneration of the lens from the iris in the Amphibian eye. In his recent analysis of the stimuli of restitu- tion in personal organisms Driesch reaches the conclusion that “the specificity of what is taken away certainly forms part of the JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 2 320 WILLIAM MORTON WHEELER stimulus we are searching for, and it does so by being communi- cated in some way by something that has relations to many, if not all, parts of the organism and not only to the neighboring ones.”’ He also says that “‘each part of the organism assigns its specific share to an unknown something and that this something is altered as soon as a part is removed or absolutely stopped in its functional life, and that the specific alteration of the something is our stimulus of restitutions.’”’ These quotations and Driesch’s further discussion of the problem are even clearer in their applica- tion to the colonial than to the personal organism, for in the former it is much easier to see how each individual insect “can do more than one thing in the service of restitution” than it is to understand how each cell of the person can do more than one thing in restoring a lost organ. I fear that I may have wearied you with this long attempt to prove that the ant-colony is a true organism, especially as this statement must seem to some of you to be too trite for discussion, but when an author like Driesch writesa large workin two volumes on the ‘‘Philosophy of the Organism’ and ignores the colonial organisms altogether, an old-fashioned zoologist may perhaps be pardoned for calling attention to a well-founded, though some- what thread-bare, biological conception. If it be granted that the ant-colony and those of the other social insects are organisms, we are still confronted with the formidable question as to what regulates the anticipatory co6peration, or synergy of the colonial personnel and determines its unitary and individualized course. The resemblance of the ant- or bee-colony to the human state long ago suggested a naive reply to this ques- tion. Aristotle naturally supposed the colonial activities to be directed and regulated by a Baovdtels or jyeuwv, because these personages managed affairs in the Greek states. After the sex of the fertile individual had been discovered by Swammerdam, the word ‘queen’ was naturally substituted for Bacvdebs or ‘king,’ and as queens in human states do not necessarily govern and are often rather anabolic, sedentary and prolific persons and the objects of much flattering attention, the term is not altogether inapt when applied to the fertile females of insect colonies. It THE ANT-COLONY AS AN ORGANISM Al has been retained although everybody knows that these colonies represent a form of society very different from our own, a kind of communistic anarchy, in which there is ‘‘neither guide, overseer nor ruler,” as Solomon correctly observed. In this respect too, the colony is essentially the same as the personal organism, at least in the opinion of those who do not feel compelled to assume the existence of a ‘soul’ in the scholastic sense. For it is clear, that to primitive thinkers the soul was supposed to bear the same rela- tion to the person as the Baovrebs to the insect colony and the king to the human state. This supposition is still held though in a more subtle form, by writers of the present day. Some of these, like Maeterlinck, clothe the postulated controlling agency in a. mystical or poetic garb and call it the ‘spirit of the hive.’ The following passage from the Belgian poet’s charming account of the honey-bee will serve to illustrate this method of meeting the problem: What is this ‘spirit of the hive’—where does it reside? It is not like the special instinct that teaches the bird to construct its well planned nest, and then seek other skies when the day for migration returns. Nor is it a kind of mechanical habit of the race, or blind craving for life, that will fling the bees upon any wild hazard the moment an unfore- seen event shall derange the accustomed order of phenomena. On the contrary, be the event never so masterful, the ‘spirit of the hive’ still will follow it, step by step, like an alert and quickwitted slave, who is able to derive advantage even from his master’s most dangerous orders. It disposes pitilessly of the wealth and the happiness, the liberty and life, of all this winged people; and yet with discretion, as though governed itself by some great duty. It regulates day by day the number of births, and contrives that these shall strictly accord with the number of flowers that brighten the country-side. It decrees the queen’s deposition or warns her that she must depart; it compels her to bring her ownrivals into the world, and rears them royally, protecting them from their mother’s political hatred. So, too, in accordance with the generosity of the flowers, the age of the spring, and the probable dangers of the nuptial flight will it permit or forbid the first-born of the virgin princesses to slay in their cradles her younger sisters, who are singing the song of the queens. At other times, when the season wanes, and flowery hours grow shorter, it will command the workers themselves to slaughter the whole imperial pepe WILLIAM MORTON WHEELER brood, that the era of revolutions may close, and work become the sole object of all. The ‘spirit of the hive’ is prudent and thrifty, but by no means parsimonious. And thus, aware, it would seem, that nature’s laws are somewhat wild and extravagant in all that pertains to love, it tolerates, during summer days of abundance, the embarrassing presence in the hive of three or four hundred males, from whose ranks the queen about to be born shall select her lover; three or four hundred foolish, clumsy, useless, noisy creatures, who are pretentious, gluttonous, dirty, coarse, totally and scandalously idle, insatiable, and enormous. But after the queen’s impregnation, when flowers begin to close sooner and open later, the spirit one morning will coldly decree the simultaneous and general massacre of every male. It regulates the workers’ labours with due regard to their age; it allots their task to the nurses who tend the nymphs and the larve, the ladies of honour who wait on the queen and never allow her out of their sight; the house-bees who air, refresh, or heat the hive by fanning their wings, and hasten the evaporation of the honey that may be too highly charged with water; the architects, masons, wax-workers, and sculptors who form the chain and construct the combs; the foragers who sally forth to the flowers in search of the nectar that turns into honey, of the pollen that feeds the nymphs and the larve, the propolis that welds and strengthens the buildings of the city, or the water and salt required by the youth of the nation. Its orders have gone to the chemists who ensure the preservation of the honey by letting a drop of formic acid fall in from the end of their sting; to the capsule makers who seal down the cells when the treasure is ripe, to the sweepers who maintain public places and streets most irreproachably clean, to the bearers whose duty it is to remove the corpses; and to the amazons of the guard who keep watch on the threshold by night and by day, question comers and goers, recognize the novices who return from their very first flight, scare away vagabonds, marauders and loiterers, expel all intruders, attack redoubtable foes in a body, and, if need be, barricade the en- trance. Finally, it is the spirit of the hive that fixes the hour of the great annual sacrifice to the genius of the race: the hour, that is, of the swarm; when we find a whole people, who have attained the topmost pinnacle of pros- perity and power, suddenly abandoning to the generation to come their wealth and their palaces, their homes and the fruits of their labour; themselves content to encounter the hardships and perils of a new and distant country. This act, be it conscious or not, undoubtedly passes the limits of human morality. Its result will sometimes be ruin, but poverty THE ANT-COLONY AS AN ORGANISM 323 always; and the thrice-happy city is Scattered abroad in obedience to a law superior to its own happiness. Where has this law been decreed which, as we soon shall find, is by no means as blind and inevitable as one might believe? Where, in what assembly, what council, what in- tellectual amd moral sphere, does this spirit reside to whom all must submit, itself being vassal to an heroic duty, to an intelligence whose eyes are persistently fixed on the future? It comes to pass with the bees as with most of the things in this world; we remark some few of their habits; we say they do this, they work in such and such fashion, their queens are born thus, their workers are virgin, they swarm at a certain time. And then we imagine we know them, and ask nothing more. We watch them hasten from flower to flower, we see the constant agitation within the hive; their life seems very simple to us, and bounded, like every life, by the instinctive cares of reproduction and nourishment. But let the eye draw near, and endeay- our to see; and at once the least phenomenon of all becomes overpower- ingly complex; we are confronted by the enigma of intellect, of destiny, will, aim, means, causes; the incomprehensible organization of the most insignificant act of life. Other authors like Driesch, give the postulated controlling agency the sharper outlines of a would-be scientific but in reality metaphysical entity and call it the ‘entelechy.’ It is true that the entelechy is deduced by Driesch from the autonomic peculiari- ties of the personal organism, but as the colony has all the essen- tial attributes of the organism, he would undoubtedly assign it an entelechy, which according to the definition would have to be nonspacial, but working into space, nonspsychic, but conceivable only after analogy with the psychic, and non-energetic, but never- theless capable of determining the specificity of the colonial activities through releasing and distributing energy. I confess that I find the entelechy quite as useless an aid in unravelling the complex activities of the ant-colony as others have found it in analyzing the personal organism. This angel-child, entelechy, comes, to be sure, of most distinguished antecedents, having been mothered by the Platonic idea, fathered by the Kant- ian Ding-an-sich, suckled at the breast of the scholastic forma substantialis and christened, from a strong family likeness, after old Aristotle’s darling evredéxeca, but nevertheless, I believe that 324 WILLIAM MORTON WHEELER we ought not to let it play about in our laboratories, not because it would occupy any space or interfere with our apparatus, but because it might distract us from the serious work in hand. I am quite willing to see it spanked and sent back to the metaphys- ical house-hold. But, speaking seriously, it seems to me.that if the organism be inexplicable on purely biological grounds, we should do better to resort to psychological agencies like consciousness and the will. These have at least the value which attaches to the most imme- diate experience. And even the subconscious and the super- conscious are more serviceable as explanations than such anaemic metaphysical abstractions as the entelechy. Of course, psychic vitalism is one of Driesch’s pet aversions and he will have none of it, because he is a solipsist, but the fact that he is compelled to operate with a ‘psychoid’ and with an entelechy conceivable only per analogiam with the psychic, shows the inconsistency of his position. Before we can adopt any ultrabiological agencies, however, except in a tentative and provisional manner, an old and very knotty problem will have to be more thoroughly elucidated. I refer to the problem of the correlation and coédperation of parts. If the cell is a colony of lower physiological units, or biophores, as some cytologists believe, we must face the fact that all organisins are colonical or social and that one of the fundamental tendencies of life is sociogenic. Every organism manifests a strong predelec- tion for seeking out other organisms and either assimilating them or codperating with them to form a more comprehensive and effi- cient individual. Whether, with the mechanists, we attribute this tendency to chemotropism or cytotropism, or with the psychic neovitalists, interpret it as conscious and voluntary, we certainly cannot afford to ignore the facts. The study of the ontogeny of the person, 7.e., the person in the process of making, in the handsof recent experimentalists, has thrown a flood of light on the pecu- liarities of organization, but the animal and plant colony are in certain respects more accessible to observation and experiment, because the component individuals bear such loose spacial rela- tions to one another. Then too, the much simpler and more primi- THE ANT-COLONY AS AN ORGANISM 32a tive organismal type of the colony, as compared with that of the person, should enable us to follow the process of consociation and the resulting physiological division of labor moresuccessfully. In the problem, as thus conceived, we must include, not only the true colony and society, and the innumerable cases of symbiosis, parasitism and ccenobiosis, but also the consociation and mutual modification of hereditary tendencies in parthenogenetic and biparental plants and animals, since in all of these phenomena our attention is arrested not so much by the struggle for existence, which used to be painted in such lurid colors, as by the ability of the organism to temporize and compromise with other organ- isms, to inhibit certain activities of the aequipotential unit in the interests of the unit itself and of other organisms; in a word, to secure survival through a kind of egoistic altruism.’ 2Since this paragraph was written I have found that several recent authors have given more explicit expression to a very similar conception to the réle of cooperation and struggle in the development of organisms. Especially worthy of mention in this connection are Kammerer (Allgemeine Symbiose und Kampf ums Dasein als gleichberechtigte Triebkraifte der Evolution. Arch. f. Rass. u. Ges.-Biol.6, 1909, pp. 585-608), Schiefferdecker (Symbiose. Sitzb. niederrhein. Ges. f. Natur. u. Heilk. zu Bonn, 18, Juni, 1904, 11 pp.), Bolsche (Daseinskampf und gegenseitige Hilfe in der Entwicklung. Kosmos, 6,'1909); and Kropotkin (Mutual aid, a factor of evolution, London, 1902). at i i § . 4 ; wo) ay Tt P aaa " rt ' he, “ds 7) : 3 ‘ ' Te , we “. rl j ; . \ « . esis ‘ i Ae t i" A . 7 = ay, . my i " “ a h rs ‘e % SEXUAL ACTIVITIES OF THE SQUID, LOLIGO PEALII (LES.) I, COPULATION, EGG-LAYING AND FERTILIZATION GILMAN A. DREW From the University of Maine, Orono, Maine THIRTEEN FIGURES FOUR PLATES This account, which deals with some of the sexual activities of the squid, is based upon observation made on specimens kept in glass sided aquaria at the Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods Hole, Mass. Specimens caught in the fish traps of the immediate vicinity may, by careful handling, be kept in aquaria in fairly good condition for a number of days. Such specimens occasion- ally copulate and eggs are sometimes laid. There are two methods of copulation. By one method the sper- matophores ejaculate their contentsso the sperm reservoirs thrown from them are attached in a special depression on the inner side of the outer buccal membrane opposite the junction of the two ventral arms (figs. 8 and 10). They then slowly emit sperm, which are carried to and stored in, a special sperm receptacle that opens near this depression and is imbedded in the tissue of the outer buccal membrane (figs. 10 and 11). In this receptacle the sperm are mixed with a secretion and are not active. How long the sperm may be retained in the receptacle is not known, but there is some reason to think that they may be retained for at least some weeks. Females with eggs that can be fertilized may be found during the four months, June to late September, that I have worked at Woods Hole. Without exception every adult female that had not spawned had the sperm receptacle filled more or less completely with sperm, although in many cases the 327 328 GILMAN A. DREW eggs were far from mature. This, together with the dormant condition of the sperm in the receptacle, and the fact that they seem to be poured out only during egg laying, point to a possible long retention. It is certain that the same female may have sperm reservoirs attached near this receptacle a number of times after it has been filled, and it is possible that the same sperm do not continue long in the receptacle. There seems, however, to be no evidence that they are discharged except during the period of egg laying. at The other method of copulation results in fastening the sperm reservoirs of the ejaculated spermatophores near the end of the oviduct (fig. 8, s) usually directly on its walls but sometimes on the mantle, gill or visceral mass. There is no special receptacle for the sperm from these sperm reservoirs. They escape into the water, becoming active as they escape, and pass out with the water through the funnel. The escape of the sperm is rather rapid but there are vast numbers in each reservoir, from which they are constantly poured like smoke from a chimney until the reservoir is empty. It is not known how long it takes to empty a reser- voir but by keeping reservoirs from spermatophores that ejacu- lated in dishes of sea-water, and by examining reservoirs normally attached to the oviducts and buccal membranes of females, it seems probable that the sperm do not all escape for two or more days. In aquaria I have seen rather more cases of copulation where the spermatophores are inserted into the mantle chamber than where the sperm reservoirs are attached to the buccal membrane. This may be because of the limited quarters in aquaria. In the larger floating tanks, in which specimens are sometimes kept be- fore they are brought into the laboratory, the buccal membrane copulation seems proportionally more common than in aquaria, but even here the mantle chamber copulation seems to be rather more frequent. The same individuals may copulate several times in the course of a few hours. In general the male is aggressive. The female may attempt to escape or she may be quite passive. Spermato- phores seem to be inserted in the mantle chambers of only those SEXUAL ACTIVITIES OF THE SQUID 329 females that are nearly ready to deposit their eggs. In the large number of trials made it was found that the eggs of these individ- uals were so nearly mature they could be artificially fertilized. Females that are nearly ready to deposit eggs have the nidamental glands considerably swollen and the accessory nidamental glands are highly colored with bright red. Wherever the spermatophores were inserted in the mantle chamber these glands were in this con- dition. Before copulation both female and male are usually especially active and may be known as sexually excited animals by their peculiar movements. ‘The female in swimming seems to be ner- vous or excited. She throws short but rapid puffs of water from the funnel, moves the tail fin very rapidly and, leaving the arms quite limp, spreads them apart and frequently throws them to one side. This gives the arms a jerky or trembling motion not showa in ordinary swimming. Except during the most rapid movements of the female, the male solemnly swims by her side, an inch or two away, but parallel, and with his head in the same direction. He frequently manipulates his arms, spreading them apart, commonly with the two dorsal arms elevated nearly or quite to a perpendic- ular position, and the third arms spread far to the sides (fig. 3). This position is not infrequently accompanied by localized activ- ity of chromatophores. A spot may appear near the base of each third arm and a smaller spot on each second arm a little further from its base. These spots do not remain continuously while the male is in this attitude but suddenly appear with each increase of activity on the part of either the male or female. Occasion- ally blushing is quite general over the head and anterior end of the body and sometimes includes the whole body but the bodies of both animals generally remain colorless except for the special spots mentioned on the male. The attitude of the male, with ele- vated and spread arms, is not continuous but is assumed every few minutes, or in some cases seconds, and the arms may be brought into the usual position of a swimming animal for periods of many minutes. Males do not allrespond equally tothe presence of sexually active females. Not uncommonly one male in an aquarium containing 330 GILMAN A. DREW several males will follow the females around by the hour while the other males remain entirely inattentive. Usually when a male begins to show sexual activity he will follow a single female although other females that show similar activities are present in the aquarium. Occasionally he may change to another indi- vidual but he nearly always returns after a few minutes to the one to which he has been paying chief attention. A few males have been observed that were so sexually excited . they followed individuals around quite indiscriminately. Under such conditions I have upon three occasions seen a male catch another male and insert spermatophores into his mantle chamber. Two of the three instances were between the same individuals, the second performance being only a few minutes after the first. In each of these cases the male seized made great efforts to get away and finally to get hold of the male that was holding him but was unsuccessful. Upon killing the male that received the spermato- phores, sperm reservoirs were found attached to the base of the left gill and to the adjacent visceral mass. Such exceptionally active males may copulate repeatedly with a single female. Ina few cases this has been carried so far that the female has actually been killed. Even after the female has become entirely inactive and apparently dead the male may copulate with her several times. In one case, a male that had been several days without food, after copulating with a weakened female, retained his hold and killed her by eating a considerable hole through the mantle. The male always uses the same arm for transferring the sperm- atophores. This arm, the left ventral, is not greatly modified, but a short distance from its tip some of the suckers, especially those in the row farthest from the midline of the body, and a ridge between the rows of suckers show modification (fig. 4, h). The peduncles of a dozen or more of the suckers of the outer row are considerably elongated and the sucking dises of a few, (six or eight) are greatly reduced in size or entirely absent. In both directions from these, the dises become increasingly normal until no modi- fication is apparent. The suckers of the row toward the midline of the body are somewhat modified, the peduncles being somewhat shorter than those of the other suckers in the row, and the suck- SEXUAL ACTIVITIES CF THE SQUID 331 ing dises somewhat smaller, but in none of the suckers of this row are the sucking dises entirely absent. A glandular plaited ridge extends lengthwise between the suckers of this region and gives off branches that join each of the peduncles. This ridge is highest and broadest opposite the suckers that are most modified and grad- ually disappears as the suckers become normal. At its highest point it has about the same elevation as the shortest modified suckers, which are adjacent. Sections of the modified portion of the arm show that the ridge and suckers mentioned are covered by a thick columnar epithelium that stains deeply. Many of these epithelial cells are filled with large rounded granules that stain with eosin. The cells that cover other portions of the arm are flattened or cubical, do not stain very deeply, and do not contain granules. It seems probable that the cells of the hectocotylized region secrete a substance that aids the arm in holding the sperm- atophores. The modified suckers probably make the bending and grasping necessary for the transfer of the spermatophores more easily accomplished. The positions of the animals during copulation are rather hard to determine as the whole process generally does not occupy more than ten seconds and during this time the animals are usually swimming and the arms are changing positions, but by carefully focusing attention during different acts upon first one arm and then another, the positions and movements have been determined with some accuracy I think. Fig. 1 represents the positions of the animals while the arm of the male that bears the spermato- phores is inserted into the mantle chamber of the female. This figure is the result of my conception of positions after having care- fully observed copulation more than twenty times. Since draw- ing the figure many other observations have been made and the positions always seem to be essentially as given. The male usually grasps the female while both are swimming. Occasonally the female may be resting on the bottom in the charac- teristic attitude, with the tips of the arms and the posterior _ end of the body touching and the head and funnel region somewhat elevated. If not swimming, she usually, when grasped, starts to swim, but in a few cases that I haveobserved she made no effort Bae GILMAN A. DREW and left the bottom only as she was lifted or turned by the male. In every case the male attached from the left side of the female. He frequently swims close to her and brushes the tips of his arms along her head and mantle. Just before attaching, if both are swimming, he sinks slightly beneath her and grasps her body with his arms so that his right arms are all on the right side of her body and his left arms are all on her left side. The body of the male is seldom exactly ventral to the female but usu- ally slightly toward the left side. Attachment is evidently made as nearly as possible in the required position but when the female darts ahead, as she frequently does, the male is likely to attach too far posteriorly. In such caseshe does not let go his hold but crawls rapidly forward, arm over arm, until the right position is attained. Naturally the positions of the individual arms differ somewhat but in general the arrangement is reasonably well shown in fig. 1. For about a second after his position is attained the arms seem busy in making firm attachments, then with a rapid sweep his left ventral arm is passed by the end of his funnel and is im- mediately inserted into the mantle chamber along the left side of her neck, near the funnel. During the act both animals are usually quite without color and the inserted arm of the male may be seen fairly distinctly inside the mantle chamber. The movement of the arm past the funnel is rapid and only once have I actually seen the grasping of the spermatophores and their transference to the mantle chamber. In this case while watch- ing squid in an aquarium that was placed so the squid were between me and a window, a male grasped a female that was resting on the bottom. The female, contrary to the usual custom, did not move. As the male had attached far back on the body, opportunity was given me to get into position for observation before the male could crawl forward. As the female made no attempt to get free, the male seemed far more deliberate than usual. Just before the arm was passed by the end of the funnel, the penis could be seen protruding into it. A number of spermatophores appeared in the opening of the funne) and were grasped by bending the tip of the arm around them. With a rapid sweep of the arm they were immediately inserted into the mantle chamber of the female SEXUAL ACTIVITIES OF THE SQUID goo where they were held about five or six seconds. The arm was then withdrawn and in about five or six seconds more the empty cases of the spermatophores passed out of the funnel of the female with a respiratory jet of water. These spermatophore cases were pretty closely attached to each other by having the tubes of their ejaculatory apparatus twisted together. They were re- covered and found to be 41 in number. To the cluster were at- tached five sperm reservoirs. Examination of the female later showed that most of the other reservoirs were attached near the end of the oviduct. While the number of spermatophores used in an act of copulation varies greatly, the observations that have been made, indicate that this may be a little, but not much above the average. The animals nearly always separate almost immediately after the arm is withdrawn. Beside the male which started to eat the female, a very few individuals have remained attached for from some seconds to nearly a minute after the arm has been with- drawn. After copulation the female frequently seems considerably fa- tigued and may settle to the bottom and rest some minutes before becoming active again. I am rather inclined to think that this is due to her struggles, for when the female remained quiet, the apparent fatigue did not seem so marked. The male does not seem greatly affected, but is likely to continue to be very active for some time. The copulation that leads to the filling of the sperm receptacle on the buccal membrane does not seem to be preceded by special movements. Although I have observed it several times the ab- sence of preparatory movement has left me rather unprepared for the observations that must necessarily be made so quickly, for in this, as in the other form of copulation, the animals are sel- dom in contact more than ten seconds. In the cases I have ob- served my attention has been attracted by the sudden dart of one squid, the male, from one end of the aquarium directly at another, the temale. Before the dart the squid face each other, and are separated by thirty centimeters or more. The movement was always exceedingly rapid and was probably due in each case to the 334 GILMAN A. DREW expulsion of a single jet of water. The male seemed to reach the female before she had time to move much, although she has given me the impression of attempting to dodge as if frightened. The two animals become attached head to head with their arms inter- mingled, each grasping the other (fig. 2). Then as in the other method, the male sweeps his left ventral arm past the end of the funnel and grasps the bundle of spermatophores. These are im- mediately thrust between the ventral armsof the female and held there for a few seconds. The animals then separate and exami- nation has shown fresh sperm reservoirs attached to the receiv- ing depression on the buccal membrane of the female. The empty cases of the ejaculated spermatophores may be held between the arms several minutes but they are finally dropped. Here, as in the other method of copulation, only the sperm reservoirs are retained for any length of time. The spermatophores begin to ejaculate immediately after leav- ing the penis and the whole process is completed in a very few seconds. Pulling the filament attached to the ejaculatory end of a spermatophore is all that is needed to start its ejaculation. As the ejaculatory end of the spermatophore leaves the penis last and, as the spermatophores in the penis and the spermatophoric sac are imbedded in a viscid secretion, there is every reason to believe that the pull given the spermatophores by the arm with which they are grasped, when this arm starts to transfer them from the penis to the mantle chamber or to the buccal membrane, is sufficient to start ejaculation. The arm carries the spermatophores into the position necessary for the attachment of the sperm reservoirs while they are ejaculating and holds them there until the ejacu- lation is complete and the reservoirs are attached. The structure of the spermatophores and the mechanics of ejaculation which lead to the attachment of the reservoirs will be treated in another paper. It should, however, beunderstood that the spermatophores are never attached as such, but they ejaculate and the sperm reservoirs are attached. As the reser- voirs are attached by cement carried inside the spermatophores and liberated by the ejaculation, they may be stuck anywhere. The sperm slowly escape from these reservoirs and may then SEXUAL ACTIVITIES OF THE SQUID a0 become free in the water, as when they are attached in the mantle chamber, or may be stored in a special receptacle, as when they are attached in the special depression on the outer buccal mem- brane. They are mixed with a viscid secretion in the reservoir and probably also before entering the reservoir, although I am not certain about the latter. The epithelium of the region is abund- antly supplied with goblet cells which very possibly supp’y se- cretion for this purpose. The depression in which the sperm reservoirs are mostly at- tached is supplied with a deeply staining columnar epithelium which is covered by a mass of rather hard material, evidently se- creted by these cells, that shows distinct markings parallel with the surface of the epithelium (figs. 11 and 12). These markings seem to indicate that the material is secreted intermittently and thus is formed in layers. This material forms a suitable place for attachment of sperm reservoirs and probably serves no other pur- pose. Reservoirs are sometimes attached to other portions of the buccal membranes or to the tentacles but they are far more abun- dant in the depression than anywhere else. The sperm that es- cape from the reservoirs that are not attached in this depression probably do not find their way into the sperm receptacle. The sperm receptacle has the shape of a compound alveolar gland (fig. 11). It is imbedded in the outer buccal membrane and opens on the inner surface of this membrane at a point opposite the junction of the two ventral arms. Simple cubical epi- thelium lines the deeper alveoli of the receptacle, and cubical epithelium with many goblet cells the portion nearer the open- ing. Some, but not many, cilia have been seen on these cells. The killing fluids used may not have preserved them, for the tails of sperm in the reservoirs are not often individually visible in the sections. With the exception of the tails of the sperm and the possible cilia on the cells the material gives evidence of good pre- servation. A layer of muscle fibers surrounds the receptacle as a whole and bundles of fibers run between and around the indi- vidual alveoli. It was not determined whether the sperm are active in the in- terval between their discharge from the reservoirs and their en- JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 2 336 GILMAN A. DREW trance into the receptacle or not. That they are not active while stored in the receptacle is shown by opening filled receptacles on dry slides. The sperm are invariably quiet, but immediately become active when sea-water is added. In specimens killed soon after copulation, sections show the sperm entering the receptacle in narrow streams and not spread out as one might expect them to be if the sperm were active (fig. 11). It was not possible to remove all the sea-water from living specimens in which the receptacles were being filled without causing disturbances in the vicinity of the reservoirs and that made it impossible to determine the normal condition of the sperm in transit from one to the other. In the sections that show sperm entering the reservoir the tails all point in the same direction, as would be the case if they were not swim- ming actively but were being moved by an outside force. The heads go first and the tails all trail behind. Swimming sperm usually move in all directions but there may be some directive cause that would account for their positions even if they are stored through their own activities. As previously stated, a female that is nearly ready to deposit her eggs can be told by her peculiar nervous movements and the way she manipulates her arms. Frequently the borders of the accessory nidamental glands, which are very red at this time, may be seen through the semi-transparent mantle and thus form a further indication that the eggs are nearly ready to be deposited. The nidamental and oviducal glands of such an animal are always somewhat, and frequently greatly, enlarged. Immediately after the eggs have been deposited these glands, while still large, are soft and flabby. As is well known the squid deposits her eggs imbedded in strings of a jelly-like substance which vary in size with the size of the ani- mal depositing them but which probably average about 8 mm. in diameter and 90 mm. long. The jelly consists of an inner mass that surrounds the eggs and a thick, rather tough but still jelly- like sheath that forms the outer covering. The inner jelly is se- creted inside the oviduct by the oviducal glands. The outer jelly is secreted by the nidamental glands and is apparently moulded into shape as it passes through the funnel. The accessory nidamental SEXUAL ACTIVITIES OF THE SQUID 337 glands, which lie just in front of the anterior ends of the nidamental glands and open by wide openings near the narrow openings of these glands, are very active during this period and secrete a viscid material. What the special function of this secretion is has not been determined. It would seem from position and activ- ity that the secretions from both sets of glands must be mixed as they are poured out. Until recently eggs have not commonly been deposited in aqua- ria at Woods Hole. This maybe due to the way the animals have been handled. Squid will not stand rough handling, either in capture or transportation, and live well in aquaria afterward. When captured in fish traps, quickly and carefully transferred to live cars where they are supplied with an abundance of water, and transported to the aquaria with as little excitement and as good water as possible, they may be kept several days in pretty good condition, but they wear themselves out by constantly bumping against the walls of the aquaria and are not vigorous many days. During each of the months I have worked at Woods Hole, June to late September, specimens have been obtained that have de- posited eggs in aquaria. During the first three months speci- mens ready to deposit eggs are rather easy to get. In September only a small proportion of those captured still contained eggs. Eggs are somewhat more frequently deposited in aquaria at night than during the day, but this may be due to the frequent if not nearly continuous disturbance to which they are subjected during the day in a laboratory where many people are working. The usual number of strings deposited by a female in what would seem to be a continuous laying period ranged from one to six. These strings were commonly delivered from fifteen to forty min- utes apart, the time between any two strings being quite variable in an individual. One specimen, however, deposited twenty- three strings in an hour and thirty-five minutes. These were laid during a comparatively dark day when the laboratory was quiet. Possibly the small number deposited by other females was due to disturbance. The end of the egg string begins to protrude from the end of the funnel while the female rests upon the bottom in the attitude 338 GILMAN A. DREW habitually assumed by resting squid (fig. 5). When from one to two centimeters of the egg string protrudes from the funnel, the female leaves the bottom and begins to swim slowly backward. This swimming is apparently due both to movements of the tail fin and to small jets of water forced from the funnel along the sides of the egg string. The jets of water cause the egg string tobe protruded gradually. The protruding end is now caught by the ends of the two dorsal arms, which are bent ventrally between the other arms for this purpose (fig. 6), and as the string is ejected from the funnel, it is drawn between the circlet of arms. It usually takes from half a minute to a minute for the egg string to pass through the funnel and to disappear between the arms. It is then held between the arms about two minutes or sometimes a little longer. While the string is held between the arms it is com- pletely enclosed by them and their free ends keep twisting around each other. In this position they form a cone with the apex at the ends of the arms (fig. 7). At other times the arms are held so they form a dorso-ventrally flattened expansion that serves somewhat as a rudder or anterior fin. The arms while enclosing the eggs are never entirely still but move slightly upon each other and are probably busy in moving the string about. While the string is thus held the animal slowly swims back and forth, never rapidly but continuously. Toward the end of the period during which the string of eggs is held, the animal shows an increasing tendency to turn the body into a nearly perpendicular position to bring and keep the tips of the arms in contact with the bottom (left animal in fig. 9). With the arms held quite rigid and the tail fin moving rapidly she goes bounding along on the tips of her arms, dorsal side foremost, with a movement somewhat similar to the bounces that may be ob- tained by pushing a lead pencil, held by one extremity and slightly inclined from the perpendicular, over a table. This action is generally repeated several times. She occasionally catches hold of objects with her suckers, finally catches some object firmly, draws down into close contact with it for two or three seconds (right animal in fig. 9) and, when she releases her hold, leaves the string of eggs fastened to the object she had laid hold of. At SEXUAL ACTIVITIES OF THE SQUID 339 this time the jelly of the string is soft and sticky. It hardens quite rapidly and soon will not stick to objects, but at this time it adheres readily. The position of the string when taken between the arms indicates that the string is finally stuck by the end that first leaves the funnel. After sticking a string of eggs the female rests upon the bottom some minutes before another string makes its appearance. She usually selects some protruding object like a stone, shell, or water pipe upon which to stick the egg strings. Having stuck one string she usually, but not always, returns to the same place to stick later strings. If strings are present when a female begins to deposit she usually attaches to these strings, or to nearby ob- jects. This no doubt accounts for the very large clusters, with strings containing eggs in various stages of development, that are sometimes found. Upon several occasions clusters in fish- traps aad live-cars have been found that would not go into an ordi- nary ten-quart pail. Such clusters are of course formed by many females. It is evident that the eggs may be fertilized in the oviduct,in the mantle chamber, or between the arms. Examination of the contents of the oviduct have in no case given evidence of sperm. Eggs taken from the oviduct may easily be fertilized by placing them in sea-water containing sperm, but in no case did eggs taken from the oviduct show evidence of fertilization although many sperm reservoirs that were giving off active sperm were attached to the walls of the oviduct and to surrounding organs. There can be no doubt, however, that eggs may be and are fer- tilized in the mantle chamber and also between the arms. That the eggs may be fertilized in the mantle chamber is indicated by reason rather than by obervation. When sperm reservoirs are attached in the mantle chamber the sperm are constantly liber- ated in the water in this chamber as long as the supply lasts. The eggs upon leaving the oviduct also pass into the mantle chamber and, as before stated, when eggs and sperm are mixed in sea- water, fertilization results. That fertilization may be delayed until the egg string is formed and held between the arms is indicated by observations made on 340 GILMAN A. DREW the female already mentioned that deposited twenty-three strings. She was in a rather large aquarium with a number of other squid. Copulation had occurred several times but this particular squid, . which had been under observation some hours, had not been seen to copulate. Dissection later showed that there were no sperm reservoirs attached in her mantle chamber. Because of disturb- ance she upon six occasions failed to get the egg string between her arms. When she reached for the string with her dorsal arms she was each time disturbed so she dropped the string and ejected it directly into the water. Four of these strings were recovered as quickly as possible after they were dropped, and placed in dishes of fresh sea-water where the proportion of fertilized eggs could be determined. From 40 to 50 per cent of the eggs in the strings developed. More than 99 per cent of the eggs in strings that had been held between the arms and then placed in similar dishes developed. As already mentioned there had been copulation among other squid in the aquarium and as the reservoirs were attached in the mantle chambers there must have been many free sperm in the water of the aquarium. It seems probable that enough of these sperm reached the strings that were dropped, be- fore they could be removed from the aquarium, to fertilize a por- tion of the eggs. Microscopic examination of these strings imme- diately after they were dropped revealed very few sperm, but the strings that were held between the arms were swarming with them. Sperm were able to penetrate and move actively about in the soft jelly of a recently formed string, but the jelly soon hardened so fresh sperm brought in contact with it were not able to work their way in. A curious bit of habit reflex was exhibited by this squid each time she dropped a string of eggs. Immediately after the dis- turbance she took the attitude she would normally have taken had the egg string been successfully lodged between the arms. The arms were held in the form of a cone, the tips were twisted together and she passed on through each of the succeeding phases even to drawing down tight against an object as if to attach the egg string that had never been between the arms. After this she rested until the next string was formed, but she never interrupted the orderly SEXUAL ACTIVITIES OF THE SQUID 341 sequence of her activities because she had accidentally lost a string of eggs. The methods of copulation of cephalopods have attracted the attention of observers from very early times but the act of copu- lation has not been actually seen for many species and where ob- servations have been made’ they have for the most part been in- complete. Aristotle makes several statements regarding the breeding habits of cephalopods. It is quite possible that he saw something of the act of copulation for some species, but his state- ments are hard to follow and are evidently inaccurate. The most important statements are here quoted to show the curious medley of facts and fiction. In chapter 5, book 5, he says: 1. All the malacia, as the polypus, sepia and teuthis, approach each other in the same manner, for they are united mouth to mouth; the tentacula of one sex being adapted to those of the other; for when the polypus has fixed the part called the head upon the ground, it extends its tentacula which the other adapts to the expansion of its tentacula, and they make their acetabula answer together. And some persons say that the male has an organ like a penis in that one of its tentacula which contains the two largest acetabula. -This organ is sinewy, as far as the middle of the tenta- culum, and they say it is all inserted into the nostril of the female. 2. The sepia and loligo swim about coiled together in this way, and with their mouths and tentacula united, they swim in contrary directions to each other. They adapt the organ called the nostril of the male to the similar organ in the female; and the one swims forwards, and the other backwards. The ova of the female are produced in the part called the physeter, by means of which some persons say that they copulate. Again in chapter 10, book 5, he says: ; 1. The malacia breed in the spring, and first of all the marine sepia, though this one breeds at all seasons. It produces its ova in fifteen days. When the ova are extruded, the male follows, and ejects his ink upon them when they become hard. They go about in pairs. The male is more variegated than the female, and blacker on the back. The sexes of the polypus unite in the winter, the young are produced in the spring, when these creatures conceal themselves for two months. It produces an ovum like long hair, similar to the fruit of the white poplar. The fecund- 342 GILMAN A. DREW ity of this animal is very great, for a great mumber of young are produced from itsova. The male differs from the female in having a longer head, and the part of the tentaculum which the fishermen call the penis is white. It incubates upon the ova it produces, so that it becomes out of condition, and is not sought after at this season. Part of these statements, such as “‘The sepia and loligo swim about coiled together in this way, and with their mouths and ten- tacula united, they swim in contrary directions to each other’ would seem to be based upon such observations as could be made from above but the further statement that they adapt their nos- trils (funnels) together, probably indicates the ease with which observation and supposition can be mixed. It is not necessary further to analyze Aristotle’s statements. No doubt much was based upon fishermen’s stories but he evidently did study the an- atomy and habits of these animals and recognized the probability that one of the arms of the male is used in copulation. While the modified arm of the male thus early received atten- tion, the true hectocotylus that separates entirely from the male and attaches itself in the mantle chamber of the female escaped notice for many centuries. To quote from the Cambridge Natural — History: The typical hectocotylus seems to have entirely escaped notice until early in the present (last) century, when both Delle Chiaje and Cuvier described it, as detected within the female, as a parasite, the latter under the name of Hectocotylus octopodis. Kd6lliker, in 184549 regarded the Hectocotylus of Tremoctopus as the entire male animal, and went so far as to discern in it an intestine, heart, and reproductive system. It was not until 1851 that the investigation of Vérany and Filippi confirmed a suggestion of Dujardin, while H. Miller in 1853 completed the discovery by describing the entire male as Argonauta. While nearly all male cephalopods show some modification of one or more arms, the only ones that have been reported with de- tachable arms are Argonauta, Ocyth6ée, and Tremoctopus. Extended studies have been made on the modification of the arms of cephalopods, and there have been a few observations upon SEXUAL ACTIVITIES OF THE SQUID 343 the functional activities of these arms, but most of the observa- tions have consisted in finding sperm reservoirs recently attached to various portions of females. In 1869 Lafont described copulation i in Sepia. A translation of that portion that deals with the act itself is as follows: In copulation the male and fernale precipitate themselves upon one an- other, hold together by their arms which are twined together, and remain thus, mouth to mouth, for a variable time, which may last for two or three minutes. This act is followed in the female by a state of very marked general prostration, while in the case of the male the general excitation is greatly prolonged and for a considerable time it keeps the splendid appearance these animals show as the result of the accomplish- ment of the function of reproduction. He supposed that while the animals were attached by their arms, head to head, the male ejected a packet of spermatophores, which ejaculated while in his mantle chamber and the sperm reser- voirs were then thrown from the funnel of the male into the bran- chial chamber of the female with the current of water entering her branchial chamber. Sepia, like Loligo, has a receptacle for the storage of spermato- zoa in the buccal membrane, and the position observed by Lafont of animals attached head to head was doubtless a true position of copulation, but it seems probable that the spermatophores were not disposed of in the way suggested, but were transferred to the buccal membrane by one of the arms of the male. Lafont found sperm reservoirs attached in the mantle chamber of the females near the mouths of the oviducts, so it seems probable that in this form, as in Loligo pealii, both methods of copulation occur. Racovitza (1894, a) observed copulation inSepiola. The male . seized the female, turned it over and inserted his first pair of arms into the mantle chamber. Copulation lasted eight minutes dur- ing which the female struggled to free herself. He speaks of the spermatophores being fixed on the folds of a large pocket situated on the left side of the pallial cavity of the female. These ejacu- late and the freed reservoirs deliver their sperm into the pocket 344 GILMAN A. DREW which in turn ejects them (from his description I take it they are not stored up in this pocket as in the receptacle on the buccal mem- brane of a squid) into the pallial cavity where they are supposed to meet the eggs as they are laid. The most complete account of copulation that I have seen for any cephalopod was given by Racovitza in 1894 (b) for Octopus vulgaris. He observed copulation in an aquarium and gives a figure showing the positions of the animals. The copulation differs markedly from that of Loligo, as might be expected, for Octopus has a hectocotylized arm that is much more differentiated than that of Loligo. The animals were some distance apart in the aqua- rium. The male reached over with the hectocotylized arm, which for this species is the third on the right side and, after caressing the female with its tip, introduced its end into her mantle chamber by the side of the funnel. Here it remained for something more than an hour. During this time the female remained quiet, ex- cept for certain spasmodic movements, while the male showed only slight movements of the hectocotylized arm which were sup- posed to be associated with the movements of spermatophores down the longitudinal groove of this arm. Although it was not possible actually to see the spermatophores in transit, examina- tion of the female after copulation showed numbers of the sperm reservoirs, derived from the ejaculated spermatophores, within the oviducts. Evidently there are at least three methods of copulation prac- ticed by cephalopods. A method of caducous hectocotylism in which the charged hectocoty] is liberated in the mantle chamber of the female; a method in which the arm does not liberate any special portion but is so modified that it can transfer spermato- phores by a mechanism within itself to the region of the oviduct of the female; and finally a slight modification of the arm that simply enables it to grasp the spermatophores which are then trans- ferred directly to the female by moving the arm. Where the lat- ter method is employed there may be two kinds of copulation, as in Loligo peali. Racovitza, (1894, c) in commenting on the copulation of Rossia believes that, although special receptacles are found outside the SEXUAL ACTIVITIES OF THE SQUID 345 mantle chamber of this species, they cannot be considered as nor- mally functional. He seems led to this conclusion by finding sperm reservoirs attached to various portions of the bodies of the animals as well as in the immediate neighborhood of the mouths of the oviducts. It would seem more likely in the light of the ob- servations here recorded for Loligo, that a copulation that leads to the filling of these receptacles is normal and that the sperm so stored may be used in fertilizing the eggs. It is certainly hard to conceive by what steps a complicated method of transferring sperm that has led to the formation of a hectocotylized arm and complicated spermatophores might be perfected. The modification of different arms for copulation by different cephalopods further increases the difficulty in under- standing the history of hectocotylism as a whole. While evidence that bears directly upon the history of the hecto- cotylism seems to be lacking, such complications are so frequently considered to be impossible to explain by known evolutionary factors that it may be well at least to consider the great difficul- ties presented.by such structures. It must not be supposed that in so doing I put myself in the position of defending a thesis. This would be too much like the methods employed by many of the Greek philosophers who needed little or no basis of fact upon which to build. My only reason for considering the matter here is to show that, with all the difficulties, the condition of hectocotylism among modern cephalopods cannot be considered beyond the pos- sible range of evolutionary factors. Among the Dibranchiata the arms that show hectocotylism are the first, the third and the fourth on both sides of the body. Some- times more than a single one is affected. In such cases the modi- fied arms may be symmetrically placed on the two sides of the body, or they may be adjacent arms on the same side of the body. Steenstrup attempted to base the classification of cephalopods upon their hectocotylized arms but Brock and Hoyle have shown that forms whose general body structure would seem to indicate relationship, do not always have homologous arms modified. While the arm is usually constantly on one side for all members of a genus, unless both sides are modified as not infrequently hap- 346 GILMAN A. DREW pens, a genus whose general body structure indicates nearrela- tionship may have the similar arm of the other side modified. The position of the arm on the right or left side of the body is not generally considered very significant. ‘The somewhat frequent occurrence of genera showing hectocotylism of arms symmetri- cally placed on the two sides of the body may indicate a primitive paired condition that has been replaced among the majority of existing cephalopod genera, by specializing on one side and drop- ping out on the other. Whether this accounts for the condition or not, the shifting of a modification from one side of the body to the other, sometimes involving modifications of other body structures and sometimes apparently not, is not uncommon among animals, and even if not easily explained, evidently has no very great phylogenetic significance. Shifting in series is not so com- mon and when we find in the same family, genera with the fourth and others with the first arm hectocotylized it becomes difficult to imagine ancestral conditions that made this posisble. Wherever known, male cephalopods use one or more of the arms to transfer sperm to the female. Copulation has not been described for many of the species but the presence of more or less modified arms in more than half the recognized families may be taken as an indication that either these animals or their ancestors used their arms in copulation. If the spadix of Nautilus is used in copulation we have a pos- sible indication that a number of arms may have been employed in the transfer of sperm by primitive cephalopods. It is of course possible that all the arms were used for this purpose and that the present diversity can be accounted for by the specialization of one or the other of the arms involved in this primitive condition. This, however, does not seem reasonable when the diversity within the limits of a single family is considered. The arm that is used, and the way in which it is used, is asso- ciated with the character of the spermatophores and the position of their final discharge. The Octopoda show the greatest struc- tural modification in their hectocotylized arms. While two of the families of this group give no evidence of hectocotylism, none of the genera of the remaining families are known to be free from it, SEXUAL ACTIVITIES OF THE SQUID 347 and wherever found it is always the third arm that is involved. Sometimes this arm is on the right and sometimes it is on the left side. In three genera it is known to be caducous and in a fourth (Alloposus) it is supposed to he. In the remaining genera in which the hectocotylized arm has been studied, the modifications, while not resulting in the actual separation of the arms, are of an exten- sive nature. In Octopus, for instance, they involve not only changes.in size, form, and the condition of suckers, but a special eroove is present through which the spe matophores are supposed to be carried from the base, presumably from the penis to the tip. The tip in turn is modified so it is supposed to function in placing the spermatophores in position for ejaculation. The Decapoda do not show such extensively modified hectoco- tylized arms. ‘The changes are here chiefly confined to some of the suckers and their immediate vicinity. In Loligo this modi- fication apparently serves to aid the armin grasping thespermato- phores, which are then transferred by the movement of the arm. While the actual grasping of the spermatophores has not been previously observed, there can be little doubt that other forms of the Decapoda use the arms in a similar manner. Where copula- tion has been observed the movements of the arms indicate that they are used in the transfer, and the positions of the sperm reser- voirs that have been found attached to the females indicate that some arm must have functioned in getting them into position. As there is no special transferring mechanism, this must have been accomplished by the free movements of the arms. Where structural modification is slight and the placing 0 the spermatophores is due to dexterity, there is less difficulty in under- standing how the function may be shifted from one arm to another in response to changes in the positionof the attachment of the reservoirs on the female, than would be the case were great structural changes involved. It would be much more difficult to understand how there could be a shifting in series of arms as highly modified as those of the Octopoda, where only the medified arm could possibly perform the function. It mast not be understood that habit formation requiring such dexterity is considered easier to originate than modification in 348 GILMAN A. DREW structure that will perform similar acts. When, however, the habit and dexterity have been acquired, it is not inconceivable that they might be shifted to another closely similar appendage if the position of this appendage becomes more suitable forthe purpose. The modification is so slight in the arms of most of the Decapoda, and the modification varies so greatly in the different genera, that it may have been functionally acquired in each case. So far as can be seen it would be mechanically quite posgible for a squid to use an unmodified arm, instead of the one that shows the modification, for the transfer of the spermatophores. The spermatophores might not be so tightly or compactly held but the normal suckers would hardly seem to interfere greatly in the performance of the function. There is still another question involved. Is there any genetic relation between these two methods of transfer and if there be, which, if either, most probably came first? A special method of copulation that requires the use of arms and complicated spermatophores is not found among animals often enough to make it at all probable that it has arisen in this group more than once, so we can hardly doubt that the two methods are genetically related. At first sight the squid’smethod of grasping the spermatophores and transferring them directly might be considered the simpler process, but there is some reason to doubt that this method was at the beginning of the series. While it would be hazardous to say that Octopoda were the ancestors of Decapoda, there is much reason to believe that the ancestors of the latter lived upon the bottom and were far less active than the modern animals. Such animals would not seem to be so well adapted for the transfer of spermatophores by dexterous movements as the more active, free- swimming forms. It is at least certainly true among modern ceph- alopods that those that show great modifications in the structure of the hectocotylized arms are found entirely among the less active bottom forms. If the method of transferring sperm by means of the arms originated before the Decapoda became free-swimming animals, and this seems the only explanation of its prevalence SEXUAL ACTIVITIES OF THE SQUID 349 among both Decapoda and Octopoda in modern times, it would seem that structural modification probably came early. Possibly this modification was based upon the use of one or more arms as guides for the transfer of the sperm. It is possible that having first used the arms as guides, structural modifications and dexterous movements were developed as divergent methods. If the two methods form a linear series, there issome reason to think structural modifications came first.. It would seem much easier to explain modifications that lead to the change in the structure of appendages for the transfer of spermatozoa, as the grooved hec- tocotylized arm of Octopus or the modified abdominal appendages of certain Crustacea, than to explain a sudden change that would result in a practically unmodified arm functioning by grasping spermatophores of a very specialized kind, transferring them quickly and accurately to the required position and holding them there until they have had ample time to ejaculate and fix their contents. It seems more reasonable to suppose that an arm modi- fied as a machine to perform this process, with its tip serving to place the spermatophores in position, might in time acquire the necessary dexterity and then lose the modifications previously acquired, than to look at this as the beginning of the series. Again we find that in such cases as the squid, where the arm is little modi- fied but very dexterous, there is a special receptacle at some dis- tance from the opening of the oviduct that is norma ly filled with sperm during the breeding season. This would certainly seem to be a comparatively recently acquired receptacle, so the copulation leading to its being filled would also be considered comparatively recent. That this receptacle is concerned in the fertilization of the eggs is shown by observations made while the eggs were being laid. With no personal knowledge of the breeding habits of other cephalopods than the squid, it would seem more reasonable to consider the method of using the detachable hectocotyl of such forms as Tremoctopus as one extreme, the method used by Loligo In grasping spermatophores and transferring them directly as an- other extreme and the condition shown by Octopus as the modern greatly specialized product of a modification such as early cephal- 350 GILMAN A. DREW opods probably developed. This would mean that the detachable hectocotyl is an extreme specialization in structure and that the modification shown by the squid represents possibly a degenera- tion in structure but a remarkable specialization in habit. Why a form should have two methods of copulation is not at all clear. Certainly the introduction of the spermatophores into the mantle chamber to a position near the oviduct is to be con- sidered more primitive than their being placed in a position to fill a receptacle outside of the mantle chamber, but why mantle chamber copulation should be retained after the receptacle has been perfected is not clear. That mantle chamber copulation is not absolutely necessary for the fertilization of the eggs I think is proved by my observations; that it is common is certain. That the sperm receptacle is an improvement over the free attachment of the sperm reservoirs in the mantle chamber is evident from the longer possible retention of the sperm in the receptacle. Inalim- ited period after the sperm reservoirs are freed from the sperma- tophores, as when deposited in the mantle chamber, the sperm all escape and are wasted unless oviposition takes place in the mean- time. SUMMARY Squid have two methods of copulation. By one method sperm reservoirs are attached in the mantle chamber on or near the ovi- duct and immediately begin to discharge their contents freely in the water. By the other method sperm reservoirs are attached to the outer buccal membrane and the sperm become stored in a special receptacle in the membrane, which is placed opposite the junction of the two ventral arms and opens on its inner surface. The left ventral arm of the male is always used in transferring the spermatophores, which are grasped by the arm and transferred by its free movement. Ejaculation of the spermatophores is evi- dently started by the pull given their filaments when the arm starts to transfer them from the penis to the mantle chamber or buccal membrane. The transfer requires rapidity and dexterity and the spermatophores are held in position until ejaculation is complete and their sperm reservoirs are fastened. As many as forty sperm- atophores may be transferred at a time. SEXUAL ACTIVITIES OF THE SQUID Bot The egg strings are composed of two kinds of jelly. One kind is supplied by the oviducal gland and the other by the nidamental and probably accessory nidamental glands. The string is appar- ently molded into shape by passing through the funnel. The jelly is at first soft and sticky but soon becomes tough and loses most of its stickiness. From the funnel the egg string is drawn between the circlet of arms, where it is held two or more minutes. In sticking the string the female grasps some object with her arms and draws down tight so the string is evidently crowded against it. When she releases her hold the string is left sticking to the object. Fertilization evidently does not take place inside the oviduct. It doubtless may take place in the mantle chamber when sperm reservoirs are present there, and is known to take place while the egg string is held between the arms. The sperm are liberated - from the receptacle while the eggs are between the arms. Notwithstanding complications, the conditions of hectocotyl- ism shown by cephalopods need not be considered beyond the influence of factors of evolution. LITERATURE CITED The cephalopod literature is very extensive. Only those papers directly re- ferred to are here given. ARISTOTLE History of animals. Trans. by Richard Cresswell. 1891. Brock, J. 1882 Anat. u. Syst. d. Cephalopoden. Z. f. wiss. Zool. 36. 1884 Miénnchen d. Sepioloidea lineata. Z.f. wiss. Zool. 40. Horie, W. E. 1907 Presidential address of Zodlogical Section. Rept. Brit. Ass. Ady. Sci. Laront, M. A. 1869 Observations sur la fécundation des Mollusques Cephalo- pods der Golfe de Gascogne. Ann. des Sci. Nat. (5) 11. Racovitza, Emile. G. 1894a Sur l’accouplement des quelques Cephalopods Sepiola rondeletii (Leach), Rossia macrosoma (d. Ch.) et Octopus vul- garis (Lam.). Comp. Rend. |’Acad. des Sci. 118. 1894b Notes de Biologie. I. Accouplement et Fécondation chez Octopus vulgaris Lam. Arch. d. Zool. Exper. et Gen. (3) 2. 1894ce Notes de Biologie. II1l. Moeurs et Reproduction de la Rossia macrosima (D. Ch.). Arch. d. Zool. Expér. et Gen. (8) 2. STEENSTRUP, J. J.S. 1856-57 Hectocotyl. hos Octopodstegterne. Vid. Selsk. Skr. (5) 4, Translated Ann. N. H. (2) 20. 1881 Sepiadarium og Idiosepius. Vid. Selsk. Skr. (6) L. 1887 Notz Teuthologice 7. Overs. Vid. Selsk. Forh. JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 2 302 _ GILMAN A. DREW EXPLANATION OF FIGURES All of the figures that represent the attitudes of squid were drawn from memory after repeated observations. While each figure is thus really a composite, and must represent impressions received rather than the actual positions of particular in- dividuals, much care has been given to the preparation of the figures and it is be- lieved that the general attitudes are reasonably wellrepresented. Sexually mature squid are usually as much as 15 cm. and may exceed 40 em. in length. ABBREVIATIONS bmi, inner buccal membrane n, nidamental gland bmo, outer buccal membrane na, accessory nidamental gland d, depression in which sperm reservoirs 0, oviduct are attached r, rectum g, gill Ss, sperm reservoirs (ejaculated from sper- h, modified (hectocotylized) portion of matophores) arm sr, Sperm receptacle j, Jaws sro, opening of sperm receptacle PLATE 1 EXPLANATION OF FIGURES 1 Copulating squid showing the positions taken by the animals when the sperm- atophores are inserted into the mantle chamber. The figure shows the animals during the period the arm of the male is inserted in the mantle chamber of the fe- male. Drawn from memory after many observations. 2 Copulating squid showing the positions of the animals when the spermato- phores are placed so that their reservoirs become attached to the outer buccal membrane. The figure shows the male in the act of grasping the spermatophores with the tip of his arm as they are ejected through the funnel. Drawn from mem- ory after many observations. 3 Acommon attitude of a sexually excited male. The arms are not kept rigidly in a set position, but are frequently spread as shown in the illustration and held thus for from a few seconds to a minute or more ata time. The drawing is based upon sketches made of active animals. 4 Photograph of the two ventral arms of a male squid, showing the slight modi- fication (h) consisting of enlarged peduncles, reduced sucking dises and a ridge between the suckers, toward the tip of the left arm. The wrinkles on the arms are due to shrinkage. A bit of the outer buccal membrane shows between the arms. The arms from which the photograph was made are 93 cm. long. SEXUAL ACTIVITIES OF THE SQUID PLATE 1 GILMAN A. DREW Drew, del. JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 2 358 PLATE 2 EXPLANATION OF FIGURES 5 Afemale at rest with the egg string beginning to protrude. Drawn from memory and hurried sketches after many observations. 6 | Se ce Be ce Oe Bee oe oe oe oe oe ee z oe Oe ROSAS OURS Bon ee Sa : 2 a or ia E —* fae a a n | | oO fe DOD OOAHHHONOONHHIDNION AHN ON AON ORHENAOMOEANR | DOOSSKRKNKKKRKRKRDDDDDDDAABRBAASASCSCSCSOHHANS HMO HHH | | Ss coe coe Oh Be oe Oe he Doe ee ee oe | | \ pees a =! a lz ] | | | | | SAAN WH Hg 1D SH DD ROONHODRAONGSHBONADHNAGANAONNA veer ae ccl e COHOSSOSSSSOSOSSOON EEE EEN NN DNDN SRBSSBRBOSSCOd AS . > Se I oe ee Be oe ee oe ai S|) 2 | i : Lae ew =| 4 < j bat | 5 | | aha iain OM DOCOM HON NDOAAMAMNMOTNONNDRONHOOE S 5) 6 SCSOSSOSOSOOSOSRERKRKRK KR RR DHDHHDGDOAGAGASDASSOSOHHH i & Sasa ~ eet = a ee me = a os == ~ = ~ — bal = | © | 2O A as ead RE S zi | : El I < NY fool Pa Ts) 2 || 0 rae = | ; ‘> 8 | ars Be <= |—————_— == = ~ ———— —- = oO | i el rr DARPOCOAAANMMAMDOON On S || va a HH Had isidisiginisisig sigan isin eo | ial = | § |. 3 | ———___—_ SSS = -=— - = 1} eal a = || ‘a TAA HHI ID IDI MMOS OOD Hed 1D Q &, || fq IDAGAGAG iG asic isis isin gpSosooooe A = |i << ~ ay ss A = | 2 | N68 HAD ID BOE OD AOD HOD AAO IDO A AOA HO S69 19 1 M0919 1 Ooo 09 19 0 . | on | Sk | CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS 401 SS HE 89 2 69 00 09 OD O00 HD O_O 0119 A. IED O DIN IHODOCOSCHW WIN WOIBO WA es IN EIED INQ IDDOIGDNnR KN DDBRAONNAMH HOR KROHN MM HOR GOOCH MH SOOM RIBK OH oma FSSA N ANNAN AA AAA AOD OD OD OD ODO OD ODO HAHAH HID HISIOIDIn BOOBS oR THD CN00 6 0 09 00 09 69 OHO E> 09 09 09 19 DO OO A HOO 69 19 CO. 19 0.00 19 O 4 69 09 19 19 CO O 00 00 OO 19 00 O09 11D IDIDO ORME DWDSSOSSONHADHIDSRHDHDSSCOMMBRGGHAI ON DSOOMAMIMHisnNostis tt ON NN TNO OI I OI NT 019 019 013. 019 09 01. 019 CD SHH SH HH HID IN ID INIDOOOSOOrr COKE IND HOSE NIDA HOOMHONOEM GHDWHOMDMAE-OHINODOMNODNDONNMWOOCRrOM® PAN OHH HIN IDDSRNADRBAOHANDHABDSSHHSBOHAHHIN SIR KDOSONMIBnNnNOoMsHOs SAN AA AAA AANA AIO 09 09 09 OD OD OD OD OD OD HOD HH HH HHI D2 BD SH 00 CN 4 4 09 09 09 ON SH HDD S 19 00 09 ODO OW O O19 1 O O09 19. O O 00 O 09 IO 10 tH 00 00 CO FAN SH HID IDSSKRWDADBONHNADOIDIBOSORDDOHONMMINOSOKRKKNGNNH HOO HNHOS Fr I TN IT ON IT 09 09. 09. OS OD CVD. OD OD. OD 01D CD SH SH SH HOH HD 1 19 1 1D SAN 69 09 1D MH HKD 29 CO COE O&O 00 00 00 © VID Be 00 2 II 09 SH E> 00 2 © © 19 C0 © 4 O00 S19 & 00 OD HID 41 1D > 4 191819 19.19 191919191918 1919.19.18.1919 1G OO OO OOR NEE ENN HHHDDAAABOSSSH MANOA Seer thon Renee ee hee ee OD UD CN CD CD OF MH UC UD 00 C2 DS OA ACN CA SH CO Be 4109 HID P= 00 OO HOMIE AHOWOMOWOMOA Oa hODOS 1919 1919.19 19.19 19 11H} NDOSOSOSSSSOSOSKM OK KKK DHHHDHHDHNAGESDSOSSOSCH AH HANANAE Sonia than ieee Ihre lhe Ieee hoe ee ee ee ee eM CO RNa SEER AIG Ne oC ee ENS BIC Saleh IGG OIC I SCN 1S) ICH SHOES SOOOSSON EEE EEN DNNDARBABOOSH AMAA OOM OSMEOSSSOTIA FSR BRN IH TANNAINANG BD DOV HE BE DDD CVD SHA DAN 69 © 10 DHE DO DININAORWAOPDAIMMowe SONNE NH DHHHH WOOP AABSSSSM AANA Od Od Og HIG ID OOM WKH SAOGIAS TFN NNN RNA AR © CO OO HD? OD DOI CD DP GO 09 G2 SH ALD D2 DH DO OVID 4 4S 1D IED OD OO WO IDO MAO’ VID OO O19 O ois HH Hid IDI SSOKRK KK DDAADAOHHHMABOSRODDAGDONAMHOSOOSONGOnAHON KR WOGS NNN NANA NAN AAI OD 69 09 09 01 OD 0D CD OD SH SH SH ch OH SH ee ain HDD TH D0 Be O09 AI 91D VID AI OD DO O99 S409 WO MO 0009 Ort OW ODO OD 04 OD O OD 19 CU Od OD AD = aoo HHH Hid WON DODAAOSCHONGMHAHORDOBDOHAMIBIAHOSOHDOSOSONGHMNSCHHHOOS rd rt tt ON NNN OI OI OD 09 0 09 9 09 OD CD OD. OD OD OVD OD SN SH et et HH HH AD SH C91 OB O19 2S Be UO OE SO O19. O O29 16 XH E~ 00 269 1019 © C9 001) S601 C'S 69:19 S900 SO Sco IDIDSKhRKDDSOSCSCHANGM MO HININS ~DOHNMHHHR ONT ANHODDONGNR OOH 69 aH at HHS 1S BS OS SS AAV SS RAN Os SSS sass es elseses UD OVID CO C2 G2 P 00 19 G2 S OOF © 19 © 60 1 09 © CO 69 09 19 © 69 09 19 © 10 19 © 19 © 19 09 © © & C0519 © 19 169 C019 SS o tr BOHHAADHM SAIN SSOR DOONAN NDR WDONHHSCDOSOHMMOONW th HE ES SB SS 8 2G SSS 20 20 ON Oa eo ee CoS ISOM OMADMONADSOWSANSSOSSSSHOSW!WOWOS SCOoOMmsooCoCoCoOMS BORN MO HIORKR RR SOSOGHOMKRKNDOHONADIORMOMHSINDONHO™ enh” a A a ee ae es eee 19am 19 1911919 Ses pele BoSs'S core SE 00 P18 09 1 © COD 2 OID OT O19 © OW OIWSOOOSWSSOSSSSS HO OOS “O Oe Sra Tee Li aale ly ie. ei serie Pal pees eA Tear er ra ar eo ~Om ii nN MSO ON SASAAM ASH OD AWA ISH SHEN S19 Se9 Cate NLASSS a "Sas AAI AIA AIAN OD 09 019 09 09 0D OD OD 0D CD OD OD 0D SH OH SH SOSH Ha 29 19 1 AG Ad cco OO 402 W. E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON TABLE 2 Length measurements of the zooids of wheels of chains VII and VIII Horizontal lines indicate end of wheels. Double lines indicate one wheel lost. Unit —1 mm. NO. | CHAIN VII CHAIN VIII CHAIN VilI—continued CHAIN VIII—continued : i iL epteetee 7 Sl SW etOe 4 AGE Ly ai reais 132 7 p12e6e a Sie ee 20.5 20.9 Dae aa, TG) Ouest |" (OSB adn 13h AO Onl Saw | 19.2 | 18.6 5 lagi Fok| a Se OLo || ee OulaSeerics 12,9, | a eae ea 118.6 | 18.6 As ee aT, Saeed | 16 vee 13.0| 12.9| 84.....119.8| 17.2 eae Fa8)| Oa Mares: | AGe Sul age oes 122030390) Sheen 20.7 | 19.8 Gee Shor eee aie | “G8: edo eu 14.0.) 1324) (S63 99:7 | 1928 aye: S46:| “Sia | “7 Alinag e420" | Sisal) iyek aoe | 21.9 | 20.2 Chae Sool 8 Tiere || TBaae Oe aso") AGA eee | 22.5 | 20.4 Gentine | Sa) 8281 Meer | 7g. «te. 48, | On 80r a | 21.9 | 20.5 LOM oes sede SS ameee Ss 22a eta 14,3;|12:8)) 90... | 19.8 | 17.5 i aera: NeSiai| Sak hoe ay ese ke = IACGH 2-40 One A 21.1 | 20.0 ize Pree 8.2| 8.8| 8.7| 7.6] 52...... | 15.2] 14.0] 92.....| 22.9 | 21.0 (Soe, eae: OF5 7007 | 822), Seaoge =, . .. | aa) ees Sees | 24:27) 9389 4c ee (19.5) 10,0") 825s] Be6H) Shee. | 15) | k5eSo 04s 2258) 2342 ope aoe. S72) 40-0. 8.8). 8.2 nee... 16504) TAR O95 | 24.1 | 21.6 Ty aes as PeOes 1) HOt PR9u4 | 8.47 sGare. 1654 (15.3) SOG 23.0 | 19.9 eres. 59.67) AOE S| G8D | Sa aye: 15.0 | 148 |) 9%... 2032008 1800) OP) 1010) | 83), -Si4 | eae pat | LAOs! 0g. | 98.97) 2089 TOR ee 9:8.| OF8)/ 1056) 9.1] Bort i525) 13-9 |) 08: | 28-7 \one3 iene | 10.6] 11.0) 9.8] 8.9] 60.....- 16.6 | 13.2 || 100..... | 24.5 | 22.6 A UES ae Bese pCO Jee Me i yl eae te. G22) 15.4 Ole ke 24.6 23.4 7 RR oge 1OK95)) 11-23) LOGS GO| 69. 20 igs ae Beda nk ee 23.6 | 23.6 DBt we mal LOCRO ll As | Or BeS GSS ae 1 Ol Pea 103" 2... 24.0 | 22.5 yeaa [PRO Stan “OFS Gron sea | pac Ouiaeseh a04e 2. | 23.9 | 22.1 fy ae or atdONG | 9.6/8.9 Es. 16.0 |.13-6 | 105..... | 23.0 | 220 7 aw a tO NO. 71) 1002! “Sabi gee. ase | 16.3 | 18.3 | 106..... 25.1 | 22.2 oyuaaae se 11) AOwS | “9.8 Sage ue 18.81 17.9 | 107.....| 26.3'| 23.1 98 Me 11 40 1a | O08) SS gse | 19°61 17.7 || 108..... 2osha eae eek eae PU 2SedOuG | 10. Te COES leo ee fama! 17-7 || 109225. 26.4 | 23.4 86.2.0 Gat SUG ps lee ee eT Yoce isto | 17.1 | WOe eS. 25.5 | 22.9 See aN (HS | S25 )51029.) MOSaal ra Vefsez | Va 72) ele 22.4 21.3 SOeN Ae PV 23" |) 187) 99" ee 76.2 | 14:7 Soe HLL Le eA PE Te ORS (573 ten ee 18.8 | 7s | AN wee 12'S) 1214 p23 | LOsSai ea 19 4| 19.4 Tap eee 13.0 | 11.8 42.3) 10.7 yee 0 19.7 19.4 SG t eis: 12.9: Tes |G | Ll eee 119.5 | 18.3 Cy ets Ss hes? | oy | aaa Ste i ayes ae al beam 18.6 | 18-4 | ees SF (eee 19.3: 16-4 SORA ae esos bot Tat: | 70rae 20.5 | 19 1 Bc se 13.6 | 11.6 | go... 22.2 | 20.0 CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS 403 wheel portions of Chains VII and VIII. In all, the unbroken portions of seven chains were measured. . The number of zooids used depended upon the miminum size measurable. In four cases, 90 zooids were taken but in the other three chains only 80, 70 and 52 zooids respectively were large enough to be measured accurately. ;.. [he measurements of all series are given but only two are plot- ted, the right-hand series of Chain II in fig. 1, and the right-hand s 3 13 AA BI ES 29 SS TT 9 4B OOD ee GS BD { 64 ie Z | | | | \ | 56 Chain Il Right side. | | Upper line Length of 2o0/ds 52 Dotted line Length of peduncles. _| Lower line Length of roof pieces freq 48 4 IL 2) ss Se eee | erie 44 | Fig. 1 Plot of length measurements of the zooids, peduncles, and foot-pieces of chain II, right series. Vertical distances represent length. Horizontal dis- tances represent position in the chain. series of Chain VII in fig. 2. In the latter figure, 1-90 are the zooids of the unbroken part of the chain while 91-108 are wheel zooids, the divisions between wheels being indicated by vertical dotted lines. Table 3 gives the measurements of zooids of several short chains of wheels which furnish figures for comparing graphs of wheels of various sizes. In each series of results here given except length of Chain I, two measurements were taken and these 404 W. E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON TABLE 3 Length measurements of zooids of various small groups of wheels. Unit—Imm. Group A Group B- | Group C Group D FOUR WHEELS FOUR WHEELS FOUR WHEELS TWO WHEELS R | L R. Lat oy ere | Le | R. L ee a ee teaee 10.9 | 10.7 | 19.0 | 18.5 | 16.7 | 20.8 | 27.9 | 27.2 Dee ee Bele. ok Soe ee rs MET LORS ) LS Aa) ESAS PTS SON eho 20 a amet Been Sid Hovnieto ceeeeaminas hex tear cual L220 TPT | 1920 | WOT) AO Le 2h 25) 292 1 S0ae) aE NM AED atte Ae ek ED Sie 12.1 | 11.4 | 19.0 | 19.6 | 19.7 | 21.9 | 29.8 | 30.7 See ON 2 io: SA ee a OR (t2%6)|:13.2:|-20.5 | 20:7 | 204.1226" S01. 3008 6 13:2) 13.5 | 17-9 | 19-9") 21.6 | 21:9 | 29.3 | 2925 6 14.7 | 13.6 | 19.6 | 19'8 | 21.1 | 22.0 | 28.9 | 30.7 Sees Ae SAME Alas OY Rae | 15.3 | 14.5 | 21.1 | 19.9 | 22.3 | 23.4 | 30.9 | 31.8 9. ae ns ees | AB NG ela 20 SG 20829 2256 2A 2 re sOuS: acne LOE Re tee eee cme st 16.3 | 15.8 | 22.0 | 22.1 | 22.6 | 24.2 | 40.0 | 31.9 ERR eRe oe CMe Lge as 8 CNay 14.8 | 15.1 | 22.5 | 22.4 | 22.5 | 23.7 | 30.4 | 33.2 Ie AO eee Le eae: Acres ee he 16.6 | 15.1 | 22.2 | 23.0 | 21.0 | 24.2 | 30.3 | 31.3 IG es aaa |. RR a *....{ 17.0 | 17.1 | 22.3 | 21.8 | 19.9 | 28.0 ean SOS 3 en ee eel hsbc 16.9 | 16.7 | 23.3 | 21.8 |-22.3 | 24.0 ED ae eee as ao V7 | 17:9) 22939) 28-5.) 2420) 240 LIC ee ee Reais | a NR ER oe ea 18.5 | 18.5 | 24.6 | 24.2 | 25.5 | 25.0 GENE eS ee cho eae Pea ee 18.1) 16:9 | 2a 243 | 23.5 | 25.2 Tee le Aa “RRR toon | 12.7 | 15.9 | 28.0 | 23.1 | 25.0 | 25.7 (LO Bes. Os) Se Rees, ai: Gok ees | 18.5 | 15.7 | 22.8 | 22.3.) 26.5 | 20.8 DO aes ets ch Ine lok sae | 19.4 | 18.8 | 24.6 | 24.0 | 27.6 | 24.0 Diy ye eerie A Pomrehn bi sla 19.4 | 18.9 | 24.9 | 26.1 | 28.4 | 26.6 DINE ines Naa Pete catchy REA: | 18.9 | 18.6 | 25.8 | 25.4 | 27.8 | 27.3 pe eared: bedi eter Ug ut A eal bate rie Lb. LOL Ss eames. | 20-84) 28.0 DAG Sh eaten seat ene ee ee 24.9 | 25.7 | 23.8 | 28.4 25 | | 24.5 28.0 EE ea ds BINGE oe | 25.9 | ae | CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS TABLE 3—conTINUED 405 Groupe E Group F Group G Group H THREE WHEES.S THREE WHEELS) TWO WHEELS | ONE WHEEL R. Tie R. i. | Wo ae Tie Seger dce ey Aa aye oscar UN ici aetna | 23.4 | 23.0 | 22.3 | 22.9 | 21.3 | 21.0 | 25.4 | 23.1 PRE re ere ie es Seren Re chara eee 124.6 | 24.8 | 23.8 | 23.3 | Dimon Oo anon Toes su pheSchach Bucs ee Charente ek OFS Ge os Ure ere ote teell| 7a eee yal (ewe | Ib ee a Pars 9) | 21.6 | 22.6 DoLOR|sZonit 5 Cole aac MC TN ea | 24.7 26.1 || 24.8 | 23.9) | 2223) | 24.2 | 24.9) | 25.1 fy US ASR ee Oe ae 25.1 | 26.5 | 25.0 | 24.7 | 22.4 | 22.6 | 23.9 | 24.8 ee ee ee gr 28,0)| 20.3)/ 26-3) 25-1 21.3 | 23.2 | 24.40 Ag Stee eer eae 24.9 | 24.1 | 24.2 | 25.0 | 22.0 | 25.2 Heh RE TES. ae a PIS Otero an 26.8 | 26.9 | 24.8 | 24.2 | 22.5 | 25.9 res hie te ead O 20.2. | 2la2:| 20.ONl oes seen SRA eet GEG eS os Sea W2Geonloteo! | 28. | Zola 2am Ome We Bia bench mateo 27.7 27.7 | 28.6| 26.0 | 25.7 2am Raa ey ith tier Oe REDE Cea | 27.2 | 27.2 | 28.4 | 26.8 | oUF Perea ee Org earner aie | 27.4 | 27.5 | 28.4 | 27.9 ta ea) Reet ey erie PHS} fe) || PAIRS) || PAP? | 22 eee er a center 2957300 | 260) aaa re re ree eps ee 29.7 | 29.8 | 29.9 | 29.2 Sepa ctnaeeh gael OL Tae 29.2 | 29.2 | 29.8 | 29.8 OTE Wan Lt ated oaee 27.6 | 30.3 | 29.3 | 29.9 bo Ne Dt Ae eee | 28.2 | 30.4 | 30.3 | 406 W. E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON were averaged for the final result. Where the first and second measurement differed by more than 10 per cent, a third measure- ment was taken and the three figures averaged. ee 8 16 i rd 40 4% 56 64 re 68 96 104 = 120 (2B SEeeee eI aL a PCeRGe SCE SecCoae ZERORER Reese AE iz4 SRR ESS SERS SSS SS ReSeeeeenne ie ‘ | iE ba (Sea ee PEC enT EU 104 oa ea a) [ 100 ca | a g6 |_| _| Ree 92 et | S| aa || ea its. sealers 84 eS eee eee 80 alee) SV Sa see (iT a, P eT EnnIA 68 jarnenate 60 ile 56 2a ia 48 | {ata lolcats Length of Zoords. Chain Vil Fight side ——_+ | | 90-128- Whee/ portion of chain 36 | Wheels seporoted by dolled lines jeeeeeaugae 6 = aaa (ee 7 12 | |_| —| ae 1 aE” = Fig. 2. Plot of the length measurements of the zooids of chain VII, right side, including wheels. TREATMENT OF THE QUANTITATIVE DATA At first glance, one sees a resemblance between the curves for the wheels of Cyclosalpa affinis and the blocks of Salpa fusiformis- runcinata. In both cases, the end zooids are smaller than those nearest them, the maximum values lying somewhere between, usually nearer the distal end. CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS 407 28 (| 12. ah fel Ares a Sao ee a a ( Ee RS ier 1 a ae rs ee "Be eae Fig. 8 Mean curves for wheels of various sizes. Vertical distances represent length of zooids. Horizontal distances represent position in the wheel. 408 W. E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON Some variation in the graphs of wheels of different sizes was noted, and to make sure of its general trend, the data for all the wheels were considered. The wheels were first grouped accord- ing to size, Group A included wheels whose zooids averaged 5-10 mm. in length; Group B, 10-15 mm.; and so on. In Group A were ten wheels. Not only does the number of zooids in a wheel vary, but the number in one-half of a wheel is not always the same as in the other half. For this reason the ten wheels were re- garded as twenty half wheels. Among these twenty half wheels of Group A were three contain- ing four zooids; one with five zooids; nine with six zooids; and seven with seven zooids. The corresponding values of the three four- zooid half wheels were averaged, the three first zooids together, the three second zooids, the three third, and the three last zooids. The result was a typical curve for a four- zooid half-wheel whose zooids have an average length of 6-10 mm. The five, six, and seven-zooid half-wheels were averaged in the same way. Similar computations were made for the other four groups. and the results plotted. The graphs were smoothed and those for each size were averaged in order to get the typical curve for that size. These curves (fig. 3) show that the size differences between the zooids of a half-wheel greatly increase as the zooids grow and that the typical form already noted becomes increasingly evident. Passing now to the unbroken portion of the chain, we find that the zooids increase in length very slowly at first and more rapidly later; also that though the curve is fairly smooth at first, it be- comes quite irregular toward the end. Upon closer examination of fig. 2 and the graphs of other chains, we surmise that these irregularities are the forerunners of the groups making up the wheels; in other words that the periodicity shown so plainly in the wheel part of the chain extends back into the unbroken part. Were this found to be true, the fact could hardly be ignored in considering the problem of the break-up of the chain and the pro- duction of wheels. In order to test the conjecture more critically we submitted the measurements to Mr. George F. McEwen, the mathematical expert of the Marine Biological Station of San Diego for examina- CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS 409 tion. Out of this examination has come the graphs shown in figs. 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. A curve was computed to fit the graph (fig. 2), as nearly as pos- sible. From the equation of this smooth curve we get a ‘calcu- lated value’ for each zooid; that is the length of each zooid, if the series were as smooth as our calculated curve. Wenext subtract the observed length of each zooid from the calculated length, and get a series of values, some plus and some minus according as the irregular graph went below or above the smooth curve. When we plot these plus and minus values above and below a horizontal line we have the graph fig. 7. It shows that the values follow the curve fairly well at first and then vary more and more; in other words, that we have a periodic curve of increasing amplitude.’ i Mr. McEwen gives the following summary of the method used: The sizes for each of the points corresponding to the numbers 45, 50, etc., to 90 were taken as the ordinates of a curve whose abscissae were 1, 2, etc., to10. It was assumed that the above curve corresponded to an equation of the form y=a-+bai+c2? and the most probable values of the coefficients a, b, and c were computed accord- ing to the method of least squares. By substituting (2x — 8) for az: in the above equation, the equation y=a+b (2e—8) +c x—8)? was obtained in which, if ;/y of the number of the point is substituted, will equal the computed value of the corresponding size. (This equation was used to calcu- late the corresponding values of y, which were used in connection with the observed values for computing the algebraic sum of the residuals and the probable error, for the purpose of determining if the equation was a proper expression for measured values of y.) It was assumed that this equation, determined from the 10 points was very nearly the same as if it had been computed from the 45 actual points, and there- fore represented the relation between the number and the average size of all the points. This assumption was verified in one case by including all the points and comparing with the result when only 10 points were used. The observed values of y were subtracted from the corresponding computed values and these differences were plotted as ordinates against the numbers as abs- cissae, thus giving a representation of the deviation of the observed values from those given by the equation. These deviations are due to errors in the measure- ments, and to the fact that the assumed equation was not a true expression for therelation. Asthe error inmeasurement was = 0.1, itis evident that the devia- tions are due mainly to the latter fact. The periodic character of these curves shows that the true law is a periodic fluctuation of increasing amplitude about a mean value increasing in a regular manner with the number of the point. 410 W. .E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON 44 48 52 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 | ; | Gea |S ve BEARS CALL a as Plot of Differences. Chain IV. Right side ---- averaged for every 3rd point averaged for every oth 46 350 34 58 anh | 2 C1 r = : I} pieseiacvee" CBs ae ss -L6 Flot of Ditferences -20 Chain VI... Fight side. 45-30 -24 20 1.6 rk EcHECECEESEEE 8) (eae. se | : re aE 2 A=) Peal) Ss 8 ny 12 Plot of Differences -16 Chain V1... Left side. 45-390 20 Pe es aa Fig. 5 Plot of differences for chain VI, right and left sides. CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS 411 Chain IV, whose plot of differences is shown in fig. 4, is one of the smaller chains and in it one would expect to find the grouping less evident than in the larger chains. However it can be plainly seen even here. The right and left sides of Chain VI are shown in fig.5. With Chains IV and VI, the differences were figured only for the zooids 45-90. In figs 6 and 7, the two sides of Chain VII 46 50 A 7 Passee See jana e rt a 20 Flot of Differences feu ae ra A oe ci aks i SUR nee a Lower series-.. /-45 fp 8 || iy A jae a Fr a eee ol EY aes ry liad ioe oe Ud ala cual “EE I EVA fl aloe Bae aco -(.6 7AM GicaGte WNC i 24 ee ~ | eo ale ahaa Le PP L ce Sa | aa fe a ee = inal a a a ee Jee SS -| Jn eS aaa Aca aS pee JS cies AM oS a ele il a (2S 2 cansansa a 2 6 10 14 18 t2 26 30 4K 36 42 46 Fig. 6 Plot of differences for chain VII, left side are given entire, the curves and the differences being figured separately for the two parts of the chain, since it can be fitted better when but half is considered at one time. The complete series being given, one can more readily see how the amplitude of the waves increases toward the end. It will be remembered that in computing the differences, the observed values were subtracted from the calculated values. Hence upward curves in fig. 2 appear as downward curves in fig. 7. To make the comparison with the wheel graphs easier the signs JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 2 412 W. E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON were reversed for fig. 8 so that values greater than the correspond- ing ones in the fitted curve lie above the x axis while smaller ones lie below. Vertical dotted lines have also been drawn to indicate a possible grouping of the zooids. Irregularities appear, it is true, but since irregularities often appear in the wheels also it is to be expected here. Moreover, with such small values the chances for error are so great that one would expect considerable variation. 46 50 54 58 62 66 70 74 78 62 86 ao) Plot of Differences Chain VI... Right side. Upper series... 45-90. Lower series..... 1-45. ER SEER Gee EB ENBee Rae AGee Gare BERANE A eee Pa aN aL Nat RR I al a eae Re See t Soe a EEEEEEEEE EE He AP | al (eS A a ial cae Ce Mono IAD ELE Reae DR Sree r fe) es a 2 6 10 14 18 22 Zola, «34. Gap ae cas Fig. 7 Plot of differences for chain VII, right side What we get then from these plots of differences is the probable fact that the unbroken part of the chain really shows a periodicity or incipient grouping closely resembling that of the wheeled portion of the chain, the groups including four to eight zooids each, which is the number found in the completed wheels. The plots of differences brought to light an aspect of the matter which had not been anticipated, namely, the existence of another wave with a longer period, shown in all the curves. The plots in CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS 413 figs. 4 and 5 have been smoothed by averaging for every ninth point in order to make this curve more plain. The curves are not just the same for the two sides of Chain VI, the difference probably being due to a difference in the way in which the com- puted curve fits in the two cases. With what, if any, other biological phenomena in the species this newly discovered periodicity is connected we do not know. te zooids. ‘7 zoo/ds. ‘6 z00/d. 5 Z00/as '8 zoo/ds. \7 2ooids. 15-1 l2-/8 9-24 125-29 J0-37 8-45. Chain Vil Right side. Flot of Oifferences. 7zoo1ds. :7 zo0ids. 16 200/ds. 'S zooids. ‘5 zovids.\ 5 200/ds\'|5 2o0ids.\ 4 200Kds. 46-52. IS- FI. 1600-65, \66-79. ‘71-76. 77-8. 82-86. ‘87-90. Fig. 8 Plot of differences for chain VII, right side Inverted and possible groups indicated Of its existence however, there seems to be no doubt; and it is certainly interesting to recognize that we have here an instance, by no means uncommon in organic phenomena, of waves, so to speak, of one size riding upon those of another size. It is highly desirable to take these cases in hand with a view to finding their connection with other phenomena. 414 W. E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON ATTEMPT TO CONNECT THE FORMATION OF WHEELS WITH MOR- PHOLOGICAL, PHYSIOLOGICAL, AND MECHANICAL PHENOMENA PRESENTED BY THE ANIMALS 1. Segmentation of stolon and the deploying point To find other factors entering into the wheel production, a study of the structure of the chain was made. The portion of the chain in which the zooids are in single file is of the same general form as that of other species. The incipient zooids, marked off by the infolding ectoderm, have their aboral ends uppermost, and the dorsal side of each against the ventral side of its neighbor, the dorsal sides being towards the base of the stolon. The blood sup- ply passes out through one-half of the large axial blood vessel and back through the other half. The segmentation of the stolon in some cases extends to the root of the stolon, in others not quite so far. S| af z paats Saree Sa on | 3g =| 28 i Sul ee o F SAM DOO OCOHGOSMOSMINNOO S119 19DO19M OS iI Bo NANA ONAH HR OOHOWOOMHHOSSOSONS | SARAH NNNMDNANANNANANNANANNANANAANNA = | “= S | we Hi . | SHSOSSCCOHSOMOSCSCOCONHNOOMNHOMMOS -| BB] a] 7 | SSOHA WB SSSOMRHDOSOKR SMO BHMHSOHASWH Sp ced Bi SSSA AHH ANNMNMONANAANNAANANS SNS |} Wea ~ am z — _ = : Sa) 2B oe Sac 2 2 | PO O19 119 10 O19 O19 O19 19H 091919 1D OM OO “| 3 SSSSONGSHAVGSAWSE WSHAVSSSAGW S| SSH NNNMONNANNNANNANNNNAN AS ~ 3 | - — ———-— - Sa = ’ DOOCOCHKRRROHMASMIMOMOMOKRKRA Sg. 4 OOHHHODMMDMMMNANAANARH AS Sa al, el | ‘S| Hos Z - a 11,8 «0 ee Site aie cra = Siegen e | S| 98/0] .| pHommncamorncoomoogoscon Sc] | og | Wim HHHHAHHADMMMAMMANAY AS | Ss » 3S --- - — ———————— - —— —— a § | a oS .| SCOMSSCSCSCOWWNHMHOWONOONOSDSCOONHNS res G1 Rie dhs 00 S 03 69 HG O} SH BSS HH 28 15 18 19.09 BOSS HB n | Se dey SSA NNNNANNNANNANNANNNANANNNNNANN = Se )| ee AER) ane i eee eee Sri gioi le ~ 2 , | gp WWOMSSSOMOSSOSOSONSSOSSSONSOSS =| ae rs :S TAABAASHASSOSSANTSE SHG Han OHnSO 8 MAH ANAANANAAAANNANNAAAANAA S = = = = a = = Ee ee | S 2 | © | 2929.00 O19 0191919 DOO 0 010191919 01910919191 OO Q| &B A MON AD SASOOE ros HMOHAMHHANMHOR Ss Cee a= FANAHDANNAAAANAANAANAAAANAA &| #8 Zz aS of 2), | Sart = a a a s| #9/ 3 = He , | SOMMIMIHOOMMDOMOWMOONSOMOOWHOS ° “3 DANHOBADBNDOONHNSDSHHMHNAHANDME HHO 2 BHAHANANANDAANANNANNANAAANANAAAAAAA 2 | } S| Fie Fore oe ove aay Rn: © eee 39 So 7 oe Slur Sat Cub Bone a yl a [Pee QEh SR Sets emerge Sa Opi age rhe = B ti Seo Saami 2 6S . ha eage a S| z ely los men feted Es SOE ch sas fis bak eh a eee ae re | OZ MMS esse Ca Sy Ramee eae me TS EPR: ~ Or 4 el! Sind < “es = . 5 =| ns : Pate Ona o : : : ; : S| grs | tee a eee d 2 : : | : | Sad ee : | = 3 Sea as 3 F E : ; Bp 3 aS 3 ; s 5 ; 5 a | a oe Ae ie ; : 5 5 5 | SQORODHAMAHOCAODRONHHMNHOCOONK SH | PHDDOHND OO DORRRRRNERERROODSOO CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS 425 SOW S13wWDOOSCM~ SOwmqqowoooocecooo#ecess9 9 OSONOAIG IGG HO HHAIAHTADADOADATAAANTAHSOSOOOD | Sn nnn ee Oe ie Ie Be eB oe Oe ee oe ee ee S1D1D1D ODDS Ow WOO OOOW OW OSSWOSSHOSSS S19 O'S DHOMONM IAA HOH HOH OAD OADBAAIAN A AANOSORS Ce ee a Dc Oe Oe 426 W. E. RITTER AND M. EF. JOHNSON conjecture be proved true, an exceedingly important biological point would have been made. And now as to the evidence that a periodicity corresponding to the future wheels does exist in the chain before its break-up. In discussing the results of our treatment of the data pertaining to the unbroken part of the chain, we said the curves, as shown in fig. 2, for example, ‘probably’ show a periodicity. We permitted ourselves to doubt to this extent, in the interest of conservatism. We wish now to sum up the evidence for periodicity. Its strength lies in the fact that it is cumulative rather than in the sufficiency of any one piece. In the first place, does not the undoubted fact of periodicity in the wheels themselves, and the groups that immediately precede them, make the presence of periodicity in the rest of the unbroken part of the chain probable a priort? It would seem so. In the second place mathematical treatment of the quantitative data makes it almost certain that a periodicity corresponding to theory actually does exist. Third and finally the probable exten- sion of the periods far back into the young part of the chain, leads us to suspect that this fact is connected with another observation of quite a different order, an observation, that is, which strongly . indicates that the periodicity is really established at least as early as the segmentation of the stolon itself. One of us has shown that in Salpa fusiformis-runcinata the very early segmented part of the stolon may be interrupted by an unseg- mented part (Johnson, 710, p. 154 and fig. 8). While such inter- ruptions have not been observed in Cyclosalpa affinis attention was called, when speaking of the first stages in the segmentation of the stolon, to the fact that in some cases the segmentation reaches to the very root of the stolon, while in others a stretch of unsegmented stolon exists. May not this difference indicate a periodicity in the segmentation corresponding to the periodicity in growth that we have found? The reader may think that the grouping, as shown in the plots of differences, is too variable and indefinite to warrant the con- clusions we have drawn. True, the groups here are not as regular as the wheel graphs shown at the end of the curve (fig. 2), but though CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS 427 the small groups appear to be more irregular on account of their riding on the secondary waves, they are of the same sort. It must be remembered, too, that the values are very small and the chances of error are large. In fact, such a uniformity of re- sult throughout all the graphs examined, in spite of small values and difficulty of measurement, is very convincing. The transformation of the groups of zooids into wheels is easily understood: The moment the break occurs so that the pressure of the zooids upon one another in the group canexertitseffect back- ward as well as forward, the hindmost pair swings in toward the axial line, each of the other pairs up to the transverse middle line of the group following in its proportional amount. Since by this time the foot-pieces have wholly or almost wholly disappeared and the central ends of the peduncles have become closely appressed, the swing of the zooids disposes the peduncles in the form of the spokes of a wheel, the hub being represented by a small elliptical space. The course of things here described is illustrated in fig. 17. That the pressure tending to force the mid-zooids of the groups outward is considerable is obvious from the zig-zag form into which the axial vessel is thrown, due to the pull on the radial vessels, as seen in the second group of fig. 18. The disappearance of the axial vessel in the older wheels may be supposed to be partly due to the same cause, although probably the vessel is actually in course of degeneration. 3. Impossibility that the character of the blood supply to the zooids can be the cause of the size schemes within the wheels No study involving the growth of the zooids could be complete without attention having been given to so fundamental a matter as that of the blood supply. For example, the question naturally arises, does not the break-up of the chain into groups so affect the common blood vessel of the stolon that the zooids do not share alike in nutriment received, and is not this inequality respon- sible for the disparity in size among the zooids? The changes in the circulatory system are best shown by the diagram fig. 18. At the end of the continuous part of the chain, JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 2 428 W. E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON the individual blood vessels are arranged at regular intervals along the large vessel. The arrangement is the same for the first wheel, but with the second or third wheel the axial vessel begins to shrink. As the vessel remains in connection with the individual lateral vessels, while growing smaller, it comes to have a zig-zag course, due to the opposite but alternate pulls upon it by the growing zo- oids. The shrinkage of the vessels goes on so rapidly and to such an extent that in the next wheel the vascular connection between the central zooids is lost. The portion of the main vessel which joins two wheels together persists for some time. In fact this and the transparent cellulose envelope which forms around the wheels, filling in the spaces between the zooids, are all that hold the chains together and very long chains of wheels aresometimesfound. The small remnants of the individual vessels gradually disappear. Though these vessels end blindly, the blood may still be seen in them forsome time, flowing out one side and back theother. After the disappearance of the main vessel at the center of the wheels, short circuits are maintained between the zooids connected at any point. Thus in fig. 18, zooids 1, 2, 12, 6', and 7! have a circuit of theirown. Thus it would seem that if any of the zooids of the wheels have an advantage over others the end ones would be fa- vored as against the middle ones, but the middle ones are on the whole larger. Hence inequality in blood, supply seems to be excluded from being a determining factor in the size relations observed. If there be any communication between the zooids of the un- broken chain or of the wheels, other than by the circulatory sys- tem just described, it must be through the peduncles. The ves- sels in the peduncles are irregularly arranged but they are dis- tinctly larger toward the edges and reach part way into some of of the papillae. They are easily followed in the living specimens. To test the question of blood communication between zooids, injections were made. Methylene blue in sea water was used, which could plainly be seen in the transparent peduncles and in the bodies of the salpae. The first attempt was on two wheels whose stage of development was the same as the third and fourth in fig. 18. The needle was inserted in the stolonic vessel half way CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS 429 between the two wheels. The color shot out through the small vessels to the peduncles of the zooids still remaining in contact. It went throughout the vessels of the peduncles of the zooids but stopped cleanly at the edge of the peduncle. No zooids whose connection with the main vessel had been lost showed any touch of the color. However, the wheel was again examined about fif- teen minutes later. The stained zooids had died and dropped away from the wheel, the peduncle dropping away with the zooid. A slight stain was found around the papillae of the peduncles of one or two of the other zooids where they had come in contact with the stained ones. We conclude that there is no direct vascu- lar connection here but that there is possibly some interchange by absorption through the thin ectoderm. Another injection was made in the peduncle of one of the zooids in a wheel. ‘The color flowed throughout the peduncle and into the zooid but did not enter other zooids of the wheel. We therefore seem driven to con- clude that the blood supply is not a factor in the size differentiation of the zoords of a wheel. 4. Unltkelthood that the wheel arrangement of the zoorids in Cyclo- salpa has, as believed by Brooks, anything to do with the position of the four first blastozooids of Pyrosoma Brooks was firmly convinced that the radial, or wheel arrange- ment of the asexually produced zooids in Cyclosalpa is homolo- gous with the radial disposition of the first four blastozooids of Pyrosoma. This he regarded as one of the strongest evidences of the close relationship between the two genera. Thus he says (Brooks 793, p. 133): The opinion that Salpa and Pyrosoma are closely related does not however, rest upon superficial resemblances, but upon their fundamental identity of structure, although one of the details, the resemblance in their asexual multiplication, is so complete as to be almost enough in itself to establish their affinity. The same view he expresses with only a little less assurance in several other connections. We had no thought, in entering upon 430 W. E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON the present study, of considering this point,nor do we propose now to go into it extensively. However, our results on the growth and mechanical factors involved in producing the wheels of Cy- closalpa seem to have so much bearing on the question, that we can hardly pass it by without notice. The resemblance between such a figure of the Cyclosalpa wheel as, for example, that given by Brooks (93, pl. 1, fig. 2), and reproduced by Delage and Hé- rouard (p. 203, fig. 151) and a figure of an early Pyrosoma colony like 15, (pl. 31), by Huxley (’59) is considerable and not unnaturally suggests true heredity kinship. The moment, however, one comes to look into the details of how each group comes about ontoge- netically rather than phylogenetically, he finds them so different that his imagination is balked at an attempt to interpret them as both referable to a common hereditary operation. In the first place Brooks seems never to have observed the fact that the Cyclosalpa wheel is at the outset bilateral. None of his published figures give any intimation of this, nor does he refer to it in his text. For instance, the two figures, 8 and 9, pl. 2, of his latest publica- tion (Brooks, ’08) represent wheels of C. floridana, and C. pinnata as though they were perfect—as though the zooids were disposed in exactly the same way throughout the circuit. We would not, of course, assert that he did not draw just what he saw in these two instances, especially since we have had no chance to examine the wheels of C. floridana, and have seen but a single one of C. pinnata. In the one specimen of C. pinnata which we have, attentive study finds that two zooids on opposite sides of the cir- cuit have slightly different positions from the others. These probably indicate where the axis of the chain lay; but the de- parture from perfect regularity is so slight and of such a char- acter that it might be easily overlooked had one not discovered, by studying the formation of the wheels, what their real nature is. In C. affinis the bilaterality of the wheels is probably never wholly obliterated. The first four ascidiozooids in Pyrosoma, on the contrary, stand in single file as do the Salpa zooids before the deploying point is reached and the radial order is taken on by the swinging around of the file so that number four comes to be adjacent to CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS 431 number one. Further there is no opportunity in the Pyrosoma group for the differential mechanical action caused in Cyclosalpa by the growth and crowding of the zooids while the foot-pieces diminish in size. Neither is it possible seemingly, for the periodic phenomenon to play any such part in the arrangement ofthe Pyrosoma zooids as it appears to in Cyclosalpa. THE LARGER SIGNIFICANCE OF SUCH STUDIES 1. Supplementing biological with quantitative observations We venture to call attention to the way in which morphological and physiological observations and considerations join hands with quantitative observations in this research. Numerous structural details in the adult individuals of both sexual and asexual generations, in the chain of zooids as a whole, in the in- dividual wheels and the individual zooids composing the wheels, and in the unbroken part of the chain both as a whole and as to its individual elements had to be attended to. On the functional side not only growth in several of its aspects, but the mode of swimming, certain facts pertaining to the circulation of the blood, and some points about nutrition have come in for consideration. All this sort of thing is so familiar to modern biologists as to need no special mention. Not so with what we have done in a quantitative way. It seems to us that in this we have entered a region of research that biologists will be compelled to regard vastly more seriously in the future than they have in the past or do now. The case in hand furnishes a rather striking illustra- tion of what the quantitative method can do. It can enable us to see facts we cannot see otherwise. It amounts to a great increase in the power of our eyes just as does the microscope. This statement is to be taken literally, not figuratively. One may easily imagine a magnifying instrument that would so en- large the wheels as to make visible the size differences between the zooids. It would seem that this is what the application of math- ematics in physical science very frequently does. We should never have suspected from ordinary examination size differences 432 W. E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON of a systematic character among the zooids of the chains. It was only from certain biological considerations combined with aid from this instrument, that the existence of the system was made certain. And it should be specially noted how our results would have been affected by failure to recognize this fact. The breaking up of the chain 7n some way, and the production of wheels from the breaking, could have been inferred from the unequal growth of the bodies and foot-pieces of the zooids; but why the breaking should be into groups rather than into single pairs would have remained with no definite answer but for the discovery of the periodicity in growth in the unbroken as well as in the broken part of the chain. 2. Natural periodicity in organisms and exacter methods of research But promptly comes the question from some of the foremost biologists, What of it? What particular good is there in knowing that growth is periodic so long as we have no explanation of why it is so? Our real interest, they say, is in the causes not the mere facts of organic phenomena. ‘This objection displays, in our opin- ion, one of the most pervasive and fundamental weaknesses in the biological philosophy of the day. Looked at critically, it is found to mean that facts of nature, in order to be interesting and deemed really worth while, must be prejudged; that an explanation of them must be ready at hand before they are observed in order that they may be attractive. The issue must be looked squarely in the face. It is in fact the old, old issue between the inductive and the deductive methods of interpreting nature; between ob- servation and reason going hand in hand, and the power of reason alone; between the a posteriori and a priory modes of reasoning. The objection carries the implication that great numbers of facts of nature can be explained without having been themselves ex- amined; that the unobserved causes of many observable effects may be sufficiently inferred from observations on other effects than the particular ones under consideration. In a word the meaning is implied if not expressed, that some time nature may CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS 433 be fully known without having been fully studied. This concep- tion of nature and the knowledge of nature is always and every- where the begetter of dogmatic assertion on the part of leaders, of subserviency to authority on the part of followers, and of idol- atry to certain facts and neglect of others by everybody. This is not the place to go into the logic, or rather, the epistemology, of biology. The case under treatment does, however, justify us in a few observations and reflections on procedure in research. Why is it that the biological sciences are designated as obser- vational and descriptive, to distinguish them from the physical sciences which are called quantitative and exact? Surely no present-day student of nature would contend that living objects are qualitative alone and so must be dealt with in terms of quality, while non-living objects are quantitative and are to be dealt with in terms of quantity! There is surely no structural part or activity of any organism that does not exist in some quantity or other, and hence is not susceptible of being measured in some way. Contrarywise, there is surely no inorganic body or sub- stance that has not qualities of some sort by which it is described and defined. Yet why is it that in spite of the brave effort made by a few distinguished men of science during the last half century to introduce conceptions of quantity and the methods of mathe- matics into biology, these efforts have met with only limited success at best, and are ignored in practice and frowned upon in theory by many of the foremost bilogists? Only a few months ago a distinguished investigator declared in the presence of the senior author of this paper that the quantitative method in biol- ogy is dead, and this student suiting practice to theory, though working in fields where quantitative conceptions and exact de- terminations are particularly important, rarely attempts to meas- ure in any rigorous way the biological phenomena with which he deals. Attention cannot be called too strongly to the extent to which much of what is esteemed the very highest type of recent biological work has laid stress on accurate quantitative determi- nation of certain environmental factors of organisms, but has ignored almost wholly quantitative determinations of the vital phenomena themselves. There can be no question about the 434 W. E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON importance of exactness in the determination of external factors. So far these methods are admirable; but, it appears to us, it must be recognized that when exactness has gone thus far it has gone at best not more than half the way. Nothing less than equal exactness all along the line will do to fulfil the highest demands of physical science. Let one recall the degree of refinement with which physicists and chemists are measuring the phenomena with which they deal: the wave lengths and angles of refraction of light; the quantity of heat generated in chemical reactions; diffusion rates of gases and liquids; atomic weights and combining ratios, and innumer- able other things. Then let him compare these with the ridicu- lously crude quantitative determinations made in nearly all departments of biology. A few aspects of physiology, as for instance, the temperature of the human body; and a number of phases of the psychology of higher animals—reaction times, for example—have been brought under mensurational treatment comparable with the standards of exactness long demanded in physics. But the vast fields of morphology, of general physiol- ogy, of individual and race growth and decline, of propagation, of variation, of automatic and responsive action, etc., have hardly been touched quantitatively as physics and chemistry would understand this term. As yet we in biology have hardly heard of anything corresponding to physical constants, units of measure- ment, coefficients of change, etc. Yet will any one, fully alive to the spirit of modern physical science, venture to maintain that inorganic phenomena are so utterly different from organic, that conceptions and practices so enormously fruitful in the one realm are wholly inapplicable in the other? It is a significant fact that many biologists, the most ardent in defence of the so-called mechanistic or materialistic view of living things, are farthest away from, even most hostile to, the very methods for biology proper that have so largely made the physical sciences what they are. One looks in vain through num- bers of technical writings by biologists of this school for anything like exact, comprehensive accounts, either qualitative or quan- titative of organsims or parts of organisms, or even functions CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS 435 of organisms, dealt with. Yet how these writings bristle with such expressions as ‘differs considerably,’ ‘constant results.’ ‘as a rule,’ ‘very similar,’ ‘normal segmentation,’ ‘normal nuclear spindle,’ ‘normal blastulae,’ ‘normal animal,’ ‘practically iden- tical,’ ‘essential features,’ ‘increases in exact proportion,’ and so on! Two rejoinders are frequently made to this demand for carry- ing more exact methods into biology. One is on the purely theo- retical ground that it is not necessary; that ‘mere quantity’ is of no great moment in life phenomena; that slight differences are of the purely ‘fluctuating’ or individual sort, so have no large significance. ‘To answer this objection in full would take us much farther into philosophical discussion than we can go here, but it may be the more warrantably passed by because the attitude of mind that makes it is seen to be obviously hostile to the whole trend and spirit of physical science. If the history of progress in science can be relied upon to furnish any clue as to how progress is to be continued in the future, the man of science, who holds a general view of nature that makes many facts insignificant and negligible, is bound to come to grief sooner or later. The other objection is more practically justifiable. It is that the phenomena of living beings are so complex and subtle, and that animals, especially, are so sensitive to changes in exter- nal conditions as to make it impossible to apply to them in more than a very limited way, the exacter methods of the physical laboratory. Our answer to this is two-fold. In the first place, we are persuaded that exact methods could be applied far more widely than they are, and they undoubtedly would be, did our general conceptions call for such applications. The other an- swer is that if it be true, as it well may be, that many life processes are too subtle and involved to submit to measurement on an exact and large scale, then the only course open for the inter- pretation of such processes is to introduce no considerations that envolve the conception of accurately measured quantity. The ex- tent to which this principle, seemingly so obvious and unes- capable, -has been violated in much biological theory during the last quarter century or more, is seen to be remarkable once 436 W. E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON one comes to think about the matter. For example, reflect on the extent to which theories of development and heredity have made use of the notion of equation and reduction nuclear divi- sions of the germ cells; yet who has determined in any rigid quan- titative way the elements that enter into the hypothetical equali- ties and inequalities? How familiar is the textbook statement that the chromatin of the male fertilization nucleus is ‘exactly equal’ to that of the female nucleus with which it fuses! But on what sort of determinations does this assertion rest? On scarcely another thread of evidence than that they ‘look equal!’ And here we come upon the almost incredible naiveté with which biologists in most things eminently sound, have gone down before this fal- lacy! Only a short time ago while discussing this point with a number of biologists, one of them, a man of excellent standing and great carefulness in nearly all scientific matters, replied to my strictures, ‘‘if chromosomes look equal why are they not equal?’’. The words were hardly off the man’s tongue when he saw what a remarkable statement he had made. The incident illustrates the straits to which one may blindly go in following a theory. We conclude this topic with a quotation from John Tyndall. In his well-known address on the “‘Scientific Use of the Imagi- nation,” he says: Let me say here that many of our physiological observers appear to form a very inadequate estimate of the distance which separates the microscopic from the molecular limit, and that, as a consequence, they sometimes employ a phraseology calculated to mislead. When, for example, the contents of a cell are described as perfectly homogeneous or as absolutely structureless, because the microscope fails to discover any structure; or when two structures are pronounced to be without dif- ference, because the microscope can discover none, then, I think the mi- croscope begins to play a mischievous part. In view of the vast amount of evidence now before us from so many aspects of biology, that vital processes are periodic in their most fundamental manifestations, it appears unwarrantable to assume without proof that any whatever are not so.- But see what periodicity means; it means that the phenomena are increas- CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS 437 ing and decreasing; that they have phases; that the time element being considered, they change in value from moment to moment. How then can we treat any particular phase, or stage of such phe- nomena so as to meet the demands of rigorous science without considering each phase in relation to the other phases? So far as they are treated without such reference the procedure would seem to be of the nature of ‘random observations’—of the ‘grab- sample’ kind—that always, whether in common life, business, or science finally proves to be inadequate if not disastrous. Astron- omy, physics, chemistry, and in general geology, have passed quite out of this portion of their careers. Taking it as established that biology is allied in essential nature with these older, less complex sciences, does it not seem inevit- able that it too must move on and leave its cruder, haphazard methods behind? Does it not look as though this very fact of periodicity, this gradual come-and-go of things in the operations of organisms is to be one of the chief if not the chief way out? To press the inquiry a little closer, does it not look as though the wide prevalence of repetitive parts in reproduction and growth, which though like one another still differ from one another by some regular quantity, is to be one of the most important, though only one, of these exits? It appears to us that cell division, for example, including the division of all cell parts subject to this process will have to be looked at sooner or later from this standpoint. Take the Fora- minifera, for instance, unicellular organisms (according to the current interpretation) the bodies of great numbers of which be- come divided into many sections called nodes and chambers. In the great majority of species, as a glance at figures enables one to see, these divisions fall into quantitatively differentiated series. To make the point more cogent we introduce figures of two species Reophax membranaceus Brady (fig. 21) and Peneroplis arietinus, Batsch. sp. (fig. 20). Now let one compare these organisms with the salpa chain, the one, for example, represented in fig. 18, and catechise himself something like this: surely there is some resem- blance between these objects. Both are composed of a considerable number of sections rather regular in form and much like one an- 438: W. E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON other, though obviously differing from one another in size. Both objects are living, and both have come to be what we see them by a process of organic growth. Can we properly ignore these sim- ilarities in our efforts to interpret the organism, because on the whole the differences between them are more numerous and con- spicuous than are the resemblances? Is it not at least possible that by turning to these few correspondences seriously they may serve as the starting point for the discovery of still others, and finally result in the detection of laws of organic growth and func- tioning that would greatly broaden our conceptions of, and hold upon, life phenomena? One reason for selecting the Foraminifera as a group with which to make the comparison is the fact that the comparison of these organsims with higher ones in somewhat the same way has been made by several other zoologists. For instance, Schaudin (’95) speaks of the production and breaking off of parts in Calcituba polymorpha Roboz. as having ‘‘eine gewisse Ahnlichkeit mit der Strobilation.”’ But the most interesting comparison from our standpoint, of Foraminifera with other organisms was made by L. F. de Pourtales in 1850. At the meeting that year of the American Association for the Advancement of Science Professor L. Agassiz presented a short communication from this young zoologist in which Agassiz said: Mr. Pourtales has, for the first time, pointed out a direct, well sustained analogy, which is to be found in the order of succession of the cells in for- aminiferae of the genera Textularia, Candima, Biloculina, Triloculina, and Quinqueloculina. This succession agrees fully with the succession of leaves in plants—so fully that it can be expressed by the same frac- tions with which botanists are now in the habit of expressing phyllotaxis in the vegetable kingdom. This is, therefore, an important additional link in the investigation of the plan which regulates the normal position of parts in organized beings—a link which may lead to include into one universal formula the rhythmic movements which preside over the de- velopment of all finite beings. (Pourtales, 750, p. 89.) This communication appealed strongly to at least one of those who heard it. At the next meeting of the association the presi- CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS 439 dent, Professor A. D. Bache, said in what we should now call his presidential address: The germ of two most important discoveries in natural history was contained in papers by two of our youngest members. [The first is omitted as not relevant.] Thecontents of the other were thus expressed: ‘The order of succession of parts in foraminiferae is identical with the successive development of leaves in plants, and can be expressed by the same formulae.’ Such discoveries, just warm from the study, it may be, as in these cases, forced to light by the occasion of our meetings, are among our greatest triumphs in the way of advancement. (Proc., vol. 4, p. 159.) ; We find no evidence that these ideas of Pourtales have been carried farther either by him or by any one else, though our ex- amination of the literature with reference to the point has been far from exhaustive. D’Orbigny, twenty-five years before, had done much work on the fundamental types of growth in the foraminiferae, though we find no reference to his having com- pared the arrangements here found, with phyllotaxy in plants. Our object in calling attention to this matter is, in the first place, to show that we are not quite alone in thinking such com- parisons are profitable; and in the second place, to call attention to the possibility that exact studies in the quantitative relation- ship existing among the members of a repetitive series as well as upon the ordinal arrangement of these members, may be profit- able. But should it be found that such studies are significant when prosecuted on unicellular organisms in which the segmen- tation does not go to complete severance of the pieces, it would seem to follow that they should also be significant when made on species in which the severance is complete, and then to all cell division whatever. This, of course, brings us immediately to the cyclical phenomena in the propagation of the Infusoria that has received so much attention in recent years, particularly at the hands of Maupas, Calkins, Jennings, Woodruff, and others. Concerning these researches we do no more now than remark that if the general conceptions on which we are going are sound, the phenomena of 440 W. E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON protozoon division, and of all cell division will have to be examined much more systematically and vastly more exactly, quantitatively, than they yet have been. 3. The inadequacy of treating periodicity generally, as an aspect of fluctuating variation Here seems to be the place to point out how much more ob- jective, more workable, more important ‘periodicity’ is in our conception than it is as usually conceived by biologists. We compare our ideas on the subject with those held by only one other investigator. Hugo de Vries has dealt with certain aspects of periodicity exhibited by plants, quite at length and in several of his works. He states the general facts with clearness. (De Vries, ’05, p. 721): This law of periodicity involves the general principle that every axis, as a rule, increases in strength when growing, but sooner or later reaches a maximum and may afterwards decrease. This periodic augmentation and declination is often boldly manifest, though in other cases it may be hidden by the effect of alternate influences. Pinnate leaves generally, have their lower blades smaller than their upper ones, the tallest being seen sometimes near the apex and sometimes at a distance from it. There can be no doubt that the phenomena we are dealing with in Salpa and calling periodicity resemble closely those in plants thus described. The question, are they ‘exactly the same’ phe- nomena, we do not raise. Rather, we ask, in view of the close- ness of resemblance ought they or ought they not to be looked at from much the same standpoint? The truth is de Vries has regarded the phenomena in plants very differently from what we have in Salpa, and his standpoint is surely inadequate for the facts we are dealing with. ‘‘This dependency on local nutrition,” says de Vries, ‘“‘leads to the general law of periodicity, which, broadly speaking, governs the occurrence of the fluctuating devia- tions of the organs” (p. 721). Again (de Vries, ’01, vol. 1, p. 638) under the section, ‘‘ Die Periodicitit semilatenter Eigenschaften,’’ we read: CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS 441 Ueber die gréssere oder geringere Haufigkeit des Sichtbarwerdens semilatenter Eigenschaften entscheidet nicht nur die augenblickliche Lebenslage, d.h. die dusseren Einfliisse wahrend der empfindlichen Periode der Entwickelung. Fast ebenso gross ist die Bedeutung der individuellen Kraft des Jungen Pflanzentheiles, diese aber ist das Ergeb- niss der Wirkung der dusseren Factoren in den vorhergehenden Zeit- abschnitten, theils nach Wochen und Monaten, theils nach Jahren gerechnet. . . . Diese Erscheinung tritt am deutlichsten zu Tage in der Periodicitéit der Anomalien auf der Pflanze. Again, pushing the matter a step farther, and in a somewhat different direction: From a broad point of view, fluctuating variability falls under two heads. They obey quite the same laws and are therefore easily con- fused, but with respect to questions of heredity they should be carefully separated. They are designated by the terms individual, and partial fluctuation. Individual variability indicates the differences between individuals, while partial variability is limited to the deviations shown by the parts of one organism from the average stature.” (’05, p. 717). The individual differences seem to be due, at least in a very great measure, to such apparent trifles. (As differences in soil, moisture, light, etc.). Onthe other hand partial differences are often manifestly due to similar causes. . . . The development of the leaves is depend- ent on their position, whether inserted on strong or weak branches, ex- posed to more or less light, or nourished by strong or weak roots (p. 721). Then follows the quotation already given, viz., ““This dependency upon local nutrition, ete.” De Vries’ standpoint seems clear: Periodicity in plants is a special form of the more general phenomenon of fluctuating varia- tion which in turn is due to ‘dusseren Factoren.’ The quanti- tative differences that manifest themselves in the periods may be lumped together and treated according to the law of probabil- ity as first applied to organic beings by Quetelet. After illustra- ting the application of the method of statistics, the author says: “Tt should be repeated once more that the empirical result is 3 It would be very interesting to have deVries follow up this point critically and impartially. 442 W. E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON quite the same for individual, and for partial fluctuations’ (p. 732). And: ‘In the present state of our knowledge the fluctu- ation-curves do not contribute in any large measure to an eluci- dation of the causes.”’ (p. 734.) And so we come to the real issue. Certainly, as de Vries says, the differences called partial may be treated en masse, so to speak. For example, we might pick to pieces ten wheels of the same di- mensions of the Cyclosalpa chain, mix the zooids indiscriminately in a dish, then measure them and plot the results. The curve would be the same—the normal probability curve—but would give us no clue to the way the zooids are disposed as to size in the individual wheels. In that case the treatment would not, it is true, ‘‘contribute in any large measure to an elucidation of the causes.”’ But in our case we have seen that no evidence can be found tending to show that the size scheme as it actually does occur in the wheels is dependent:on external factors. All the evi- dence is to the effect that it is due to the growth process itself independently of any correspondingly differentiating external conditions. In other words, the periodicity in growth occurs - under external conditions, that so far as the evidence goes, are not correspondingly periodic. Viewed in this light, can we still say the curves teach us ‘‘measureably little about the cause of the phenomena under consideration?” It seems to us not. Truly they do not furnish us ‘a complete explanation’ of the phenomena. They do, however, tell us, seemingly, this much: That the cause is in the nature of the growth process itself; that the growth goes that way. If now it should turn out as suggested that not only the length of the zooids falls into a size scheme, but that many of the other morphological dimensions, and functional capacities fall into sim- ilar schemes, then the instructiveness of the curves would, for us at least, be very great touching the causes of the phenomena. Whatever view may be held as to the relation of the periodicity in plants to that in the Salpa chain, it will we believe be allowed that the general question is one of many sides and great possible importance to biological theory. We have not pretended to do more than call attention to it here. CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS 443 We conclude with an acknowledgment of our indebtedness to the work of several other biologists who have entered by one or another gate the course upon which we find ourselves. Of these perhaps the first to be mentioned is Julius Sachs whose idea of the grand period of growth in plants must, it seems to us, expand and play a much larger role in biological theory in the future than it has in the past. After Sachs, chronologically, the various inves- tigations by C.S8. Minot on the rate of growth in aminals has largely influenced our observations and thinking. Another research, that by T. Tammes entitled ‘‘Die Periodicitiét morphologischer Erscheinungen bei den Pflanzen,” has had considerable to do with shaping our ideas on the strictly biological side. But by far the most important as opening up the way to the quantitative work has been Raymond Pearl’s ‘Variation and Differentiation in Ceratophyllum.’”’ Although Pearl’s quantitative data in this research are entirely enumerative rather than mensural; and although his aims and results are in several rather important particulars different from ours, his fundamental problem really gave us our starting point. JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 2 444 W. E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON BIBLIOGRAPHY Brooks, W. K. 1893 The genus Salpa. Memoirs of the Biological Laboratory of the Johns Hopkins University, vol. 2. 1908 The pelagic Tunicata of the Gulf Stream. In Publication 102, Carnegie Institution of Washington, pp. 73-94. Brapy, Henry B. 1884 The Foraminifera. The voyage of H. M. 8. Challen- ger. Zoology, vol. 9, and plates. DELAGE, Yves, ET HfROvARD, EpGarp. 1898 Traité de Zoologie concréte. Tome ] ) 8, Les Procordés. Huxuey, T. H. 1859 On the anatomy and development of Pyrosoma. Trans. Linn. Soe. 23 (1862) p. 193-250. JoHnson, Myrtie EuizasetH 1910 A quantitative study of the development of the chain in Salpa fusiformis-runcinata. Uniy. of Calif. Publica- tions, Zoology, vol. 6, no. 7, pp. 145-176. Minot, C.S. 1891 Senescence and rejuvenation. First paper: On the weight of guinea pigs. Journal of Physiology, vol.12, pp. 97-153. (Also num- erous other writings by Professor Minot.) PEARL, RAYMOND (assisted by OtivE M. Pepper and FLORENCE J. HAGLE) 1907 Variation and differentiation in Ceratophyllum. Publication no. 58, Carnegie Institution of Washington. bE Pourtaes, L. F. 1850 On the order of succession of parts in Foraminiferae. Proc. of the American Assoc. for the Advancement of Science. Third Meeting , vol. 3, p. 89. Reference to this by Prof. A. D. Bache, A.A. S., Fourth meeting, Proceedings, vol. 4, p. 159. Sacus, Junius 1873 Lehrbuch der Botanik, Aufl. 3. (The grand period of growth is dealt with by the author in various other publications. ) Scuaupin, F. 1895 Untersuchungen an Foraminiferen. I. Calcituba poly- morpha Roboz. Zeitsch. fiir wiss. Zoologie, 59, 2 pp. 191-232. Tames, T. 1903 Die Periodicitit morphologischer Erscheinungen bei den Pflanzen. Verhand. Kon. Akad. Wetensch. Amsterdam. Tweede Sec- tie, Deel. 9, no. 5. Vries, Huco pe 1901-1903 Die Mutationstheorie. 1905 Species and varieties. atr., atrial orifice emb., embryo end., endostyle f.p., foot-piece g., ganglion gi., gill gon., gonad PLATES ABBREVIATIONS ht., heart 7.b.v., individual blood vessel int., intestine oes., oesophagus or., oral orifice ped., peduncle ph., pharynx . st.b.v., stolonie blood vessel 445 PLATE I EXPLANATION OF FIGURE 11 Cyclosalpa affinis Chamisso, solitary generation with chain of five wheels. Natural size. 446 CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS PLATE 1 W. E. RITTER AND M. BE. JOHNSON JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL, 22, NO. 2 447 PLATE 2 EXPLANATION OF FIGURES 12 Cyclosalpa affinis, aggregate generation. X 15. 13 Cyelesalpa affinis, solitary generation, with young chain of zooids just emerging. X 2. CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS PLATE 2 W. E. RITTER AND M. FE. JOHNSON JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, No. 2 449 PLATE 3 EXPLANATION OF FIGURES Deploying point of chain of Cyclosalpa affinis. 14 Dorsal view. 15 Side view, left side. 16 Ventral view. Zooids on the right side are numbered 1’, 2’, 3’, etc.; those on the left, 1, 2, 3, etc. A given zooid has the same number in all three views. 450 PLATE 3 HAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS Cc E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON Ww. & Wig 2 > 2. = a = iz Higa et OC — JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, No. 2 451 PLATE 4 EXPLANATION OF FIGURES 17-19 Chain of Cyclosalpa affinis 17 Ventral view of chain, showing unbroken part and four wheels. Somewhat diagramatic but drawn to scale. Natural size. 18 Dorsal view of same. 19 Peduncles of distal part of unbroken chain and of first two wheels. 20 Peneroplis arietinus Batsch, sp. Longitudinal section through the shell. Taken from Brady, Foraminifera, Challenger Expedition, vol. 9, plate 138, fig. 22. 21 Reophax membranaceus H. B. Brady. Taken from monograph of the For- aminifera of the North Pacific Ocean, Cushman, 1910, U.S. Nat. Museum Bulletin 71, p. 90, fig. 126. 22-25 Chain of Cyclosalpa affinis. 22 Enlarged view of the distal foot-pieces of the unbroken part of the chain. 23 Enlarged view of the foot-pieces of the first wheel. 24 Diagramatic representation of three stages in the development of the cir- culatory system of the chain. 25 Cross section through chain. 452 CHAIN OF CYCLOSALPA AFFINIS ; PLATE 4 W. E. RITTER AND M. E. JOHNSON Trosee i \ ‘ \ Al JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, No. 2 453 ON THE FORMATION, SIGNIFICANCE AND CHEM- ISTRY OF THE WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK Or OVA OSCAR RIDDLE From the Laboratories of Zoélogy and Experimental Therapeutics, University of Chicago THREE PLATES AND ONE TEXT FIGURE NEN GTO GEC EL OLR 9. ee pes aoe chen ald f Loa-dia SSeS a teen Se ea 455 A method of measuring the rate of growth of rapidly growing ova............ 457 The rate of growth of the cvum of the common fowl......................... 458 iteelarce ova more thansO.0) mime Ghimeter ss. 240-2). 06 ee eee 458 Pee smalleovanlessimansorOMmm: in diameter. sa... eas ci ee ee 459 The thickness of the strata of white and yellow yolk in the egg of the common Ong Spee eoele pes Se ce Se a a ee ae et RU rect AIS So lene eS 2: c 461 The coincidence of the amount of yolk deposited in a day, with the amount of yolk contained in a layer of white and yellow yolk...................... 462 Yolk stratification in eggs of other animals as seen in the light of its causation iho oeKoep eG omee Pe Ne sibs. 5 6 She. chs a. Pe 462 Onsinechemistinyotwwoitesandryellow yolke a2 5: 35s atee ener enya 467 On the mechanism of yolk formation and de-formation.....................- 470 1. The part played by the reversible action of enzymes.................. 471 2. Therdle of the partition coefficient of the elements of yolk ............. 475 3. These two factors and the histological data ...................h.ceeus- 477 SUTEUTICER ES emt ts eNO is ce ona 5 Résces tno py + ne ooh Se op ne ee ee 482 MGiteraturencibedre teary Ses oi ob soc see wl Shea 2 Ree DOO eIc ORE ICrae 485 INTRODUCTION Very many thousands of pages have been written concerning yolk—its presence, formation, varieties and distribution in eggs. Indeed, the task of recording such a series of facts has been repeated on nearly every egg that has come under the closer ob- servation of the biologist; while some eggs, notably those of the frog and the fowl,-have submitted their yolks to the observa- tion and description of dozens of different investigators. Not- JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 2 455 456 _ OSCAR RIDDLE withstanding this great amount of study and description, the literature fails to give satisfactory answer to any of the following questions: (1) Precisely how and where does yolk originate? (2) Why, or how is it that there are two kinds of yolk, (a) smaller spherules (often with enclosures) of white yolk, and (b) larger spherules of finely granular (often pigmented) yellow yolk? and, what is the relation between these? (3) What is the meaning of the stratified condition of the yolk of some eggs, eggs in which layers of white yolk alternate with layers of yellow yolk? (4) What are the chief chemical differences between these two kinds of yolk? Thinking that we are now able positively to answer questions 3 and 4, and that these solutions bring some light upon the first and second questions, we submit the following data and considera- tious. These are presented with a minimum of refereace to the enormous literature; otherwise this communication must have been increased to several times its actual size. In carrying out this work, and now in the presentation of it, the author would say that he has not forgotten that ‘yolk’ is ‘non-living substance’ and therefore from a certain standpoint has but a minor interest to biologists. But, standpoints change. Until Johannes Miiller declared, and Van Beneden clinched the point, that the yolk of eggs is not living matter, and that it con- trasts absolutely with the other part of the egg—the protoplasm— yolk had an all-absorbing interest to naturalists as a substance per se. In the years that followed, yolk has been studied largely with a view to cataloguing its diverse occurrences, forms, origins, distribution, tingibility, etc.; its interest to most students has flagged; though its often overweening bulk in the most studied of all cells has frequently won for it unwilling and tedious descrip- tion. Perhaps one day we shall have a new standpoint. At any rate, we are only now beginning to realize that, though yolk is non-living substance, it is nevertheless organized substance and a very refined product of the vital laboratory; that it is a product laid down in the meshes of protoplasmic elements; and that the very act of its laying down is a signal of important metabolic states and capabilities of these living elements. More of the im- WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF OVA 457 port of the relation between this ‘organized’ and this ‘living’ material we shall know later; in the meantime, each bit of informa- tion is doubly welcome because it concerns the most interesting form of protoplasm—the egg—at what is probably its most inter- esting period. Perhaps, then, the substance that has seemed to have but blundered in where it could blind us most, may itself prove to be a mirror for many a secret that we have else- where sought in vain. A METHOD OF MEASURING THE RATE OF GROWTH OF RAPIDLY GROWING OVA The present studies began with an attempt to learn the cause of the stratified condition of the yolk of the hen’s egg. It was suggested to me by results of an earlier study (08) that the al- ternate layers of white and yellow yolk in the egg may be the result of the daily rhythm of nutrition—connected with high and low blood-pressure—which I had discovered in birds, and which I had shown to be the cause of the alternate fault-bars and funda- mental bars of birds’ feathers; it being there found that the daily variation in nutritive conditions in birds is sufficient to produce structurally perfect, and structurally imperfect parts in their rapidly growing feather germs. To test the suggestion, then, one might need only to learn the rate of growth of a bird’s egg. What is the rate of growth in the eggs of the common fowl? This had not been determined, and no way of determining it was known. It occurred to methat Sudan III might be used for this purpose. Knowing that Sudan was not destroyed in passing through the intestinal wall, (Daddi) that it circulated tied to the fatty acids of the food, and that the fatty acids of the food were laid down unchanged in the egg (Henriques and Hansen, ’03), I inferred that Sudan given with fatty food would be laid down in the egg. Moreover, it seemed possible by regulating the dosage and using proper intervals between feedings, to get laying hens to put this bright pigment down as definite bands in their growing ova, and thus enable one to determine the rate of growth. The first experiment was as successful as the last. When such Sudan-containing eggs’ were hard-boiled and sectioned under 458 OSCAR RIDDLE water it was easy to measure the distance between the innermost borders of two such rings of Sudan, and thus to identify this amount of growth with the time which was known to have inter- vened between the two feedings. Having thus discovered a method! (described in detail by me elsewhere, ’10) of measuring the rate and time of growth of ova, many data were collected on this point; the distance between the normal strata (layers of white and yellow yolk) of the egg was carefully measured; later the problems and considerations grow- ing out of the results were further followed up. We give here the following short statement of the observations and conclusions: The radius of the hen’s egg increases during the last few days of its growth by about 2.0 mm. per twenty-four hours. The thick- ness of a layer of white yolk and a layer of yellow yolk taken to- gether is usually about 2.0 mm. Our conclusion is that in the fowl a layer of white and another of yellow yolk are laid down each twenty-four hours. Other facts at hand indicate that the yellow yolk is laid down under the best nutritive conditions, while the white yolk is a sort of growth-mark left by poorer nu- tritive conditions. THE RATE OF GROWTH OF THE OVUM OF THE COMMON FOWL 1. Ova of more than 6.0 mm. in diameter Table 1, section A, and plates 1 and 2 have been prepared to show the rate of growth of the larger ova as this is indicated by the Sudan method. The reader is referred to the table and plates in order to learn the kind of evidence on which the first conclu- sion is based. The amount of this evidence could be increased several times. It will be seen that the radius of the larger ova contained in the ovary of a fowl may increase by rather more than 2. mm. during twenty-four hours; also that this rate of growth is quite variable and may often fall to one-half the above amount. Other data in our possession show that this rate not only varies for the eggs of different ovaries, but for different eggs of the same 1 First announcement of the method, and of some of the present results, Riddle (07). WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF OVA 459 ovary which were grown at different periods. It has been shown moreover by the Sudan-method that the rate of growth may be reduced not only to one-half that given above, but to absolute zero; this, however, is only a confirmation of what in- ference has long declared must be so, since ova may even de- crease in size while in the ovary, 7. e., they may be resorbed. TABLE 1 Showing under section A the rate of growth of hens’ eggs as this was measured in central and peripheral parts of the yolk by means of Sudan. The numbers in the first column refer to the number which this egg bears in the plate. In section B are recorded measurements of the thickness of pairs of white and yellow yolk strata in central and peripheral regions of the ovum as this could be seen with unaided eye or with addition of iodine solution. The seven measurements here chosen arbitrarily from nearly forty in the records, are consecutive measure- ments of eggs from different hens. A B 24 HOURS RADIAL GROWIH THICKNESS OF A PAIR OF IN MM. YOLK STRATA NO. OF EGG 5 = ‘eens: va NO. OF OVARY pA IS 7 & Central | Peripheral Central | Peripheral i Jel, il iD, te Jel; al 1G at 1 1.41 1 16 2.16 4° 1 13) 1 '7/ 2 1.54 1.54 a 1 Laz 3 Wea) (aq 1 1.64 + 2.5 225 1 2 1.8 1.8 5 1.4 1.4 2 2 lg | W.&: 6 2.0 2.0 5 2 | 1108) 7 levy gga 1.47 ANCTAR CS 3 ogi 1.53 1.67 | Average...... | 1.85 18 2. Ova of less that 6.0 mm. in diameter It has not been possible to obtain a deposit of Sudan in eggs smaller than 6.0 mm. in diameter. This failure is explained by the fact that these ova are growing very slowly, as compared with the more advanced ova, and the intake of the stained food is here not rapid enough to give a perceptible effect. We shall see, moreover, that this white yolk—for ova of this size are com- 460 OSCAR RIDDLE posed entirely of white yolk—is much poorer in fat than is yellow , yolk. Since fat is the only food that can carry Sudan this is another reason for the failure of Sudan to appear in them. The Sudan method is therefore not available for the determination of the rate of growth in these eggs. One bit of evidence of another sort concerning this rate of growth was obtained and may be recorded. In fig. 3, pl. 2, is shown the striated appearance which the peripheral white yolk of one of the small eggs showed after having lain in a quantity of Mann’s formalin-aleohol mixture for a few weeks. Here the note- worthy facts are, that a striation exists, and that the lamellae are not thicker than 0.25 mm. Whether these lamellae are made up of still smaller strata which really represent days of growth I am quite unable to say. I doubt somewhat that the radius of these small eggs is increased by as much as 0.25 mm. in twenty- four hours; anyway these strata offer some evidence—in the light of what we know of succeeding yolk strata—that these small eggs do not grow faster than 0.25 mm. per day. One must ask what is the meaning of the extraordinary differ- ence in growth-rate of eggs under, and over, 6.0 mm. in dia- meter? What old mechanism is inhibited or what new one brought into action, that accounts for this procession of cells— each with months of slow and constant growth behind it—coming to a point from which each jumps in a day from its accustomed rate of increase, to a rate that is probably from eight to twenty times higher? Do the follicular cells now become more permea- able than formerly to the ingredients of yolk? Is the increased vascularity of the follicular envelopes, that certainly occurs at this time, a cause or a result of the new activity? To these ques- tions there comes no answer. But to us there are few events in the history of the primary oécyte of the fowl more interesting than this one. All the more interesting it is, too, because of its glar- ing apparent teleology. Here is an ovum within five to eight days of extrusion? and containing less than the hundredth part 2Tt is true, however, that if the -yolk grow less rapidly than normally the egg remains longer in the follicle; showing that the time of ovulation is not controlled by heredity but is governed quite completely by conditions. WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF OVA A461 of the yolk necessary to make it capable of producing an animal. Nevertheless five to eight days suffice to supply the missing ninety-nine parts. THE THICKNESS OF THE STRATA OF WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF THE COMMON FOWL The measurement of the thickness of a layer of yolk offers some difficulties and. can rarely be done directly on a single layer; the reasons being that one stratum merges very gradually into another and that the strata are often very indistinct. More frequently, though by no means in every egg, a series of well- marked layers can be found and a measurement made over all; the number of strata—or rather of pairs of strata—may be easily counted. When the total measurement is divided by this number one obtains the thickness of a combined layer of white and yellow yolk. The result of eight such measurements is recorded in section B of table 1. These are typical of nearly forty reliable measure- ments, and indicate a thickness of about 2.0 mm. (1.4 — 2.5) for a layer of white and yellow yolk combined. The layers of yolk can sometimes be seen in the fresh eggs, proving that they are not artifacts; but for the purpose of measure- ment it is usually best to hard-boil them, and section (under water) from one side until the exact ceuter of the egg is reached. Sometimes it will be found advantageous to put the egg thus pre- pared in weak iodine solution for a time. This treatment seems occasionally, though not always, to strengthen the contrast between the layers of white yolk and those of the yellow variety. For reasons stated above it is impossible satisfactorily to measure the thickness of a layer of white yolk. It can be said with con- fidence, however, that this so-called layer has but a fraction of the thickness of the adjoined yellow layer. Perhaps one errs but little in saying that the former usually has from one-fourth to one-eighth the thickness of the latter. 462 OSCAR RIDDLE THE COINCIDENCE OF THE AMOUNT OF YOLK DEPOSITED IN A DAY, WITH THE AMOUNT OF YOLK CONTAINED IN A STRATUM OF WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK A comparison of the two sections of table 1 shows quite convinc- ingly, I think, that the figures, which in the one column indi- cate the amount of a day’s growth, are of the same order of magni- tude as those which in the other column indicate the thickness of a stratum of yolk. This fact, and another one, namely, that we know that there exists in birds a daily nutrition rhythm capable of producing daily growth-marks in their rapidly growing feathers, convince us that a layer of white yolk and another of yellow yolk ws laid down during each twenty-four hours. The well-developed appearance of the yellow yolk, its large yolk-spherules andits much greater thickness than that of the white layer, all indicate, moreover, that this layer, like the broad fun- damental bar of the feather, is grown under the best nutritive conditions; while the narrow layer of white yolk with its small spherules gives indication that it, like the fault-bar of the feather, is grown under poor nutritive conditions. Since I have shown that the poor nutritive conditions which pro- duce the fault-bar occur in the later hours of the night—1 :00-5:00 a.M.—I consider it as practically certain that the white yolk of the ovum is produced at the same time, and that the yellow yolk is pro- duced during all other hours of the day. The layer of white yolk of the hen’s egg is then a growth-mark left at the ever-changing boundary of the ovum; it represents the results of yolk formation. under sub-optimal conditions. It is indeed incomplete, unfinished yolk, as is apparently indicated by the histological data already known, and by the chemical evidence which I shall present in another section. YOLK STRATIFICATION IN OTHER ANIMALS AS SEEN IN THE LIGHT OF ITS CAUSATION IN BIRDS With the story of the white and yellow yolk of the bird in mind it becomes most instructive to reéxamine many of the peculiar types of yolk distribution which from time to time have been re- WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF OVA 463 ported and figured by embryologists and cytologists; for now we can feel fairly sure that wherever we meet alternate layers of white and yellow yolk, such layers indicate just so many alterna- tions of better and poorer nutritive conditions during the time these layers were being formed. The better and poorer nutritive conditions doubtless applying to the organism as a whole.’ A zonal arrangement of yolk similar to that of the bird has been reported in at least four other groups, viz., turtles, lizards, skates, and myxinoids. Some yolk patterns are known which are not distinctly zonal but intermediate to it and the type of yolk arrangement which is usual in small eggs; these help to bring all yolk distribution under a single principle or set of principles. In order to avoid much tedious description in the text, and also to present more clearly and accurately this part of the subject, I have prepared plate 3, which is to a large extent a reproduction of figures which are not new. To what is shown in the plate, and in the explanation which accompanies it, I here add the following: In all ripe ova, as in all the growth stages during which yolk is being deposited in the ovum, a layer of yolk composed of very ‘ small spherules (white yolk) is to be found at the extreme pe- riphery of the egg. If larger yolk spherules (yellow yolk) also occur, they occupy more central portions of the egg. There is, moreover, scarcely an exception to the rule that the germinal vesicle or egg-pronucleus is immediately surrounded by similar small spherules and not by large ones. It seems also to be very generally true that in those ova in which considerable yolk is developed, and in which the germinal vesicle makes its way from the center to the periphery of the egg (or remains near one side of the cell) it leaves in its wake a cylinder of white yolk to which in some cases has been given the name of Pander’s nucleus. All of these features are shown in eggs of such widely separated forms as the skate (fig. 6) the amphibian (fig. 5), the lizard (fig. 3 On the other hand, some eggs, e.g., those of the salmon, may undergo their chief growth at the expense of the somatic tissues and while no food whatever is being ingested. The conditions here, however, are essentially constant and there- fore produce no stratification of the yolk. 464 OSCAR RIDDLE 8), the birds and at least in some mammals (fig. 3). These are the forms, too, which—with the exception of the mammal—in addition show a stratification of the main body of the yolk. Two other forms are known, the turtle and the cyclostome (Bdellostoma) in which the stratification and other features occur, as in theabove mentioned eggs, except that no Pander’s nu- cleus has been found. How may we explain at one and the same time the essential similarity of the yolk distribution in eggs of widely separated forms, and the often essential dissimilarity of its distribution in the eggs of closely related species? There seems now no doubt that all can be accounted for when one knows two things: first, the length of the growth period; and, second the chief fluctuations in the nutrition of theanimal during the growth period of the eggs. Most ova have no stratification, then, because the yolk is grown in a short season—the animal not being subjected to such severe alternations as winter and summer, while the process is going on; or, because the eggs remain very small and develop little yolk; or, again, because some ova have the extraordinary capacity of growing at the expense of somatic tissues. In such cases fluctuations in the nutrition of the animal are of little moment to the egg; the latter being able to feed well at the ex- pense of the organism as long as it continues to live. When stratification is present, however, I believe this to be a positive declaration that nutritive fluctuations did occur in the organism, and the number of the strata tobe a reliable index to the number of such fluctuations. The presence of yolk stratifica- tion in the eggs of an animal then is an invitation to the natura- list and physiologist to look for important nutritional variations in that animal. Thus far definite causal and time relations between such stratifi- cation and nutritional fluctuation has been determined only for the bird. What this time period is in Bdellostoma we can now only conjecture; but the fact that in a mature specimen eggs of a wide range of size exist possibly argues that these eggs are several years in forming. The further fact, that the animals lose much blood and become much weakened at each yearly spawning WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF OVA 465 period, is significant in that here may be found the means of a nutritional depression which produces a layer of white yolk in all of the remaining eggs of the ovary. If this be the true explana- tion one can readily understand the lack of stratification inthe eggs of the related Petromyzon (fig. 2) since this form spawns but once in a lifetime. In the skate the main growth period of the odcyte is probably completed in less than a year. The nine orten pairs of strata figured by Rickert (fig. 6) are probably produced at the rate of about one per month. Whether this refers merely to the number of times the animal has fed during this time, or otherwise, nothing seems to be known. The amphibian egg has a short growth period, and derives its growth material too from substances stored in the body, and is thus independent of external food supply. Doubtless these facts —together with its usually moderate size—will account for the actual configuration of its yolk. The eggs of two reptiles—turtle and lizard—show very evident, but dissimilar, yolk strata. What the time, or the nature of the nutritive fluctuations are, that may produce these strata in La- certa, I can make no suggestion. In the egg of the tortoise Munson (’04) seems not to have identified (fig. 1) the so-called inner and outer cytocoel as layers of white yolk. A study of my own preparations, however, con- vinees me that such is their nature and the term cytocoel there- fore 1s unnecessary. The turtle’s egg has then alternate layers of white and yellow yolk somewhat comparable to those of the bird. I have found indications of four pairs of such zones in some eggs; or rather, by comparing the strata of different eggs from the same animal I have found such indications. But I'am not now sure that four such pairs exist, nor that only four exist. Cer- tainly several very thin strata can sometimes be found within 2 mm. of the periphery of some ova. One wonders much whether the well-marked innermost layers of the turtle’s egg can be the indications of years of growth. Agas- siz (757) showed that these ova undergo their greatest growth in four interrupted stages extending over four years. Our predic- 466 OSCAR RIDDLE tion is that further examination of these yolks, by proper methods for differentiating the strata, will show four pairs of white and yellow zones, to correspond to four yearly periods; each year supplying a period of growth and of rest, or at least of more rapid, and of less rapid growth. Of the mammal’s egg shown in fig. 3 it can be said that the several conditions of its growth seem to be closely similar to those of the amphibian egg which it so much resembles. To be sure, this egg may not, like the amphibian, develop at the expense of sub- stances stored in the body; but, so few eggs are here developing at one time that an adequate food supply is always assured. We believe then that these data practically give answer to the very important question which has been so well put by Riickert (’99, p. 585): Diese Uebereinstimmung des Selachier—speciell des Torpedo-Eies, mit dem Vogelei ist, wenn der Vergleich sich zunachst auch nur fiir die grébere Structur durchfiihren lasst, immerhin eine auffallende That- sache. Es wiirde die Miihe wert sein, bei einer erneuten Untersuchung der ohnedies seit vielen Jahren vernachlassigten Dotterentwickelung nach Anhaltspunkten zu suchen, ob die Aehnlichkeit nur dadurch her- vorgerufen wird, dass die beiderlei Hier unter gleichen Bedingungen sich entwickeln, oder ob es sich um einen durch Vererbung auf das Voge- lei tibertragenen Vorgang handelt; mit einem Wort, ob eine Analogie oder Homologie vorliegt. Im letzteren Falle wiirde sich der Schluss ziehen lassen, dass das meroblastische Ei des Vogels resp. der Saurop- siden ein primar meroblastisches ist wie das Selachierei und das Sauge- tierei kein tertiair sondern ein sekundir holoblastisches wie das Amphi- bienel. The similarity noted above of the amphibian and marsupial eggs is another case in point. My results indicate that the like- ness of yolk distribution in these two eggs, and in those of sela- chian and bird cited by Riickert, does not rest on heredity in any narrow sense of the word, but on the fact that they develop under like conditions. ON THE CHEMISTRY OF WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK The conception of white yolk which arose from the preceding work was that such yolk is a halted, or intermediate stage, in the WHITE AND YELLOW. YOLK OF OVA 467 development of yellow yolk. This same conception had been urged on histological grounds by several workers, though opposed by others. The chemistry of the two substances was then ap- pealed to for further evidence of a sort which it alone could give. An examination of the rather abundant literature on the chem- istry of yolk showed that it contained none of the data which our problem required. Analyses of yellow yolk have indeed been made by Prout, by Gobley and by Parke; but it was believed that the extraction methods of their time did not effect a complete separa- tion of the fat from the other constituents of the yolk. These determinations have therefore been made anew. That such was really necessary may be indicated by the fact that Parke (’67) extracted only 66.7 per cent of fat and phosphatids, whereas my analyses always yielded more than 70 per cent of these constitu- : ents. It was also imperative of course that results of analyses which were to be compared should be obtained by identical methods. Apparently no analysis of white yolk had been made, so that this had to be done. Since, moreover, the metabolism of yellow yolk includes not only its formation but also its de-formation into absorbable con- stituents, it was considered necessary to take account of yolk in a late stage of such modification. Such yolk is met with in two rather different situations: Normally, the whole yolk of the egg (yellow yolk) is subjected during the incubation period to the digestive, 7.e., disintegrative action of the embryonic tissues— entoderm and yolk sac. Under such modifying action does yellow yolk become more like white yolk, or does it become less like it? A similar digestive action occasionally overtakes an ovum in situ, 7.e., while still in the ovary and surrounded by follicular cells. These are the so-called ‘resorbed ova.’ How does the yolk of such an ovum in an advanced stage of resorption compare with the yellow yolk which it was before the beginning of resorption? Has it become more like, or less like white yolk? The complete results of my analyses with a consideration of their points of chemical interest, and an account of the preparation of materials, and of methods used, will be published elsewhere. A468 OSCAR RIDDLE I may say here that the fat and phosphatid extractions were made with the methods recently discussed and described by Prof. Waldemar Koch, in whose laboratory these analyses have been made. At this time it seems most desirable to present only the amount and sort of data which is necessary to give a clear picture of the major differences between the two forms of yolk under con- sideration, and to answer the two questions just stated above. TABLE 2 ey PER CENT OF SOLIDS NO. OF SAMPLE MOISTURE - ————— —_—_—_ 5 ; ~ Fat Phosphatids Extractives | Protein dT eee Be esearch nce pgs 47.8 A492 20.9 | 0.6 | 28.8 Ze Ne 21? | PMG SE A BAS 7 15.3 2:0) Pays Seen, Gighena eee ete: 49.2 40.7 15.9 2.4 38.7 BA RE se Ae 5 cists 88.1 36.8 Iba 3.4 43.5 1 = analysis of fresh egg-yolk (yellow yolk) (17.670 gr.) 2 = analysis of a resorbed ovum (1.834 gr.) 3 = Average of three analyses of contents of (9) yolk sacs (18 da. ine.), (78.821 4 = analysis of white yolk (6.019 er.) Table 2 has been so arranged as quickly and accurately to tell the story. Nos. 1, 2 and 4 are single and quite typical analyses. The several analyses of the yolk sac contents varied considera- bly, and therefore an average of three separate analyses of yolk- sacs of eighteen days incubation is here given in preference to a single analysis. The white yolk was taken from a great number of eggs under 6.0 mm. in diameter, the yolk being removed without ‘carrying over any traces of the enveloping membranes. The quantitative differences in each of these chief components of white and yellow yolk are remarkable. Quite as striking and conclusive, too, are the numbers which show that when yellow yolk is subjected to digestive action, in either of the two situations named, eacn and every component approaches more nearly to the quantity characteristic of white yolk. It cannot be said, however, that these data conclusively answer the question we have raised as to whether white yolk is an inter- WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF OVA 469 mediate stage in the formation and indeed of the de-formation (digestion), of yellow yolk; although they do strongly support that view. There seems to be an alternative, namely, that the figures under nos. 2 and 3 approach the composition of white yolk more and more, only because the amount of that sort of yolk originally present in the egg is not diminishing, or is diminishing but slowly, whereas the yellow yolk is here being digested very rapidly. For, it must be remembered that, although we are con- sidering a mature hen’s egg as our type of yellow yolk, it still contains white yolk in quantities not easy to estimate; though we are accustomed to think of this amount as small, probably between 5 and 15 per cent of the total. Parallel to the chemical data are the histological conclusions that it is always white yolk and never yellow yolk that is found applied to a surface into which yolk is being ingested. This is true for the germinal disc of pre-embryonic stages, and for the advancing entoderm and yolk-sac of the embryo (Balfour, Agas- siz). Virchow (91, p. 105) however, questions the correctness of this statement. It is certainly almost always true for the nucleus, or germinal vesicle of the primary oédcyte, a seemingly significant fact upon which I shall publish observations elsewhere. Our chemical data themselves show, however, that the alternative can- not be true unless there is several times as much white yolk in an egg as we have reason to believe exists there. In any event the certain and interesting fact remains that when the yolk complex of the hen’s egg is subjected to digestive and absorptive processes, the fat and phosphatids digest and disappear much more rapidly than does the protein. - ON THE MECHANISM OF YOLK FORMATION AND DE-FORMATION Having presented datato answer questions three and four of the introductory statement, we may now consider the first and second questions in the light of these results, and with the help of other facts. Precisely how and where does yolk originate? Why or how is it that there are two forms of yolk; or, what isthe relation between these? 470 OSCAR RIDDLE I purpose to preface this inquiry with a statement of my two main conclusions, or theses. (1.) The formation and the de-forma- tion of yolk are one and the same subject. The processes of bualding are also the processes of tearing-down; only an equilibrium changes. These two sister-subjects have, however, long paraded as inde- pendents. The formation of yolk has been considered a subject the investigation of which was connected with a wide variety of study such as the migration of fully-formed yolk granules from follicular cells into the ovum; the origin of yolk granules from migrated particles of the chromatin, or the nucleolus; or again their formation by the yolk nucleus, or by mitochondria, etc. On the other hand, when the other phase of yolk metabolism—its de-formation—was concerned, observers have been pretty gener- ally satisfied to speak only of ‘a digestion and ingestion of yolk.’ (2.) Given a region into which the elements of yolk—with their vast amount of potential energy—can go and can exist without under- going oxidation, and yolk (or some of its elements) will there be in- creased or decreased 1n amount subject to an equilibrium which is a function of two factors; (a) the reversible action of enzymes and, (b) the partition coefficient of the elements of yolk. We do not state that all desirable proof of this thesis is at hand, but we do insist that a very considerable body of evidence supports it. Having been led to the formulation of this view, and to the acceptance of it to the fullest extent ourselves, we shall here outline the evidence which we believe will likewise commend it to others. It is not necessary to discuss separately what we have called theses one and two. Both rest upon the question of the presence, the effectiveness, and the modus operandi of the two factors which we have proposed as the immediate agentsof yolk transformations; whether such transformations be of growth or of ‘digestion,’ whether they be progressive or regressive in character. The dis- cussion therefore hangs upon these factors and we shall consider them separately. Before proceeding in this direction, however, it is well to be reminded that these theses are the physiological and explanatory counterpart of an histological dictum which in certain of its as- pects has been for many years ably maintained by several noted WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF OVA 471 histologists; but which has apparently not gained universal accep- tance: A spherule of yellow yolk may arise from a spherule of white yolk; in the normal destruction and utilisation of the yellow spherule, a white spherule may be again produced. i Lhe part played by the reversible action of enzymes Kastle and Loevenhart (00) proved the reversibility of the action of lipase—the enzyme concerned in the analysis and syn- thesis of fat; and we have seen that fat is the chief constituent of yolk. Wohlgemuth (’05) demonstrated the presence of lipase in the yolk of the fowl’s egg. It was shown by Henriques and Hansen (’03) that the fatty acids of the food, z.e., of foreign fat, are laid down as such in the hen’s egg. Since we know that this fat did not originate within the egg; and, since we are assured that fat as such does not pass through living cells, but that it is previously split into alcohol and constituent fatty acids, we must believe that the foreign fat found by Henriques and Hansen was synthesized within the egg cell; or, that it was synthesized in the neighboring follicular cells and thrown from their inner margins into the egg. This last alternative is not true as will be pointed out later. Thus we come by means of the above series of facts directly to the proof of the existence within the fowl’s egg of the synthesis— one side of the enzyme action—of the most voluminous constitu- ent of the yolk. Has the existence of the splitting action of lipase in the egg also been demonstrated? I believe it has practically been so dem- strated by Liebermann’s (’88) determination that only the merest traces of free fatty acids are present in the fresh egg, whereas large amounts are present at seven and fourteen days of incubation. The existence of a splitting activity of lipase in the hen’s egg is moreover a matter that probably no one will question. From these facts then I think it must be said that the reversible action of lipase within the hen’s egg has been indirectly demonstrated. In fact, one familiar with the picture presented by the deposit and absorption of the yolk of eggs, can but wonder that this pic- ture has not been before specifically pointed out as an example— JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, No. 2 472 OSCAR RIDDLE a typical example—of the reversibility of lipase effecting speedy and rhythmic transformations. The example too, becomes of con- siderable zoological interest, since certainly nowhere else does this simple physiological principle have such a relation to interesting features of morphology as just here. For, not only does it in these cases often completely change the features of the egg-cell, but itresults ina condition (telolecithal) which later gives direction to a host of events of early development—cleavage, gastrulation, etc.—which proceed from the egg. When we have spoken above of proof of the synthelic and of the analytic action of lipase we mean, of course, proof that each of these reactions may predominate in the egg. The burden of our whole statement is that both sorts of reaction are going on simultaneously (since thereaction is a reversible one), but that the conditions in the egg are, as a matter of observed fact, shown to be such that during the growth period the synthetic reaction normally exceeds the analytic; and that during incubation the reverse is true. We say nothing in this connection of the origin and disintegra- tion of the proteins of the egg. This group does not furnish, at present, examples specially proved for conditions in the egg, as do the fats. The reversibility of proteolytic enzyme action has however been demonstrated. With yolk-forming enzymes (lipase, etc.) accelerating a series of reversible reactions in an egg-cell in which traces of yolk have been deposited, what are the factors which favor each side of the reac- tion, and thus induce either an increase in the amount of yolk, or a decrease in the traces that already exist? We believe that for the ovum of the fowl which we shall more specifically consider, some of the factors effective elsewhere may be ignored.‘ The daily temperature fluctuations, for example, are relatively slight, ete. There seems good reason to believe that the amount and pro- 4 There are several other factors or conditions which possibly, even probably, play parts in the storage of facts, i. e., building of yolk, in the egg; most of these however are factors supplementary to those of distribution coefficient and enzyme reversibility; though some are not. Some such factors known to be effective in fat-storage elsewhere are: (1) quantity of lipase (Kastle and Loevenhart) ; (2) different species (?) of lipase (Hanriot); (3) alkalinity WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF OVA 473 portion of the reacting substances present is here, as elsewhere under these conditions, the factor that determines whether the amount of yolk shall from time to time increase, remain constant, or diminish. What then are the conditions in the fowl that would tend to modify the amount of these reacting substances in the egg? In answer to this we revert to the facts forecasted at the begin- ning of this paper in regard to our own earlier demonstration (’08) of a daily rhythm of better and poorer nutrition in birds; which rhythms coincide with periods of higher and lower blood-pressure. It was there made certain that very rapidly growing organs (feather-germs) were usually unable to pass over the period of the nightly (1:00-5:00 a.m.) reduction in blood-pressure without showing defects; which defects were proved to be due to insuffi- cient nutrition. Now we think there is no doubt that these facts lead to an answer to the above question. The egg (like the feather germs) doubtless derives fewer nutritive particles from the blood at this time than during the rest of the day. Possibly, even probably, the low blood-pressure induces at this time feeble but effective currents of fluid from these cells towards the blood and lymph; for it is probable that under low-blood-pressure the volume of the blood tends to increase at the expense of the fluid of the tissues. At any rate it seems certain that at this time the intake of the food substances from the blood is reduced, with the result that the equilibrium of the reaction is shifted. Thus the morphological picture becomes changed. Now growth will proceed more slowly. It is now that the granules must remain small, and poor in fat. It is now that some of the larger yolk spherules (yellow yolk) may possibly suffer reduction to smaller spherules (white yolk) ; (Hanriot) ; (4) presence of other bodies eg. lecithin (Hewlett); (5) reducing conditions, i. e., conditions favorable to the formation of fat from carbohydrate and protein by reduction. A further reason for only a mere mention of these factors here is that the data for the egg are at present too meagre. The factors which have to do with the formation and storage of the protein constituents of yolk, and of their union with lipoids and fats to form yolk, are less known than those factors which involve fat metabolism only; therefore the latter only are treated here. Macallum (’91) has some interesting state- ments on related subjects, and further points out that similar processes occur in the formation of yolk and in the production of pancreatic zymogen. 474 OSCAR RIDDLE the former being robbed more rapidly of their fat than of their protein. Now a layer of white yolk is produced in the egg. In fig. A is shown a diagrammatic representation of how these fluctuations in the quantity of food-products of a fatty nature in the blood-stream would effect changes in size in oil drops, if these latter were separated from the blood by thin and semi-permeable membranes—the conditions existing at the surface of an egg. Sec- tion A represents growing conditions—predominance of fat syn- thesis due to rapid ingress of the constitutents of fat. Section B | A Text Figure A=] Idealized representation of the relations of the periphery of a mature sauropi- dan egg to the blood and lymph. Follicular cells not shown; these considered per- vious as vitelline membrane, or by their intercellular spaces offering free access of lymph to that membrane. A = optimum growth conditions. B = metabolism of an oil drop in equilibrium. C = impoverished blood bearing away elements of yolk, with extension of white yolk area at the expense of yellow yolk. 6b. cap. = blood capillary; v.m. = vitelline membrane; w.y. = granules of white yolk; y.y. = granules of yellow yolk. See text. stationary conditions; as much of fatty ingredients is being given off into the blood, as is being taken from it. Section C droplets reduced in size as a result of continued contact with a blood stream poor in fat. WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF OVA 475 2. The role of the partition coefficient of the elements of yolk Of less importance than the reversible action of enzymes, but following upon it, is the distribution between the yolk® and the blood of the soluble substances concerned in these reactions accord- ing to their relative solubilities in these two solvents. There can be no doubt that this distribution, or partition coefficient is a factor in determining the amount of soluble substance which comes from the blood, lymph, follicular cells, or vitelline membrane, to the periphery of the yolk, and vice versa. Such is a physical necessity. The constitutents of fat for example, quite certainly enter the egg in soluble form and must there be subject to the laws of solubility. The chief thing incumbent upon us in this connection is to point out how this partition coefficient may act selectively in - modifying the amount of the reacting substances in the egg; t.e., how this principle may contrive at one time to increase, and at another to decrease the quantity of yolk contained in the egg. Remembering that it is the amount of reacting substances present that decides whether yolk formation or yolk de-formation may occur, the answer can perhaps be more easily given in refer- ence to fig. 1. Let this figure now represent the periphery of the ovum of a turtle, in contact with the lymph and blood streams. During the summer, when the constituents of fat are probably most abundant in the blood, some of these must, on account of their solubility, pass into the egg and there later be built into yolk; their former places being continually taken by new particles from the constant supply of the blood stream. Under these con- ditions yolk spherules grow, as is represented by section A. In winter, conditions become asin C. The turtle cannot now digest food (Riddle, ’09). Its heart-beat and other activities, however, require food for their continuance, and the blood becomes depleted of food. The reversible action of-its yolk enzymes is not like- wise suppressed, but these now as before set free soluble yolk 5 The word ‘yolk’ ishere made tostand for the whole body of the egg cell. Perhaps egg-protoplasm, follicular cell, vitelline membrane, and yolk, should all be men- tioned instead of ‘yolk’ alone. 476 OSCAR RIDDLE constituents. For such to be set free now, however, is to leave the egg entirely; for now the distribution coefficient of each of such substances brings a portion of it into the blood or lymph; and here it is not allowed to accumulate—to saturate this solution and then cease to act,—but is taken up by other organs; while the blood thus freed from traces of it continues to pick up more of such particles as it passes the ovum. Because of this principle then an ovum may not be able to hold all the yolk that it has once acquired. Apparently we can explain the broad zones of white yolk in the turtles in this way, and the known facts seem to re- quire the mechanisms we have described. Of course we do not mean to infer that no other factor than the two we are describing have to do with certain aspects of yolk metabolism. For example, these two may have little causative influence in deciding that very important matter as to when the rapid growth of the hen’s yolk is to begin. Here le mysteries perhaps of the follicular cells, or something else, perhaps more dis- tant from the point of actual yolk formation. We are dealing only with the immediate mechanism of yolk formation and de- formation. The possible réle of lecithin in increasing the solubility of fatty acids and soap in the follicular cells and in the yolk is an attractive subject. Moore and Parker (’01) have shown how enormously the solubilities of these substances are increased by the addition of small amounts of lecithin and bile salts. I have ascertained the presence of lecithin in the follicular membranes, but as yet have not enough analyses for comparison to draw conclusions. I have determined also, as is indicated in Table II, that the leci- thin content of the white yolk—i. e., the layer just beneath follic- ular membrane, and usually between it and the yellow yolk— is smaller in amount than that of the yellow yolk. As a concluding word on the réle of the partition coefficient we record our belief that it alone accounts for the presence of the yolk coloring matters—vitello-lutein and vitello-rubin—in the yellow yolk, and not in the white. These are lipochrome pigments, soluble only in fat and fat solvents, and are abundant in the large yolk spherules, probably because, as we have shown by compara- WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF OVA ATT tive analyses, these spherules abound in fat. Of similar interest is the discovery of Miescher (’97) that at the time of the develop- ment of the eggs of the salmon the blood of these animals is unusu- ally rich in lecithin, fat and globulins. 3. These two factors and the histological data One hardly has a right to mention the words ‘histology of yolk’ without entering upon the consideration of an enormous litera- ture. Since my own contribution is not primarily of histological nature, and for reasons stated at the outset, I refrain from doing so, although by my results I am seeking to put some rather new and additional interpretations upon histological conclusions, and to answer some questions in which histological, and to a less extent microchemical methods have before been largely used. The view that intermediate forms of spherules exist, connecting white yolk with the yellow yolk spheres, has been maintained by Rickert, Sarasin, Disse, Kolliker and others. The region under the germinal dise of avian, reptilian and selachian ova have fur- nished the most and the clearest pictures of the transition forms. Previous authors have, however, generally considered only the formation of the yellow from the white spheres during growth, and have not considered the reverse of this process as it occurs during the destruction of the yolk. Theengulfing of whole granules of (white) yolk by the entodermal cells has been recorded by His (00) and others. This I would observe is, if true, not a real con- tradiction of my thesis, since these granules doubtless later un- dergo the ordinary processes of digestion in the entodermal cell. Similarly I would note that the presence of yolk granules in follicular cells—demonstrated by many observers—only illus- trates the mechanism we have described at work in another cell; the classic example of this sort of formation being the fat globule in the cell of the intestinal mucosa. On the other hand the finding of such granules in a follicular cell is no guarantee whatever that the granule is thrown as such from that cell into the egg. The granule may here, as in the mucosa cell, again undergo diges- tion and pass from it in solution. 478 OSCAR RIDDLE As regards yolk formation in insects, conditions are peculiar; the nurse cell seems here largely to carry out the work of yolk formation; while certainly the de-formation process normally is carried out by the egg only. All observers agree that the outermost layer of yolk in any egg or growing odcyte consists of finely granular yolk. If this were otherwise our general theory of yolk formation would be untenable. Sarasin (’83) was led to the odd idea that the zones of the Lacerta egg were developed outermost first, and the central ones last. I think our demonstration of the nature of this growth in the bird, and the considerations that have followed, will con- vince that Sarasin’s view is untenable. Yolk spherules have been seen to grow after the egg leaves the ovary by Agassiz (’59), Van der Stricht (’07) and others. This growth is quite surely due to the spherule taking up by osmosis water-particles from the albumen or other fluid encountered by the egg; such growth is not of the nature we have described, though neither of the above mentioned authors has made the dis- tinction. In regard to the conclusion of many cytologists that yolk arises from the egg-nucleus, and of still others that it arises from the follicular cell nuclei, or from these cells in toto, I may append the following to show that we can exclude all of these as inadequate in the case of the yellow yolk of the fowl’s egg. I have calculated that during the last day that a hen’s ovum remains in the ovary it may deposit more than 5000 cubic mm. of yolk! Evidently too much work for an egg-nucleus. Again, since the radius of such an egg is increased by 2.0 mm. per day, this means that if yolk for- mation be a function of the follicular cell, each such cell must here produce daily a column of yolk 2.0 mm. long and of the diam- eter of the cell; that is to say each such cell must form more than 50 times its volume of yolk per day, or more than twice its volume per hour! Evidently too much vicarious labor for a cell. It appears then that an exclusive origin of yolk from the nu- cleus, or within the follicular cells is impossible in the birds. The quantities of yolk laid down daily are amounts compatible with substances undergoing physical translocation by osmosis, solution, WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF OVA 479 etc., but not compatible with the probable rate of organic synthesis in the restricted regions of either the nucleus or follicular cell. It is of course necessary for all of the material entering into yolk- formation to pass through or between the follicular cells; but each particle of this material may have, by undergoing the synthesis in situ in the egg, twenty-four hours or longer to accomplish this; whereas we have seen that if it originated within the follicle each cell would there have to organize completely its own volume of yolk material and empty itself of this more or less solid material at least once in each twenty or thirty minutes of the day. Since such theories of yolk formation as have been proposed are now shown to be inadequate in a case where a test can be applied, and since it seems clear that the mechanism of yolk build- ing which we have here outlined and described is necessarily: present wherever and whenever yolk is formed, there is at present no valid reason for believing that any dissimilar method of yolk formation exists. In a certain sense, no general theory of yolk formation has as yet been stated. That is to say, no outline of the processes involved in yolk-building and of the conditions affecting these processes has been attempted, and our own effort leaves at least important chemical phases of the problem quite untouched. Previous efforts have been largely devoted to features of the histogenesis of yolk granules, and to the identification of some cell organ as the directive agent of yolk formation. Thus such cell structures as centrosome, nucleus, chromatin, nucleolus, mitochondria, yolk-nucleus, ete., have each been several times proposed as the seat or source of yolk. Whilst for some eggs, particularly those in which all of the yolk plainly could not have so circumscribed an origin, the seat or source of such yolk was centered upon a sim- ilar structure of the follicular cell; yolk particles have some- times been described as arising in such cell and later making their way through the follicle cell membrane, vitelline, or other egg membranes, into the periphery of the egg. But theory usually has extended only to the matter of the source of yolk, to the rela- tion between the white and yellow granules, or to the designation of one or another cell-organ as the directive agent of yolk forma- 480 OSCAR RIDDLE tion. There has been no theory to cover the long series of points involved, some of which are the following: What are the con- ditions which permit yolk to form? In what situations and about what structures does it form (this point much studied and dis- cussed)? What are the processes involved,—what is the mech- anism of yolk formation? How are the different forms of yolk genetically and chemically related? How account for the vari- able amount, distribution, and stratification of yolk? The statements concerning cell-organs as directive agents of yolk-building have often been quite misleading. This could hardly be otherwise since we have had here attempts to ‘explain’ a process, not in terms of other processes, but in terms of struc- twre—an error not uncommon even in modern biology. One gets the idea from some descriptions of yolk formation that the nucleus is the absolute, immediate and ultimate source of yolk; and this in spite of the fact that yolk is never present within the nucleus, but only outside of it. Just how a vanishingly small fragment of chromatin, thrust from nucleus into cytoplasm—7.e., into an environment so new as to imperil its own existence,—may guide and direct the very rapid production of a thousand times its own volume of yolk (a new and very different substance from itself) we have not been told. Much apparently has been left to the imagination of the reader who is evidently expected to bridge for himself the gap that exists between the chromatin particle in situ and the yolk building process in operatio. But, the high regard © which some adherents of this theory have for the kingly chromatin evidently persuades them that chromatin particles—which cer- tainly are thrown from the nucleus into the cytoplasm, and about which traces of yolk certainly are sometimes found—comprise material of such superior quality that the base and foreign matter which meets their Midas-like touch must turn at once into golden yolk! By other workers mitochondria, and still other structures, have been similarly endowed with what would seem to be wonder- ful and transforming power. The writer would not undervalue the great amount of very valuable work that has led to the deter- mination of the cell-elements about which yolk forms. But it seems to him that much less valuable than this painstaking work WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF OVA 481 are the inferences that have too often accompanied it to the effect that the structure about which yolk ts found to form, is itself the active agent in the yolk formation. From the facts already brought forward we see that whatever the out-wandering chromatin par- ticle—the invisible td or biophor—may be able to accomplish in directing the course of differentiation in the highly complex living cytoplasm, the building of a single inert yolk granule by a plainly visible amount of chromatin is a task which clearly quite surpasses it! At any rate a task which it does not accomplish. Yolk formation as it is indicated by the facts presented in this paper may be connectedly outlined as follows: Yolk will be formed (1) when conditions are such in the egg, follicular cell, food-supply, or organism that excess of food may enter the egg; but (2) in those regions only where some excess of food fat (and protein) can exist without undergoing oxidation; (8) the main- tenance of such excess of food is dependent upon the amount of food, or upon marked fluctuations in the amount of food outside the egg, and (4) upon the distribution coefficient of the elements of yolk in the substance inside and immediately outside of the egg, and doubtless by other undetermined conditions within the egg; (5) the actual and active processes of yolk increase or decrease are essentially identified with the partially known synthetic and analytic,—7.e., reversible-action of the-enzymes which act upon the constituents of yolk; (6) in the first stages of the growth of a (white yolk) yolk spherule the proportion of fats and phos- phatids in its composition is small; (7) in later and more com- plete (yellow yolk) stages the proportion of these constituents is large. | In my opinion what we now most need to know is how those conditions arise which permit yolk-building to begin. We need further knowledge on*points (1) and (2) of the above. That is, we need to know why an unusual amount of food enters the egg at this particular time in its history. At present we do not know whether such cause lies inside or outside the egg. Again, what is the source of those reduction centers where foods which yield energy so easily as do the fats may not undergo oxidation but be built unchanged into yolk? It is possible, of course that nucleus, 482 OSCAR RIDDLE chromatin, mitochondria, or centrosome, etc., of the egg, may later be shown to have special causal significance with regard to such changes in amount of food-intake, or with the production of reducing centers, which we now recognize as basic and unknown features of the cunditions which primarily initiate yolk formation. If so, then such cell-structure will have been shown to bear indi- rect causal relation to a result which it was formerly credited with ‘causing’ directly; the test of this hes with the future. But, some at least, of the more direct and immediate features of yolk- building are quite certainly those which have been described in these pages. SUMMARY 1. A method of measuring the rate of growth of large, rapidly growing ova has been found. It consists in feeding, at known intervals, the fat stain Sudan ITI to animals developing such ova. 2. Ova of the common fowl smaller than 6 mm. in diameter grow extremely slowly as compared with ova of larger size. 3. The time interval between the beginning of rapid growth of the 6 mm. egg, and the breaking of the egg from the ovarian folli- cle (ovulation) is normally between five and eight days. In most cases it is either six or seven days. 4. The radii of ova which are larger than 6 mm. usually increase nearly 2 mm. during each twenty-four hours. 5. The thickness of a layer of white yolk together with an adjacent layer of yellow yolk is nearly 2 mm. 6. A pair of such yolk layers is therefore produced during each twenty-four hours. 7. We conclude that the layer of white yolk in the hen’s egg is laid down during poorer nutritive conditions obtaining in the later hours of the night (1-5 a.m.) and that the yellow yolk is deposited during the better growth conditions of the rest of the day. ; 8. Reasons are found for believing that white yolk wherever found is but a stage in the formation, or the de-formation, of yellow yolk. That it remains as the final form of yolk, only where it is slowly grown or is halted by sub-optimal growth conditions. WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF OVA 483 Yellow yolk, on the other hand, probably indicates, wherever it is found in ova, rapid growth under better nutritive conditions. 9. The presence of alternating layers or zones of yolk (Schich- tung) in the ova of some animals thus receives an explanation. A period of poor nutrition corresponds to each of such zones of white yolk; a period of better nutrition to each layer of yellow yolk. 10. The time of formation of a pair of such zones is known in the birds to be one day; in the turtle and myxinoid perhaps a year; in the skate possibly nearly a month; in the lizard this is quite unknown. 11. This ‘Schichtung’ of the yolk, and other peculiarities of yolk distribution, have produced great similarity in the gross morphology of eggs of widely separated forms, e. g., selachian and bird; amphibian and marsupial. We can be confident that such similarities do not depend upon heredity in a strict sense, but upon the fact that these eggs have developed under like con- ditions. 12. The gross chemical composition of white and yellow yolk, and of yellow yolk undergoing de-formation or digestion (a) by the embryo and (6) by the follicular cells, have been determined and comparisons made. | 13. White yolk contains much more water, proteid, and extrac- tives, and much less fat and phosphatid than does yellow yolk. 14. When yellow yolk is digested, in either of the two situa- tions named, its constituent parts are not digested, utilized, and absorbed at a uniform rate; but in such a way that the compo- sition of what remains approaches the gross normal composition of white yolk. In such digestion fat and phosphatid are broken down more rapidly than is protein. 15. The immediate mechanism of yolk formation and of yolk- de-formation are the same. Chiefly involved are two factors— not previously applied here—which we recognize as (a) the rever- sible action of enzymes, and (b) the partition coefficients of the several constituents of yolk. 16. The presence of the native lipochrome coloring matter —vitello-lutein—in the large spherules of yellow yolk only, is © 484 OSCAR RIDDLE probably due to the fact that these spherules contain much fat, and the lipochrome pigment is soluble in fat and fat solvents only. 17. The origin of the yolk of the fowl’s egg from the nucleus of this cell, or from the nuclei of the follicular cells, is shown to be impossible. It is not probable that the essential features of yolk synthesis in any egg resides in either of these alleged sources. 18. An attempt is made to outline the processes involved in yolk formation. LITERATURE CITED Aaassiz, L. Anp Cuarxk, H. J. 1857 Contributions to the natural history of the United States, vol. 2. CALDWELL, W. H. 1887 On the embryology of monotremata and muarsupialia. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., vol. 178. Dean, B. 1899 On the embryology of Bdellostoma stouti: Festschrift f. v. Kuppfer. HENRIQUES, V AND HANSEN, C. 1903 Ueber den Uebergang des Nahrungsfettes in das Hiihnerei, und iiber die Fettsiure des Lecithins. Skand. Arch. f. Physiologie, vol. 14. Herrort, K. V. 1900 Der Reifung und Befruchtung des Eies Petromyzon flu- viatilis. Arch. f. Anat. u. Entwick., vol. 57. His, W. 1900 Lecithoblast und Angioblast der Wirbeltiere. Histogenetische Studien. Abhdl. der math-phys. Klasse d. kénigl. sachs. Gesellsch. d. Wiss. Leipzig. KkastLe J. H. AnD LoEVENHART, A. 8. 1900 On lipase, the fat-splitting enzyme, and the reversibility of its action. Amer. Chem. Jour., vol. 24. LIEBERMANN, L. 1888 Embryochemische Untersuchungen. Pfliigers Archiv, vol. 48. Miescuer, F. 1897 Histochemische, physiologische Arbeiten. vol. 1, Leipzig. Moors, B anp Parker, W. H. 1901 On the functions of bile as a solvent. Proc. Roy. Soe. Lond., vol. 68. Munson, J. P. 1904 Researches on the oégenesis of the tortoise, Clemmys mar- morata. Amer. Jour. Anat., vol. 3. Park, J. L. 1867 Ueber die chemische Constitution des Eidotters. Med.-chem. Untersuchungen f. Hoppe-Seyler, heft. 2. WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF OVA 485 Rippie, O. 1907 The rate of growth of the egg-yolk of the chick, and the signifi- eance of white and yellow yolk in vertebrate ova. Paper before Amer. Soc. Zool., Chicago. Abstract in Science N. 8. vol. 27, 1908, p. 945. 1908 The genesis of fault-bars in feathers and the cause of alternation of light and dark fundamental bars. Biol. Bull., vol. 14. 1909 The rate of digestion in cold-blooded vertebrates: the influence of season and temperature. Amer. Jour. Physiol., vol. 24. 1910 Studies with Sudan III in metabolism and inheritance. Jour. Exp. Zo6l., vol. 8. Rickert, J. 1899 Die erste Entwickelung des Hies der Elasmobranchier. Festsch. f. v. Kuppfer. Sarasin, C. F. 1883 Reifung und Furchung der Reptilieneier. Arb. aus d. zool. Inst. Wiirzburg, vol. 6. ’ Sarasin, P. unp C. F. 1887 Zur Entwick. und Anat. d. Ichthyophis glutinosa. Ergeb. naturw. Forsch. auf Ceylon. vol. 2, Wiesbaden. VAN DERS?TRICHT, O. 1907 La vitellogenese et la deutoplasma del’ oeuf de chauve- souris. Comptes rendus de |’ Assoc. Anat. Lille. Vircuow, H. 1891 Der Dottersack des Hiihnes. Festsch. R. Virchow., vol. 1. WouucemutH, J. 1905 Ueber den Sitz der Ferment in Hiihrerei. Zeitsch. f. physiol. Chem., vol. 44. PLATE 1 EXPLANATION OF FIGURES All figures natural size. 1-6 and la-6a represent series of ezgs grown simultane- ously in two Sudan-fed hens. About 20 milligrams of Sudan fed to each hen at, 2p.M., January 27, and at 10 a.m., January 30 (sixty-eight hours). The bird bearing series la—6a killed February 2, 10 a.m. (70 hours after last Sudan began to be deposited in yolk). 1 Egg laid January 27, with pear-shaped, more solid ‘waxy’ interior; also two prominent circles of ‘modified yolk’ near periphery. 2 Egg laid January 29. The outer border line here represents Sudan deposited from feeding of January 27. This layer was 1 mm. in thickness. The two cir- cles of ‘modified yolk’ showing here as in figs. 1, 3 and 4. The size of each of the yolks at the time of the modification is indicated by these circles. 3 Egg laid January 31; see above. 4 Egg laid February 2. Two layersof Sudan. Thetime between Sudan feedings was sixty-eight hours; the amount of yolk deposited in this egg during that time was 6.2mm, = 2. 2. mm. in twenty-four hours. Section nearly in plane of germ. 5 Egg laid February 4. The two layers of Sudan here as in fig. 4, were 6.2 mm. apart = growth of 2.2 mm. in twenty-four hours. Section at right angles to plane of germ. 6 Egg laid February 7. Shows spreading, or dilation, effects in Sudan layers. Apparently the ‘spreading’ is mostly outwards, though this figure well repre- sents neither the position nor the condition of each layer. This effect noted in eggs that have remained long in ovary, or, as in this case, in laboratory at high tem- peratures. la Egg laid January 27. To unaided eye the outer 10 mm. of one side of this egg showed very plainly six pairs of yolk layers = 1.67 mm. each. Interior con- tained somewhat solid, waxy body 15 X 10 mm. 2a Egg laid January 29. Seven very distinct pairs of layers of white and yellow yolk. The white yolk represented by dotted lines; the yellow yolk by the spaces between these. Probably another layer central to those indicated in figure. 3a Hgg 40 X 27 X 28 taken from oviduct (see first statement above). Inner borders of two Sudan layers are 4 mm. apart = 1.41 mm. growth per twenty- four hours. Section through plane of germ. 4a Egg 31 X 26 X 28 from ovary (February 2). Distance between inner borders of Sudan lines = 3.6mm. = 1.3mm. intwenty-four hours. Section nearly in plane of germ. Figs. 3a and 4a show the spreading or diffusion of Sudan in the region of the germ. Distance between inner border of outer Sudan layer and periphery = 5.mm.; this growth of seventy hours = growth of 1.7 mm. in twenty-four hours. 5a Egg 24 X 21 X 20, from ovary (February 2). The first feeding of Sudan (January 27) left but faint traces of the dye in this small egg (see small crescent). By mistake the inner border of the thick layer of Sudan of this figure was placed 7 mm. from periphery instead of 5 as it actually was. This 5 mm. = growth of seventy hours = 1.7 mm. growth in twenty-four hours. 6a Egg 15 X 16 X 19, from ovary (February 2). Smallest egg in which trace of Sudan was present; this somewhat diffuse and indicated by dotted circle. From inner border of circle to periphery = 4.8 mm. the growth of seventy hours = 1.64 mm. growth in twenty-four hours. All eggs are drawn as perfect circles, although, as is indicated above, the boiled yolks quite constantly show three unequal diameters. 486 I PLATE LLOW YOLK OF OVA . u WHITE AND YE OSCAR RIDDLE 6a Ww 4a i) PLATE 2 EXPLANATION OF FIGURES Figures all drawn twice natural size, and then reduced one-sixth. 1 Section at right angles to germ of an egg( 32 X 30 X 28) that showed with schematic clearness its rate of growth. The Sudan deposited in the first (inner) broken line was fed forty-eight hours before a following feeding. Thereafter the feedings of the dye were made at thirty-six hour intervals. A growth of 1.8 mm. per twenty-four hours is indicated for the three intervals of thirty-six hours. 2 Through germ of egg, 33 X 29 X 27. Shows well the manner of deposit of dye (and therefore of yolk) in immediate region of germ. The fan-shaped figure of dilute Sudan lying deeply beneath the germ is perhaps however not a correct pic- ture of the original position of the dye, but a ‘spreading’ effect. The first two feed- ings of Sudan were here twenty-four hours apart; the next forty-eight hours and the last, twenty-four hours later. A growth of 1.5mm. per twenty-four hours is here indicated for time between first and last feedings. 3 A-series of small ova (4-7.5 mm. in diameter) from the ovary of a laying hen which had been once fed about 25 milligrams of Sudan and killed on following day. Only three of these ova (6.5 to 7.5mm.) showed any trace of the dye. In the draw- ing of the egg of 7.5mm. the position of the layer of dye was placed two mm. too near center of egg. The number along side each ovum indicates its actual diameter in millimeters. The egg of 7mm. was of special interest. After lying in a quantity of Mann’s balanced formalin-alcohol solution for a few weeks the striated appear- ance of the outer portion of its white yolk was visible with binocular. The lower right hand figure is an attempt to represent the structure of the outer 1.75 mm. of the 7mm. egg. Eight strie could be here distinguished. Apparently therefore the strie have a thickness of about 0.25 mm. The stain was found to be confined to the large, yellow yolk granules. 4 Egg, 34 X 29 X 31, through plane of germ. Central heavy irregular lines are from Sudan feeding three days apart. Bird was laying at long intervals and next feeding delayed ten days and following this two feedings two days apart. This egg therefore at least seventeen days in developing. But its abnormality is evidenced by the crumpled appearance of the innermost layers of Sudan (the cor- ners of innermost layer are too sharp in drawing) and by a curious depression of the germ. Another peculiarity of this egg was its presentation of a brightly Sudan- colored vegetative pole (the stratum of dye here near surface), and a normally colored animal pole (except for the small depressed region of germ). 5 Later egg, sister tono. 4. Much morerapid growth thanin4. First two feed- ings thirty-six hours apart; others twenty-four. A growth of 1.3 mm. per twenty- four hours is here indicated. 488 WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF OVA PLATE II OSCAR RIDDLE or Nin ~“I hol vit, mem. _-7 _,large nS ey OlKy Stam op > 7 stain | >: :+clefts ~white yolk: i PES ) ey 489 PLATE 3 EXPLANATION OF FIGURES The distribution of white and yellow yolk in the ova of vertebrata with special reference to zonal or lamellar formation. 1 Egg of tortoise, Clemmys (from Munson, ’04), c.c. = cytocenter (centro- sphere); y.c. = inner cytocoel of Munson, and what I should call inner or first layer of white yolk; 7.y.l. = inner yolk layer of Munson, and inner or first yellow yolk layer I have called it: o.cy.c = outer cytocoel or second layer of white yolk; o. y. l. = outer yolk layer, or second layer of yellow yolk; s. c. 1. = subcuticular layer. 2 Mature egg of Petromyzon (from Herfort, ’00). Very small granules in the external odplasm, gradually merging into the large granules and large vacuoles of internal odplasm. 3 Nearly grown egg of Phascolarctus (marsupial) (from Caldwell, ’87). The darker crescentic body is coarsely granular yellow yolk; the clear area around the nucleus, which is also continued around the periphery of the entire egg is of finely granular white yolk. 4 One end of large (3 em. long)egg of Bdellostoma (eyclostome) to show stratifi- cation of its yolk (from Dean, ’99). The fine curved lines represent points richest in minute yolk-spherules (white yolk). 5 Mature egg of Ichthyophis glutinosa (amphibia) (from the Sarasins, ’87) 6 X 9mm. with central ‘latebra’ of white yolk; this connects above with the germi- nal vesicle, forming a nucleus of Pander beneath the latter. 6 Mature egg of Torpedo (from Riickert 99) in meridional section. The lens- like germ above. A central ‘latebra’ without stratification (Riickert says this is composed of dark, not light, substance). The dark layers are composed of loosely bound, but larger yolk platelets (white yolk?); the wider lighter strata of more closely packed but somewhat larger platelets (yellow yolk?). 7 Hen’s egg photographed to show something of the concentric deposition of Sudan III. Dark lines = Sudan; these bright orange-red in original. The appear- ance here is very similar to the always less evident stratification of white and yellow yolk; the™narrow lines of Sudan in the photograph simulating the faint and narrow lines of the white yolk. 8 Part of immature egg of Lacerta (from Sarasin, ’83) showing well-marked layers of white and yellow yolk (I infer that the dark lines represent white yolk); about one-fourth of egg is here shown. The germinal vesicle lies just outside the figure, above and to the right; all layers are seen to converge toward it, and to become gradually modified in its vicinity. 490 WHITE AND YELLOW YOLK OF OVA PLATE III OSCAR RIDDLE 6 7 8 JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 2 491 +k on oh as Ais yet ate) 1 A ce 4 Wi ry 7 th) Op fae hf bay oh i ty) mo Pas SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY CHARLES W. HARGITT From the Zoological Laboratory, Syracuse University THREE PLATES AND THREE TEXT FIGURES CONTENTS ienoirehronewes mrs, el me Ss A a MOR eee eee oe ee 494 MARGE ean CnIMOCHOOS 4s. sc... 205 sb pars.- anid Ree ae ec eke ee ae 495 Reena IRCT Se i) ee ORIN SS doce uh deeded = + ely SO 497 JN, TR TCR ies Meat: Ate a OE WORMED LL. i504 ult oes oe icacie 6 497 OCHO rte SRM 9 cel. winds s EG aha 4 3 wien «ye ee 499 Dem NIG GAIWaSHOCUS. cece. os ken <2 apie acs ao. el ee nae eee ee eee 499 BEPPATIT COSTS eee PAM hes SA. S bvinls Soke Pa aoes DR oO eee Oe eee 501 Beekivanractiniasechimatarblem of .a0:.'0.. 0 00. + sane She ee ee eee ee 502 TPR SIGE Ga ec se a erie Three ary oe eS ae! 503 DC LOSANC HIER HUIE COPYY ooo acts declan! cot Sloe GA On Pee 508 Ay MELA lpr PERC TID OTM) fe 52. esc cg) sacs! Soace ay est epee 508 42 Oreniizainon ofthe embryol. . . 6s. 02:5 eee eee a ee 509 Ree Titod CrMerOnMaytiONe, i... .0cns os.gcloa pee eC eee eee 509 Op hevianus, oplantilas 016. 02.) agp 2 2, dese ee le I SI 510 Soa Lit MEO LOS IAA Oe SRS 2 yc 6c 5 a ns «a0 oe aS 5 ht Cee ee 511 stro RsaCUiT a EM IDe eee re ee ee os ahs 5 oe a 511 a Niicleariie hav Obie ts. k 2 oon 23 Es see een eee See 512 SMa NER CRI OLU YLT tas MME os oa y's gle oaecd- Shots ee Noes eae a eS ar 513 Sy AS Grrel lo) al Dre ne Ee een arte ae oe: 516 SL SNe CLEVELOPINEHMG, 6. ct. 2 soc iss +'- + oy Wel poe ae eee cee ete ia 517 Ge bhenmoriulaes s43 sooo aes. so ee et eee 518 eee Chine Layer ecto Ge Ws ice: sic) + Bet Sea oes ae ee 529 Bye PerMnlavernn so. seek. ee on he 3 | sk 2 eg eee eee er 531 |o3e 4B Vogy olf: 0100 tse gee” Go ee ORS 8) OR Sree a ean a ee 531 Gay IN GYS aoe TUT Ee ite rca s osm 2) ee a ROMPOIE IISc 5 to cn iota mue es coe As Bi 532 Gil Rhee tiastGeae lees ce esha oe vain. c)d ad cc)s ye Oe ee 534 én Clesvare homologs 2. ie: iio as Te as pak ee cee oe gr 535 BPE CU OSI Si eyo eRe arenas: ict co 6 Seas. ackemiso tas Jae aes 537 SURED LEV ets CR A RE cs os he See ere © 2 ae ne ie 541 TBAT OLGTOy ales 6111) eee tats IPO A SEAT E A Rt So ee a Pe sr oor ks Var e cumenm a ADR acc ene) Aa 542 JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, No. 3 SEPTEMBER, 1911 494 CHARLES W. HARGITT INTRODUCTION In the course of investigations carried on by the writer during several years, certain facts have come to light which seem to have important bearings upon several problems of general ontogeny. Invarious papers phases of these have been suggested, but only incidentally has any attempt been made to discuss their significance or their probable correlations as developmental phenomena. With further investigations still additional facts have been observed, and similar investigations by others have tended to convince me of their importance in a still larger degree. When the honor to codperate in the preparation of this memorial volume was submitted, it seemed that no more appropriate sub- ject came within the scope of the writer’s researches than that involved or implied in the above caption. My introduction to coelenterate morphology began many years ago with the problem of the origin of sex-cells, a subject at that time brilliantly exploited by Weismann, whose “‘Entstehung der Sexualzellen bei den Hydromedusen, Zugleich ein Beitrag zur Kentniss des Baues und der Lebenserscheinungen”’ (’83), has long been a recognized classic in its line. It was ably supple- mented by the hardly less brilliant researches of Metschnikoff (86), ‘“Embryologische Studien an Medusen. Ein Beitrag zur Genealogie der primitiv Organe.”’ The first contribution to the subject by the writer was a very brief and tentative paper before Section F, of the American Asso- ciation for the Advancement.of Science, in 1889. It was adversely commented upon by one who had accepted without question the then prevalent dogma that Hydrozoa were distinguished from all other Cnidaria by the origin of the sex-cells exclusively from the ectoderm. Under this adverse criticism no further utter- ance was made on the subject for several years, though there was no lapse of interest or investigation. In the meantime, an observer here and there had dared to question the conclusiveness of the earlier dogma. Little by lit- tle facts were accumulating which cast further doubts upon the matter, and even compelled the conclusion that Weismann’s SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 495 fundamental contention was inconclusive. Results to be cited from various sources will tend to show that the early attempt to formulate a general theory of embryogeny on the basis of the origin of sex-cells was no less defective and inadequate than it was hasty. For some time past phases of my researches have forced the impression, which has deepened as the investigations have extended, that not a few of the earlier views as to coelenterate ontogeny were seriously defective, or absolutely in error at many points. Certain of these I have taken occasion to point out from time to time, as occasion arose. The purpose of the present paper is two-fold: First, to submit accounts of the development of several species of Hydromedusae which have been under inves- tigation for some time; and secondly, to point out certain errors as to the ontogeny of the groups which, from various reasons, had become associated therewith. MATERIAL AND METHODS 1. Material. The material upon which the results herein described are based (with the exception of that of Pennaria australis, for which I am indebted to Mr. Edgar J. Bradley, of Australia, to whom my thanks are hereby acknowledged) was collected by the writer at various times within the past two years, and chiefly in the immediate vicinity of Woods Hole, though some of that of Clava was collected at Harpswell, Maine. It is a pleasure to express my thanks to the directors of these labora- tories for various courtesies. Attention will be given primarily to two species of Pennaria, and to a single species each of Clava and Hydractinia. Other species will be given attention in relation to the several problems with which the paper has to do. 2. Fixation. In my earlier work great difficulty was encoun- tered in reference to killing and fixing reagents. For killing my first lots of eggs of Pennaria picro-nitric and picro-sulphuric solu- tions, then much in vogue, were used; but to my sorrow these were found to be almost worthless. This was particularly the case with picro-sulphuric. Almost the whole of one summer’s 496 CHARLES W. HARGITT collection was absolutely worthless by reason of the almost exclu- sive use of this reagent. Hermann’s and Flemming’s solutions afforded fairly good fixa- tion, but subsequent staining was very difficult. Perenyi’s solution was absolutely worthless with both Eudendrium and Pennaria material and has since been discarded. ‘The only solu- tion which gave reasonably good and fairly constant results was a strong solution of corrosive sublimate to which had been added 5 per cent of glacial acetic acid. In later work I made use of various solutions of formaldehyde, but with only fair results. A 10 per cent solution in sea-water gave a good general fixation for immediate use. Combination with corrosive did not seem materially to better it. There was found also to be great variability in different species as to this matter. This was particularly apparent in eggs heavily yolk laden as compared with those in which yolk was lacking, or pres- ent in only small quantities. There was also great difference in later differentiating other cytoplasmic elements. For example, in the peculiar proteid granules present in eggs of Clava the first, and only satisfactory reagent was picro-acetic acid (p. 217, Biot Bulk, vol,10706); In 1906 my attention was directed to Bouin’s picro-acetic- formol. It was thoroughly tested upon eggs of Pennaria and Hydractinia, and was found to be far superior to any thus far employed. I have since used Zenker’s fluid with good results in fixation of eggs of several species. It is worth while to empha- size the importance of this feature of fixation, especially as it relates to coelenterate material. I have called attention to this in several previous papers, but it is absolutely imperative in order to warrant trustworthy results that particular attention be given to this matter. 3. Imbedding. In another respect I have learned to my cost the importance of prompt working up of coelenterate material after fixation. Attention was directed to this point in my paper on Pennaria (’04b, p. 455). This precaution has been abun- dantly confirmed by later experience, and I take occasion here to emphasize its importance once more. The value of this has been SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 497 vouched for by Smallwood (’09). My present method in this particular is to imbed the material in paraffine as early as possible after reasonable time has been given for proper hardening and dehydration. ‘This imbedded preservation may apparently be indefinitely prolonged without detriment. But in my experience it is impossible to preserve material of this group for any consid- erable period in alcohol without having it suffer considerable deterioration. This is particularly the case with those cytologic factors of mitosis and allied features so important in modern problems of embryology. 4. Staining. This, like the matter of killing and preserva- tion is one of much importance and of varying grades of diffi- culty, as it related to the problem under review. As in the pre- ceding, I had long since called attention to the extreme difficulty in the staining reactions of coelenterate material. This was most marked, in my experience, in the eggs of Eudendrium and Pen- naria. Others have also found similar difficulties with this phase of technique. G. T. Hargitt (09, p. 163) has recently devoted some attention to the subject, and my own results have been confirmed by those described in his paper. Difficulties experienced in my earlier work in Pennaria, and the later work on Clava, were such as to leave doubt, particularly in relation to the phenomena of maturation, leading me to con- clusions, tentatively adduced, which subsequent work has not ‘confirmed, as shown by G. T. Hargitt (op. cit.) and Smallwood (09), and by facts herein described. OBSERVATIONS A. Pennaria Except for additional facts which have come to light in rela- tion to a species of Pennaria, the development of which has been hitherto unknown, no particular attention would be given to the subject in this connection. Since the issue of my detailed paper on the early development of Pennaria tiarella (’04), repeated observations on the living eggs have confirmed my previous 498 CHARLES W. HARGITT results in every detail, so far as the general facts are concerned. I think it may now be regarded as beyond doubt or cavil that these results, anomalous as they may appear, are absolutely normal and conclusive. Furthermore, when analogous cases to which I had directed attention, and others to be cited in a later con- nection, are taken into consideration, it seems rather strange that “early cleavage differing widely from what we have come to think as typical’ should be given as adequate grounds for a reéx- amination of the case! However, when it is recalled that, with certain investigators, it is more important to reduce vital phenom- ena to a set of formulae, or to corral all development within a common law than to recognize facts as they are, the wonder is less strange than it might at first seem! But additional facts are now available from a most unexpected source, and of such character as to remove any further grounds for question or doubt. Somewhat over a year ago I had the good fortune to receive from Mr. Edgar J. Bradley, of Adelaide, Australia, a collection of hydroids, and along with them several colonies of Pennaria australis Bale, together with the meduse and eggs, which had been taken in tow-nets just at the height of the breeding season. The only feature of regret as to the eggs is that they had not been preserved in other than weak formalin, in order to have made them available for cytological study. But, as it is, they show in surface study the external aspects of developmental behavior to such perfection as to leave little to be desired. Figures 5 to 8 are sketches of a few of these stages, which speak for themselves. As will be seen at a glance, they duplicate in a most striking way similar stages in the development of Pennaria tiarella. If one were to pass under review separate séries of eggs of the two spe- cies, without pains to have critically determined them in advance, it would be practically impossible to say which belonged to the one species and which to the other. There are the same ecto- sarcal features,—papille, bridges, strands, etc., in both; the same bizarre, amoeboid characters, the same anomalous phases of cleavage, ‘every egg a law unto itself’, and finally the same end resultant, a normal embryo. Later phases of development of the Australian species were not present, hence further compari- SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 499 son was impossible, though there is no reason for doubt as to its subsequent similitude and results. A comparison with figures 1 to 4, of Pennaria tiarella, will make this more evident. The fact that these eggs had been taken with the tow-net in the open harbor, and had been preserved shortly after in for- malin, leaves no grounds for serious question as to their normal condition, and confirms completely the results of my own pre- cautions (’04b, p. 474), to guard against possible effects of arti- ficial conditions of the laboratory. These additional facts, together with others of like character which have since come to our knowledge, especially those described by Brooks and Ritten- house (07) must suffice once for all to establish the perfectly natural and normal phenomenaof extremely erratic and indetermi- nate modes of cleavage and consequent organogeny. 1. Cleavage. ‘There is nothing new to add concerning the cleavage features of the eggs of Pennaria tiarella. Concerning this feature in Pennaria australis little attempt will be made to give detailed descriptions. The figures cited will afford all that is necessary as to the general surface aspects. As already stated, there is such essential conformity in every respect to the corre- sponding stages in Pennaria tiarella that there seems small occa- sion to do more than refer to the figures and descriptions of the former paper (’04b). While the fixation does not give material fit for cytologic details, it is fairly good for general comparisons. Eggs carefully stained and cleared show fairly well the general internal conditions, and here, as in the surface features, there is essential likeness to corresponding stages in Pennaria tiarella. 2. Nuclear aspects. Brief reference may be made to a few points under this head. Fragmentation. In several of my earlier papers (’04b, pp. 460-1), attention was called to certain nuclear phenomena of a rather peculiar character. Among these was what seems to be a rather promiscuous dissolution, or disintegration of the nucleus and the dispersion of the greater portion of it into the cytoplasm. To designate this process I used the term fragmentation, long previously employed to designate phases associated with direct nuclear division, and apparently first employed by Van Beneden (Wilson, the Cell, p. 64). 500 CHARLES W. HARGITT In recent papers both Smallwood (’09) and G. T. Hargitt (’09, pp. 197-8), have expressed doubt as to the process in the eggs of Pennaria, the latter stating that ‘“‘no sign of its fragmentation has ever been seen.”’? But in the following sentence he adds, “the supposed disappearance of the germinative vesicle at this time, I believe to be due simply to the usual dissolution of the nuclear membrane and the mingling of karyoplasm with cyto- plasm.” Smallwood expresses similar doubt, saying: If by fragmentation of the nucleus is meant that the entire nucleus disappears and its contents disperse throughout the cytoplasm, then I find no evidence of such a process in these hydroids. But what shall be said of the chromatin changes before maturation in Hydractinia and in Pennaria after maturation, where large quantities of chromatin migrate into the cytoplasm? (Op. cit., p. 228.) It was chiefly in this latter sense that I had used the term, and observations of Coe, Lillie, and others were cited in support of facts found in Pennaria. It may also be admitted that there seemed to be evidences of the entire dispersal of nuclear substance through the cytoplasm and their subsequent reorganization into new nuclei. (06, p. 227, etc.). Further reference to this will be made in another section. Contention for fragmentation was based almost wholly on chromatin behavior. The facts which I urged in this connection were those involving, first, the enormous dissipation of chromatin and its absorption by the cytoplasm, during the phases of matu- ration; and secondly, the achromophilous condition of the chro- matin at a slightly earlier time. These facts have not been disputed. Whether my inferences or interpretations are valid is quite another matter. As to that upon which I have laid most stress, viz., the disintegration and dispersal of a preponderating portion of the chromatin, certainly not less than 90 per cent in many cases, and that it has little or no subsequent function as chromatin, —I am still firmly convinced of its validity and of the vast sig- nificance it involves as to chromosome theory. Concerning the achromophilous condition above referred to, I have little to add to my previous accounts. G. T. Hargitt SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 501 (09, p. 165), whose detailed experiments on differential staining have surpassed my own, was perplexed as to this condition. “At the end of the growth period, the nuclear reticulum shows so little affinity for basic stains that there appears to be, so far as this test shows, no chromatin present in the entire nucleus. I can suggest no explanation for this peculiar condition of the chromatin at this period, but it is normal and characteristic of this stage.”’ I am now convinced that there is here a chief ground for my fail- ure to distinguish certain phases of maturation, and my subse- quent error in the assumption of their possible suppression or modification in certain cases. 3. Amuatosis. Concerning a further problem, that of amitosis, I amin doubt so far as Pennaria is concerned, even as at the time of my previous work. My chief grounds for this view are the facts first cited, and those of the multivesiculate aspects of the nucleus during cell proliferation. And here again Smallwood and G. T. Hargitt (09), and iater Beckwith (09), all confirm my basis of facts. They find in these vesiculate nuclear conditions essentially the same results which are described in my accounts. Without exception their interpretations differ from mine. To them these facts are believed to be obscure phases, chiefly telophases, of mitosis. While I freely admit the force of their contentions, there are still good reasons for maintaining the plausibility of my own views and interpretations. This is especially the case concerning Hudendrium. Here there seemed to be clear and posi- tive examples of amitosis, as shown in fig. 238, a and b, plate 15 (04a). It may not be amiss to state here that all these exam- ples of amitosis occurred in association with those ‘nuclear nests’ so intimately involved in the syncytial phase of development con- cerned in entoderm formation. The conditions are somewhat different in Pennaria, yet sufficiently similar to lead one to anti- cipate similar processes, and these appeared probable in the vesi- culate ‘nuclear nests’ mentioned above. But in no case were there found the specific and positive examples figured in the case of Eudendrium. The same must also be said of Clava. But fur- ther discussion of this will be reserved for a later section. 502 CHARLES W. HARGITT B. Hydractinia echinata Flem. During the summer of 1907 I was fortunate in securing large numbers of this hydroid in the height of its breeding season, and took occasion to study the development and life history of the species. Some account of the life history has already been given (08) which obviates any call for emphasis here on this point. The early development was studied from living material during two summers and at the same time material was carefully pre- served for cytological study. This latter was turned over to my colleague, Dr. Smallwood, and his results have already appeared (09). It only remains for me to submit such accounts of my observations as seem important in order to afford a more or less complete and connected description of phases of development, especially when correlated with Smallwood’s account referred to above. There are numerous points of difference between my observa- tions and those of Bunting (’94), some of which may be due to the fact that her studies were restricted to material obtained from the small colonies living upon shells occupied by hermit crabs, while my material was derived chiefly from colonies of enormous size, obtained from piles of docks or similar habitat, but with compari- son from the former sorts. As pointed out in the paper referred to above (’08, p. 98), there is no adequate reason for regarding these hydroids as other than a single species, hence any differ- ences to be cited must be incidental rather than fundamental. One of the first points of difference to be noted is concerning the time at which the liberation of sexual products takes place. According to Bunting this is between the hours of 9:30 and 10:30 p.M. That it occurs during the night I have repeatedly demon- strated. Further, that it may occur in certain cases about the time stated by Miss Bunting, I have also found true. But that it may also occur at a much later hour, and also at varying hours, I have also found to be the case. Some of the best cleavage series obtained, especially for the very early stages, were in the mornings from seven to nine o’clock. That is to say, the eggs had been deposited some time after midnight, and at the hours SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 503 named were in early stages (two- to eight-cell) of cleavage. This would seem strongly to indicate their deposition at perhaps five or six o’clock in the morning or thereabout, as recorded in my notes of July 11th and 12th. In other cases development had reached the morula stage at nine a. m., which would lead to the conclusion that liberation of sexual products had occurred about midnight. While it is true that in many hydroids the liberation of eggs and sperm occurs at a fairly constant time, yet there are others in which this is not the case, and in which such ripen- ing and discharge is a more or less continuous process during the breeding period. _ The character of the egg is much like that of Pennaria, though it is much smaller. Both are alike in general texture of proto- plasm, contain yolk, and similar inclusions. There is present a pigment similar to that in the eggs of Pennaria, though less marked in color. Like those of the latter, the eggs are devoid of a defi- nite membrane. They are rather heavy and sink promptly when set free. By reason of this it was practicable to suspend colonies in shallow vessels within wire baskets under docks in freely cir- culating water and with little liability of their being lost. This was a matter of some importance; for, despite the best precau- tions, these hydroids soon deteriorate in vitality under the arti- ficial conditions of the laboratory, while by suspending them in open waters about the docks they thrive almost as if in the natural habitat. 1. Cleavage. So far as I am aware the only definite work on cleavage of Hydractinia is that of Bunting (94). In this paper we have a characteristically symmetrical portrayal of the process. In general surface aspects it 1s represented as almost mathemat- ical in its regularity and symmetry. That the earlier cleavage phases in perhaps a majority of the eges conform to this in greater or less degree is probably true. But that it represents with any degree of accuracy the average behavior of this phenomenon as a whole none who had carefully followed it could for a moment admit. It has been difficult to conceive how, except by a selective process, any such account could have been formulated. It is quite easy to see that by directing 504 CHARLES W. HARGITT attention only to eggs which exhibited the regulation aspects of cleavage, and disregarding, as abnormal, those of differing aspects, Just such an account might easily have been made up; and this in all probability may have been the method followed. It is not strange that under prevailing conceptions as to for- mulated ‘laws of cleavage’ this method might naturally have been adopted. In the case of Pennaria the present writer delib- erately disregarded an entire batch of eggs which were so erratic in behavior as to suggest the probability of pathological condi- tions. But, by whatever method one may explain the matter, certain it is that there is a measure of irregularity in a large pro- portion of the eggs of Hydractinia, especially after the third or fourth cleavage furrows, which at once takes them out of the usual category of geometrical order or symmetry and puts them, if not in the Pennaria class of chaotic irregularity, at least consigns them to the category of the indeterminate and unsymmetrical. However, it is not my purpose, in thus discrediting an account which gives so inadequate and misleading an impression, to goto a similar extreme in the other direction and convey the impression of predominantly erratic cleavage. On the contrary, let it be noted that in perhaps a majority of the eggs of Hydractinia echi- nata the cleavage, while seldom exhibiting an approach to geo- metric order or symmetry, is yet more or less regular and orderly. In such cases cleavage begins, as usual, at the animal pole, cut- ting vertically downward, and generally divides the egg into sym- metrical halves, which adhere to each other by a narrow band, or connective of cytoplasm at the lower pole. The second cleavage likewise may begin at the upper pole and at right angles to the previous division, or may begin at the center and work outward, thus dividing each half into symmetrical fourths, giving a fairly tvpical four-cell stage. The third cleavage, which is usually equa- torial, often begins at the center and extends toward the periph- ery, a process more or less common in eggs of hydroids. The subsequent phases may continue more or less orderly as in earlier stages, but often grow increasingly irregular and independ- ent, though resulting in a symmetrical embryo. On the other hand, figs. 14 to 22, which are camera sketches of living eggs, SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 505 show how strikingly irregular and unsymmetrical cleavage may be in eggs of a given lot, developing under identical conditions. But in these cases the first two of three cleavage furrows are more or less symmetrical. In not a few, however, cleavage is dis- tinctly erratic from the first, the first furrow dividing the egg into very unequal portions. In such cases the irregularity be- comes usually increasingly more so as cleavage goes forward. A very interesting case is that shown in figs. 9 to 138, which occurred at irregular intervals within a period of about forty minutes of constant observation during which the sketches were made. The egg was kept under observation for several hours, or till the morula was apparently completely formed. Fig. 9 shows what may be regarded as a four-cell stage, the central portion comprising the main body of the cell, while at opposite poles are three other blastomeres, in each of which the nuclei were distinctly visible. In fig. 10 the small blastomere at the upper pole has divided, so that now we have a five-cell stage. It remained in this condition about fifteen*minutes, when a most curious thing happened, the small blastomeres, x and y,being the factors of most interest. At first the blastomere y became detached from its connection with the cell body as shown in the figure, and later the other blastomere x did the same thing, both thus becoming absolutely free, in which condition they contin- ued about thirty minutes. At the end of this time they resumed division and went forward to complete segmentation and formed what seemed to be a perfect, though very small morula, shown in fig. 11, b. The other portion exhibited something of the same tendency. For example, the small blastomere z cut itself free as had y, but it later drew back and, fusing with the cell body, continued as an integral part of the egg in its later development. Figs. 12 and 13 show the general aspects of this portion, which went forward normally and became a perfect morula and later gave origin to a normal planula. The small segment exhibited the same aspects, but later in the day began to show signs of degenerative tendency and finally disintegrated entirely without assuming the larval condition. ‘This can hardly be ascribed to its minute size, for other embryos, which were otherwise appar- ently similar in every way, suffered the same fate. 506 CHARLES W. HARGITT Among the anomalous aspects of cleavage which I have en- countered in the development of these and other hydroid eggs not the least singular or significant is the occurrence, now and then, of what may be designated as blastomeric autotomy. That is to say, occasionally one finds during the earlier stages of cleav- age, most commonly at the first, the complete separation of the primary blastomeres, which continue to develop as independent eggs, and from which independent embryos arise, giving origin to two polyps. I have called attention to something of this in Pennaria. The same thing has been found in at least two cases in Hydractinia. In one case actually followed from beginning to end the sequence of events may be briefly described. At the first cleavage of an egg which was in a marked degree unequal, the two blastomeres separated entirely, each part developing quite apart, and in a perfectly independent fashion. One of these seg- mented in a fairly regular and symmetrical fashion, while the other portion was markedly irregular from the first. It should be ob- served that the rate of cleavage in the former was much slower than in the latter, which exhibited a marked tendency toward amoeboid aspects as shown in the figures already cited. It seems perfectly clear, therefore, that we have in these aspects of development a perfectly normal, and not particularly rare mode of segmentation, involving the origin of two, and probably even three or more embryos from a single egg, in a perfectly natural and spontaneous way. Among these anomalous aspects, which were numerous as well as various, those shown in text figs. 4, B and C will be interesting. In this case the first cleavage was about normal, beginning at the animal pole and extending downward to the lower, where the blastomeres remained attached by the connective shown in fig. A for some time. The second cleavage was the not unusual type shown in fig. B where it was directed centrifugally and in a hori- zontal instead of a vertical plane; and as it continued the connec- tive was resorbed, leaving the two blastomeres quite free for a time during which they moved into the position shown in the figure, when the vegetal blastomere of the one side came into contact with the animal blastomere of the opposite part, in which posi- + SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 507 tion they fused and remained for some time. Fig. C shows the condition when the four-cell stage -had been established. As will be seen, the blastomeres had rotated until they became, as it were, fitted into close contact with each other, and the devel- opment of another connective bound them in that relation for some time. It may be noted that later development went for- _ ward with average regularity. 2. Kctosarcal features. In my paper on Pennaria (’04b, p. 469) attention was directed to certain very conspicuous aspects which were designated as ‘ectosareal phenomena,’ and which comprised various more or less superficial excrescences, such as papillae, films or bridge-like connectives between blastomeres, 508 CHARLES W. HARGITT etc. They were described in some detail and various suggestions and comparisons submitted as to their significance. In the eggs of Hydractinia very similar structures were encoun- tered, though less conspicuous and less constant than in Pennaria. Certain of these are shown in figs. 14 to 22. As to their signifi- cance or function I have nothing new to offer beyond that pre- viously suggested. Their more obvious function would seem the two-fold one of connecting adjacent blastomeres, and afford- ing codrdinating bonds for the entire egg during development. These suggestions could hardly apply to the papillose structures of the surface, and their presence must be regarded as problemat- ical. 3. The early embryo, morula. With the progress of cleavage toward completion the irregularities of surface, due to ectosarcal structures above mentioned and erratic cleavage, which were so conspicuous a feature, gradually disappear and the embryo tends to become more or less typically spherical and blastula-like. But in comparatively few Hydrozoa does a typical blastula occur. In my earlier accounts of the development of Eudendrium and Pennaria attention was directed to the presence of a true morula as the embryonic stage resulting from cleavage, and also to the entire absence of a stage comparable to a coeloblastula. This is likewise the condition to be found in Hydractinia and Clava. Rittenhouse (’07) has shown the same to be the case in Turri- topsis nutricula. It will be shown in a later connection that this is the dominant type of cleavage embryo throughout the entire phylum. At no time is there to be found in either Hydractinia or Clava a distinctive or permanent cleavage cavity, though there may often be found certain intercellular spaces which are desig- nated as such, but the correctness of which may be seriously challenged. This, again, will be considered in more detail in a later section. For some time following the apparent completion of cleavage and the establishment of the morula there seems to be a period of quiescence. This is such, however, only in appearance; for in reality there exists a condition of active cell proliferation, as may easily be demonstrated by means of sections of embryos at this time. This has been especially demonstrated and emphasized SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 509 in the cases of Eudendrium and Pennaria, but is no less true in the present instances. 4. Organization of the embryo. This has usually been assumed to consist fundamentally in the formation of the tissues, ectoderm and entoderm. In part this assumption is correct, but only in part. For example, the morula may remain for some time entirely devoid of these tissues in any definitive sense, and even in the . later larval stage the entoderm may not arise till.a late period. As has long been known, among the first evidences of organiza- tion is that associated with the formation of the ectoderm. Indeed, this is only what might naturally be expected as one comes to consider the primary function of such a tissue, or its analogue, throughout the animal kingdom. The embryo, no less than the adult organism, requires superficial protection against external conditions. And from protozoon to mammal provis- ion is made to this end by ectosare and epidermis, and in thé embryo by the ectoderm, which may be regarded as the primary tissue of the embryo. 5. Entoderm formation. But up to this time there is no def- inite differentiation of entoderm. It is true, that one will find what has long been designated as entoderm, namely, an interior mass of embryonic matter more or less cellular, but without differentiation of any sort. By some students of hydroid devel- opment this condition has been described as the ‘end of entoderm formation’ (Ende der Entodermbildung). In reality one may better designate it as the beginning of entoderm formation, though even this might be open to question. What we have at this time is simply an interior embryonic mass, often a syncy- tium, within the enclosing ectoderm, if this be yet differentiated ; and of this mass but a very small proportion ever participates directly in entoderm formation. For the sake of clearness it seems desirable formally to recognize this condition by giving to it such name as may express the fact, and at present no better term seems available than ‘pro-entoderm.’ This only implies the existence at this time of material, a primordium, out of which in varying ways will be developed the definitive entoderm of the larva. JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, No. 3 510 CHARLES W. HARGITT 6. The larva, planula. The life history of the morula is com- paratively brief, perhaps from six to eight or ten hours, the period varying considerably. During this time the definitive ectoderm has been established, cilia developed and the free-swim- ming larva, the planula, begins its career. Concerning the structure of this organism there is no occasion for special details. It differs little if at all from that characteristic of others whose structure has: been repeatedly portrayed, and is too well known to need further account. In the present instance, as in those of numerous others, at the time of the assumption of this condi- tion the larva is still a solid mass, with little organization beyond the above mentioned ectedermal differentiation. A definitive entoderm may not become established till relatively late in larval life, as I have repeatedly pointed out in other cases, and only after a process of physiological differentiation, as shown in a later section. The first evidence of a coelenteron appears as a slit-like cavity in the larval axis, which later enlarges as the reduc- tion and absorptionof the pro-entodermic mass proceeds. Finally, by such graduated method does the entoderm become estab- lished. At no time is there a mouth or other means of communi- cation with the outside during phases of embryonic or larval his- tory. Planulae of Hydractinia have been frequently reared under artificial conditions, and readily transform into the final, or polyp state. Soon after the larva attaches itself the mouth is established by a terminal opening which arises by a rupture and rearrange- ment of the adjacent cells. Tentacles arise in the usual manner, first three in number, followed shortly by three others at inter- mediate points, and slightly below the first series. At the base of the polyp there arise root-like stolons, two or more in number, which mark the origin of the hydrorhizal network characteris- tic of the species. C. Clava leptostyla Ag. In connection with the work on Hydractinia I have taken occa- sion to re-examine the material upon which was based the work embodied in my previous paper on Clava (06), and have also care- fully studied sections of new material which had been fixed in SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY Sit Bouin’s picro-formol, and in Zenker’s solution, and carefully stained by several of the most recent methods. So far as it relates to the organization of the egg or its cleavage no occasion has been found for modifying in any essential the earlier conclu- sions. These I believe to be confirmed in every detail, and lead me to reaffirm the former account. Concerning some few points in relation to the phenomena of maturation and nuclear behavior, including phases of germ-layer formation not touched upon in the previous paper, it is necessary to reconsider and add to the former results. 1. Maturation. Concerning the phenomena associated with maturation my observations will be very brief. In the former paper the general facts were explicitly stated and no occasion has been found to call for essential modification. Both in living eggs and in sections of stained material polar bodies were found and described. In connection with earlier accounts of this feature in other eggs of hydroids one may find such expressions as “‘ About this time the nucleus becomes indistinct and finally disappears;”’ the nucleus ‘‘fades from view when the ovum is deposited.” These accounts relate almost wholly to observations upon living eggs, and I have repeatedly verified them both in the living, and in sections of fixed eggs. While in themselves such accounts may seem to have little of distinctive value, in a morphologic sense, yet, as expressive of physiological conditions they seem to me to have very large significance. In the first place, these observa- tions described what was actually seen and its fidelity to fact can not be questioned. In the next place, cytological study of fixed material confirms just these accounts. As eggs grow toward maturity the germinal vesicle is large and conspicuous. But as they approach the phase of metabolism involved in maturation a marked change occurs, as is well known. The chromatin network, which has been conspicuous, gradually disappears, and in many cases loses absolutely its affinity for stains. With dissolution of the nuclear membrane, a still further change occurs, which is exactly what these accounts describe, namely, the min- gling and fusion of nucleus and cytoplasm to such a degree that it is often difficult to differentiate them by any of the usual methods. By bs CHARLES W. HARGITT Itis just at this time that the maturation phenomena are in proc- ess of development. In my previous account some doubt was expressed as to the presence of mitosis. Critical study of fresh material has enabled me definitely to confirm the facts of matu- ration mitoses attested by Smallwood (’09) in Hydractinia, and Beckwith (’09), in Clava. A critical review of my earlier material only went to confirm the previous doubt; all of which but tends to resolve the case to one of technique. In the newer material both maturation mitoses were distinguishable without serious difficulty. 2. Nuclear behavior. In addition to the foregoing discussion some further reference to points of nuclear behavior seems desir- able. In several of my earlier accounts attention was directed to the migration of the nucleus to the distal periphery of the egg as it approached maturity. Asis well known, many earlier stu- dents of nuclear physiology have sought to correlate directly the nucleus with nutritive’ functions during the growth period, and its location has been said to conform to this conception, and nu- merous citations made to facts recorded in phyla above protozoa. So far as the Hydrozoa are concerned I am not able to confirm this view. In the growing oocyte of Clava the germinal vesicle is rarely if ever directly contiguous to the nutritive surface of the spadix, and in the period of later growth invariably migrates to the distal surface and comes to lie in immediate contact with the outer wall of the gonophore. While I have not made any attempt at this time to take up the problem for critical inquiry and investigation, yet my general observations tend to render extremely doubtful the view above suggested, at any rate in any very explicit and causal sense. That the nucleus may function in this matter in a general way as in many other vital functions may be probable, yet that its primary or fundamental and direct part in the oocyte has to do with nutritive more than other func- tions of cell life seems more than doubtful. It may easily be shown that processes of nutrition, along with other phases of metabolism, are functions of the entire cell working as a whole. In the earlier paper attention was directed to the phenomena of metabolism as related to the origin and development of the pig- SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY ibe ment granules of the egg, and it was pointed out that they appeared first in the region of the nucleus, and from this extended as a peripheral zone over the entire egg, the process continuing up to, and even beyond, the phenomena of maturation, which would seem clearly to imply that at most the nucleus was con- cerned only in the origin of this process, since it early became involved in other functions of very different character. 8. The chromatin. In addition to what has been said in this connection as relates to Pennaria and Hydractinia a few facts may be mentioned as directly bearing on the matter of nuclear fragmentation. In figs. 31 and 32 are shown phases of nu- clear behavior associated with maturation. Fig. 31 is a careful drawing of a condition not at all unusual in these eggs. Here one finds undoubted evidences of chromatin fragmentation and dispersal prior to the dissolution of the nuclear membrane. As will be noted, there is as yet no definite disintegration of the nucleolus, which is quite intact, though with a large vacuole. Chromatin granules are variously distributed through the nuclear network, chiefly at nodal points as shown. But the same sort of granules are to be seen just outside the nucleus, and are indis- tinguishable from those shown in the next figure, in which the nucleus is in process of disintegration, the membrane being entirely dissolved, and the network also surely disappearing. Here also the nucleolus is about to collapse, being flattened on one side, as if ready to go to pieces. Numerous cases of this sort occur in these eggs and seem to confirm what has been said above, that a degree of fragmentation both of nucleus and chro- matin is apparently a constant feature. In a few cases I have found these features actively associated with maturation, the first polar body having been already formed. From this it will be noted that fragmentation of the nucleolus may not occur until that of the nucleus is well under way, as shown in the figures already cited. I have called attention to the problem of nuclear fragmenta- tion in several of my earlier papers, (04a, ’04b, ’06,), and in a paper now in press on the development of Cyanea (’10), attention is directed to very similar conditions associated with maturation. 514 CHARLES W. HARGITT It is not a new problem; many investigators having directed attention to the matter. Strangely, however, there has been no very serious attempt to explain its probable significance, fur- ther than to suggest, as Wilson had done long ago (’00), its pos- sible relation to the extremely active metabolism involved during the growth period of the egg. Unfortunately, there seem to be serious difficulties involved in such an interpretation ; for example, the fact that in many ova growth seems to be almost nil. Fur- thermore, it is not certain that just this type of fragmentation occurs in all eggs just at this period. But whatever may be its significance certain it is that in large numbers of organisms there seems to occur at this time this very interesting fact, that a largely preponderating proportion of chromatin is lost, or at least takes no part in the formation of the chromosomes, and so is a negative factor so far as relates to chromosome function or theory. The bearing of this on the question of chromosome individuality is not without great interest and importance; but no attempt can be made to discuss the problem here. It may be suggested, how- ever, that defenders of the extreme views of chromosome indi- viduality in its morphological sense,—and only in such sense has it any essential significance,—are confronted with a problem, the complexity of which is beyond estimate, and the difficulty of which is hardly less so. Let him who finds difficult the intricacies of ‘germ-plasm’ hypothesis beware in essaying to unravel the no less intricate mystery, or miracle, of preserving individuality in the metabolic maze through which chromatin must. pass in every cytogenic cycle! In the previous paper (op. cit.’00, , p. 227), attention was direc- ted to the very anomalous aspects of nuclei during early cleavage, features of which were shown in several sketches. Certain of these presented rather strong indications of amitosis, though the condition of the chromatin was such as greatly to obscure the finer details of nuclear structure, and the suggestion was made that ‘‘certain phases of the mitotic mechanism may be disguised or actually lacking.’”’ As shown above, mitosis has been demon- strated during maturation, yet something of the original doubt remains as to mitosis during early cleavage, the newer material SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 515 affording no appreciable advantage over that used in the former instance. At this time the chromatin appears only in the form of extremely irregular, flocculent patches, scattered here and there through the cytoplasmic cell-like aggregates. The same elongated, clavicular, or dumb-bell shaped nuclei previously described are found in the newer material treated by latest methods. Under ordinary treatment the chromatin stainsso intensely as seriously to obscure details of structure. Only by prolonged destaining and clearing, and by more delicate staining with picro-hematoxylin has it been possible to reduce somewhat the flocculent aspects. When this is done one may distinguish a granular chromatin con- stitution, but the chromosomes have defied all attempts to render them distinctive either inform orinnumber. This relates to con- ditions in early cleavage, as was pointed out in the previous paper, aspects of mitosis become fairly clear in later cleavage. Beckwith describes mitoses in early cleavage but makes no reference to the anomalous conditions here described. With all the pains taken in preparation of my material it must be allowed that these conditions are not artifacts, but facts enti- tled to the same consideration as others of similar treatment. It must be admitted however, that, even at best, our latest refine- ments as to staining technique must be accepted as only tenta- tively trustworthy. In other words, it becomes more evident every day that in protoplasmic and nuclear metabolism there are such incessant and intricate variations of chemical conditions that one may not assert that a given stain or fixing agent affords any certain test of a given state at a given time. On the contrary, it will not be denied that a given stain may act in one manner on one cell and on another very differently; or indeed, that it may in another case fail utterly to yield any results whatsoever in differentiation. Under the aspects of chromatin organization, or perhaps better, lack of organization, as here portrayed, it has not been possible to obtain any definite information as to the number or character of the chromosomes. But it may be said, as before mentioned, that in Clava, as in Pennaria and Hydraec- tinia, there is an enormous fragmentation and dispersal of chro- matin at the time of maturation, most of which must be utterly 516 CHARLES W. HARGITT lost as chromatin, unless some may be recovered during phases of cleavage, as suggested in the previous paper. Some further reference to this feature will be made in a later section of this paper, in connection with the discussion of theoretical problems involved in the general subject. Incidentally it may be worthy of mention that in at least one case two germinal vesicles have been demonstrated in a given egg. So far as the writer is aware this is a rather rare occurrence, though probably not more so than that of hermaphrodite gono- phores, as described in the previous paper (p. 211). Fig. 23 is a careful camera sketch of these nuclei. There was not the slight- est evidence to show that there might have been a fusion of two oocytes in this case, as sometimes happens in other hydroids, the egg being only of average size. 4. Nucleolar behavior. In the previous paper (p. 221), atten- tion was directed to some aspects of nucleolar changes associated with maturation. Among these that of vacuolation was partic- ularly mentioned, as was also that of the migration of the nucleolus from the nucleus into the cytoplasm. The latter feature is rather unusual, and is not probably of any large significance. More important is the fragmentation which is a rather common fea- ture. Prior to maturation the nucleolus exhibits various phases of vacuolation. In some cases several vacuoles of slightly differ- ing sizes appear, some of which may later fuse into a larger vacuole. In other cases one finds a single large vacuole which finally occu- pies almost the whole of the nucleolus, at which time it may hap- pen that the body collapses upon itself, or gradually goes to pieces, i.e., fragments. In other cases there may be in a given nucleus two nucleoli, one highly vacuolated and evidently degenerating, the other having all the appearance of a new organ, without signs of vacuoles.1 These changes usually occur while the nucleus is 1 In this case the larger, vacuolated nucleus exhibited a most interesting phase of apparent fragmentation. Almost the whole organ comprised a single large vacuole, and adhering to the outer surface were numerous deeply staining spherical granules borne upon delicate pedicels, the whole resembling a sort of pin-cushion aspect. Just what significance such a condition may have in relation to nucle- olar metamorphosis, or its bearing on the problem of chromosome formation, as ’ SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY De yet intact; and in some cases, at any rate, the entire fragmenta- tion, or dissolution of the nucleolus may occur before the nuclear membrane disappears. In other cases nucleolar dissolution and disappearance take place coincident with the nuclear dissolution and maturation, as stated in a preceding section. In some in- stances the nucleolar degeneration seems to involve a gradual proc- ess of shrinkage, probably by solution or absorption by the nucleo- plasm. It has been no part of my present purpose to study the matter of nucleolar genesis, or the possible relation of nucleolar metabolism to the genesis and differentiation of chromosomes. An interesting and varied literature on this subject has grown up with recent times, some of which seems to have a profound significance in relation to chromosome theory. But to enter upon this phase would involve time and details far beyond the scope of the present paper. 5. Later development. It is not the purpose to enter into any considerable details as to later aspects of development save as they are found to be more or less exceptional as compared with other species concerned. As to cleavage no occasion has been found to modify the account already given in the former paper (pp. 223 to 227). There is much here in common with that known in Tubularia, Hydractinia and Pennaria. While in a certain proportion of the eggs cleavage is more or less regular; on the other hand, in a large proportion, irregularity and lack of order or symmetry is the rule. This is particularly the case with those ova which are flattened laterally against the sides of the spadix of the gonophore. In the case of ova terminally placed in the gonophore the shape is more nearly spherical, and in such cases the tendency is toward regularity. This is what one might naturally expect; yet there are notable exceptions, and one will do well to remember the extremely erratic cleavage of such ova suggested in a following sentence, I am not prepared to suggest. The nucleus of this egg was in rather typical resting condition, and its chromatin of the usual granular spireme aspect. As stated in another connection, different modes of fixation and staining have appreciably different effects on the egg cytoplasm and nucleoplasm, so that much more elaborate observations would be necessary ere one might venture any very positive opinions on so complex a problem. 518 CHARLES W. HARGITT as those of Pennaria, Hydractinia and Turritopsis, where the freedom of the egg from all influence of gonophore walls, etc., ought to afford perfect conditions as to regularity of cleavage. It may not be improbable that external conditions of pressure, etc., have an appreciable influence on cleavage, but such facts as those just cited clearly indicate that there are other factors concerned which are probably more potent than the merely phys- ical ones of pressure, gravity, ete. 6. The morula. As in Hydractinia and Pennaria, the early embryo in Clava is a morula. Cleavage results in a solid mass of cells, with only incidentally a sign here and there of an inter- cellular space, and in only rare instances anything comparable with a segmentation cavity. Indeed, one might venture to aver that such cavity is conspicuously absent throughout the ontogeny of this hydroid. As already pointed out, this is not peculiar, but rather the general fact in hydroid development. Something further will be said on this point in a later connection. There is nothing in the morula stage in Clava which differs appreciably from that of the other species already referred to. As the embryo reaches the morula condition it assumes the usual spherical shape, whatever may have been the shape of the egg during cleavage or growth. Evidently the walls of the gonophore do not afford any very serious barrier to this change, for one finds all condi- tions of shape from the flattened lateral pocket of the growing oocyte to the spherical terminal capsule, and the oval capsule of the planula, all derivable in turn from the first as the embryo grows and finally emerges as a pear-shaped planula. 7. The germ layers. What has been said on this subject in connection with Hydractinia may be affirmed of Clava. Granted the assumption of a morula as the primitive embryo, andthere is no occasion for question or discussion concerning the segmen- tation cavity, delamination, multipolar immigration, etc. Abso- lutely nothing of these is involved in the case under consideration. At the time of the completion of cleavage,—indeed before this, when the morular aspect first begins to take shape,—we have only a spherical cell mass, with syncytial tendencies, and as yet without sign of tissue differentiation. In fig. 29 is shown such SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 519 an early morula-like embryo. In this is shown an oval embryo without definitive ectoderm, or sign of entoderm. This condi- tion persists for some time, the only changes distinguishable being that of cell proliferation, or perhaps more precisely, nuclear proliferation; for in most cases it is not possible to distinguish the presence of cell boundaries of any definitive sort. But a most remarkable thing becomes apparent under careful staining, —namely, the fact that the internal mass shows a differential staining reaction, represented by the shaded interior. This I take to be indicative of an important physiological change, namely, an incipient entodermal differentiation directly related to the primary purpose of entoderm development, that of diges- tion. While the results do not as yet warrant a dogmatic pro- nouncement on this matter, they do tend to confirm a view I have already proposed (cf. Science, March 25, 1910). It has gen- erally been assumed that the ectoderm is the primary germ layer, and morphologically this is undoubtedly true. But if the suggestion just made be confirmed by later experiments one will have to aver that, physiologically speaking, the entodermal function is the first to express itself. Further consideration of this point will be deferred to a later section. a. Eetoderm. The development of this tissue is a graduated process. With the establishment of a surface layer of cells of more or less similar character one is not warranted in designating it as a definitive ectoderm. For, as Rittenhouse has ‘pointed out (07, p: 453): Kven those cells which are atthe surface at the completion of segmenta- tion cannot be regarded as primitive ectoderm, for in the breaking down of the cell boundaries, the formation of the syncytium, and the recast- ing of the cells, it is quite impossible to say what changes of proto- plasm may take place. Furthermore, it must not be overlooked that, with a primary layer of cells established, there are yet other ectodermal elements to be taken into account, such as interstitial cells, cilia, nettling cells, ete. Only with the formation of the supporting lamella ean it be claimed that the definitive ectoderm is really established. 520 CHARLES W. HARGITT b. Entoderm. As in the case of the ectoderm, what has been said as to entoderm formation in Hydractinia will apply for the most part to Clava. What has been said above in ref- ’ erence to the morula as the primordial embryo applies in this connection. Entoderm formation is a graduated process, and in its morphology a much slower process than that of the ectoderm. In its physiological genesis it may be said to outrun the ectoderm; for its functions begin almost immediately after the completion of cleavage. As was pointed out in an earlier section, the inter- nal cell-mass included within the primordial ectoderm is not in any sense a tissue, but rather a primordium,—pro-entoderm. For some time following the nuclear proliferation of this mass continues. But at the same time another, and extremely differ- ent process is under way, namely, that of cellular and nuclear disintegration and destruction. Out of this interior mass rela- tively few cells will survive to constitute the definitive entoderm of the polyp. What is taking place is in reality a struggle among these cells for nutrition, reminding one of the ingenious theory of Roux (81), ‘Der Kampf der Theile im Organismus,’ though, so far as I am aware,.this author never applied his theory in this direction. It is not until after the planula has become free that a definitive entoderm is finally established; indeed, this does not become established until near the metamorphosis of the planula into a polyp, though one may trace stages in the process much earlier.” What really happens is that the same sort of vicarious process of nutrition occurs as that by which, inmany hydroids, the oocyte grows; that is, the devouring of sister cells or primor- dial ova; in the later stage occurs the similar process of digesting the pro-entoderm cells and making their substance available as nutrition to the embryo. As is well known, these pro-entoderm cells are richly laden with yolk granules, as were also originally the cells of the ectoderm. But long after the ectoderm has ex- hausted this primitive supply the entoderm is reducing its sur- plus cell mass for similar ends. With the gradual advance of this process the coelenteron of the larva grows larger, appearing in sections as an axial slit of irregular outline, and later assuming a more regular aspect and SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 521 becoming more capacious. As the entoderm cells become defi- nitely organized and adjusted in contact with the supporting lamella the entoderm may be said to be established as a tissue. But this does not become complete until a large proportion of the pro- entoderm mass has been reduced and appropriated by the embryo. There yet remains masses of cells in the cavity along with yolk fragments and other debris variously distributed. Earlier accounts of the differentiation of the entoderm differ in several particulars from that here given. In the first place, it has been generally assumed that the entoderm is early estab- lished, an error which I have taken occasion in several accounts to correct. In the next place, the exact mode of its differentiation has not been very critically studied, nor the fate of those parts of the pro-entoderm not directly concerned in entoderm forma- tion. For example, Korschelt and Heider, following the older accounts, have asserted that following the establishment of the entoderm the remaining cell-mass undergoes fatty degeneration, serving in part as food matter, with a residual mass of debris, the fate of which is not formally stated. I have not found in my preparations any evidence of such fatty degeneration, though, as stated above, I have found direct evidence of the operation of digestive ferments. According to Wilson (’83) something akin to amoeboid engulfment of these cells and their intracellular digestion is tentatively suggested: 6 These appearances suggest, though they do not prove, that the yolk granules and spheroids pass bodily into the cells. I have never seen them in the act of passing into the cells, but the technical difficulties are great, and the other considerations seem sufficient weight to warrant the provisional acceptance of the view advanced. That something of such amoeboid engulfment may occur is not altogether improbable; though I have found slight evidence of it. We know that in the growth of the oocyte in certain spe- cies just such a process does take place, and its occurrence in the slightly later history of the embryo would be what might naturally be expected. Indeed, I have, in an earlier part of this paper, suggested such a process in the behavior of the cells of the pro- 522 CHARLES W. HARGITT entoderm during differentiation. But associated with the proc- ess there are strong evidences of the action of digestive ferments which are set free by these cells in which this process is first set up and carried forward. This likewise takes place in the case of the oocyte during growth, as has been shown by many recent observers. The suggestion of Metschnikoff long ago, that intra- cellular digestion forms the dominant, if not the only digestive process in coelenterates, is not borne out by recent investigations. For example, it is well known that medusae, actinians, etc., capture highly organized prey, such as crustacea, fish, etc., and digest it quite after the fashion of the higher Metazoa. The same thing is easily demonstrated in hydroids, in which small organisms, like worms, copepods, etc., form an important food supply. Gland cells are well known in the entoderm of Hydro- zoa and are evidently associated with digestive functions. Hence it seems more than probable that enzyme digestion is no less a feature in this than in other animal groups; and that it more than any other, is the mode involved in the reduction of this inner cell mass of the planula is almost certain. This in no wise contravenes the fact of the presence of yolk granules in the ento- derm cells, for they were original constituents of these cells, just as in the case of the primordial ectoderm cells. Whether such yolk granules are ever taken in entire by the larval entoderm may be open to doubt, at least till better sustained by direct evidence than at present. So far as I am aware, the general conception herein outlined as to the physiological processes involved in this phase of larval development has not been hitherto proposed. Of its fundamen- tal validity there seems no serious objection and much direct evidence. In brief, it involves these facts: First, that of the pro-entoderm mass of cells relatively few go to constitute the defin- itive entoderm of the planula. In the second place, the primary process involved in the necessary differentiation must be one of selection. So far as one can distinguish these pro-entoderm cells are alike in form and potency. The primary demand in embry- ogeny is growth, which involves nutritive material in some form. And the only source of such is that associated with these cells SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY Rae as yolk granules, which can only become available by the dis- solution of the cells which contain them. Supposing that origin- ally it was equally distributed, it could only remain so by the fur- ther assumption that cell division was likewise equal and contin- uous throughout. This we know is seldom the case, being in general inversely as the amount of yolk varies. Hence those cells whose growth and metabolism became more rapid would first exhaust their own deutoplasm and demand supplies from outside. And here must originate the struggle among cells _ which has been emphasized above. Assuming the substantial truth of the conception we must face the implication that the older views as to the ontogenic and phylogenic significance of the germ layers are discredited by these further facts, as they have also been in theory. I be- lieve we may, therefore, conclude that fundamentally the phe- nomena involved in germ-layer formation are primarily physio- logical processes, and relate to protective, motor, and nutritive ends; and that only secondarily, if at all, can they be supposed to have any significance in ontogeny or phylogeny. REVIEW AND DISCUSSION As stated in an early section of this paper one of the purposes in view was to review certain phases of current and earlier theory and doctrine concerning problems of ontogeny, in the light of recent knowledge, and to seek to point out and correct such errors as may easily come within the scope of pertinent discussion. This seems to the writer particularly important and desirable just at this time of virile criticism and readjustment. For some time the conviction has grown that not a few of the earlier views and theories touching ontogenetic problems had outlived their days of service, and that new facts were demanding new methods of interpretation. For example, who today pre- tends to invoke, in its original content, the Recapitulation Theory in correlating ontogeny and phylogeny? Who would seriously defend, or use the so-called laws of cleavage in interpreting every phase of egg development? And so one might multiply examples. 524 CHARLES W. HARGITT The fact remains, however, that Just these outgrown systems or theories still cumber the literature, the available text-books and manuals for introducing students to these subjects of present day biology, much to the reproach of its leaders and sponsors. With the desire to aid, in however small a degree, in correct- ing phases of error, or what appear such, the writer will aim under this section of the paper briefly to pass in review the chief aspects of the problems involved, and, so far as may be practicable, will endeavor to show distinctive examples of inadequate theory and erroneous implications and deductions. 1. Origin, multiplication, and growth of germ-cells It seems worth while briefly to summarize results which obser- vations, more particularly my own, have brought to light on these several aspects of ontogeny. Many of the facts have already been made known in previous papers, but care will be taken to avoid, as far as may be, any unnecessary duplication, giving atten- tion chiefly to those features relating to phases which seem to ‘all for consideration. Concerning the earlier controversy as to the mere place or tissue in which the germ-cells arise, it is no longer necessary to multiply words. Recent work from various sources, and especially that of Goette (07), has, I believe, placed the sub- ject beyond further dispute. That there is any such region as may be designated a ‘Keimzone’ or ‘Keimstiitte’ may be at once dismissed as absolutely without warrant as a general proposition. Furthermore, that the germ cells have their origin in the ecto- derm alone in hydromedusae may be similarly denied and dis- missed as unworthy of further inquiry or doubt. And still fur- ther, | am thoroughly convinced that the still more recent con- troversy as to the hypothesis of the ‘germ-plasm,’ if not as clearly a delusion as the preceding, is yet without the slightest support from the ontogeny of the group under review. It is a matter of easy demonstration that in many species of hydroids the egg may be followed in every detail from its origin as an ectoderm or an entoderm or interstitial cell through its gradual differentiation and growth to maturation, as a distinet individual SOME PROBLEMS OF CORLENTERATE ONTOGENY 525 cell, without the slightest tendency to multiplication. That is to say, in species of Hudendrium, Hydractinia, Campanularia, Pachycordyle, and others, there is at no time any organ which is Ovarian in character, within which masses of primordial ova arise and pass through oogonial and oocytie phases familiar in other species to be mentioned later; but a given cell of the ento- derm which is to give rise to an egg begins to grow, and either 7 situ or after migration into the gonophore, develops directly into a typical egg, and later, after fertilization, gives rise directly to an embryo and finally to an individual polyp. On the other hand, in many cases, e.g., Pennaria, Tubularia, Syneoryne, Hydra, large numbers of primordial ova arise in what may be regarded as an ovary where, by a series of cytological changes, they exhibit the oogonial and oocytie phases referred to above. These some- what strikingly different modes of oogenesis may, for convenience be designated as the ‘direct’ or ‘individualized’ and the ‘indirect’ or ‘oogonial’ modes. That they are sharply distinet, or quali- tatively differentiated types of oogenesis is not claimed. In this, as in other phases of development, there are all shades of intergradation and relation to be found in these and other species of Cnidaria. Correlated with these apparently widely divergent modes of origin are those of nutrition and growth. In the ‘direct’ or ‘individual’ ova nutrition is almost invariably likewise through the direct medium of the adjacent tissue cells, which supply by diffusion the appropriate nutritive plasma. On the other hand, in Ovarian eggs, which involve oogonial and oocytie generations, there arise indefinite masses of primordial ova; and the growth of certain of these as ovarian eggs, Is largely through the active appropriation of the excess primordial ova, which are literally devoured whole, or predigested to a liquid plasma, which is then absorbed. Illustrations of both these processes are too familiar to call for special emphasis. While the two processes of nutri- tion are thus apparently different, intermediate cases are not unknown, e.g., Eudendrium hargitti, recently described by Cong- don (’06, p. 39) has been found to comprise something of both modes. And, though it belongs to a genus in which oogenesis JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, No. 3 526 CHARLES W. HARGITT is associated in its nutritive relations with the direct activities of the tissue cells of the parent organism, yet in this particular species the egg certainly turns parasite, if not cannibal, and de- vours bodily the cells of either ectoderm or entoderm as may happen to afford it particular support at a giventime. And one finds in these growing ova of E. hargitti eggs literally loaded during most active growth with the engorged nuclei of tissue cells, the exact counterpart of those conditions found in Pennaria and Tubularia in which the growing eggs are similarly packed with the primordial ova of the ovarian tissues. In his earlier studies on heredity Weismann admits that germ- cells may be derived from somatic cells, e.g., (Essays on Heredity Eps 209): It is quite impossible to maintain that the germ-cells of Hydroids or of the higher plants exist from the time of embryonic development, as indifferent cells, which cannot be distinguished from others, and which are Only differentiated at a later period. Such a view is contradicted by the simplest mathematical consideration; for it is obvious that none of the relatively few cells of the embryo can be excluded from the enormous increase by division, which must take place in order to pro- duce the large number of daughter individuals which form a colony of polyps. It is, therefore, clear that all the cells of the embryo must for a long time act as somatic cells, and none of them can be reserved as germ-cells and nothing else; this conclusion is moreover confirmed by direct observation. In later discussing th's feature, while still contending that in most cases germ-cells arise early in ontogeny, Weismann is | yet compelled to admit that in Hydrozoa these do not arise till very late, and indeed in individuals of a later generation, (Evo- lution Theory, vol.1, p. 410). Notwithstanding this admission he still contends for his dogma of germinal continuity: Here the primordial germ cell is separated from the ovum by a long series of cell-generations, and the sole possibility of explaining the pres- ence of germ-plasm in this primordial cell is to be found in the assumption that in the divisions of the ovum the whole of the germ plasm originally contained in it was not broken up into determinant groups, but that a part, perhaps the greater part, was handed on in a latent state from cell to cell, till sooner or later it reached a cell which it stamped as a primor- dial germ-cell. Theoretically it makes no difference whether these germ-tracks, that is, the cell generations which lead from the ovum to SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 527 the primordial germ-cells, are short or very long, whether they consist of three or six or sixteen cells, or of hundreds and thousands of cells. That all the cells of the germ-tracks do not take on the character of germ-cells must, in accordance with our conception of the maturing of determinants, be referred to the internal conditions of the cells and of the germ-plasm, perhaps in part also to an associated quantum of so- matic idioplasm which is only overpowered in the course of the cell divisions. This splitting up of the substance of the ovum into a somatic half, which directs the development of the individual, and a propaga- tive half, which reaches the germ-cells and there remains inactive, and later gives rise to the succeeding generation, constitutes the theory of the continuity of the germ-plasm (p. 411). Theoretically, the hypothesis is interesting and developed with much plausible argument. Yet its demonstration is far from evident, indeed quite beyond demonstration, as has been frequently pointed out by many of his critics. However, Weis- mann insists that there are evidential facts: The hypothesis does not depend for support merely on a recognition of its theoretical necessity, on the contrary there is a whole series of facts which may be adduced as strongly in its favor. Thus, even the familiar fact that excision of the reproductive organs in all animals produces sterility proves that no other cells of the body are able to give rise to germ-cells; germ-plasm cannot be produced de novo. It is passing strange that he should ignore the body of facts concerned in regeneration, and among them the reproductive organs. And it is still more strange that in support of this he should cite in detail the Hydrozoa as illustrating and supporting the hypothesis, ignoring the well-known facts that among these are abounding evidences which afford insuperable objections to just these assumptions. The present author has, in many cases, shown that gonads may be as readily regenerated by hydroids and medusae as any other organs; and that not for once or twice, but repeatedly in the same specimen, and that de novo and in situ; not the slightest evidence being distinguishable that any migration through pre-existing ‘germ-tracks’ occurred. The assumption that in these animals the gonads have ‘‘been shifted backwards in the course of phylogenetic evolution, that is, have been moved nearer to the starting point of development’’ seems so at variance with known facts as to be difficult to appreciate 528 CHARLES W. HARGITT or respect. That ‘‘the adherence of the sexual gonophore to the hydroid colony has made a more rapid ripening of the germ-cells possible,” or that ‘‘nature has taken advantage of this possibility in all cases,”’ as claimed by Weismann, is but another example of subservience to theory; for I cannot believe he can be ignorant of the general fact that there is not the slightest evidence that in hydroids with fixed gonophores the germ-cells ripen more rapidly or more frequently. It is in vain to attempt to bolster up these speculations by cleverly designed diagrams; for such devices are too often mere products of a vivid imagination. Furthermore, it is difficult to account for the dogmatic persistence with which this writer seeks to sustain the view that the germ-cells originate exclusively in the ectoderm. In the earlier work, which makes up his splendid monograph already referred to, he has admitted again and again the probable origin of the cells in the entoderm (pp. 215-217). But in his ‘Evolution theory’ (p. 415), it is asserted, “in no single case is the birthplace of the germ-cells to be found in the entoderm, but always in the ectoderm, no matter how far back it may have been shunted.’”’ And in citing cases in support of the point he refers to Hydractinia and Podocoryne, both of which are known to prove the exact opposite, as shown by Bunting (’94) and Smallwood C 09), as well as by the writer in numerous similar cases. The alee critique by Lloyd Morgan (’91) is ene in this connection: This germ-plasm residesinthenucleusof the cell; andit wouldseem that by a little skillful manipulation it can be made to account for anything that has ever been observed or is likely to be observed. It is one of those convenient invisibles that will do anything you desire. The re- growth of a limb shows that the cells contained some of the original germ-plasm. A little sampled fragment of Hydra has it in abundance. It lurks in the body-wall of the building polyp. It is ever ready at call : Now, although I value highly Professor Weismann’s luminous researches, and read with interest his ingenious speculations, I cannot but regard his doctrine of the germ-plasm as a distinctly retro- grade step. His germ-plasm is an unknowable, invisible, hypotheti- cal entity. Material though it be, it is of no more practical value than a mythical germinal principle. By a little skillful manipulation, SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 529 it may be made to account for anything and everything. The funda- mental assumption that whereas germ-plasm can give rise to body-plasm to any extent, body-plasm can under no circumstances give rise to germ- plasm, introduces an unnecessary mystery . . . . The fiction of two protoplasms, distinct and yet commingled, is in my opinion, lit- tle calculated to advance our knowledge of organic processes. It has been assumed, as the foregoing citations clearly show, that there is some predetermined order of sequence and relation as to the origin, nutrition, growth, etc., of germ-cells, not only in such a group as the hydrozoa, but throughout the animal kingdom. And with this as a postulate assiduous search has been directed to its support. It is not necessary that one should, a priorv discredit the method, for it is perfectly scientifiec,—within limits. The fault which must be emphasized is that it has been so conspicuously partial and dogmatic. Facts quite as accessible, quite as convincing, have been silently ignored; and it is thus that such work or method becomes both unscientific and untrue. I believe the foregoing facts must suffice to show that, both as to origin, differentiation and growth, the germ-cells of the Hydrozoa, so far from sustaining the doctrine of the germ-plasm, afford the strongest and most direct evidence to the contrary. 2. Doctrines of homology [f one were asked to indicate the dominant conception which characterized the biological activity of the greater part of the nineteenth century he could hardly go far amiss in phrasing it somewhat as follows: The perennial and irrepressible search for homologies! 'This would be confessedly the case with so much of the period as comprised the Darwinian epoch of biology. But the conception belongs quite as properly to the seething period of the biological renaissance of the early half of the century, and finds expression in the researches of von Baer and Cuvier, Lam- arck and St. Hilaire, and a long roll of hardly less distinguished names. But strangely enough the doctrine had antipodal sig- nificance under the early, as contrasted with the later epochs of thought. To the first homology embodied the postulate of types of creation according to the conception of ‘archetypes’ of plan and 530 CHARLES W. HARGITT structure, details of which have been elaborately developed by Owen (48) whose well-known ‘Homologies of the vertebrate skeleton’ is its best expression. But to these naturalists homology meant likeness of structure merely, with the implications of ideals and design. To naturalists of the later period the conception took on an infinitely larger scope and significance. Like the for- mer, they were free to accept likeness of structure as an index of homology; but following the blazed trail of Lamarck and St. Hilaire, they conceived in the doctrine the key to lineage. To them homology involved kinship; and ‘archetypes’ as such had no vital meaning. It is not strange that, under the masterful hand of Darwin, the newer doctrine gave to biologists a working hypothesis comparable with that of gravitation, and at once placed biology on the foundation of scientific certitude. To naturalists of both periods must be ascribed well deserved praise. Both sought in the most conscientious and critical manner to discern the facts of homology. Among both were those of divergent and conflicting views,' von Baer and Cuvier versus Lamarck and Hilaire; Agassiz versus Darwin. In both were elements of important truth; in both were extremes of mischiey- ous error. It is not the purpose to undertake any critical review of the phases of conflict involved in these antithetic aspects of one of the most profound of biological doctrines; but rather, ignoring extremes of the earlier period, whose errors have largely gone into oblivion, to point out in briefest way wherein, under the ardent impulse of the newer view, something of extravagant over-valuation has come to have a retarding and mischievous influence upon biological thought and progress. It hardly need be said that in this matter attention will be directed to those points in particular which have come under my own lines of research. A similar duty has been ably performed upon a larger scale by several brilliant authorities, among them Wilson (’94), Morgan (03), Montgomery (’06). a. The germ-layers. No occasion exists for a review of the origin of the conception of germ layers developed through the work of Wolff, Pander, von Baer, Remak and KOlliker. It is sufficient to my purpose to cite the astute observation of Huxley SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 531 as to the likeness of the diblastic tissues of coelenterates and the mucous and serous layers of the embryo (’49). Let it be noted, however, that Huxley does not designate these as homologous, but rather as analogous. Ten years after his first utterance he remarks ‘‘It by no means justifies the assumption that the Hydro- zoa are in any sense arrested developments of higher organisms. All that ean be justly affirmed is, that the Hydrozoon travels for a certain distance along the same great highway of development as the higher animals.’”’ (Oceanic Hydrozoa, p. 2.) Interestingly enough, the embryological researches of the time, led by Kowalevsky, Gegenbaur, Haeckel and others, centered about this pregnant conception of Huxley and led Haeckel to formulate his famous Gastraea Theory, with all its far-reaching implications as to the homology of the germ layers of all embryos, ‘‘from the lowest sponge to man.” Of course, the gastrula at once sprang into a position of commanding importance in embry- ology, and as the prototype of Haeckel’s hypothetical gastraea became a focal factor in embryological thought for a whole gen- eration. It is not strange, therefore, that the Coelenterata, as the distinctively diploblastic phylum of the animal world, should early come in for a more than usual measure of interest and concern; and as the theoretical ancestral phylum from which all higher metazoa must have arisen, should have at once assumed a unique and dominant phylogenetic importance. When, however, it is clearly known that in only a single class of coelenterates does gastrulation occur, and that in no case is the gastrula, as an embryo, known, it seems remarkable to the point of surprise that the theoretical postulate should still be cherished by not a few students of phylogeny. Current liter- ature, however, furnishes abundant evidence of just such adher- ence to tradition. b. The planula. As is well known the planula is the distinc- tive larva of the entire phylum, including also the sponges. It has generally been assumed that the planula is a specialized gas- trula, and that in some early species its enteron must have been formed by gastrulation. In this again there is involved the fur- ther inference and implication of the dominance of the biogenetic joa CHARLES W. HARGITT law. Granted the diploblastic character of coelenterate and sponge; granted further, the gastrula stage in ontogeny through- out a large proportion of higher Metazoa, who could well resist the conclusion jumped at by Haeckel as to the necessary homology of gastrula and planula, facts to the contrary notwithstanding! c. The morula. It has just been stated that the planula is the distinctive larva of coelenterates. Another ontogenetic stage, however, must not be overlooked, namely, the morula. Of this one hears little now-a-days, though formerly it was a name fairly common in the literature of embryology. Even so recent a text-book as that of Korschelt and Heider devotes to it a single brief paragraph or so. They remark, ‘‘we shall see that examples of such a mode of origin of the two primary germ-layers are still ascribed to many Hydroids and Anthozoa, though probably the greater part of the cases referred to this: method can be reduced to epibolic gastrulation, in which events the morula stage, as being a schema founded on erroneous assumptions, would have to be omitted.” As an illustration of subserviency to dominant theory this sentence is a brilliant example! As a matter of fact epibolic gastrulation is absolutely unknown in coelenterate devel- opment, cases given of its occurrence having, without exception been proven egregious errors. It might be questioned whether the morula, as a stage, should be given recognition. But when it is taken as the counterpart of the blastula, a stage everywhere recognized, but comparatively rare in the phylum under review, the objection vanished. The morulaisfarand away the dominant cleavage embryo in Hydrozoa and common in other classes, the Scyphozoa alone excepted. Accounts of its structure and origin given in an earlier section obviate any call for details here. Suffice it to say, that the com- plicated methods described by Metschnikoff (’86, p. 70), while interesting and ingenious, are but of small value. That delam- ination and immigration (polar or multipolar), may occur need not be questioned; but that they occur in any such degree of fre- quency or constancy as to constitute laws of entoderm formation none who has had to do with the problem would hesitate to deny. While less importance is attached to this problem of germ layers SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 533 than formerly, one still finds it more or less dominant in embryol- ogy. Inhis book, ‘The Development of the Frog,’ Morgan (’97) gives the subject usual attention; and in the still more recent book, ‘The Development of the Chick,’ Lillie (08) devotes several pages to the subject, and it crops out repeatedly in the earlier chapters. The germ layer theory came to have a larger place than might otherwise have been the case in the attempt to dis- cover some ultimate embryological basis for homology, and simi- lar warrant for the so-called Biogenetic Law, or Doctrine of Reca- pitulation. It has long passed as a cardinal doctrine in embryology that the primary germ layers form a constant, and more or less infal- lible basis for homology,—a sort of court of last appeal where other criteria fail. But not a few recent results have tended to force the concession that even here there have been hasty gener- alizations. Not only in modes of formation and development have the germ-layers been found to differ widely, but in their function and fate in ontogeny there has likewise been obvious variation and discrepancy at many points. Balfour long ago called attention to discrepant modes of mesoderm formation, and recent experimental results have shown that organs of usual ectodermic origin are far from dependent on such mode of deriv- ation. In coelenterate ontogeny the most radical divergences as to modes of origin are too well known to call for extended review. From the extreme mode of delamination exclusively in entoderm formation as pointed out by Metschnikoff in Geryonia, and since confirmed in substance by Brooks (’86), who ealls it “ very peculiar, and without any exact parallel,’ to that of gastrulation in Sey- phozoa, with its confusing variations and exceptions, which invol- ved those rancorous discussions of Claus, Goette, and others, and the more usual mode through the morula, the entire gamut of germ-layer formation might seem to be epitomized. But despite the misguided and essentially mischievous (however well meant), efforts to derive all these phases from a mythical gastraea, now long a discredited and discarded phylogenetic monstrosity, the fact remains that there is probably no genetic relation what- soever between them. 534 CHARLES W. HARGITT d. The blastocoel. As another phase of the germ-layer prob- lem, the cleavage-cavity calls for some passing notice. Formerly it had large attention at the hands of embryologists, and, though less emphasized at present, it has not passed out of consideration. One can hardly consult a current paper dealing with early devel- opment without meeting the problem of the origin of the cleavage cavity and its later fate in ontogeny. It is not necessary that one should assume to discredit entirely any possible morpho- genic significance to this cavity in any group of organisms; but one does not need to study any considerable series of onto- genies to have forced upon him the conviction that its importance has been greatly exaggerated and correspondingly misinterpreted. One of the first impressions to be gathered from any considerable comparison of coelenterate embryology is that of the conspicuous absence of any definite blastocoel. It is only necessary to cite such figures as those given on plates I to III, illustrating these phases in Pennaria, Tubularia, Clava, Hydractinia to make this point very evident. It is true that here and there at certain stages of cleavage may be found irregular intercellular spaces which have been designated in general as segmentation cavities by those describing them. Spaces they undoubtedly are; but they are not cavities which have any permanence, either of form or position, but shift, or disappear under the erratic adjustments of the blastomeres; and one might about as well speak of the mor- phologic significance of the interstices in a box of oranges or bag of potatoes as of these promiscuous intercellular spaces. Another feature may also be mentioned in this connection. That is the rather significant fact that in many species, such as Hydractinia, where during very early cleavage a cavity may appear incidentally, it almost immediately disappears, becoming totally and permanently obliterated by encroaching cells. And even in certain species, where a more or less characteristic cavity arises and persists for a time, as in certain Geryonids, I am constrained to interpret it as having a physiological rather than morphological significance,—a sort of embryonic receptacle for the deposition of cytolymph, or other substances developed dur- ing cleavage, or possibly for food matters derived from the water SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 535 during early cleavage, or even later the retention of infusoria, as claimed by Merejkowsky (’83), though this may be doubtful.? Hence the facts herein adduced, together with the further fact of its extreme variation as to size, shape, position, or, still more significantly, its absolute absence in a large proportion of the species of the entire phylum, afford ample warrant for the con- clusion that, so far from having any necessary morphogenic or ontogenic significance, the blastocoel may be said to be absolutely devoid of anything of the sort, least of all of any relation to phylogeny. e. Cleavage homology. With the later development of the doctrine of homology there came to be involved varying phases of embryology, as shown above. One of its latest aspects is that concerned with cleavage, which has assumed a place of com- manding influence within recent years, as expressed in the flood of literature which sprang into existence dealing with the subject from every point of view,—normal, artificial, experimental. Conklin (’97), has stated well the subject as follows: In the whole history of the germ-layer theories I see an attempt to trace homologies back to their earliest beginnings. This problem is as impor- tant today as it ever.was, and whether one find these earliest homolo- gies in layers or regions of blastomeres or the unsegmented ovum itself, the quest is essentially the same. Within this question of the earliest homologies is included another of great and present interest, viz., the significance of cleavage. With the broader implications and relations of this subject there is neither the time nor occasion for extended review in 2 T can but express the strong conviction that those who contend for the presence in such eases of a definitive segmentation cavity and blastula are in serious error. It seems not at all adequate to aver that the absence of any true blastocoel is due to the ‘abbreviation of this stage of development,’ as G. T. Hargitt (’09) has des- ignated it. As suggested above, but for the earlier theoretical significance involved in the matter, it may be doubtful whether any such contention would be made as that under review. To the writer it seems a pity to waste words over the subject in the form of argumentation. The facts are their own best exponent, and with these clearly apprehended there ought to be small occasion for contro- versy. The presence or absence of syncytial conditions has nothing whatever to do with the problem. Long before a syncytium has developed the morula has arisen as shown above, a fact as incompatible with the blastula as the planula is independent of the gastrula. 536 CHARLES W. HARGITT this connection. With certain limited aspects of the problem as they relate to coelenterate ontogeny facts have come to knowl- edge which demand consideration. In a general way it may be said of the problem of cleavage homology that two rather diverg- ent schools of biologic thought have grown up. One of these, ably represented by Driesch and O. Hertwig, maintain that cleayv- age is a more or less general and quantitive process, the result- ing blastomeres being largely equipotent in later development, their individual values depending largely upon relations of posi- tion, ete. The other wing of thought would hold that cleavage is fundamentally a qualitative process, involving a nicely pre- determined and ‘orderly sifting of materials,’ resulting in a splen- did ‘mosaic work,’ each cell fitted into its predetermined place with mathematical precision. Under the latter conception ‘cell lineage’ became the dominant problem of embryological research. As a corollary to this, not only were blastomeres factors of supreme concern, but the natural and almost necessary implica- tion followed that there must of necessity be predetermining factors in the unsegmented egg even more fundamental than those in the blastomeres. Hence came into prominence the search for evidences of ‘formative stuffs’, ‘prelocalized germinal areas’, etc. Watving all further consideration of this particular aspect of the problem in its theoretical implications, I may very briefly cite facts concerned. with coelenterate cytology, and attempt to show their bearing in the case. In earlier contributions on the subject.of cleavage, partic- ularly in Pennaria and Clava, and further facts given in previous parts of the present paper, attention has been directed to facts which must be their own exponents. As to any blastomere homo- logy in any of these cases it is difficult to conceive. Further- more, both under normal conditions and through experiment, it has been demonstrated over and over that one or many blasto- meres may be detached without in the least modifying the course of development in any particular. With such pictures as those in figures 1 to 30 before one, he would need be possessed of a measure of imagination beyond compare who could discern any sign of a SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 53d ‘mosaic work’! And what shall be said as to the existence of prelocalized germinal areasin such ova? Ihave searched through- out the phylum for ova having any semblance of such, but with- out evidence of its existence. It was thought for a time that Clava might be a case, but the most painstaking efforts to detect it were only negative. For a time Conklin believed he had found such in the ova of Linerges, and so pronounced; but his final utterance (’08, p. 166), recalls this: ‘‘The view expressed in my preliminary note on the development of Linerges, that the three layers of the egg give rise to the ectoderm, the entoderm, and the mesogloea is not confirmed by further study.” That there may be certain special distribution of egg material I have already shown in the case of several hydromedusae, but this is by no means implies that it is germinal in character or defi- nitely prelocalized. 3. Amitosis In several earlier papers I found occasion to call attention to what seemed to be amitosis in cells during early cleavage. In several of these the evidence seemed direct and positive; in others the indications were somewhat general and indirect. The fact that several later students of cleavage in eggs of hydroids failed to confirm my results, while in the case of several others there has been very explicit confirmation, leads me to briefly review the matter as it appears at the present time. As I have elsewhere stated, the question of amitosis is purely one of fact. Whatever may be the implications of amitosis in its theoretical bearings on problems of heredity or otherwise, it must be evident that to attempt to discredit it on such grounds, or others of like nature, can only result in confusion worse confounded. One fact is Just as sacred as another, and just as much entitled to respect and consideration, and is bound sooner or later to be taken account of. The extreme attitude of Ziegler, Vom Rath, and certain other cytologists who would have us believe that amitosis is to be found only in senile or pathologic tissues, will have to be aban- doned as altogether unwarranted. Cytologists no less capable and conscientious, in growing numbers, accept amitosis as a normal 538 CHARLES W. HARGITT and not rare mode of cell division. The following recent utter- ance of one of the avowed conservatives will show how just is this claim: ‘‘ Accepting the idioplasm hypothesis. . . what do we know of its transmission? We may answer with assurance that it is transmitted from cell to cell by division; and we may safely presume, I think, in most cases by mitosis, though the di- rect or amitotic process may play a larger réle than was formerly supposed.” (Wilson, ’09.) My first suggestion concerning the problem was made in con- nection with my early account of Pennaria (’00); and the same year, Allen, one of my graduate students, made a similar statement in connection with the development of Tubularia. In a paper on regeneration, my son, G. T. Hargitt (’03), described abundant amitoses in the regenerating hydranths of Tubularia, and sug- gested the probable relations of the process to rapid growth and metabolism. In several contributions Child has also described amitosis, and in one in particular (’07), gave a brief account of the process in a series of organisms from coelenterates to birds. In one of these he made bold to predict that ‘‘future investigations will probably show that amitosis is at least as important in the life of the cell as mitosis.”” How timely was this prediction may be inferred by an examination of several recent papers on the sub- ject, particularly by Patterson (’08), on ‘Amitosis in the pigeon’s egg,’ and Glaser (’08), “A statistical study of mitosis and amito- sis in the entoderm of Fasciolaria.’ In both these studies it is interesting to find so striking a vindication of Child’s forecast. Patterson finds that at certain stages amitosis is quite as common as mitosis; and suggests ‘“‘it seems very probable that amitosis is the result of special physiological conditions, which create a stimulus to cell division,. . . . whatever factors are in- volved in bringing about the rapid growth of any region would seem to be concerned in causing amitosis.’”’ This affords an interesting agreement with the suggestion made by G. T. Hargitt, as quoted above. Glaser also concludes ‘‘that amitosis plays in this in- stance ’’(Fasciolaria) ‘‘an important, if not the chief part in the differentiation of a definitive tissue.”’ SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 539 These several series of facts afford, as I believe, very strong confirmation of my own results as related to Eudendrium, Pen- naria and Clava. They are also further supported by interest- ing results described by Young (’08) in connection with the ‘ His- togenesis of Cysticercus pisiformis.’ In this paper is found the somewhat radical suggestion that cells may arise de novo, from a ‘eytoblastema,’ much as held by Schwann long ago. It is not necessary to review this phase further than to point out its relation to a similar suggestion made by the writer con- cerning a somewhat similar origin of cells after nuclear fragmen- tation in both Eudendrium and Clava. Several of Young’s figures are strikingly similar to those given in connection with Kudendrium, Another most interesting confirmation of my results is to be found in the account of Brooks and Rittenhouse (’07), of the development of Turritopsis. In this case both mitosis and ami- tosis are found occurring ‘simultaneously in the different cells of the segmenting egg.’ The varying size of the amitotic nuclei and their reticular structure, confirm with utmost exactness my earlier accounts. Furthermore, the association of amitosis with an approach toward syncytial conditions also resembles the con- dition in Eudendrium, as does also the metabolism associated with yolk digestion. I cannot agree, however, with the authors that there is any such relations involved in any of these processes as would bring them into conformity with the theory of Flemming, Ziegler, and others, that they presage degenerative ends. On the contrary, they seem to me to be most intimately associated with the intense metabolism and rapid growth of histogenesis. It remains briefly to refer to phases of nuclear behavior so characteristic in the cleavage of Pennaria, and to a less extent in Clava. Among these are such features as the highly vesiculate aspects of the nuclei during early cleavage, and the equally anom- alous features of clavicular, reniform and dumb-bell shaped nuclei. These facts have been very abundantly confirmed by the several researches of Hargitt, Smallwood, and Beckwith, already cited. Their interpretations, however, differ very widely from my own, and with plausibility and force. At the same time I fail to per- 540 CHARLES W. HARGITT ceive that the facts are not quite as clearly within the amitotic mode, and with apparently quite as strong evidence in support of the latter view. Granted the facts of amitosis as a normal process in cytogeny, and this is no longer open to denial, its occurrence along side of mitosis must be allowed. And even ° where one investigator may find mitosis, another may find both mitosis and amitosis; and this I have shown in the cases already cited, and my results have been confirmed in similar cases by others. ‘ But there is still a further word in this connection. The fact that the nuclear vesicles differ so markedly in size, shape and num- ber is rather difficult to interpret on the basis of mitosis alone. Are these several vesicles derived from single chromosomes, or from several which have fused? If the latter, how shall we corre- late the fact with the further fact, admitted by both Smallwood and Beckwith, that it is not essential that these vesicles should fuse between successive mitoses? But how then shall we attempt to explain the assumed exact nuclear equivalents of every mitotic division? But if, on the other hand, it be held that these nuclear vesicles are originally derived from single chromosomes, as seems more likely, how are we to account for the marked diversity of size, number and shape? These queries are not suggested out of any captious spirit, nor on the other hand, as affording an insup- erable objection to the interpretations given by these authors, but as more or less clearly pertinent questions which warrant consideration in connection with the problem concerned. The further assertion of Smallwood in this connection that ‘‘the mere shape of the nucleus in Pennaria is no indication of amitosis,”’ may be looked on as somewhat of an evasion of the real issue. I have nowhere made such a claim; but if such were the case it might with pertinence be replied that mere shape is not the point at issue. On the other hand, we are here concerned with partic- ular and anomalous shape, a very different matter. Whether shape has any significance in this relation depends to a marked degree upon the kind of shape. That a reniform, or dumb-bell shaped nucleus ‘is no indication of amitosis’ may be flatly denied, where it is more or less prevalent. Given such shapes, while SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 541 spheres, spindles, etc., are held to be types of normal nuclei, I think it must be allowed that the burden of proof that the former are but phases of the latter is upon the champions of exclusive mitosis, and thus far the evidence which they submit has not been convincing. With the facts herein presented, and the cumulative evidence available from a wide range of observation and authority clearly appreciated, it seems difficult to evade the force of the conclusion which is implied. The writer believes, therefore, that his earlier tentative suggestions concerning amitosis as a mode of nuclear activity is not only not discredited nor disproved by later researches, but is rendered both credible and probable. SUMMARY The main points embodied in the paper may be summarised as follows: 1. Later observations on the development of Pennaria, and including a new species, go clearly to confirm the earlier results, and to show that it is not peculiar to a single species or to a given locality. 2. Observations on the development of Hydractinia echinata also confirm much of that found to occur in Pennaria, including cleavage, ectosarcal features, formation of germ layers, etc. 3. The same may be said in general as to Clava leptostyla. New facts as to certain histogenic aspects seem established, and the significance of the early embryo,—the morula,—is empha- sized. 4. Concerning the origin and growth of germ cells it becomes more and more certain that the theoretical contentions of Weis- mann find no warrant in the ontogeny of Coelenterates, and par- ticularly in that of Hydrozoa, the group especially claimed by him. 5. A review of earlier doctrines of homology goes to show that they have been greatly overestimated as criteria of phylogeny. This includes especially the features involved in germ layers, the early hydroid larva, cleavage homology, prelocalization of ger- JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 3 542 CHARLES W. HARGITT minal areas, etc. The facts of homology and ontogeny as related to phylogeny leave much to be desired ere it will be possible to sustain the earlier conceptions of recapitulation and its enormous implications as to biological philosophy. 6. Amitosis as a factor in cytogenesis is a question of fact. Cumulative evidence from almost every field of cytology goes to show that it is neither rare, nor limited to senile or pathologic conditions of cells or tissues. Its significance in cytogeny is difficult to overestimate. It is not unknown as a factor in embry- ogeny in any of the great phyla of nature. As a fact it is no less sacred than any other, and must be reckoned with in any final doctrine of development. BIBLIOGRAPHY ALLEN, CarRIE M. 1900 A contribution to the development of Parypha crocea; Biol. Bull., vol. 1, p. 291. Batrour, F. M. 1885 A treatise on comparative embryology; London, 2nd Edition. BeckwitH, Cora J. 1909 Preliminary report on the early history of the egg and development of certain hydroids; Biol. Bull., vol. 16, p. 183. Brooks, W. K. 1886 Life history of North American Hydromedusae; Mem. Bost. Soc. Nat.. Hist., vol. 3. Brooks, W. K. anp RitrennouseE, 8. 1907 On Turritopsis nutricula; Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. 33, p. 429. Buntine, MartHua 1894 The origin of sex-cells in Hydractinia and Podocoryne, and the development of Hydractinia; Jour. Morph., vol. 9, p. 203. Cuitp, C. M. 1904 Amitosis in Moniezia; Anat. Anz., Bd. 25, p. 545. 1907a Amitosis as a factor in normal and regulatory growth; Anat. Anz., Bd. 30; p. 271. : 1907b Studies on the relation between amitosis and mitosis; Biol. Bull., vol. 12, pp. 89, 175; vol. 18, pp. 188, 165. ConkuIn, E.G. 1897 The embryology of Crepidula; Jour. Morph., vol. 13. 1908 The habits and early development of Linerges mercurius; Carnegie Inst., Washington, Pub. No. 1038, p. 153. GuasER, O. C. 1908 A statistical study of mitosis and amitosis in the enteron of Fasciolaria; Biol. Bull., vol. 14, p. 219. Hareirt, C. W. 1900 The natural history and early development of Pennaria tiarella (McCr.); Am. Nat., vol. 34, p. 387. 1904a The early development of Eudendrium; Zool. Jahrb., Bd. 20, p. 257. SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY 543 Haraitt, C. W. 1904b The early development of Pennaria tiarella (McCr.); Archiv f. Ent-Mech., Bd. 18, p. 453. 1906 The organization and early development of Clava leptostyla Ag.; Biol. Bull., vol. 10, p. 207. 1908 Notes on the Coelenterates of Woods Hole; Biol. Bull., vol. 14, p. 97 et seq. Hareitt, C. W. ann G. T. 1910 Studies in the development of Scyphomedusae; Jour. Morph., vol. 21, p. 217-262. Haraitrr, G. T. 1903 Regeneration in Hydromedusae; Arch. f. Ent-Mech. d. Organismen, Bd. 17, p. 64. 1909 Maturation, fertilization and cleavage of Pennaria tiarella and Tubularia crocea; Bulletin Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, vol. 53, no. 3. Harm, K. 1902 Die Entwickelungsgeschichte von Clava squamata; Zeits. f. wiss. Zool., Bd. 73, p. 115. Hertwia, O. 1892 Text book of embryology; English trans., Huxtry,T. 1849 On the anatomy and affinities of medusae; Phil. Trans. Royal Soc. London, part 2, p. 413. 1859 -Oceanic Hydrozoa; Ray Society, London. KorscHELT AND HerperR 1895 Text book of the embryology of invertebrates; English translation. Linuiz, F. R. 1908 Development of the chick; Henry Holt, New York. MEREJKOWSKY 1883 Development de la meduse Obelia; Bull.de la Soc. de France. METSCHNIKOFF, E. 1886 Embryologische Studien an Medusen; Wien. Monteomery, T. H. 1906 The analysis of racial descent in animals; Henry Holt, New York. Morgan, Luoyp 1891 Animal life and intelligence; Ginn and Company, Boston. Morean, T. H. 1897 Development of the frog; Macmillan, New York. 1903 Evolution and adaption; Macmillan, New York. OweEN, R. 1848 Homologies of the vertebrate skeleton, London. Patrrerson, J.T. 1908 Amitosis in the pigeon’s egg; Anat. Anz., Bd. 32, p. 117. RiTTENHOUSE, S. See Brooks and Rittenhouse. Roux, W. 1881 Der Kampf der Theile im Organismus. Smautuwoop, W. M. 1909 A reéxamination of the cytology of Hydractinia and Pennaria; Biol. Bull., vol. 17. WeIsMANN, A. 1883 Entstehung der Sexualzellen bei den Hydromedusen. 1889 Essays on heredity; English translation, Macmillan, vol. 1. 1904 Vortrige iiber Descendzentheorie; English translation, 2 vols. London. Witson, E. B. 1884 The development of Renilla; Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. Lon- don, vol. 174. 1894 The embryological criterion of homology; Biological Lectures, Woods Hole, Boston. Youna, R. T. 1908 The histogenesis of Cysticercus pisiformis; Zool. Jahrb., Bd. 26, p. 183. EXPLANATION OF PLATES All figures made with the aid of Abbe camera lugida. Those of living eggs in outline only. Details supplied free hand. No attempt has been made to give exact magnification of living eggs, the erratic shapes making this extremely diffi- cult. ' PLATE I EXPLANATION OF FIGURES 1 to 4 Pennaria tiarella. Varying aspects of cleavage in early phases, as a basis for comparing that of Pennaria australis. p. protoplasmic connective or strand; a very common feature in these eggs. x, a blastomere of second cleavage. In fig. 3 it will be noted that this blastomere segments more rapidly than the lower. This is very common, and continues in fig. 4. 5 to8 Pennaria australis. Cleavage here resembles in a marked degree that of the preceding species. 9 to 1lb Hydractinia echinata. An extremely erratic cleavage. In fig. 10 are shown several interesting features, viz. the blastomeres at z, y, z. At fig. 11 they are shown in a later stage, in which z and y are just becoming detached. Their later history is shown in figs. 11, a and b. 544 SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY PLATE CHARLES W. HARGITT 9 JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, No. 3 545 PLATE 2 EXPLANATION OF FIGURES 12 to 22 Various phases of cleavage of similar eggs. Figs. 14 to 18 phases of cleavage in a single egg at intervals of ten minutes. The irregular spaces shown are interesting as so-called segmentation cavities. As a matter of fact, they are but aspects of the peculiar ectosarcal and amoeboid activities, and hence abso- lutely devoid of any blastocoel relations. Such is likewise the case with other similar features in other cases. 19 to 22 Varying phases in the cleavage of another egg, sketched at intervals of fifteen minutes. In these are shown in typical aspects the ectosarcal features more or less common in these eggs. The various strands, papillae, etc. are con- spicuous. 12 to 13 Aspects of later cleavage of the egg body shown in figs. 9-11. 23 Gonophore of Clava showing the unusual feature of two perfectly formed and typical germinal vesicles in a single egg. X about 100. 546 PLATE 2 SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY HARGITT CHARLES W. JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 3 547 PLATE 3 EXPLANATION OF FIGURES 24 to 27. Cleavage aspects of Tubularia crocea. (Reproduced from drawings made by G. T. Hargitt illustrating his paper on early development of Pennaria tiarella and Tubularia crocea. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zodl., vol. 53, no. 3, by per- mission. ) ; 24 Cleavage planes which are complete, are more or less vertical, but the equa- torial furrows are shown in several of the blastomeres. 25 to 26 Two sections of anegg showing extremely elongated and erratic aspects. The several spaces shown are designated as cleavage cavities. This view I have taken occasion to question in the text of the present paper. 27 So-called blastula stage. This point I have also shown to be a mistaken view. In fact it may be questioned if in any case the term blastula should be applied to early stages of cleavage such as this. 28 Section of an egg of Pennaria tiarella in early cleavage. This is an egg which has shown an unusual regularity in cleavage behavior. WN shows a typical resting nucleus, of which several others are shown. At N’ is shown a nucleus in what seems amitotic cleavage. In this egg are seen also several inner spaces, but which are extremely transient phases. 29 Morula of Clava. The pro-entoderm has been tinted to show the early physiological differentiation of these cells. A discussion of this may be found in the text. 30 Morula of Hybocodon prolifer. As compared with preceding figures of Tubularia, Pennaria, e¢ al., it shows the same indefinite intercellular spaces, but no distinctive blastocoel. Several nuclei here shown resemble much those of Clava, and appear in some cases in amitotic division. 31 Nucleus of Clava just prior to maturation. Thenucleolus is conspicuously vacuolated. Chromatin is in process of fragmentation and dispersal. Stained by picro-hematoxylin which differentiates the yolk beyond mistake, and makes certain the chromatin nature of these granules. X 800. 32 Nucleus of Clava in process of fragmentation and dissolution. First polar body already discharged. Nucleolus in process of collapse; chromatin fragmenta- tion well advanced. Stain as in previous egg. > 800. O48 SOME PROBLEMS OF COELENTERATE ONTOGENY PLATE 3 CHARLES W. HARGITT JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 3 549 PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY VICTOR E. SHELFORD Department of Zoology, The University of Chicago NINETEEN FIGURES CONTENTS MPU TETOGITCTLON Gh ethos 2 che 32 Ss 20s dS oa a sacs es Slo has dn, Vee 552 I TRA EMINe Grouteney) MePyEeVoMys doneeocootcootoocesoncnvcecouwaneunee aR Zo enysiologicalvaninral georraphy....,.°.<. 22% 2 = stile ae ee eee 554 II The physiological characters and distribution of particular species of PIE DCCL ICS eens crc. vice 0.6 85 9 dts), a begilg as el REA te ge 556 Age\iatenialskocenerallhalbubs:.. ch. sss aussie Eee eke ee renee eee 556 Ig iveproductive: Processes. 230.2905. 5 7 ee eee eee 557 PA ADE WAY, EHC LY OLN) OF a near ee ea 557 este bd MUG aY0 Ld cose sched Gch eee ae eR een HEAL ee os 558 B Habitat relations of soil-inhabiting tiger beetles................. 559 Gh ASionj OuUEowxsyelbhon] of NMR Me Remote cto lshceohAnowaes ce sic 559 iGeneral behavior of adults?) 20.5. oanem ac hae ee ee 559 An ticologicalrelationsiot adults. : sa. aco tae ee 560 See colocicalenelations ote larvae ar eee eee 561 4 Experimental studies of habitat selection ........... 566 5 Ceorenjoane: Chisel owonmiOws ss wn gn oc da dceaasol sc covedso, 567 67 Geographic variation in: habits7.).0 440 eee eee 568 beaCicindelsy tranquebarica.-.'-.:\ 03" > sek nena eee ee eee 568 ComO Risen Ob Laas cic has od wee Fle oo) sede OE are 575 d= Other species: Moo... 5. 0: ie ae eee ene 584 Genera eonsiderationss | .4.(. ji. hece Sonate ue ae ee ee ee 586 1 Importance of breeding instincts and breeding place........ 587 2 Relation of behavior to the habitat and associated forms... 588 oy Meaning of yariation im habits:.e-.- 40ers ee 589 4 The relation of geographic to local distribution-governing PACEOTS ss SHON owe sie diehele. 4.2 lola ae cee to eee ee (0) III. The physiological characters and distribution of groups of species (for- HT AEIOTM Se eencenere cn tra eck tee NR, LORE OER, Be Ree TN ey eC 591 AE AOOlLOPICAlopInions anGdad ili CUltleSi are nee 591 Bee Natuneroftethesen vironment cr. - Acie erae ie ee seen ee 592 © Environmental relations of animals. 99252 a... .05. eee 592 1 Comparison of the environmental phenomena of plants and E51 O00 0) ES) A en ERS 5 5 cA Me aint ald ot anh cae 592 2) bhemostamponrtant relationsoteaninis | See eee 595 ae WuneUmMethodsor INVES tie a ulONee eer tee ere 595 551 HO VICTOR E. SHELFORD 3 The relation of physiological characters to geographic range. . 596 a Laws governing the reactions of animals.............. 597 by Law? of mimimumtys..755 152 ho eno ot eee 597 c Law of toleration of physical factors..--............5- 598 4. ~"Fentative laws of distribution’. .a.% 22204 ie eee oek one 600 De Clagsiticanionvolsenvaronmmlentses: ee et eee 600 1 Elementary principles:ef classification...... 2.5.5. 4..24.... 5 601 2 The best index of geographic complexes..................... 601 Hache animal tormeationssse anaes oe ene ae ee ee eee 602 (Classification ofetormstiOnsae seer eran anne 603 AM Erinciplesmote Semper brought a large number of these facts together as they existed in 1879. PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 555 of the biological type, the most noted of whom were contempo- raries of Darwin, such as Bates, Belt, Wallace and Brehm. Though anthropomorphic, at least in his wording, Brehm stands as one of the foremost writers of the time in this field of animal behavior. He had unusual power as an observer of the habits of animals. His particular excellence is his power of observing and picturing animal life as it is lived in nature, without taking account of which biology is a mockery and any theory of evolution a one-sided dogma. The success of the pictures which Brehm has given us of bird-bergs and tundras, of steppes and desert, of river fauna and tropical forest, raises the wish that they had been complete enough to embrace the whole world. Thomson. An excellent discussion by Craig (’08) who compares the be- havior and adaptation of the birds and mammals of the steppe of North America with those of the forest,? is the only recent paper of this kind, by a zoologist, which has come to my attention. There has been, so far as I have found, no comparison of the behavior of the animals of the different deserts or different steppes, etc. While physiological animal geography is a subject for experi- mental study, experimental methods can hardly be said to have been used in the study of geographic distribution. Experimental researches which have involved distribution are limited chiefly to investigations of the reactions and local distribution of aquatic and cave animals (Banta, 710). In the field of plant geography, Schimper’s (’03) work indicates the first step in the development of the world-wide aspect along physiological lines (Cowles, 09). This work opened a new and fruitful field for experimental work and field observation. Here Warming (’09), Cowles (’01), Whitford (’01), Transeau (’03, ’95) and others contributed much from the observational side, while others have done important experimental work. In the presentation of data and in the discussions here we illustrate two points of view for investigation by classifying the materials roughly into (a) those related primarily to the par- ®’ The work of Adams (’05, ’09), and Ruthven (06), was conducted with refer- ence to all the animals but from a genetic rather than a physiological point of view. 556 VICTOR E. SHELFORD ticular species of tiger beetles, and (b) those related to the entire group of animals inhabiting a given environmental complex. II. THE PHYSIOLOGICAL CHARACTERS AND DISTRIBUTION OF PARTICULAR SPECIES OF TIGER BEETLES A. MATERIAL: GENERAL HABITS The tiger beetles are graceful, predatory, swift-flying insects, whose bright colors and great variability have long been familiar. The following general account of habits applies to all the species especially considered here. The life-histories consist of the egg, three larval stages, the pupa and the adult. When the beetles Fig. 1 From left to right—the ventral, side, and dorsal view of the ovipositor of Cicindela purpurea with segments numbered. Three times natural size. Fig.2 The egg of C. purpurea in position in the hole in the ground made by the ovipositor. One and one-half times natural size. Fig. 3. The egg. Three and one-half times natural size. emerge from the pupal stage in summer, they are not sexually mature. Many species hibernate during the winter following emergence. Hibernating species (Shelford, ’08), reach sexual maturity after several warm days of spring. Previous to sexual maturity, the animals are in a different physiological state than when sexually mature, and they accordingly behave differently, congregate in different places, and never attempt to use the ovi- positor. PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 557 1. Copulation and egg-laying The beetles copulate on warm days, especially when the atmos- pheric humidity is high. The eggs are laid in small vertical holes, 7 to 10 mm. deep, made by the ovipositor (figs. 1, 2 and 3). 2. The larva and pupa The larva, which on hatching excavates a vertical, cylindrical burrow in the position of the ovipositor hole, is elongated, yellow- ish, and grub-like, with a number of brown spots on each abdom- inal segment, and with a dark-colored, strongly chitinized head and prothorax of unusual form. The head bears two pairs of large ocelli on the outer border of the upper surface, two pairs of small ones on the lower surface immediately below them (figs. 4 and 5). The mandibles, instead of extending downward or for- Fig.4 The larva, side view; h, hooks. Three times natural size. Fig. 5 The anterior half of the larva; an, antennae; mp, maxillary palp; m, mandible; o, ocelli. Three times natural size. ward as is usual in insects, are curved upward, and when closed, overlap above the anterior end of the clypeus. The lower side of the head is somewhat hemispherical, the upper side flattened, and, with the appendages, almost semicircular in outline. The prothorax is semicircular, flattened above, and projects at the sides. Taken together, the head and prothorax form nearly a circle. The meso- and metathorax and abdomen are soft and fleshy. On the dorsal side of the fifth abdominal segment is a JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, No.3 508 VICTOR E. SHELFORD hump-like outgrowth which bears a pair of long, curved, anteriorly directed hooks (A, fig. 4), a pair of short vertical spines, and many strong bristles. The last two abdominal segments are also armed with strong bristles. In moving up and down in the burrow the larva uses the dorsal hump, the legs, and the last abdominal segments. The animal turns around in the burrow by bending the anterior part of the body dorsally, and forcing the head past the dorsal side of the abdomen which is held in position while the anterior part is moved by means of the feet. When at rest in the burrow, the animal assumes a zigzag (Enoch, ’03) position as shown in fig. 4. When waiting for prey at the mouth of the burrow, the same general position is maintained, but the head and prothorax are bent at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the meso-meta- thorax. The legs, the vertical spines of the dorsal hump, and the strong bristles of the last two segments hold the animal in position. The head and prothorax just close the round opening and the mandibles are extended. If a small or medium sized insect pass near, the larva strikes atit with its head, by suddenly straight- ening the body in the region of the meso- and metathorax (Geof- froy, 1762), at the same instant closing the mandibles with a snap that can be distinctly heard, if the prey escapes them. If the insect caught be of small size, the larva darts backward to the bottom of the burrow with its prey which is devoured at leisure, the inedible parts being brought to the surface and cast out. If the prey be large (for example, a cabbage butterfly, as was observed by Weed, ’97), it is held at the entrance of the bur- row. The forward projecting hooks of the dorsal hump serve to prevent the butterfly from dragging the larva out of its hole, while its blood is being withdrawn. The pupa is of the usual beetle type (fig. 6). Pupation takes place in the ground. 3.. LFfoud The food of both larvae and adults consists of sow-bugs, centipedes, spiders, dragon-flies, butterflies, beetles, flies, and larvae of all sorts, in fact, any small animals that come within PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 559 reach. If larvae are not fed, they will not die for a week or two, or even longer, but the lengths of their periods of growth are greatly increased. B. HABITAT RELATIONS OF THE SOIL-INHABITING TIGER BEETLES (CHARACTERISTIC DATA) The environmental relations will be illustrated by the relations of three species of Cicindela purpurea Oliv. subspecies limbalis Klg., tranquebarica Herbst, and sexguttata Fabr. Fig.6 The pupa. Three times natural size. a. Crcindela purpurea limbalis The adults are beautiful red and green, though not strikingly conspicuous forms. Eggs are laid in June; the larvae hibernate usually in the second instar and pupate in the second summer. The imagoes emerge about a month after pupation, hibernate, and become sexually mature late in the third June. The larval life lasts twelve to thirteen months; adult life, ten months; two years between generations. 1. General behavior of adults. They are not strong fliers, but are very alert and start to fly whenever one approaches them. The form of the moving object is not important; size and move- ment produce the reaction apparently without reference to form and color. I have not been able to ascertain that they turn and face an approaching person with any degree of uniformity, 560 VICTOR E. SHELFORD as is asserted by Comstock (’04), and have never seen them fly into vegetation, or crawl into crevices. 2. Ecological relations of adults. a. General conditions at the point of study. My studies have been conducted along the west shore of Lake Michigan between Lake Bluff and Winnetka, Fig. 7 “Diagram showing Lake Michigan bluff as seen from the zenith. U, leve! surface of upland; BL, bluff; SB, sandy beach; M, water, L. Mich.; J, piers; to- ward the left is north; sand has lodged on the north side of the piers. AB and CD indicate positions of cross-sections below. Fig.8 Cross-section AB. Slumping bluff stage. The adults of C. limbalis are distributed from A—B; the larvae, sparingly, from EF to F. Other letters as in figs: Fig. 9 Cross-section CD; stage of some bluff stability and bare clay exposure. Adults of limbalis between C and D; larvae plentiful between G and H. Other letters as in fig. 7. Illinois, but my attention has been concentrated on the habitats near Glencoe, Illinois. Between the points mentioned, the lake is eroding its morainic shores. Steep banks have been formed by this action which are from 11.4 meters (38 feet) to 20.4 meters (68 feet) in height. PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 561 The steepness of the slope makes conditions severe for plant life. It is only where inactivity of forces of erosion has decreased the steepness of the slope, that scattered plants are present. Where the slope is still less steep, the bluff is sometimes covered with forest. On the upland adjoining the bluff are stretches of meadow, woods, and sometimes pastures, all intersected by paths, roads, and ravines. All these furnish bare ground which apparently is essential to these tiger beetles. At the base of the cliff is fre- quently found a narrow stretch of sandy beach, which varies in width from 1 to 25 meters (figs. 7, 8 and 9). b. Loeal distribution. The adult beetles of C. limbalis are found on the upland near the bluff in all of the bare places just Fig. 10 The burrow of C. purpurea limbalis; p.c., pupal cell. One-third natural size. described, and on the steep clay bank and the sandy beach— about equally distributed in proportion to the area of the bare soil exposed (figs. 7, 8, 9). If the number be greater in any one of the situations, it is on the sandy beach. If the adults be about equally distributed on the different areas, which of these are we to consider the habitat of the species? Let us inquire into the habits of the larvae. 3. Ecological relations of the larvae. a. Local distribution. I have carefully watched the larvae of this species (fig. 10) in their external environmental relations for five years in the vicinity of Glencoe. They are found almost exclusively on the clay bank (fig. 11). Occasionally larvae are found in bare places on the steep banks of the ravines. Three or four individuals were once found on the top of the bluff in a bare place on level ground, 562 VICTOR E. SHELFORD EXPLANATION OF FIGURES 11 The habitat of C. purpurea limbalis near Glencoe, Illinois, showing several stages in the development of the forest on the bluff. The area to the right of the © imaginary line between a and 6 is stable enough to support some sweet clover. Here the tiger beetle larvae are most abundant. The area between lines joining a and b and a and ¢ is in the early shrub stage. To the left of ac the shrubs are denser, and larger and some trees are present. 12 Habitat of C. tranquebarica in the pine zone of the ridges at the south end of Lake Michigan. The dark portion in the foreground is the shadow of a tree. At the left is the cattail zone of the depression; between a and b, the sedge zone; between b and c the zone of high depression plants. The white blossoms here are those of Parnassia caroliniana; their distribution, September, 1906, corresponds approximately to the distribution of the larvae of C. tranquebarica which arose from eggs laid in May and June, 1905. The portion above and to the right of c represents the higher portion of the ridge and the habitat of C. scutellaris. 564 VICTOR E. SHELFORD but these are the only ones found in such a situation, as compared with over six hundred actually dug from the clay bank. They are entirely absent from the sandy stretch at the base of the bluff. I have dug very many larvae of Cicindela lepida from this situ- ation, and have never found a single larva of C. limbalis. How- ever, larvae of C. limbalis are not equally abundant on all parts of the clay bluff. The portions which are very steep, subject to land slides in the spring, and very dry in summer, are essentially without larvae. The forest covered portions are without larvae. The shrubby parts are inhabited only in the open places. The bare places with a few herbaceous plants have the greatest nwmber of larvae. b. Migration of larvae. As I pointed out in 1908, the larvae of this species rarely migrate, but remain at the point where the egg was laid. Only fifteen per cent of them left their burrows during a period of two or three weeks after they had been dug from their normal habitat and placed in holes made with a wire in moist sand. In eighty-five per cent of the cases the larvae smoothed off the sides of these burrows, and remained in this very unnatural situation—one in which all of the physical conditions had been changed. The steep, sloping clay had been replaced by level sand, resistantly packed particles of clay, by coarse sand grains, and the solid edge of the burrow (fig. 10) by the crumb- ling sand. In the field, I have never seen larvae crawling on the ground. Burrows have been found empty in a few cases in digging about six hundred larvae. In one or two cases the dead larvae were found in the burrows and as these would soon disin- tegrate and leave the burrow apparently empty, vacant holes may have been left in this way. Then again, ants may overcome a larva, and after chewing off its antennae and tarsal joints, drag it from the burrow. While larvae may occasionally migrate, the empty holes are not so numerous but that their occurrence may be due to other causes. c. Loeal distribution of larvae dependent upon adjustment in egg-laying. The larvae vary in position from year to year appar- ently with the weather conditions at the time of egg-laying. They live for a little more than a year. In 1906 the full grown larvae PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY DO5 were found on the higher and drier parts of the clay bank. The eggs from which these larvae were hatched were laid in June of 1905. The total rainfall at Chicago, from January to June inclu- sive, was 42.5 cm. (17.1 inches), for April, May and June 29.0 cm. (11.5 inches), and for May and June 21.0 em. (8.4 inches) and for June 8.0 em. (3.2 inches). In 1907, cn the other hand, they were on the low places near the springy situations and in small gullies, the eggs from which these larvae hatched having been laid in June 1906. The rainfall from January to June inclusive in 1906 was 29.0 cm. (11.6 inches), from April to June inclusive 14.5 em. (5.8 inches), for May and June 10.0 em. (4.0 inches), and for June 4.7 em. (1.9 inches). The failure of the larvae to migrate stands out clearly even a year after the egg-laying took place. The larvae of this species usually adjust the depth of their burrows to the temperature conditions of the sand in which they were placed under experi- mental conditions. In nature, however, I doubt that these larvae can dig their holes deeper when the soil becomes dry and the tem- perature high, because at such a time the clay is very hard. d. Relation of larval habitat and distribution of food to the distribution of adults. In a natural indentation of the coast at Lake Bluff, Hlinois, a beach of considerable width has been depcs- ited and the bluff bears a very dense forest. No larval habitat is present, and the adults of C. limbalis are not present on the beach. Their food is at least as abundant here as where the clay bank is bare. As we have stated, the tiger beetles feed over an area much more diversified and much greater in extent than the breeding place or larval habitat. The adult beetles feed on any available animals. The feeding areas which are adjacent to like breeding places differently located, are frequently very different, and are occupied by very different food species. The food is then of necessity different for forms living in different places. In captivity the adults have been fed with lean meat of various sorts (beef, pork and mutton) which they eat readily when fresh. They also pick up the ants, Thysanurans, etc., in the cages, and 566 VICTOR E. SHELFORD when not fed, devour their own species. The food relations are, then, highly regulatory, the animal feeding on available food. 4. Experimental studies of habitat selection. a. Methods of experimentation.‘ Do the adults select their egg-laying place? To answer this question, adults were placed in cages containing soil of several kinds. Each kind was so arranged into steep and level parts, that about one square foot of each type was exposed. The adults placed in the cage were taken when the species was copulating freely. The soil was kept very moist up to the time the first ovipositor holes were made because this species lays only in moist soil. After this the wetting of the soil must be done very cautiously, so as to prevent washing eggs from the ground in steep parts. Accordingly, the holes were not obliterated from day to day and the counts are not accurate for the soil in which a large number were made because eggs are sometimes laid very close together and adjoining holes destroyed. Some eggs are deposited in irregular cracks and crevices where they are likely to be overlooked. The greatest care was taken to discover every hole made in the soils in which larvae do not occur in nature. b. Results. The following table shows the approximate number of holes made in the clay and probably the actual number TABLE 1 The distribution of ovipositor holes and larvae of C. purpurea limbalis under experi- mental conditions SAS | CLAY, 9 PTS. POREST | HUMUS, | pT. | CLEAN = HUMUS, | PT. | HUMUS | SAND, 9 PTS. | SAND Sih al s BAI lh Aes Li: | Sula | ies pa ees +. | — OR ih eh Holes 5.5) oO) ysineed) 0 0 0/0] 0 07 Orie \Larvae.....: 9 0 0 OVO OnieeO 0 | 0;|0 Pa aE Holes....... 21 Bip] 0 dO", | 0 04)= SON yenO. a Galea ; 2 = hiayaes ae, | 12 a 0) OM nO | 0 0 0 |10;0 Tet Ca \Holes.......| 17+ 7+ i! 0 | 0 | 0 0 0 | 0/0 |Larvae......| 24 10 1 ON Os Os = 0 QO One | S = steep; L = level. * Each experiment requires daily attention for from one to two months, as well as considerable greenhouse space. PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 567 made in the other soils, together with the number of larvae which appeared; 80 per cent on the steep slope, 98 per cent in clay. The count of holes includes some in the first stages of digging, mere scratches on the ground, and others which had been exca- vated to the usual depth with or without eggs being laid. c. Factors controlling egg-laying. Pairs taken in coitus were placed in cages containing sand only and level clay only. No larvae appeared in either case. The experiment with the level clay has not been repeated. Females placed in cages containing rough, steep clay, deposited eggs. Eggs are also absent from dry soils, whether steep or level. Slope, kind of soil and soil moisture are factors governing the deficiency or absence of eggs. A deficiency or excess in any one of these respects decreases the number of eggs laid, or causes them not to be laid at all. The animals are in the condition for egg laying for a short period. d. Method of selection. It has been determined by opening holes that eggs are not laid in all, and in one case the first holes made by a female were empty. This would tend to show that they try the soil before laying the eggs, but I have not been able in other cases to determine whether the first holes contained eggs ur not. To determine this, it would be necessary to watch a female all of.the time during several days. 5. Geographic distribution. a. Distribution of the species. This species occurs from the Island of Mount Desert on the coast of Maine, northward along the coast of Nova Scotia and New Brunswick, up the St. Lawrence River, through the region of the Great Lakes, and westward across the northern part of the great plains to Alberta, and south along the eastern slope of the moun- tains; southward in the upper Mississippi Valley to St. Louis. Its place in the great plains and southern prairie region is taken by other forms recognized as other color varieties, but so far as is known, similar in habits. These forms are the varieties or subspecies transversa, splendida, amoena, denverensis, and ludo- viciana. Splendida has recently been recorded by Sherman from western North Carolina. Occasional specimens are recorded from Kentucky, Tennessee, and northern New Jersey. It is evident, 568 VICTOR E. SHELFORD since none of these states were mentioned in the old state records of early collectors, that the beetles have dispersed into this region with the cutting of the timber and the building of roads and rail- roads, which have exposed large areas of clay bank. There are also taxonomic difficulties and lack of knowledge of larval habits. No map of the distribution of the species will be published until we have investigated the subject further. It is clear, however, that the distribution area of limbalis is one in which moist clay banks are common. It represents the margin of the ice sheet, the region of extensive clay deposits which are being eroded rapidly, and the slope of the mountains where erosion is also rapid. It is closely correlated with the behavior of the species. Its geographic distribution appears to be determined by the same factors as its local distribution. 6. Geographic variation in habits. The relations to soil and topography do not vary greatly geographically. The various races mentioned as occurring in the southern part of the range of the series differ sufficiently in structure and color to constitute subspecies in the opinion of good taxonomists. Still a number of observers, Messrs. Lantz, Wickham, Wolcott, Smyth, and Clover- dale, tell me that the adults of all are associated with clay banks. Near Chicago the larval life is a little more than a year, thirteen to fourteen months, and the adult life ten to eleven months. Criddle (’10) has confirmed his statement (’07) that the larval life lasts two years in Manitoba. The depth of larval burrows in Manitoba is 15 em., near Chicago, Illinois, 5-10 em.; the adult burrows at Aweme are 15 em.; at Chicago, in captivity, 5-8 em. b. Cicindela tranquebarica Herbst The usual color of the adults in eastern North America is brown. The life-history differs from that of C. limbalis in the following points: (1) Eggs are laid in May; (2) larvae pass the winter in third stage. 1. General behavior of adults. They are a little shyer than C. limbalis and more difficult to capture. They start when ap- proached by a moving object, and when alighting, frequently PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 569 turn toward the observer. They almost never alight on vege- tation. When caused to fly up from a narrow path, they fre- quently fly in a circle and return to a point behind a person moving forward. I have never seen them crawl under objects when pur- sued. They excavate burrows for the night and cloudy days. 2. Kcological relations. a. Area of special study. They have been studied specially at the south end of Lake Michigan. Here the species is found only on the ridges with pines. These ridges were originally thrown up under water near the shore. By the falling of the surface of the lake, which has amounted to a total of 18 meters since glacial times, ridges have been left out of water perhaps about as fast as they were formed. We have, then, a series of them of different ages, arranged in order of age. The youngest are nearest to the shore. Their width varies from five to thirty meters. Long, narrow ponds of corresponding age occur between the ridges. As a given ridge came above the sur- face of the water, it often received wind-blown sand; there is little or no vegetation on the youngest ridges. b. Local distribution. C. tranquebarica is absent from the ridges with sparse vegetation. On the ridges on which young conifers are found together with various herbaceous plants along the pond margins, C. tranquebarica is present. Adults are nu- merous along the margins of the ponds and all over the ridges, particularly on the sandy ‘blowouts,’ or points where the wind has removed some of the sand and keeps the vegetation from growing up. The beetles frequently burrow into the sand for the night and for hibernation. Food is abundant on the white sand areas and the beetles find advantage in its conspicuousness, which no doubt causes them to congregate on these places to feed. When an area of denuded sand, in which ponds or depressions are present, is deposited or exposed, vegetation appears first nearest the water. Humus accumulates, blackening the soil and making conditions favorable for more plants, so that a turf is soon formed near the water. Similar processes are going on higher up on the side of the pond margin and it is soon captured by the plants. It is on the ridges in which the soil just above the very moist or sedge zone is blackened by humus, but still not completely occupied by the roots of plants, that we find C. tranquebarica. 570 VICTOR E. SHELFORD The succession of plants does not end here, and we find shrubs coming in and the turf migrating farther and farther up the slope of the pond margin. Shrubs shade the pond margin. The pines on the ridges are displaced by oaks and the undergrowth of her- baceous plants becomes denser; the pond margins are densely covered with turf or shaded by shrubs and trees. Though the higher portions of the ridges, namely, the feeding grounds, are still bare, C. tranquebarica is not to be found. The species must then have some vital relations to the pond margin. Fig. 13 The upper part of the burrow of C. tranquebarica, pupal cell shown by dotted line. One-third natural size. 3. LHeological relations of the larvae. a. Local distribution. The general behavior of the larvae is similar to that of C. limbalis The holes are, however, deeper and straight: (fig. 13). The larvae of C. tranquebarica are found in clay, alluvium, or sand, and have been reared or identified from all of the kinds of soil mentioned in the discussion of the adults. In our sandy area of special study, they are found near the pond margins only. In all the localities referred to in connection with the adults, the larvae have PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 571 been found in soils with a moisture content similar to that near Chicago. b. Migration of the larvae. The larvae of this species rarely migrate. I have watched the larvae that appeared in the exper- imental cages after the soil had been permitted to become very dry, but none of them moved during several weeks. c. Variation in local distribution. The distribution of larvae in Gary in 1906 corresponded to that of the white blossoms of Parnassia caroliniana which are shown in fig. 12. Their position varies from year to year, according to the rainfall as in the case of C. limbalis. d. Relation of the larval distribution to the distribution of the adults. On the pond margins where herbaceous plants have been displaced by shrubs, C. tranquebarica is not present, al- though the higher parts of the ridges are bare and much like they are where C. tranquebarica is present, indicating that the adults disappear with the larvae. 4. Experimental studies of habitat selection a. Method. Adults of C. tranquebarica were placed in cages which were much like those which were used in the work on C. limbalis, but the soil was all essentially level. b. Results. The results were as follows: TABLE 2 The distribution of ovipositor holes and larvae of C. tranquebarica under exper imental I conditions SAND, 9 PTS.) CLAY HUMUS HUMUS, lpr. CLEAN SAND) ees 4 elo) (see eee eet 7 0 13+ 19 wanting 1907 | TAY Oe ier ces ak 4 0 25 1 wanting jeelolests =: ? 3 25+ 18 wanting bimanvae. 09S & 11 3 31 1 wanting 1908 { Holes. A202 oe, a: 16 wanting 29+ 11 46 GATE AOC Abr cccer 5 | wanting 41 a 24 c. Factors controlling egg-laying. One striking difference is that the females did not lay with the same precision as did the Sia : VICTOR E. SHELFORD females of C. limbalis. Very many holes were made in the fresh, clean sand, but eggs were laid in only afew of them. These holes in the fresh sand have frequently been opened and found to be without eggs. Why fresh, clean sand should be so attractive to the females and fail to satisfy the final act of egg-laying is strange. Pure humus appears to be avoided -when either moist or dry. During the experiments, the different kinds of soil werekept as nearly equally moistened as possible, but a slight depression was provided in each. These were wetter and were especially selected by the females when standing water was not present. Eggs are not laid in dry or very wet soil. Moisture is evidently an important factor in controlling the egg-laying. I have found the beetles copulating and depositing eggs in my cages, on damp, cloudy days. This has not been observed in the case of most other species. It would appear, then, that light is not very im- portant. However, as in the case of C. limbalis, deficiency or excess 1n one factor is sufficient to cause the soil to be avoided or only little used. 5. Geographic distribution. The habitat relations of C. tran- quebarica are less definite than those of C. limbalis. We have found it on the bare clay of the overflow flats of the Arkansas River at Dodge City, Kansas, depending on stream moisture; on a path at the top of a terminal moraine at Waverly, New York, de- pending on climatic moisture; on alluvium along the Des Plaines River at Lyons, Illinois; and on the residual and alluvial soils of various parts of Colorado, New Mexico, Nevada and Idaho. In nearly all these localities, the soils examined were similar in their moisture content. The species is always nearer water courses in the more arid climates. The only place in which the soil mois- ture was deficient about the burrows was at Las Vegas, Nevada, at the height of the dry season. This is a region of winter rain, where the soil would be much moister in spring, the egg-laying season of the species. The larvae were much nearer the water (Las Vegas Wash) than I have found them in the moister climates. The bottoms of the burrows were nearly as moist as we commonly find them near Chicago. PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 573 This species includes several races which seem, according to the accounts of entomologists and my own observation, to be very similar in habits. It stretches across the middle region of North America, and ranges from the sea level to 7536 feet and throughout four of the zones of Merriam without regard to vege- tation, efficient temperature or other climatic condition (table 3). A consideration of the races involved is necessary (Horn, ’05; Wickham, ’06). The records represented by dots (fig. 14) adjoin- ing the Pacific Coast are for well recognized races. All others have been cast into synonomy by good taxonomists. The remain- ing records including 1I—9 of fig. 14 are then for a single race. Fur- thermore two of the races sometimes recognized, horiconensis and Wickham’s southern race, have been produced by suitable conditions during the late larval and pupal life. Table 3 shows the relation of a single race to climatic conditions. TABLE 3 The relation of the distribution of C. tranquebarica to climate. Vegetation and rain- fall are approximated, especially for Albertaand B.C. Life zones are approximated where detailed maps are not available. The vegetation at Kalso is in question but the species has been taken in the mountains near, where there can be little doubt that it is coniferous forest. The numbers at the left refer to fig. 14. PLACE i STATE = ioe ee RAIN FALL VEGETATION | ( See mM) COLLECTOR 1 Woods Hole Mass. 5 45.0 deciduous | Transition Author forest 2 | Meridian Miss. 358 58.0 deciduous | Lower Aus- U.S.N.M. forest tral 3 Alamosa Col. 7536 15.0 steppe Upper “ Author 4 Aweme Man.; 1180 17.45 steppe Boreal Criddle 5 | Innisfail Alb. 3600 15.0 steppe Boreal TN. Will- ing 6 Caliente Nev. 4407 7.0 desert Lower Aus- Author tral 7 \|Hagerman Id. | 2600 10.0 semi-desert | Upper Aus-, Author tral | 8 Kalso Bai: 1870 25.0 conifer for- Boreal ‘I. W.Cockle est 9 Bridgeport Cal. 64 Seid desert Lower Aus- Wickham tral JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 3 574 VICTOR E. SHELFORD Fig. 14 The distribution of C. tranquebarica as shown by locality records. The map indicates general topography. The numbered localities are selected to show relations of the distribution of a single race to topography, climate, vegeta- tion, and Merriam’s zone (p. 573). | PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 575 Such distribution is characteristic of species which occupy environments made by streams, lakes, soil, or other local condi- tions. Such species are local in their distribution. 6. Geographic variation in habits. The life-history at Chicago is similar to that of C. hmbalis. Criddle expresses the opinion that the larval life is two years in Manitoba, but has not yet confirmed the statement. The depth of larva burrows at Chicago is 22-50 em.; at Aweme, Manitoba, 43-50 em. c. Cicindela sexguttata This is a brilliant green form. Its life-history differs from that of C. imbalis in the following points: (1) Egglayingoccurs about one week later, (2) larvae pass the winter in both second and third stages, (3) the adults emerge in August, but usually remain in the pupal cells until spring. 1. General behavior of adults. The adults of this species are less alert than those of the other species just discussed. They frequently fly and alight on leaves of bushes. When frightened in the woods they frequently crawl under a leaf or other object on the ground. Sometimes they remain very quiet for a time when the body is not all covered and the bright green wing covers stand out in contrast to the brown leaf under which they are hiding. They crawl under the bark of trees at night and in cool or cloudy weather, both in nature and in cages, and rarely dig into the soil. But one individual moved soil when in captivity. This one was in a cage in which a piece of bark lay on the sand present. It was found to have removed a small amount of sand to make room for its body under the bark. 2. Ecological relations of adults. C. sexguttata has been studied in Massachusetts, New York, Illinois, Indiana, and Tennessee. It lives only in or about forests of a certain particu- lar type. It is entirely absent from those that have developed on low, wet ground, such as marsh forests and humid climate flood-plain forests; it 1s not found in the early stages of the oak forest nor in the beech and maple (the climax forest of eastern 576 VICTOR E. SHELFORD North America) nor in the cotton wood or true coniferous forests. It is abundant in and about the white-oak, red-oak hickory forest (figs. 15 and 16). Climatic conditions influence the relations of this species to different types of forests, e.g., in eastern Tennessee they are found in much more xerophytice forests than in the vicinity of Chicago where the rainfall is appreciably less. EXPLANATION OF FIGURES 15 General view in east Tennessee. 16. An open place in the oak and hickory forest of the mountain side, a typical C. sexguttata habitat. The individuals were seen copulating on the log in the foreground. I~ ™ 578 VICTOR E. SHELFORD The Cumberland mountain district was originally completely forested. The forest of the valleys was chiefly beech and maple; of the mountain slopes, oak and hickory; of the mountain tops con.fer. The soils are various, resulting from many different kinds of rock. We were unable to find this species in the strictly red cedar, pine or beech forest. However it occurs in the more mesophytic oak containing ravines of strictly conifer forests and in forest of mixed oak and conifer. Sherman records it from such situations also. This is not true near Chicago. The beetles come out into the little streaks of sunshine on fallen trees and bare ground in the early forenoon to feed. The writer has seen them picking up insects from the logs in such locations. From my observations in the field I am confident that bare spots of mineral soil, fallen trees, etc., are essential to this species. Fig. 17 The burrow of sexguttata. One-third natural size. It is only in such places in virgin or little disturbed forests that I have found them copulating. However it is not a particular type of forest that is essential to this or any other species of tiger beetle, but a certain environmental complex in which a certain ‘consistency and moisture of soil and a certain amount of sunlight and bare ground are the essential things. 3. Ecological relations of larvae. a. General behavior. The burrow resembles that of C. limbalis and is shown in fig. 17. This larva is less active than those of the other species, but other- wise is similar in habits. b. Local distribution. The larvae of this species are very difficult to find because they are for the most part under leaves. PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 579 In eastern Tennessee I found them in bare spots on the steep mountain slopes where steepness of slope had prevented the accumulation of leaves, and in parts of the forest that had been fired recently and the leaves accordingly removed. They occur in clays resulting from the weathering of the following rocks: Briceville shale, Newman limestone, Knox dolom te, Chicamauga limestone, and Conasauga shale. Near.Chicago they have been found on clay till, and on sandy till mixed with humus. 4. Experimental studies of habitat selection. a. Method. This species has been placed in cages containing various kinds of soil as have the others. The light relations were the same as in all of the other experiments, although the light is of more impor- tance. b. Result: Tables 4-8. Distribution of larvae of C. sexgut- tata under experimental conditions. TABLE 4 Relation to slope; sand dry at surface CLEAN SAND, 9 PT. eee CLAY,9PT. (FOREST SAND | HUMUS1 PT. HUMUS, 1PT. HUMUS 1907 Ps 2 REMARKS | | Stale L |s|t/ ss ee Peat iolesee (mer oer 0) /-0))0-- | O- (0--/0-F) 0-25 10.0) OS —ssteep fanrae eet ee ONO pio” | 0. 14 7 | 5 0 0|0|L = level TABLE 5 Relation to shade; sand dry at surface. glass roof and cage screen Sunlight in cages ts reduced to one-third by | SAND, 9 PT. FOREST | CUBAN SAND | HUMUS, | PT. Chay | ukeos = - REMARKS Selecw sae vu |sjulsiul Ah a Poem Re Mie en | 3's oe a Z | | TICLES ORS nek. 21. Sean ee ? rome Pe sa} 0 0 | S = shaded PANVAC © vit: bala 0 8 0 |0|0)|0| 0) U = unshaded 580 VICTOR E. SHELFORD TABLE 6 Clean sand, moist | | Opn: 7 Pr. 1908 | “Sax> | womusier. | AY lrumuaden| RAGHIONGaT HAT ae | : Lot1l , Holes) Mc. e ene 5 | 5+ 18 1 Tatvyaes 4. ou.c2 ess | 4 | 6 4 1 Lot De | | Holes .. 2-- | 0+ 0+ 0 Clay very dry Warviaien ease ee 4 3 1 0 Lot 3 lolests. a cemerner 0 | 10 -10+ 5 Two under leaf ILENE. SS ob cbvore 6 nas 0 3 12 1 Lot 4 | Holes 565 ane 2+ 1i+ | 54 | 36 | Three under leaf Larvaes. aeons aoe | | 37 [ae BS A eles) Se = | a — = TABLE 7 Relation to thick covering of leaves AND, 9 PT. , ler. rie aaMes, ae | SENN eoueD: ee SOS | ( All soil covered anv eee e 7 34 28 8 with leaves ex- | cept clean sand | | TABLE 8 Total larvae shown in tables 6 and 7 ee PE aa ae : r Z cu ve sano | gumgs,iee. | AX | momug1er. | SBMARES : a | | Miamvele ere eee \eoee2all 90 56 43 Grand total 210 Total under leaves: 76. PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 581 c. Factors controlling egg-laying. The relations to light and leaves are interesting. The larvae were frequently at the edges of the piles of leaves in such positions as eggs might be placed by females, the posterior half of whose bodies were concealed by the leaves (fig. 18). Females have been found making ovipositor holes, when the posterior two-thirds of the body was under a leaf. The depositing of eggs in the unshaded portions of the cages may be due to the reduced intensity of light, or the shadow of the cage frames, which falls upon some parts of the soil at any Fig. 18 Showing the position of the larvae of C. sexguttata in a cage. The black spots represent the larval holes. The stippled portion represents the approximate area in shadow during the middle of the day. given time. Nearly all parts pass into shadow for a time during each day. All of the eggs may then have been deposited when all or a part of the animal’s body wasin the shade. The reduction of the intensity of the light to one third that of normal out-of- door light may act as a partial shadow to this species. The experiments will be repeated in the full sunlight. As will be seen by an inspection of the tables most of the eggs were deposited in the sand with a little humus. None were laid in pure forest humus. The fresh sand and clay were ignored when they were allowed to remain dry. Muddy places were avoided. It is evident that egg-laying is governed by (a) kind of soil, (6) soil moisture, (c) slope, (d) light, (e) temperature (activity only 582 VICTOR E. SHELFORD on warm days). Under conditions unsuitable in any one factor, few or no eggs are laid. 5. Geographic distribution. The geographic distribution of C. sexguttata is exactly what the general habitat relations would lead one to expect. Within fifty miles of Chicago, I have found it always associated with the white-oak and red-oak and with a single exception also the shag bark hickory. The same is true in east Tennessee. Comparing the distribution of the trees, we find that the combined extent of the white-oak and hickory represent almost exactly the distribution of this species (fig. 19). That is, the geographic distribution is the exact function of the local dis- tribution (Ruthven, ’07). Fig. 19 A combination of the maps of Schimper ’03, and Transeau, 03, showing the geographic plant formations of North and northern South America and the distribution of Cicindela sexguttata. 1a, c, d are forests with broad thin leaves. la. Dense tropical evergreen forest, rain-forest. ic. Dense temperate evergreen forest, temperate rain-forest. 1d. Deciduous forest. The large black dots in this area represent locality records of C. sexguttata; the heaviest dots combined with crosses are placed over the centers of states from which it isrecorded. The lines x and y show the relation of its distribution to that of two characteristic trees of the deciduous forest. The continuous line (x) represents the distribution limits (except along the Atlan- tic Coast of the white-oak (Quercus alba) ; the broken line (y) represents the distri- bution limits of the shag bark hickory (Hicoria alba), except where its limits are coincident with those of the white-oak. The distribution of these is not the same as that of the deciduous forest because the map is based on area with more than twenty per cent of woodland. In the savanna region (3b) these trees occur along the streams as does C. sexguttata. 2. Coniferous forest (with narrow thick leaves). This is mixed with the deciduous forest in the region of the Great Lakes. In southern Unites States it does not properly belong to this map because it is dependent upon soil rather than climate (p. 600). 3a. Tropical steppe and savanna. 3b. Temperate savanna. 3c. Temperate grassland or steppe. 4. Evergreen forest with broad thick leaves. Sa. Scrub or thorny forest which merges into desert. 5b. Desert; 3-5 is very arid desert-like steppe. Unshaded area in the north is tundra. PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 583 — | | 5 | ; aa Ba Aare rd) Pex] 2 os eed ORG 3c [bed4 5a! THAIS y | oo 584 VICTOR E. SHELFORD It is not to be understood that these forms are in any way directly related to the trees, but the trees represent the general conditions in which the beetles will live and reproduce. The species is an inhabitant of one of the ‘climatic’ realms and will be found continuously distributed where the forests are con- tinuous. 6. Geographic variation in life-history. C. sexguttata rarely appears in northern localities in the autumn and it is probable that it remains in the pupal burrows until spring. The species is reported as appearing both autumn and spring in some southern localities. At Chicago, the adults appear during April and May, while in the western part of the geographic range of the species they do not appear until late in June, after the heavy rains which soften the soil, so that the imagoes can dig to the surface. d. Other species 1. Experimental studies of habitat selection. By similar methods, I have determined the breeding place of the following species: C. scutellaris, high, dry sand with a little humus, or sand which is not shifting; C. formosa generosa, slightly shifting sand; C. lepida, shifting white sand; C. duodecimguttata, very moist dark soil; C. punctulata, soils with some humus and moist at egg-laying time; C. purpurea, same as punctulata, but in moister places, not repelled by considerable grassy vegetation, bare spots necessary as breeding places. In every case the range of the adults is far wider than the breeding grounds. 2. Geographic variation in habits. In captivity the larvae of all the species studied at Chicago close the burrows near the mouth and go to the bottom when the soilis dry. Here they remain inac- tive until water is applied. No such closures have been noted in the field, except C. lepida, which lives on the dry sand dunes. Criddle (’10) says: In Manitoba, there are often long intervals of inactivity of the larvae of manitoba, venusta, limbata, lecontei, and probably others, during the summer months. At such times the larvae close their burrows at PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 585 the top, and remain apparently without food, and do not grow appre- ciably. In 1907, larvae of venusta and limbata closed their holes on June 12, and some did not appear again until August 25, nearly two-and- a-half months. A few, however, would open up at night, throw out a lot of earth, and then retire again. These larvae were always active when dug out. This strange habit may be due to the dryness of the soil to some extent, though it is not altogether so, as holes have remained closed during wet weather, and they are always opened in autumn or late summer, and deepened before winter, no matter what the condition of the ground is. The extreme heat of the sun may also be a factor of some importance. The beetles are unquestionably influenced by tem- perature, and will go into winter quarters earlier on a dry, hot fall than they do during a cold one, and hot summer days are much preferred for commencing winter homes. The following table shows the depth of burrows at Chicago and at Aweme, Manitoba. It includes all available data. TABLE 9 Showing the relative depths of hibernation burrows of adults and burrows of larvae, of the same species, in the same soil. Manitoba, Criddle (07, 7°10). Compare with table 10 LARVAE AbuL? HIBERNATION Q | CHICAGO AWEME =) CHICAGO AWEME ——— = S SPECIES Z wn i ’ B Jepth of ° F ° : Depth of S Pepin of Depth of Burrow B ee Adult in a EO a yer De Hibernation ) i tion cm, cm. cm. cm. €. limbalis......| clay 5-10 15-20 clay 5-8 7-15 C. tranquebarical sand? | 22-50 43-50 | clay 15 15-80 CMiormosaes. ¢) sand 30-50 125-200 sand 62-117 C. seutellaris.... 5 Or ~ i | « lecontel....... sand 25-45 70 | sand 25-64 Crlepidaees.....sands| 60-90 145-175 | C. 12-eguttata ... allu-| | | vial | 5-10 15-37 clay | 10-15 5*25 C. repanda sand | 10 | clay 5-10 15-20 D86 VICTOR E. SHELFORD TABLE 10 Showing the comparative meteorological conditions in Chicago and Brandon (28 miles northwest from Aweme) during active period of tiger beetles, April to Septem- ber, and during the time of digging hibernation burrows (September ) . ea 2 Ge si a 3 ae eee ey ae am 4m uy . 5 5 as aS) BS o¢ ve 5 Be aye aa Z =< Bi <8 Ze 2 =; tay & pS aL 25 a & = a Do a SIS S MB ae Zz 2 Za ra oe a Aw 5A G AS De Sa & < = <= as = z e 7a) 4 a 3 fe) > Tg Ea) = 2 & Ba Ae 7% ° Zw zu ze S 2p i) A < B< ae ged go gm eB et & = rt = = = a in hrs. deg. percent deg. deg. deg. in. about Chicacou naa 19.3 1695 70 | 100 43 4 71 a7 33.4 1BRRHNGKOIM pncn ee seonc, oti 1510 68 SO 33 66.4 | 38 17.45 On comparison of the data for the two points in question in table 10, we see that the amount of rainfall, the extremes of temperature and the length of season as well as the amount of sunshine differs widely at Chicago and in the vicinity of Aweme, Manitoba. Comparing these data with those found in table 9, we note that the larval burrows are deeper in the climate which is most arid and coldest in winter. Likewise the depth of the hibernation burrows is greatest where the temperature is lowest during the period of digging. The shorter season, fewer hours of sunshine, and drought accompanied by the periods of inact vity described by Criddle may be the cause of the longer ife-histories referred to in the case of the three species especially considered here. C.. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS We have noted various features of tiger beetle behavior. A discussion of the general bearing of this will now bepresented under the following heads: (1) Importance of the breeding in- stincts and breeding place, (2) the relation of behavior characters to habitat and associated forms, (3) the meaning of variation in behavior, (4) relation of local and geographic distribution; importance of various factors. PHYSIOLOIGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 587 1. The importance of the breeding instincts and the breeding place We have shown that the adults range over an area much greater than that which the larvae inhabit and that a species is entirely absent where feeding habitats of the adults is represented and the ege-laying place or larval habitat absent. Those tiger beetles which hibernate in situations different from the one in which the larvae are found, always return to the breed- ing place to deposit eggs. When the breeding place disappears, the species also disappears. The larval habitat or egg-laying place is much narrower and more definitely circumscribed than any other part of the habitat. The breeding place and the breed- ing instincts are, then, the center about which all other activities of the organism rotate. They are the axis of the environmental relations of these organisms. a. Comparison with other activities and relations. The breeding place and breeding instincts must usually be considered in con- nection with the feeding ground, and feeding instincts as well as other factors. The tiger beetles will not breed where there is not sufficient nourishment for considerable periods. The feeding place is often the second consideration after breeding. In the tiger beetles, however, the feeding structures and habits are so generalized that their food is plentiful everywhere, and the food relations need only be mentioned. A third important environ- mental relation is that to means and place of escape from those environmental factors which tend to destroy the organism, such as its enemies, extremes of weather or climate, ete., but all these are of secondary importance. b. Fixity of breeding instincts. The determination of their degree of modifiability or fixity would require experimental work which I have as yet been unable to accomplish. There is, however, good evidence from field study that the breeding instincts are most fixed of all the instincts. Since such behavior characters in the tiger beetles are usually specific or racial, they are probably modified only by the gradual processes of evolution. 588 VICTOR E. SHELFORD 2. Relation of the behavior to habitat and associated forms There is the greatest difference in the behavior of the different species. I have as yet been unable to study this critically, but it is at least a very promising field. a. Behavior and habitat. As we have noted, C. sexguttata has for example, various peculiarities of behavior which are related to the forest conditions in which it lives, which are not possessed by other forms. As we noted, when it is frightened from a rock or bare place, it frequently alights on the leaves of a low tree or bush and crawls under the bark of trees for the night, or even to hide when pursued. None of the other species which I have studied behave in such a manner. I have never seen C. tranque- barica crawl under objects when pursued. It does not alight on the green leaves of trees or shrubs when they are present. It excavates burrows instead of crawling under objects. The be- havior of these two species is correlated with the general environ- mental conditions. b. Inter-physiology, and inter-psychology. Tarde (’03) has recently written an article on inter-psychology—the psychology of the relations of individuals of the same species (man). To this should be added the behavior between different species, while acting or living together as one. He suggests that the social psychology of man may be traced to the inter-psychology and physiology of the lower animals. If this is true, then we can be more certain that the inter-psychology of the higher forms has developed from the inter-physiology of the lower forms (Craig, 08 [2]). I have looked for the inter-physiological manifestations in these beetles, but have found none striking except the mating instincts. There is little or no social life. I have found animals belonging to totally unrelated species attempting to copulate in some cases where the two are dissimilar. It seems quite evident from my observations that the more marked phases of the behavior of the tiger beetles arise not from inter-physiology, but from relations to the species which are quite PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 589 different in behavior and habit from the beetles themselves. This I propose to call intermores-physiology or psychology.® c. Intermores-physiology. We have seen the behavior of these beetles when pursued, their flight, alighting only to wait for the moving object to come near when they start up again, the hiding under leaves of C. sexguttata, ete. All this is illustrative of the behavior which is related to forms antagonistic in behavior and habits. The study of the behavior of forms which live together in the same situation from the point of view of the relations of the behav- ior of the different species is a promising field of investigation. It will throw much light on the problems of psychology as well as ecology. 3. The meaning of variation in habits We have noted geographic difference in the length of the life- history and the depth of the burrows. In 1908 we pointed out that severe conditions increase the length of the various stages. Criddle has noted that the larvae do not feed for a considerable period in the summer. ‘This accords fully with my experimental results on the larvae of the Chicago species They stop eeding and close their burrows when the soil becomes too dry, or the condition otherwise severe. The lengthened life-history of Man- itoba forms may be due to the shorter seasons and the failure of the larvae to feed for a considerable period. We pointed out also (’08) that the larvae respond to stimuli by deepening their burrows. The soil conditions in Manitoba have not been studied, but the different depths of the burrow under different experimental conditions is suggestive. The correspondence between experimental results and the dif- ferences in the so-called habits in the different localities suggests that the apparent variation in habits may be only a regulatory behavior response that probably would be found common to most individuals of the species. This could be settled by experimental study. 5 Mores (Latin), ‘behavior,’ ‘customs,’ ‘habits.’ JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, No. 3 590) VICTOR E. SHELFORD 4. The relation of local and geographic distribution We have suggested in the case of the three species here consid- ered, that the geographic distribution of each is the geographic distribution of the conditions in which it lives and breeds. We have visited several of the different climatic realms in which each of these three and many other species occur. So far as ordinary observation can go, the breeding and general living conditions are similar in the different localities, even though the climate, as in the case of Cicindela tranquebarica, is very different. The same conditions are found by the species through its moving near to water in the arid climates, as compared with the more moist climate. It is customary to conclude that condi ions are the same because the species is the same. Here we have tried in a general way to determine whether the species is the same throughout its range, by the study of the condition, and experimentation on the animals. This is the only mode of attack that can yield definite results. It is highly desirable, however, to carry the observations onsoil and other environmental factors further with the use of physical factor instruments. It is equally desirable to conduct actual experiments on each species of beetle at a number of points, especially those near the outskirts of its geographic range. This would, no doubt, reveal differences of detail which we have over- looked, but which cannot, so far as present observation goes, be of great importance. 5. Factors governing geographic distribution Our data show clearly that the breeding pe iod is crucial as determining the local distribution, and that an excess or deficiency in any one factor is sufficient to decrease the number of individ- uals present, or cause them to be absent entirely. Any factor dif- fering sufficiently from the optimum for a given species is sufficient to limit its distribution. There can be no important difference whether a deficiency in moisture is due to insufficient rainfall or to distance from or height above water, or whether an excess of temperature is due to latitude or exposure and accordingly the same factors must govern both ocal and geographic distribution of the tiger beetles. PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 591 Ill. THE PHYSIOLOGICAL CHARACTERS AND DISTRIBUTION OF GROUPS OF SPECIES (FORMATIONS) A. ZOOLOGICAL OPINIONS AND DIFFICULTIES There is, I believe, a general opinion among laboratory zool- ogists to the effect that no important generalizations can be made from data concerning the environmental relations of animals. In other words, the data of natural history cannot be organized into a science. There are at least three good reasons for the prevalence of such views. ‘The first of these is that such zoologists are often familiar with only a few of the very common species of animals, common because their habitat relations are such that they can flourish in the conditions which civilization produces or because they do not have definite habitat relations, being in this respect an excep- tion to the rule. The lack of attention to the taxonomy of com- mon forms is also a factor. Animals which belong to different species, genera, or even families, are often quite similar in appear- ance and so are sometimes regarded as single species. Articles regarding American species have occasionally been published under the names of Kuropean species not found in this country, or at least rare and confined to northern latitudes. The second reason results from the fact that relations of animals to their environment are not understood. Often we do not dis- eriminate between the important and unimportant periods of relation to environment in a life-history. The third reason lies in the fact that the environment of animals is also not understood and the various stages and phases have not been classified so that habitat relations can be readily described. The lack of knowledge of taxonomy and the simpler facts of natural history requires no discussion. On the other hand, our knowledge of animal behavior and animal physiology has been but little applied in the study of animals in nature, and the knowl- edge of environments, which is in the hands of the plant ecologists and geographers is not at all well known among zoologists. 592 VICTOR E. SHELFORD B. THE NATURE OF THE ENVIRONMENT The animal environment is a complex of many factors. Each is dependent upon another or several others, in such a way that any change in one factor affects several. Some of the most im- portant environmental factors are water (atmospheric moisture), oxygen, carbon-dioxide, nitrogen, temperature, pressure, currents, excretory products, food, enemies, and materials for abode (soil, vegetation, etc.). In nature, such combinations of these and other factors, in the proportion requisite for the maintenance of the life of a considerable number of animal species, are cal ed environ- mental complexes (Davenport ’03). C. ENVIRONMENTAL RELATIONS OF ANIMALS The only features which space will permit us to discuss are the physiological and ecological relations. In this field we must confine ourselves to a comparison of plants and animals and the bearing of the important environmental re’ations on geographic distribution. 1. Comparison of the environmental phenomena of plants and animals An organism is a system of inter-dependent and definitely related processes (i.e., a system in dynamic equil brium). The definite relations of the inter-dependent processes of the organism (dynamic equilibrium) may be disturbed by changes in the exter- nal forces which surround the organism and to which the processes are adjusted (Jennings, 06). Such a disturbance is what we ordi- narily call stimulation. With this idea as a background, we give in parallel columns a comparison of the more obvious relations of plants and animals to their environments, as shown by experimental work. The column on the right is written by Dr. H. C. Cowles, Associate Professor of Plant Ecology in the University of Chicago. PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 593 TABLE 11 a Comparison of the responses ‘of (motile) animals and (sessile) plants ANIMALS (MOTILE) PLANTS (SESSILE) I. Animal behavior is evident be- cause of motility: II. When an external stimulus is ap- plied to an animal, it responds mainly by movements which are usually more or less random, and which bring the organism into various conditions, one of which relieves the disturbance and the organism resumes nor- mal activity, in conditions which brought the relief. These conditions are not necessarily advantageous. (Jen- nings. ) III. Animal behavior is usually plas- tic, 1.e., may be modified by external stimuli, but some- times appears rigid. IV. (Animal structure is only slightly plastic. occurs in the early stages). Structural modifications rarely of importance in the life of the animal. V. The motile organisms of a given habitat usually have common behavior characters. Com- bined structural and behavior characters of comparable forms of a given habitat, or of similar habitats are ecologically equiv- alent.® VI. The breeding activities of ani- mals are probably least modifi- able and least regulatory, but are governed by the same laws as the other activities. LOLs Odep 410))e The plasticity usually | are | (Shel- | I. Plant behavior is inevident be- cause of lack of motility. II. Plants respond more evidently through changes in form and structure. III. Plant structures are usually plas- tic but frequently appear rigid. IV. Structural modification of plants is often of importance in the life of the plant. V. The plants of a given habitat usually have common structure and functions, or those that are ecologically equivalent.® VI. The reproductive organs and em- bryonic stages of plants are less modifiable than the vegetative stages of adults. §’ The meeting of the same general conditions in a different way constitutes ecological equivalence. The term was first used by Cowles. 594 VICTOR E. SHELFORD b. Discussion of the parallel statements. (11) Animal (or motile organism) distribution at any given time is a better in- dex of the condition at’ that time than the distribution of plants, because when the conditions at a given point become unfavorable, the animals (or motile organism) move to another situation, while the plants (or sessile organisms) remain or die. (V) The fifth is not well established. However, a prelim- inary testing, for example, of the rheotaxis of a arge number of brook animals has shown them to be strongly positive, strong positive rheotaxis being a common behavior character. Many of them have special means of attachment which may be brought into play with great speed. The darters are strong swimmers and are able to live in rapids by virtue of their swimming powers and positive reaction, while the snails (Goniobasis) which occupy similar situations, are able to maintain themselves because of the strength of the foot and positive reaction. The two are ecologically equivalent. The sixth statement appears to be generally true, but needs experi- mental confirmation. The proposition may be summarized as follows: The behavior and general mode of life of animals are the superficial equivalent of the structural phenomena in the vegetative parts of plants. Behavior and vegetative structure are convenient indices of physiological conditions within the organism. To illustrate this still further, let us consider the plants of the sand areas at Chicago and in Manitoba. As compared with Chicago plants, the plants of Manitoba differ in size and structure under the more arid conditions found at the point where Criddle’s studies were made. The Manitoba tiger beetles do not, so far as I can find, differ from the Chicago forms in any of the struc- tural characters which have to do with their meeting those condi- tions, but they dig their holes deeper and require longer time for trans- formation. The tiger beetles of the desert and semi-desert and the tropical sand areas (Batesand Westwood, ’52; Snow’77; Lucas, 83) are usually nocturnal or crepuscular; those of moister and cooler areas are diurnal—a differencein behavior. Desert plants are structurally adapted to withstand the desert conditions PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 595 (Schimper ’03) and differ in this respect from plants of cooler, moister situations. Again, the difference between the tiger beetles which deposit their eggs in different soils is not structural difference in ovipositor, but a different physiological response of the organism. The activities mentioned are general and may be separated, into feeding, breeding, etc. Probably all are governed by the same general laws. In the study of all the animals of a given environment we are confronted with the question of what activi- ties are most important, just as in the study of particular species. 2. The most important environmental relations of animals The strength of a chain is the strength of the weakest link. The activity which determines the range of conditions under which a species will be successful is the activity which takes place within narrowest limits. Failure to recognize this principle is in part responsible for the general chaotic state of our knowledge of natural history. Men have often failed to interpret the relations of animals to their environments because they have regarded the records of the occurrence of all stages of the life-history as equally important. They have considered the occurrence of the most motile stage in the life-history important, as for example, the occurrence of an adult butterfly. Plant ecologists would have met with equal success if they had studied only the environmental relations and distribution of wind-disseminated seeds. While we have indicated above that the breeding activities are most limited (Merriam, ’90; Allen and Verrill fide Merriam, ’90; Adams, ’08; Shelford, ’07, 710; Reighard, ’10; Herrick, ’02; Clark, ’10), there are no doubt exceptions to this, and at the present stage of our knowledge the subject is one for investigation. Whatever this activity may prove to be in a given case, it is of great import- ance and deserves comment, both as to method of investigation and bearing on distribution. a. Method of determining the most important activities. The first step is field observation—the continuous watching of animals throughout a number of life cycles. Experimentation is almost 596 VICTOR E. SHELFORD always necessary also. It is only under unusually favorable conditions that the relative importance of the various periods of the life-history of an animal can be ascertained, without experi- mentation. On the other hand, experimentation must be cor- related with field observation. Simple experimentation on the behavior of animals in the laboratory does not illuminate this matter to any appreciable extent. 3. The relation of physiological characters to geographic range Our studies of animal distribution usually consist of a list of names of species with a statement of the distribution of each, followed by such interpretation as suits our particular purposes. Attempts actually to study the environment in any detail, or the reactions of animals to the conditions of environment are rare indeed. Furthermore, the groups most studied (higher verte- brates) are probably least dependent upon their environmental complexes; they are often decidedly migratory and because of their size least adapted to experimental study. Some quite extensive attempts to correlate geographic range with meteorological conditions have been made, but always with only implied reference to the physiological character of the organ- isms themselves, and usually with the use of species as an index of conditions. A few factors have been emphasized, and these usually in the sense of barriers. Merriam (’90, naming also Allen and Verrill but not citing their papers) emphasizes temper- ature; Walker (’03) atmospheric moisture. Heilprin (’87, p. 39), like most paleontologists, emphasizes food. There appears to be no adequate basis for the idea that the same single factor governs the distribution of most animals. Such a conclusion probably results from leaving the organism out of consideration. Since the environment is a complex of many factors, every animal lives surrounded by and responds to a complex of factors, at least in its normal life activities within its normal complex (Jennings, ’06, p. 180). Can a single factor control distribution ? A large amount of physiological study of organisms has been conducted with particular reference to the analysis of the organ- ism itself, but with little reference to natural environments. PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 597 Many of the factors and conditions employed in such experiments are of such a nature that the animal never or rarely encounters them in its regular normal life. Other experiments are, however, attempts to keep the environment normal, except for one factor (Jennings, 06, p. 180). These have demonstrated that in ordi- nary reactions an animal responds to the action of a single stimu- lus. Certain general laws govern the reaction of animals to different intensities of the same stimulus. a. Laws governing the reactions of animals. The laws govern- ing the stimulation of animals in the experiments of the laboratory are familiar subjects in the textbooks of physiology (Verworn- Lee 99). With respect to a given factor used in the experiment, it has been found that there is a range of conditions within which the activities of the animal proceed without marked stimulative features. These are called optimal conditions. Take, for exam- ple, temperature. There is in most animals which have been subjected to experimentation with temperature, a range of several degrees in which the animal is not markedly stimulated(optimum). ‘As the temperature is raised or lowered from such a condition, the animal is stimulated. If the temperature be continuously raised, a point is reached at which the animal dies. The tempera- ture condition just before death occurs is called the maximum. The lowering of temperature produces results comparable in a general way to those of high temperature. The condition just before the death point is reached is called the minimum. With various limitations, unimportant in this connection, the same is true with respect to each of the various factors which an animal encounters in nature. Which factor determines the limitations of occurrence of an animal on the earth’s surface? The answer to this is suggested in Liebig’s Law of Minimum. b. Law of minimum. Liebig’s law of minimum is summarized by Johnstone (’09, p. 234): A plant requires a certain number of food stuffs if it is to continue to live and grow. Each of these food substances must be present in a cer- tain proportion. If it is absent the plant will die; if present in a minimal proportion the growth will also be minimal. This is true no matter how abundant the other food stuffs may be. The growth is then dependent upon the amount of food stuff present in minimal quantity. 598 VICTOR E. SHELFORD In nature this law applies both geographically and locally. As applied to animals it includes both food and material for abode. The presence, absence and success of a species is determined by the necessary material which is absent or present in minimal quantity. c. Law of toleration of physv:al factors. We have noted (p. 581) in the case of the tiger beetles, that for the egg-laying to take place the surrounding temperature and light must both be suit- able, the soil must be moist, probably also warm, and must satisfy the ovipositor tests with respect to several factors. Egg- laying, the positive reaction, is then probably a response to several factors. Furthermore, after the eggs are laid, the conditions favorable for egg-laying must continue for about two weeks if the eggs are to hatch and the larvae reach the surface of the ground. The success of reproduction depends, then, upon the qualitative and quantitative completeness of the complex of conditions. The negative reaction, on the other hand, appears to be different. The absence of eggs, the number of failures to lay and therefore the number of eggs laid in any situation can be controlled by qual- itative or quantitative deficiency or excess with respect to any one of several factors. The presence, absence, or number of eggs laid is, then, determinable by a single factor, according as it is near the optimum or near either the maximum or minimum tol- erated by the species. It is, however, not necessary that a single factor deviate; the effect is similar or more pronounced if several deviate. In nature the presence or absence, or success of a species or group of species, its numbers and sometimes its size, etc., are largely determined by the degree of deviation of a factor or factors from the range of optimum of the species or group of species. The cause of the deviation in the factor or factors is not of importance. For example, in the case of a soil inhabi- ting species such as Cicindela tranquebarica, to which consider- able moisture is necessary, the cause of the deficiency in one case may be climatic deficiency in rainfall, in another a rapid drainage due to steep slope and porosity of soil. The former is what we have called a climatic (geographic) condition and the latter a PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 599 local condition. The evidence for the law of toleration as apply- ing to distribution is good so far as the local distribution is con- cerned and, since the same factors are involved in the geographic, there is no difficulty in the application of the law to geographic distribution also. The fact that in so far as our observation can go at present, the tiger beetles are found in similar conditions throughout their ranges, is also good evidence for the application of both the laws of minimum and toleration to geographic dis- tribution. In fact the law of minimum is but a special case of the law of toleration. Combinations of the factors which fall under the law of minimum may be made, which makes the law of toler- ation apply quite generally; for example: food and excretory products may be taken together as constituting a single factor. From this point of view the law of toleration applies, the food acting on the minimum side, excretory products on the maximum. d. Application of the law of toleration to geographic distribu- tion. ‘The so-called centers of distribution are often only areas in which conditions are optimum for a considerable number of species (Transeau, 705; Adams, ’02 and ’05). The relation of the law to centers of distribution is shown in the diagram below; above the line is the scale of stimulation with the limits of toler- ation shown and below the parallel relation of the distribution and relative abundance. Minimum limit Range of Maximum limit of toleration optimum of toleration iL | » | | | | | —— Center of distribution —— Absent Decreasing Greatest abundance Decreasing Absent On account of the nature and distribution of climatic and vegetation conditions, it follows that as we pass in one direction from a center, one factor may fluctuate beyond the range of toler- ation of a species under consideration; but as we pass in another direction it is very likely to be a different factor. The divisions of Merriam’s zones into arid and humid portions is an illustration of this, and seems to constitute a begging of the temperature question. 600 VICTOR E. SHELFORD 4. Tentative laws of distribution On this general basis tentative laws of distribution may be formulated. a. Governing the limit of geographic range. The geographic range of any species is limited by the fluctuation of a single factor (or factors) beyond the limit tolerated by that species. In non- migratory species the limitations are with reference to the activ- ity which takes place within the narrowest limits. In migratory species this activity limits the range only during a part of the life cycle. b. Governing distribution area. The distribution area of a species is the distribution of the complete environmental complex within which it can live as determined (1) by the activity which takes place within the narrowest limits and (2) by the animal’s power of migration. Barriers in which some one factor of the complex fluctuates beyond the limits of toleration of the species at all periods of its life-history may prevent the animal from reaching all the suitable habitats, but this is the result of the working of the laws rather than an exception, and faunistic animal geography begins where physiological animal geography ends. D. CLASSIFICATION OF ANIMAL ENVIRONMENTS While this is a necessary subject for discussion, it is with much hesitancy that I undertake it here, where brevity is necessary. Obviously, since our subject is physiological animal geography, we shall confine our attention mainly to those aspects which are geographic in extent in the sense that they are nearly uniform over a considerable area of the earth’s surface. If one is to understand the most elementary principle of syn- ecology,’ he must first recognize the distinction between local (edaphic, Schimper, ’03; minor and secondary, Adams, ’08), and climatic or geographic (extensive) environmental complexes (major, * Synecology is the ecology of formations. In the classification of formations and environments, no nomenclature has been established for the larger or cli- matic units. Dr. Cowles tells me that plant formations do not represent climate and therefore ‘climatic’ should not be used. However, every ecologist and geog- rapher knows the significance of ‘climatic’ and ‘local.’ The geographers object PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 601 Adams, ’08). The climate of a region and all that goes with the climate are a climatic or geographic complex. Opposed to these are local complexes, such as water (streams or lakes), soil, expos- ure, or lack of exposure, ete. For example, in the Mohave Desert the climatic conditions are characterizable as hot, arid, etc., but within the desert are streams fed by mountain rainfall. These streams are local conditions in themselves, and also produce other local conditions such as moist soil, ete. These are not dependent upon the dominant conditions within the desert. The relation of local and geographic condition has been the subject of much careful consideration by Cowles (’01), Schimper, (03), Shelford (07), Adams (’08) and (’09). We will turn our attention, then, first to an inquiry as to the best index of climatic or geographic condition or major environ- mental complexes. 1. The index of climatic or geographic conditions or of major environmental complexes The vegetation from the standpoint of whether it is forest steppe, or desert, etc., does not involve animals, and represents climatic complexes in a general way. It is the most important factor in the control of temperature, moisture, light, food and material for abode’ and is a good index of the conditions which surround animals. Tentatively it may be used as a basis of classi- fication of the animal environments. A knowledge of these en- vironmental complexes may be acquired from the data of physi- ography, meteorology, plant ecology and physiological plant geography (Schimper, ’03). to the use of the term ‘geographic’ for the climatic environments because, to them, the local environments are equally geographic. Every zoologist under- stands the meaning of ‘geographic’ and ‘local.’ Adams’ terms, ‘major’ (climatic) and ‘minor’ (local) are to be preferred but one must continually explain their meaning. The writer uses ‘climatic’ and ‘geographic’ here because their meaning is clear. 8 Material surroundings have been regarded as of great importance in the case of mammals. Hagenbeck states that he always supplies an environment which resembles as far as possible the natural environment. He has imitation icebergs for polar bears, etc., and finds that this adds greatly to the success of keeping his animals in captivity. 602 VICTOR E. SHELFORD E. THE ANIMAL FORMATION Animals select their habitats, probably by trial and error, as is indicated by the making of additional holes and parts of holes by the tiger beetles only to reject them without laying eggs. The simple fact of selection is, we believe, very familiar to all naturalists. A given environmental complex is selected by a number of species. All of the animals of a given habitat constitute what is known as an animal formation (Warming, (’09); Clements, (’05) ; Schimper, (03); Adams, (’08); Grisebach, (’48, fide Clements). It follows that there is a certain physiological or ecological similarity and ecological equivalence in the forms that thus select the same or similar complexes. It follows® that the animals of different deserts, different deciduous forests, different steppes, etc., are ecologically and physiologically similar or ecologically equivalent if the deserts, the forests, and the steppes, etc., are similar (Adams ’05). Tentatively, formations may be characterized in general phys- iological or ecological terms (mores). The characterizations of plant formations have thus far been largely based on growth-form. Attempts to find structural similarity among animals of similar habitats, while not failing in particular cases, have led to no good results or generalizations (Ritter, 09). The great difficulty with this point of view is that it must, because of the great diffi- culty of investigation, remain for a long time largely a matter of speculation. The attempts which have been made are based on natural selection speculations or Lamarckian speculations. It should be noted further that the relations of a given group of animals to their habitat and to each other is more complex than that of the plants which are commonly treated in this manner. The conspicuous plants of a given environmental complex, except in the tropical forests, are usually rooted in a single plane which greatly simplifies the relations of plants to their environments. 9 A term is needed to cover such characters. The term mores (Latin), ‘cus- toms,’ ‘behavior,’ ‘habits’ is suggested as best covering the need. It stands opposed to form and forms; thus steppe mores meaning the behavior of character- istic steppe animals or an animal or animals with characteristic steppe behavior. ‘PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 603 Animals, on the other hand, have different habitats which are not related to one plane, and so must be separated into similar groups for purposes of the comparison of one formation with another. For example, the animals which burrow into the ground in a given environmental complex cannot be compared with those that live in trees in another, but must be compared with subterranean forms. Accordingly, for comparison, animals must be separated into: (a) burrowing forms, (b) ground forms, (c) arboreal forms, etc. 1. Classification of animal formations based on environmental relations a. Principles of classification. We have noted that all of the animals of a given environmental unit constitute a formation, and that environmental units are classified into climatic or geog- raphic (extensive) and local. The groups of animals which occupy the climatic or geographic environments may be called ‘climatic or geographic animal formations.’ The groups of animals which occupy the local environments are called local formations (soci- eties, or associations). If one is to study the relation of animal physiology and behav- ior to the environmental conditions, in so far as this can be done by field study, these distinctions must be kept clearly in mind. For example, in dealing with animals of the great North American steppe area, to treat together all forms found here (as is common practice) would lead to endless confusion from our point of view. The forms which belong to the water (aquatic), those that live in the timber along the ravines, in the sand areas, are forms belonging to local formations. Those that occupy the plains proper belong to the steppe formation. Some forms may belong to both, in which case the facts should be taken into account.?° 10 An animal should be associated: first, with the breeding conditions; second, with the feeding conditions; third, with the conditions affording shelter. Calvert. (08) attempted to find correlation between the distribution of Odonata and vege- tation zones with negative results. Aside from the reasons given by the author, it should be noted that Odonata breed in the water and, excepting forms breeding in water holding plants, belong to local conditions, and no correlation was to have been expected. Correlation of the distribution and species is, however, not essen- tial to our point of view. 604 VICTOR E. SHELFORD b. Climatic or geographic animal formations of the world based upon physiological similarity and ecological equivalence under sim- ilar conditions.|. The distribution of the similar environments is given by Schimper (’03) and Transeau (’03, ’05) and in fig. 19. Only the environments and distribution of the formations is given here; much concerning the mores of the different format ons may be obtained from the existing literature but we do not have it well enough organized to present here. 1 Formations of forests with broad, thin leaves. a Tropical rain-forest formations (fig. 19, 1a). Environment: Dense forest with broad thin leaves, two or three heights of trees, uniformly distributed rainfall and nearly uniform temperature. Distribution: Large areas Mexico and Central America (Belt, ’88),” and South America (Bates, and [Clodd, ’93]), southern Asia and East Indies (Wallace, ’94), and several small areas in Africa (Garner, ’01). b Monsoon-forest formations. Environment: Similar to the rain-forest but with a dry season in which the leaves fall. Distribution: Adjoins areas of rain-forest. e Temperate rain-forest formations (fig. 19, Ic). Environment: Similar to the tropical rain-forest, but much less luxuriant and in different climatic conditions. Distribution: East coast of northern Mexico, southern U. S8., western Chile, southern Japan (Kobelt, ’02), New Zealand. d Temperate deciduous forest formations (fig. 19, 1d). Environment: Similar to the temperate rain-forest, but much less dense and deciduous. Distribution: Eastern North America, north to the Great Lakes; Chile, north to 35° (Darwin, ’45, p. 242); Europe, north of the Alps (Mosley and Brown, ’63, p.) and south of 60° (Kobelt, ’02; Brehm, ’06); Japan and vicinity of Okhotsk. 2 Formations of forests with narrow, thick leaves (coniferous forest formations; further study will probably subdivide these) (fig. 19, 2). Environment: dense evergreen forests with little undergrowth. Distribution: North America, north of the Great Lakes and Columbia River extending southward in the mountains (Seton, ’09) ; Eurasia, north of 60° and southward in the high mountains (Brehm, ’96). This outline is essentially that arranged for a committee of the Geographic Society of Chicago on the Classification of Geographic Materials, and is parallel to one for plants by Dr. H. C. Cowles and to one for Human Geography by Dr. J. P. Goode and Miss J. B. Obenchain. 22 Some characteristic literature on the natural history of the various formations is cited where possible. See Thomson’s introduction to Brehm (’96). PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 605 3 Formations of savannas and grasslands. a Warm savanna and steppe formations (fig. 19, 3a). Environment: Dry season in spring; scant rainfall; grassland with scat- tered thorny trees, occasionally thickets, and dense forests along pee streams. Distribution: The great plains of Africa (Roosevelt, 09-10), and South America. b Cool savanna formations (fig. 19, 3b). Environment: Similar to the warm in aspect, but more often with trees in groves. Distribution: A narrow belt nearly surrounding the Great Plains, Uru- guay, Australia, and eastern Siberia (Brehm, ’96). e Cool steppe formations (fig. 19, 3c). Environment: Cool, dry, winters cold, grassland with trees only along the principal streams. Distribution: The great plains of North America (Craig, ’08; Seton, ’09), south central Asia (Brehm, ’96), De La Plata southward to Patagonia (Hudson, ’92). 4 Formations of forests with broad, thick leaves (fig. 19, 4). Environment: Subtropical conditions with winter rain and hot, dry summers. Distribution: California, the Mediterranean region, Chile (near Val- paraiso, Darwin ’45), South Africa, southwest Australia. 5 Formations of deserts and scrub areas (semi-desert). Environment: Various types of arid condition with thorny vegetation. a Scrub or semi-desert formations (fig. 19, 5a). Distribution: Mexico, Texas and Central America (Belt, ’88; Bailey, 05), eastern Brazil, southern South America, arid Australia (in part), northeastern Africa (Plowden, ’68), India, and China. b Desert formations. Distribution: Southwestern North America (Merriam, 90), South America, Sahara and Arabia (Brehm, ’96), central Australia and south Africa. 6 Tundra formations. a Arctic tundra formations. Environment: Cold, treeless, with short cold summers. Distribution: Circumpolar (fig. 19). b Alpine tundra formations. Environment: Similar to a. Distribution: Mountains above the tree line. 7 Formations of fresh water. a Still water formations (lakes, ponds and sluggish streams). b Turbulent water formations (swift streams and eroding lake shores). 8 Formations of the sea and its shores (amphibious formations, principally breeding on shore, feeding in sea). a Ice-bound shore formations (Arctic) (Brehm, ’96; Shackleton, ’10). b Tropical and temperate shore formations. ec Oceanic Islands formations (the island fauna, representing the migra- tion of land animals by sea) (Wallace, ’92). JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, No. 3 606 VICTOR E. SHELFORD 9 Formations of the waters." a Formations of the sea (marine) (M’Intosh, ’04). Limestone bank formations (littoral) (Brooks, ’93). Rocky (eroding) shore formations (Littoral) (Verrill, 72; King and e Russell, ’09). Ne 3 Sandy (depositing) shore formations (littoral). 4 Open sea formations (pelagic) (Heilprin, ’81). 5 Deep sea formation (mudline and abysmal). It should be noted that the various formations of the list are to be found duplicated or essentially so in various parts of the world. This point of view emphasizes the resemblances in the behavior and ecology of forms living under similar conditions. In the case of the great zoogeographic regions, there is no duplication, and differences are emphasized." 13 The distribution of aquatic animals is governed by: a. Kind of bottom (Sum- ner, 09). b. Depth, current, temperature and all other factors which are modi- fied by depth, ete. 14 There are no doubt several valid objections to such a classification, when thus statically stated and as mapped by some workers, such as Schimper. We present it thus because the recognition of the existence and general features of a phenomenon must precede its analysis. However, one of the most important of these objec- tions arises when one inspects a number of maps of the distribution of species. Such an inspection shows that the distribution areas of some species are bounded by the limits of the deserts, steppes, forests, etc., while those of others bear no relation to these regions. The former afford no difficulties while the latter deserve further comment. Species that, apparently, do not fit our classification fall under three heads: 1. Species whose range is far greater than that of any realm or plant formation, covering perhaps several realms. 2. Species that occupy only a part of the plant formation in which they belong. 3. Species whose range lies within a region intermediate between two realms or plant formations. The first group is made up of species dependent wholly or in part upon local conditions. Some species are always associated with local conditions, e.g., C. tranquebarica, p. 574, fig. 14. Such forms are relatively independent of climate, geographic plant formations, etc., and are dependent upon such conditions as are afforded by streams, sand areas, lakes, etc. ; The species which are in part dependent upon local conditions usually belong properly to the climatic or geographic conditions of one formation, and invade another formation in local conditions which happen to be like the geographic of the one, in respects essential to that species. For example, some of the species of Orthoptera belonging to the great plains, or North American steppe region, in- vade the sand areas in northern Indiana where the climate is suitable for forests. Such phenomena are common and have been discussed by Adams (’02, 09). ¢ PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 607 IV. THE PROBLEMS, METHODS, AND RELATIONS OF PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY A. SOME PROBLEMS OF PHYSIOLOGICAL-ANIMAL-GEOGRA PHY 1. Behavior problems. That the behavior of animals reflects their general conditions of existence, I think will not be seriously doubted. Some of the geographic problems may be stated as follows: a. Behavior and geographic conditions. How much, and what features of the geographic conditions, for example, such as the steppe, the tundra, or the tropical forest, are reflected by the behavior of animals? Are these characteristics acquired by the individual or are they hereditary? In connection with the first question, I quote Brehm on the Arctic fox: His whole character and conduct are quite different from those of our reynard and his near relatives. One scarcely does him injustice in describing him as a degenerate member of a distinguished family, unusually gifted, intelligent, and ingenious. Of the slyness and inge- nuity, the calculating craft, of his congeners he evinces hardly any trace. His disposition is forward, his manner officious, his behavior, foolish. He may be a bold beggar, an impudent vagabond, but he is never a cunning thief or robber. He follows his worst enemy; without fear he approaches a man sleeping in the open, to snap at a naked limb. The behavior of the penguins of Antarctica as described by Shackleton is equally interesting. Is it, or is it not, a picture of the hard struggle, intense cold, and monotony of the tundra? 144—_Continued. Our second group (or species which occupy only a part of the formation to which they belong) is important. Maps of the distribution of trees.by Transeau (05) illustrate this. An inspection of these shows that there is a central area in the formation, in which species are most numerous, and in which we may con- clude the conditions for the majority of the forms are best (optimum). Suitable investigation would no doubt show that species thus narrowly distributed are limited by the termination of their necessary conditions, and that relative num- bers are dependent upon the law of toleration. Our third type, or species which occupy intermediate ground between the realms, are few so far as observation has been recorded (Ruthven, ’07). The above discussion is, however, based on the distribution of morphological species. If, however, there are physiological differences, behavior differences, or even regulatory responses in the different formations, morphological species and their distribution. are unimportant matters. 608 VICTOR E. SHELFORD b. Inter-psychology and inter-physiology (between ecolog- ically similar forms). The problems of the inter-psychology (Tarde, ’03) and inter-physiology (p. 588) are equally important in connection with the relations suggested above. Some aspects of inter-psychology are not inter-specific, but concern forms with similar habits. In the steppes ecologically similar animals fre- quently act as one species. Mr. Roosevelt has said: ‘‘One of the most interesting features of African wild life is close association and companionship so often seen between totally different species of game” (Roosevelt, 09). Mr. Roosevelt shows the zebra and hartebeest herding together. c. Intermores-psychology and physiology (between ecologic- ally dissimilar forms, or antagonistic forms). The relations of animals of different size, habits, ete., to one another involves the most striking features of behavior. Much of the behavior which tends to protect the species from enemies falls under this head. This aspect of behavior has its geographic as well as its local significance. For example, the problem of the effect of the presence or absence of large carnivores on the behavior of other animals present in a climatic formation would deal with the broader geographic side. d. Geographic variation of mores. The phenomenon of geo- graphic variation in behavior and physiology probably usually belongs to wide ranging species. The best available data are probably on the nesting habits of birds (Knowlton ’09). 2. The more purely physiological problems. Let us illustrate by the desert. The dominance of the reptiles in the desert is well known, and Dr. A. P. Mathews has called my attention to the fact that the excreta of reptiles is uric acid which is a substance of low osmotic pressure passing out with the feces in a dry state; little water is used in the disposal of the excreta. This, together with the thick skins, enables reptiles to meet the conditions of the desert. Desert mammals must meet the same conditions. In these, water is required to wash the urine out of the tubules. Mammals are few in the desert; their physiological relations there are not well known; Swain (’03) has pointed out the high specific PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 609 gravity of the urineof the California coyote. The fact that many mammals do not drink for long periods in the steppe and desert regions is well known. Livingstone (’58) noted it in the Kalahari Desert, Roosevelt (09) in east Africa, and Craig (’08) in the case of the prairie dogs and birds of Dakota. (Verworn, ’99 p. 280.) B. METHODS The methods of physiological animal geography have been indicated from time to time throughout the paper. The method may be characterized as combined experimentation and field observation, each conducted with reference to the other, and both conducted with reference to animal formations. tends, unless barriers are encountered; faun- istic animal geography begins where physiological animal geo- graphy leaves off (pp. 573, 582, 598). d. Thesuccess of a species within a territory and its limitations to that territory are determined by fluctuation of one or more environmental factors, toward or beyond the limit tolerated by the species (p. 599). e. Species which select those environmental complexes which are determined by streams, soil, or other situations which occur only locally, are local in their distribution (pp. 574, 5). f. Animals which select a habitat which is geographic in extent and which represents the dominant conditions of an area, are distributed throughout their area and are usually not so wide ranging as the species which select the local conditions (p. 582). PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 613 g. The dominant vegetation of a given area which possesses some degree of uniformity of climate (as, for example, the decid- uous forest of the United States), is the best index of general conditions, as it not only presents the results of the conditions, but makes certain types of environmental complex for the animals (pp. 582, 601). ' h. The field of plant ecology and of ecological plant geography present the best data on the distribution of animal environmental complexes (p. 601). 2. The physiology and behavior of animals a. In animals, behavior characters take the place of growth- form in plants. Animal formations may be characterized by the behavior, physiological, and habitudinal relations (mores) of the constituent animals, while plant formations are superficially characterized by structural characters which indicate the physio- logical conditions of the constituent plants (593). b. Animal behavior, physiology and general mode of life (mores) probably reflect the geographic conditions such as cli- mate, general surroundings (vegetation) and other animals present (pp. 588, 607). c. Physiological animal geography offers a field for experi- mentation and observation which will have important bearing on human geography, sociology and psychology, and the general problems of biology and evolution (p. 609). ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The author wishes to express his indebtedness to the staff of zoology of the University of Chicago, especially to Prof. C. O. Whitman for encouraging the study of natural history; to Dr. C. M. Child, who suggested our type of experimental study of the tiger beetles several years ago: he is indebted also to Dr. H. C. Cowles for much advice and information in the field of plant ecology; to Dr. Wallace Craig and Prof. H. H. Lane for criticising the entire manuscript; to Professor William Ritter and Mr. Ellis 614 VICTOR E. SHELFORD L. Michael for suggestions; and to Mrs. Mabel Brown Shelford for tabulating the data furnished by the gentlemen whose names appear below. I am especially indebted to the following, who very kindly sent me locality records included on the maps. Many of the locali- ties are in remote parts. Mr. C. C. Deam Mr. J. D. Evans Prof. J. S. Hine Mr. James Johnston Mr. A. W. Andrews Mr. W. Knaus Prof. H. F. Wickham Prof. A. L. Melander Prof. 8. A. Forbes tre, 18G, TR, Jett Mr. G. P. Mackenzie Dr. E. C. VanDyke Dr. R. H. Wolcott Prof. D. E. Lantz + Prof. E. P. Felt Prof. Wm. McIntosh Mr. Germain Beauleiu Mr. Chas. Stevenson Mr. B. H. Walden Mr. E. D. Harris Mr. Albert L. Borrows Prof. G. W. Herrick Mr. Chas. W. Leng Prof. R. S. Woglum Mr. G. M. Dodge Mr. C. N. Ainslie Mr. Norman Criddle Mr. Tom Spalding Prof. 8S. A. Johnson Mr. Wm. Beutenmiiller Mr. C. S. Brimley Mr. E. P. Venables Mr. I. W. Cockle Mr. E. M. Anderson Mr. T. N. Willing Dr. Henry Skinner Mr. F. F. Crevecoeur Mr. James Hunsen Prof. F. H. Snow Mr. H. P. Loding I am also indebted to Dr. Swartz, Dr. Henry Skinner, Mr. William Beutenmiiller and Dr. Samuel Henshaw for the privilege of examining the collections in their charge, from which data were obtained. PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY 615 BIBLIOGRAPHY Apams, C.C. 1902 Southeastern United States, a center of distribution of flora and fauna. Biol. Bull., vol. 3, pp. 115-131. 1905 Post-glacial dispersal of the North American biota. Biol. Bull., VOI Blo fo), a) 1908 Ecological succession of birds. The Auk, vol. 15, pp. 109-153. Bibliography. 1909 Isle Royale, Biological survey of Michigan. Rep. Mus. Univ. of Mich. Geol. Surv.(Lansing). Bibliography. Baitey, V. 1905 Biological survey of Texas. U.S. Dept. Agr., N. A. fauna, no. 25. Banta, A.M. 1910 A comparison of the reactions of a species of surface Isopod with those of a subterranean species. Jour. Exp. Zool., vol. 8, nos. 3 pp. 248-310 and, 4, pp. 439-488. Bates, H. W. anp Westwoop, J. O. 1852 On the habits of the Coleopterous genus Megacephala. Trans. Ent. Soc. London, 2d Ser., vol. 2, pp. 49-58. Bates, H. W. (EH. C. Ciopp) 1893 The naturalist on the river Amazons. 6th Edition, London. Brpparp, F. E. 1895 Zoogeography. Cambridge University Press. Brett, THomas 1888 The naturalist in Nicaragua. London. BreuM, A. E. 1890 Vom Nordpol bis zum Equator. Stuttgart. 1896 From north pole to equator. London. Translation by M. R. Thomson, introduction with bibliography by J. A. Thomson. BrenuM, A. EK. anp RossMAssutER, E. A. 1864-67 Die Tiere des Waldes, 2 Bd. Leipzig (not seen). Brooks, W. K. 1893 Salpa in its relation to the evolution of life. Johns Hop- kins Univ. Studies, Biol. Lab., vol. 5, p. 129. CALVERT, P: P. 1908 The composition and ecological relations of the odonate fauna of Mexico and Central America. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. Proc., vol. 60. Bibliography, pp. 486-88. : Cuark, F. N. 1910 Plan for promoting the whitefish production of the Great Lakes. Bull. Bur. of Fish, vol. 28, 1908 pp. 637-642. CLEMENTS, F. E. 1905 Research methods in ecology. Lincoln, Nebr. Comstock, J. H. 1904 Manual for the study of insects. Ithaca, N. Y. Cowtss, H. C. 1901 The physiographic ecology of Chicago and vicinity. A study of the origin, development and classification of plant societies. Bot. Gaz., vol. 31, pp. 73-108, and 145-182. 1901 Plant societies of Chicago and vicinity, Bull. Geog. Soc., Chicago, no. 2. 1909 Present problems in plant ecology. Am. Nat., vol. 43, p. 356. 1911 A textbook of botany. Part on ecology. American Book Co. In press. Craig, Wattace 1908 North Dakota life: plant, animal, and human. Am. Geog. Soe., Bull. vol. 40, pp. 321-415. Bibliography. 1908 The voices of pigeons regarded as a means of social control. Am. Jr. Sociol., vol. 14, pp. 86-100. 616 VICTOR E. SHELFORD CrippLe, N. 1907-1910 Habits of some Manitoba tiger-beetles. Can. Ent., vol. 39, April, pp. 105-114; 2d paper, vol. 42. Jan., 1910, pp. 9-16. DarRWIN, CHARLES 1845 A naturalist’s voyage around the world. London. Davenport, C. B. 1903 The animal ecology of the Cold Spring sand spit. Univ. of Chicago, Dec. Pub. Ist series, pp. 157-76. Enocu, F. 1903 The life history of Cicindela campestris, Proc. Ent. Soc., London, pp. 10-19. GarRNER, R. L. 1901 Apes and monkeys, their life and language. Boston and London. Grorrroy, EK. L. 1762 Histoire des insects. Paris, 1762, T. i, p. 139. Goope, J. Paut 1904 Human response to the physical environment. Journal of Geog., pp. 333-348. Happon, A. C. 1903 The saving of vanishing data. Pop. Sci. Monthly, vol. 62, pp. 222-229. > HaGeNnBEcK, K. 1909 Beasts and men. London. Heiuprin, A. 1887 The distribution of animals. Appleton. Herrick, F. H. 1902 The home life of wild birds, a new method of the study of the photography of birds. New York. Horn, WALTHER 1905 Systematischer Index der Cicindeliden. Deutsch Ent. Zeit. Suppl., Feb. 1. 1908-10 Genera Insectorum, Fase. 82. Carabidae-Cicindelinae. Hupson, W. H. 1892 The naturalist in La Plata. London. Hovuau, R. B. 1907 Hand book of trees of the northern States and Canada. Lowville, New York. HupsBarp, G.G. 1896 The Japanese nation: A typical product of environment. Smithson. Rep. 1895, p. 667-88. Jennines, H. 8S. 1906 Behavior of the lower organisms. Macmillan. Bibli- ography. JOHNSTONE, JAMES 1908 Conditions of life in the sea. Cambridge. Kine, L. A. L. anp Russet, E. 8. 1909 A method for the study of the animal] ecology of the shore. Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc., Edinburgh, vol. 17, no. 6, pp. 225-2538. Know ton Z. H. 1909 The birds of the world. R. Ridgway ed. Henry Holt. Kopet, W. 1902 Die Verbreitung der Tierwelt. Leipzig. Lene, C. W. 1902 Notes on Cicindelidae of Louisiana. Journ. N. Y. Ent. Soc., vol. 10, pp. 131-1386. 1902 Revision of the Cicindelidae of boreal America. Trans. Am. Ent. Soc., vol. 28, pp. 93-186. LivincstongE, Davin 1858 Missionary travels and researches in South Africa. Harpers. Lucas, H. 1883 (On the habits of Mantichora.) Bull. Soc. Ent. France (6), T. 3, pp. Ixxi-lxxil. MacDovcat, D. T. 1908 Heredity and environic forces. Science, Jan. 24. M’Kintosu, Pror. 1904 On the distribution of marine animals. Ann. and Mag. of N. H., vol. 13, ser. 7, pp. 117-180. Mason, 0. T. 1896 Influence of environment upon human industries or arts. Smith. Rep. 1895, pp. 639-665. PHYSIOLOGICAL ANIMAL GEOGRAPHY GLZ McGer, W. J. 1896 The relation of institution to environment. Smith. Rep. 1895. pp. 701-11. Merriam, C. H. 1890 Result of a biological survey of the San Francisco moun- tain region and the desert of the little Colorado. Arizona. U.S. Dept. Agr. NovA> Hauna,, no.-3: 1898 Life zones and crop zones. U.S. Dept. Agr., Biol. Survey Bull. 10. Mostey, O. AND Brown, E. 1863 The natural history of Tutbury. London. OrTMANN, A. E. 1896 Grundziige der marinen Tiergeographie, Jena. 1907 The crayfishes of the State of Pennsylvania. Mem. Carnegie Mus. Pittsburg, vol. 2, pp. 343-523. Ossorn, H. F. 1902 Law of adaptive radiation. Amer. Nat., vol. 36, pp. 353- 363. PiowpeENn, W. C. 1868 Travels in Abyssinia. London. REIGHARD, JacoB. 1910. Methods of studying the habits of fishes with an ac- count of the breeding habits of the horned dace. Bull. Bur. of Fish., vol. 28, 1908 pp. 1112-1136. Ritter, W. E. 1909 Halocynthia johnsoni, a comprehensive inquiry as to the extent of law and order that prevails in a single animal species. Univ. of Cal. Pub., Zool., vol. 6, pp. 65-114. RoosEvELt, T. R. 1909-i910 African game trails. Scribner’s. Rutuven, A. G. 1906 An ecological survey in northern Michigan. Rep. Mus., Univ. of Mich. (Rep. Geol. Surv., 1905). 1907 Reptiles and Amphibians from southern New Mexico and Ari- zona. Am. Mus. of Nat. Hist. Bull. vol. xxiii, pp. 483-604. 1908 The faunal affinities of the prairie region of central North America Am. Nat., vol. 42, pp. 388-393. 1908 Variations and genetic relationships of the garter snakes. U.S. Nat. Mus., Bull. 61. Sarcent, C. 8. 1880 The forests of North America. 10th Census, vol. 9. 1905 Manualof trees of North America. Boston and New York. Scuimpger, A. F.W. 1903 Plant geography upon a pinyetateeta basis. Trans- lated by W. R. Fisher, Oxford. Seits, A. 1901 Pavecseeolacche Betrachtungen. Zool. Gart., 193 and 232. SeLous, F. C. 1893 Travel and adventure in southeast Africa. London. Semper, Karu. 1881 Animal life as affected by the natural conditions of exist- ence. Appleton, N. Y. Seton, E. Tuomrson 1909 Life-histories of northern animals, New York. SHACKLETON, Ernest 1909 The heart of the Antarctic, Philadelphia. SHELForD, V. E. 1907 Preliminary note on the distribution of the tiger beetles and its relation to plant succession. Biol. Bull., vol. 14, no. 1, pp. 9-14, 1908 Life-histories and larval habits of the tiger beetles (Cicindelidae). Linn. Soe. Journ. Zool., vol. 30, pp. 157-184. 1910 Ecological succession of fish. Trans. Ill. State Acad., vol. 3. pp. 108-110. 618 VICTOR E. SHELFORD SHERMAN, F. 1904 List of Cicindelidae of North Carolina with notes on species. Ent. News., vol. 15, no. 1, pp. 26. 1908 Notes on tiger beetle elevations. Ent. News, vol. 18, p. 360. October. Snow, H. F. 1877 Amblychila. Trans. Kans. Acad., vol. 6, p. 29. Sumner, F. B. 1910 An intensive study of a small area of sea bottom. Bull. Bur. Fish. vol. 28, pp. 1225-1263. Swain, R. E. 1905 Some notable constituents of the urine of the coyote. Am. Journ. Phys., vol. 13, no. 1. TarpDE, GasrieL 1903 Inter-psychology. International Quarterly, vol. 7, pp. 59-84. : Tower, W. L. 1907 An investigation of evolution in Chrysomelid beetles of the genus Leptinotarsa. Carnegie Inst., no. 48. Washington, D. C. 1910 The determination of dominance and the modification of behav- ior in alternative inheritance. Biol. Bull., vol. 18, no. 6; vol. 20, no. 1. Tower, W. 8S. 1910 Scientific geography; the relation of its content to its sub- divisions. Bull. Am. Geog. Soc., vol. 42, Nov., p. 801. Transeau, E. N. 1903 On the geographic distribution and ecological relation of bog plant societies. Bot. Gaz. vol. 36, pp. 401. 1905 Forest centers of eastern America. Am. Nat., vol. 39, no. 468, pp. 875-88. VERRILL, A. E. 1873 Invertebrate animals of Vineyard Sound. Rep. U.S. Comm. Fish and Fisheries. 1871-72 pp. 295-538. VERWoRN, Max 1899 General physiology. London. Translation by F. 8. Lee. Waker, A. O. 1903 Atmospheric moisture as a factor in distribution. 8. E. Nat., vol. 8, pp. 43-47. Watuace, A. R. 1869 The Malay Archipelago. London. 1876 Geographical distribution of animals. New York. 1892 Island life. London. Warmine, E. 1909 Oeccology of plants. Oxford. WaxweILerR, E. 1906 Equisse d’une Sociologie. Inst. Solvay Inst. de Soc. Notes et Mem., Fasc. 2, 306, Bruxelles. Wess, Sipney [903 The diminution and disappearance of the south east fauna and flora. South East Naturalist, vol. 8, p. 48. Weep, C. M. 1897 Life-histories of American insects, New York. Wuitrorp, H. N. 1901 The genetic development of the forests of northern Michigan. Bot. Gaz., vol. 31, p. 315. Wickuam, H. F. 1902 The habits of American Cicindelidae. Davenport, Ia. Acad. Nat. Sci., vol. 7, pp. 206-228. 1906 The races of Cicindela tranquebarica Hbst., Ent. News., Feb., pp. 43-48. ON THE OLFACTORY ORGANS AND THE SENSE OF SMELL IN BIRDS R. M. STRONG From the Hull Zoological Laboratory, University of Chicago TWO PLATES AND FOUR TEXT FIGURES CONTENTS PRINT OCU ELON. ween creias sHaRe hla wx ec ne S15 Ma ee ct ee oe 619 MeN EL AUCs ty eh mt use He ees Sl tices ae c Mapes nat be ee ee eee 620 An General. 2.7.04 BO Mi: Miele Sn, cry ae cen tals Cota: ee ee 620 Dea heripreraimoladchory apparabug: <.6f2. on ¥cs 0 . oe See eee 621 ianbhe nasaltehanibers: %.).24 64... Jak oo. an ohne ee 621 Deen erolnacvomya eplu ie MUI y.cugh 5 fs. ower pen ne eee ae 622 Sn eueRer OlbaCLORy, MERVES eco. 2i 2 Sa. ola So a Sian ee eee 623 Cer Central OHActory; apparatus. 04... S546 05 ode eee 623 ipeetheroliaetony “lobes ..."36 252... PP AE ce Se 623 Pa liTeTOliactOnyatlioeryubaCbSt 42:50 sc.04 irae Seer ae eee ee 625 De Opsenvations:Gmbehayvlon. 4)... 24 desc. clasts See eRe eee 625 iB e Reports; Oh experimental studies)... . |... «=i: n+ ceamee Oe See ees 626 See Veqnodsrangdymaterialeend ase... hess eke cela eee ee ery Set 629 we Vorp nologies wae! 6 2d suet oak ae ee ea 629 BS ee EM erimen alls Sry ta wake ocletos uss “oe coe Syed ale SEM a Ok a Sree eee 632 Zee Motaholocicr res ulisee dre wee oP a4 <0 6 20 Aeloe sa, ete eae eee 641 5. Results of experimental studies of the sense of smell in ring doves....... 646 ow Controlkexperiments with) white Tats... 2s. ..4.2 08 acne eee eee aoe 650 7. Results of other experiments and observations......................-.- 650 Sep CONG NISIOM A et meee ee iad Soe save 5. bch eiocb'e S dsaeca tk Pate Rape neae ge ear 652 TOMO a Year 0] Tie Ree kes es San Ra ne RP eaters eel SNS ye OS de 655 1. INTRODUCTION The work described in this paper was done principally at the University of Chicago. About six years ago the writer became interested in the question of whether birds possess asense of smell or not. The subject was assigned to a student for some prelim- inary study in the spring of 1905. During this time it became apparent that something more than simple direct tests would be 619 O20" % R.. M. STRONG necessary, and the writer decided to study the problem by means of a labyrinth in which a demonstration of olfactory ability would require the association of an odor with the location of food. Such work was done mostly in the year 1907-8. During the autumn of 1909, the writer enjoyed the privilege of studying the unique collection of bird brain material in the Senckenbergisches Neurologisches Institut at Frankfurt am Main, Germany. Though a large number of bird brain sections representing a good many species of birds were studied, no new facts of importance concerning central olfactory relationships were discovered from them. On careful examination of the lit- erature it became apparent that there was need of a comparative study of the lobes and nerves, which could be done to advantage with the fine series of partly dissected heads in Professor Edinger’s collection. These were placed at my disposal for further dissec- tion and study. The nasal chambers also were studied. The writer wishes to express his hearty thanks to Prof. Dr. Ludwig Edinger, the director of the Institute, for the opportunities afforded and for his helpful interest. Thanks are also due to Dr. W. M. Cooper of Frankfurt, to Dr. Priemal, the director of the Frankfurt Zoologischer Garten, to Prof. John B. Watson of Johns Hopkins University, and to Mr. W. H. Osgood of the Field Columbian Museum of Chicago for additional material and for courtesies received. Through the kindness of Mr. Seth Smith and Mr. R. I. Pocock, the privilege of making a test of the olfac- tory sense in Apteryx was enjoyed at the London Zoological Gardens. Assistance in the preparation of the drawings was received from Mrs. Strong. 2. LITERATURE A. General During the early part of the last century, a spirited controversy was waged by a number of naturalists over the question of the existence of an olfactory sense in birds. So much evidence on the negative side was brought forth as to put the general occur- ence of a sense of smell in birds in doubt ever since. THE SENSE OF SMELL IN BIRDS 621 The presence of normal olfactory apparatus in birds has been recognized by a number of writers. In Apteryx, according to Parker (91) and Owen (’71), the olfactory organs are relatively large for a bird. In other groups of birds the olfactory apparatus is generally recognized as small when compared with mammals, but varying in size. Thus Searpa (’89), Schultze (62), and others speak of well developed organs in the swimming birds, in the wading birds, and in the birds of prey. Bumm {’83), recognizes a relatively large olfactory apparatus in the swimming birds, but not in the birds of prey studied by him. The gallinaceous birds and the singing birds are described as having very much reduced olfactory organs. B. Peripheral olfactory apparatus 1. The nasal chambers. The nasal chambers of birds have been studied from various standpoints by a number of writers, including the following especially: Beeker (03) Common fowl (Gallus) ogeranus, Psittacus, Picus, Capri- and duck (Anas) mulgus, Podargus, Sturnus, Corvus, Born (’79) Chick (Gallus) and other forms Cohn (’02) Chick Giebel (76) Seventeen species of Dieulafé (04 and 705) Paroquet, birds duck, turkey, dove, and vulture Mihalkovies (98) Gallus Exner (72) Fowl, duck, dove, and Owen (72) Apteryx some finches Parker (91) Apteryx Ganin (90) Eighteen genera of birds Schultze (62) Falco, Strix, Gallus, Gegenbaur (773) Columba, Gallus, Columba, Anas and other birds Meleagris, Anser, Buteo, Strix, Gyp- In general, two or three turbinals or conchae are recognized as occurring in the nasa] chambers of birds. According to Gegen- baur the so-called superior or posterior concha is better named a ‘Riech-hiigel,’ as, in the material he studied, it was found by him to be only an elevation or projection which did not possess the characteristic rolling of a true turbinal. Beeker (03) supported him in this position. In some species Gegenbaur found even a ‘Riech-hiigel’ lacking. The other turbinals are regularly desig- nated as median or middle and inferior or anterior. JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 3 622 R. M. STRONG The turbinals of Apteryx are described by Parker (91) as having an ‘extreme complexity’ (p. 49). In addition to the three turbinals already mentioned, he found ‘anterior and ventral accessory turbinals.’ The absence of a posterior concha in the smaller species of birds was noted by Schultze ('62) and also by Giebel (76). The latter considered this structure also lacking in Corvus and Garrulus. He found three turbinals in Lanius excubitor, however. Jacobson’s organ occurs in rudimentary or vestigial form accord- ing to Mihaleovies (98), Ganin (’90), and Cohn (’02), in the em- bryo bird. It is lost during embryonic life, though the median portions of the ducts of the nasal glands are regarded as modi- fied Jacobson’s organs by Ganin and Muihaleovics. 2. The olfactory epithelium. In Apteryx, according to Parker, all of the turbinals, except the so-called ventral accessory, are covered with ‘Schneiderian membrane’ (p. 51). Owen, using a different terminology for the turbinals of Apteryx, also described an extensive distribution of olfactory nerve fibers in this bird both on all of the turbinals, excepting the ‘anterior,’ and on the septum narium. In other birds studied, a much more limited distribution of the olfactory epithelium has been found. In the common fowl, according to Mihalcovies, the olfactory epithelium is limited to the posterior turbinal and to the adjacent wall of the nasal cavity up to the roof. Ass 23 1 BiiS Crd sD eS 648 R. M. STRONG TABLE 8 Violet sachet powder series No: 62 A).0; Bi 2:'C, 1: D; 1 No. 30 A, 3; B, 0; CG, 0; D, 2 No. 92 A, 6; B, 0; C, 0; D, 1 No. 24 A, 2; B, 2; C, 0; D, 0 ~~ TABLE 9 Oil of bergamot series INio: 62), AS 352B fase. b45D 24 NON SO AC O9 a de Oras) 2, Now 92) AN 94 Basle Cs 12D 39 No. 24 A, 31; B, 42; C, 24; D, 44 In those experiments where A was not the first chamber en- tered, the percentage of correct first entrances made by No. 30 in the oil of bergamot series was 41, and 44 per cent for dove No. 92. It will be seen that doves Nos. 30 and 92 both entered chamber A first a very large number of times. This habit became so con- firmed in No. 30 that experiments with this bird were finally dis- continued. Attempts were made to break up the habit, but no suecess was obtained, except when the food was placed regularly at one of the three other chambers. This could not be done much, of course, without seriously affecting the results of the experi- ments. It was desirable that there should be little difference in the number of times each chamber was used for food. It will be noticed that dove No. 62 did not develop such a habit and that No. 24 did not exhibit the tendency in the oil of bergamot series. In order to test the possible odor discrimination of the doves after they had made one mistake, the means of errors made by the birds were calculated. If, for instance, the birds entered the chambers at random and did not go into any single chamber more than once, they would, in a sufficiently large series of exper- iments, be expected to have a mean of errors approximating 1.5. As a matter of fact, they often entered an empty compartment more than once before finding the food. Thus, on one occa- sion, No. 92 entered chambers B and C each three times before THE SENSE OF SMELL IN BIRDS 649 finding the food at A. In this case D was entered once. The record of this result was written as follows: No. 92=B=D=C =B=C=B=C=A. This repetition of errors increased the size of the mean appreciably, at first, in the cologne series. In the following tables it will be seen that the means were significantly small when oil of bergamot was used, in spite of the fact that errors were repeated occasionally. TABLE 10 Cologne series BIRD | MEAN dese Go eee Nate mS) s Lc. | 1.5483— 0.179+ SU tPA eee cee dea | 1.58 0.1578+ COE I Aa em OR ee. oh an le 708342 0.182+ lS I a shed a ee ore a ee | 1.9689-++ 0.189 TABLE 11 Musk series BIRD MEAN sea Co ey cae rg Gori ares ten ae AR TTL LGW, cree es Sill) a! 5! See OR a Ss A a Re | 1.447 (7) so les eterra- ee eRES EGS cece aehee FR Re a | 1.549 Pee schol BiG bere aE AO EL ae | TG TABLE 12 Oil of bergamot series BIRD MEAN a a aS TEs eae kOe wee AW a 1.18+ 0.058 + SUD ers TR SA SN Sy oe IE EP CR Sth ay firs hana 1.369+ 0.0703 + OER TE oa ES NO or peas SEOs Hees 1.1938+ 0.0625+ Beaaien ssn tres Sentes 0.922— 0.0663 + The totals of trials given the doves for different odors will be found in the following table: 650 R. M. STRONG TABLE 13 Bitd 2... hth eee Pe ee ers ere 62 50a P02 24 Golomners ee cena! an a neem eee ees 25 sil 630: ate Mish oy eee S cicnate chia rie Mike = ts oie ot a ie ane aaa Violetsachet powders. . 255045) lee seo nae 4 5s he + Oilofbergamboyce bee votes Lee oe { @ 186h S16 | AG a Saleh 6. CONTROL EXPERIMENTS WITH WHITE RATS A pair of rats were used as a test of the efficiency of the appara- tus. They gave the following results when oil of bergamot was employed, the conditions being those which were furnished the ring doves. | TOTAL NUMBER PERCENTAGE MEAN Torn OF TRIALS IN EDIE es pert eect n 8 tae Pope oe A ei | 0.62 0.406-+ 59 Remalerat 4) 0 See are ee eee Cenk. 0.71 0.316+ 60 It is the writer’s opinion that the rats found their food usually, if not always, when not by accident, through an association of the odor of oil of bergamot with the location of the food. In a short series of trials which were made without any odor, the rats appeared to find the food (sunflower seed) by the method of trial. That these keen scented animals made so many mistakes is prob- ably explained by their tendency to enter the first chamber they came to and sometimes the next in order before they made any attempt to localize the source of the odor of oil of bergamot which was all of the time entering the enclosure. 7. RESULTS OF OTHER EXPERIMENTS AND OBSERVATIONS The writer spent about ten weeks of the winter of 1906 in Flor- ida, where some observations were made on the habits of the turkey vulture. Some very simple experiments with meat wrapped in paper resulted negatively, but the conditions of the experiments did not warrant the conclusion that meat is not smelled by these birds. During a tramp through a pine forest, THE SENSE OF SMELL IN BIRDS 651 a turkey vulture was flushed from the entrance of a gopher-turtle hole. The bird showed a great disinclination to leave the spot although other individuals which were seen by the writer outside of cities were disposed to be wild. A dead gopher-turtle was found inside the burrow. It was impossible to view the turtle except when in a position to look down the oblique burrow, and it did not seem probable that a bird when flying overhead could see the body. 3. Dorsal viewshowing the very small and fused olfactory lobes merged with the tapering fore brain lobesso as to be unde- finable by the method of dissection only. 16 Coccothraustes coccothraustes, (hawfinch). > 3. Dorsal view of portion of dissected head. The right nasal chamber has been partly exposed. The olfac- tory nerves are shown throughout most of their extent. Orbit tissue removed. 17. Corvus corax, (raven). Dorsal view showing the minute olfactory lobes and the slender olfactory nerves. The posterior ends of the nasal chamber are included. SENSE OF SMELL IN BIRDS R. M. STRONG PLATE 2 JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 3 ¥ * yale oFe r fT ee, ON THE REGULAR SEASONAL CHANGES IN THE RELATIVE WEIGHT OF THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM OF THE LEOPARD FROG HENRY H. DONALDSON The Wistar Institute of Anatomy and Biology FIVE CHARTS The bearing of this investigation can best be understood by a short account of the steps leading up to it. In some earlier stud- ies on the innervation of the muscles and skin of the leg of the bullfrog and of the leopard frog (Donaldson ’98) (Donaldson and Schoemaker ’00)! the weights of the brain and of the spinal cord of the frogs were taken, and the percentage of water in these two portions of the central nervous system determined. When the records thus obtained were assembled, the arrange- ment of them as they appeared on the chart suggested that the increase 1h the weight of the central nervous system might run parallel to a logarithmic curve, based on the weight of the entire body. The curve based on this datum alone was however found to fall away from the observed values as the body weight increased and hence a second factor, the value of which increased gradually but at a diminishing rate, was necessary to make the calculated values correspond to those observed. This second factor was found in the total length of the frog, the fourth root of which in- creased at such a rate that when the logarithm of the body weight is multiplied by the fourth root of the total length, the values obtained are an almost constant fraction of those observed. It remained then merely to multiply the number thus found by a constant to approximate the observed values. ‘In the paper cited above and in several other publications from my labora- tory, the leopard frog has been designated R. virescens brachycephala Cope. Since 1908 the name Rana pipiens has been used (see Donaldson, Science, vol. 26, p. 655, 1907). 663 664 HENRY H. DONALDSON The formula for the weight.of the central nervous system was accordingly written Weight C. N.S. = (Log. W x yL)C where ‘weight C. N.S.’ is the combined weight of the brain and spinal cord in milligrams; W the body weight in grams; L the total length of the frog in millimeters, and C, a constant empirically determined. Corresponding results were obtained for both the bullfrog and leopard frog (Donaldson ’02). By this formula it is possible to calculate the approximate weight of the central nervous system of the frog from the data on body weight and total length, and also to show its growth. The observations used in the foregoing study, from which the formula was obtained, were taken from summer frogs (%.e., in the case of the bullfrogs, July and August, and in the case of the leopard frogs, June and July). In commenting on these results, I pointed out at the time that it was necessary to avoid several sources of observational error. These are represented (1) By variations in the moisture of the frog, and therefore only frogs that have been kept moist for some hours at least, should be used. (2) By loss of weight during cap- tivity, especially in frogs taken in the spring and early summer. Hence such frogs must be examined either as soon as caught or must be kept under special conditions or some correction must be made for the loss which they undergo. (38) By season; as I noted that both in the few spring and autumn frogs which I had exam- ined, the nervous system was apparently relatively lighter than in frogs killed during the midsummer. In the course of this work, the first two sources of error were taken into account, and corrections made where they were deemed necessary. Also, as just stated, the third was escaped by using summer frogs only. The difference thus found between the relative weight of the central nervous system in the summer andin thespringandautumn, appeared to me worth further examination, for unless it could CHANGES IN WEIGHT OF CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM 665 be satisfactorily explained, the formula which had been suggested for determining the weight of the central nervous system seemed to have only limited applicability. For this reason, in 1901-02, I endeavored to get data which would show whether a regularseasonal variation took place. Since that time, I have examined for the same purpose other series of frogs in 1908 and also in 1909. The general result of these observations is to show that the relative weight of the central nervous system of the leopard frog does change during the year, being constant during hibernation, low in the spring, high in the summer and low again in the autumn, when the frogs go into hibernation. The discussion which follows is intended to present I. The evidence that a seasonal change occurs. II. The biological interpretation of this change. I. THE EVIDENCE THAT A SEASONAL CHANGE OCCURS. TECHNIQUE AND SOURCES OF ERROR In all of the series about to be described, the technique for examination has been essentially uniform. Specimens of Rana pipiens, the leopard frog, alone were used. The frogs were kept moist for several hours before dissection. They were killed with chloroform and the body weight =(Bd. W.) taken to the nearest 0.1 gm. The frog was next either suspended or laid flat on its ventral surface, with the legs fully extended, and the distance from the tip of the nose to the tip of the longest toe taken with a jointed calipers and then read off on a scale to the nearest mil- limeter =(total length). While in the ventral position, the long axis of the head was brought in line with that of the body by raising the head with a small wooden wedge, and with a vernier calipers the distance from the tip of the nose to the tip of the urostyle—the cartilaginous end of which was exposed by a slit through the skin—was measured and read to the nearest 0.1 mm. =(body length). The frog was then placed on its back, opened and all the viscera removed. 666 HENRY H. DONALDSON At this time any necessary correction in the body weight was made by subtracting from the initial weight, the weight of the ova or of undigested food distending the stomach. These were the only two corrections made to the body weight. The body weights of the females are always given without the ova. After evisceration. the brain was exposed throughits entirelength and the spinal cord exposed as far down as the III nerve. With spring compasses, the length of the brain from the tip of the olfac- tory bulbs to a point midway between the tip of the calamus scrip- torius and the level of the III nerve =(origin of II nerve) was taken. This was recorded to the nearest 0.1 mm. = (brain length) The olfactory nerves were next cut through with a very fine scis- sors, and in the same manner a section was made between the tip of the calamus scriptorius and the III nerve, 7.e., the level of the emergence of the II nerve. The choroid plexus over the fourth ventricle was removed and then the brain was raised from be- hind forwards on a narrow lifter, and the nerve roots severed as close to the brain as possible. If the hypophysis was still attached to the brain, it was removed and the remaining mass at once placed in a closed weighing bottle and weighed to 0.1 milligram =(brain weight). Similarly the spinal cord was exposed through its entire length and the conus just caudad to the XI nerve laid bare. With the spring compasses the length from this point to the level at which the cord had been severed from the brain was measured and re- corded to the nearest 0.1 mm. =(cord length). The cord was then seized just below the conus with a fine forceps and raised so that the nerves could be clipped away close to the cord. The mass of the cord, thus deprived of nerves, was placed in a closed weighing bottle and at once weighed to 0.1 milligram = (cord weight.) Both parts of the central nervous system were then dried at 90-95° C. for a week and reweighed. From these data, the percentage of water in the brain and in the spinal cord was de- termined to 0.1 per cent =(percentage water, brain) = (percent- age of water, spinal cord). For the present investigation, the foregoing determinations represent all that are necessary. CHANGES IN WEIGHT OF CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM 667 Observations on the frogs examined at Chicago, 1901-1902 Beginning in the spring of 1901, I endeavored to examine four males and four females of R. pipiens each week from March 28, 1901, to the following March, 1902. As will be seen from table 1, this plan met with only approximate success. The frogs examined in Chicago were obtained from a dealer who was in turn supplied from a wide range of country extending from southern Minnesota to Indiana. It was assumed at the beginning of this work that season was the main cause modifying the relative weight of the central nervous system in these frogs, and that therefore the fact that the frogs were taken from different localities would not materially modify the results. Consideration of all the facts at present in hand now leads me to think, on the contrary, that the relative weight of the nervous system is modified by station, and that in the case in question, the frogs from different stations were mixed together. As a rule however, the lots which were obtained were rather uniformly mixed and so, except in a few cases, no serious discrepancies appeared. As has been stated, it was planned to examine every week, four frogs of each sex or eight in all. From March 28, 1901, to Octo- ber 2, this plan was followed with moderate success, although the number of complete records is less than of those incomplete. This has come about by reason of the fact that although the full number of frogs was examined almost every week, nevertheless when the percentage of water in the brain and in the spinal cord was determined later, it was found in some cases that it was be- yond the normal limits. These I have set for the brain as 83.5— 85.5 per cent and for the spinal cord as 79.5-81.5 per cent. When any record transgressed these limits for both the brain and spinal cord, such a record was excluded as it was assumed that deviation to this extent in both divisions of the central nervous system meant that the frog was in an abnormal state. Between October 2nd and the end of the year, this deviation in the percentage of water made it necessary to exclude all the records. The frogs obtained by us at this season had evidently 668 HENRY H. DONALDSON been caught much earlier and were suffering from the conditions under which they were kept. It was then not until the end of January, 1902, that a few freshly captured frogs were brought in and these were used for series 37, the last one in table 1. The frogs examined were selected from the dealer’s tank less than 24 hours before they were to be dissected, and kept in proper TABLE 1 Data on frogs from Chicago, 1901-02 | sats Sache | AE ee A eanstncnen ia ieee M. F. | | Mean | Range Brain | Cord | | 1901 | | | RMT NG | 3 | 3 | Mareh 28 | 24.7| (24.2-25.7) | 84.1] 79.5 7 SA ae Ay BO at) April 3 | 24.8 (22.5-26.7) | 84.4 | 80.2 Hen ee 4 | 3 | April 10° | 25.4) .(23:6-28.7)r 1), 84 ees a 4 4 April 16 | 26.9 | (22:9-29.4) | 84.7 | 80.7 Se. 4 4 | April 23 | 27.0| (24.3-31.4) | 84.2 | 80.2 Gi. 4 4 | April 30 | 25.0] (23.0-26.3) | 85.0 |-80.7 riiee 4 | 4 | May 8 | 28.6 | (24.6-32.7) | 85.1 | 80.9 Sis: 4 | 2) May 15 | 27.3} (24.1-29.8) | 84.4 | 80.9 Ore! | 3S "| 4. |) May 21 | 28.1, (24.1-30.5) | 84.9 | 80.5 ieee | 4 | 4 | May 28 | 27.2| (24.4-30.9) | 84.4} 80.4 hs gn re | 3 3 June 4 |29.4] (24.5-33.8) | 85.0 | 81.0 ae fare 3 June 11 | 26.1] (23.5-29.1) | 84.2 | 80.2 13% 2 4 | June 19 | 26.4*| (21.5-30.1) | 85.0 | 80.9 ee 4. |) 2") Jane 26 | 25.2%) (23.5-27.5) | 85.5 | 80.3 Ares ae 21a) (FEZ ae es all seta 3 | 24.2% (22.9-25.4) | 85.6 | 80.9 16.. 4 | 3 | July 9 | 25.1% (23.7-26.3) | 84.4 | 79.8 ii AN A Tiley 17° | 27.9| (25.9-30.7) | 84.3 | 79.7 1S: 4a 30 Sully 23 | 80.0} (27.3-31.4) | 84.9 | 80.7 1Se 4 4 | July 30 | 29.3 (22.7-83.7) | 85.0 | 80.5 205.5 4 4 August 6 | 27.0) (25.3-30.9) | 84.5 | 79.7 Pe 4 | 4 | August 13 29.4 | (28.1-31.5) | 85.1 | 80.4 2. 3 | 4 | August 20 | 28.0] (24.8-31.1) | 84.9 | 81.3 rs ie Vin 3 | August 27 | 28.5) (24.9-33.6) | 84.6 | 80.4 24... 3 3 | September 3 | 27.1) (23.6-31.2) | 84.5 | 79.0 208 2 4 | September 12 29.2 | (24.0-32.7) | 84.1 | 79.1 26.5 3 | 2 | September 17 | 24.9/ (22.8-25.9) | 85.2 | 80.9 Ploeg 3 | 4 | September 24 | 28.6 (26.4-30.6) | 84.3 80.2 287 4. |) (4. | October ) 2 | 2821 |" (@6-4-32.3)) 88-4 S056 | 1902 | 37 2 | 2 | January 30 | 24.8| (22.9-27.8) | 84.6) 81.1 *See page 671. CHANGES IN WEIGHT OF CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM 669 jars in the laboratory until examined. Enough frogs were taken to give as a rule four of each sex, and the endeavor was made to have them of nearly the same size, 7.e., 22-29 gms. in body weight. A glance at table 2 will show that this effort was largely success- ful. The measurements which were made included (1) the total length, (2) the body weight (3) the weight of the brain (4) the weight of the spinal cord, as well as the length of each of these portions of the central nervous system and the percentage of water in each. These data, from 1-4, are necessary for determining the value of the constant C in the formula Weight of C. N.S. = (Log Wx yL)C. It will be seen from the inspection of the formula that if there are two frogs of the same body weight and the same total length, but differing in the weights of their central nervous systems, then in the case of the frog with the lighter nervous system, the value of C will be less than in the other, for by the terms of the formula, the weight of the central nervous system is C times (Log Wx \L) a value which in this instance is the same for both the frogs. It becomes therefore possible to express the changes in the rela- tive weight of the central nervous system by the differences in the value of C—and it is this method which has been here em- ployed. This variation in the constant C not only enables us to express the variations in the relative weight of the central nervous system, but is by far the best method available for the purpose, as it is quite independent of the absolute size of the frog in any instance. In table 1, the average value of C is given together with the range in this value for each series. If these average values for successive weeks are plotted, they show great irregularity. By grouping the series however, so as to take the first one alone, then the next three series as the second group, and finally the remaining series up to the very last one in groups of four, and the last one again alone, we obtained the data JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 3 670 HENRY H. DONALDSON TABLE 2 Data on frogs from Chicago, 1901-02. Fundamental table giving the mean values of all the data for each group |aroannien OF SPECIMENS SERIES Soe See) =. BODY WEIGHT TOTAL LENGTH M. | F. gms. mm | einer ene ts Sree 3 3 pile? 165 DG Ts 6 Ld ES oF 12 8 22.6 170 a es Ld. nN 16 14 2153 168 OHI ae. Were easels t aS Me 22).3 168 1316s. bees eee: 15 eee? 24.4 174 Wee eet PAL NA 16 15 22.4 166 PET, IR ay aah ek Sel 14 14 23.3 166 D5 eA awe 2 hoe ee 12 14 23.0 165 STR Oe 2 2 19.4 166 Brain SERIES WEIGHT LENGTH PERCENTAGE OF WATER gms. | mm. 1 ee ee ae ee 0.0793 | 13.7 | 84.1 A le ie niet lente cate ee Oa 0.0857 1 Sed, | 84.6 SO Res CP eee Tin Chetty eae 0.0870 13.6 | 84.7 NES etl Rie a eee 0.0917 13.9 | 84.6 Sea Setlists hae 0.0859 14.1 B51 Te a ep ae ee in 0.0939 14.2 84.7 p.) ae, eee See meee 0.0944 | 14.2 | 84.8 DRO RN etat Mace yey ete 0.0933 14.1 84.5 Byte tS hs Ceres ae ae 0.0793 13.4 84.6 Cord Nic: Pe Se een es 0.0382 14.6 79.5 4 os, encore 0.0410 15.6 80.3 BEG) telstra oe | 0.0415 | 15.5 80.7 GEIB. SR ke bare eee en | 0.0423 15.3 80.6 IGG ie we te Sere y 0.0416 | 15.6 80.5 V720.L ae Ree | 0.0443 | 15.5 80.1 Py A Mine ae Fae | 0.0453 | 15.3 80.4 D596 1) a eee | 0.0429 | 15.2 80.2 1 A Te ER 2, 0.0344 15.4 81.1 CHANGES IN WEIGHT OF: CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM 671 given in table 3. This table shows that the mean value of C rises from March 28th to a maximum in July and then begins to fall. In the case of one group, formed by the series 13, 14, 15 and 16, there appears an unexpectedly small relative weight of the central nervous system, while at the same time there is no ground to exclude these series as abnormal. I assume therefore that the series forming this group came from localities where the frogs had a proportionately small nervous system and that these were not mixed as in the case of the other series, with frogs from more north- ern stations, in which the nervous system happened to be larger. For reasons given earlier, the autumn fall is very incompletely shown, but the observation of the January series gives, asone would expect, a value of C similar to that found in March. Asa control, I have calculated the probable error of the mean (+ .6745 a \ n of C in all the groups of table 3. As will be seen, in the groups that consist of four series, this is quite constantly about 0.3. This value is high but when it is considered that the ranges of the value of C in the several series TABLE 3 Data on frogs from Chicago, 1901-02 | ene a, VALUE OF C PERCENTAGE OF WATER SERIES an oi MEAN DATH ita |e yt ; a | Probable ifs We aie Mean error of Brain Cord | mean | 1901 | | 1 eee st it March: | 28 | .o47 | #016) 84.1 | 79.5 DATS Atte 12). (8 \ April 9 | 25.8 | +0.32| 84.6 80.3 Fees, ote 16. “| 1a | May Ao DIO aOR IO pee gy 80.7 OSi2h or.) 14 oid. Jone 1” |) e276 ls Orato s4aG 80.6 a= Ge hale eto June 29* | 25.8: |) 20:27 |e 85.1 80.5 E20 MealiG) ot lay t dhaly oF | 28:5 0 iy sOnsteh 6847 80.1 PI el TAS | 4 4) August 94 |. “28.5. Ors" 8458 80.4 25-28......; 12 | 14 | September 22 97.9 | +£0.32) 84.5 80.2 1902 | | iene aes Bop 22 January 30 24.8 | +0.67 84.6 81.1 *See Comments on p. 671. 672 HENRY H. DONALDSON ~ are much the same (table 1) then it would follow that the size of the probable error of the mean would rapidly reduce as the num- ber of cases was increased. It is by reason of this fact that I still consider the successive mean values of C significant, despite the large probable error. When the data in table 3 are put in the form of a chart (1) where the ordinates represent the values of C on a base line of time in days, the relations above described are shown clearly. We conclude therefore from this series that the relative weight of the central nervous system of the leopard frog rises from the time that the frog appears in the spring until midsummer, arid 297 VALUE OF C. CHART | 2 CHICAGO FEB. MAR. APR. MAY. JUNE. JULY AUG. SEPT. OCT. NOV. DEC. JAN. Chart 1 Based on data in table 3. Determination for C, June 29, not entered. then falls until the frog goes into hibernation, 7.e., when the external temperature drops to 7°-10° C. =45°-50° F. (Torelle, 03). It should be added however that this critical temperature is probably modified by latitude and tends to become lower as we pass from south to north in the range of the frog. In table 2 are given the necessary fundamental data relating to the several groups belonging to this lot of Chicago frogs. Observations on the frogs from Minnesota, 1908 The exact locality of the frogs in this series is not known. They came however from Minnesota, probably from southern Minnesota and all from the same station. They were delivered in good condition in Philadelphia where they were examined. As CHANGES IN WEIGHT OF CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM 673 table 4 shows, there were but three series and the numbers, ex- cept in the last series are small. The treatment of these Minne- sota frogs was similar to that for the Chicago frogs, and need not be again described. As shown in table 5, there is a spring series, a summer series and a late autumn series (entered in two parts) and in these three series the relative weight of the central nervous system as shown by the values of C, undergoes a seasonal variation corresponding to that found in the Chicago frogs—although the absolute values for C are much higher. This variation is exhibited in chart 2. TABLE 4 Data on frogs from Minnesota, 1908. Fundamental table giving the mean values for each series | NUMBER OF SPECIMENS | SERIES : BODY WEIGHT TOTAL LENGTH BODY LENGTH M. 12% gms. mm. mm. Hen Seb le weer eet 9: Dee ees (50S oltanerale 79.5 ee fe ick bee OMe Ser 56-4 ees 84.2 BNE Aah vc dose skiy 3 SP | 48258 Pca 78.4 ener te AL 3 Qi) |e (64-98" | eaeeo see 85.4 | Brain SERIES WEIGHT LENGTH | PERCENTAGE OF WATER | gms. mm. Pale antes es ee Mah ot | 0.1250 16.4 84.8 hg Opal ooh te en Pe | 0.1475 17.5 85.6 2 AAR Oui hae SRR a | 0.1245 | 16.6 85.0 Sy Ney Rack einen aaeaes | 0.1334 | 17.5 84.6 : CPUNSLRET te fi Kc Cord TRC Adeee sects 8.8 2 | 0.0577 18.5 79.9 Tite ed ee Se | 0.0640 1807; 80.4 oh ca ae | 0.0582 18.1 80.1 | 3) iS ids bin ee ae | 0.0665 19.3 | 79.9 674 HENRY H. DONALDSON For the Chicago frogs we had no October observation, but in this case we do have one and it is seen that it occupies the position which we should expect, and thus supplements and extends the Chicago data. When first computing the values of C for the Minnesota frogs, taken in October, it seemed important to use specimens having the same body weight as those used in the preceding series, so the first entry for October made in tables 4 and 5 is for the six speci- mens having an average body weight of 48.5 gms. This entry is designated 3. Later the value of C was determined for the re- TABLE 5 Data on frogs from Minnesota, 1998 NUMBER OF | ae BIRO SPECIMENS VALUE OF C SERIES a Probable DATE M. | #F Mean error of the Range meant 1908 ile 2 | 2 | March 26 28.1 +0.30 (27 .0-29 ..4) Di 0 > | June 10 Sil i +().65 (28 .8-34.8) gS 58 A ee ed 3 3 | October 19 PASS Pe +().66 (24.5-32.6) cea ene 3 9 October 19 28.3 +().36 (25 .1-32. * Series 3 (six cases) has an average body weight of 48.5 gms. + Series 3’ (twelve cases) has an average body weight of 64.9 gms. t See comments on pp. 671-672. maining twelve specimens having an average body weight of 64.9 gms. This latter record is entered in the tables as 3’. The value of C is the same in both series. This gives me the opportunity to correct a statement previously made, (Donaldson 710, p. 14) to the effect that the value of Cis in a measure influenced by the absolute size of the frog. This conclusion I now think erroneous. It may be added that in the paper just cited the argument is not altered by the introduction of the data for the groups of frogs there excluded from comparison on account of their body weight. The most striking difference between the observations on the Minnesota frogs and those on the Chicago frogs is the high value CHANGES IN WEIGHT OF CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM 675 of C in the former, but the discussion of this point will be deferred until the observations on the next lot of frogs have been presented. The probable error of the mean values of C given in table 5 is open to the same interpretation as was given in the case of the Chicago frogs (see pp. 671-672). We conclude from this study of the Minnesota frogs that the relative weight of the central nervous system is low in the spring, high in the midsummer and low again in the autumn, and these relations are shown on chart 2. 327 VALUE OF C. CHART 2 MINNEAPOLIS FEB, MAR. APR. MAY. JUNE. JULY AUG. SEPT. OCT. NOV. DEC. JAN. Chart 2. Based on data in table 5. Observations on the frogs from the Brandywine, 1909 These frogs were brought from the Brandywine Creek near Philadelphia, and in some ways represent the best of the three lots. The plan was to examine about twelve specimens at inter- vals of a month or less between the appearance of the frogs in the spring and their disappearance in the autumn. The two Feb- ruary series, as well as those of October and November, were taken within a spring house, and those of the intervening series from the neighborhood. The frogs did not emerge until the end of March. The July series was overheated in transport and could not be used. In all there are eleven series recorded. 676 HENRY H. DONALDSON As in the other cases, all the frogs examined in which the per- centage of water was normal, have been included in the records, but those with abnormal percentages of water in the central ner- vous system have been omitted, hence many of the series contain less than twelve records (see table 6), which also gives the funda- mental data for this lot. TABLE 6 Data on frogs from the Brandywine, 1909. Fundamental table giving the mean values for each series NUMBER OF SPECIMENS | SERIES para Se Sh ee Paes | BODY WEIGHT TOTAL LENGTH BODY LENGTH Mies Salant |) Hebruarey § tape 23-7 | 0220 | 20.925 1) Ds sentria | 6 | 5 | February 22 | 23.8 | +0.36 (21.7-26.8) 30 | 7 | 4 | Mareh 3) | «624.0 | +£0.29 | (20.9=26:)) 4.. LI eo Apr Sen | 24.8) | 20120 (23.2-26.3) ERWrarses e 6 | May 20 | 26.8 | +0.61 | (22.5-31.7) 6 Penne 2 | June 19 26.3 | 0.30 | (24.4-28.9) 7 .| a | | | our |) 3.) 25 1 Apustoe e138 26.1 | +0.24 (A=27 41) 9.. | 5 °| | September 8 | 27.2 | +031 | 425.2-20.6) 10ers Were 6 September 24 25.2 | £0.57 | (21.6-29.6) Wie ame 7 | October 19 24.5 | +0.43 | (20.2-28.7) IDs. 2 3 November 16 23.9 =0.16 | (22.7-26.0) *See comments on pp. 671-672. CHANGES IN WEIGHT OF CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM 679 TABLE 8 The percentage changes in the value of C in each of the three lots of frogs. The March value used as the standard is underlined CHICAGO LOT MINNESOTA LOT BRANDYWINE LOT o a | Sr _|| a Cai ae mS | 8 5 | 28 | s | 28 5 | 68 DATE Ng A in| DATE a | 2% DATE Balhae z 5 | gs S| Be 5 | 28 2 a ° < g° < a? > m& | > 0) > iv = — It ————— —- —__— — | | | February 4 23.7 |-1.0 | | | February 22 | 23.8 |—0.8 March 28 | 24.7| 0 || March 26 | 28.1 0 March 23 | 24.0) 0 April 9/25.8| 4.8] | | April Dal 247 Se 353 May 427 ON 9 3. | | May 20 | 26.8 | 11.6 June D206) 7 June 107) 31.1) 10.7 || June 19 | 26.3 | 9.6 June 29 | | | | July 27 | 28.5 | 15.4 | | August 13 | 26:1} 8.7 August 24 | 28.3 | 14.6 | | September 8 27.2 | 13.3 September 22) 27.9 | 13.0 | | | September 24 | 25.2) 5.0 | October 29 | 28.2 | 0.3 | October 19 | 24.5| 2.1 | | | 0.4 | . November 16 23.9 — 0.4 | | | | | | | January 30 | 24.8 The percentage change in the value of C as indicated by the observations when the late March value is taken as the standard, is given for all three lots in table 8. When thé data on these tables are put in the form of a chart (chart 4) and then an ideal symmetrical curve is drawn a number of interesting relations come into view. In the first place the maximum of this curve in July is 13 per cent above the initial value of C. Second, during the month from the end of March to the end of April, C increases about 7 per cent; during the month from the end of April to the end of May, about 4 per cent, and from the end of May to the end of June, about 2 per cent. During July little change occurs and then the converse changes follow during the three months from August first to the end of October. During hibernation, November first to the end of March, the value of C is nearly constant. These values are admittedly only approximations, but when so understood, they serve to show the general course of the seasonal changes. 680 HENRY H. DONALDSON From the foregoing we are justified in concluding that there is a seasonal change in the relative weight of the central nervous system of the leopard frog, R. pipiens, and that this occurs regularly each year and in frogs taken from widely separated localities. Moreover, if we know in any case the value of C for a colony of frogs at a given date, it is possible in accordance with these results to determine approximately what the value will be for other representatives of the same colony, at any other season of the year. Nevertheless in the first instance, the values of C for a given colony must always be determined by direct observation. We have seen that at similar dates the value of C for the Brandy- CHART 4 16- PER CENT ° 12+ CHANGES IN THE gL VALUE OF C. Ory x xo 1 _L 1 — et 1 =f ! {ee FEB. MAR. APR. MAY. JUNE. JULY. AUG. SEPT. OCT. NOV. DEC, JAN. Chart 4 Based on data in table 8. Also giving an ideal curve about which the several records are grouped. ® Records from Chicago series. ° Records from Minneapolis series. x Records from Brandywine series. wine frogs is 24.0, for the Chicago frogs 24.7 and for the Minne- sota frogs 28.1. The differences between these series I refer to the general effect of the external conditions (= food supply, abundance of water, etc.) but whatever the explanation is, such differences must always be anticipated. Further, the individual variation in this character is large so that all determinations should be based on data from groups, and not on single cases. On the other hand, although the frogs from a given locality or station may have the central nervous system developed in a proportion different from that found in frogs from another local- ity, yet frogs from the same locality tend to remain constant in this character. CHANGES IN WEIGHT OF CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM 681 This last statement is supported by my observations on the two European species, R. esculenta and R. temporaria, as given in table 9. As is seen, the value of C in both the European forms is less than in the American R. pipiens (Donaldson, ’08 and ’10). The point to be specially illustrated in table 9 is, however, that frogs from the same locality maintain the same values of C. Thus both series of R. esculenta, taken from the same station at Zurich and examined in July, but with an interval of five years, show values of C nearly alike. TABLE 9 | VALUE OF C | NUMBER OF : 4 Fie Sh ews POR | SPECIMENS BEAMINED. Probable Mean error of the mean Rresculentascceer sae eee | 11 July 20, ’04 23.8 | +(). 46 Rescuilemitan $3. yas. 11 | aluly 6, 709 23at +(0.36 Its LEMMON oo ooeocue see 12 July 1, ’04 22.8 | +£0.47 I, WEMO NOMEN oe gee ge eno c|| 16 August 20,709 21.8 | =+0.26 On the other hand, the two series of R. temporaria from the same station at Liverpool, give on July 1, 1904, 22.8 and on August 20, 1909, 21.9, a fall of about 4 per cent in the value of C, which, as explained above, is the sort of change to be expected, although the amount of it is larger than we should have predicted. Il. THE BIOLOGICAL INTERPRETATION OF THE SEASONAL CHANGE IN THE RELATIVE WEIGHT OF THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM In order to form a proper picture of the manner in which this change in the relative weight of the central nervous system as just described is brought about, it will be necessary to obtain a notion of the growth changes in the entire frog during the active period of each year. At present only two sets of observed facts are available: (1) The change in the percentage of water. (2) Changes in length :—but from these latter, changes in body weight can be fairly inferred. 682 HENRY H. DONALDSON 1. The changes in the percentage of water As to the percentage of water in the entire frog, I made the determination in the Chicago frogs by drying the animals for sev- eral weeks in the same oven which was used for the determina- tion of the percentage of water in the brain and spinal cord. From each series in the Chicago lot, with the exception of 1, 2, 35 and 38, one male and one female frog were taken; both were weighed fresh and then opened and the ova removed from the female when necessary. Care was taken of course that no other tissue was lost by the operation. The results are given in table 10, first for single series, then for the averages of the several series grouped in the way in which the series appear in table 3. The entries for the series, 13, 14, 15 and 16, which series were not used for the determination of C, are also given, and it is interesting to note that there was nothing peculiar in the amount of water in the entire frog in these cases. TABLE 10 On the amount of water in the entire frog. Chicago frogs, by single series and by groups PERCENTAGE OF WATER SERIES © DATE MALES | agar FEMALES ees i ee SERIES GROUP | SERIES GROUP | ot evar ee Aas ams. 1 nae March 29 | | | | | Ze ae: April 4 | Sere April 10 | AeA Ae April i fame ess ri Team 2126 81.4 81.4 | 16.6 Ce ae April 24 | 80.1 | 81.0 |] (oes May 1 erie Pari 80.8 | 80.5 | 22.9 80:7 |. 21-3 Teste May 8 80.1 80.8 | Bate ees May 15 82.1 79.3 YBa! May 22 Sr aren | 81.4 |) 10) eee May 29 8 leo a | aare 82.2 Si 9 aoe eee June 5 80 3 | Wee 81.8 He June 12 ise | 79.4 | CHANGES IN WEIGHT OF CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM 683 TABLE 10—ContTINUED PERCENTAGE OF WATER SERIES DATE MALES FEMALES BODY BODY = = ) |) WRIGHT: } iene n Som (0the TES EL GED | SERIES GROUP SERIES GROUP | 1901 | gms. | | | gms. Ce June 19> 3) 80:5; “1 Wels Jet Ee eee June ah} 79.9, | 79.9 : ae July 4 79.8 80.1) 22.9 | 79.9 pl CE ee WG. July 11 78.4 |j | oa) UP cast July 18 78.9 |) | b <79e7 Cae a July 24 | 80.4 | hizet aces Ta eee aly 31 | 77.9 78.7 | 22.9 HG Sualliwce ea Vas PAU SRE August Tf Noe tices [meer (s8) Bo) Aupustis 14) 27605 : | 77.6 | a ale PAIS cis Di Pee 1G: 5 |< 76a by 23....... August 28 | 78.1 Le Rare) a COA (eee 2 DA Nes | September 4 | 78.7 | 76.3 | 7 oleae September 12 16.3 |) (herd ANN | AG eae September 18 | 81.3 || 78.4 | 27......| September 25 76.8 TMZ cae 77.5 Gee | ar 7: eke | October See iie eSn0 78.2 7 eat October 10 | 78.4 | | 78:6" |) “(aes October 17 | 77.8 | 81.9 ie October 24 | 79.4 GUUS) ease 78.5 oO ees Be aback October 31 80.5 80.7 ee November 14 | 79.8) 80.2 oi ae ee | November 27 | 81.3 |} 80.7] 23.3 82.0 80.7 | 24.3 aOreeE el Decembery is mee sleOn | 80.0 | 1902 | Biel acs | January 10 8273 ~ |) \ 84.5 | \ Bie uetiianery. aie ee eo.3- | {52> | 20 Oe ee eee Soar | March 22 | | The entry for January 10 and 31, 1902, of M. 82.3 and F. 83.2 per cent seems very high—but the water in the nervous system of these groups was not found to be excessive. These high values are probably due to the fact, as suggested by the body weights, that these frogs were a year younger than those used for the rest of the series. I will return to this matter later. On following 684 HENRY H. DONALDSON down the water determinations by groups, it is quite evident that the entire frog begins with a high percentage of water in April and May, which diminishes towards the midsummer (Aug- ust) and then rises again during the autumn. Moreover as the records stand, they suggest that the percentage of water in the female, as compared with the male, is higher in the spring, lower from July to October and higher again during hibernation. It may be added as bearing on this difference according to sex that I made a few observations on the percentage of water in the ripe ova of these frogs. These were taken early in the spring. The determinations are given in table 11. TABLE 11 Percentage of water. Females IN ENTIRE FROG IN SAME FROG ~ WITH OVA WITHOUT OVA xt ONES SEELCS 4 kas heres 76.8 81.4 56.4 SELES Dien Wh es 76.8 §1.0 | Dae SErlGse(acoss hse Meee 76.5 80.8 O2eo The average of the values in table 11 is 57.3 per cent which is in general agreement with the old observations of Beaudimont ‘and St. Ange (’47) giving in the eggs of Rana (esculenta?) the percentage of 55.7. The data serve to show the relatively small amount of water in the ova and the effect of the presence of the ova in reducing the percentage of water in the entire frog. It is just possible that in late summer, at least, small quantities of young ova, considered at the time too insignificant to be removed, may have contributed to the lower percentage of water in the female at this season. For the general course of this percentage during the season, as shown in table 10, it is difficult to give a complete explanation. Long ago, in his admirable study on the distribution of water, v. Bezold (’57) showed that larger frogs (Rana temporaria) had a less percentage of water than smaller ones. His series ranged in body weight was from 3.0-61.0 gms. and the corresponding percentages of water were 79.77 and 74.31, with six intermediate determinations. CHANGES IN WEIGHT OF CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM 685 In this series it is to be noted that the heaviest frogs are prob- ably three years older than the lightest. At 22.7 gms., v. Bezold finds the percentage of water in the early summer to be 78.2, which is in good agreement with my July record of 78.7 (average of both sexes) for frogs the average body weight of which was 22.4 ems. Since in table 10 the body weight values—save for April (females) and January (both sexes)—are nearly alike, the vari- ations in the percentage of water cannot well be explained as due to size. On the other hand if the frogs were from eggs of the same year, except in the instances above indicated, the specimens examined later in the season must be older than those taken ear- lier. Advancing age would demand a fall in the percentage of water and this fall as we have seen, occurs. But the fall in turn gives way to arise in the percentage of water after the beginning of September. To explain this latter result, I can merely suggest that it occurs as active feeding comes to an end and when the frog is less well supplied with food than in the early part of the summer, and thus it may represent a condition of underfeeding or starva- tion which has been shown by Moraczewski. (00) to cause the percentage of water in the entire frog to rise.’ It is evident therefore that age and food conditions at least have an influence on the percentage of water in the entire frog, but the results, like those given in table 10, cannot be fully explained until it is determined first whether there are additional important con- ditions, and second, how these conditions which we do recognize interact. Before leaving this topic it is important to state that in both the brain and the spinal cord no systematic variation in the percent- age of water can be observed during the active season. This statement is true for all three lots of frogs. Moreover, as shown in table 12, the averages for the percentages of water in the brain and cord (using the data in tables 3, 4 and 6) are nearly alike for all three lots of frogs. 2 In the paper cited above, Moraczewski’s general conclusion 2, page 144, is con- tradictory to his tables. The above statement in the text is based on the tables and on the text on page 136 of the paper cited. JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 3 686 HENRY H. DONALDSON TABLE 12 Average values of the percentages of water in the brain and spinal cord of the several lots of frogs, from data in tables 1, 3 and 6 BRAIN CORD Frogs trom Chicago- eye ace te | 84.6 80.4 Hrogs trom Mannesota, 150.0240. ecee en |. 85.0 80.1 Frogs from the Brandywine............... 84.6 80.0 2. Changes in length On the growth of the frog in length during the active season only two sets of data have been found. In the first instance Miss Dickerson (’07) gives pictures of Rana aurora at one, two and three years. On measuring these, I obtained the body lengths given in table 13. Using the determinations made on R. pipiens—which Rana aurora resembles—and according to which the body length is 37.5 per cent of the total length—we obtain the calculated total lengths given in table 13. From-a series of determinations of the relation of body weight to total length in R. pipiens, Dr. Hatai (’11) has developed the accompanying formula: y = 158 Log(@@ + 6.5) —63 in which y is the total length in millimeters and x the body weight in grams. This expresses the normal relation of total length to body weight in R. pipiens’. TABLE 13 Rana aurora CALCULATED AGE | BODY LENGTH mas =e See ee et Total length Body weights yrs. mm. mm. gms. | en Perey Ee Nees eee 36 | 96 3.6 D te Shee Te eta Oe Tees 50 | 133 10.9 DEO SM ee oe ey ly, > 63 | 168 * This formula was based on themeasurements of several series of Chicago frogs, R. pipiens. It fits the observations on the Minnesota frogs also. The observa- CHANGES IN WEIGHT OF CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM 687 When this formula is applied to the foregoing data, we obtain for the given total lengths the body weights which are entered in table 13. The results show that for the years taken, the body weight approximately doubles during each active season. This completes the first instance. The second instance is from Fischer-Sigwart (’97) who reports for R. temporaria the following body lengths at different ages: see ‘body length’ in table 14. TABLE 14 R. temporaria CALCULATED AGES BODY LENGTH = =n Total length Body weight mm. gms. End of first year........ 20-25 | 68 0.8 End of second year..... | 30-35 95 | 3.5 End of third year....... (42-47) * | (128)* 8 .0* 0 End of fourth year... .. 55-60 163 | 22) *Interpolated by H. H. D. According to Boycott (04) the body length in R. temporaria is 36.6 per cent-of the total length. If now we take for the determination of the total iengths the highest values for the body lengths as given in the foregoing table, we obtain the series of figures marked ‘total length’ in table 14. Using the data on body weight given for R. temporaria by Boy- cott (’04) in his table (p. 375) we obtain the approximations for the body weights which are given in the last column of table 14. Here again the body weights are more than doubled from season to season during the last three years. The value of the foregoing calculations lies not in the exact numbers obtained, for these are in a measure open to correction, but in the indication which these numbers give of the rate of growth from year to year. tions on the Brandywine frogs however show fora given body weight, total lengths about 4 per cent less than those determined by the formula. These last frogs are therefore heavier for a given total length or shorter for a given body weight than those on which the formula is based. The formula does not apply to frogs less than 3.5 gms. in body weight. 688 HENRY H. DONALDSON They show that the rate is such as to cause the body weight to double, or more than double, from season to season during the three successive annual intervals; a very peculiar interesting re- sult when compared with the growth of mammals. Having thus determined the growth in body weight from season to season, it is desirable to calculate the weights of the central nervous system which correspond to the body weights found. We shall take but one instance—namely the last pair from the table 14—as these represent records for which we have some control observations. The weight of the central nervous system is determined by the formula based on body weight and body length, using in the first instance 20.2 for the value of C. This value of C was obtained in the following manner. On referring to table 9, page 681, it is seen that the value of C for R. temporaria on July 1, 1904, was 22.8. According to our present view of seasonal change, we should expect this to be the maximum annual value of C. If this be correct, then this value is 13 per cent greater than it would be in the spring or autumn; therefore at the two ends of the season we should expect the value of C to be 13 per cent less or 20.2. The weight of the central nervous system is therefore calculated accordingly, 7.e., with C = 20.2 for the two ends of the season. In addition to the two sets of values giving the body weight, total length and weight of central nervous system, first at the time of emergence of a given individual, and second at the time of its hibernation, there have been interpolatéd in table 15 the val- ues for this same frog when half grown in body weight—that is weighing 15.0 gms., and in the first instance the weight of the central nervous system in this half grown frog is calculated using 20.2 as the value of C. This table 15 gives us a notion of what would take place. if the frog increased by about two and a half times its initial weight in the course of the season, and at the same time underwent the nor- mal correlated increase in body length and in the weight of its central nervous system—the relative weight of this latter remain- ing the same, 7.e., the constant C remaining unaltered during the process and having the value of 20.2. From the Zirich series we have reason to think, (see table 9,) that the mid season value of CHANGES IN WEIGHT OF CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM 689 C is not 20.2 but 22.8, as observed. When this latter value of C is taken, then the weight of the central nervous system at the mid season becomes 0.0941 gms., which is nearly the weight found at the end of the season. This value is entered in table 15 under Cz=22 8. The first comment on these results is that they are in good agreement with the direct observations on the weight of the cen- tral nervous system in R. temporaria (Donaldson, ’08, table 9), and may therefore be used as a basis for further argument. The foregoing computations have been repeated in the case of the data for R. aurora, (table 13), but as the results depend en- tirely on the fact that the frog more than doubles its body weight TABLE 15 R. temporaria CALCULATED WEIGHT OF CENTRAL NERVOUS | SYSTEM TOTAL LENGTH BODY WHIGHT C=20.2 C=22.8 mm. gms gms | gms 128 | 8.0 0.0614 150 15.0 | 0.0834 | 0.0941 | | 163 22.0 | 0.0968 from season to season, and as we do not have data to control them, it does not appear necessary to put down the numerical findings. If now we attempt to picture how these growth changes which have been determined are related to one another in order to give the results found, the following appears. As shown in table 15, the weight of the central nervous system at emergence is .0614 gms. and at hibernation .0968 gms., a gain of 57 per cent. For the mid weight value in this table, or a body weight of 15.0 gms., the weight of the central nervous system would be .0834 if C remained constant. We know however that C rises in the first half of the season and in July is 13 per cent greater than in March. Taking C as 22.8 therefore, or 13 per cent more than its initial value, the weight of the central nervous system becomes .0941, or almost that found at the end of the 690 HENRY H. DONALDSON season. We conclude from this that the growth of the central nervous system is precocious and takes place mainly in the first half of the active season. The relations just described are plotted in chart 5. Here the shape of the curve for the increasing weight of the central ner- vous system is fixed for the last half of the season, but the form given to it for the first half is based on the assumption that growth must begin slowly and become rapid only later. Until direct observations on the body growth can be made for the exact control of this curve, the form given here may stand as a probable representation of what occurs. 10 - WEIGHT IN GMS. CHART 5 10 09 .09 .08 .08 GROWTH OF CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM CALCULATED 07 O07 FEB. MAR APR. MAY. J " os ; y é UNE. JULY. AUG. SEPT. OCCT. NOV. DEC. JAN. Chart 5 Curve for the growth of the central nervous system, R. temporaria. Based on data in table 15, using the value of C=20.2 for March and October and the value of C=22.8 for July. It is to be remembered however that this curve asit stands is based on observations on R. temporaria, but from what we know about this species it seems most probable that it applies to R. pipiens also. In connection with the phenomena just described, it may be well to review briefly the growth conditions for the frog at various seasons. When a normal frog disappears in hibernation, it 1s prepared for the experience. The digestive system has suffered involution and a considerable amount of fat has been stored in the fat bodies, liver and muscles. The frog emerges from hiber- nation with most of this stored material intact and lives on it largely during the breeding season and the earlier spring weeks. CHANGES IN WEIGHT OF CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM 691 As this gradually becomes exhausted, feeding is resumed and with the advance of the season and the increase in food, the frog not only grows, but restores these reserves and prepares for the next period of hibernation. This review of the feeding habits of the frog serves to empha- size the fact that the conditions for nutrition in the early part of the season are different from those to be found later, and in so far might be responsible for the peculiarities in the relative growth of the central nervous system which we have observed. In addition there are several considerations which have a very immediate bearing on the foregoing results, and especially on their variability. It must always be remembered that we are working with an animal in which the regulation of both general and rela- tive growth is poor: an animal very responsive to the influence of external conditions—one that canbe chilled or warmed, dried or made moist, fed abundantly or left without food for long periods. Thus, in a poor season, 7.e., poor in insects, or in the water con- ditions, the frog may not exhibit its usual increase in size, may not store its full food reserve for the first half of the year to follow and so not only grow poorly in general, but also not be able to exhibit the usual relative growth of the central nervous system during the season which follows. It is hardly necessary to elaborate these relations, enough hay- ing been said to indicate why frogs taken at the same date and in the same locality, may exhibit wide differences in the relative weight of the central nervous system. What we find in the case of any frog probably depends in large measure on the external conditions to which that individual has been subjected, not only during the season in which it was caught, but also during the sea- son which preceded. If one turn back therefore to table 1, it appears that in the Chicago series the minimal values of C vary irregularly from month to month; suggesting that some of the individuals grew very little—as this would be the readiest explan- ation of the absence of systematic changes—while the maximal values show more consistent changes, tending to follow the mean. On the other hand, in the case of both the Minnesota and Brandywine frogs, both the minimal and maximal values tend to 692 HENRY H. DONALDSON follow the mean values more regularly; Minnesota, table 5, Brandywine, table 7. SUMMARY From the foregoing discussion, the following conclusions are drawn: 1. - The relative weight of the central nervous system of the frog, Rana pipiens, changes during the active season, and such a change is probably characteristic for other species of frogs with like habits. 2. The relative weight of the central nervous system is low at the time of emergence, high in the midsummer (July) and low again at the time of hibernation. During hibernation it remains nearly constant. In the formula used to express the weight of the central nervous system, the absolute value of C is character- istic for the station from which the frogs come. 3. The range from minimum to maximum in the value of C is about 13 per cent, rising 7 per cent from the end of March to the end of April, 4 per cent more from the end of April to the end of May, and 2 per cent more from the end of May to the first of July, remaining stationary in July and then in reverse order falling month by month at a similar rate to the end of October. 4. This variation-in the relative weight according to season is due to lack of coincidence between the growth of the central nery- ous system and the growth of the entire body. 5. In frogs from one to four years old, the body weight more than doubles during each active season. The precise form of the curve representing this body growth is not known. 6. The growth of the central nervous system is precocious in relation to that of the body, but in the absence of direct observa- tions on the growth of the body, the form of the curve can only be indirectly determined as shown in chart 5. 7. During the active season, the percentage of water in the entire frog falls slightly from spring to summer and rises again from summer to autumn. These changes seem to be due to the combined effects of advancing age and varying food supply. The conclusions just given apply primarily to the interpreta- tion of the preceding observations, but secondarily they also CHANGES IN WEIGHT OF CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM 693 bear on the phenomena of growth as shown by vertebrates in general. The curve for the growth of the central nervous system of the frog as given in chart 5 has the general character of the cor- responding curve for a mammal; but as is evident, this curve in the case of the frog must repeat itself from year to year, so that if we should plot the entire curve for the span of life, rather than for a single season, it would be represented by a sinuous ascend- ing line in which the sinuosities would probably diminish towards the upper end. If we turn now to general body growth, which is closely corre- lated with that of the central nervous system, it appears that the poikilothermous vertebrates as a group must show a seasonal variation in growth in all latitudes where there is any marked seasonal change, and that the phenomena of hibernation, with the concomitant effects with which we have to deal, represent merely a special case of this seasonal variation. If now we pass up the vertebrate scale we find in the temper- ate zones both hibernating mammals, as well as those in which the seasons seems to produce marked nutritional modifications, and finally we have Malling-Hansen’s observations (’86) on Danish children from 9 to 15 years of age which show that the growth in stature is mainly inthe third of the year between the middle of April and the middle of August, while the third comprised be- tween the middle of August and the middle of December is the one in which they gain nine-elevenths of their annual increase in body weight. This leaves the remaining third from mid-De- cember to mid-April, z.e., late winter and early spring, as the one in which very little growth of any sort occurs. This seems to link the rhythmic growth in the frog with that in man. To be sure there are at present but very few data available, but such as we have suggest that within the annual cycle we should expect even in the higher vertebrates a distinct rhythm corresponding to the responses of the poikilothermous vertebrates, and still exhib- ited even by the group in which the regulation of temperature has been more or less completely attained. Just one point more. The rate of growth in the frog, more than doubling its body weight for three successive years (as far as we have observations) shows that the rate in the frog does not 694 HENRY H. DONALDSON fall off with anything like the rapidity that it does in man and some other mammals. This difference suggests a number of questions to answer which it will be necessary to take up the study of growth in hibernating mammals. LITERATURE CITED BrauDIMONT ET St. ANGE 1847 Sur les phenomenes chimiques de l'evolution embryonnaire des oiseaux et des batraciens. Annal. de Chim. et de Physique, 38rd series, vol. 21. vy Bezoup, A. 1857 Untersuchungen iiber die Vertheilung von Wasser, organ- ischer Materie und unorganishen Verbindungen in Thierreiche. Ztschr. f. wiss. Zool., vol. 8, pp. 487-524. Boycorr, A. E. 1904 On the number of nodes of Ranvier in different stages of the growth of nerve fibers in the frog. J. of Physiol., vol. 30, pp. 370- 380. Dickerson, Mary C. 1907 The frog book. Doubleday, Page & Co., N. Y. Dona.tpson, H. H. 1898 Observations on the weight and length of the central nervous system and of the legs in bullfrogs of different sizes. Jour. Comp. Neur. Psych., vol. 8, no. 4, pp. 314-335. 1902 On a formula for determining the weight of the central nervous system of the frog from the weight and length of the entire body. Decennial publications, University of Chicago, vol. 10. 1908 The nervous system of the American leopard frog, Rana pipiens, compared with that of the European frogs Rana esculenta and Rana tem- poraria (fusca). Jour. Comp. Neur. Psych., vol. 18, no. 2, pp. 121- 149. ; 1910 Further observations on thenervous system of the American leop- ard frog (Rana pipiens) compared with that of the Huropean frogs (Rana esculenta and Rana temporaria). Jour. Comp. Neur. Psych., vol. 20, no. 1, p. 1-18. Donaupson, H. H. anp ScHoEMAKER, D. M. 1900 Observations on the weight and length of the central nervous system, and of the legs in frogs of different sizes (Rana virescens brach'zcephala Cope). Jour. Comp. Neur. Psych., vol. 10, no. 1, pp. 109-132. z Fiscuer-Sigwart, H. 1897 Biologische Beobachtungen an unseren Amphibien. Vierteljahrsch. d. Naturf. Gesell., Ziirich, vol. 42, Jahrg. 1897. Harat, 8. 1911 A formula for determining the total length of the leopard frog (R. pipiens) for a given body weight. Anat. Rec., vol. 5, no. 6. Mauuinc-HANSsEN, R. 1886 Perioden im Gewicht der Kinder und in der Sonnen- wirme. Kopenhagen. MoraczEwskI, W. von 1900 Die Zuzammensetzung des Leibes von hungernden und blutarmen Fréschen. Arch. Anat. u. Phys., Suppl. Bd. zur phys. Abthl. ToRELLE, EtteN 1903 The response of the frog to light. Am. J. of Physiol., vol. 9, pp. 466-488. THE PHYSIOLOGY OF CELL-DIVISION IV. THE ACTION OF SALT SOLUTIONS. FOLLOWED BY HYPERTONIC SEA-WATER ON UNFERTILIZED SEA-URCHIN EGGS AND THE ROLE OF MEMBRANES IN MITOSIS RALPH S. LILLIE From the Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods Hole, and the Physiological Labor- atory, Department of Zoology, University of Pennsylvania THREE FIGURES INTRODUCTION During the summer of 1909 at Woods Hole I found that mem- brane-formation and cleavage, leading in a small proportion of cases to the production of blastulae, could be induced in unfer- tilized eggs of Asterias and Arbacia by temporary exposure to isotonic solutions of various neutral salts.!. Salts of sodium and potassium were chiefly employed, including chloride, bromide, nitrate, iodide and sulphocyanate; last summer chlorate was also used. In the case of Asterias all of these were found to induce membrane-formation and cleavage in a large proportion of eggs. With Arbacia, however, only iodide and sulphocyanate showed a corresponding degree of effectiveness; nitrate had well- marked though less decided action, chlorate produced little and bromide still less effect, while chloride was almost entirely in- active; sodium acetate was found to act like chloride. The order of relative effectiveness of the salts, ranged according to the anions, is as follows: COO CH; and Cl who has been followed by Briinings, Hober, and others,?° is briefly as follows. In general any membrane, differ- ing in its permeability to ions of opposite sign, and interposed between two electrolytic solutions of dissimilar concentration (or composition), must be the seat of a potential-difference; i.e., the two surfaces will have different potentials due to separation of oppositely charged ions at the membrane, since the more pen- etrating ion will traverse the membrane more freely and impart its charge to the layer of solution in contact with the opposite face. Such a potential-difference will persist so long as the in- equality of concentration and of permeability to the two sets of ions remains unchanged. Equalization of the concentration- difference, as by gradual diffusion, will abolish the potential- difference; alteration in the permeability of the membrane, so 24 Ostwald: Zeitschrift fiir physikalische Chemie, 1890, vol. 6, p. 71. 25 Bernstein: Archiv fiir die gesammte Physiologie, 1902, vol. 92, p. 521. 26 Briinings: Archiv fiir die gesammte Physiologie, 1903, vol. 98, p. 241, and vol. 100, p. 367; Héber: Archiv fiir die gesammte Physiologie, 1904, vol. 101, p. 607, also Physikalische Chemie der Zelle und der Gewebe; further references here. THE PHYSIOLOGY OF CELL-DIVISION 715 that both ions then pass with equal readiness, will have a similar effect ;27 such an effect will follow any marked general increase in the ionic permeability of the membrane, since the selective per- meability to different ions will then tend to disappear. If we take a limiting case and suppose that the membrane is freely per- meable to one ion of the electrolyte, e.g., the cation (hydrogen- ion) of an acid, and completely impermeable to the anion, the surface adjoining the solution with the lower H-ion concentra- tion will be positive relatively to the other surface; if the con- centrations be known, the potential-difference can be calculated from Nernst’ ay Oe me rom Nernst’s equation, a ap ae difference between two adjoining unequally concentrated solu- tions of any electrolyte with ions of unequal velocity; in the pres- ent case, since v=o, the potential-difference will be equal to R fe C2 Fr In a Ce ; In ar for the potential- 1 This formula is identical with that expressing the factors deter- mining the potential-difference between any ion-liberating surface, e.g., a metallic plate, and the solution, e.g., of its own salt, in con- tact with it.22 Such a membrane in fact acts essentially as an ion-liberating surface, freeing ions (H-ions) with a certain solu- tion-tension; it may thus play the same part as one of the ion-liberating surfaces (usually surfaces of metallic plates) in a galvanic battery. The same theory thus applies to the conditions under which potential-differences arise in a system containing 27 The potential-difference in this case will fall to that existing between adjoin- ing solutions of the electrolyte unseparated by a membrane. 28 In this formula Z denotes the potential-difference in volts, & the gas constant, T the absolute temperature, F the Faraday constant, 1.e., the number of coulombs of electricity carried by a gram ion (here assumed to be monovalent), wu velocity of cation, v of anion, In natural logarithm, cz ionic concentration of the stronger, c) of the weaker solution. The interposition of amembrane impermeable to anions of course reduces their velocity to zero. 29 In such a case ¢ is the solution-tension with which the ions are liberated from the surface, c; the concentration of the ions in the solution. For a polyvalent Jesh WG metal the formula is 2 = —— In = n being the valence of the cation. Cj 716 RALPH S. LILLIE such membranes as to the conditions in galvanic batteries.*° Bearing this principle in mind, we find that the electrical phenom- ena exhibited by living tissues, 1.e., systems in which electrolyte- solutions are separated by semi-permeable membranes—including those of stimulated muscle and nerve and dividing cells—lose their enigmatical character; they are special cases of phenomena long known to physical science and for which an adequate theory, due in its essential features to Nernst, has existed for some time. The indications that electrically polarized semi-permeable membranes play a fundamental part in vital processes are many and various. Cells are separated from their media by surfaces which are definitely semi-permeable. They also show a potential- difference against the medium, the demarcation-current potential, which has been repeatedly shown to undergo marked decrease when the surface-permeability increases, as at death or under the influence of cytolytic substances. Another proof of a surface- polarization, undergoing decrease with increase of permeability, is the well known fact that living cells are carried by an electrical current toward the anode, indicating that the cell-substance 1s negative, the adjacent water surface positive; when the cells die the rate of transport undergoes decided diminution.*! Again, electrical stimulation is a matter of ionic polarization, which can only occur at surfaces difficultly and unequally permeable to 20 The type of membrane investigated recently by Haber and Klemensiewicz (Zeitschrift fiir physikalische Chemie, 1909, vol. 67, p. 385) is one permeable only to the ions of water. Such membranes, e. g. thin layers of glass or benzol saturated with water, have properties that appear in many respects to answer more closely to the biological requirements. Changes in the acidity or alkalinity of one of the solutions separated by such a membrane, amounting to a few ten-thousandths normal, may, especially if both solutions are nearly neutral, produce changes of potential comparable to those observed in living tissues during stimulation. The effects of increased permeability would in such membranes be identical with those produced at membranes of the type imagined by Ostwald. The most striking peculiarity of these membranes is their sensitivity to changes in the re- action of the adjoining solutions in the neighborhood of the neutral point. The fact that protoplasm and its normal medium lymph are typically neutral acquires new significance from this point of view. The following considerations apply to either type of membrane. 31 An observation communicated to me by my colleague at Woods Hole, Dr. F. H. Pike, of Columbia University. I have since confirmed this observation, using portions of Spirogyra filaments. THE PHYSIOLOGY OF CELL-DIVISION iz ions; this has been definitely and conclusively demonstrated by the work of Nernst, Lapicque, Lucas, and Hill; this theory is confirmed by the fact that during the stimulated state, when the membranes undergo increase in permeability, stimulation becomes difficult or impossible (refractory period); i.e., increase in the permeability of the plasma-membranes beyond a certain degree makes electrical polarization and hence stimulation, impossible ;** this, it may be pointed out, is the essential reason why ‘dead’ cells are non-irritable. The proofs that stimulation involves increase in permeability of the plasma-membrane are too numer- ous to detail here ;* electrical changes, as long known, are an inva- riable accompaniment of stimulation. All of these facts, with many others, indicate that the electrical condition of the boundary membranes of cells, i.e., of the semi-permeable plasma-membranes, is a matter of fundamental importance to vital processes, and that this condition is variable and dependent on the degree of ionic permeability of the membranes. I have recently brought these facts and considerations to bear on the problem of cell-division.*® Since free cells, like egg cells, show the same osmotic properties as muscle-cells, it is fair to assume that they possess the same electrical properties. Investi- gation indicates that this is in fact the case.*® On application of the Ostwald-Bernstein theory of the origin of the demarcation- current potential to the case of the dividing cell, the familiar 32 Nernst: Archiv fiir die gesammte Physiologie, 1908, vol. 122, p. 275. La- picque: Numerous papers in Comptes rendus de la Société de Biologie and Archives de Physiologie normale et pathologique; cf. especially the latter journal, 1908, vol. 10, p. 601. Lucas: various papers in Journal of Physiology; cf. vol. 36, 1907, p. 253; vol. 37, 1908, p. 459; vol 39, 1909, p. 461; vol. 40, 1910, p. 225. Hill, ibid., vol. 40, 1910, p. 190. 33 Cf. my paper in the American Journal of Physiology, 1909, vol. 24, pp. 17, 18, for a brief discussion of this point. Tait: Quarterly Journal of Experimental Physiology, 1910, vol. 3, p. 221, has brought forward evidence indicating that the duration of the refractory period is identical with that of the action-current. Both phenomena, on the present theory, are manifestations of the same essential change, viz., increase in surface-permeability. 34 T have reviewed this evidence in American Journal of Physiology, 1909, vol. 24, p. 14, and 1911, vol. 28, p. 197. Cf. also Science, 1909, vol. 30, N.S., p. 245. 35 Cf. Biological Bulletin, 1909, vol. 17, p. 188. American Journal of Physiology, 1910, vol. 26, p. 106. 3 Cf. I. H. Hyde: Amer. Journ. Physiol., 1904, vol. 11, p. 52. JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY, VOL. 22, NO. 3 718 RALPH §. LILLIE phenomena of the production of a system of cytoplasmic radia- tions and spindle-fibers appear in a new light. The arrangement of the colloidal material in dividing cells irresistibly suggests the figures due to polarization of suspended particles in electrical or magnetic fields, and this comparison has naturally been made by many. The hypothesis that electrical forces are actually con- cerned in these phenomena has, however, been accepted by few and with reservations, and alternative attempts at explanation have on the whole received more credence among biologists. As I have already remarked, the difficulty of accounting for the existence of potential-differences between different regions of the cells has been the chief obstacle to the acceptance of such views. This difficulty, since the rise of the ionic theory and the recog- nition of the part played by ion-liberating surfaces in galvanic cells, has, I believe, ceased to exist. It is only necessary to recog- nize that membranes unequally permeable to anions and cations may play a part essentially identical with that of the metallic surfaces in batteries. Evidence from many sides indicates that such membranes exist.” Furthermore, their existence is a necessary deduction from the ionic theory, which ascribes different diffusion-rates, different solubilities, and different velocities and powers of penetration tothe different ions arising from the dissociation of any electrolyte. I shall not therefore attempt further in the limited space at my dis- posal to justify the assumption that such membranes exist; this would be tantamount to justifying the ionic theory, which, in spite of certain apparent inadequacies which have been made the basis of sometimes violent attack, has today a stronger position than ever. Its fruitfulness, the criterion of value in any theory, is attested by the innumerable successful researches which have 37 Cf. Ostwald: loc. cit.; Tammann: Zeitschrift fiir physikalische Chemie, 1892, vol. 10, p. 255; Walden: ibid., p. 699; Bein: ibid., 1899, vol. 28, p. 439; Briin- ings: Archiv. fiir die gesammte Physiologie, 1903, vol. 100, p. 367; Schreber: Zeitschrift fiir physikalische Chemie, 1899, vol. 28, p. 79; Springmann: Annalen der Physik, 1896, vol. 51, p. 140. The phenomena of electrical endosmose also belong here in part. THE PHYSIOLOGY OF CELL-DIVISION 719 been based upon it.** Its application to the phenomena exhibited by surfaces and by matter in the colloidal state has been especially illuminating.*® I shall assume, as in my former papers, that the plasma-membrane of any typical resting cell, like the egg-cell, is the seat of a potential-difference which is a function of its gen- eral impermeability to dissolved substances, including the major- ity of the ions normally present in protoplasm and its surroundings; it is further assumed that hydrogen-ions,—present in low con- centration in protoplasm in consequence of the dissociation of carbonic and other weak acids produced in metabolism,—having high velocity and penetrative power, can freely traverse the plasma-membrane. Whenever, therefore, as normally, the H-ion concentration is greater within the cell than in its medium, the membrane will exhibit an electrical polarization with outer surface positive. The chief polarizing electrolyte on this hypothe- sis is thus simply carbonic acid. Hydrogen-ions penetrate the membrane and enter the adjacent medium; the corresponding anions, being blocked in their diffusion by the membrane, are left behind; a typical electrical double layer is thus formed. The protoplasm, like (e.g.) a zine plate dipped in water, assumes a negative charge; there is a potential-difference across the surface, which, judging from the conditions in muscle, has an approximate value of 0.1 to 0.2 volt.*° 88 Hven yet one hears doubts expressed among biologists as to the validity of the ionic theory. A good discussion of this topic is to be found in the paper by G. H. Lewis: ‘‘The use and abuse of the Ionie Theory,’’ Zeitschrift fiir physi- kalische Chemie, 1910, vol. 70, p. 212. 39 For the general subject of the relations of ions to surfaces and to matter in the colloidal state, cf. Michaélis: Dynamik der Oberflichen, Dresden, 1909, and particularly Freundlich: Kapillarchemie. Leipzig, 1909. This treatise is a treasure-house of facts and principles of importance to biologists. 40 T.have met several times with the objection that carbonic acid is too weak to account for the very considerable potential-difference (ca. 0.1 volt) which, judging from the demarcation current of muscle, appears to exist between the outer surface and the interior of the cell. I do not see the force of such objections. The poten- tial-difference is a function of relative concentrations on opposite sides of the demar- cation surface, not of absolute concentrations. The quantity of ions actually liberated from a surface which shows a high potential-difference from its surround- ings may be infinitesimal; e.g., take the case of a metallic plate like zine in contact with a normal solution of its salt; the quantity of metal passing into solution is 720 RALPH S. LILLIE In a resting cell like the unfertilized egg there are two semi- permeable membranes, the plasma-membrane bounding the entire cell and the nuclear membrane bounding the inner surface of the cytoplasm. The cytoplasm between these surfaces is typi- cally homogeneous‘! and may hence be regarded as freely perme- able to diffusible crystalloid substances, including ions. This is indicated by the fact that diffusible coloring substances, like the pigment of Arbacia eggs, tend to become uniformly distributed throughout the cytoplasm, but meet with barriers at nuclear and plasma membranes; Héber has recently adduced physico- chemical evidence indicating that ions are free to diffuse within the cytoplasm, though they encounter marked resistance at the plasma-membrane.*2 The semi-permeability of both nuclear and plasma membranes is evidenced by the difference between the inorganic salt-content of the cytoplasm on the one side and of both external medium and nucleus on the other. Numerous other proofs for the essential semi-permeability of the plasma-mem- brane are well known; Macallum’s researches constitute the best proof for a similar condition in the nuclear membrane.“ The inappreciable; yet the P. D. is 0.51 volt. Particles of suspended quartz show a .P.D. against the water of 0.044 volt. Cf. Freundlich: Kapillarchemie, p. 234. It should also be noted that if the protoplasm serves in any way as a source of hydrogen-ions there will be a potential-difference at the surface even though the actual H-ion concentration within the protoplasm is extremely low. To account for the P.D. at the surface of the zine plate it is not necessary to assume that Zn-ions exist as such in the metal; all that is required is that the zinc which passes beyond the surface into the solution should be ionized. There is thus no necessary discrepancy between the present hypothesis and the view which regards proto- plasm as practically neutral in reaction. This, however, is demonstrably not always the case; contracting muscle (e.g.) may be distinctly acid to litmus, indi- cating a H-ion concentration exceeding 10-'n . “1 This statement relates particularly to cells about to Aaeaae by mitosis. Such cells typically lack ‘differentiation;’ i.e., the colloidal as well as the crystalloidal material usually shows a uniform distribution. Egg-cells with their stored masses of inert food material or yolk are frequent exceptions. * Hoéber: International Physiological Congress, September 1910; Archiv fiir die gesammte Physiologie, 1910, vol. 133, p. 237. 48 Cf. Macallum: Ergebnisse der Physiologie, 1908, vol. 7, p. 552. Hamburger finds the nuclei of intestinal and tracheal epithelial cells decidedly less permeable to NaCl than the cell-bodies of the same cells; nuclei of other epithelia (bladder and oesophagus) are also impermeable to NaCl. Cf. Osmotischer Druck und Ionenlehre, vol. 3, pp. 8 seq. Roémkes finds the nuclei of liver cells similarly im- permeable (cf. Biochemische Zeitschrift, 1908, vol. 14, p. 254). THE PHYSIOLOGY OF CELL-DIVISION 721 cytoplasm during rest, may therefore be regarded as an essen- tially homogeneous phase bounded externally and internally by a semi-permeable surface. What will be the electrical conditions in such a system? As already explained, each surface is to be regarded as permeable to H-ions, hence as corresponding to an ion-liberating surface, like that of a metallic plate immersed in an ionizing solvent like water. The conditions will hence be essentially as follows: Imagine a hollow zine sphere immersed in a solution of a zine salt and con- taining in its interior a second solution of zine salt (fig. 1). The Fig. 1. Representing in section a hollow zinc sphere immersed in zinc sulphate solution and containing the same solution in its interior. The orientation of the double layers is shown. The metal is uniformly negative, the adjoining solution positive. The analogy to the conditions in the resting cell is obvious,—7. e., there are two concentric electrically polarized surfaces separated by a homo- geneous conducting medium. two surfaces correspond to the two semi-permeable surfaces in the cell; at each surface zinc ions will tend to pass into the solu- tion with a pressure depending on the solution-tension of the zinc and on the concentration of zine ions in the adjoining solution. There will thus be a potential difference at each surface calculable Jed Mae 2 from the formula: H = oF ln = ; the only possible condition of ; , equilibrium however will be that these two potential differences should be equal, since if one surface of the zinc be at a higher potential than the other, electricity will pass through the freely conducting metal to equalize the potentials.“* The potential- 44 The case is obviously different from that of a concentration-cell in which two metallic plates are immersed in unequally concentrated solutions of a salt of the metal, and the two solutions freely communicate. In the above system the two surfaces are in metallic connection but the solutions are separated by an impermeable partition. If the partition were rendered permeable to ions, e.g., by boring a hole through the sphere, thus placing the two solutions in communication, a typi- 722 RAUPH-S. LiGLIEe difference at each surface will be the geometrical mean of that which either surface would show if the metal were in contact with only the one solution.4* The metal will necessarily be isoelec- tric, i.e., of the same potential in all its parts (outside of the double layer itself); this potential will be negative by a certain value (equal to 0.51 volts for zinc in contact with a normal solu- tion of zine sulphate) in relation to both solutions in contact with the metal. This corollary is especially important from the present point of view, because it means that the central enclosed solution is positive in relation to the metal enclosing it. Now the cell—considered from the electrochemical point of view as a system with two concentric semi-permeable membranes bounding a solution which in virtue of its slow oxidations is con- tinually freeing carbonic and other acids and hence H-ions—must exhibit conditions essentially similar to the above. The seat of these oxidations is the cytoplasm. The region enclosed by the nuclear membrane must thus represent a region of higher poten- tial than the adjacent cytoplasm, i.e., is positive relatively to the latter;° the same is true of the solution in contact with the surface of the cell. The persistence of such conditions depends on the semi-permeable character of the limiting layers or mem- cal concentration-cell would be the result, and zinc ions would be deposited from the stronger solution and pass into the weaker while anions simultaneously by dif- fused from the more to the less concentrated solution until the two were equalized. Impermeability to anions is the essential characteristic of the space separating the two solutions in the above system as also of the space bounded by the semi- permeable membranes in the cell. 4 The grounds for this conclusion will be found in Michaélis’ treatment of the case of asolid substance in contact with its saturated solution; this case is analogous to the above inprinciple. Cf. Dynamik der Oberflichen, p. 57. 46 Tt is evident that this view assumes that the H-ion concentration within the nuclear membrane is less than that outside, i.e., in the cytoplasm. Such a view implies that the oxidative metabolism in the resting cell—and hence the produc- tion of carbonic and other acids yielding the H-ions—is essentially confined to the cytoplasm. The conditions in active tissues like muscle support this concep- tion;in fact, the characteristic activities of cells are in general cytoplasmic activities; nuclei are relatively uniform in their characters. Hence the above assumption appears to be in accordance with the general facts of physiology. The question is difficult to decide by direct experiment, though possibly the use of indicators capable of penetrating both nucleus and cytoplasm without injurious action might yield valuable results. It should be borne in mind that oxygen, in order to reach the nucleus, must penetrate a layer of cytoplasm containing reducing substances. THE PHYSIOLOGY OF CELL-DIVISION hee branes, i.e., their essential impermeability to anions. Increase in the ionic permeability of the membranes must thus alter the electrical conditions in such a system, by altering the potential- difference across the surfaces concerned. The effect of such a change would be essentially the same as if in the above metallic model the solution-tension of the metal were to change. One difference between the two analogous systems thus com- pared must here be emphasized, since upon it an essential part of the following physico-chemical interpretation of certain features of mitosis is based. In the metal inequalities of potential are in- stantly equalized. Alteration of the potential-difference at the surface, as by changing the concentration of the adjoiming solu- tion, must produce simultaneously an alteration of the potential throughout the whole metal, since electricity in metallic conduc- tors moves with a velocity which, in relation to the distances involved in the case under consideration, is practically infinite. It is otherwise with a system consisting of an electrolyte solution bounded by membranes, like the cell. In this case an alteration of the surface potential-difference does not involve immediate alteration of the potentigl in the interior of the solution at a dis- tance from the membranes, since electricity is conveyed in such a system only by the slowly moving ions;*’ hence an appreciable time must elapse before the solution is again isoelectric; during this period there will be a potential-difference between the surface- layers and the interior; the potential-gradient may have a very considerable slope, depending on the original potential-difference across the surface and on the distance between the membranes. If, as seems probable, ionic movement be slower in protoplasm than in simple aqueous solution this potential-difference may persist for some time; i.e., there will be an electric field within the cell during this interval.“ To take a simple case: let fig. 2 represent 47 The rate of ionic travel in protoplasm is of course unknown. It seems likely that it is slower than in simple aqueous solution because of the viscosity of the medium and the presence of colloids which adsorb or bind the ions and so limit their mobility. Cf. footnote 49. 48 It should be remembered that there is direct experimental evidence that poten- tial-differences, arising essentially in the manner described, i.e., by changes in the electrical polarization of a membrane separating two solutions, may be of considerable value and may persist for some time. I refer to the so-called polari- zation currents obtained from a membrane, through which an electrical current 724 RALPH §S. LILLIE a cell of the dimensions of an Arbacia egg (0.072 mm.) ; the nucleus is omitted from consideration to bring the conditions to their greatest possible simplicity. If the original surface potential- difference in the resting cell A be placed at the probable value of 0.1 volt, and it be assumed to fall suddenly to 0.05 volt as a result of increased ionic permeability (fig. 2, B), there will temporarily exist a potential-difference of 0.05 volt between the surface- layer and the interior of the cell; the gradient between the center and the periphery, a distance of 0.036 mm., will be ca. 14 volts | Potential Uniform A Fig. 2. A illustrates the conditions during the resting state. The plasma membrane is the seat of a potential-difference of ca. 0.1 volt with outer surface positive. The cytoplasm, within the double layer, is isoelectric, 7.e., the poten- tial is uniform throughout. In B the membrane is supposed to have undergone decided and sudden increase in ionic permeability so that the surface polarization is diminished by 0.05 volt. Ions are then free to travel to equalize the potential- difference, and a gradient exists at first between superficial and central regions as represented. The fall of potential over this distance 0.036 mm. will at first be 0.05 volt, i.e., ca. 14 volts per centimeter. per centimeter. If we take the nuclear membrane also into con- sideration and assume an equal increase in permeability to occur simultaneously in both, the consequences will be essentially the same except that two oppositely oriented electrical fields will arise temporarily in the space between the membranes. It is to be noted that the regions most remote from the membranes will retain their original negativity longest. There will thus be a region of greatest negativity intermediate between the two mem- branes; from this region the potential will rise on either side toward has been passing, for a certain time after the polarizing current has been broken. The same phenomenon, as is well known, is shown by living tissues, as muscle or nerve; dead tissues show it to a relatively slight degree. THE PHYSIOLOGY OF CELL-DIVISION 125 the region adjoining the membranes where it will be highest. This condition can of course be only temporary since ions are free to diffuse through the cytoplasm. It is supposed, on the present theory, that it persists for a sufficient length of time to produce well marked effects.** We are now in a position to apply the above principles in inter- pretation of the radiations and spindle-figure of dividing-cells. I shall consider only the most general and constant phenomena of mitosis, neglecting individual variations, and shall offer a physico- chemical-analysis of the conditions at a time when the mitotic figure is fully formed (metaphase). The radiations at this time centre toward two definite areas one on either side of the nucleus. Of those which immediately adjoin the nuclear region, two sets are ordinarily distinguishable, (1) the spindle-fibers which show a definite curved course, with concavity toward the cell-axis, similar to the lines of force between opposite electric or magnetic poles, and (2) the mantle-fibers which have a more external posi- tion, show a straighter course, and tend to diverge. The remain- ing radiations spread out from each astral centre in all directions toward the periphery of that half of the cell. If we regard the fibers as indicating with a fair degree of accuracy the direction of the electrical lines of force, we see here distinct evidence of the existence in each half of the cell of two oppositely oriented electri- eal fields. For reasons that will be apparent shortly, the periph- eral regions of the cytoplasm are to be regarded as positive rela- “9 T may cite here two quite independent investigations indicating that the rate of ionic movement in protoplasm may be much less than in ordinary solution. Girard has found that the diffusion-rate of electrolytes through membranes which are the seat of an electrical polarization is much slower than through the same membranes in the unpolarized condition. If this be a general rule, it would apply to the case of ions moving along potential-gradients in the cell. Cf. Girard: Archives de physiologie normale et pathologique, 1910, vol. 12, p. 471. Again, Keith Lucas concludes, from the differences in the excitation rate of various excit- able tissues, that the ions concerned in the polarization resulting from electrical stimulation must move at vastly different rates in the different cases. The facts indicate that the ionic movement is 4000 times as rapid in a highly excitable tissue like the ‘substance @’ of the frog’s sartorius, as in the ventricular muscle of the same animal. If such a range of ionic velocities exists in different tissues, it is clear that in some the movement must be extremely slow. Possibly this condition is distinctive for dividing cells, which show an even slower rate of response than ventricular muscle. Cf. Journal of Physiology, 1910, vol. 40, p. 224. 726 RALPH S. LILLIE tively to the regions toward which the radiations converge; the nuclear region is positive also. The lines of force in closest prox- imity to the nucleus are thus curved sharply toward the latter and in their aggregate show a spindle-form. Others on the ‘nuclear side show less departure from the straight radiating course of the great majority; a certain number, intermediate in position are less strongly developed and show a less well defined course, peculiarities probably due to their being under the influence of both fields which partly counteract each other’s action. As to the origin of these two fields,—they arise, on the present hypothesis, in consequence of simultaneous and similar changes in the electrical polarization of the two boundary surfaces of the cytoplasm, due to alterations in the ionic permeability of the membranes. Let us assume the primary change to be a rapid and decided increase in the ionic permeability of the plasma- membrane.’® This increase of permeability is assumed to be not uniform and simultaneous over the entire surface of the cell but to be most marked and most rapid over two extensive areas (e.g., between A and B, C and D, fig. 3) at the opposite sides of the cell adjoining the polar axis. It seems necessary to assume this definite localization of the areas of markedly increased perme- ability because of the characteristic and symmetrical bipolarity of the mitotic figure. If membranes are concerned in the process, a corresponding symmetrical and bipolar alteration of these struc- tures must be assumed. There is at present no definite and independent evidence that this is the case; but the assumption seems justifiable since it involves merely the extension of the 50 The question as to whether under normal conditions the nuclear or the plasma membrane is the first to undergo increase of permeability 1s probably to be an- swered differently in the different cases. In the majority of dividing cells the radia- tions appear to originate near the surface of the nucleus, typically at points where the nuclear membrane begins to break down, i.e., where its permeability first unde- goes decided increase. This indicates that the primary change is frequently, perhaps usually, at the nuclear membrane. On the other hand, in artificial par- thenogenesis or normal fertilization the primary action is on the plasma-membrane. The essential principle is that alteration of the potential-difference at the one membrane involves a similar alteration at the other. The case is analogous to the stimulation of one muscle or nerve by the action-current of another—stim- ulation signifying increase in the permeability of the limiting membranes. THE PHYSIOLOGY OF CELL-DIVISION Bet: general biological conception of an essentially bipolar organiza- tion in dividing cells so as to include the physico-chemical prop- erties of the plasma-membrane. The increase in permeability must be sufficiently rapid and marked to produce a consider- able fall in the potential-difference across the surface. On account of the interdependence of the two potential-differences at nuclear and plasma-membranes, a similar fall of potential must occur at the nuclear membrane. The latter change produces an increase in permeability®! and is possibly responsible for the Fig.3 In this figure the probable position and orientation of the gradients at the metaphase stage are indicated. The general disposition of the radiations is like that seen in the living sea-urchin egg. The + and — signs indicate the re- gions of highest and lowest potential in the several fields. The dotted lines repre- sent electrical lines of force, corresponding to the paths of the diffusing ions. Several negative signs are crowded into the centers to indicate that the current density would be greatest there. The membrane over the equatorial regionis supposed as yet to have undergone little or no depolarization. dissolution of the membrane which shortly follows. The condi- tions are then essentially as represented in fig. 3. The peripheral layer of cytoplasm and the central nuclear area are, for a time, positive, relatively to the adjoining regions. In each hemisphere a potential-gradient will exist between the posi- tive areas adjoining the two depolarized membranes and the region midway between the two which retains its original nega- 5t The facts of electrical stimulation, particularly Pfliger’s law of cathodal stimulation on the make and anodal on break of the current, indicate that the permeability of the plasma membrane depends on its condition of electrical polar- ization, and that depolarization, whether partial or complete, involves an increase in permeability. The stimulating action of the electrical current depends on this: ef. my paper on the general conditions of stimulation in the American Journal of Physiology, 1908, vol. 22, pp. 77 to 80. Recently Girard has shown that elec- trically polarized membranes are in fact much less permeable to electrolytes than the same membranes when unpolarized. (See note 49.) 728 RALPH 8. LILLIE tivity the longest. The time during which this gradient will persist will be that required for the diffusion of ions to equalize the potentials. This diffusion is probably slow in the viscous protoplasm filled with colloidal particles, so that the gradients may persist for a considerable period. The space-relations of the regions of highest and lowest potentials would be approxi- mately as represented; the region most remote from the two posi- tive central and peripheral areas will naturally remain negative relatively to these areas for the longest period; this region will be intermediate in position in each half of the cell. Each hemisphere is thus the site of two oppositely oriented electrical fields. The potential-gradient of these fields, as the above considerations show, may at their first appearance be many volts per centimeter; their duration is problematical, but it seems probable that they . would have marked effect, even if acting for only a few seconds. The influence on the colloidal particles is apparently to produce electrical polarization analogous to that of most indifferent particles in strong electrical fields; the particles assume positions along the lines of force and apparently in many cases fuse to form fibrils. These fibrils once formed may _ persist, in accordance with their colloidal nature, for some time after the originating conditions have disappeared.® It should be noted that the defi- nite character and sharp curvature of the rays connecting the astral and nuclear areas receive consistent explanation on the present theory, since the nuclear area is positive and the astral ®2 It should perhaps be emphasized that colloidal fibrils once formed may out- last the disappearance of the conditions to which they owed their origin. The essential process in their formation is the fusion of colloidal particles to form larger aggregates, as in coagulation. Now all degrees in the reversibility of the coagulation-process in protein solutions are known; some coagula (e.g., those produced by alkali or alkali-earth neutral salts) are readily, others difficultly reversible (heavy metal coagula). The fibrils formed in mitosis are often remark- ably persistent (Zwischenkérper, etc.). It is clear then that once having been formed they may undergo curvature, displacement, or crossing, and the fact that they often do so under normal or experimental conditions (ef., e.g., Morgan: Proceedings of the Society for Experimental Biology, 1910, vol. 7, p. 132) in no way invalidates the theory that their formation is due to electrical conditions like those imagined above. THE PHYSIOLOGY OF CELL-DIVISION 729 centers negative.” The chromosomes in the nuclear area, being negatively charged bodies, are influenced by the electrostatic forces existing in the field and spread out laterally in a symmet- rical position between the adjoining negative areas. The lines of force, indicated by the radiations, converge in each hemisphere toward the intermediate regions of greatest negativity; the latter evidently correspond to the more or less definitely circumscribed astral centers.*! | During this period ions must be regarded as slowly diffusing along the gradients in such a manner as to equalize the potentials. Just as the region midway between the two most positive areas (superficies and nuclear region) retains its original negativity longest, so the region midway between the two most negative areas (the astral centers) retains its original positivity longest. That is, the gradient of decreasing negativity or increasing posi- tivity is from the astral centers toward the periphery and toward the original nuclear area. Wéathin the nuclear area a region sym- metrically situated with reference to the two astral centers will thus, so long as the potentials remain unequalized, be the region of highest potential or greatest positivity. The position of this region will coincide with a plane equidistant from and perpendicu- lar to the astral centers, and to this plane negative particles will tend to be drawn; hence the gathering of the chromosomes in this ‘equatorial plate’ position. ‘3¥or the sake of definiteness I express myself here as if the negative and posi- tive areas were sharply circumscribed; this of course cannot be the case where ions are free to diffuse; it is with more or less steep gradients that we are dealing. The astral centers, under the above conditions, represent merely the regions of greatest negativity; the plane midway between the two, the region of the greatest positivity; the potential changes continuously and probably quite uniformly— judging from the usual disposition of the fibrils—between these two regions. ‘The conditions are essentially like those in the solution between the plates of a battery with closed external circuit, though the gradient in the cell is much steeper. ‘4 The degree of development of the radiations will depend on the steepness of the gradient, on the time during which it persists, and on the density of the cur- rent-lines. This is probably why the spindle-fibers are the most constant, definite, and persistent of all; it also suggests the reason why radiations do not normally extend from the nuclear region to the equator of the cell. Possibly the neighbor- hood of the other oppositely oriented fields also interferes with the formation of such radiations. 730 RALPH S. LILLIE I do not propose to elaborate the above theory further at present. The foregoing analysis, whatever its defects in detail, indicates, I believe, that by taking account of the changes of poten- tial resulting from alterations in the permeability of electrically polarized membranes, certain characteristic phenomena of mitosis are susceptible of consistent physico-chemical explanation. The distinctive appearances presented by the process appear to depend essentially on the following conditions: that two concentric semi-permeable membranes, enclosing between them cytoplasm with its characteristic oxidative metabolism, undergo simultane- ously, in certain definite regions, alterations of permeability with accompanying changes in the potential-differences between the regions which they separate. Membranes of varying permea- bility thus play a fundamental réle in cell-division, as in the processes of stimulation, absorption, secretion, and conduction of stimuli. ie It is evident that such a system as the dividing cell presents many difficult physico-chemical problems. The situation is complicated by the chemical changes involved, some of which, including the energy-yielding oxidations, must be influenced by the changes in electrical potential at the surfaces. The mem- branes, in fact, are to be regarded as electrodes of changing potential; and by acting as such, as well as by altering the con- ditions of interchange, they must influence the course of the chemical reactions. The simple inorganic model imagined above is probably similar, in the purely electrochemical aspect, to the normal nucleated cell, while complications of a purely chemical nature are absent. It may thus serve to throw light on those physical features of the mitotic process which are dependent on changes of electrical potential at the surfaces. The nature of the metabolic processes in cell-division remains, however, as the essential problem, and it is probable that the facts required for its adequate solution are still largely unascertained. It is possi- ble that study of the relations between alterations in membrane- permeability and chemical changes in substances adjacent to the membranes will throw light on the nature and conditions of meta- bolic processes, not only in dividing cells but in cells in general. THE SPERMATOGENESIS OF AN HEMIPTERON, EUSCHISTUS THOS. H. MONTGOMERY, Jr. From the Zoological Laboratory, University of Pennsylvania 147 FIGURES—FIVE PLATES CONTENTS ARE NOUN ULM e heat pane Meineke RPE OAS eS. wack nah ee eR. te ee eee 732 ieherstucosomes: (ordinary Chromosomes) .. <2. 6.3... 5..02.